First Step Guide. IM 04L55B01-02EN. This is the electronic version of the paper manual. Data Acquisition System GM. User's Manual. IM 04L55B01-01EN.
Manual (IM 04L51B01-31EN), provided as an electronic manual. For details on other options, see the relevant user's ... Text format is TSV (tab separated).
User's Manual
Data Acquisition System GM User's Manual
IM 04L55B01-01EN
9th Edition
Introduction Revisions
Thank you for purchasing the SMARTDAC+ GM Data Acquisition System (hereafter referred to as the GM). This manual explains how to use the GM. In this manual, the GM10 standard type and large memory type are distinguished using the following notations. · Standard type: GM10-1 · Large memory type: GM10-2
For details on the settings and operation of the PID control module and program control (/ PG option), see the Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-31EN), provided as an electronic manual. For details on other options, see the relevant user's manuals. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation. The following manuals are provided for the GM.
Paper Manuals
Manual Title
Manual No.
Data Acquisition System GM
IM 04L55B01-02EN
First Step Guide
Precaution on the use of SMARTDAC+
IM 04L51B01-91EN
Regarding the Downloading and Installing for IM 04L61B01-11EN
the Software, Manuals and Labels
About the Usage of Open Source Software
Description Explains the basic operations of the GM.
Provides precautions common to the SMARTDAC+ series. Explains where software applications and electronic manuals common to the SMARTDAC+ series can be downloaded from and how to install the software applications.
Downloadable Electronic Manuals
You can download the latest manuals from the following website. www.smartdacplus.com/manual/en/
Manual Title
Data Acquisition System GM First Step Guide
Data Acquisition System GM User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 Communication Command User's Manual
SMARTDAC+ STANDARD Universal Viewer User's Manual
SMARTDAC+ STANDARD Hardware Configurator User's Manual
SMARTDAC+ STANDARD IP Address Configurator User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 Multi-batch Function (/BT) User's Manual
Data Acquisition System GM Advanced Security Function (/AS) User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 Log Scale (/LG) User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 EtherNet/IP(/E1) Communication Interface User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 WT Communication (/E2) User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 OPC-UA Server (/E3) User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 SLMP Communication (/E4) User's Manual
Models GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM10 Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual
Manual No. IM 04L55B01-02EN IM 04L55B01-01EN IM 04L51B01-17EN IM 04L61B01-01EN
IM 04L61B01-02EN
IM 04L61B01-03EN
IM 04L51B01-03EN IM 04L55B01-05EN
IM 04L51B01-06EN
IM 04L51B01-18EN
IM 04L51B01-19EN
IM 04L51B01-20EN IM 04L51B01-21EN IM 04L51B01-31EN
Description This is the electronic version of the paper manual. Describes how to use the GM. The communication control commands and some of the options are excluded. Describes how to use command control communication functions. Describes how to use Universal Viewer, which is a software that displays GM measurement data files. Describes how to use the PC software for creating setting parameters for various GM functions. Describes how to use the software for setting the GM IP address.
Describes how to use the multi batch function (/BT option). Describes how to use the advanced security function (/AS option).
Describes how to use the log scale (/LG option).
Describes how to use the communication functions through the EtherNet/IP (/E1 option).
Describes how to use WT communication (/E2 option).
Describes how to use the OPC-UA server function (/E3 option). Describes how to use SLMP communication function (/E4 option). Describes how to use the PID control function and program control (/PG option) function.
December 2014 August 2015 December 2015 March 2016
June 2017
1st Edition 2nd Edition 3rd Edition 4th Edition
5th Edition
June 2018
6th Edition
July 2018
7th Edition
September 2018 8th Edition
March 2019
9th Edition
9th Edition: March 2019 (YK) All Right Reserved, Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM 04L55B01-01EN
i
Notes QR code
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument's performance and functions.
Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA's permission is strictly prohibited.
The product may have a QR Code pasted for efficient plant maintenance work and asset information management. It enables confirming the specifications of purchased products and user's manuals.For more details, please refer to the following URL.
https://www.yokogawa.com/qr-code QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
Trademarks
SMARTDAC+ is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated. Kerberos is a trademark of Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective holders. The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the
registered trademark or trademark symbols (® and TM).
About the Usage of Open Source Software
This product uses open source software. For details on using open source software, see Regarding the Downloading and Installing for the Software, Manuals and Labels (IM 04L61B01-11EN).
ii
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Compliance with Radio Laws of Various Countries (Bluetooth (/ C8 option) only)
· Radio Law of Japan
This product contains radio equipment that has obtained a certification of construction type as a radio station of a power saving data communication system based on the Radio Law. Radio equipment name: 001NYCA1293
· FCC Approval FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
· IC Approval This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES003.
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). [*But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body.]
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l'exposition maximale autorisée. [*Cependant, il est souhaitable qu'il devrait être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps.]
IM 04L55B01-01EN
iii
· China Certification (Radio Waves Act) 1. : 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz (EIRP): 100 mW 20 dBm : 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) : 20 ppm (2.4-2.4835GHz) -80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ()(±2.5): -36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) -33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) -40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) -40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) -30 dBm / 1 MHz (1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.() 3. 4. 5. 6.(): CMIIT ID:2014DJ4615
· Korea Certification (Radio Waves Act) · · A ( )
(A ) , .
iv
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Version and Functions Described in This Manual
The contents of this manual correspond to release number 4 (see the STYLE S number on the nameplate) and style number 1 (see the STYLE H number on the nameplate).
GM10 Versions and Functions
For the procedure to check the version, see "System Information Monitor" on page 3-39.
Edition Product
Addition and Change
1
Version 2.02
--
2
Version 2.03
Addition of the advanced security function (/AS option).
· See the Data Acquisition System GM Advanced Security (/AS) User's Manual.
A new function for sending e-mail for each alarm level (page 2-159), subdivision of initialized items (page
2-203), subdivision of settings that are loaded (page 2-192), show/hide setting of the Web content selection
tree (page 2-170), historical trend display (page 3-19), login support for DARWIN compatible communication
(communication command user's manual)
3
Version 3.01
Addition of pulse input module support (page 2-52), increase in the number of math channels (GM10-
2: 200 channels) (page 2-70), increase in the number of timers and match time timers (12) (page
2-132), addition of Modbus registers (multi batch support) (page 4-10), addition of aerospace heat
treatment (/AH option) (page 2-225)
Addition of the multi-batch function (/BT option).
· See the Multi-Batch Function (/BT) User's Manual.
Addition of the OPC-UA server function (/E3 option)
· See the OPC-UA Server (/E3) User's Manual.
Addition of SLMP communication (/E4 option)
· See the SLMP Communication (/E4) User's Manual.
4
Version 3.02
Quick setting function was added (page 1-70)
Description of the port limitation setting of DARWIN compatible communication has been added (page
2-218).
Read feature of Modbus register (batch related) has been added (see GM operation setting: page
4-57).
5
Version 4.01
Measurement mode has been added (page 2-207). Support for high-speed AI, 4-wire RTD/resistance
modules has been added (page 2-25).
Logic math function (/MT option) has been added (page 2-91).
Variable constants have been added (page 2-90). Support for analog output modules has been
added (page 2-57).
Individual settings have been added to initialization (page 2-206). DR commands have been added to
DARWIN compatible communication (page 2-219).
Support for PID control modules and program control (/PG option):
· See the Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM
04L51B01-31EN).
6
Version 4.02
Calibration correction of the communication channel has been added (page 2-152), (page 2-225).
7
Version 4.03
Support for high withstand voltage AI module has been added.
8
Version 4.04
Automatic restart when a device error has been added (page 5-48).
9
Version 4.06
Support for GM10 firmware version R4.06 (Removed the use of Java in the Web application. Added
Google Chrome to supported browsers).
IM 04L55B01-01EN
v
How to Use This Manual
Structure of the Manual
Read the First Step Guide (IM04L55B01-02EN) first to familiarize yourself with the basic operation of the GM, and then read this manual. For a description of the communication command functions and the accompanying software programs, read the
respective manuals.
This user's manual consists of the following sections.
Chapter 1 2 3 4 5 --
--
Title and Description GM Feature Overview Introduces the GM features. Configuring the GM Explains how to configure the GM. Operating the GM and Using Network Functions Explains how to operate the GM. Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices) Explains how to use the Modbus functions. Maintenance and Troubleshooting Explains how to inspect and calibrate the GM and describes error messages and troubleshooting. Appendix Explains measurement data file size, the types of data that the GM can generate and how to use them, the text file data format, and so on. General Specifications Provides the specifications of the GM.
Note
· This user's manual covers information regarding GMs whose display language is English (language suffix code "E").
· For the procedure to set the display language, see page 2-180 in section 2.26.1, "Setting the Display Language, Temperature Unit, Decimal Point Type, and Date Format".
vi
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Conventions Used in This Manual
Unit K k
Denotes 1024. Example: 768K (file size) Denotes 1000.
Notes
WARNING CAUTION
Note
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user's manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user's manual to identify those instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction with the word "WARNING" or "CAUTION." Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences. Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or cause damage to the instrument or user's data, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences. Calls attention to information that is important for the proper operation of the instrument.
Reference Item
Reference to related operation or explanation is indicated after this mark. Example: section 4.1
Conventions Used in the Procedural Explanations
Bold characters Denotes key or character strings that appear on the screen.
Example: Volt
Aa# 1
Indicates the character types that can be used.
1 number,
a lowercase alphabet,
# symbol
Procedure Explanation
Carry out the procedure according to the step numbers. All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind; depending on the operation, not all steps need to be taken. Explanation gives information such as limitations related the procedure.
Path Description
Indicates the setup screen and explains the settings.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
vii
Contents
Introduction............................................................................................................................................ i Version and Functions Described in This Manual................................................................................. v How to Use This Manual.......................................................................................................................vi
Chapter 1
viii
GM Feature Overview
1.1 What Is SMARTDAC+ GM?.................................................................................................1-1 1.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................1-1 1.1.2 Features..................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Functions That Ensure Reliable Measurements.................................................................. 1-2 1.2.1 Rich I/O Interface....................................................................................................................1-2 1.2.2 Actual Values Underlying Accurate Measurements................................................................1-3 1.2.3 Fail-safe Saving of Recording Data........................................................................................1-4 1.2.4 Easy Access from Web Browser.............................................................................................1-4 1.2.5 Offline Configuration and Monitoring.......................................................................................1-5 1.2.6 System Configuration Using Data Logging Software GA10 (Sold separately)........................1-6
1.3 A Full System Configuration Example..................................................................................1-7
1.4 GM Application Examples....................................................................................................1-8
1.5 Scalable Data Acquisition System......................................................................................1-12
1.5.1 Component Devices..............................................................................................................1-12 1.5.2 Flexible Support for Channel Additions and Reductions.......................................................1-13 1.5.3 Unit Types and Configurations..............................................................................................1-14 1.5.4 Flexible Installation Methods.................................................................................................1-15
1.6 Functions............................................................................................................................1-16
1.6.1 Basic Functions.....................................................................................................................1-16 1.6.2 Recording..............................................................................................................................1-22 1.6.3 Output...................................................................................................................................1-26 1.6.4 Storage..................................................................................................................................1-27 1.6.5 Display (Web browser)..........................................................................................................1-28 1.6.6 Various Functions..................................................................................................................1-30 1.6.7 Event Action Function...........................................................................................................1-33 1.6.8 Control Event Action Function...............................................................................................1-35 1.6.9 Batch Function......................................................................................................................1-37 1.6.10 Math Function (/MT option)...................................................................................................1-38 1.6.11 Logic Math Function..............................................................................................................1-40 1.6.12 Report Function (/MT option)................................................................................................1-40 1.6.13 Report Template Function.....................................................................................................1-41 1.6.14 Security Function..................................................................................................................1-42 1.6.15 Fail, Status Output................................................................................................................1-44 1.6.16 Timer and Internal Switch Functions.....................................................................................1-45 1.6.17 Log Scale Function (/LG option)...........................................................................................1-46 1.6.18 Communication and Network Functions...............................................................................1-47 1.6.19 SNTP Function......................................................................................................................1-48 1.6.20 Mail Transfer Function (SMTP).............................................................................................1-49 1.6.21 HTTP Function......................................................................................................................1-50 1.6.22 Communication Channel Function (/MC option)...................................................................1-50 1.6.23 Modbus Function...................................................................................................................1-51 1.6.24 SSL Communication Function...............................................................................................1-53 1.6.25 DARWIN Compatible Communication..................................................................................1-55 1.6.26 EtherNet/IP Function (/E1 option).........................................................................................1-57 1.6.27 WT Communication Function (/E2 option)............................................................................1-58 1.6.28 Bluetooth Function (/C8 option)............................................................................................1-59 1.6.29 Measurement/Setting Server Function..................................................................................1-59 1.6.30 Advanced security function (/AS option)...............................................................................1-59 1.6.31 Multi-batch Function (/BT option)..........................................................................................1-60 1.6.32 Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option)...............................................................................1-60 1.6.33 OPC-UA Server Function (/E3 option)..................................................................................1-61 1.6.34 SLMP Communication (/E4 option).......................................................................................1-61 1.6.35 PID Control Function (PID), Program Operation Function (/PG Option)...............................1-62
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions.......................................................................... 1-63
1.7.1 1.7.2
7 segment LED.....................................................................................................................1-63 Status Display.......................................................................................................................1-64
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Contents
1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.7.7 1.7.8
START, STOP, USER1, and USER2 Keys............................................................................1-66 Operation Mode....................................................................................................................1-68 USB Port...............................................................................................................................1-68 RS-422/485 Serial Port (/C3 option).....................................................................................1-68 Ethernet Port.........................................................................................................................1-68 SD Card Slot.........................................................................................................................1-69
1.8 Quick Setting Function (Release number 3 (Version 3.02) and later)................................ 1-70
Chapter 2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Configuring the GM
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Connecting to a Network.........................................................................................................2-1 2.1.2 Setting the IP Address (IP Address Configurator)...................................................................2-2 2.1.3 Web Application Overview......................................................................................................2-3 2.1.4 Starting and Closing the Web Application...............................................................................2-4 2.1.5 Setup Guide..........................................................................................................................2-10 2.1.6 Change settings.................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2 Setting the Date and Time..................................................................................................2-24
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels.... 2-25
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
Setting the Range.................................................................................................................2-25 Setting Alarms.......................................................................................................................2-33 Setting the Display................................................................................................................2-37 Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, Correction factor* (release number 3 and later))...................................................................2-44
2.4 Configuring DI Channels (Digital input channels).............................................................. 2-47 2.4.1 Setting the Range.................................................................................................................2-47 2.4.2 Setting Alarms.......................................................................................................................2-48 2.4.3 Setting the Display................................................................................................................2-50
2.5 Configuring Pulse Input Channels (Release number 3 and later)......................................2-52 2.5.1 Setting the Range.................................................................................................................2-52 2.5.2 Setting Alarms.......................................................................................................................2-54 2.5.3 Setting the Display................................................................................................................2-55
2.6 Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)............................................................ 2-57
2.6.1 2.6.2
Setting the Range.................................................................................................................2-57 Setting the display.................................................................................................................2-61
2.7 Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels).......................................................... 2-63
2.7.1 2.7.2
Setting the Range.................................................................................................................2-63 Setting the Display................................................................................................................2-67
2.8 Configuring the Control Function and Program Function (/PG option) (Release number 4 and later)............................................................................................2-69
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)........................................................................... 2-70
2.9.1
Setting Basic Computation Operations (Error indications, operation at start, overflow handling, PSUM overflow* handling)............2-70
2.9.2 Setting Expressions..............................................................................................................2-71
2.9.3 Writing Expressions..............................................................................................................2-77
2.9.4 Setting Alarms.......................................................................................................................2-86
2.9.5 Setting the Display................................................................................................................2-87
2.9.6 Setting Constants to Use in Computation.............................................................................2-90
2.9.7 Setting Variable Constants to Use in Computation...............................................................2-90
2.10
Configuring Logic Math (/MT option)..................................................................................2-91 2.10.1 Logic Math Number, Output Destination, Calculation expressions.......................................2-91
2.11 2.12
Setting Display Conditions.................................................................................................2-94
2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5
Setting the Trend Interval......................................................................................................2-94 Setting Display Groups.........................................................................................................2-95 Setting Messages..................................................................................................................2-96 Setting Trend Display Conditions..........................................................................................2-96 Turning the Operation from the Monitor Displays On and Off...............................................2-97
Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)................................2-98
2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.12.5
Setting the Scan Interval.......................................................................................................2-98 Setting the Over-range Detection Method.............................................................................2-99 Setting the Operation Mode of a Module..............................................................................2-99 Setting the A/D Integral Time (Other than high-speed AI or PID control modules).............2-101 Setting the Noise Rejection (High-speed AI, PID control module) (Release number 4 and later).............................................................................................2-102
ix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Contents x
2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18
2.19 2.20 2.21
2.22
2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26
2.12.6 Setting the Burnout Criteria.................................................................................................2-103 2.12.7 Setting the Chattering Filter for Pulse Input........................................................................2-103
Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)...... 2-104 2.13.1 Setting the Type of Data to Record (Event or display data) and Recording Conditions......2-104 2.13.2 Configuring Recording Channels........................................................................................ 2-111
Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later).............................. 2-112 2.14.1 Setting the Scan Interval..................................................................................................... 2-112 2.14.2 Setting the Scan Interval of Each Module........................................................................... 2-113 2.14.3 Setting the Recording Conditions........................................................................................ 2-113 2.14.4 Configuring Recording Channels........................................................................................ 2-115
Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files.................................................................... 2-116 2.15.1 Setting the Save Directory, File Header, and File Name..................................................... 2-116 2.15.2 Setting the Save Method to Media (Auto save or manual save) and Media FIFO.............. 2-118 2.15.3 Setting the File Format of Display Data and Event Data.....................................................2-121
Configuring the Batch Function........................................................................................2-122 2.16.1 Configuring the Batch Function (Lot-No. digit and Auto increment)....................................2-122 2.16.2 Setting Batch Text (When the batch function is set to On)..................................................2-122
Configuring the Report Function (/MT option).................................................................. 2-124 2.17.1 Setting the Report Type, Creation Time, Data Type, Etc....................................................2-124 2.17.2 Setting the Channels to Output Reports.............................................................................2-127
Using the Report Template Function (/MT option)........................................................... 2-129 2.18.1 Excel Report Files...............................................................................................................2-129 2.18.2 PDF Report Files.................................................................................................................2-130 2.18.3 Printing on a Printer over the LAN......................................................................................2-130 2.18.4 Creating Template-Based Report Files...............................................................................2-131 2.18.5 Loading and Saving Report Template Files........................................................................2-131
Setting the Timers............................................................................................................2-132 2.19.1 Setting the Timers...............................................................................................................2-132 2.19.2 Setting the Match Time Timer.............................................................................................2-133
Configuring the Event Action Function............................................................................. 2-135 2.20.1 Setting Event Action Numbers and Actions.........................................................................2-135 2.20.2 Event Action Examples.......................................................................................................2-143
Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)........................................................ 2-146 2.21.1 Enabling Communication Channels and Setting the Span, Decimal Point, and Unit..........2-146 2.21.2 Setting Alarms.....................................................................................................................2-148 2.21.3 Setting the Display..............................................................................................................2-149 2.21.4 Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias,
Correction factor* (release number 4 (version 4.02) and later))..........................................2-152
Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function......................................................... 2-154 2.22.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions...........................................................................2-154 2.22.2 Configuring the FTP Client Function...................................................................................2-156 2.22.3 Configuring the SMTP Client Function................................................................................2-158 2.22.4 Setting E-mail Transmission Conditions (When the SMTP client function is on)................2-159 2.22.5 Setting the SNTP Client Function.......................................................................................2-162 2.22.6 Configuring the Modbus Client Function (/MC option)........................................................2-163 2.22.7 Configuring the Server Function.........................................................................................2-166 2.22.8 Limiting the Connection to the Modbus Server (GM)..........................................................2-167 2.22.9 Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE,
DARWIN compatible communication).................................................................................2-168 2.22.10 Setting the Web Content Selection Tree.............................................................................2-170
Configuring the Serial Communication Function (/C3 option)..........................................2-172 2.23.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions...........................................................................2-172 2.23.2 Enabling or Disabling the Modbus Master Function (/MC option) and
Setting Communication Conditions.....................................................................................2-174 2.23.3 Setting Modbus Master Transmission Commands..............................................................2-175
Configuring the USB Communication Function................................................................ 2-176 2.24.1 Turning the USB Communication Function On and Off......................................................2-176 2.24.2 Connecting USB Communication........................................................................................2-176
Using the Bluetooth Communication Function (/C8 option).............................................2-177 2.25.1 Turning the Bluetooth Communication Function On and Off...............................................2-177 2.25.2 Bluetooth Connection..........................................................................................................2-178
Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)........................... 2-180 2.26.1 Setting the Display Language, Temperature Unit, Decimal Point Type, and Date Format..2-180 2.26.2 Setting the Interval for Calculating the Rate-of-Change for Rate-of-Change Alarms..........2-181
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.27 2.28
2.29 2.30
2.31 2.32
Contents
2.26.3 2.26.4 2.26.5 2.26.6 2.26.7 2.26.8
Setting the Alarm Display Hold/Nonhold and Individual Alarm ACK Operation...................2-182 Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time....................2-182 Setting Internal Switches.....................................................................................................2-185 Setting the Printer Output Conditions..................................................................................2-186 Setting Instrument Tags......................................................................................................2-187 Setting Comments to Setting Parameter Files....................................................................2-187
Configuring the Security Functions.................................................................................. 2-188
2.27.1 Configuring the Security Functions.....................................................................................2-188 2.27.2 Setting Registered User Conditions (When touch operation or
communication is set to login).............................................................................................2-189 2.27.3 Setting User Restrictions (when communication is set to login).........................................2-190 2.27.4 Enabling Key Lock, Releasing the Key Lock.......................................................................2-191
Saving and Loading Settings...........................................................................................2-192
2.28.1 Saving, Loading, and Deleting GM Setting Parameters......................................................2-192 2.28.2 Downloading Files...............................................................................................................2-194 2.28.3 Saving and Loading Report Templates (/MT option)...........................................................2-195 2.28.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters, Report Templates, Trusted Certificates,
Program Patterns (/PG option) (Release number 4 and later)............................................2-196 2.28.5 Saving, Loading, and Deleting Trusted Certificates............................................................2-197 2.28.6 Saving, Loading, and Deleting Program Patterns (/PG option)
(Release number 4 and later).............................................................................................2-199 2.28.7 Saving All the Data* in the Internal Memory........................................................................2-202
Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode.......................................................................................2-203
2.29.1 Initializing the Settings and the Internal Memory................................................................2-203 2.29.2 Initializing Display Groups or Recording Channels Separately...........................................2-206 2.29.3 Setting the Measurement Mode..........................................................................................2-207 2.29.4 Reconfiguring the GM.........................................................................................................2-208 2.29.5 Notes on System Configuration..........................................................................................2-209
Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)...................................................................... 2-211
2.30.1 Enabling the Encryption Function....................................................................................... 2-211 2.30.2 Creating a Key....................................................................................................................2-212 2.30.3 Configuring Certificate Management (Creating self-signed certificates, creating certificate
signature requests (CSRs), installing certificates, and installing intermediate certificates) and Deleting Certificates............................................................................................................2-213 2.30.4 Configuring the Encryption of the Server Function and Client Function, and Applying PDF Electronic Signatures..........................................................................................................2-216 2.30.5 Loading, Deleting, and Saving a Trusted Certificate...........................................................2-216 2.30.6 Verification Confirmation of Unverified Certificates.............................................................2-216
Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function..............................................2-217
2.31.1 2.31.2 2.31.3 2.31.4 2.31.5
Overview............................................................................................................................. 2-217 Supported Commands........................................................................................................2-219 Configuring the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function........................................2-224 Configuring the GM IP Address, Subnet Mask, and the Like (for Ethernet)........................2-224 Setting the GM's Basic Serial Communication Conditions (for RS-422/485)......................2-224
Using the Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option) (Release number 3 and later).......... 2-225
2.32.1 Setting the Calibration Reminder........................................................................................2-225 2.32.2 Notification Screen Display.................................................................................................2-226 2.32.3 Displaying Reminders.........................................................................................................2-227
Chapter 3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM...............................................................................................................3-1 3.1.1 Starting and Stopping Recording............................................................................................3-2 3.1.2 Monitoring the GM Data and Controlling the GM from the Monitor Screen............................3-9 3.1.3 Changing the Display Settings on the Browser.....................................................................3-42 3.1.4 Changing the Password........................................................................................................3-43
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages...........................................................................................3-44 3.2.1 Configuring the SMTP Client Function..................................................................................3-44 3.2.2 Setting the Mail Content........................................................................................................3-44 3.2.3 Performing an Mail Transmission Test..................................................................................3-45 3.2.4 Starting and Stopping E-mail Transmission..........................................................................3-45 3.2.5 E-mail Format........................................................................................................................3-46
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
xi
Contents
3.3 Accessing the Measurement Data File on the GM from a PC (FTP server function)......... 3-53
3.3.1 3.3.2
Configuring FTP Server Settings..........................................................................................3-53 Accessing the GM from a PC................................................................................................3-53
3.4 Transferring Data Files from the GM (FTP client function).................................................3-55
3.4.1 Configuring the FTP Client Function.....................................................................................3-55 3.4.2 Testing the FTP Transfer.......................................................................................................3-57
3.5 Synchronizing the Time (SNTP client function).................................................................. 3-58
3.5.1 Configuring the SNTP Client Function..................................................................................3-58 3.5.2 Adjusting the Clock Manually................................................................................................3-58
3.6 Transmitting Time Information from the GM to SNTP Client Devices (SNTP server function).......................................................................................................3-59 3.6.1 Configuring the SNTP Server Function.................................................................................3-59
Chapter 4
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
4.1 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable Other Devices to Read Data from and Write Data to the GM (Modbus server function).....................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Setting Basic Network Communication Conditions.................................................................4-1 4.1.2 Configuring the Modbus Server Function................................................................................4-1 4.1.3 Reading from and Writing to the GM from Other Devices.......................................................4-2
4.2 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus client function).......................................................................................................4-3
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5
Setting Basic Network Communication Conditions.................................................................4-3 Configuring the Modbus Client Function.................................................................................4-3 Configuring the Destination Server.........................................................................................4-4 Setting Commands..................................................................................................................4-4 Checking the Modbus Operation Status.................................................................................4-7
4.3 Using Modbus to Enable Other Devices to Read Data from and Write Data to the GM (Modbus slave function).......................................................................................................4-8
4.3.1 Setting Serial Communication Conditions...............................................................................4-8 4.3.2 Reading from and Writing to the GM from Other Devices.......................................................4-8
4.4 Using Modbus to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus master function)....................................................................................................4-9
4.4.1 Setting Serial Communication Conditions...............................................................................4-9 4.4.2 Configuring the Modbus Master Function...............................................................................4-9 4.4.3 Setting Commands..................................................................................................................4-9
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments..................................................................... 4-10
4.5.1 Modbus Client/Master Function............................................................................................4-10 4.5.2 Modbus Server/Slave Function.............................................................................................4-12 4.5.3 Register Assignments (Shared with the Modbus server/slave function)...............................4-12 4.5.4 Input Registers (Shared with the Modbus server/slave function)..........................................4-15 4.5.5 Hold Registers (Shared with the Modbus server/slave function)..........................................4-38 4.5.6 Coil........................................................................................................................................4-64 4.5.7 Input Relay............................................................................................................................4-65 4.5.8 Property area........................................................................................................................4-67
Chapter 5
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5.1 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Periodic Inspection..................................................................................................................5-1 5.1.2 Calibrating Modules................................................................................................................5-1 5.1.3 Performing A/D Calibration and Adjusting the Input Accuracy of an AI Module......................5-5 5.1.4 Calibrating the D/A of AO Modules and Adjusting the Output Accuracy................................ 5-11 5.1.5 Calibrating the I/O of PID Modules and Adjusting the I/O Accuracy......................................5-13 5.1.6 Using a Password.................................................................................................................5-15 5.1.7 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts..........................................................5-15 5.1.8 Updating the Firmware..........................................................................................................5-17
5.2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................5-21
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3
Messages.............................................................................................................................. 5-21 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................... 5-43 Auto restart when a device error occurs (release number 4 (version 4.04) and later)).........5-48
xii
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Contents
Appendix
1
Appendix 1 File Size of Event Data and Display Data........................................................................App-1
Appendix 2 Types of Data Files That the GM Can Create and How They Can Be Used...................App-4
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format.......................................................................................................App-5 Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates............................................................................................App-16
2
Appendix 5 Power Recovery Operation............................................................................................App-23
Appendix 6 Computation Examples Using Pulse Input.....................................................................App-25
Appendix7 Terminology....................................................................................................................App-27
3
Index
General Specifications
4
Data Acquisition System GM
GX90XA/GX90XD/GX90YD/GX90WD/GX90XP/GX90YA I/O Modules
GX90UT PID Control Module
5
GX60 I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O), GX90EX Expansion Module
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
xiii
Blank
Chapter1 GM Feature Overview
1.1 What Is SMARTDAC+ GM?
1
GM Feature Overview
1.1.1
Overview
The SMARTDAC+ GM Data Acquisition System is a data logger that excels in versatility
2
and expandability. The main unit contains memory for data acquisition and also supports SD
cards for external storage.
The system consists of a Data Acquisition Module (GM10), Power Supply Module
(GM90PS), and Module Base (GM90MB), which houses various modules.
3
GM can operate with SMARTDAC+ series modules.
4
1.1.2
Features
Flexibly supports channel additions and reductions
· Measurement on up to 420 channels · Easy installation and reduction of modules with slide locks
Easy Access from Web Browser
· Hardware configuration · Real time monitoring
Mobile connection ready
· Bluetooth communication (/C8 option) · Monitoring and configuration from a tablet
High performance, high reliability
· Highly accurate measurement · Reliable data redundancy with internal memory and external storage medium · Auto backfill feature (Data Logging Software GA10)
Environmental and noise tolerance
· Wide operating temperature range: -20 to 60°C · A complete lineup of noise tolerant electromagnetic relay scanner type analog input
modules
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-1
1.2 Functions That Ensure Reliable Measurements
1.2.1
The GM has four basic functions: measurement, recording, display, and storage. In addition, data can be used in various ways such as system configuration through the standard software (Hardware Configurator) and data file display (Universal Viewer). This section provides an overview of each function.
Rich I/O Interface
Input The GM can measure the following types of inputs. The supported input types vary depending on the module.
Input Type DC voltage (DCV)
Thermocouple (TC)
Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
On/Off (voltage-free contact, level), pulse
I
DC current (mA) (direct input)
I
DC current (through an external shunt resistor connection)
Pulse
Measurement The GM samples the input signals at a specified scan interval and performs A/D conversion. These values become the measured values of each channel.
Scan interval
Input
1.23
Sampling A/D conversion Measured value
Input module
Output (Relay output)
The GM can generate alarms assigned to measurement channels, turn the output on and off according to manual operation, and output relay signals through the event action function (digital output module, digital input/output module, PID control module).
For details on the settings, see page 2-25 in section 2.3, "Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels" and page 2-63 in section 2.7, "Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)".
1-2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.2.2
1.2 Functions That Ensure Reliable Measurements
Actual Values Underlying Accurate Measurements
The measuring accuracies noted in the general specifications have a margin of error that
takes into account the product's components and the equipment used for adjustment and
testing.
However, the actual values calculated from the accuracy testing data upon shipment of the
instrument from the factory are as follows.
Input Type
Measuring Accuracy*1 (typical value*2)
DCV
20 mV
±(0.01% of reading +5 V)
60 mV
±(0.01% of reading +5 V)
TC *3
6 V(1-5 V) R, S
±(0.01% of reading +2mV) ±1.1°C
B
±1.5°C
K (-200.0 to 1370.0°C)
±(0.01% of reading +0.2°C) for 0.0 to 1370.0°C;
±(0.15% of reading +0.2°C) for -200.0 to 0.0°C
K (-200.0 to 500.0°C)
±0.2°C for 0.0 to 500.0°C;
± (0.15% of reading +0.2°C) for -200.0 to 0.0°C
J
±0.2°C for 0.0 to 1100.0 °C;
±(0.10% of reading +0.2 °C) for -200.0 to 0.0°C
T
± 0.2°C for 0.0 to 400.0°C;
± (0.10% of rdg +0.2 °C) for -200.0 to 0.0 °C
N
±(0.01% of reading +0.2°C) for 0.0 to 1300.0°C;
±(0.22% of reading +0.2°C) for -200.0 to 0.0°C
RTD
Pt100 (-200.0 to 850.0°C) ±(0.02% of reading +0.2°C)
Pt100 (high resolution)
±(0.02% of reading +0.16°C)
(-150.00 to 150.00°C)
* Applies to GX90XA-10-U2, A/D integration time 16.67 ms or more, General operating conditions: 23±2 ºC, 55±10% RH, supply voltage 90132, 180264 V AC, power frequency within 50/60 Hz ±1%, warm-up of 30 minutes or more, no vibrations or other hindrances to performance.
*2 For the measuring accuracy (guaranteed), see the module's general specifications (GS 04L53B01-01EN).
*3 These values do not include the reference junction compensation accuracy.
·For details on modules with higher guaranteed accuracy specifications, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-3
1.2 Functions That Ensure Reliable Measurements
1.2.3
Fail-safe Saving of Recording Data
Data Storage The GM supports long-term recording and multi-channel recording. Measurement data is constantly saved in internal memory and can be transferred periodically to an external storage medium (SD card). Moreover, the FTP client function can be used to provide data redundancy using a file server. Measurement data is saved without fail even in a sudden power interruption. Data can be saved automatically or manually to an external storage medium.
Measured data
1.2.4
1-4
Data file
A
Data file
B
Data file
C
Auto save Copy
Data file
A
Data file
B
Data file
C
Internal memory
External media (SD)
Data Types Based on the sampled measurement values, the GM can recorded two types of measurement data: event data and display data (the data type depends on the GM settings). Measurement data is saved to internal memory as data files.
Internal memory
Measured value per scan interval
Event data Display data
Measured data file Measured data file
Data type
Measured data at each recording interval
When the measurement mode is Dual interval, measured data of the channels assigned
to measurement groups are recorded in the internal memory by each measurement
group.
Internal memory
Measurement group 1
Measured value per scan interval
Event data
Measured data file
Measurement group 2 Measured value per scan interval
Event data
Measured data file
Data type
Measured data at each recording interval
For details on recording conditions, see page 2-104 in section 2.13, "Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)".
Easy Access from Web Browser
Data being measured can be monitored in real time on a Web browser. You do not need to use a dedicated software application. Using a network environment, you can monitor data over a wide area.
Control operation, configuration
View on a Web browser PC
GM Ethernet
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Web screen example
1.2 Functions That Ensure Reliable Measurements
1
GM Feature Overview
2
3
4
1.2.5
Configuration and Operation You can configure the GM from a Web browser. You can also start and stop recording, write messages, and so on.
Offline Configuration and Monitoring
Hardware Configurator This software is used to transfer setup data to the GM and also save setting parameters. USB and Bluetooth connection is possible in addition to Ethernet connection.
Hardware Configurator
5
App Index
Setting parameters
Ethernet
Load settings
SD card
Universal Viewer This software is used to display measurement data files on a PC and print them. You can also calculate statistics on a specified set of data and convert data to ASCII and Excel formats.
IP Address Configurator This software is used to set the GM10's IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and the like.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-5
1.2 Functions That Ensure Reliable Measurements
1.2.6
System Configuration Using Data Logging Software GA10 (Sold separately)
A dedicated software application for configuring a full-fledged system is available. This application is capable of acquiring data from multiple devices including SMARTDAC+ GM. Max. 100 devices 100 ms high-speed acquisition Max. 2000 channels (tags)
Data Logging Software GA10
Ethernet
1-6
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.3 A Full System Configuration Example
You can configure a GM system as shown below.
Web site
Server
PC
· Download PC software
· Download user' s manuals
Ethernet
Power meter Temperature
(WT)
controller
Recorder
Network printer
PC Serial communication*
Signal input
Data Acquisition System GM
RS-422/485
RTD TC/DCV DI Pulse mA
A
Single unit system
SD card
Remote input
Signal output Alarm output Manual DO
Analog output FAIL/status output
Control input RTD TC/DCV DI
Multi unit system
USB port
Main unit
Bluetooth*
·
·
· ·
· ·
Up to six units
Tablet
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Control output mA Pulse DC loop power supply
A
Digital input/output DO
Alarm output DI
Sub unit * Option
Do not link modules in a way that violates the specifications. Doing so can cause the GM system to crash.
See page 2-209 in section 2.29.5, "Notes on System Configuration".
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-7
1.4 GM Application Examples
This section introduces main application examples in different industries.
Electrical and Electronic Performance evaluation testing of microwave ovens and IH cooking heaters
· The GM is used to acquire temperature data at multiple points to evaluate temperature distribution and ambient temperature.
· Measurement less susceptible to noise is possible by using electromagnetic relay type modules.
Noise
Ambient temperature Temperature in oven
Electromagnetic relay scanner
Main unit
Microwave oven
Sub unit
Performance evaluation testing of washing machines
· The GM is used to acquire rotation, vibration, temperature, power consumption, and other types of data of washing machines.
· For power consumption, voltage, current, and the like, the measurement data from WT power meters can be acquired in digital form, which preserves high-precision power measurements. (This requires the WT communication (/E2) option.)
WT communication (/E2 option)
Temperature Rotation Vibration
GM
Ethernet
Washing machine
Power Voltage Current
Digital data WT power meter
1-8
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.4 GM Application Examples
Vehicles
1
Car air conditioner evaluation
· The GM is used to acquire in-car temperatures, duct temperatures and humidities,
supplied voltages, outside air temperatures, engine on/off state, and other types of data. · The wide operating temperature range of -20 to 60°C enables testing in environmental
2
test labs, hot and cold regions, and so on.
· Monitoring on a tablet is possible with the Bluetooth (/C8) option.
Temperature Humidity
3
Bluetooth
Tablet
4
Inside a car
Engine durability testing · The GM acquires various types of data, such as air temperature, water temperature,
rotation, air volume, exhaust gas, in tests performed on engine test benches. Long-term data acquisition is possible such as in durability tests performed by supplying rotation and load control signals and varying the measurement conditions. · Data acquisition is possible at different time intervals for each bench (multi-logging, (/BT option)) by using the Data Logging Software GA10.
GA10
5
App Index
Bench 1 Bench 2 Bench 3
Block temperature Water temperature Oil temperature Rotation Air volume
Exhaust gas concentration
Ethernet Main unit
Test start
Test stop
Bench 1
Bench 2
Bench 3
Multilogging
Sub unit
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-9
1.4 GM Application Examples
Environmental Monitoring Factory utility monitoring
· The GM is used to acquire and monitor various types of data, such as power, temperature, flow rate, PH, and residual chlorine concentration, from different utility equipment in factories.
· Equipment maintenance is possible based on the acquired data. Web browser
Ethernet
Factory utility
Power Flow rate Residual chlorine PH Turbidity
Main unit Sub unit
Air conditioning monitoring in pharmaceutical labs and warehouses
· The GM is used to acquire and monitor the temperature, humidity, and the like in storage rooms for pharmaceuticals and foods and warehouses.
· Quality management is possible by acquiring trends and evaluating the effects to the quality of stored products.
· Monitoring on a tablet is possible with the Bluetooth (/C8) option. · The advanced security function (/AS option) can be added to comply with 21 CFR Part11.
Web browser
Foods
Ethernet Temperature Humidity
Main unit
Pharmaceuticals
Sub unit
1-10
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.4 GM Application Examples
Plants
1
Film coating process monitoring
· The GM is used to acquire and monitor the volume and components of photosensitizing
agents, sheet feeding speeds, temperatures, humidities, the volume of bubbles, and the like.
2
· Performance and quality management of film is possible.
· Acquiring and monitoring of process data is easy with Data Logging Software GA10.
GA10
3
Film
Temperature Humidity
Transfer speed Photosensitizing agent volume
Bubbles
Ethernet
Temperature distribution monitoring of melting furnaces · The GM is used to acquire temperature data of melting furnaces, which can be monitored
from a Web browser. · Multi-point measurement of up to 100 channels is possible. (GM10-1)
Web browser
4 5
App Index
Ethernet
Temperature Melting furnace
Up to 100 channels
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-11
1.5 Scalable Data Acquisition System
1.5.1
Component Devices
A single GM unit consists a combination of the following modules and a module base. A data acquisition module is linked to the left of the power supply module, and input/output modules are linked on the left side of the data acquisition module. A multi unit system is configured by linking expansion modules and connecting units over a LAN network. A module base is used to link a data acquisition module, input/output modules, and expansion module.
Name Data Acquisition Module
Model GM10
Power Supply Module GM90PS
Component Names
7 segment LED×2 Status display area START/STOP key USER key USB port
RS-422/485 serial port (/C3 option)
Ethernet port
Description A module for acquiring data. It is linked to the left of the power supply module. · Only one module can be linked to a system.
A module for supplying power to the unit.
Input/output Module GX90 --
Module Base
GM90MB
Power switch
Power Inlet or terminal (M4)
A module for receiving and transmitting signals. A base is used to link a data acquisition module, input/output modules, and expansion module.
Expansion Module GX90EX
7 segment LED×2 Status display area
Setting switches Ports
Input/output Module
Name Analog Input Digital Input Pulse input Digital Output Digital Input/output
Model
GX90XA GX90XD GX90XP GX90YD GX90WD
A module for connecting units over a LAN network. An expansion module is used in each unit to configure a multi unit system. · The firmware version of the GX90EX that can
be used with the SMARTDAC+ GM must be R1.02.01 or later.
Name
Analog Output PID Control
Model
GX90YA GX90UT
1-12
· Input/output modules may need to have their firmware updated. For details, see page 2-209 in section , "Conditions on the Combination of GM10 Versions and Input/output Modules".
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.5 Scalable Data Acquisition System
Analog Input Module Scan Intervals and Measurement Types
Type
Universal (-U2) Low withstand voltage
Channels Scan interval Scanner TC RTD DCV DI mA
(fastest)
10
100 ms
SSR
ü
ü
ü
ü
10
500 ms
SSR
ü
ü
ü
relay (-L1)
Electromagnetic relay (-T1) 10
1 s
Relay ü
ü
ü
DC current input (-C1)
10
100 ms
SSR
ü
High withstand voltage 10 (-V1) High-speed universal (-H0) 4
100 ms 1ms
SSR
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
4-wire RTD/resistor (-R1) 6
100ms
SSR
ü
Resistor Use
Universal Low price
Noise tolerance
mA only
High withstand
voltage
High-speed
universal
ü
4-wire RTD
1.5.2
Flexible Support for Channel Additions and Reductions
YOKOGAWA's original block structure (patented) Modules can be added one module at a time. Unique structure in which modules are linked to a module base Secure linking using a module base (slide lock mechanism; can be fastened with screws) Module insertion and removal from the front, easy maintenance The GM can be set up in a single unit system or multi unit system. Max. 100 Channel Measurement Standard (Single unit)
This system consists only of a main unit for data acquisition.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App
Max. 420 Channel Measurement through Expansion (Multi unit)
This system consists of sub units connected to a main unit for data acquisition. Up to six sub units can be connected. The GM10-2 can be used to configure a 420-channel (input channel) system. Expansion modules are used to connect between the main unit and sub units and between sub units. Units are connected using Ethernet cables. The connections can extend up to 100 m total. Less wiring is possible by distribution such as when measurement locations are separated far apart.
Index
Main unit LAN cable
Sub unit
* The main unit and sub units are connected directly using LAN cables. Hubs and repeaters cannot be used.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-13
1.5 Scalable Data Acquisition System
Less Wiring by Distribution If the measuring site and the data logger installation location are far apart, a sub unit can be installed at the site to monitor the data without having to extend thermocouple and other signal wires over long distances.
Main unit
1.5.3
Sub unit
LAN cable Up to 100 m
Thermocouples
Unit Types and Configurations
There are two GM unit configurations: main unit and sub unit. A system consisting only of a
main unit is called a single unit system; a system consisting of a main unit and sub units is
called a multi unit system.
Main Unit
The main unit includes the data acquisition module. Up to 10 input/output modules can be linked. An expansion module (GX90EX) is linked to the left end when connecting to sub units. In this case, the maximum number of input/output modules that can be linked is six.
Main unit (Single unit system)
When a sub unit is connected (Multi unit system)
Input/output Module (up to 10 modules)
Data acquisition module
Expansion module
Input/output Module (up to 6 modules)
Sub unit
For details on how to configure expansion modules, see the First Step Guide.
Sub Unit A sub unit is connected to the main unit. An expansion module (GX90EX) is linked to connect to the main unit or other sub units with LAN cables. The maximum connection distance between two units is 100 m. Only cascaded connection is allowed. An expansion module is linked to the left of the power supply module, and input/output modules are linked on the left side of the data acquisition module. Up to six input/output modules can be linked.
Main unit
LAN cable
Input/output Module (up to 6 modules)
Expansion module
Note
The multi unit system support only cascaded connections. If connected in a ring, none of the sub units will be identified.
1-14
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.5 Scalable Data Acquisition System
Notes on Connecting Modules
1
See the GM10 Data Acquisition System First Step Guide (IM 04L55B01-02EN) and GM
Data Acquisition System General Specifications (GS 04L55B01-01EN).
GM Feature Overview
Do not link modules in a way that violates the specifications. Doing so can cause the
2
GM system to crash.
See page 2-209 in section 2.29.5, "Notes on System Configuration".
1.5.4 Flexible Installation Methods
3
The GM can be not only installed on a desktop but also mounted on a DIN rail or a wall.
Desktop
4
Legs
DIN Rail Mounting The GM can be mounted easily on a DIN rail using the latches on the rear of the module
base.
5
App Index
Latch for DIN rail mounting
Wall Mounting The GM can be mounted on a wall using the screw holes on the power supply module and module base.
Screw holes
Screw holes
Module base
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Power supply module
1-15
1.6 Functions
1.6.1
Basic Functions
Measurement Input/output Types
A rich lineup of input/output modules are available. You can select the best-suited module according to your measurement needs.
Input/output Module
Module Analog input
Model GX90XA
Digital Input
GX90XD
Pulse input
GX90XP
Digital Output
GX90YD
Digital Input/output GX90WD
Analog output
GX90YA
PID control
GX90UT
Type (Suffix code)
Number of channels
Universal, solid state relay, scanner type (-U2) 10
Electromagnetic relay, scanner type (-T1)
Low withstand voltage relay, scanner type (-L1)
DC current (mA), scanner type (-C1)
High withstand voltage, scanner type (-V1)
High-speed universal, individual A/D type (-H0) 4
4-wire RTD/resistor, scanner type (-R1)
6
--
16
--
10
--
6
--
Input: 8, Output: 6
--
4
--
PID: 6, AI: 2, AO: 2,
DI: 8, DO: 8
The following table shows the input types supported by each module.
Module Analog input
Digital input Digital input/output Pulse input Analog output PID control
Type (Suffix code) -U2 -T1 -L1 -C1 -V1 -H0 -R1 -- -- -- -- --
Input Type
(DCV) (GS)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
(TC) ü ü ü ü ü
ü
(RTD) ü
(DI)2 ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
(mA) ü1 ü1 ü1 ü ü1 ü1
ü ü1
1 When an external shunt resistor is connected 2 Will be voltage or contact for analog input modules 3 Pulse input modules can receive also Level (5 V logic) signals.
Pulse3 Resistance
ü ü ü ü
1-16
IM 04L55B01-01EN
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6Functions
Pulse measurement
· Using digital input and digital input/output modules, you can measure pulses of flow rates, rain gauges, and the like (250 Hz max.,* minimum pulse width: 2 ms). To perform pulse measurements, the GM10 needs to have the computation (/MT) option. * When chattering filter is off. 125 Hz when chattering filter is on.
· Pulse input modules can be used to integrate pulse output (20 kHz maximum, minimum pulse width 25 µs) from flowmeters and the like. * To perform pulse integration, the GM10 needs to have the computation (/MT) option.
Input Calculation
The following calculations can be performed on input signals.
Linear scaling
Converts the input value unit to obtain the measured value. For example, linear scaling is used to convert the output signal from a temperature converter into temperature values.
10 V
300°C
Input value
Measured value
0 V
100°C
Delta
The measured value of the channel is set to the difference with respect to the measured value of the reference channel. For example, this is useful when you want to measure the temperature difference in reference to the room temperature.
Input value
Measured value
--
Measured value on the reference channel
Square root computation
Takes the square root of the input value and converts the unit to obtain the measured
value.
In a differential pressure flowmeter, the output signal is proportional to the square of the
flow rate. Therefore, to measure on a GM, square rooting is required.
b
B
Input value x a
X Measured value AB
x a
X = (B A)
+A
b a
A
a
b
Low-cut Set the low-cut value for square rooting.
Measured value
Result of square root computation
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Low-cut value
Input value
Log scale (/LG1)
The GM supports Log input, pseudo log, and log linear input. For details on the function, page 1-46 in section 1.6.17, "Log Scale Function (/LG option)".
1-17
1.6 Functions
Other Types of Input Processing Moving average
Performs moving average over the specified number of sampling points. For example, you can use this to smooth the data when the input signal is fluctuating due to noise or other unwanted influences.
Scan interval
Average Average
Sampling count
Bias This is used to add a constant value to input values or scaled values (input computation).
Channel on which bias is added
Input value
Measured value
+
Bias (a constant value)
Calibration correction Input values can be corrected using segment linearization. Up to 12 correction points can be specified.
Linearizer approximation Corrects input values using characteristics specified with segments to derive output values.
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Output value ( Measured value )
Input value
Linearizer bias Corrects input values using bias values specified with segments to derive output values.
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
After correction
Output value
Linearizer bias
( Measured value )
Input value
Correction factor
Corrects input values using the instrument correction factor and sensor correction factor specified with segments to derive output values.
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Output value
After correction
Uncorrected value Instrument correction factor + Sensor correction factor
( Measured value )
Input value
1-18
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.6 Functions
Scan Interval
1
This is the interval at which the input signal is sampled and converted into digital values (A/D
conversion). You can select from 1 ms, 2 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms,
500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, and 5 s. The scan intervals that you can set vary depending on the module.
If modules with different shortest scan intervals are present in the system, the shortest scan
2
interval that you can set is the shortest scan interval of the slowest module.
Input signal Scan interval
A/D conversion
1.23
Measured value
Shortest scan intervals by analog input module suffix codes
Module
Type
Number of Channels
GX90XA analog Universal (-U2)
10
input
Low withstand voltage relay 10
(-L1)
Electromagnetic relay (-T1) 10
DC current input (-C1)
10
High withstand voltage
10
High-speed universal (-H0)
4
4-wire RTD/resistor (-R1)
6
Shortest Scan Interval
100 ms 500 ms
1 s 100 ms 100 ms 1 ms 100 ms
A/D Integration Time
The GM uses an A/D converter to convert sampled analog signals to digital signals. The
power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated by setting the integration time of
the A/D converter to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply
or an integer multiple of one cycle.
Common (36.67 ms/100 ms) can specified to effectively eliminate power supply frequency
noise for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Note that the selectable A/D integration times vary depending on the scan interval settings.
Integration Time Explanation
Auto
The GM automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the
integration time to 16.67 ms for 60 Hz and 20 ms for 50 Hz.
However, if the module operation mode is 10ch and the scan interval is
100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is fixed at 1.67 ms.
50Hz
Sets the integration time to 20 ms.
60Hz
Sets the integration time to 16.67 ms.
Common
Sets the integration time to 16.67 ms, 20 ms, 36.67 ms, or 100 ms.
Integration time and scan interval by module
Type
Integration Time Scan Interval
10ch mode / 2ch mode
6ch mode
Universal
36.67ms
1s
DC current input 4-wire RTD/resistance High withstand voltage
100ms
2 s or 5 s
Electromagnetic relay 16.67ms/20ms 1s
--
36.67ms
2s
--
100ms
5s
--
Low withstand voltage 36.67ms
2s
--
relay
100ms
5s
--
3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-19
1.6 Functions
Measurement Mode
By switching the measurement mode according to the measurement target and measurement conditions, you can perform high-speed measurements as well as simultaneous high-speed and low-speed measurements. High-speed measurement at the shortest measurement interval of 1 ms Measurement at the shortest interval of 1 ms is possible by using a high-speed analog input module equipped with an original A/D converter developed by YOKOGAWA. Dual interval measurement Two different scan intervals can be used together in a single system. Slow changing signals such as temperature and fast changing signals such as pressure and vibration can be measured simultaneously and efficiently. Scan groups are specified on each module.
Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)
Performs reference junction compensation on thermocouple input. You can select whether to perform reference junction compensation internally within GM or externally (with a reference junction compensator).
GM Thermocouple
Internal reference junction
Thermocouple
External reference junction
Burnout Detection
When the range type is set to thermocouple (TC), resistance temperature detector (RTD) or general signal (GS (1-5V), GS (4-20 mA)), the GM detects sensor burnouts. If the range type is set to GS (1-5) or GS (4-20 mA), you can set the high and low limits for determining burnouts.
Burnout
Thermoelectromotive force Indicated as Burnout
Burnout
1-5V Detected on the 1-5 V value
Indicated as Burnout
Burnout criteria (for GS (1-5V), GS (4-20 mA) ranges)
Item Lower Limit of Burnout Upper limit of burnout
Selectable Range (Percentage of the specified span width) -20.0 to -5.0% 105.0 to 120.0%
1-20
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
Operation Modes of Modules AI modules
2ch mode and 10ch or 6ch mode are available. In 10ch mode, measurement is possible on CH1 to CH10. In 6ch mode, measurement is possible on CH1 to CH6. In 2ch mode, measurement is possible only on CH1 and CH2. (CH3 and higher channels are fixed to Skip.) In 10ch mode, when the scan interval is 100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is fixed at 1.67 ms. Since the power frequency noise is not eliminated, the measured values may fluctuate, especially in temperature measurements using thermocouples. In 2ch mode, when the scan interval is 100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or 20 ms. This allows power frequency noise to be eliminated. Note that the selectable A/D integration times vary depending on the 2ch/6ch/10ch mode and scan interval settings. For the high-speed AI module, power frequency noise is rejected using the noise rejection feature. DI modules Normal and remote operation modes are available. For normal DI input, specify Normal. Specify Remote to use the DI module as a remote control input. When there are multiple DI modules, only one of them can be set to Remote. Remote can only be specified for a DI module or DI/DO module installed in the main unit. To use remote control through event action, select Remote.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-21
1.6 Functions
1.6.2
Recording
Recording Interval
The recording interval is the interval at which data sampled at the scan interval is recorded as measurement data. For details on the methods for recording event data and display data, see the next page. Event data
Set the interval at which to record measurement data. You cannot choose a recording interval that is shorter than the scan interval. Display data The recording interval of display data is determined by the trend interval [/div] setting. The GM records the maximum and minimum values from within the data sampled at the scan interval within the recording interval.
Data Types
The GM can record the following types of data. If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see section 1.2.1, "Data Types," in the Advanced Security Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Data Type Event data
Display data
Manual sampled data Report data (/MT option)
Setting parameters
Explanation
· Measurement data that is recorded at the specified recording interval. There are two modes. One mode starts recording when a trigger occurs. The other mode records at all times.
· A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Contains alarm and message information. · Data format: Binary and text · Measurement data that records the maximum and minimum
values of the sampled data within the recording interval, which is determined by the specified trend interval. · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Contains alarm and message information. · Data format: Binary and text · Instantaneous value of the measured data when a manual sample operation is executed. · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Data format: Text · Hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, batch, daily custom report data. Report data is created at an interval that is determined by the report type (one hour for hourly reports, one day for daily reports, and so on). · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Data format: Text · The data can be converted to Excel and PDF formats. · The setting parameters of the GM. · Data format: Text
1-22
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.6 Functions
Methods for Recording Event Data and Display Data
1
This section explains the methods for recording event data and display data.
Event data
The GM records the data sampled at the scan interval at the specified recording interval. Detailed data is recorded, but the data size becomes large.
2
Event data recording
Recording data
3
Scan interval
Time
Recording interval
Display data
Display data can be likened to recording to chart paper on conventional pen recorders. Using the data sampled at the scan interval, the GM records the maximum and minimum sampling data values within each recording interval (interval determined by the trend interval [/div]). Detailed data of each sample is not retained, but because the maximum and minimum data values are recorded, display data expresses the fluctuation range in each recording interval. In addition, because the number of data values can be reduced, display data allows long-term data recording to the internal memory.
Display data recording
Max.
Max.
Max. Max.
Max.
Recording data Max.
Min.
Min. Min. Min.
Min.
Min.
Scan interval
Time
Recording interval (determined by the trend interval [/div])
Recording interval of display data The recording interval of display data is determined by the trend interval [/div] setting. The relationship between the trend interval and the recording interval is shown below.
Trend Interval Recording Interval Trend Interval Recording Interval Trend Interval Recording Interval
5s 100ms 2min 4s 30min 1min
10s 200ms 5min 10s 1h 2min
15s 500ms 10min 20s 2h 4min
30S 1s 15min 30s 4h 8min
1min 2s 20min 40s 10h 20min
4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-23
1.6 Functions
Event Data Recording Modes
The following event data recording modes are available. Free
Recording starts when you start it and stops when you stop it. Measurement data is divided by the specified duration (data length).
Time
File
File
File
Adding data
Data length Set the size of recording data per file. Recording data is divided at the specified file size. The selectable data lengths vary depending on the number of channels to record and the Scan interval setting.
Single The GM enters the trigger-wait state when you start recording. After a trigger event occurs, the GM will record data for the specified time (data length) and stop. From this point, the GM will not record even if the trigger condition is met.
Trigger condition met
Time
File
Repeat
The GM enters the trigger-wait state when you start recording. After a trigger event occurs, the GM will record data for the specified time (data length) and stop. Then, it enters the trigger-wait state again and repeats recording for the specified time (data length) every time the trigger condition is met. To stop recording event data, stop the recording.
Trigger condition met Trigger condition met
Time
File
File
1-24
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.6 Functions
Internal memory
1
The recorded measurement data is divided at a specific time interval (data length for event
data and file save interval for display data) and saved to files.
If the internal memory is full or if the number of display data files and event data files
exceeds 500 for the GM10-1 or 1000 for the GM10-2, files are overwritten from the oldest
2
file.
Time
3
· · ·
File
Data length (event data) File save interval (display data)
4
Old
File 1
Update date
New
File 2
File 3
Internal memory
File 4
5
App
Overwrite
Recording Channels
Set the channels for recording the measurement data of event data, display data, and manual sampled data. Only the channels assigned to recording channels are recorded as measurement data. You can select the channels to record from AI channels, DI channels, pulse input channels, DO channels, math channels (/MT option), and communication channels (/MC option).
Record channel
IO channel
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005
0001 0002
0003
Communication C001
channel
C002 C003
C004
C005
C002 C004
Record
Math channel
A001 A002 A003 A004 A005
A001
A004 A005
Number of recording channels Data Type
Event data Display data Manual sample
Maximum Number of Recording Channels
GM10-1
GM10-2
500ch (250ch)*
1000ch (600ch)*
500ch (250ch)*
1000ch (600ch)*
50ch
100ch
* Numbers in parentheses are for when the measurement mode is set to Dual interval. The maximum number of channels that the GM can record varies depending on the recording interval and recording data type (for the GM10-2).
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-25
1.6 Functions
1.6.3
Output
The GM can output relay signals (digital output module or digital input/output module) when an alarm occurs, when a failure occurs, when they are manually turned on, or according to the event action function. The output (DO channel) can also be recorded.
Digital output module
Module Digital output Digital input/output
Model GX90YD GX90WD
Output Type Relay, SPDT(NO-C-NC) Relay, SPDT(NO-C-NC)
Number of Channels 6 6
Alarm output
When an alarm assigned to a measurement channel occurs, a relay signal is output from the DO channel that the alarm output is assigned to.
Alarm occurrence
Relay output
Manual output DO channels can be turned on and off through manual operation on the digital display screen shown in the Web browser. To use manual output, the following settings are required. · Set the DO channel type to Manual. · In Display settings, set Value Modification from the Monitor to On.
Relay on/off
Event action
A relay signal is output when an event occurs. For the events that can use relay output, see section page 1-33 in section 1.6.7, "Event Action Function".
Event occurrence
Relay output
1-26
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.4
1.6 Functions
Storage
Measurement data saved in the internal memory can be saved in an external storage medium (SD card) automatically or manually.
Auto Save
Measurement data in the internal memory is saved automatically to an external storage medium (SD card). Keep the SD card inserted in the drive at all times. Media FIFO Function
If not enough free space is available when saving a new data file to the SD card, files are deleted in order from the oldest data update date/time to save the new file. This operation is referred to as FIFO (first in first out). When saving the data files automatically, you can save the data so that the most recent data files are constantly retained in the SD card. This method allows you to use the GM continuously without having to replace the SD card.
Old
Update date
New
Deleted
File 1
Medium
File 2
File 3
Saved
File 4
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App
Media FIFO Save Operation · Up to the most recent 1000 files are retained. If the number of files in the save destination directory exceeds 1000, the number of files is held at 1000 by deleting old files even if there is enough free space. · If there are more than 1000 files already in the save destination directory, at least one file is always deleted before saving the new file. The number of files is not kept within 1000 in this case. · FIFO is used only when the following files are saved automatically. When files are saved using other methods, FIFO is not used. Data File Types Display data file Event data file Report data file Manual sampled data file
Manual Save (Collectively Storing Unsaved Data)
If you do not use the auto save function, save measurement data manually. Unsaved data in the internal memory is stored in files to the external storage medium (SD card) when an external storage medium is inserted. When using manual save, you must be careful to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium before the data is overwritten.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-27
1.6 Functions
Measurement Data File Format
Measurement data can be saved in binary or text format.
Binary format If security is a priority, save the measurement data in binary format. It is extremely difficult to decipher or tamper binary data using a typical text editor or the like.
Text format If you want to directly open the data with a general-purpose text editor, spreadsheet application, or the like, save the data in text format. You will be able to edit the data without using a dedicated software application.
1.6.5
Display (Web browser)
Real time monitoring of measurement data is possible from a Web browser. You do not need to use a special software application. You can also configure the GM and perform operations such as recording start/stop and computation start/stop.
Monitoring
You can monitor data being measured on the trend, digital, bar graph, overview, and other screens. In addition, past data can be displayed (historical trend).
Operation
You can perform operations such as recording start/stop, computation start/stop, message
writing, and manual sampling.
Manual sample
Start/stop recording Alarm ACK
Save event (data)
Save display (data) Write a message
1-28
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Message writing Messages can be written in event data and display data.
1.6 Functions
1
2
GM Feature Overview
Message
3
4
Types of messages that can be written
Message Type
Explanation
Preset message
You can write preset messages.
Number of displayable characters: Up to 32
Free message Auto message
Up to 100 messages can be registered. You can write messages that you enter freely. There are 10 free messages. The messages that you enter are registered in free messages 1 to 10. When the GM recovers from a power failure during
recording, a fixed message is written.
Configuration
You can configure the GM from a Web browser. When a configuration change occurs, you can simply switch to the Config. tab and change the settings; you do not have to use the configuration software. In addition, you can perform system reconfiguration and A/D calibration from the Calib tab.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Configuration tab
Setting display
Upadte configuration
Calibration tab
· Reconfiguration · A/D calibration · Advanced security settings · Encryption/Certificate · Multi batch settings · Measurement mode · Update
The following may be displayed depending on the available options. · Advanced security settings (/AS option) · Multi-batch settings (/BT option)
1-29
1.6 Functions
1.6.6
Various Functions Alarm Function
For the measured values, up to four levels of alarms can be set on each channel. Alarms can be output to relays and internal switches. The alarm types that you can set vary depending on the channel type (input/output, math, communication).
Alarm Types
Type High limit (H)
An alarm is activated when the measured value is greater than or equal to the alarm value.
Explanation Measured value
Alarm value
Hysteresis
Alarm output ON
Lower limit (L)
An alarm is activated when the measured value is less than or equal to the alarm value.
Alarm value
Measured value
Hysteresis
Alarm output ON
High limit on rate-of- An alarm is activated if the increasing
change (R)
rate-of-change of measured values
over a certain interval is greater than
or equal to the specified value.
Measured value T2
T1
t1
t2
Interval (t2 t1)
Change in the measured value
Amount of change in the setting | T2-T1|
Time
Low limit on rate-of- An alarm is activated if the decreasing
change (r)
rate-of-change of measured values
over a certain interval is greater than
or equal to the specified value.
Measured value T2
T1
t1
t2
Interval (t2 t1)
Amount of change in the setting | T2-T1| Change in the measured value Time
Delay high limit (T)
An alarm is activated if measured values remain greater than or equal to the alarm value for a specified time period (delay period).
Alarm value Delay period
Measured value
Alarm output ON
Delay low limit (t)
An alarm is activated if measured values remain less than or equal to the alarm value for a specified time period (delay period).
Alarm value Delay period
Measured value
Alarm output ON
Difference high limit An alarm is activated when the
(h)
difference in the measured values of
two channels is greater than or equal
to the specified value. This alarm
can be specified on measurement
channels set to difference
computation.
Continued on next page
Difference in the measured values
of two channels
Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm output ON
1-30
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
Type Difference low limit (I)
Explanation
An alarm is activated when the difference in the measured values of two channels is less than or equal to
Difference in the measured values
of two channels
Hysteresis
the specified value. This alarm can be specified on measurement channels Alarm value
set to difference computation.
Alarm output ON
The character inside the parentheses is the symbol denoting each alarm.
Alarm of a channel set to difference computation
It is set in the position shown in the figure below.
H, L, T, t, R, r
h, l
Input value
Measured value -- Measured value on the reference channel
Hysteresis
You can furnish an offset between the value used to activate and release alarms. This is fixed at 0 for the DI range.
Example: H: If you set the alarm value of a high limit alarm to 1.0000 V and the hysteresis to 0.0005 V, an alarm is activated when the measured value is greater than or equal to 1.0000 V and is released when the measured value is less than 0.9995 V.
Alarm Display (Detection)
You can select whether to display an alarm (indicate the occurrence) when an alarm occurs. If the alarm display is disabled, when an alarm occurs, the GM outputs signals to alarm output DO channels or internal switches but does not display the alarm. In addition, alarms are also not recorded in the alarm summary.
Changing the Alarm Values from the Web Page
You can change the alarm values from the Monitor Page (digital, bar graph, overview) on the Web browser. This is useful when you need to change the alarm values depending on measurement conditions. To use this function, in Display settings, under Screen display settings, Changing each value from monitoring must be set to On.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-31
1.6 Functions
DO Output Operation AND/OR Operation
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, you can select which condition below will activate the output relay. You can also specify AND operation for internal switches. · AND: Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously · OR: Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring
Reflash When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, this function notifies the occurrence of subsequent alarms after the relay is activated by the first alarm. When subsequent alarms occur, the output relay is released temporarily. The duration for which the relays are deactivated can be set to 500 ms, 1 s, or 2 s. Relays set to Reflash will operate using OR and Nonhold settings.
Energize or De-energize Operation You can select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an alarm occurs. If you select de-energize, the alarm output relays will be in the same state when the GM is shut down as they are when an alarm occurs.
Non-hold/Hold The alarm output relay can be set to operate in the following fashion when the alarm condition is no longer met. · Turn OFF the relay output (nonhold). · Hold the relay at ON until the alarm ACK is executed (hold).
Alarm Acknowledge Operation (Alarm ACK) Acknowledging All Alarms Releases all alarm indications and relay outputs.
Individual Alarm ACK You can releases specific alarms. In System settings, under Alarm basic settings, Individual Alarm ACK must be set to On.
DO Output Relay Operation
See "DO Output Relay Operation" on page 2-66.
1-32
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.7
1.6 Functions
Event Action Function
The event action function is used to execute specified actions when certain events occur. It can also be used to perform remote control. For example, you can have the GM write a message in the measurement data when an alarm occurs or start recording on a remote control input. You can set up to 50 event actions (event action number 1 to 50).
Event Types
Item Remote (DI) Relay (DO) Internal switch Alarm - IO channel Alarm - Math channel Alarm - Communication channel Any alarm
Timer Match Time Timer User function key Status
Explanation DI channel of remote control input Relay status Internal switch status Alarm of an I/O channel Alarm of a math channel Alarm of a communication channel The change from no active alarms to one or more active alarms is regarded as an event. Timer (timer 1 to 12) expiration Match time timer (match time timer 1 to 12) expiration User function key (USER1/USER2) Recording, math, memory/media error, measurement error, communication error
Action Types
Item Recording Computation
Flag Manual sample Alarm ACK Event trigger
Message writing
Save event data
Save display data
Reset the relative timer Load settings
Save settings Adjust the time Relay Internal switch Load program pattern
Explanation Starts or stops recording. Starts or stops computation (/MT option) or resets the computed values of all math channels. Sets a flag to 1 (On) or 0 (Off). (/MT option) Executes manual sampling Clears the alarm output Applies a trigger that starts event data recording. You can specify this when the GM is configured to event data. Writes a message. Specify the message number and the message write destination. Set the destination to all groups, or specify a write destination group number. You can execute this while recording is in progress. Saves the event data being recorded to a file in the internal memory. You can specify this when the GM is configured to event data. Saves the display data being recorded to a file in the internal memory. You can specify this when the GM is configured to record display data. Resets a relative timer. The timer starts immediately. Loads the setting parameter file from the root directory of the SD card and configures the GM accordingly. Saves the current setting parameters to the SD card. Sets the clock to the nearest hour. Sets the relay output to On or Off. Sets the internal switch to 1 (On) or 0 (Off). Loads all the pattern files (ProgPatYY, YY: 01 to 99) in the specified folder at the root directory of the SD memory card.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-33
1.6 Functions
Event Action
Possible Combinations of Events and Actions
The combinations that are indicated with marks in the table below can be used.
Remote (DI)3
Relay (DO)
Internal switch
Alarm - IO channel
Alarm - Math Alarm -
Any alarm
channel
Communication
channel
Timer
Match timer User function key
Status
Recording
Recording start/stop1
Computation
Computation start/stop1
Manual sample
Alarm ACK
Save display data
Save event data
Event trigger
Message
Reset the relative
timer
Load settings
Save settings
Load program pattern
Adjust the time
Relay output2
Relay on/off1, 2
Internal Switch2
Internal switch On/
Off1, 2
1 When the operation mode is rising/falling edge 2 Action can be set to Relay output, Relay On/Off, Internal switch, or Internal switch On/Off only when the DO
channel range type and internal switch type is set to Manual. 3 Only for DI modules installed in the GM whose operation mode is set to Remote.
Event Action Examples
No. Event Action Description Event 1 Start and stop recording Remote through remote control. 2 Write a message when an Alarm - IO channel alarm occurs. 3 Save event data every day Match time timer at hour 17.
Action
Other Settings
Recording start/stop DI module operation
mode: Remote
Message
Save event data
Match time timer setting Timer match condition: 17:00 Timer action: Repeat
1-34
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.8
1.6 Functions
Control Event Action Function
The control event action function is used to execute a specified action when certain events occur. For details, see the Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-31EN).
Control Operation Loop Control and Common Control
Function Run all control loops Stop all control loops Control operation stop/start (specified loop)
Auto/manual switch (specified loop)
Remote/local switch (specified loop)
Auto switch (specified loop) Manual switch (specified loop) Cascade switch (specified loop)
Remote switch (specified loop) Local switch (specified loop) SP number switch (binary/BCD)
Description Starts running all loops when the input changes from off to on. Stops all loops when the input changes from off to on. Stops the control operation of specified loops when the input changes from off to on. Starts the control operation of specified loops when the input changes from on to off. Switches the control operation of specified loops to auto when the input changes from off to on. Switches the control operation of specified loops to manual when the input changes from on to off. Switches the control operation of specified loops to remote when the input changes from off to on. Switches the control operation of specified loops to local when the input changes from on to off. Switches the control operation of specified loops to auto when the input changes from off to on. Switches the control operation of specified loops to manual when the input changes from off to on. Switches the control operation of specified loops to cascade when the input changes from off to on (during cascade control). Switches the control operation of specified loops to remote when the input changes from off to on. Switches the control operation of specified loops to local when the input changes from off to on. Switches the SP number according to the combination of input ON/OFF states (binary or BCD).
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-35
1.6 Functions
Program Control
Function
Description
Program RUN/RESET switch
Starts program operation when the input changes from
off to on.
Stops program operation when the input changes from
on to off.
Hold operation
Pauses the operation of program patterns when the input
changes from on to off.
Advance operation
Advances the operation of program patterns by one
segment when the input changes from on to off.
Start of program operation
Starts program operation when the input changes from
off to on.
Stop of program operation
Stops program operation when the input changes from
off to on.
Hold operation (specified loop, specified Pauses the operation of the specified program pattern of
program pattern)
the specified loop when the input changes from on to off.
Advance operation (specified loop, specified Advances the operation of the specified program pattern
program pattern)
of the specified loop by one segment when the input
changes from on to off.
Start of program operation (specified loop, Starts the operation of the specified program pattern of
specified program pattern)
the specified loop when the input changes from on to off.
Stop of program operation (specified loop, Stops the operation of the specified program pattern of
specified program pattern)
the specified loop when the input changes from on to off.
Program pattern number switch (binary/BCD Switches the program pattern number according to the
selection)
combination of input ON/OFF states (binary or BCD).
Notification and Monitoring
Control status monitoring parameters and notifications (events) are output to DO or internal
switches (as actions).
Function Control status (RUN/STOP) Wait end signal (1s, 3s, 5s) Pattern end signal (1s, 3s, 5s) PV event status Time event status Wait flag Hold-on flag Program operation mode monitoring (STOP/RUN) Segment number monitoring (binary/BCD) Pattern number monitoring (binary/BCD)
Description Outputs the control status (RUN status: ON, STOP status: OFF). Outputs an ON state signal for 1, 3, or 5 seconds when the program operation wait state ends. Outputs an ON state signal for 1, 3, or 5 seconds when the program operation ends. Outputs an ON state signal while a PV event is occurring during program operation. Outputs an ON state signal while a time event is occurring during program operation. Outputs an ON state signal while the program operation is waiting. Outputs an ON state signal while the program operation is being held. Outputs the program operation status (RUN: ON, STOP: OFF) Outputs the running segment number in binary or BCD ON/OFF states. Outputs the running pattern number in binary or BCD ON/OFF states.
* The behavior varies depending on the energize/de-energize state of the contact type.
1-36
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.9
1.6 Functions
Batch Function
You can attach batch information to event data files and display data files. You can manage event data and display data files using batch information.
At the start of recording, batch number, lot number (when in use), and comments (1 to 3) are
entered.
Each comment can be entered once during recording.
Batch number + lot number
Recording start Comment
Recording stop
Text field
Time
Comment
Data file
Batch Information Item Batch No.
Lot No. Comments 1 to 3
Textfield
Title Label
Explanation
Up to 32 characters, A a # 1 Lot numbers can be set to not use, 4 digits, 6 digits, or 8 digits.
Up to 50 characters each, A a # 1 You can insert each comment once during recording. Up to 24 fields can be set.
Up to 20 characters, A a # 1
Up to 30 characters, A a # 1
Auto Increment Function Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to the current lot number + 1.
Batch Information Attached to Measurement Data The following figures show a display example of batch information attached to measurement data using Universal Viewer.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Batch No. Lot No.
Commnet
Batch text
Batch information
Batch text
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-37
1.6 Functions
1.6.10
Math Function (/MT option)
You can define expressions using measured data, computed data, and the like as variables, compute the expressions, and display and save the results. You can set up to 200 math channels.
Computation Types
Classification Basic arithmetic Basic operation Relation operator
Logical operator
Operator + * / ABS( ) SQR( ) LOG( ) LN( ) EXP( ) ** .GT. (or >)
.LT. (or <)
.GE. (or >=)
.LE. (or <=)
.EQ. (or =)
.NE. (or <>)
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
Statistical operations TLOG.MAX( ) TLOG.MIN( ) TLOG.AVE( ) TLOG.SUM( ) TLOG.PSUM( ) TLOG.P-P( ) CLOG.MAX( ) CLOG.MIN( ) CLOG.AVE( ) CLOG.SUM( ) CLOG.P-P( )
Syntax
Explanation
a+b
Determines the sum of a and b
ab
Determines the difference between a and b
a*b
Determines the product of a and b
a/b
Determines the quotient of a and b.
ABS(a)
Determines the absolute value of a
SQR(a)
Determines the square root of a
LOG(a)
Determines the common logarithm (log10) of a
LN(a)
Determines the natural logarithm of a
EXP(a)
Determines the exponent of a
a**b
Determines a to the power of b
a.GT.b (or a>b)
The computed result is 1 when a is greater than b.
Otherwise, the result is 0.
a.LT.b (or a<b)
The computed result is 1 when a is less than b.
Otherwise, the result is 0.
a.GE.b (or a>=b)
The computed result is 1 when a is greater than or
equal to b. Otherwise, the result is 0.
a.LE.b (or a<=b)
The computed result is 1 when a is less than or
equal to b. Otherwise, the result is 0.
a.EQ.b (or a=b)
The computed result is 1 when a is equal to b.
Otherwise, the result is 0.
a.NE.b (or a<>b)
The computed result is 1 when a is not equal to b.
Otherwise, the result is 0.
e1ANDe2
If the two data values e1 and e2 are both non-
zeros, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, it is 0.
(The logical product is determined.)
e1ORe2
If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zeros, the
computed result is 0. Otherwise, it is 1. (The logical
sum is determined.)
e1XORe2
If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and non-
zero or non-zero and zero, the computed result is
1. Otherwise, it is 0. (The exclusive logical sum is
determined.)
NOTe1
The result is the inverse of the status of data
e1 (zero or non-zero). (The logical negation is
determined.)
TLOG.MAX(e1)
Determines the maximum value of the specified
channel (e1).
TLOG.MIN(e1)
Determines the minimum value of the specified
channel (e1).
TLOG.AVE(e1)
Determines the average value of the specified
channel (e1).
TLOG.SUM(e1)
Determines the sum of the specified channel (e1).
TLOG.PSUM(e1)
Determines the sum of the specified channel (e1).
TLOG.P-P(e1)
Determines the maximum - minimum value of the
specified channel (e1).
CLOG.MAX(e1.
Determines the maximum value among the
e2.e4-e6)
specified group of channels (e1, e2, e4, e5, e6).
CLOG.MIN(e1.e2.e4-e6) Determines the minimum value among the specified
group of channels (e1, e2, e4, e5, e6).
CLOG.AVE(e1.e2.e4-e6) Determines the average value among the specified
group of channels (e1, e2, e4, e5, e6).
CLOG.SUM(e1.
Determines the sum among the specified group of
e2.e4-e6)
channels (e1, e2, e4, e5, e6).
CLOG.P-P(e1.e2.e4-e6) Determines the maximum - minimum value among
the specified group of channels (e1, e2, e4, e5, e6).
Continued on next page
1-38
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
Classification Special operation
Operator PRE( ) HOLD( )
RESET( )
Syntax PRE(e1) HOLD(a):b
RESET(a):b
CARRY( )
CARRY(a):b
Conditional
[a?b:c]
expression
Remainder extracting .MOD.
operation
Integer extracting INT( )
operation
Trigonometric
SIN( )
function
COS( )
Bit output
BIT.Bnn(a)
Recording status
REC1
[a?b:c] a.MOD.b INT(a) SIN(a) COS(a)
REC1
Explanation Determines the previous value of e1. When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value. Otherwise, the previous computed value is held. When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value. Otherwise, the previous computed value of b is reset, and b is carried out to derive the computed value. Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the computed value X of b is less than a, the computed result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a, the computed result is the excess (X a). If the value of expression a is true, expression b is executed; otherwise expression c is executed. Determines the remainder when a is divided by b.
Determines the maximum integer that does not exceed a Determines the sine value assuming the data of a to be an angle in degrees. Determines the cosine value assuming the data of a to be an angle in degrees. Outputs the value of the specified bit (Bnn) from bit data a (positive integer) Set to 1 if recording is in progress and 0 if recording is stopped.
Data That Can Be Used in Expressions
Data I/O channel data Math channel data (/MT)
Constant Variable constant Communication channel data (/MC)
Range 0001 to 6950 GM10-1: A001 to A100 GM10-2: A001 to A200 K001 to K100 W001 to W100 GM10-1: C001 to C300
Internal switch status Flag Recording status Integer data
GM10-2: C001 to C500 Raw data GM10-1: RC001 to RC300 GM10-2: RC001 to RC500 S001 to S100 F01 to F20 REC1 Z000 to Z999
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-39
1.6 Functions
1.6.11
Logic Math Function
Logic math is a function that outputs calculated results as 0 or 1 to relays (DOs) or internal switches. Up to 50 logic math operations can be set.
Computation Types
Type Auxiliary operation Basic arithmetic Relational operation Logical operation Conditional operation Bit operation
Computing Element +, +, -, *, / .GT., .GE., .LT., .LE., .EQ., .NE., >, >=, <, <=, =, <> AND, OR, NOT, XOR [expression 1 ? expression 2 : expression 3] BIT.Bnn()
1.6.12
Report Function (/MT option)
The report function can be used to create a variety of report files from the measured data of I/O channels, math channels, and communication channels. You can set up to 60 report channels. You can set up to five computation types. You can select whether to save report files separately for each kind of report or two kinds of reports in a single file.
Time of creation: 10:00
Up to 60 channels
File created
Up to 5 items
Max Min Ave Sum Inst
Max Min Ave Sum Inst
0001 Houly 12.34 1.23 6.78 45.67 3.45 Houly
Houly
0002 11:00
12:00
13:00
0003
· · ·
0510
Combine
Separate
Hourly and Daily Reports
Hourly Daily
Hourly
Max Min Ave Sum Inst
Max Min Ave Sum Inst
Houly Daily
10:00 10:00
Daily
Example of a single file (Combine) containing Daily+Hourly
1-40
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
Report Kind Item Hourly + Daily
Daily + Weekly
Daily + Monthly Batch Daily custom
Explanation
Creates hourly and daily reports. Hourly report: Creates report data every hour on the hour for the previous one hour. Daily report: Creates report data every day at a specified time for the previous one day. Creates hourly and weekly reports. Weekly report: Creates report data every week at a specified time at a specified day of the week for the previous one week. Monthly report: Creates report data every month at a specified time at a specified day for the previous one month. Creates a report in unit of batches. Creates daily reports by dividing it at the specified time intervals.
Computation Types
Item
Ave Max Min Sum Inst
Explanation
Outputs average values. Outputs maximum values. Outputs minimum values. Outputs sum values. Outputs instantaneous values.
1.6.13
Report Template Function
You can create report templates and use them to automatically create custom report files.
Load a report template file that you have created into the GM internal memory. The GM will
automatically create report files using the report template file.
Report template file
Report file based on a template
Saved
Internal memory Output
Excel
Ethernet
PDF
Printer
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Files Created by Using Report Template Files
Report File
Template
Explanation
Report files in Excel Excel format
A report template for each kind of report file
format
is created.
Report files in PDF
Yokogawa
For each kind of report file, a corresponding
format
proprietary format report template file is used to create the
appropriate report files.
Report output to printer Yokogawa
The report template file for PDF reports is
proprietary format used to output data to the printer.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-41
1.6 Functions
Creating Report Templates for PDF Report Files and Printer Output
To create a report template, use the editing tool provided by YOKOGAWA to enter keywords and text in the cells of table. Keywords specify the type of data that will be entered into a cell. Text are output as they are in reports. You can download creation tool from the following URL.
http://www.smartdacplus.com/en/
1.6.14
Security Function
The security function consists of the following functions. · Login · User privileges · Key lock
Security function
Communication
Login
Only registered users can log in
· User name · Password
Admin User
Operation restriction
Key lock
Lock the GM keys
START STOP USER1 USER2
Login
Only registered users (administrators and users) can log in to the GM to perform monitoring and operation. User Levels
User Level
Administrator (Admin) User
Explanation
An administrator can perform all GM operations. Authority of user can be configured to restrict the items that users are allowed to use. A user cannot configure security settings.
Number of User Registrations Up to 50 users including administrators (user numbers 1 to 50) can be registered. User number 1 is fixed as an administrator.
Login Method Registered users log in to GM by entering their user names and passwords.
1-42
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
User Privileges
Limitations can be applied to the operations that a user can perform. Up to 10 conditions of operation limitations can be set (authority numbers 1 to 10). For each user, you can set whether to apply user limitations and the conditions to be applied.
Operation limitations
Operation
Explanation
Recording
Restricts record start/stop operation.
Computation
Restricts math start, math stop, and math reset operations.
Data save
Restricts the operations to save display data, save event
data, generate event triggers, manual sample, snapshot,
reset timer, and reset match time timer.
Message
Restricts message writing operations.
Batch
Restricts batch number writing, lot number writing, comment
writing, and text field writing.
Alarm ACK
Restrict alarm ACK operations.
Communication
Restricts the operations to start, stop, and test mail; test
FTP, get and release network information; test printer output;
manually recover Modbus master; and manually recover
Modbus client.
Time set
Restricts manual SNTP time adjustment and time setting
operations.
Setting operation
Restricts setting operations.
External storage medium Restricts the operations to save, load, and delete files;
manually save data; save alarms; abort saving; create
certificate signature requests; install certificates; and install
intermediate certificates.
System operation
Restricts the operations to initialize; reconfigure system;
encrypt; manage, display, and delete certificates; and execute
unverified certificates.
Output operation
Restricts internal switch operations, relay operations, and AO
channel operations (retransmission output, manual output).
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Key Lock
The GM10 (Data Acquisition Module) keys (START, STOP, USER1, USER2) can be locked.
Key
Lock
GM10
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-43
1.6 Functions
1.6.15
Fail, Status Output
CPU errors (FAIL) and status can be output as relay signals. You can select which status to output from event action. To output relay signals, you need a digital output module (GX90YD) or digital input/output module (GX90WD).
Device information
Device status
Recording
Math
User lock out
Memory/media error
Measurement error
Communication error Alarm
Description
Details
A relay signal is output when recording ------
starts.
A relay signal is output when
------
computation starts.
A relay signal is output when a user ------
lockout occurs.
A relay signal is output when an error Error in the internal memory.
occurs in the internal memory or
Error in the external storage
external storage medium.
media.
A relay signal is output when a
Error in the A/D converter.
measurement error occurs.
A burnout was detected.
This occurs when
thermocouple or RTD wires
are disconnected or when
general signals are outside the
specifications.
Module error was detected.
A relay signal is output when a
A communication error
communication error occurs.
occurred in the Modbus
master, Modbus client, WT
communication (/E2 option),
or SLMP communication (/E4
option).
A relay signal is output when an alarm ------
occurs. However, alarms that are set
not to display their occurrence are not
output to the relay.
For details on the fail function, see page 2-63 in section 2.7, "Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)". For details on the status output, see page 2-135 in section 2.20, "Configuring the Event Action Function".
1-44
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
1.6.16
Timer and Internal Switch Functions
Timers
Timers are used in event action and computation (/MT option). There are two types of timers: absolute and relative. You can set up to 12 timers for each type.
Absolute Timer The timer expires at the times determined by the reference time and the interval. The reference time is set on the hour (00 to 23).
Absolute timer
Set the timer
Ref. time
Time
AAAA
Timeout
A: Interval
Example: Reference time: 00:00 Interval: 10 minutes
The timer expires at 0 hour, 0 hour 10 min, 0 hour 20 min, . . . 23 hour 40 min, and 23 hour 50 min. For example, if the timer is set at 9 hour 36 min, the timer expires at 09 hour 40 min, 09 hour 50 min, 10 hour, and so on.
Relative Timer
The timer is started when the timer is set, and the timer expires every specified interval. In this mode, the timer stops when a power failure occurs.
Relative timer
Set the timer Reset timer
Time
B
B
B: Interval
Example: Interval: 15 The timer expires every 15 minutes.
Internal Switches
The GM has 100 internal switches (S001 to S100). You can use them as output destinations for calculation expressions and alarms.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-45
1.6 Functions
1.6.17
Log Scale Function (/LG option)
A logarithmic voltage that has been converted from a physical value is applied to the GM, and then the GM's Log scale (logarithmic scale) is used to display and record the physical value.
Input Type
The GM supports the following three types of input signals. Logarithmic Input
This is referred to as "Log input." It is an input in which voltages correspond to logarithmic values of physical values.
Pseudo Log Input This input supports pseudo logs.
A pseudo log signal is a voltage obtained by summing the one's digit of the voltage representing the exponent of the logarithmic data and the decimal digits of the voltage representing the mantissa.
Input That Is Linear on a Logarithmic Scale This is referred to as "Log linear input." Log linear input is input in which the voltage values correspond to the logarithmic values of physical values at each decade division (e.g., 1×102) and in which, within each decade, the voltage values correspond linearly to physical values.
Display
The trend display (Web browser) shows waveforms with the Log scale. Digital values are displayed as exponents (e.g., 1.2E+03).
Alarms Alarm Values
Alarm values can be set in the range corresponding to -5% to 105% of the span width on the LOG scale. The mantissa range is 1.00 to 9.99 or 1.0 to 9.9 (depending on the decimal place setting).
Alarm Types You can set the following alarm types. H: High limit, L: Low limit, T: Delay high limit, t: Delay low limit
Log Input (Nonlinear Log Input) Example
To support the nonlinear output of vacuum gauges, use the calibration correction function to correct the GM input values with linear approximation.
Conceptual diagram The pressure scale is mapped to an input scale that has been multiplied by a constant number to derive the output scale.
Input value [V] 10
9
8 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10-1
10 0
10 1
10 2
10 3
Pressure scale
Output scale
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Output value [V]
1-46
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.6.18
Communication and Network Functions
DHCP Function
IP parameters can be set automatically using DHCP.
IP DNS server Default gateway
Ethernet
1.6 Functions
1
2
3
DHCP server
File Transfer Function (FTP)
The GM has FTP server and FTP client file transfer functions. Server
You can use a PC to access the GM via FTP. You can perform operations such as retrieving directory and file lists from the external storage medium (SD card) of the GM and transferring and deleting files. In addition, you can also retrieve the directory or file list and transfer files in the internal memory.
PC
4 5
App Index
Files in internal memory or on the external storage medium Ethernet
GM FTP server
SD card
Client The following files that are created in the internal memory of the GM can be automatically transferred using FTP when they are created. File Type Event data Display data Report data Alarm summary data Manual sampled data
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-47
1.6 Functions
File Transfer Destination (FTP server)
You can specify two file transfer destinations (FTP servers): primary and secondary. If the primary server is down, the file is transferred to the secondary server. If the report template function is in use, report files in Excel format and report files in PDF format that are created in the external storage medium of the GM can be automatically transferred when they are created.
GM FTP client
Data file Destination (FTP server) Transfer log
to transfer
information
(FTP log)
Data file
FTP server
Primary
Ethernet Secondary
1.6.19
SNTP Function
Client
The GM time can be synchronized to the time on an SNTP server (time information server on the network). The GM can retrieve time information from a specified SNTP server at specified intervals.
SNTP server
Time query 12:34
Ethernet
GM SNTP client
1-48
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
Server
1
The GM can operate as an SNTP server.
When an SNTP client device on the network queries the GM for time information, the GM
sends the information.
GM SNTP server
2
GM Feature Overview
12:34
Ethernet
3
Time query
4
SNTP client device
1.6.20
Mail Transfer Function (SMTP)
Mails can be transferred when alarms occur, when reports are created, and so on. You can set up to two destinations (recipient 1, recipient 2). You can also set multiple e-mail addresses in a single recipient (space-delimited).
Mail Transmission Conditions
Classification Item
Explanation
Alarms
Report Periodic System
Alarm notification
An e-mail is transmitted when an alarm
occurs and when it is released.
Instantaneous data can be included.
The data that is included is the instantaneous
value at the time of the e-mail transmission.
Report notification
An e-mail is transmitted when a report is
created.
Scheduled notification An e-mail is transmitted at the specified time.
Instantaneous data can be included.
The data that is included is the instantaneous
value at the scheduled time.
Memory full notification An e-mail is transmitted when the free space
on the external storage medium or internal
memory is low.
Power failure notification An e-mail is transmitted when the GM is
powered on or recovers from a power failure.
System error notification An e-mail is transmitted when a system error
occurs.
Alarm detection channels You can set up to 50 channels from I/O channels, math channels, and communication channels.
Authentication The following authentication methods are supported.
Authentication SMTP Authentication POP before SMTP APOP
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-49
1.6 Functions
1.6.21
HTTP Function
You can access the GM from a Web browser and monitor measurement data in real time and configure and operate the GM. For details, see page 1-28 in section 1.6.5, "Display (Web browser)".
1.6.22
Communication Channel Function (/MC option)
When data from Modbus devices or PC is recorded on the GM, the acquired data is assigned to communication channels (GM10-1: C001 to C300, GM10-2: C001 to C500). Data acquired from power meters using WT communication (/E2 option) is also assigned to communication channels. Alarms can be set on communication channels.
Communication channel
GM10-1: C001 to C300 GM10-2: C001 to C500
Data
PC Modbus device
WT
Watchdog timer
Data may fail to be updated due to Modbus or other communication problems. The watchdog timer function replaces values with their preset values or last values and when values are not updated within the specified duration (timer). Data replacement occurs immediately when the timer expires, and the values are held until the next read cycle. The watchdog timer is also useful for detecting communication interruptions caused by communication errors.
Z Replace data
Read cycle
Timer
Communication channel data
A BC D E Communication data
E E FG Data not updated
H Preset value: Z
1-50
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.23
1.6 Functions
Modbus Function
The Modbus function is used by the GM and external Modbus devices to perform
communication and data reading and writing.
The GM can perform the following operations.
Interface
Protocol
Function
Ethernet
Modbus/TCP
Modbus server
Modbus client (/MC option)
RS-422/485
Modbus/RTU
Modbus slave
Modbus master (/MC option)
Modbus Server/Slave Function
The GM can operate as a Modbus server or slave. Modbus client or master devices can perform the following operations on the GM.
· Read I/O channel and math channel (/MT option) data · Read communication channel (/MC option) data · Write data to communication channels · Start and stop recording, write messages, and perform other operations · Load the recording start/stop condition, message strings, and other types of data · Limit the IP addresses that can connect to the GM Modbus server function.
Client devices can transmit commands to the GM to read data from and write data to the GM internal registers. By writing data to the GM internal registers, you can control the GM (such as start recording).
GM Modbus server
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Ethernet
GM internal register
Command
Input register
Read
3XXXXX
Hold register 4XXXXX
Read Write
Modbus client device
Client device
Read Read Write
Maximum Number of Client Connections When Operating as a Modbus Server
Type
GM10-1 GM10-2
Maximum Number of Client Connections
4 4
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-51
1.6 Functions
Modbus Client/Master Function
The GM can operate as a Modbus client or master. It can read from and write to the internal registers of Modbus server or slave devices. Read data can be assigned to communication channels (/MC) for processing.
Modbus server device
Ethernet
GM Modbus client
Server device internal register
Input register 3XXXXX
Hold register 4XXXXX
Command Read
Read Write
Number of Commands
Type GM10-1 GM10-2
Number of Commands
100 200 (Modbus client) 100 (Modbus master)
GM
Read Read Write
Maximum Number of Server Connections When Operating as a Modbus Client
Type
GM10-1 GM10-2
Maximum Number of Server Connections
16 32
Writable Data
Data Type I/O channel data Math channel data (/MT option) Communication channel data (/MC option)
1-52
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.24
1.6 Functions
SSL Communication Function
Communication that sends and receives information encrypted by the SSL protocol is possible. Public key encryption and certificate are used to encrypt communication and secure the connection.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) SSL is a function for encrypting data communication between devices on the Internet and other networks. It ensures safe data transmission such as by preventing spoofing by other devices and data eavesdropping.
Supported Servers
HTTP server and FTP server are supported. HTTP Server Function
A certificate is saved in the internal memory in advance. When a PC accesses the GM's Web server, the certificate is sent from the internal memory to the PC. Encrypted data is exchanged.
Encryption
Web browser
Certificate (internal memory)
PC Ethernet
FTP Server
A certificate is saved in the internal memory in advance. When a PC accesses the GM's FTP server, the certificate is sent to the PC. Encrypted measurement data is exchanged.
Encryption
Web browser
Certificate (internal memory)
PC Ethernet
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-53
1.6 Functions
Supported Clients
FTP client and SMTP client are supported. FTP Client A trusted certificate is saved in the internal memory in advance. When an access is made to an FTP server, it compares the certificate received from the server to the one in the internal memory. Encrypted data is sent to the server.
FTP server
Certificate
Encryption
Data
Trusted certificate
Ethernet
SMTP Client A trusted certificate is saved in the internal memory in advance. When an access is made to an SMTP server, it compares the certificate received from the server to the one in the internal memory. Encrypted e-mail is sent to the server.
SMTP server
Certificate
Encryption
Email
Ethernet
Trusted certificate
Trusted Certificate, Electronic Signature Function Trusted Certificate
Trusted certificates (up to 100KB total) can be saved in the internal memory. Certificates received from servers can be compared to the ones in the internal memory. Electronic Signature Function Electronic signatures can be added to report files created in PDF format using the PDF form creation function. Electronic signatures are applied when report files are created. Electronic Signature Certificate Electronic signature certificates that users create can be saved in the internal memory.
1-54
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.6 Functions
1.6.25 DARWIN Compatible Communication
1
A portion of the DARWIN's setting and control commands is supported.
Measured data, math data, and the like can be output in DARWIN format.
You can use an existing program that has been created for DARWIN to communicate with
the GM.
2
Ethernet and RS-422/485 are supported.
Existing control
program
3
Ethernet
Output
Command
4
STATUS DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
STATUS SUB UNIT
GM
DARWIN
Supported Commands
Instantaneous Data Output Commands
Command EF EL
EB
Description
Outputs measured data and math data in binary format. Outputs unit and decimal point information of a specified channel in ASCII format. Sets the byte output order.
ESC+T Command
If a "Esc+T" command is received, time-synchronized measured value and math value are
held in the local buffer until the next "Esc+T" command is received.
Command
Description
Esc+T
Prepares to output the data selected with the TS command.
Setting Commands
Command SR SN SA SC SZ PT SD SV AO
CM
Description
Sets the range. Sets the unit (scale unit). Sets an alarm. Sets the chart speed. Sets the zone recording. Sets the analog recording. Sets the date and time. Sets moving average. Assigns a reference channel to the retransmission output channel Sets math input data (option).
Commands Applicable to RS-422/485 Only
Command
Description
ESC+O ESC+C
Open Command (address a communication destination) Close Command (close the addressed state of a device)
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-55
1.6 Functions 1-56
Data Output Request Commands
Command Parameter
TS
0: Measured data
1: Setting parameters
2: Unit information
5: System configuration information
9: Setup mode setting parameter output
FM
0: Measured data (ASCII)
1: Math data (binary)
2: Math data (ASCII)
3: Math channel (binary)
LF
--
CF
--
VF
--
BO
--
ESC+S --
Description Selects the talker output data.
Selects the output format of measured/math data.
Sets the output channel for the setting parameter output, unit, and decimal place information. Sets the system configuration data format. Relay status output request. Sets the byte output order. Status output request
Control Execution Commands
Command Description
AR
Resets alarms.
IR
Resets timers.
EX
Starts, stops, resets, clears (option) math.
RS
System reconfiguration.
RC
Clears RAM (initializes operation mode setting parameters).
VD
Turns on and off relays externally.
CF
System configuration data output request (diagnosis)
PS
Starts or stops recording.
MS
Starts message printing.
IM
Sets the interrupt mask.
SM
Sets the auxiliary interrupt mask.
Handling of Commands for Functions Not Available on the GM
If a command or parameter for a function not available on the GM is received, a negative response (E1) is returned. However, if the command does not constitute a functional problem, a positive response (E0) is returned without performing any operation.
Commands That the GM Returns Positive Responses For
Command Description
Response
DS XE UD ESC+R ESC+L
Switches the setting mode.
Positive
Confirms setup setting parameters.
response
Sets the display mode of the top display.
Switch from Local Status to Remote Status.
Switch from Remote Status to Local Status.
Operation No operation
Commands That Do Not Affect the Operation (Negative response)
Command Description
Response
SX
Sets a math group.
Negative
SI
Sets a timer (option).
response
SQ
Sets a match time timer (option).
SL
Sets event/action (option).
SO
Sets a calculation expression (option).
SK
Sets a calculation constant (option).
AO
Assigns a transmission channel.
YO
Sets the time constant for transmission
output.
ET
Sets a timeout.
Operation No effect
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6.26
1.6 Functions
EtherNet/IP Function (/E1 option)
EtherNet/IP Overview
EtherNet/IP is a protocol that extends Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) to Ethernet. The use of Ethernet enables high-speed and periodic exchange of massive control and monitoring data between control devices placed at dispersed locations.
Devices that support EtherNet/IP are available from many vendors. Among them, Rockwell Automation's Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and Remote I/O of the Allen-Bradley brand are widely used. Yokogawa's GM is equipped with the EtherNet/IP server function, supports communications with these PLCs.
GM Functions
The GM provides the following functions:
· Participate in an EtherNet/IP network as an Adapter (Server).
· Communicate with new and old Allen-Bradley PLCs such as MicroLogix, CompactLogix,
ControlLogix, SLC 500, PLC-5, and PLC-2.
· Support both Explicit and I/O messages.
Explicit Message
Target PLC Command Name
Explicit Message
PLC-2
PLC2 Unprotected Read/Write
PLC-5
PLC5 Word Range Read/Write
PLC5 Typed Read/Write
SLC
SLC Typed Read/Write
· PLCs can access internal data of the GM. Data Input/Output channel data Computation channel1 data Communication channel2 data
Access
Read Read Read/write
1 /MT option 2 /MC option
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Scanner (Client)
EtherNet/IP
Adapter (Server)
PLC Read/write message
Ethernet EDS file
Remote I/O
GM
Configuration tool
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-57
1.6 Functions
1.6.27
WT Communication Function (/E2 option)
The WT communication function is used by the GM to acquire values measured and computed on WT power meters and analyzers made by Yokogawa Meters & Instruments Corporation. The values are acquired in digital form over Ethernet. The acquired data can be assigned to communication channels (/MC option) and displayed and recorded simultaneously with the measured temperature or other data of the GM.
Previously, the GM measured the D/A conversion output of power meters (measured values converted into analog signals). This was compromising the high-precision data that the power meters were measuring. The WT communication function maintains high precision by acquiring the digital values.
Communication channel
GM
Measured values,
computed values
Ethernet
WT300 Sever 1
WT500
POWER
FILE
IMAGE
STORE
MENU
STORE SET
ESC
SET
RESET
CAL
PAGE
PAGE
ELEMENT 12
3
RANGE VOLTAGE CURRENT
ELEMENT
ALL
AUTO
DISPLAY
NUMERIC WAVE
AUTO OTHERS
FORM CURSOR
SETUP INPUT INFO
LOCAL KEY LOCK
ITEM
INTEGRATOR START/ STOP RESET
MISC NULL
HOLD SINGLE SHIFT
· · · · ·
Sever 2
WT1800 Server n
Connectable Models and Options
Maker
Models
Option
Yokogawa Meters & WT310/WT330 /G5
Instruments
WT500
/G5
/DT
WT1800
/G5
/G6
/DT /MTR /AUX
Description
Harmonic measurement Harmonic measurement Delta computation Harmonic measurement Simultaneous dual harmonic measurement Delta computation Motor evaluation function Auxiliary sensor inputs
General Specifications
Item
Specifications
Maximum number of simultaneous
16
connections
Data acquisition interval
500ms/1s/2s/5s/10s/20s/30s
Number of acquisition data assignments 300 (assigned to communication channels)
Other Functions Exponential scaling Exponential scaling can be applied to data acquired from a WT. For example, if the measured value of the WT is 123.45 kW, the data can be scaled by 10-3 to derive data in unit of kW.
Watchdog timer The watchdog timer can be used to detect communication interruptions caused by communication errors. For details on the watchdog timer function, see page 1-50 in section 1.6.22, "Communication Channel Function (/MC option)".
Status output Notification can be sent through relay output when there is a WT communication error.
1-58
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.6 Functions
1.6.28 Bluetooth Function (/C8 option)
1
The Bluetooth function can be used to exchange setup data between a PC in which the
Hardware Configurator is installed and the GM.
Hardware Configurator
2
GM Feature Overview
Setup data
3
Bluetooth
4
1.6.29
Measurement/Setting Server Function
Dedicated commands can be used to configure the GM, acquire data, and so on.
Supported interfaces · Ethernet · USB · RS-422/485 (/C3) · Bluetooth (/C8)
1.6.30
Advanced security function (/AS option)
This function makes the GM comply with FDA 21 CFR Part 11 (Electronic Records; Electronic Signatures). It enables the GM to be used in pharmaceutical production and other various applications that require strict security, data management, and electronic signatures. For details, see the Data Acquisition System GM Advanced Security (/AS) User's Manual.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-59
1.6 Functions
1.6.31
Multi-batch Function (/BT option)
The multi-batch function allows you to record and save the measured data from multiple batches separately (per batch). You can also apply the multi-batch function to multiple consecutive processes.
Instrument 1
Batch group 1
Recording Start
Data file
Recording Stop
Instrument 2
Batch group 2
Data file
Recording Start
Recording Stop
· · ·
· · ·
Instrument 6
GM
Batch group 6
Data file
Recording Start
Recording Stop
· · ·
· · ·
Instrument 12
Batch group 12
Data file
Recording Start
Recording Stop
Item Number of multi batches Batch single operation Batch overview operation
Scan interval Data type Recording interval Data file Number of display groups
Batch single settings
Specifications GM10-1: 6 max., GM10-2: 12 max. Memory start/stop, math reset, message writing Computation start/stop, report start/stop, manual sampling, setup data save/load 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s (common to all batches) Display or event only Trigger mode not available for event data. Common to all batches Display or event data file created for each batch GM10-1: Up to 6 per batch (number of channels per group: 20) GM10-2: Up to 12 per batch (number of channels per group: 20) Group, trip line, file header, data file name, text field, batch number, lot number
For details, see the Multi-Batch Function (/BT) User's Manual.
1.6.32
Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option)
This function supports heat treatment application AMS2750/NADCAP and enables schedule management for periodically executing calibration correction configuration and the like. · It can be used to manage user-defined schedules for periodical execution. For details, see page 2-225 in section 2.32, "Using the Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option) (Release number 3 and later)".
1-60
IM 04L55B01-01EN
GM Feature Overview
1.6 Functions
1.6.33 OPC-UA Server Function (/E3 option)
1
Data acquired by the GM can be accessed through Ethernet communication from a host
system (OPC-UA client).
Equipped with an OPC-UA server function. GM measurement data can be retrieved directly
from a host system, such as SCADA and MES.
2
OPC-UA client
Write Read
Ethernet
Temperature Pressure Flow rate Voltage Others
I/O channel
Math channel
Communication channel
GM
Device information
OPC-UA server
For details, see the OPC-UA Server (/E3) User's Manual.
Production site
1.6.34
SLMP Communication (/E4 option)
The SLMP communication (/E4) of the GM is a function for reading and writing data by connecting to an SLMP* server through Ethernet. · The GM is an SLMP client. The maximum number of connectable servers is 16.
SLMP server
Internal data
3 4 5
App Index
Ehernet
Sever function
SLMP client
Client function
Data type conversion
GM
I/O channel
Math channel
Communication channel
For details, see the SLMP Communication (/E4) User's Manual.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-61
1.6 Functions
1.6.35
PID Control Function (PID), Program Operation Function (/PG Option)
PID control and program control become possible by installing the PID control module and program control function. Control Function
A single PID control module can perform PID control on up to two loops. It is equipped with two control inputs (PV inputs), two control outputs, eight digital inputs, and eight digital outputs. In addition to single loop control, cascade control and loop control with PV switching are possible. For the control output, you can select current output or voltage pulse for each loop. Remote Control and Monitoring Remote monitoring of sites is possible using the Web application. Control loops can be monitored and controlled from a control group screen, and adjustments can be made from a tuning screen. Program Control Function (/PG option) You can perform program control using the program patterns (up to 99 patterns) stored in the GM main unit.
For details, see the Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-31EN).
1-62
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
1
GM Feature Overview
7 segment LED×2
7 segment LED
2
Status display
START Key STOP key USER1 and USER2 keys
USB port
Higher digit
Status display
3
Lower digit
SD card slot
RS-422/485 Serial port (/C3 option)
SD card
SD card slot (with the cover open)
4
Ethernet port
5
1.7.1
7 segment LED
Displays the GM operation mode, system number, operating status, operation errors, and so on.
Operation mode indication
Operation mode Normal mode
7 segment LED Remarks System number display
Fixed IP address mode
System number display
A/D calibration mode
In A/D calibration mode
Update mode
In update mode
System number indication
Displays the instrument tag number. The instrument tag number display shows only the first two characters of the instrument tag number setting. If the first two characters of the instrument tag number setting are not between 0 and 9 or space, they are shown as 0 on the instrument tag number display. If the instrument tag number is not set or a value other than numerical value is set, nothing is displayed.
Instrument tag number setting If the character is between 0 and 9 (display example: 88) If the character is not between 0 and 9 or space (display example: Ab, 5C) If the characters includes a space (example: space and 2)
7 segment LED display example
For the instrument tag number setting, see page 2-187 in section 2.26.7, "Setting Instrument Tags".
Operating status
When the GM is turned on, firmware starting indication, operation preparation indication, and self-checking indication are displayed in order.
Firmware starting indication Operation preparation indication Self-checking indication
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-63
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
Operation error indication An error code is displayed with an alternating pattern: first the error type and the hundreds digit of the error number and then the lower two digits (the tens and ones digits) of the error number. Example of how E123 is indicated
For details on error codes, see page 5-21 in section 5.2.1, "Messages".
Key lock indication
Key lock enabled Key lock/release indication
Key lock released
The lower-digit dot is lit.
The dot is not lit.
Process running indication
If some process is in progress, such as the SD card being accessed or a calibration is in progress, the following indication is repeated. Never remove the SD card when it is being accessed. Process running indication
Module installation indication Module installation information is displayed when a module is installed. If a module is removed or malfunctions, an error is indicated. Module installation indication
Module number Unit number
Module installation information P0: When the same modules as those used during system
configuration are installed P1: When different modules than those used during system
configuration are installed
Unit confirmation indication When a GM confirmation operation is performed from a connected IP Address Configurator, the following indication is displayed.
Bluetooth authentication indication
When Bluetooth pairing is executed, a 6-digit authentication code is displayed. The code is repeatedly displayed until pairing is complete ("--" is displayed at the end).
1.7.2
1-64
Status Display
The GM operating status is displayed with LEDs.
Status RDY
LED color Description
Green
System normal indication
REC SD
Green Orange
Recording status SD card access status
FAIL MATH SER BT ALM
Red Green Orange Orange Red
System error indication Computation (/MT option) status RS-422/485 communication (/C3 option) status Bluetooth communication (/C8 option) status Alarm status
RDY
LED status On Off
Operation description Powered on and normal operating status Powered off or during shutdown
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
REC
LED status On Off Blinking
Operation description Recording in progress, or trigger-wait state in trigger mode Recording stopped Transitioning from recording in progress to recording stopped
SD
LED status On
Operation description Accessing SD card
FAIL
LED status On
Operation description MCU error
MATH
LED status On Off Blinking
Operation description Computing Computing stopped Transitioning from computing to computing stopped
SER
LED status On
Operation description RS-422/485 communication connected
BT
LED status On Blinking
Operation description Bluetooth communication connection standby state Bluetooth communication connected
ALM
LED status On Off Blinking
Operation description An alarm is occurring (see below) No alarms are occurring See below.
The ALM LED states depending on the alarm indication's hold or non-hold setting are illustrated below.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Alarm
ON OFF
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
Status display ALM LED
Display Nonhold
Display Hold
On Blinking Off
For details on the alarm indication's hold and non-hold settings, see page 2-182 in section 2.26.3, "Setting the Alarm Display Hold/Nonhold and Individual Alarm ACK Operation".
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-65
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
1.7.3
START, STOP, USER1, and USER2 Keys
START Key
The START key is used to start recording, start reporting,1 and start computing.1 This key
is valid in normal mode or fixed IP address mode.
1 When GM10 (/MT option) is in use
Key operation Short press
Recording status Stopped
Computation
Off On
Recording Off On
Hold down for at Stopped
Off
least 3 seconds
On
Computation status -- Stopped Computing -- Stopped Computing -- Stopped
Computing
Recording and computing operation No operation Start computing No change No operation Start computing No change Start recording Start recording, start reporting2 Start recording, start reporting2
Recording Off On
-- Stopped
No change No change
Computing 2 When the report function is enabled
No change
Additional operations can be assigned to the START key.
For details on the settings, see page 2-70 in section 2.9.1, "Setting Basic Computation
Operations (Error indications, operation at start, overflow handling, PSUM overflow*
handling)".
Key operation Operation that can be added Operation description
Short press
Off
Hold down for at Start computing1, 3
Start computing Start recording4 and computing
least 3 seconds Start computing + reset computation1, 3
simultaneously Start recording,4 reset computation, and start computing simultaneously
Synchronize with SNTP server Query an SNTP server for the time,
3 Only one can be added.
synchronize the clock, and then start recording4
4 If the report function is enabled, reporting also starts.
STOP key
The STOP key is used to stop recording, stop reporting,1 and stop computing.1 This key is
valid in normal mode or fixed IP address mode.
1 When GM10 (/MT option) is in use
The STOP key operation varies depending on the 7 segment LED display status.
7 segment LED display status System number indication
Operation description Stops recording or computation
If reporting is in progress, it is also
Operation error Error type [F]
stopped. No operation
Error type [E]
Clears the error display
1-66
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
Key operation Short press
Recording status Stopped
Computation
Off On
Recording Off On
Hold down for at Stopped
Off
least 3 seconds
On
Recording Off On
2 When reporting is in progress
Computation status -- Stopped Computing -- Stopped Computing -- Stopped Computing -- Stopped
Computing
Recording and computing operation No operation No operation Stop Computing No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Stop Recording Stops recording and reporting2 Stops recording and reporting2
Additional operations can be assigned to the STOP key.
For details on the settings, see page 2-70 in section 2.9.1, "Setting Basic Computation
Operations (Error indications, operation at start, overflow handling, PSUM overflow*
handling)".
Key operation Operation that can be added3 Operation description
Short press
Off
Hold down for at Stop Computing1
Stop Computing Stop recording3 and computing
least 3 seconds
simultaneously
3 If the report function is enabled, reporting also stops.
USER1 and USER2 Keys
You can assign functions to these keys as you choose. User function key refers a key that users can freely assign a function to.
For details on function assignment, see page 2-135 in section 2.20, "Configuring the Event Action Function".
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-67
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
1.7.4
1.7.5 1.7.6
Operation Mode
The GM10 has operation modes for performing various operations.
Operation mode
Description
Normal mode
Normal operation mode in which measurement, recording,
and so on are performed.
Fixed IP address mode
A mode in which the IP address is fixed (192.168.1.1) and
the Web port is fixed (80). Everything else is the same as
normal mode.
Fixed IP address
192.168.1.1
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0
Web port number
80
A/D calibration mode
A mode for performing A/D calibration. Only A/D calibration
can be performed in this mode. Measurement, recording,
and so on are not performed.
Update mode
A mode for updating the firmware of input/output modules
and expansion modules and updating the Web application.
Measurement, recording, and so on are not performed.
Switching to Normal Mode The GM is in normal mode when it is turned on.
Switching to Fixed IP Address Mode
1. While holding down USER1, turn the power on. The 7 segment LED displays "C0."
2. Press STOP. · To return to normal mode, turn the GM off and then back on (restart).
Switching to A/D Calibration Mode
This is performed from the Web application. For details on A/D calibration, see page 5-5 in section 5.1.3, "Performing A/D Calibration and Adjusting the Input Accuracy of an AI Module".
Switching to Update Mode This is performed from the Web application. For details on updating, see page 5-17 in section 5.1.8, "Updating the Firmware".
USB Port
A USB2.0 port (mini B type) is available. Using a dedicated protocol, you can operate and configure the GM10 and output data.
For details on setting the USB communication function, see page 2-176 in section 2.24, "Configuring the USB Communication Function".
RS-422/485 Serial Port (/C3 option)
This port is for RS-422/485 serial communication. For details on setting the serial communication function, see page 2-172 in section 2.23, "Configuring the Serial Communication Function (/C3 option)".
1.7.7
Ethernet Port
This port is for Ethernet communication. For details on setting the Ethernet communication function, see page 2-154 in section 2.22, "Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function".
1-68
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1.7.8
1.7 Names of the GM10 Parts and Functions
SD Card Slot
SD Card Handling Precautions
· SD cards are delicate and should be handled with caution. · Yokogawa provides no warranty for damage to, or loss of data recorded on the SD card,
regardless of the cause of such damage or loss. Please always make backup copies of your data. · Do not store or use the SD card in places with static electricity, near electrically charged objects, or where electrical noise is present. Doing so can result in electric shock or damage. · Do not disassemble or modify the SD card. Doing so can result in damage. · Do not physically shock, bend, or pinch the SD card. Doing so can lead to malfunction. · During reading/writing of data, do not turn OFF the power, apply vibration or shock, or pull out the card. Data can become corrupt or permanently lost. · Only use Yokogawa SD cards. Operation cannot be guaranteed with other brands of card. · When inserting the SD card into the instrument, make sure you orient the card correctly (face up or down) and that you insert it securely. If not inserted correctly, the card will not be recognized by the instrument. · Never touch the SD card with wet hands. Doing so can lead to electric shock or malfunction. · Never use the SD card if it is dusty or dirty. Doing so can lead to electric shock or malfunction. · The SD card comes formatted. SD cards must be formatted according to the standard established by the SD Association (https://www.sdcard.org/home). If using a PC to perform the formatting, use the SD card formatter software available from the above SD Association. The GM does not have a format function. · You can use SD/SDHC cards (up to 32 GB) on the GM.
Inserting an SD Card
Open the SD card slot cover on the GM10 front panel, and insert an SD card until a click is heard.
Removing the SD Card
Open the SD card slot cover on the GM10 front panel, and push the SD card until a click is heard. Check that the card is disengaged, and remove it from the slot.
Note
Before removing the SD card from the slot, make sure that the SD card is not being accessed.
GM Feature Overview
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
1-69
1.8
Quick Setting Function (Release number 3 (Version 3.02) and later)
In Quick setting, a minimal setup menu for data collection is displayed. Quick setting allows you to collect data quickly.
Display example of the quick settings tree
Display example of the standard settings tree
1-70
Switching between Standard Setting Tree and Quick Setting Tree
On the SMARTDAC+ Web Service tab, click Quick Setting or Quit Quick Setting to switch between the standard setting tree and quick setting tree.
Button
Function
The display is switched from the standard setting tree to quick setting tree. When switched to the quick setting tree, the button switches to Quit Quick Setting.
The display is switched from the quick setting tree to standard setting tree. When switched to the standard setting tree, the button switches to Quick Setting.
· If the Web application is closed when the quick setting tree is displayed, the next time a connection is established, the quick setting tree will be displayed.
Note
In the following situations, quick settings are invalid (the Switch Quick Setting and Quit Quick Setting buttons are hidden). · When the advanced security function (/AS option) is On · If the communication of the security function is set to Login and the user has Setting operation
of User property set to Lock
Displaying the Quick Setting Tree
The quick setting tree only displays the range and alarm of I/O channels, recording basic settings, and trend interval.
Display Item Input/Output channel > Range Input channel > Alarm Trend interval
Recording basic settings Dual interval settings
Description Configure settings related to the range of each Input/Output channel.
Configure settings related to the alarm of each input channel. Set the trend interval. This does not appear when the file type is set to Event (default value). Set the event data recording interval and the like. Configure settings related to recording for each scan group. * Appears when the measurement mode is Dual interval
For details on the settings, see chapter 2, "Configuring the GM" on page 2-1. In this manual, the operation path (the order in which displays are opened) is described for Standard setting (tree).
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Chapter2 Configuring the GM
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
1
2.1.1
This chapter explains how to configure the GM using a browser. For details how to configure the GM using communication commands, see the Communication Interface User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-17EN).
Connecting to a Network
Configuring the GM for Network Connection To connect the GM to Ethernet, you need to configure the GM in accordance with the network environment.
For the configuration procedure, see page 2-154 in section 2.22, "Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function".
Connecting an Ethernet Cable
Do not connect an Ethernet cable whose plug does not comply with FCC specifications. Doing so may damage the GM.
Connect an Ethernet cable from your network to the Ethernet port on the GM rear panel.
GM10
GM90PS
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App
Index
Ethernet port
Note
Do not connect an Ethernet cable from the network to the port of the expansion module (GX90EX). The GX90EX port is used to directly connect between the GX90EX of the main unit to that of a sub unit or between the GX90EXs of two sub units.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-1
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
2.1.2
Setting the IP Address (IP Address Configurator)
For details on how to install and configure the IP Address Configurator, see the SMARTDAC+ STANDARD IP Address Configurator User's Manual (IM 04L61B01-03EN).
Procedure
2
4
3 7
5
6
1 Start the IP Address Configurator. The Address Setting screen in displayed.
2 Click the Search button in the List display screen. The GMs residing in the same segment are displayed.
3 Click the No. of the GM whose address you want to change. The information of the selected GM is shown in blue characters.
4 Click Network Config. in the Address setting screen. This enables changes to the settings.
5 Enter settings for each item. 6 Click Apply to change the settings of the GM, Cancel to exit without saving changes,
or Release to clear the IP address from the DHCP server.
7 Clicking here will display "--CALL--" on the 7 segment LED of the GM10.
Note
When the GM (firmware version R2.03.01 or later) is in either of the following conditions, the IP address cannot be changed. · In security settings, Communication is set to Login. · The advanced security function (/AS option) is set to On, and the GM is recording.
2-2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1.3
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Web Application Overview
You can do the following on the Web application. · Change settings · Control the GM · Monitor data
There is no need to install the Web application. Specify the GM IP address on the Web browser to display the application screen. If a GM is accessed from multiple browsers simultaneously, the Web application performance may degrade.
PC System Requirements
The system requirements are shown below. Hardware
Item CPU
Internal memory Hard disk Printer Mouse Display
Communication ports
Specifications
Windows 7 (32 bit edition)
Windows 7 (64 bit edition) Windows 8.1
Intel Pentium 4, 3GHz or faster x64 or x86 processor Intel Pentium 4, 3GHz or faster x64 processor
Windows 10
2 GB or more 100 MB or more free space, NTFS recommended Printer compatible with the OS Mouse compatible with the OS A video card compatible with the OS and a display that has a resolution of 1024×768 or higher, and that can show 65,536 colors (16-bit, high color) or more. Ethernet port compatible with the OS and TCP/IP protocol
OS Windows 7
Windows 8.1
Windows 10
Home Premium SP1 (32- or 64-bit edition) Professional SP1 (32- or 64-bit edition) Update (32- or 64-bit edition) Pro Update (32- or 64-bit edition) Home (32- or 64-bit edition) Pro (32- or 64-bit edition)
Web browser Internet Explorer 11 or Google Chrome
Depending on the CPU, Application behavior may be delayed while displaying trend in Internet Explorer 11. In that case, using Google Chrome may improve it.
GM Configuration
You can connect to the Web application when the GM's HTTP server function is on. For the procedure, see page 2-168 in section 2.22.9, "Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)".
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-3
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
2.1.4
Starting and Closing the Web Application
Starting the Web Application
If a message appears in the information bar or dialog box when you start or while you are using the Web application, see the note on the next page.
Procedure
1 2
Start the Web browser.
In the Address box, enter "http://" followed by the GM IP address. If DNS is available, you can specify the host name in place of the IP address.
Example 1:When the IP address is "127.1.1.1," enter the following in the Address box. http://127.1.1.1
Example 2:If the HTTP server port has been changed from its default value (80) to "1024," enter a colon after the IP address and then the port number. http://127.1.1.1:1024
Example 3: If the HTTP server encryption is set to on https://127.1.1.1
Example 4:If the HTTP server encryption is set to on and the port is changed from the default value of 443 to 1024 https://127.1.1.1:1024
The Web application starts, and the screen appears. If the login function is enabled, a user authentication dialog box appears. Proceed to step 3.
3 Enter the correct user name and password, and click OK.
The Web application starts, and the screen appears.
Start Screen The Web application starts with the default display conditions or the display conditions that were in use when the application was closed the previous time (see "Closing the Web Application").
2-4
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Note
1
· If the GM login function is changed while the Web application is in use, you may need to reload
the page or restart the browser. Follow the instructions in the message.
· If you cannot connect from Internet Explorer 11 to a GM whose login function is in use, disable
the Enhanced Protection Mode of Internet Explorer.
Click the Tools button (gear icon) > Internet options > Advanced tab, and clear the Enable
2
Enhanced Protection Mode check box. Restart the PC, and then start the Web application.
Configuring the GM
· In some cases, immediately after you try to start the Web application, Internet Explorer displays
a message "A problem with this webpage caused Internet Explorer to close and reopen the
tab." Then it reloads the webpage several times, and finally displays "We were unable to return
you to your webpage," preventing the Web application from starting. If this happens, delete the temporary Internet files of Internet Explorer, and try connecting again.
3
Click the tool button (gear icon), Internet Options, the General tab, and then Delete under
Browsing history. Select the Temporary Internet files and website files check box, and click
Delete. Then, close the Web browser, restart it, and then start the Web application.
· During operation, a message generated by the Web application or the GM may appear. For details on these messages, see page 5-21 in section 5.2.1, "Messages".
4
Icon
[Title]
[Code]
[Message]
OK
5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-5
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
· Messages may appear in the information bar or dialog box. The possible messages and
how to handle them are provided below.
Message
Corrective Action
To help protect your security, Internet Explorer stopped this site from Click the information bar,
installing an ActiveX control on your computer. Click here for options... and select Install ActiveX
Control.
Internet Explorer - Security Warning
Click Internet Options >
Windows has blocked this software because it can't verify the publisher. Security > Internet/Local
Name: liked file name (see the table below)
intranet > Custom Level
Your security settings do not allow Web sites to use ActiveX controls > ActiveX controls and
installed on your computer. This page may not display correctly. Click plug-ins, and then select
here for options...
the Prompt check boxes
An add-on for this website failed to run. Check the security settings in for Download signed
Internet Options for potential conflicts.
ActiveX controls and
Download unsigned
ActiveX controls.
·Closing the Web Application
When close the browser, the Web application also closes. Display Condition Storage and the Application of the Display Conditions the Next Time the Application Starts
When the Web application closes, the display conditions are saved to the GM. If the login function is enabled, the display conditions that are in use when the Web application is closed are saved for each user. The next time the Web application starts, it will apply the display conditions saved in the GM. If the GM configuration has been changed and it conflicts with the saved display conditions, the default display conditions will be used.
2-6
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Screen
1
The screen configuration is shown below.
Note
Set the browser's zoom (on the View menu, click Zoom) to 100%. Otherwise, the layout may appear crooked.
2
Menu
3
Configuring the GM
4
5
App
Index
Split bar Content selection tree
Content area
Name
Description
Menu bar
Consists of three tabs: SMARTDAC+ Web Service, Operation,
and Option.
You can show or hide the menu (button) area by double-clicking the
tab.
Content selection tree Used to select the contents to display in the content area. There are
three tabs: Data, Config, and Calib.
Content area
Area for displaying content.
Split bar
Drag the split bar to change the panel width of the content selection
tree and content area. While you drag the split bar, the content area
displays an alternate screen (see the note below). Click the show/
hide button (indicated with a red circle) to show or hide the content
selection tree.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-7
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
15
Status Indications
The menu bar shows the GM status.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 14
13 15
2
3
4
16 17 18 19
Number Description
1
Communication status. Turns on in yellow when communication with the GM is normal. If
you move the mouse pointer over the icon and hold it there for about 1 second, "Normal"
or "Error" will appear in a pop-up window. If communication with the GM is disconnected
or recovers, a bubble message indicating the condition will appear for a few seconds.
2
Recording status. Turns on in green when recording.
3
Indicates the computation status of computation channels.
Status Off Blinking yellow Blue Alternating blue
and yellow
Description Computation stopped. Computation stopped with error. Computing. Computing with error.
4
Alarm status.
Status Off Red Blinking green Blinking red
Description No alarms. All alarms acknowledged. Alarms present. All alarms acknowledged. No alarms. Unacknowledged alarms present. Alarms present. Unacknowledged alarms present.
5
Login user name.
6
GM date and time.
7
Batch name. Displayed when the batch function is in use. If the information does not fit
in the area, the information will scroll at certain intervals.
8
Internal memory information.
42%
Capacity remaining
Capacity used
Capacity remaining
Total capacity
9
Recording progress status.
10
Icon
Description
D
Display data file
E
Event data file (when the measurement mode is set to Normal or High
speed)
E1, E2
Event data file of measurement groups 1 and 2 (when the
measurement mode is set to Dual interval)
00:12:56
Time until the file is generated
Time already Time
recorded
remaining
Time needed to generate file
If pre-trigger is specified for event data recording, the GM will start recording pre-trigger data when recording is started and the GM enters the trigger-wait state. "TRIG" appears in the bar graph.
2-8
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Number Description
11
SD card capacity information.
42%
Capacity remaining
Capacity used Capacity remaining
Total capacity
12
Mail transmission function. Displayed when the mail transmission function is in
use.
13
This icon appears when recording is started. It disappears when recording is
stopped.
14
This icon appears when computation is started. It disappears when computation
is stopped.
When a yellow icon is blinking: Computation data dropout occurred.
15
This icon appears when any alarm is occurring.
It blinks if some alarms have not been acknowledged.
It blinks when all alarms have been cleared, but some alarms have not
been acknowledged.
16
Error information. Displayed when an error occurs. Click the icon to clear it.
17
Data save information. Appears when the internal memory data is being saved to
the external storage medium. Clicking the icon displays a data save cancel dialog
box.
18
User lock out occurring. Appears when there is a locked out user.
19
Program running (/PG option)
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-9
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
2.1.5
Setup Guide
This section describes the GM setup procedure.
GM Setup Procedure
Set the measurement mode.
Make the GM recognize the modules. (Reconfiguring the GM.)
Assign channel displays.
Assign automatically
Assign manually
Initialize
Set the date and time.*
Set the measurement mode according to the measurement conditions. See page 2-207 in section 2.29.3, "Setting the Measurement Mode".
Installed modules are identified, and the system is reconfigured. See page 2-208 in section 2.29.4, "Reconfiguring the GM".
To assign channel displays (display group settings) automatically, initialize. To assign them manually, do it in "Configure settings."
When the measurement mode is set to Normal or High speed, see page 2-203 in section 2.29.1, "Initializing the Settings and the Internal Memory". When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval, see page 2-206 in section 2.29.2, "Initializing Display Groups or Recording Channels Separately".
* If you need to set the time zone or Daylight Saving Time (DST) or both, do so before setting the date and time. See page 2-182 in section 2.26.4, "Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time". For date and time settings, see page 2-24 in section 2.2, "Setting the Date and Time".
Configure settings.
Configure the GM settings. See the description of the settings explained in this chapter.
2-10
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1.6
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Change settings
1
Follow the procedure below to change the GM settings.
Note
The items and selectable values that appear in the setup screen vary depending on the hardware system configuration. If the items that you want to configure do not appear, check the option and
2
module configuration on the system information monitor.
Configuring the GM
Notes on Changing Settings When Settings Can Be Changed
· If you are logged in using an account that prohibits setting changes, you will not be able to change the settings.
Limitations on Modifying Settings · When not using the login function
There are no limitations on modifying settings. · When using the login function
If you are connected to the GM with an Admin account, there are no limitations on modifying settings. If you are connected to the GM with a User account, you cannot specify the security settings (Security settings will not appear in the Config tab).
Limitations on Changing the Login Password If you click the Config tab > Security settings > User settings, you will not be able to set the user login password. You can only initialize the password. The default password is "default." To change the user password, log in using the user's account, click Password change on the Option tab, and change it.
Applying Setting Changes On each setup screen, send the changed settings to the GM to apply them.
Note
When settings are changed, the message "Restart is required to reflect this changes. Continue?" may appear. Click OK, and the GM will automatically restart.
3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-11
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Setup Change Procedure
1 Click the Config. tab. The setup item tree appears.
2 Click the item you want to change. The GM settings are loaded and displayed in the content area. Click Reload to load and update the displayed settings.
2-12
3 Edit the settings.
For the procedure to set each item, see the reference table below.
Setup Item
Refer To
AI channel
sec. 2.3
DI channel
sec. 2.4
Pulse input channel
sec. 2.5
AO channel
sec. 2.6
DO channel
sec. 2.7
PID control channel (Only the items are listed with references to the sec. 2.8
manual (document name and number).)
Math channel
sec. 2.9
Logic math
sec. 2.10
Display settings
sec. 2.11
Measurement settings
sec. 2.12
Recording settings
sec. 2.13
Dual interval settings
sec. 2.14
Data save settings
sec. 2.15
Batch settings
sec. 2.16
Report settings
sec. 2.17
Timer settings
sec. 2.19
Event action
sec. 2.20
Communication channel settings
sec. 2.21
Communication (Ethernet) settings
sec. 2.22
Communication (serial) settings
sec. 2.23
Communication (USB) settings
sec. 2.24
Communication (Bluetooth) settings
sec. 2.25
System settings
sec. 2.26
Security settings
sec. 2.27
4 Click Update configuration. The GM settings are changed.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Note
· If you edit the settings and switch to a different setting screen before applying the settings, the edited settings will be discarded.
· If you edit the settings and click Reload before applying the settings, the edited settings will be discarded.
Editing Settings
This section gives examples of setup editing operations.
Input Controls and Dialog Boxes
The following table shows the input controls and dialog boxes that are used to edit settings on the Web application.
Control Type Text box
Display Example
Operation Example Operation example 1
Setup Procedure Enter text and numbers.
Check box
Operation Click to select the check box. A selected example 2 check box indicate "On" or "enabled."
List
Operation Click the arrow and select from the list
example 1 that appears.
Option button
Click to select.
Dialog Box Type Channel selection Color selection Multiple channel selection
Element selection Calibration correction Calculation expression input
Operation Example Operation example 1
Operation example 2
Operation example 3
Operation example 4
Operation example 5 Operation example 6
Setup Procedure
When configuring a specific channel, such as an I/O channel, click a channel number button to specify the channel. From the color selection palette in the dialog box, click a color. You can also enter RGB values to specify a color freely. When specifying multiple channels, such as when configuring a display group, click channel number buttons to add channels as character strings to the channel configuration area of the dialog box. When specifying an internal switch or other item, click the displayed switch number string. (This is similar to channel selection.) Edit calibration correction values. Enter the values directly. A dialog box for entering calculation expressions. Set calculation expressions by selecting operators and channels from the lists that appear.
In the following pages, representative operation examples in which the dialog boxes above appear will be given.
Examples of Other Editing Operations See also the following examples of editing operations.
Operation example 7 Selecting a range Operation example 8 Copying and pasting Operation example 9 Range selection and copying and pasting in table type screens Operation example 10 Editing table type screens using tool buttons Operation example 11 Selecting and unselecting check boxes at once Operation example 12 Copying and pasting check boxes at once Operation example 13 Jumping to a specific item in table type screens
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-13
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Operation Example 1 The DI channel settings screen is shown below.
Click here () to show the available values.
Channel selection dialog box
Click to display the channel selection dialog box dialog box (figure below). Click to enter the span values.
The channel that you click is reflected in the setup screen, and the dialog box closes.
Operation Example 2 The DI channel settings screen is shown below.
Click to select the check box.
Show or hide by channel type (when multiple channel types are available). To not change or set click Cancel to return.
Click to enter a character string.
Click to open the display color dialog box (figure below).
Display color dialog box To create a color, click the text boxes and enter values.
Click a color to select it.
2-14
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Operation Example 3
1
This example shows how to assign channels to group 1 on the screen that appears when you click Display settings and then Group settings.
2
Configuring the GM
Select the check box.
Click to open the group settings dialog box (figure below).
Group settings dialog box
3
Group configuration channels
You can easily change the display order of channels.
Select a channel, and drag the channel to the appropriate position.
4
Select the channel check boxes to add the channels to the group.
Selected channels
Show or hide by channel type.
Click OK to apply the settings to the configuration screen.
Note
If the maximum number of selectable channels is reached, you will no longer be able to select additional channels.
Operation Example 4
This example shows how to set the alarm output destination on the DI channel settings screen.
5
App Index
Select the check box.
Alarm level 1 Output No. dialog box
Click to open the Alarm level 1 Output No. dialog box (figure below).
The internal switch number that you click is reflected in the setup screen and the dialog box closes.
To not change or set, click Cancel to return.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-15
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Operation Example 5
This example shows how to edit calibration correction on the AI channel settings screen.
Select the calibration
Select the number of set points.
correction mode.
Click to open the calibration correction dialog box (figure below). Calibration correction dialog box
Calibration correction points
Edit set points.
Click OK to save the edited results.
For the procedure to set calibration correction, see page 2-44 in section 2.3.4, "Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, Correction factor* (release number 3 and later))".
Operation Example 6 This is an example of entering a calculation expression in a calculation expression input dialog box in the Calculation expression setup screen of Math channel settings.
2-16
Select an On/Off check box and click Calculation expression to open a dialog box for entering an expression.
Click the button for the operator you want to insert in the calculation expression. The operator appears in the calculation expression edit box.
Calculation expression edit box
Select the operator type from the list box or tabs to display operator buttons.
Click OK to close the dialog box. The entered expression appears in Calculation expression in the setup window.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Moving the cursor over the Calculation expression column on the setup screen shows the
1
entire expression in a pop-up. This is useful when you want to view a long expression that
does not fit in the column.
2
Configuring the GM
When you click Update Config to send the settings to the GM, if the calculation expression appears in red, the expression is invalid. Refer to the pop-up that appears showing an error message.
Range Selection and Copying and Pasting
You can select a range of settings and edit them collectively or copy and paste them. This section explains how to select a range of settings and how to use the Copy, Paste, and Tool buttons.
Note
When you attempt to copy and paste values, Internet Explorer may show the message "Do you want to allow this webpage to access your clipboard?" Click Allow access to enable the copy and paste feature of the Web application. If you click Don't allow, you will not be able to use the copy and paste feature.
3 4 5
App
Operation Example 7 Selecting a range The screen that appears when you select Display settings and then Trend settings will be used as an example to explain the procedure.
1 Click a line name.
Index
Click the line name.
The line is selected.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-17
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
2 Drag the cursor and release the mouse at the last line you want to select.
Drag across line titles to select multiple lines.
Multiple lines are selected.
Note
When selecting a range, you cannot select multiple nonconsecutive lines one by one. You cannot select an individual column.
Operation Example 8 Copying and Pasting You can edit copied information in Excel or text editor and paste it back in the Web application. Below is an example of how to edit information in Excel.
1 Select the copy source. 2 Click Copy, which is in the lower right of the screen. You can also press Ctrl+C on the
keyboard. When the range is copied to the Clipboard, the color of the range changes as shown below.
2-18
3 Paste the contents of the Clipboard to an Excel spreadsheet. The figure below shows an example in which the contents are copied to cell A1 of an Excel spreadsheet. If the pasted contents do not appear correctly, check the format of the cell that you are pasting to.
4 Edit the settings in Excel.
Edit the values in the B column in Excel.
5 Copy the edit results from the Excel spreadsheet. Copy not just the values but also the item names in row A.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
6 Select the paste destination. Make the paste range the same as the range of the
1
copied data (the number of lines).
2
Configuring the GM
7 Click Paste, which is located in the lower right of the window. You can also press
3
Ctrl+V on the keyboard.
4
The edit results from the Excel spreadsheet is pasted to the configuration window.
Note
· Depending on the format of the Excel cells that you are pasting to, the values may change when you paste the contents from the Clipboard. For example, if the format is set to Number, "0001" will change to "1". You can prevent pasted values from being automatically corrected by setting Number to Text in the Format Cells dialog box of the Excel sheet that you want to paste to.
· If the values cannot be pasted as they are to the Excel sheet even with the settings above, we recommend that you use a text editor for copying and pasting.
· If the values that you edit with Excel or text editor are outside the setting range, when you paste the data, the values will be corrected in the same way as when you enter values directly.
Operation Example 9 Range Selection and Copying and Pasting in Table Type Screens The AI channel settings screen will be used as an example to explain the procedure. In table type screens, you can also edit copied information in Excel or text editor and paste it back in the Web application (see note on page 2-19).
1 Select a range of channels as shown below.
5
App Index
Click the name of the line to select the entire line. Drag down to select multiple lines.
2 Copy the channel information (lines).
Press Ctrl+C, or click Copy to copy the cells.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-19
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
3 Paste to different channels.
Select the cells to paste to. Press Ctrl+V, or click Paste to paste to the cells.
Note
In Chrome, you cannot use the Paste button. To paste, press Ctrl + V on the keyboard, or select Paste from the browser's menu.
Operation Example 10
Editing Table Type Screens Using Tool Buttons
On table type windows, you can use the tool buttons that are shown at the bottom of each table. The available types of tool buttons are "Initialize", "Paste to all lines", "Increment", "Minimum", "Maximum", and "Change all". You can use them to edit items collectively. In the example below, the Paste to all tool button is used to set the Type of all selected channels in the AI channel setting screen.
1 Select the line that contains the data you want to copy. CH0001 is selected.
Data to copy
Select the line to copy from.
Paste destination
2 Drag the cursor to the last line that you want to assign the same type. Channels up to CH0004 are selected.
2-20
Drag until the last line you want to paste the same data to.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3 Click Past to all on the tool bar.
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
1
2
Configuring the GM
3
4
Click the "Paste to all" tool button.
The type of CH0002 to CH0004 is set to Volt.
Note
· When you use the tool button to paste settings to change the settings, the values are automatically corrected in the same way as when you enter values directly.
· Tool buttons are unavailable when no cells are selected (except for the "Change all" button).
The table below shows the different tool button types and their functions.
Button
Icon Function
Paste to all
Pastes the value in the first selected line to all other lines.
Increment Initialize
· For numeric input Paste numbers to all selected lines by auto-incrementing the least significant digit, starting with the number in the first selected line.
· For character string input Paste the character string of the first line appended with autoincremented sequence numbers to all selected lines. If the character string of the first selected line ends with a number, this number will be used as the first sequence number. If the character string of the first selected line ends with a character, the sequence number 1 is appended to the character string of the first selected line.
Initializes the values of the selected lines to their defaults.
Minimize
Sets the values of the selected lines to their minimum values.
Maximize
Sets the values of the selected lines to their maximum values.
Change all
· For check boxes Switches the check box values of the selected lines at once. If all the check boxes of the selected lines are selected, they are cleared. If they are cleared, they are selected.
· For line name (left most) columns Selects or unselects all lines in the table.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-21
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application Operation Example 11 Selecting and Unselecting Check Boxes at Once The example below shows the screen that appears when you select Display settings Group settings - Channel set. Selecting a Range of Check Boxes
Click a label in a cell to select a single cell.
Drag to select cells in a rectangular area.
Selection can be made across different blocks.
Selecting or Unselecting at Once Follow the procedure below to select or unselect check boxes at once.
Click On/Off, or hold down Ctrl and click a check box to select or unselect all the check boxes in the selected area at once.
All the check boxes in the selected range are selected. Each time you click On/Off, the check boxes in the selected range become selected or unselected at once. Hold down Ctrl and click a check box that is selected to unselect all check boxes in the selected range. Hold down Ctrl and click a check box that is not selected to select all check boxes in the selected range.
2-22
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.1 Preparing to Use the Web Application
Operation Example 12
1
Copying and Pasting Check Boxes at Once
Follow the procedure below to paste the copy source. In check box type screens, you can
also edit copied information in Excel or text editor and paste it back in the Web application. In Excel, a selected check box is indicated as On; an unselected check box is indicated as
2
Off.
3
Configuring the GM
Select the cells to copy from, and press Ctrl+C to copy.
4
Select the cell to paste to and drag to select a range.
5
App
Press Ctrl+V to paste.
Note
If the cells whose check box is selected (on) reaches the maximum selectable number, cells whose check boxes are unselected become unavailable, and you will not be able to paste to them. You cannot paste to cells that do not have check boxes.
Index
Operation Example 13 Jumping to a Specific Item in Table Type Screens In a table type setup screen (e.g., AI channel settings), not all the setup items fit on the screen. In such a case, you can jump to a specific item you want to set.
1 Click the icon in the upper right of the screen. A list box for selecting the jump destination appears.
2 Enter the target channel, and click the item that you want to set. The specified setup item is displayed. Icon Channel number Setup item
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Click the icon to clear the list box.
2-23
2.2 Setting the Date and Time
Path
Set the date and time.
Note
If you need to set the time zone or DST (Daylight Saving Time) or both, do so before setting the date and time. · For details on the time zone and DST (Daylight Saving Time), page 2-182 in section 2.26.4,
"Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time".
Web application: Operation tab > Date/Time setting
Description
Setup Item Date Time
Selectable Range or Options 2001 to 2035 --
Date/time Settings In the Date/Time settings dialog box, type the date and time.
Default Value -- --
2-24
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3
2.3.1
Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Set the AI channels' and AI (mA) channels' input range, alarm, display, and calibration correction. Set the necessary setup items in order from the top.
Setting the Range
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AI channel settings* > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Range
Hardware configurator: AI channel settings* > Channel range (display example: 00010010) > Range
* AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings
Description
Range
Setup Item Type
Range4 Span Lower Span Upper Calculation Reference channel2
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Skip, Volt4/GS (general signal)4/TC
Volt 6
(thermocouple)4/RTD (resistance temperature detector)1, 4/DI (contact, voltage level)4, current
(0 to 20 mA)3, GS (4 to 20 mA) (general signal)3,
resistance7
See "Range Details."
See "Range
Details."
Numeric value (depends on the range)
-2.0000 6
Numeric value (depends on the range)
2.0000 6
Off, Delta, Linear scaling, Square root, log
Off 6
input5, pseudo-log input5, linear-log input5
Number (I/O channel number)
--
1 Cannot be specified for channels on the electromagnetic relay type, low withstand voltage relay type or high withstand voltage type.
2 You can set this when Calculation is set to Delta. 3 Appears for AI (mA) channels. 4 Does not appear for AI (mA) channels. 5 Appears on models with the log scale (/LG) option when the range type is Volt. 6 The default values of AI (mA) channels are GS for Type, 4.000 for Span Lower, 20.000 for Span
Upper, and Linear scaling for Calculation. The default values of the 4-wire RTD are -200.0 for span lower and 850.0 for span upper. 7 You can set this for 4-wire RTD/resistor type channels.
Type
Set the input signal type.
Options
Description
Skip
Not measured.
Volt, GS, TC, RTD, DI, Input type. Represents DC voltage, GS (0.4-2V, 1-5V inputs), thermocouple,
current (0 to 20 mA),
RTD, ON/OFF input, current (0 to 20 mA), GS (4 to 20 mA general signal),
GS (4-20mA), resistance and resistance, respectively.
Note
For electromagnetic relay type modules, set the range type to Skip for channels that will not be used.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-25
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Range
Set the input type range. Range Details
Type
Range
Volt (DC voltage)
20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 1 V 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V 100 V
DI
LVL (level)
DI (contact)
GS
0.4-2V
(general signal) 1-5V
DC current
--
(0 to 20 mA)
GS
--
(4 to 20 mA)
TC
R
(thermocouple) S
B
K
K-H
E
J
T
N
W
L
U
WRe3-25
PLATINEL
PR20-40
KpvsAu7Fe
NiNiMo
WWRe26
N14
XK
Selectable Range
20.000 mV to 20.000 mV 60.00 mV to 60.00 mV
200.00 mV to 200.00 mV 1.0000 V to 1.0000 V 2.0000 V to 2.0000 V 6.000 V to 6.000 V 20.000 V to 20.000 V 50.00 V to 50.00 V 100.00 V to 100.00 V
On (1)/off (0) (voltage)
On (1)/off (0) (contact) 0.3200 V to 2.0800 V 0.800 V to 5.200 V 0.000 mA to 20.000 mA
3.200 mA to 20.800 mA
0.0°C to 1760.0°C 0.0°C to 1760.0°C 0.0°C to 1820.0°C 270.0°C to 1370.0°C 200.0°C to 500.0°C 270.0°C to 800.0°C 200.0°C to 1100.0°C 270.0°C to 400.0°C 270.0°C to 1300.0°C 0.0°C to 2315.0°C 200.0°C to 900.0°C 200.0°C to 400.0°C 0.0°C to 2320.0°C 0.0°C to 1395.0°C 0.0°C to 1900.0°C 0.0K to 300.0K 0.0°C to 1310.0°C 0.0°C to 2320.0°C 0.0°C to 1300.0°C 200.0°C to 600.0°C
Default Notes Value 2 V
LVL
1-5V -- -- K
For the high-speed universal type On: 2.5 V or higher Off: 2.3 V or less
Type R Type S Type B Type K Type K (high precision) Type E Type J Type T Type N Type W Type L Type U Type WRe (WRe3-25)
Kp vs Au7Fe
W/WRe26 Type N(AWG14) XK GOST
Continued on next page
2-26
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Type RTD (resistance temperature detector)
Resistance
Range
Pt100 Pt100-H JPt100 JPt100-H Cu10GE Cu10LN Cu10WEED Cu10BAILEY Cu10a392 Cu10a393 Cu25 Cu53 Cu100 J263B Ni100SAMA Ni100DIN Ni120 Pt25 Pt50 Pt200WEED Cu10G Cu50G Cu100G Pt46G Pt100G Pt500 Pt1000 20 200 2000
Selectable Range
200.0°C to 850.0°C 150.00°C to 150.00°C
200.0°C to 550.0°C 150.00°C to 150.00°C
200.0°C to 300.0°C 200.0°C to 300.0°C 200.0°C to 300.0°C 200.0°C to 300.0°C 200.0°C to 300.0°C 200.0°C to 300.0°C 200.0°C to 300.0°C
50.0°C to 150.0°C 50.0°C to 150.0°C
0.0K to 300.0K 200.0°C to 250.0°C
60.0°C to 180.0°C 70.0°C to 200.0°C 200.0°C to 550.0°C 200.0°C to 550.0°C 100.0°C to 250.0°C 200.0°C to 200.0°C 200.0°C to 200.0°C 200.0°C to 200.0°C 200.0°C to 550.0°C 200.0°C to 600.0°C 200.0°C to 850.0°C 200.0°C to 850.0°C 0.000 to 20.000
0.00 to 200.00 0.0 to 2000.0
Default Notes Value Pt100
Pt100 (high resolution)
JPt100 (high resolution) Cu10(GE) Cu10(L&N) Cu10(WEED) Cu10(BAILEY) Cu10: = 0.00392 at 20°C Cu10: = 0.00393 at 20°C Cu25: = 0.00425 at 0°C Cu53: = 0.00426035 at 0°C Cu100: = 0.00425 at 0°C J263*B Ni100(SAMA) Ni100(DIN)
Pt200(WEED) Cu10 GOST Cu50 GOST Cu100 GOST Pt46 GOST Pt100 GOST For the 4-wire RTD/resistor type For the 4-wire RTD/resistor type
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-27
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Span Lower, Span Upper Set the input range. The selectable range varies depending on the range setting. For the selectable ranges, see "Range Details."
Note
· You cannot set the same value to Span Lower and Span Upper.
Calculation When performing input calculation, set the calculation type.
· Linear scaling
Converts the unit to obtain the measured value.
10 V
300°C
Input value
Measured value
0 V
100°C
· Delta
The measured value of the channel is set to the difference with respect to the measured value of the reference channel.
Input value
Measured value
Measured value on the reference channel
Note
Difference calculation is executed even if the input type or range is not the same between the difference calculation channel and the reference channel. Differences in the decimal place is considered but the difference in the unit is ignored in the calculation. Then, the decimal place and the unit of the difference calculation channel are applied. Example 1: If the input value of the difference calculation channel is 10.00 and the measured value
of the reference channel is 100.0, the calculated result is 10.00 100.0 = 90.00. Example 2: If the input value of the difference calculation channel is 10.00 V and the measured
value of the reference channel is 5.00 mV, the computed result is 10.00 V 5.00 mV = 5.00 V. When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval The measurement and computational processing between measurement groups is not synchronized. As such, if a difference calculation channel and the reference channel are in different measurement groups, it is indefinite as to which measured value of the reference channel in time will be used for the difference calculation.
· Square Root
Takes the square root of the input value and converts the unit to obtain the measured value. In a differential pressure flowmeter, the output signal is proportional to the square of the flow rate. Therefore, to measure on a recorder, square rooting is required.
b
B
Input value x a
X Measured value AB
x-a
X=(B-A)
+A
b-a
A
a
b
Reference Channel
Set the reference channel for the difference calculation. You cannot specify an AO channel.
2-28
IM 04L55B01-01EN
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Scale*
Setup Item
Decimal place Scale Lower Scale Upper Unit
Selectable Range or Options 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 999999 to 999999 999999 to 999999
Character string (up to 6 characters, A a # 1 )
* You can set this when math is set to Linear scaling or Square root.
Default Value
2 0.00 100.00 --
Decimal Place Set the decimal place of the scale for linear scaling and square rooting.
Scale Lower, Scale Upper
Assign values to the results of unit conversion of linear scaling and square rooting.
Note
· The GM converts measured values to values within the range set by the Scale Lower and Scale Upper values with their decimal points removed. For example, if the scale setting is "5 to 5," values are converted to values within the span of "10"; if the scale setting is "5.0 to 5.0," values are converted to values within a span of "100." In this case, the resolution of values converted to a span of "10" is lower than those converted to a span of "100."
· You cannot set the same value to Scale Lower and Scale Upper.
Unit Set the unit.
Low-cut1
Setup Item On/Off Low-cut value2 Low-cut output3
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On 0.0% to 5.0% Output 0%, Output linear
Default Value
Off 0.0 Output 0%
1 You can set this when the type is set to Volt and Calculation is set to Square root or when the type is set to GS and Calculation is set to Linear scaling or Square root.
2 You can set this when On/Off is set to On. 3 You cannot set this when the type is set to GS and Calculation is set to Linear scaling.
On/Off Select On to use the low-cut function.
Low-cut value Set the low-cut value in the range of 0.0% to 5.0% of the input span.
Measured value
Result of square root computation
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Low-cut value Input value
Low-cut output
Set the output value when the input is less than the low-cut value for when the low-cut
function is in use.
Options
Description
Output 0% Output linear
Set the value for 0%. Outputs values that result by applying linear scaling to the input on the basis of the specified span and scale.
Note
When the type is set to GS and Calculation is set to Linear scaling, the low-cut output is fixed to Output 0%.
2-29
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Moving Average
Setup Item On/Off Count*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On 2 to 100 (2 to 500 for the high-speed AI module)
Default Value Off 2
*You can set this when On/Off is set to On. You cannot set this when the type is set to DI (fixed to Off).
On/Off Set this to On to perform moving average.
Count Set the number of data points to take the moving average of.
Scan interval
Average Average
Sampling count
First-order lag filter (high-speed AI module only)
Setup Item On/Off * Filter coefficient*
Selectable Range or Options Off/On 3 to 300
Default Value Off 3
*You can set this when On/Off is set to On. You cannot set this when the type is set to DI (fixed to Off).
On/Off Set this to On to use the first-order lag filter.
Filter coefficient
Filter time constant = scan interval × filter coefficient N
The following table shows the relationship between filter coefficient N of the first-order lag
filter, scan interval, and time constant for filter coefficient N = 3, 10, 30, 100, and 300.
Scan interval 1ms
N=3 0.003
N=10 0.01
Time constant (s) N=30 0.03
N=100 0.1
N=300 0.3
2ms
0.006
0.02
0.06
0.2
0.6
5ms
0.015
0.05
0.15
0.5
1.5
10ms
0.03
0.1
0.3
1
3
20ms
0.06
0.2
0.6
2
6
50ms
0.15
0.5
1.5
5
15
100ms
0.3
1
200ms
0.6
2
3
10
30
6
20
60
500ms
1.5
5
15
50
150
1s
3
10
30
100
300
2s
6
20
60
200
600
5s
15
50
150
500
1500
2-30
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Description
1
When there is noise riding on the input signal, inserting a first-order lag filter has the effect of
rejecting noise. The larger the filter coefficient (time constant), the higher the noise rejection
effect. However, setting the filter coefficient too large will distort the waveform.
2
Actual input
When the time constant When the time constant
is small
is large
3
Configuring the GM
Illustration of the filter effect Input
Example when a filter with a 2-s time constant is inserted
Example when a filter with a 10-s time constant is inserted
4 5
App
RJC1, 3 (Reference junction compensation)
Setup Item Mode Temperature2
Selectable Range or Options Internal/External 20.0 to 80.0°C, 253.1 to 353.2K (KpvsAu7Fe)
Default Value
Internal 0.0°C, 273.2K (KpvsAu7Fe)
1 You can set this when the range type is set to TC. 2 You can set this when the mode is set to External. 3 You cannot set this for AI (mA) channels.
Mode
Set the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple.
Options
Description
Internal External
Uses the reference junction compensation function of the GM. Uses an external reference junction compensation function.
Thermocouple Thermocouple
GM Internal reference junction
Index
External reference junction
Temperature When the RJC is set to external, set the compensation temperature.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-31
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Burnout set*
Setup Item Burnout
Selectable Range or Options Off, Up, Down
Default Value Off
*You can set this when the range type is set to GS, GS (4-20mA), TC, or RTD. It is not displayed for the 4-wire RTD/resistor type.
When the range type is set to GS, GS (4-20mA), TC, or RTD, the GM detects sensor burnouts.
Options Off Up
Down
Description
Does not detect burnouts in the sensor. When the sensor burns out, the measured result is set to +over range. The measured value is displayed as "Burnout." When the input type is set to GS or GS (4-20mA), the GM assumes that the sensor has burned out when the measured value moves out of the range defined by the upper and lower limits of burnout specified on the specified span width. (Example: If the lower limit of burnout is set to -10% and the upper limit to 110%, when the measured value is less than 10 or greater than 110 when the scale is set to 0 to 100 in linear scaling) When the sensor burns out, the measured result is set to over range. The measured value is displayed as "Burnout." When the input type is set to GS or GS (4-20mA), the GM assumes that the sensor has burned out when the measured value moves out of the range defined by the upper and lower limits of burnout specified on the specified span width. (Example: If the lower limit of burnout is set to -10% and the upper limit to 110%, when the measured value is less than 10 or greater than 110 when the scale is set to 0 to 100 in linear scaling)
For details on setting the upper and lower limits of burnout, see page 2-103 in section 2.12.6, "Setting the Burnout Criteria".
Thermocouple Examples
Burnout
Thermoelectromotive force
Indicated as Burnout
Burnout
1-5V Detected on the 1-5 V value
Indicated as Burnout
Note
If the scan interval is between 1 ms and 20 ms on a high-speed AI module, burnout detection will not work properly.
Bias*
Setup Item Bias
Selectable Range or Options Numeric value (999999 to 999999)
Default Value 0
* You cannot set this when the range type is set to DI.
Set the bias to add to input values or linear scaling values (input calculation).
Channel on which bias is added
Input value
+ Bias (a constant value)
Measured value
2-32
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3.2
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Setting Alarms
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Alarm
Hardware configurator: AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Alarm
Description
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Setup Item On/Off Type1 Value1 Hysteresis1, 4
Logging1 Output type1 Output No.3
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, On
Off
H: High limit, L: Low limit, R: High limit on rate-of- H: High limit
change, r: Low limit on rate-of-change, T: Delay
high limit, t: Delay low limit, h: Difference high limit,2 l: Difference low limit2 Within the setting range Numeric value
0.0000 7 0.0005 7
When Calculation is set to Off or Delta: 0 to 5%
of range setting
When math is set to Linear scaling or Square
root: 0 to 100000
Off, On
On
Off, Relay,5 Internal switch6
Off
DO channel or internal switch
--
1 You can set this when Level (1 to 4) is set to On. 2 You can set this when Calculation of the range setting is set to Delta. 3 You can set this when Output type is not set to Off. 4You can set this when the type is set to high limit, low limit, difference high limit, or difference
low limit. 5 You can set this when the range type of any of the DO channels is set to Alarm. 6 You can set this when any of the internal switch type is set to Alarm. 7 The default values of AI (mA) channels are 0.00 for the Alarm value and 0.05 for Hysteresis.
On/Off To use an alarm level (1 to 4), set this to On.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-33
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Type
Set the alarm type.
Options
Description
H: High limit
An alarm is activated when the measured value is greater than or equal to the alarm value.
L: Low limit
An alarm is activated when the measured value is less than or equal to the
alarm value.
R: High limit on rate-of- An alarm is activated if the increasing rate-of-change of measured values over
change
a certain interval is greater than or equal to the specified value.
r: Low limit on rate-ofchange T: Delay high limit
An alarm is activated if the decreasing rate-of-change of measured values over a certain interval is greater than or equal to the specified value. An alarm is activated if measured values remain greater than or equal to the alarm value for a specified time period (delay period).
t: Delay low limit
An alarm is activated if measured values remain less than or equal to the alarm
value for a specified time period (delay period).
h: Difference high limit An alarm is activated when the difference in the measured values of two
channels is greater than or equal to the specified value. This alarm can be
specified on measurement channels set to difference calculation.
l: Difference low limit
An alarm is activated when the difference in the measured values of two channels is less than or equal to the specified value. This alarm can be specified on measurement channels set to difference calculation.
Alarms of channels set to difference calculation are set in the position shown in the figure below.
H, L, T, t, R, r
h, l
Input value
Measured value Measured value on the reference channel
Value Set the alarm value for the specified alarm type.
Options H, L
R, r
T, t
Value
Examples of Alarm Value Range
A value within the measurable range 2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
270.0 to 1370.0°C for thermocouple type K
1 digit to the upper limit of the width of 0.0001 to 4.0000 V for 2 V range
the measurable range
0.1 to 1640.0°C for thermocouple type K
Same as H and L
Same as H and L
When the Channel Calculation Is Set to Delta
Options H, L
h, l
R, r
T, t
Value
Examples of Alarm Value Range
A value within the measurable range 2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
270.0 to 1370.0°C for thermocouple type K
A value within the measurable range -4.0000 to 4.0000 V for 2 V range
1640.0 to 1640.0°C for thermocouple type K
1 digit to the upper limit of the width of 0.0001 to 4.0000 V for 2 V range
the measurable range
0.1 to 1640.0°C for thermocouple type K
Same as H and L
Same as H and L
When the Channel Calculation Is Set to Linear Scaling or Square Root
Options H, L
R, r
T, t
Value 5% to 105% of the scale width However, within 999999 to 999999 excluding the decimal point. 1 to the scale width but within 1 to 999999 excluding the decimal point.
Same as H and L
Examples of Alarm Value Range
When the scale is 0.0 to 100.0: 5.0 to 105.0 When the scale is 100.00 to 300.00: 120.00 to 320.00 When the scale is 0.0 to 100.0: 0.1 to 100.0 When the scale is 100.00 to 300.00: 0.01 to 400.00 Same as H and L
2-34
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Hysteresis
Set this to establish an offset between the value used to activate and release alarms. This is fixed at 0 for the DI range.
Example: H: If you set the alarm value of a high limit alarm to 1.0000 V and the hysteresis to 0.0005 V, an alarm is activated when the measured value is greater than or equal to 1.0000 V and is released when the measured value is less than 0.9995 V.
Logging
Set this On to display an alarm (notify you) when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, when an alarm occurs, the GM outputs signals to alarm output DO channels or internal switches but does not display the alarm. In addition, alarms are also not recorded in the alarm summary.
Output type
Set the alarm output destination. Alarm status can be output to the relay (DO channel) or internal switches (100 software switches). Internal switch values are shown below. Like the DO output relay, you can specify AND/OR operation.
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm release
1
Internal switch 0
Internal switches can be used as events of the event action function (see page 2-135 in section 2.20, "Configuring the Event Action Function"). In addition, they can also be written in calculation expressions of math channels (/MT option).
Output No. Set the number of the relay (DO channel) or internal switch to output alarms to.
Alarm delay*
Setup Item Hour Minute Second
Selectable Range or Options
1 to 24 0 to 59 0 to 59
Default Value
0 0 10
* You can set this when Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, or Level 4 is On.
Hour, Minute, and Second
Set the alarm delay. These values are valid when the delay high limit or delay low limit is in use.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-35
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Explanation Alarm Type The character inside the parentheses is the symbol denoting each alarm.
High Limit Alarm (H)
Low Limit Alarm (L)
Measured value Alarm value
Hysteresis
Measured value Alarm value
Hysteresis
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
Delay High Limit Alarm (T) Measured value
Alarm value
Delay Low Limit Alarm (t)
Alarm value
Measured value
Delay period Alarm output ON
Delay period Alarm output ON
High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (R)
Measured value
Change in the
measured value
T2
Amount of change
in the setting
T1
| T1 T2|
t1
t2
Time
Interval (t2 t1)
Difference High Limit Alarm (h)
Difference in the measured values of two channels Hysteresis
Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (r) Measured value
T2
Amount of change
in the setting
T1
| T1 T2|
t1
t2
Change in the measured value Time
Interval (t2 t1)
Difference Low Limit Alarm (l)
Difference in the measured values of two channels Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm value
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
High Limit Alarm and Low Limit Alarm An alarm is activated when the measured value is greater or less than or equal to the alarm value.
Delay High Limit Alarm and Delay Low Limit Alarm An alarm is activated if measured values remain greater or less than or equal to the alarm value for a specified time period (delay period).
High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm and Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm An alarm is activated if the increasing or decreasing rate-of-change of measured values over a certain interval is greater than or equal to the specified value. The alarm value of an rate-of-change alarm is set using an absolute value. The interval is derived using the following equation and set using the number of samples. Interval = the scan interval × the number of samples
For the number of samples, see page 2-181 in section 2.26.2, "Setting the Interval for Calculating the Rate-of-Change for Rate-of-Change Alarms".
Difference High Limit Alarm and Difference Low Limit Alarm An alarm is activated when the difference in the measured values of two channels is greater or less than or equal to the specified value. This alarm can be specified on measurement channels set to difference calculation.
2-36
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3.3
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Alarm Detection and Output When the Scan Interval Is Shorter Than 100 ms
1
Alarm is detected every 100 ms. All alarms that occur in each 100 ms interval are detected
and recorded in the alarm summary. Internal switch and relay output generated by alarms
occur at 100 ms intervals.
2
Setting the Display
Configuring the GM
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown,
--
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink,
light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan,
and spring green) and a user-defined color (1 color)
Color Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display.
3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-37
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100 %
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper
Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
Example: Set the channel 1 zone to 0 to 30%, the channel 2 zone to 30 to 60%, and the channel 3 zone to 60 to 100%.
When zone display is not used 100%
When zone display is used
100%
Time axis
CH3 CH2
CH1 0%
Time axis
Zone 3
60% Zone 2
30% Zone 1
0%
2-38
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Bar graph
Setup Item Base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
1
Default Value Lower
Base position
2
Set the bar graph base position. Depending on the setting, the bar graph is displayed as
follows. This setting is applied on the bar graph display.
Configuring the GM
When the Display Direction of the Bar Graph Is Vertical
3
The span lower limit (or scale lower limit) is at the bottom edge of the bar graph, and the
span upper limit (or scale upper limit) is at the top edge of the bar graph.
Starting point of the bar
Center: Center Lower: Bottom edge
4
Upper: Top edge
Center
Lower
Upper
Vupper
Vupper
Vupper
5
App
Vlower
Vlower
Vlower
Vupper: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit) Vlower: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
: Starting point of the bar
Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input range are 0.0 and 100.0, respectively
Center
Lower
Upper
100.0
100.0
100.0
Index
0.0
0.0
0.0
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-39
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
When the Display Direction of the Bar Graph Is Horizontal
The span lower limit (or scale lower limit) is at the left edge of the bar graph, and the span upper limit (or scale upper limit) is at the right edge of the bar graph.
Starting point of the bar Center: Center Lower: Left edge Upper: Right edge
Center Vlower
Vupper
Lower Vlower
Vupper
Upper Vlower
Vupper
Vupper: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Vlower: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
:
Starting point of the bar
Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input
range are 0.0 and 100.0, respectively
0.0 Center
100.0
0.0 Lower
100.0
0.0 Upper
100.0
When Displaying the Current Value on the Scale Using the Bar Graph
Center Vupper
Lower Upper
Vlower Center
Vupper
Lower Upper
Vlower
2-40
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Color scale band
Setup Item Band area Color
Display position Lower Display position Upper
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, In, Out
Off
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, --
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black,
pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark
cyan, and spring green) and a user-defined color
(1 color)
Span (scale) lower limit to span (scale) upper limit 0.0000
Span (scale) lower limit to span (scale) upper limit 0.0100
Band area
Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the scale. This
setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Options
Description
Off
Disables the function.
In
Displays the area inside using the color band.
Out
Displays the area outside using the color band.
Color Set the display color.
For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation Example 2" on page 2-14.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App
Display position Lower and Display position Upper Set the display position. Set a value within the span or scale range.
Alarm point mark
Setup Item Indicate on scale Mark kind Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On Alarm, Fixed 24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color)
Default Value
On Alarm --
* You can set this when the Mark kind is set to Fixed.
Indicate on scale
Set this to On to display alarm point marks on the scale. Set this to Off to not display them. This setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Mark kind
Options Alarm
Fixed
Description
Displayed normally in green. Displayed in red when an alarm occurs. Displayed with a fixed color.
Mark Shape or
Index
Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color When Mark kind is set to Fixed, set the display colors of point marks for alarm levels 1 to 4.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-41
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Display characters of each value
Setup Item 0
1
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
* You can set this when in the range settings, type is set to DI and Calculation is set to Off.
0 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 0.
1 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 1.
Examples of display characters of each value
Receive a device operation status through DI input and display measured values (0 and 1) as "Running" and "Stopped." You can select whether to display measured values (0 or 1) or characters.
Explanation
Group Display On the trend, digital, bar graph, and horizontal bar graph displays, the data of channels is displayed in groups that are set in advance. Groups are shared among the trend, digital, bar graph, and horizontal bar graph displays. The displayed group can be switched automatically at a specified time interval (5 s to 1 min).
Number of Groups That Can Be Registered GM10-1: 50 groups GM10-2: 60 groups
Number of Channels That Can Be Assigned to a Group Up to 20 channels
Update Interval of Measured Values
Values are updated every 1 second. However, if the scan interval is greater than 1 s, values are updated at the scan interval.
Alarm Indication
Alarms that are set for each channel are checked at all times and are indicated with the
symbol representing the alarm type on each display.
Alarm Type
Symbol
Alarm Type
Symbol
High limit alarm Low limit alarm Difference high limit alarm Difference low limit alarm
H L h l (lowercase L)
High limit on rate-of-change alarm R
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm r
Delay high limit alarm
T
Delay low limit alarm
t
2-42
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Trend Display (T-Y) Measured data is displayed in a waveform.
For details on the display, see "Trend Monitor, Digital Monitor, Bar Graph Monitor, and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor" on page 3-13.
Digital Display The digital display shows measured data using large numbers.
For details on the display, see "Trend Monitor, Digital Monitor, Bar Graph Monitor, and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor" on page 3-13.
Note
· Numeric display of analog input channels If a measured value of an analog input channel is over range (see below), the measured value is indicated as "+Over" or "Over." If a burnout is detected on a channel whose burnout detection function is enabled, the word "Burnout" is indicated. If you remove a module or use a module in error, "*******" is displayed. For all other cases, a numeric value is displayed. Over range of analog input channels · An over range occurs when the measured value of an analog input channel exceeds ±5% of the measurable range. For example, the measurable range when the measurement range is 2 V is 2.000 to 2.000 V. If the measured value exceeds 2.200 V, +over range occurs; if the measured value falls below 2.200 V, over range occurs. · For a channel using Linear scaling or Square root, over range occurs if the measured value falls outside the 5% to 105% range of the specified span. You can also change the setting so that over range occurs when the measured value falls outside the 5% to 105% range of the measurable span range. However, +over range occurs if the value excluding the decimal point exceeds 999999 and over range if it falls below 999999. Setup: See page 2-99 in section 2.12.2, "Setting the Over-range Detection Method".
Bar Graph Display Measured data is displayed in a bar graph.
For details on the display, see "Trend Monitor, Digital Monitor, Bar Graph Monitor, and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor" on page 3-13.
· Bar Graph Updating The bar graph is updated at the same interval as numeric values.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-43
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
2.3.4
Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, Correction factor* (release number 3 and later))
* /AH option only
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Calibration correction
Hardware configurator: AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Calibration correction
Description
Mode
Setup Item Mode
Number of set points* Edit correction points*
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, Linearizer Approximation, Linearizer Bias, Off
Correction Factor
2 to 12
2
Use the Edit correction points button to display a --
calibration correction dialog box.
* You can set this when the mode is not set to Off.
Mode
Set the correction mode when performing calibration correction. When the range is set to DI or Skip, the mode is fixed to Off.
Number of set points Set the number of points that make up the segments (including the start and end points).
Edit correction points: Linearizer approximation or linearizer bias (1 to 12*)
Setup Item Linearizer input Linearizer output
Selectable Range or Options 999999 to 999999 999999 to 999999
Default Value -- --
Execution of the input measurement --
--
* The number of displayed points varies depending on the number of set points.
Linearizer input, Linearizer output
Enter the value of the set point. For linearizer input, set a value that is greater than the previous value.
Selectable Range of Linearizer Input and Output Values
· Channels using linear scaling 999999 to 999999 (the decimal place is the same as that for the scale value)
· Other channels Values inside parentheses are examples for the 2 V range.
Linearizer approximation
Selectable range of linearizer input: Measurable range (2.0000 to 2.0000 V) Selectable range of linearizer output: Display range (2.2000 to 2.2000 V)
Linearizer bias
Selectable range of linearizer input: Measurable range (2.0000 to 2.0000 V) Selectable range of linearizer output: Measurement span width ± 100% (4.0000 to 4.0000 V)
2-44
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Edit correction points: Correction factor (1 to 12*) (/AH option only)
Setup Item Uncorrected value
Instrument correction factor Sensor correction factor
Selectable Range or Options -999999 to 999999
-999999 to 999999 -999999 to 999999
Default Value --
-- --
Execution of the input measurement --
--
* The number of displayed points varies depending on the number of set points.
Uncorrected value
Enter the uncorrected value. Set a value that is greater than the previous value. · Channels using linear scaling or open/close computation
999999 to 999999 (the decimal place is the same as that for the scale value) · Other channels
Values inside parentheses are examples for the 2 V range. Measurable range (2.0000 to 2.0000 V)
Instrument correction factor
Set the instrument-dependent correction factor. · Channels using linear scaling
999999 to 999999 (the decimal place is the same as that for the scale value) · Other channels
Values inside parentheses are examples for the 2 V range. Measurement span width ± 100% (4.0000 to 4.0000 V)
Sensor correction factor
Set the sensor-dependent correction factor. · Channels using linear scaling
999999 to 999999* (the decimal place is the same as that for the scale value) * Make sure that the sum of this factor and the instrument correction factor does not exceed this range.
· Other channels Values inside parentheses are examples for the 2 V range. Measurement span width ± 100% (4.0000 to 4.0000 V)* * Make sure that the sum of this factor and the instrument correction factor does not exceed this range.
Execution of the input measurement The uncorrected value is set to the current measured value.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-45
2.3 Configuring AI Channels (Analog (including DI) input) channels and AI (mA) channels
Procedure
Click Linearizer Edit correction points to display the AI channel[XXXX] Calibration correction dialog box. Click Execute to set the linearizer input value to the current measured value.
If the mode is set to correction factor, the linearizer input value is set to uncorrected value.
Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias
Correction factor
2-46
Executes input measurement
Note
· If you change the Mode or Range setting, the calibration correction setting is set to Off. · Calibration correction cannot be specified on channels set to Skip or DI.
Explanation Linearizer Approximation Corrects input values using characteristics specified with segments to derive output values.
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Output value ( Measured value )
Input value
Linearizer Bias Corrects input values using bias values specified with segments to derive output values.
After correction
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Output value
Linearizer bias
( Measured value )
Input value
Correction Factor
Corrects input values using the instrument correction factor and sensor correction factor specified with segments to derive output values.
Output value
After correction
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Uncorrected value
Instrument correction factor + Sensor correction factor
( Measured value )
Input value
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.4 Configuring DI Channels (Digital input channels) 1
2.4.1
Set the input range, alarm, and display conditions of DI channels (including the DI channels of DI/DO modules). To use the DI module as a remote control input, set the operation mode of the module to Remote. See page 2-99 in section 2.12.3, "Setting the Operation Mode of a Module". Set the remote control action using event action. See page 2-135 in section 2.20, "Configuring the Event Action Function".
Setting the Range
Path
Web application: Config. tab > DI channel settings* > Channel range (display example: 0501-0516) > Range
Hardware configurator: DI channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0516) > Range
Description
Range
Setup Item Type Span Lower
DI Pulse
Selectable Range or Options Skip, DI, Pulse2 0, 1 Delta: 1 to 1 0 to 999999 (decimal place: 0)
Default Value DI 0
0
Span Upper
DI Pulse
0, 1 Delta: 1 to 1 0 to 999999 (decimal place: 0)
1 1250
Calculation
Off,3 Delta, Linear scaling
Off
Reference channel1
Value (I/O channel)
--
1 You can set this when Calculation is set to Delta. 2 You can set this when the GM10 has the /MT option and the operation mode is set to Normal. 3 This is fixed to Off when the Type is set to Pulse.
Type
Set the input type.
Options
Description
Skip DI
Pulse
Not measured. Displays contact input or voltage input signals by mapping them to 0% or 100% of the display range. Counts pulses. Maximum measurement pulse cycle: 250 Hz (chattering filter for pulse input: off)
125 Hz (chattering filter for pulse input: on)
For details on the chattering filter for pulse input, see page 2-103 in section 2.12.7, "Setting the Chattering Filter for Pulse Input".
Span Lower, Span Upper Set the input range.
Calculation When performing input calculation, set the calculation type. You can set this when the range type is set to DI.
For details on the input calculation function, see section 2.3.1, "Setting the Range".
Reference channel
Set the reference channel for the difference calculation. You cannot specify an AO channel.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-47
2.4 Configuring DI Channels (Digital input channels)
Scale*
Setup Item
Decimal place Scale Lower Scale Upper Unit
Selectable Range or Options 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 999999 to 999999 999999 to 999999
Character string (up to 6 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value
2 0.00 100.00 --
* You can set this when the range is set to DI and Calculation is set to Linear scaling.
Decimal Place Set the decimal place of the scale for linear scaling.
Scale Lower, Scale Upper Assign values to the results of unit conversion of linear scaling.
Unit Set the unit.
2.4.2 Setting Alarms
Path
Web application: Config. tab > DI channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0516) > Alarm
Hardware configurator: DI channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0516) > Alarm
Description
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Setup Item On/Off Type1
Value1 Hysteresis1, 4 Logging1 Output type1 Output No.3
Selectable Range or Options
Off/On H: High limit, L: Low limit, R: High limit on rateof-change, r: Low limit on rate-of-change, T: Delay high limit, t: Delay low limit, h:Difference high limit,2 l: Difference low limit2 Within the setting range 0 (fixed) Off, On Off, Relay, Internal switch DO channel or internal switch number
Default Value Off Off
0 0 On Off --
1 You can set this when Level (1 to 4) is set to On. 2 You can set this when Calculation of the range setting is set to Delta. 3 You can set this when Output type is not set to Off. 4You can set this when the type is set to high limit, low limit, difference high limit, or difference
low limit.
On/Off To use an alarm level (1 to 4), set this to On.
2-48
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.4 Configuring DI Channels (Digital input channels)
Type
Set the alarm type. For details, see page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
Alarms of channels set to difference calculation are set in the position shown in the figure below.
H, L, T, t
R, r, h, l
Input value
Measured value Measured value on the reference channel
Value Set the alarm value for the specified alarm type.
For details, see page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
Hysteresis Fixed to 0.
Logging Set this On to display an alarm (notify you) when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, when an alarm occurs, the GM outputs signals to alarm output DO channels or internal switches but does not display the alarm. Alarms are also not recorded in the alarm summary.
Output type Set the alarm output destination.
Output No. Set the number of the DO channel or internal switch to output alarms to.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Alarm delay (for delay high/low limit alarms)
Setup Item
Hour Minute Second
Selectable Range or Options
1 to 24 0 to 59 0 to 59
Default Value
0 0 10
Hour, Minute, and Second
Set the alarm delay. These values are valid when the delay high limit or delay low limit is in use.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-49
2.4 Configuring DI Channels (Digital input channels)
2.4.3 Setting the Display
Path
Web application: Config. tab > DI channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0516) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: DI channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0516) > Alarm > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown,
--
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black,
pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark
cyan, and spring green) and a user-defined color
(1 color)
Color Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display.
For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation Example 2" on page 2-14.
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100 %
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper
Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
2-50
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.4 Configuring DI Channels (Digital input channels)
Bar graph
Setup Item Base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
Default Value Lower
Base position Set the bar graph base position. This setting is applied on the bar graph display.
For display examples, see "Trend Monitor, Digital Monitor, Bar Graph Monitor, and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor" on page 3-13.
Alarm point mark
Setup Item Indicate on Scale Mark kind Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color*
Selectable Range or Options
Off/On Alarm, Fixed 24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color)
Default Value
On Alarm --
* You can set this when the Mark kind is set to Fixed.
Indicate on Scale
Set this to On to display alarm point marks on the scale. Set this to Off to not display them. This setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Mark kind
Options Alarm
Fixed
Description
Displayed normally in green. Displayed in red when an alarm occurs. Displayed with a fixed color.
Mark Shape or
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color When Mark kind is set to Fixed, set the display colors of point marks for alarm levels 1 to 4.
Display characters of each value*
Setup Item 0
1
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
* You can set this when the range set to DI and Calculation is set to Off.
0 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 0.
1 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 1.
Default Value --
--
For usage examples, see page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-51
2.5
2.5.1
Configuring Pulse Input Channels (Release number 3 and later)
Set the input range, alarm, and display conditions of pulse input channels and display conditions. To perform pulse input integration, the computation (/MT) option is required.
For details on the computation, see page 2-70 in section 2.9, "Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)". For computation examples, see page App-25 in section Appendix 6, "Computation Examples Using Pulse Input".
Setting the Range
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Pulse input channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0510) > Range
Hardware configurator: Pulse input channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0510) > Range
Description
Range
Setup Item Type Range Chattering filter Span Lower
Span Upper
Calculation Reference channel*
Selectable Range or Options
Skip, Pulse Level, Contact Off, On 0 to 200000 Delta: -200000 to 200000 0 to 200000 Delta: -200000 to 200000 Off, Delta, Linear scaling Number (I/O channel number)
* You can set this when Calculation is set to Delta.
Default Value Pulse Level On 0
200000
Off --
Type Set the input type.
Options Skip Pulse
Description Not measured. Counts pulses.
Range
Set the pulse input range.
Options
Description
Level
Voltage (5 V logic) (counted when a change from 1 V or lower to 3 V or higher is detected)
Contact
Contact input (counted when a change from 100 k or higher to 200 or lower
is detected)
Chattering filter
This filter prevents pulse count errors caused by chattering or noise.
Options
Description
Off
The chattering filter is not used.
On
The chattering filter is used.
Note
When the chattering filter is set to On, the input range can be up to 30 Hz.
2-52
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.5 Configuring Pulse Input Channels (Release number 3 and later)
Span Lower, Span Upper
Set the input range. You cannot set the same value to Span Lower and Span Upper. · When Calculation is set to Off or Linear scaling.
0 to 200000 · When Calculation is set to Delta
-200000 to 200000
Example: M easured value per scan interval when 10000 (pulse/s) is input
Scan interval Measured value
100 ms 1000
200 ms 2000
500 ms 5000
1s 10000
2s 20000
5s 50000
Calculation
When performing input calculation, set the calculation type. See page 2-28 in section , "Calculation".
· Linear scaling
Converts the unit to obtain the measured value. · Delta
The measured value of the channel is set to the difference with respect to the measured value of the reference channel.
Reference Channel Set the reference channel for the difference calculation. You cannot specify an AO channel.
See page 2-28 in section , "Reference Channel".
Scale*
Setup Item
Decimal place Lower Upper Unit
Selectable Range or Options 0/1/2/3/4/5 999999 to 999999 999999 to 999999
Character string (up to 6 characters, A a # 1 )
* You can set this when Calculation is set to Linear scaling. See page 2-29 in section , "Scale*".
Moving Average
Setup Item On/Off Count*
Selectable Range or Options Off, On 2 to 100
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
Default Value 2 0.00 100.00 --
Default Value Off 2
See page 2-30 in section , "Moving Average".
Note
· If you change the GM's time or when the time is being gradually adjusted, the scan interval will change. This will change the measured values of each scan interval, but it will not affect the integration result (TLOG.PSUM).
· The default span upper and span lower limits assume values that are affected the most by a time change at the scan interval of 5 s.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-53
2.5 Configuring Pulse Input Channels (Release number 3 and later)
2.5.2 Setting Alarms
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Pulse input channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0510) > Alarm
Hardware configurator: DI channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0510) > Alarm
Description
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Setup Item On/Off Type1
Value1 Hysteresis1, 4
Logging1 Output type1 Output No.3
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, On
Off
H: High limit, L: Low limit, R: High limit on rate- Off
of-change, r: Low limit on rate-of-change, T:
Delay high limit, t: Delay low limit, h:Difference high limit,2 l: Difference low limit2
Within the setting range
0
Numeric value
0
When Calculation is set to Off or Delta: 0 to 5%
of range setting
When math is set to Linear scaling: 0 to 100000
Off, On
On
Off, Relay, Internal switch
Off
DO channel or internal switch number
--
1 You can set this when Level (1 to 4) is set to On. 2 You can set this when Calculation of the range setting is set to Delta. 3 You can set this when Output type is not set to Off. 4 You can set this when the type is set to high limit, low limit, difference high limit, or difference
low limit.
On/Off To use an alarm level (1 to 4), set this to On.
Type
Set the alarm type. For details, see page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
Alarms of channels set to difference calculation are set in the position shown in the figure
below.
H, L, T, t, R, r
h, l
Input value
Measured value Measured value on the reference channel
Value Set the alarm value for the specified alarm type.
For details, see page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
Hysteresis Set this to establish an offset between the value used to activate and release alarms.
Logging Set this On to display an alarm (notify you) when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, when an alarm occurs, the GM outputs signals to alarm output DO channels or internal switches but does not display the alarm. Alarms are also not recorded in the alarm summary.
Output type Set the alarm output destination.
2-54
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.5.3
2.5 Configuring Pulse Input Channels (Release number 3 and later)
Output No.
1
Set the number of the DO channel or internal switch to output alarms to.
Configuring the GM
Alarm delay (for delay high/low limit alarms)
Setup Item
Hour Minute Second
Selectable Range or Options
1 to 24 0 to 59 0 to 59
Default Value
2
0
0
10
Hour, Minute, and Second
3
Set the alarm delay. These values are valid when the delay high limit or delay low limit alarm is in use.
Setting the Display
4
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Pulse input channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0510) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: Pulse input channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0501-0510) > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, --
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray,
lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple,
black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray,
olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a user-
defined color (1 color)
Color Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display.
For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see page 2-14 in section , "Operation Example 2".
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100%
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper
Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-55
2.5 Configuring Pulse Input Channels (Release number 3 and later)
Bar graph
Setup Item Base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
Default Value Lower
Base position Set the bar graph base position. This setting is applied on the bar graph display.
For display examples, see page 3-13 in section , "Trend Monitor, Digital Monitor, Bar Graph Monitor, and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor".
Alarm Point Mark
Setup Item Indicate on Scale Mark kind Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color*
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, On
On
Alarm, Fixed
Alarm
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, --
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray,
lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple,
black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray,
olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a user-
defined color (1 color)
* You can set this when the Mark kind is set to Fixed.
Indicate on Scale
Set this to On to display alarm point marks on the scale. Set this to Off to not display them. This setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Mark kind
Options Alarm
Fixed
Description
Displayed normally in green. Displayed in red when an alarm occurs. Displayed with a fixed color.
Mark Shape or
Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color When Mark kind is set to Fixed, set the display colors of point marks for alarm levels 1 to 4.
Display characters of each value*
Setup Item 0
1
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
* You can set this when the range set to DI and Calculation is set to Off.
0 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 0.
1 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 1.
Default Value --
--
For usage examples, see page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
2-56
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.6
2.6.1
Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)
Set the analog output channels' range and display conditions.
Setting the Range
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0701-0704) > Range
Hardware configurator: AO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0701-0704) > Range
Description
Range
Setup Item
Type Range* Span Lower* Span Upper*
Selectable Range or Options
Skip, Re-Trans, Manual 4-20mA/0-20mA 4.000 to 20.000, 0.000 to 20.000 4.000 to 20.000, 0.000 to 20.000
* You cannot set this when Type is set to Skip.
Default Value
Skip 4-20mA 4.000 20.000
Type
Set the output type.
Option
Description
Skip
Nothing is output.
Retransmission output An analog value corresponding to the span of the specified reference channel
is output.
Manual output
A specified value is output.
Range Set the output range.
Span Lower, Span Upper Set the output span. You cannot set the same value to Span Lower and Span Upper.
Reference channel*
Setup Item Channel type
Channel number
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Input channel, Math channel, Communication Input channel
channel
Number (reference channel number)
--
* You can set this when the range type is set to Re-Trans.
Channel type Set the reference channel type for retransmission output.
Channel number Set the reference channel number for retransmission output.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-57
2.6 Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)
Preset value
Setup Item Preset value
Selectable Range or Options 0.000 to 22.000
Default Value 0.000
Preset value
Set the preset value when Preset action is set to Preset value. The preset value is independent of the span setting. It can be set to any value within the setting range.
Preset action
Setup Item At power-on On error Re-trans stop
Selectable Range or Options
Preset value, Last value Preset value, Last value Preset value, Last value
Default Value
Preset value Preset value Preset value
At power-on
Zero is output while initialization is in progress at power on. After initialization, the previous value or preset value is output until the first output is determined (while measurement is being started).
Power on GM
Initialization
Confirmation of first measurement
Measurement start processing
Steady state
Retransmission output
0
Manual output 0
Previous value Preset value (0) Preset action
Preset action
2-58
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.6 Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)
On error If the main unit fails or the connection to the expandable I/O is disconnected, the previous value or preset value is output. Even when the reference channel cannot be measured, the previous value or preset value is output. See the following explanation.
Fail occurrence
Normal
FAIL
GM
Normal
Fail detection in Power off Power on
5 seconds
Retransmission
output
0
Manual output 0
Sub unit
On error Preset action
Previous value Preset value (0)
At power on Preset action
Normal
On error Preset action
Main unit not connected
At power on Preset action
LAN cable disconnection and recovery*
Normal
Normal
Retransmission output
0 Previous value output
Manual output
Main unit fail detection in 5 seconds
On error Preset action
At power on Preset action
0
On error Preset action
Change manual output At power on Preset action
* When the LAN cable is disconnected, the previous value is output for 5 seconds. When 5 seconds elapse, preset action on error is performed. If the connection recovers, the output is resumed.
Re-trans stop
The previous value or preset value is output when the range type is set to retransmission output in the following situations. This does not work when the range type is set to manual output. · When computation is stopped if the reference channel is a math channel · When retransmission output is off
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-59
2.6 Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)
Description
Retransmission Output Operation
· If the output value is outside +105% to -5% of the reference channel's set span, the output is clipped at the boundaries of this span. (If the output value is outside the 0 to 22 mA range, the output is clipped at the boundaries of this range.)
· If the reference channel is a measurement channel or communication channel, when the reference channel is +OVER, the output is clipped at 105% of the output channel's set span. When the reference channel is -OVER, the output is clipped at -5% of the set span.
Preset action
When the reference channel is a measurement channel
State
Preset action
When retransmission output is off
Preset action when stopped
When the module has been removed, measurement
Preset action on error
channel is set to Skip, A/D error, calibration error, burnout
When the reference channel is a communication channel
State When retransmission output is off When NaN is input, communication channel is off
Preset action Preset action when stopped Preset action on error
When the reference channel is a math channel
State When math is stopped When retransmission output is off When the math channel value is +OVER, -OVER, math error, or when the math channel is off
Preset action Preset action when stopped
Preset action on error
Measurement
Computing Calculation
Retrans.
On
output
ON/OFF
Stopped
Measuring Off
Computing On
When the reference channel is a measurement channel or communication channel When OVER occurs: 105% of span
Retrans. output
Previous value Preset value (0)
Preset action when stopped
When the reference channel is a math channel Preset action on error also when ±OVER occurs
Retrans. output
Previous value Preset value (0) Preset action when stopped
2-60
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.6.2
2.6 Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)
Output Action When Settings Are Changed
1
Retransmission output
Description of change
Action
· Reference channel settings, scan interval,
After the settings are changed, the values before
module operation mode, A/D integration time, the change are used until the next measurement
2
over-range detection, range-over judgment
starts. Then, the new settings are applied.
Configuring the GM
upper and lower limits, chattering filter for pulse
input (DI module), and temperature unit
* Depending on the type of setting, it may take some time for the measurement to start after
3
changing the setting.
· Output channel span
It is applied to the next measurement after the
setting has been changed.
· Change to manual output
The value immediately before the setting was changed is held until the next time the manual
4
value is changed.
Manual output Description of change · Change to retransmission output
· Preset value during preset output
Action It is applied to the next measurement after the setting has been changed. It is applied at the next output update interval (100 ms).
Setting the display
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0701-0704) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: AO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0701-0704) > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-61
2.6 Configuring AO Channels (Analog input channels)
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, --
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray,
lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray,
purple, black, pink, light brown, light green,
dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green)
and a user-defined color (1 color)
Color
Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display. For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation example 2" under "Editing Settings" in page 2-11 in section 2.1.6, "Change settings".
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100%
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper
Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
Bar graph
Setup Item Base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
Default Value Lower
Base position Set the bar graph base position.
For display examples, see the bar graph settings on page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
2-62
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.7
2.7.1
Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)
Set the input range and display conditions of DO channels (including the DO channels of DI/DO modules). In addition to alarm output, DO output is possible through touch operation (manual operation).
Setting the Range
Path
Web application: Config. tab > DO channel settings* > Channel range (display example: 0701-0706) > Range
Hardware configurator: DO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 07010706) > Range
Description
Range
Setup Item Type Span Lower Span Upper Unit
Selectable Range or Options Alarm, Manual, Fail 0/1 0/1
Character string (up to 6 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value
Alarm 0 1 --
Type
Set the input type.
To output through touch operation (manual operation), "Changing each value from
monitoring" must be set to On. See page 2-97 in section 2.11.5, "Turning the Operation
from the Monitor Displays On and Off".
Options
Description
Alarm Manual
Alarm output Manual output and event action output
Fail
Output to a DO channel of a DO module or DI/DO module when an error
occurs in the GM10 CPU.
If the type is set to Fail, the GM outputs to a DO channel under the following conditions. The
output information varies depending on whether the DO channel being output to is on the
main unit or a sub unit.
Unit Containing the DO channel
Output Information
Main unit Sub unit
When the system crashes or when a GM10 CPU error occurs When the system crashes, when a GM10 CPU error occurs, when a CPU error occurs in the expansion module of a sub unit,1 or when the connection between sub unit is disconnected2
1 Only the DO channel of the sub unit in which the CPU error occurred in its expansion module 2 Only the DO channel after the sub unit that was disconnected
For details on system crashes, see page 2-209 in section 2.29.5, "Notes on System Configuration".
Span Lower, Span Upper Specify 0 or 1. You cannot set the same value to Span Lower and Span Upper.
Unit Set the unit.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-63
2.7 Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)
Operation mode1
Setup Item Energize or De-energize1 Operation mode2 Hold2, 3 Relay action on ACK4 Relay deactivated interval2, 4
Selectable Range or Options
Energize, De-energize And, Or, Reflash Hold, Nonhold Normal, Reset 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s
1 You cannot set this when Type is set to Fail (fixed to De-energize). 2 You cannot set this when Type is set to Manual. 3 You cannot set this when Action is set to Reflash. 4 You can set this when Action is set to Reflash.
Default Value
Energize Or Nonhold Normal 500 ms
Energize/De-energize
Set whether to Energize or De-energize the DO output when an alarm occurs. When Type is set to Fail, Normal [De-energize] is selected, and you cannot change this.
Operation Mode
Options And Or Reflash
Description
Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, the GM notifies the occurrence of subsequent alarms after the relay is activated by the first alarm.
Hold
Set the DO channel output operation.
Options
Description
Hold
Holds the output relay at ON until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed.
Not held
Turns the output relay off when the alarm condition is released (returns to
normal condition).
Relay action on ACK
Set what the output state of the DO channel would be after an alarm ACK operation.
If Individual alarm ACK is set to On, this is set to Reset.
Options
Description
Normal Reset
The relay is deactivated when an alarm ACK is executed. If the condition for activating the alarm output relay is met in the next 100 ms, the relay will be activated. This operation is valid only when the alarm output relay is set to Hold. The relay is deactivated when an alarm ACK is executed. If the condition for activating the alarm output relay is met again, the relay will be activated.
Example:
An example of the relay action when alarm ACK is executed is shown below. In this example, the relay is set to Or and Hold.
Normal
Alarm 1 Alarm 2
Occurrence
Alarm ACK Occurrence
Activated Alarm output relay
Deactivated Relay is activated after 100 ms.
2-64
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Reset
Alarm 1 Alarm 2
2.7 Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)
1
Alarm ACK Occurrence
Occurrence
2
Activated
Alarm output relay
Deactivated Relay is activated on the next alarm occurrence.
3
Configuring the GM
Relay deactivated interval
Set the relay's not-active interval for reflash operation.
4
Explanation AND/OR Operation When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, you can select which condition below will activate the output relay. You can also specify AND operation for internal switches. · AND: Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously · OR: Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring
Reflash When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, this function notifies the occurrence of subsequent alarms after the relay is activated by the first alarm. When subsequent alarms occur, the output relay is released temporarily. The duration for which the relays are deactivated can be set to 500 ms, 1 s, or 2 s. Relays set to Reflash will operate using Or and Nonhold settings.
Energize or De-energize Operation You can select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an alarm occurs. If you select de-energize, the alarm output relays will be in the same state when the GM is shut down as they are when an alarm occurs.
Non-hold/Hold The alarm output relay can be set to operate in the following fashion when the alarm condition is no longer met. · Turn OFF the relay output (nonhold). · Hold the relay at ON until the alarm ACK is executed (hold).
Alarm ACK Operation Acknowledging All Alarms The alarm acknowledge (alarm ACK) operation releases all alarm indications and relay outputs.
Acknowledging Individual Alarms Individual alarm ACK operation releases specific alarms.
For the behavior of alarm indication and alarm output relay when you execute an alarm ACK operation, see the next page.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-65
2.7 Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)
Alarm
DO output relay (Reflash on) DO output relay (Reflash off)
Alarm
DO Output Relay Operation The DO output relay operation is shown below.
Reflash
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Alarm
occurrence release
Non-hold/Hold Alarm ACK
Display Hold Non-hold
Alarm
500 ms, 1 s, 2 s
(when a relay is set to OR logic) AND/OR Channel 1
Normal Alarm Normal Activated
Channel 2
Deactivated
Alarm ACK
Non-hold
Relay action on ACK Normal
DO output relay or Internal switch
AND OR
(You can set AND/OR for the DO output relay and internal switch.)
Energize or De-energize
When power is Normal
shut down
operation
When an alarm is occurring
Energize NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
De-energize NO C NC
NO C NC
NO C NC
Relay operation when Fail is specified
When power is turned off
When a failure occurs
Normal operation
DO output relay
Hold
Non-hold
Hold
Activated Deactivated
Activated Deactivated
Activated Deactivated
Relay is activated after 100 ms.
Relay is deactivated until the next alarm occurs.
Relay action on ACK Reset
NO C NC
NO C NC
NO: Normally Opened C: Common NC: Normally Closed
NO C NC
DO Output Relay Operation during an Error
When an error (FAIL) occurs in the system, the DO output relay is de-energized. When an error occurs, the DO output relay is de-energized in the following manner.
When the system crashes
When a CPU error occurs in a data acquisition module When a CPU error occurs in an expansion module
When a connection between expandable I/Os are disconnected
The DO output relay of the main unit is de-energized. The DO output relays of all sub units are de-energized. The DO output relay of the main unit is de-energized. The DO output relays of all sub units are de-energized. The DO output relay of the main unit continues normal operation. The DO output relays of sub units in which the error did not occur continue normal operation. The DO output relay of the sub unit in which the error occurred is de-energized. The DO output relay of the main unit continues normal operation. The DO output relays of the sub unit that was disconnected and those of subsequent units are de-energized. Normal operation resumes when the connection recovers.
2-66
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.7.2
Setting the Display
2.7 Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > DO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0701-0706) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: DO channel settings > Channel range (display example: 07010706) > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color)
Default Value --
Color
Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display. For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation Example 2" on page 2-14.
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100 %
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper
Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-67
2.7 Configuring DO Channels (Digital output channels)
Bar graph base position
Setup Item Bar graph base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
Default Value Lower
Bar graph base position Set the bar graph base position. This setting is applied on the bar graph display.
For display examples, see the bar graph settings on page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
Display characters of each value
Setup Item 0
1
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
0 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 0.
1 Set the character string to display when the measured value is 1.
For usage examples, see page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
2-68
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.8 Configuring the Control Function and Program
1
Function (/PG option) (Release number 4 and
later)
2
For details on configuring the control function and protection function, see the Loop
Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-
31EN). For details on how to set program patterns, see the SMARTDAC+ STANDARD Hardware
3
Configurator User's Manual (IM 04L61B01-02EN).
Configuring the GM
4
5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-69
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
2.9.1
Configure math channels. You can define expressions using measured data and computed data as variables, compute expressions, and display and save the results. When the measurement mode is set to High speed or Dual interval, there is a limit to the number of math channels at scan intervals shorter than 100 ms.
For limitations, see the GM Data Acquisition System General Specifications (GS 04L55B01-01EN).
Setting Basic Computation Operations (Error indications, operation at start, overflow handling, PSUM overflow* handling)
* Release number 3 and later
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Math channel settings > Math action settings Hardware configurator: Math channel settings > Math action settings
Description
Setup Item Value on Error START key (3s) action STOP key (3s) action
Selectable Range or Options
+Over, Over Off, Start, Reset + Start Off, Stop
Default Value
+Over Start Off
Value on Error Set how to display computation errors.
START key (3s) action, STOP key (3s) action
Set how the GM operates when the START key or STOP key is held down for 3 seconds or
longer.
Options
Description
Off
Computation does not start or stop even when the START/STOP key is held
down.
Start
Computation starts when the START key is held down.
Reset + Start
Computation starts when the START key is held down. If computation is
already in progress, it is reset.
Stop
Computation stops when the STOP key is held down.
Value on Overflow
Setup Item SUM, AVE MAX, MIN, P-P
Selectable Range or Options Error, Skip, Limit Over, Skip
Default Value Skip Over
SUM, AVE
Set how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the SUM or AVE computation of
TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation and rolling average.
Options
Description
Error Skip
Sets the computation result to computation error. Discards overflow data and continues the computation.
Limit
Replaces overflow data with the limit value and continues the computation.
MAX, MIN, P-P
Set how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the MAX, MIN, or P-P computation of
TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Options
Description
Over Skip
Computes by using the overflow data. Discards overflow data and continues the computation.
2-70
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9.2
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
PSUM overflow handling
Setup Item Over/Rotate
Selectable Range or Options Rotate, Over
1
Default Value Rotate
Over/Rotate
2
Set the handling of instances when the pulse integration result exceeds the displayable
Configuring the GM
range of the math channel.
Options
Description
Over
Minimum value: When the value falls below the minimum value, set the result to
-9999999
overflow and stop the computation.
3
(Computed result: -OVER)
Maximum value: When the value falls below the minimum value, set the result to
99999999
overflow and stop the computation.
Rotate
(Computed result: +OVER) Minimum value: 0 When the value falls below the minimum value, continue the
4
computation by assuming the value of the next count to be the
maximum value.
Maximum value: When the value exceeds the maximum value, continue the
99999999
computation by assuming the value of the next count to be the minimum value.
5
Setting Expressions
Math Channel Range
GM10-1: A001 to A100 GM10-2: A001 to A200*
* Release number 3 and later
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Math channel settings > Channel range (display example: A001-A020) > Calculation expression
Hardware configurator: Math channel settings > Channel range (display example: A001-A020) > Calculation expression
Description
Math range
Setup Item On/Off Calculation expression* Decimal place* Span Lower* Span Upper* Unit*
Selectable Range or Options Off/On Character string (up to 120 characters) 0/1/2/3/4/5 9999999 to 99999999 9999999 to 99999999
Character string (up to 6 characters, A a # 1 )
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
Default Value
Off 0001 2 0.00 100.00 --
On/Off
Set the channels that you want to use to On. Computation is performed every scan interval, starting with the smallest channel number. Example: If you specify A002=A001+A003, the value of the previous scan interval is used for A003.
Calculation expression
Set the expression. In computations, measured values are handled as values without units. For example, if the measured data from channel 0001 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 0002 is 20 V, the computed result of 0001 + 0002 is 40.
Note
Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-71
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Data That Can Be Used in Expressions
You can use the data shown below in expressions.
Data
Notation
I/O channel data Math channel data1
0001 or the like A001 or the like
Constant Variable constant4
K001 to K100 W001 to W100
Integer data
Z000 to Z999
Logic math data4, 5
LM01 to LM50
Communication channel data2 GM10-1: C001 to C300
GM10-2: C001 to C500
Communication channel raw GM10-1: RC001 to RC300
data2
GM10-2: RC001 to RC500
(release number 3 and later)
Internal switch status
S001 to S100
Flag
F01 to F20
Recording status
GM10-1: REC01 to REC063 GM10-2: REC01 to REC123
Description
Specify channel numbers. Specify channel numbers. Values. Values. Integers. Specify with a logic math number. Specify communication channel numbers. Specify communication channel numbers (see "Handling of Math Channel Data (Difference between Cxxx and RCxxx)"). 1 or 0. 1 or 0. Use the event action function to set the flag (for details, see page 2-135 in section 2.20, "Configuring the Event Action Function"). Recording (1), not recording (0). If the multi-batch function (release number 3 and later, /BT option) is not in use, "REC01" shows the recording (memory sampling) status. If the multibatch function is in use, "REC01" to "REC12" show the recording (memory sampling) status of each batch group. Recording status of invalid batch groups is 0.
1 The /MT option is required. 2 The /MC option is required. 3 REC02 to REC12 are available in release number 3 and later. 4 Release number 4 and later 5 Can be used only for logic math.
Only the types of data with marks in the table below can be used in TLOG, CLOG, and
PRE.
Data Comp. Type TLOG TLOG.PSUM CLOG PRE Other computations
I/O channel
*
Math Communication
channel
channel
Constant/ Variable constant
Internal switch
Flag Recording Integer
status
data
Bad examples: TLOG.SUM(S01), CLOG.AVE(0001.0002.K01), PRE(S01) * GX90XP pulse input module only
Decimal Place Set the decimal place for span lower and span upper.
Span Lower, Span Upper Set the measurement range. The decimal place is determined by the Decimal place setting.
Unit Set the unit of computed values.
2-72
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
TLOG
Setup Item Timer type Timer No. Sum scale Reset
Selectable Range or Options
Timer, Match Time Timer 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,* 6,* 7,* 8,* 9,* 10,* 11,* 12* Off, sec, min, hour Off, On
Default Value
Timer 1 Off Off
* Release number 3 and later
Timer type Set the timer type.
Timer No. Set the number of the timer that you want to use.
Sum scale
Set the sum scale depending on the unit of measured values. Set the sum scale when using sum computation (TLOG.SUM). Example: If the unit of the measured value is "m3/min," select min.
If you select Off, the measured data is summed as-is once per scan interval.
Reset
To reset the TLOG computed value at each interval, select On. The figure below illustrates the reset operation of sum computation (TLOG.SUM). Example: Result of the TLOG.SUM computation When reset is On, the sum value is computed over each interval. When set to Off, the sum value from computation start is computed.
Timer timeout Reset: On
1 Reset
2 Reset
3 Reset
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Reset: Off
Rolling average
Setup Item On/Off Interval*
Number of samples*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 10s, 12s, 15s, 20s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6,in, 10min, 12min, 15min, 20min, 30min, 1h 1 to 1500
Default Value Off 10s
1
* You can set this when rolling average is On.
On/Off Set this to On to perform rolling average.
Interval
Set the sampling interval for performing rolling average. The sampling interval takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval. For example, if the sampling interval is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s, the actual sampling interval is 6 s.
Number of samples
Set the number of samples for performing rolling average. The rolling average time is equal to the sampling interval × the number of samples.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-73
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Note
· If the number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of samples immediately after computation is started, the average of the available data is computed.
· Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation. · If the computed data goes outside the upper and lower limits, the data is handled according to
the Value on Overflow setting. If set to Error or Skip, the computed data is not used in the rolling average. If set to Limit, the computed data is clipped at the limit value, and the rolling average is computed. The limits are "±100000000" ignoring the decimal point. The decimal place is the same as that of the span lower limit.
Explanation
TLOG Computation TLOG computation determines the sum, maximum, minimum, average, or the difference between the maximum and minimum of a specific channel for each interval determined by a timer.
Computation Data Dropout
A computation data dropout occurs if the computation is not completed within the scan interval. · When a computation data dropout occurs, the computed data of the scan interval in which
the dropout occurred is set to the data immediately before the dropout. · If computation data dropout occurs frequently, reduce the load on the CPU by reducing
the number of math channels or setting a longer scan interval. · In report computation (integration, average) and TLOG (SUM, AVE), the most recent
value is summed for the number of computation data dropout occurrences. · In pulse integration (TLOG.PSUM), integration is performed without being affected by
computation data dropouts.
Numeric Display and Recording
The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point. The decimal place corresponds to the decimal place of the lower limit span of the math channel. On the numeric display, values are displayed if the computed result is within the above range regardless of the upper and lower limits of span. The following table indicates special displays.
Display/Recording
Computed Data Status
+Over
· +Display over: When a computed result exceeds 99999999
· +Computation over: When a value exceeds approximately 1.79E+308 in
the middle of the computation
· When a computation error* occurs (you can select +Over or Over.)
-Over
· Display over: When a computed result is less than 9999999 · Computation over: When a value is less than approximately 1.79E+308 in the middle of the computation · When a computation error* occurs (you can select +Over or Over.)
* Computation error occurs when the following computation is carried out. · /0, SQR(X), or LOG(X) · If a channel number set to skip or Off is used in the equation · If error data is used in the equation
Special Data Processing
This section explains the handling of special data in TLOG computation, CLOG computation, and reports.
2-74
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Power Failure Operation (TLOG and Reports)
1
If a power failure occurs when the report function is enabled or in the middle of the TLOG
computation, the report operation and TLOG computation resume when the GM recovers
from the power failure. The operation varies depending on whether the GM recovers from
the power failure before or after the time to create a report or the TLOG interval timeout.
Time of Recovery
Operation
2
Configuring the GM
After the time to create The report data is created immediately after the GM recovers. The
the data
measured data up to when the power failure occurred is used to create
the report. When the time to create the next report data arrives, the data
after the recovery is used. The interval timer for TLOG data expires
3
immediately after the GM recovers.
Before the time to create After the GM recovers, report data is created at the normal time to create
the data
the data.
The measured data excluding the power failure period is used to create
the report.
4
The interval timer for TLOG data expires after the GM recovers.
Error Data Handling (TLOG, CLOG, and Reports)
If an error occurs in the channel data, the error data is discarded, and the computation continues. If all the data are in error, an error results. The following types of data are considered error data. · Channels set to skip or Off. · The measured result on an I/O channel is error (A/D converter failure, etc.). · I/O channel input is in a burnout condition. · The computed result on a math channel is error.
Handling of Overflow Data*
*Refers to over range on an I/O channel, computation overflow on a math channel, and over range on a communication channel.
For TLOG, CLOG, and Reports
When the channel data is overflow data, the GM handles it as follows:
Computation Type Average value or sum value
Maximum, minimum, Maximum minimum
Description
Set the handling to Error, Skip, or Limit. Error: Sets the computation result to computation error. Skip: Discards overflow data and continues the computation. Limit: Replaces overflow data with the limit value and continues the
computation. Limit value: Measurement channels: Upper or lower limit of the selectable range or the scale upper or lower limit Math channels, communication channels: Span upper or lower limit Set the handling to Over or Skip. Over: Computes by using the overflow data. Skip: Discards overflow data and continues the computation.
For Multiplication and Relation Computation EQ and NE
Computation Type Multiplication
.EQ. .NE.
Computation
0*(+Over) 0*(Over) (+Over)*0 (Over)*0 (+Over).EQ.(+Over) (Over).EQ.(Over) (+Over).NE.(+Over) (Over).NE.(Over)
Computed Result
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-75
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Handling of Math Channel Data (Difference between Cxxx and RCxxx)
The differences in how computation on communication channels is handled are explained below. · Cxxx uses the measured results of communication input from a PC or the like (display
values of communication channel) in computation. · RCxxx uses communication input from a PC or the like (display values of communication
channel) directly in computation.
Communication channel/ display value
Communication channel raw data
-Over
-1.00E+50
+Over
1.00E+50
3.14159 12566370
Measurement processing
3.1415926 1256637E+08
Communication
input
PC or the like
0.00000
1.380648E-23
0.00000
1.602177E-19
Acquired through C
Acquired through RC
Value to use in the calculation processing on the computation channel
Cxxx -Over
RCxxx -1.00E+50
+Over
1.00E+50
3.14159
3.1415926
12566370
1256637E+08
0.00000
1.380648E-23
0.00000
1.602177E-19
Measurement processing
Computation channel display value
Cxxx
RCxxx
-Over
-Over
+Over
+Over
3.14159
3.14159
12566370
12566370
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.00000
Computational Processing When the Measurement Mode Is Set to Dual interval · Computational is performed at the scan interval of the measurement group set with the
master scan interval. If a channel in a measurement group using a scan interval different from the master scan interval is used, it is indefinite as to which measured value of this channel in time will be used for the difference calculation. · Pulse integration (TLOG.PSUM) is performed only when the measured value of the channel used in the calculation expression is updated. However, computation is performed at the master scan interval.
Computational Processing When the Measurement Mode Is Set to High Speed Computation is performed at the scan interval, but computational processing is performed at 100 ms.
2-76
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9.3
Writing Expressions
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Common Items
Follow the rules below when writing expressions. · Use up to 120 characters to write expressions. · The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses. · Specify channels in expressions using channel numbers.
Example: 0001, 0012, A001, C001 · The "0" in the top digit of I/O channel numbers (0101), math channel numbers (A001),
communication channel numbers (C010), constants (K), internal switch numbers (S), flags (F), variable constants (W), integer data (Z), and recording status (REC) can be omitted. Examples: 101, A1, C10, K1, S1, F1, REC1, W1, Z1 · The data of the previous scan is used in the computation for its own channel number and channel numbers greater than its own channel number in the expression. · Write special computations (HOLD, RESET, and CARRY) and conditional expressions at the beginning of expressions.
Order of Precedence in Computations
The order of precedence of computation in expressions is as follows:
Type
Computing Element
Function
ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), LN(), EXP(), TLOG.MAX(), TLOG.MIN(), TLOG.
AVE(), TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.P-P(), TLOG.PSUM(), CLOG.MAX(), CLOG.
MIN(), CLOG.AVE(), CLOG.SUM(), CLOG.P-P(), BIT, INT, SIN, COS,
CLOG.PAVE, CP.O2, CP.CO2
Special computation and PRE, HOLD, RESET, CARRY, [a?b:c]
conditional expression
Power
**
Logical negation
NOT
Multiplication and division *, /, MOD
Addition and subtraction +,
Greater than and less than .GT. (or >), .LT. (or <), .GE. (or >=), .LE. (or <=)
Equal and not equal
.EQ. (or =), .NE. (or <>)
Logical product
AND
Logical sum and exclusive OR, XOR
logical sum
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-77
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Limitations
The following limitations exists in expressions.
Type TLOG computation
Limitation A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses.
Only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single expression.
CLOG computation
The number of channels that can be written in the parentheses is up to 30
channels.
A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses.
Only one CLOG computation can be specified in a single expression.
PRE HOLD(a):b
A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses. Can only be written at the beginning of an expression. Only one HOLD computation can be specified in a single expression.
RESET(a):b
Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
Only one RESET computation can be specified in a single expression.
CARRY(a):b
Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
Only one CARRY computation can be specified in a single expression.
Only TLOG.SUM can be written in b.
Conditional equation [a?b:c] RESET, CARRY, or HOLD cannot be written to a, b, or c. Other computing elements cannot be combined (example: [a?b:c]+0001) However, conditional equations can be specified for a, b, and c.
2-78
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Basic Arithmetic
Expression Examples · Addition 0001+0002
(Determines the sum of the measured values of channels 0001 and 0002) · Subtraction 00010002
(Determines the difference of the measured values of channels 0001 and 0002) · Multiplication 0001*K003
(Multiplies constant K003 to the measured value of channel 0001) · Division 0001/K002
(Divides the measured value of channel 0001 by constant K002)
Power and Other Computations
Expression Examples · Power 0001**0002
(Determines the measured value of channel 0001 to the power of the measured value of channel 0002) · Square root SQR(0002)
(Determines the square root of the measured value of channel 0002) · Absolute value ABS(0002)
(Determines the absolute value of the measured value of channel 0002) · Common logarithm LOG(0001)
(Determines the common logarithm (log10) of the measured value of channel 0001) · Natural logarithm LN(0001)
(Determines the natural logarithm of the measured value of channel 0001) · Exponent EXP(0001)
(Determines e to the power of the measured value of channel 0001)
Relational Computation
Expression Examples
0002.LT.0003, 0002<0003
If the measured value of channel 0002 is less than the measured value of channel 0003, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0. 0002.GT.0003, 0002>0003
If the measured value of channel 0002 is greater than the measured value of channel 0003, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0. 0002.EQ.0003, 0002=0003
If the measured value of channel 0002 is equal to the measured value of channel 0003, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0. 0002.NE.0003, 0002<>0003
If the measured value of channel 0002 is not equal to the measured value of channel 0003, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0. 0002.GE.0003, 0002>=0003
If the measured value of channel 0002 is greater than or equal to the measured value of channel 0003, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0. 0002.LE.0003, 0002<=0003
If the measured value of channel 0002 is less than or equal to the measured value of channel 0003, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-79
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Logical Computation
Checks whether the two data values, e1 and e2 (e1 only for NOT), are zeros or non-zeros, and computes according to the conditions.
AND
Logical product
(Syntax)
e1ANDe2
(Condition)If the two data values e1 and e2 are both non-zeros, the computed result is
1. Otherwise, it is 0.
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0 e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 0, e2 = 0 e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 = 0, e2 0 e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 0, e2 0 e1ANDe2 = 1
OR
Logical sum
(Syntax)
e1ORe2
(Condition)If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zeros, the computed result is 0.
Otherwise, it is 1.
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0 e1ORe2 = 0
e1 0, e2 = 0 e1ORe2 = 1
e1 = 0, e2 0 e1ORe2 = 1
e1 0, e2 0 e1ORe2 = 1
XOR
Exclusive OR
(Syntax)
e1XORe2
(Condition)If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and non-zero or non-zero and
zero, the computed result is 1. Otherwise, it is 0.
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0 e1XORe2 = 0
e1 0, e2 = 0 e1XORe2 = 1
e1 = 0, e2 0 e1XORe2 = 1
e1 0, e2 0 e1XORe2 = 0
NOT
Logical negation
(Syntax)
NOTe1
(Condition)
The result is the inverse of the status of data e1 (zero or non-zero).
(Explanation) e1 = 0 NOTe1 = 1
e1 0 NOTe1 = 0
Expression Example
0001-0002OR0003.GT.0004 Determines the OR of the computed results of "00010002" and "0003.GT.0004".
2-80
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
TLOG Computation
TLOG computation determines the sum, maximum, minimum, average, or the difference between the maximum and minimum of a specific channel for each interval determined by a timer. In the explanation below, an expression containing a computing element, an internal switch (S), and a flag (F) cannot be written in e1. In addition, only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing expression.
TLOG.MAX( )
Maximize (Syntax) (Condition)
TLOG.MAX(e1) Determines the maximum value of channel e1.
TLOG.MIN( )
Minimize (Syntax) (Condition)
TLOG.MIN(e1) Determines the minimum value of channel e1.
TLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax)
TLOG.AVE(e1)
(Condition) Determines the average value of channel e1.
TLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.SUM(e1)
(Condition) Determines the sum of channel e1.*
* Only the input channels of GX90XP pulse input modules
TLOG.PSUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.PSUM(e1)
(Condition) Determines the sum of channel e1.
TLOG.P-P( )
Maximum minimum value
(Syntax)
TLOG.P-P(e1)
(Condition) Determines the maximum - minimum value of channel e1.
Expression Example TLOG.MAX(0001)+K001*SQR(0002)
Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed TLOG.AVE(0001)+TLOG.AVE(0002) Reason: TLOG appears twice in one equation.
TLOG.AVE(ABS(0001)) Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-81
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
CLOG Computation
Only data of I/O channels, math channels, and communication channels can be used in CLOG computations. Up to 30 channels can be written in the parentheses. In the explanation below, an expression containing a computing element cannot be written to e1, etc. In addition, only one CLOG computation can be specified in a single computing expression.
CLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax)
CLOG.SUM(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition)Determines the sum of the data of channels e1, e2, e4, e5, and e6 that are
measured at the same time.
CLOG.MAX( )
Maximize
(Syntax)
CLOG.MAX(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition)Determines the maximum value among the data of channels e1, e2, e4, e5,
and e6 that are measured at the same time.
CLOG.MIN( )
Minimize
(Syntax)
CLOG.MIN(e1.e2.e5.e7)
(Condition)Determines the minimum value among the data of channels e1, e2, e5, and
e7 that are measured at the same time.
CLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax)
CLOG.AVE(e1-e6)
(Condition)Determines the average value among the data of channels e1 to e6 that are
measured at the same time.
CLOG.P-P( )
Maximum minimum value
(Syntax)
CLOG.P-P(e1.e2.e5.e7)
(Condition)Determines the difference between the maximum and minimum values among
the data of channels e1, e2, e5, and e7 that are measured at the same time.
CLOG.PAVE( ) (Release number 4 and later)
Average (Syntax) CLOG.PAVE(e1.e2.e3.e4.e5-e7) (Condition)Determines the average value by excluding input that falls outside a given
width from the pattern (SP) during program operation. For e1 to e4 only, constants and variable constants can be used.
e1:
e2: e3: e4: e5 to e7:
Calculation method switch flag (decimals rounded, computed as CLOG.AVE if zero) Loop number (decimals truncated) Effective width for ramp Effective width for soak Channels for calculating the average
Expression Example CLOG.MAX(0001.0002.A004-A006)+K001*SQR(0002)
CLOG.PAVE(W001.K001.K002.K003.0207.0208) · During periods in which measured values are unstable such as during startup, W001
is set to 0, and the average of all input values is determined. During period in which measured values are stable, W001 is set to 1, and the average is determined from the input values within the effective width.
Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed CLOG.AVE(0001.0003.0005)+CLOG.AVE(0002.0004.0006) Reason: CLOG appears twice in one equation.
CLOG.AVE(001.ABS(001)) Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.
2-82
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Special Computations
1
PRE( )
(Syntax)
PRE(e1)
(Condition) Determines the previous value of e1.
2
HOLD(a):b
(Syntax)
HOLD(a):b
(Condition)When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value. Otherwise, the
previous computed value is held. Expression Example
3
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(0001) is carried out to derive the computed value. When [0001] exceeds K01, the previous computed value is held.
Configuring the GM
HOLD(0001.GT.K001):TLOG.SUM(0001)
4
K001
RESET(a):b
(Syntax)
RESET(a):b
(Condition)When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value. Otherwise,
the previous computed value of b is reset, and b is carried out to derive the
computed value.
Expression Example
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(0001) is carried out to derive the computed value. When [A001] exceeds K01, the previous computed value is reset, and TLOG.SUM(0001) is carried out.
RESET(A001.GT.K001):TLOG.SUM(0001)
K001
Reset
5
App Index
CARRY(a):b
(Syntax)
CARRY(a):b
(Condition)Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the computed value X of b is
less than a, the computed result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a, the
computed result is the excess (X a).
(Explanation)When a value such as the flow rate is summed and the threshold value is
reached or exceeded, the sum value is reset while carrying over the amount
that exceeded the threshold value.
Expression Example Expression that sums the values of channel 0001 and resets the value when it reaches or
exceeds 10000.
K001=10000 CARRY(K001):TLOG.SUM(0001)
K001
Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed 0002+HOLD(K001):TLOS.SUM(0001) Reason: HOLD is not at the beginning of the expression.
RESET(A001.GT.K001):TLOG.SUM(0001)+RESET(A001.GT.K001):0002 Reason: RESET appears twice in one equation.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-83
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Conditional Expression
[a?b:c]
(Syntax)
[0001.GT.K001?0002:0003]
(Condition)If the measured value of channel 0001 is greater than constant K001, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 0002. Otherwise, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 0003.
Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed
[0001.GT.K001?0002:0003]*K002 Reason: Used in combination with another computing element.
Nested Conditional Expressions
A conditional expression can be written to Expression1, Expression2, and Expression3 in the equation [Expression1?Expression2:Expression3]. For example, the following expression is allowed: [Equation1?[Equation2-1?Equation2-2:Equation2-3]:[Equation3- 1?Equation32:Equation3-3]]. Expressions can be nested as long as the number of characters of the expression does not exceed 120 characters.
Bit Operation
BIT
(Syntax)
BIT.Bnn (0001)
(Condition)Assuming that the channel 0001 data (positive integer) is bit data, the nnth
(B00 to B31) bit is output. If the target bit is 1, the computed result is 1. If
the target bit is 0, the computed result is 0.
The higher digit "0" in "Bnn" cannot be omitted.
(Explanation)The status information (e.g., test information) of a lower-level device can be
extracted via Modbus communication and processed using bit operation.
The result can be used in alarms, event action, and so on.
If the value includes a decimal, the value is rounded to the nearest integer
before performing calculation.
If the input data is 0 or a negative number, the output value is 0.
If the input value is not a number (e.g., ±Over or error), the computed result
is error. The error display varies depending on the Value on Error setting in
Math action settings.
If computation is performed on a communication channel (maximum data
value: 99999999), the valid bit specification is up to B26.
Example when the data value is 3 (0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0011)
For B01
BIT.B01(C001) = 1
For B02
BIT.B02(C001) = 0
Integer Extraction Operation
INT
(Syntax)
INT (0001)
(Condition)Determines the maximum integer that does not exceed the channel 0001 data
value. If the channel 0001 data value is 123.45, the computed result is 123.
(Explanation) Operation example
When channel 0001 is 4.3
INT (0001) = 4.0
When channel 0001 is 5.5
INT (0001) = 5.0
When channel 0001 is -2.2
INT (0001) = -3.0
When channel 0001 is -3.8
INT (0001) = -4.0
2-84
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Remainder Extraction Operation
MOD
(Syntax)
0001.MOD.K001
(Condition)Determines the remainder when channel 0001 is divided by constant K001.
(Explanation)Operation example
When channel 0001 is 10 and channel K001 is 3
0001 .MOD. K001 = 1
When channel 0001 is 7.5 and channel K001 is -2
0001 .MOD. K001 = -0.5
When channel 0001 is -6 and channel K001 is 2.5
0001 .MOD. K001 = 1.5
When channel 0001 is -8.5 and channel K001 is -4.5
0001 .MOD. K001 = -4.0
Trigonometric Functions
SIN
(Syntax)
SIN (0001)
(Condition)Determines the sine value assuming the channel 0001 data value to be an
angle in degrees.
COS
(Syntax)
COS (0001)
(Condition)Determines the cosine value assuming the channel 0001 data value to be an
angle in degrees.
Note
If the input data to a trigonometric function is in radians, you can use the following equation to convert into degrees. (degrees) [°] = (radians) [rad] × 180 / Pi
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
CP Calculation (Release number 4 and later)
CP.O2
(Syntax) CP.O2 (e1.e2.e3) (Condition)e1: Furnace temperature (727.7°C to 1500.0°C)
e2: CO partial pressure (0 vol% to 100 vol%) e3: Zirconia O2 sensor electromotive force (0 V to 2 V) (Explanation)Determines the CP value [wt%] from the zirconia O2 sensor electromotive force, CO partial pressure, and furnace temperature. If a value outside the range is input in e1 to e3, the calculated result will be 2.00000. CP.CO2
(Syntax) CP.CO2 (e1.e2.e3) (Condition) e1: Furnace temperature (727.7°C to 1500.0°C)
e2: CO partial pressure (0 vol% to 100 vol%) e3: CO2 partial pressure (0 vol% to 100 vol%) (Explanation)Determines the CP value [wt%] from the O2 partial pressure, CO partial pressure, and furnace temperature. If a value outside the range is input in e1 to e3, the calculated result will be 2.00000.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-85
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
2.9.4 Setting Alarms
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Math channel settings > Channel range (display example: A001-A020) > Alarm
Hardware configurator: Setting tab > Math channel settings > Channel range (display example: A001-A020) > Alarm
Description
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Setup Item On/Off Type1
Value1 Hysteresis1, 3 Logging1 Output type1 Output No.2
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On H: High limit, L: Low limit, T: Delay high limit, t: Delay low limit 9999999 to 99999999 Numeric value (0 to 100000) Off, On Off, Relay, Internal switch DO channel or internal switch
1 You can set this when On/Off is set to On. 2 You can set this when Output type is not set to Off. 3 You can set this when the type is set to H:High limit or L:Low limit.
Default Value Off H: High limit
0.00 0.00 On Off --
On/Off To use an alarm level (1 to 4), set this to On.
Type
Set the alarm type. For details, see page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
Value
Set the alarm value for the specified alarm type.
Options
Value
H, L
Within 9999999 to 99999999
excluding the decimal point.
T, t
Same as H and L
2-86
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.9.5
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Hysteresis Set this to establish an offset between the value used to activate and release alarms.
Logging Set this On to display an alarm (notify you) when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, when an alarm occurs, the GM outputs signals to alarm output DO channels or internal switches but does not display the alarm. Alarms are also not recorded in the alarm summary.
Output type Set the alarm output destination type.
Output No. Set the number of the DO channel or internal switch to output alarms to.
Alarm delay
Setup Item Hour Minute Second
Selectable Range or Options
0 to 24 0 to 59 0 to 59
Default Value
0 0 10
Hour, Minute, and Second
Set the alarm delay value. These values are valid when the delay high limit or delay low limit is in use.
Setting the Display
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Math channel settings > Channel range (display example: A001-A020) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: Math channel settings > Channel range (display example: A001-A020) > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-87
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color)
Default Value --
Color Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display.
For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation Example 2" on page 2-14.
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100 %
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
For display examples, see page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
Bar graph
Setup Item Base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
Default Value Lower
Base position Set the bar graph base position. This setting is applied on the bar graph display.
For bar graph display examples, see page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
2-88
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Color scale band
Setup Item Band area Color
Display position Lower Display position Upper
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
Selectable Range or Options
Off, In, Out 24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color) Span Lower to Span Upper Span Lower to Span Upper
Default Value Off
0.00 1.00
Band area
Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the scale. This
setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Options
Description
Off
Disables the function.
In
Displays the area inside using the color band.
Out
Displays the area outside using the color band.
Color Set the display color.
For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation Example 2" on page 2-14.
Display position Lower and Display position Upper Set the display position. Set a value within the span or scale range.
For color band display examples, see page 2-37 in section 2.3.3, "Setting the Display".
Alarm point mark
Setup Item Indicate on scale Mark kind Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On Alarm, Fixed 24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color)
* You can set this when the Mark kind is set to Fixed.
Default Value On Alarm
Indicate on scale
Set this to On to display alarm point marks on the scale. Set this to Off to not display them. This setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Mark kind
Options Alarm
Fixed
Description
Displayed normally in green. Displayed in the specified color when an alarm occurs. Displayed with a fixed color.
Mark Shape or
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color When Mark kind is set to Fixed, set the display colors of point marks for alarm levels 1 to 4.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-89
2.9 Configuring Math Channels (/MT option)
2.9.6 Setting Constants to Use in Computation
2.9.7
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Math channel settings > Constant Hardware configurator: Math channel settings > Constant
Description
Number of constant Displays a range of constant numbers (K001 to K100).
Constant
Setup Item K001 to K100
Selectable Range or Options
9.999999E+29 to 9.999999E+29 9.9999999E+29 to 1.0000000E30, 0, 1.0000000E30 to 9.9999999E+29
Default Value 0
K001 to K100
Set the constant. The number of significant digits of a constant is eight. When specifying a constant using exponential notation, set the mantissa using up to 8 digits and the exponent using up to 2 digits. The constants in the range specified by Number of constant are displayed.
Setting Variable Constants to Use in Computation
Variable constants are constants that can be varied even when computation or recording is in progress. They can be used for math and logic math. You can vary variable constants on the setting screen or tuning screen (when the PID control module is installed).
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Math channel settings > Variable constant Configurator: Math channel settings > Variable constant
Description
Number of constant Displays a range of constant numbers (W001 to W100) to be set (in units of 10 numbers).
Value
Setup Item W001 to W100
Selectable Range or Options
9.999999E+29 to 9.999999E+29 9.9999999E+29 to 1.0000000E30, 0, 1.0000000E30 to 9.9999999E+29
Default Value 0
W001 to W100 Set the constant. The number of significant digits of a constant is eight. When specifying a constant using exponential notation, set the mantissa using up to 8 digits and the exponent using up to 2 digits. The constants in the range specified by Number of constant are displayed.
Note
When advance security is enabled, variable constants cannot be varied when recording is in progress.
2-90
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.10 Configuring Logic Math (/MT option)
1
Set the logic math operation. Logic math is a function that outputs calculated results as 0 or 1 to relays (DOs) or internal switches.
2.10.1 Logic Math Number, Output Destination, Calculation expressions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Logic math settings Hardware configurator: Logic math settings
Description Logic math number Up to 50 numbers can be set. Shows the number (LM01 to LM50) to assign logic math to.
Output
Setup Item Type Number
Selectable Range or Options Off, Relay,1 Internal switch2 DO channel or internal switch
1 You can set this when the range type of the DO channel is set to Manual. 2 You can set this when the internal switch type is set to Manual.
Default Value Off
Type Select the output of the logic math number to use.
Number
Select the output number of the calculated result. You can only select internal switch numbers, relay (DO) channels, or PID control module's DO with the type set to manual.
Expression
Type Auxiliary operation Basic arithmetic Relational operation Logical operation Conditional operation Bit operation
Computing Element +, +, -, *, / .GT., .GE., .LT., .LE., .EQ., .NE., >, >=, <, <=, =, <> AND, OR, NOT, XOR [expression 1 ? expression 2 : expression 3] BIT.Bnn()
Up to 120 characters can be entered in a calculation expression.
Data That Can Be Used in Expressions See page 2-71 in section 2.9.2, "Setting Expressions".
Note
You cannot change the calculation expression while recording is in progress.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-91
2.10 Configuring Logic Math (/MT option)
Description
The internal switch or relay output is 0 when the calculated result of logic math is as follows (or 1 otherwise).
· When the calculated result is greater than 0.5 and less than 0.5 · When the calculated result is in error
Operation Interval
Computation and updating of the output operate at the scan interval. However, if the scan interval is less than 100 ms, it runs at 100 ms. If the measurement mode is set to dual interval, logic math runs according to the master scan interval.
Starting
Operation starts when the logic math setting is changed to a value other than off. It is not affected by the starting and stopping of math, recording or control.
About the Logic Math Data (LM)
Logic math data is used when you want the result of a logic math operation to be reflected in the operation of another logic math number in the same period. The function returns a 1 when the logic math operation outputs a 1 and 0 when the operation outputs a 0. The function also returns a 0 when the output type of the specified logic math number is set to Off. The data cannot be used in the calculation expression of a math channel. LM values are retained only during the same scan interval.
Operating Conditions
The relay (DO channel) values used in logic math are displayed values (values that reflect energized or de-energized).
Logic math is applied to the internal switches and relays (DOs) after the next interval. If you want to reflect the results of logic math within the same interval, use logic math data (LM).
Example: Differences in the logic math results depending on the calculation expression
Settings Results
Logic math
Output
number
Output type
Output No.
LM01
Internal switch
1
LM02
Internal switch
2
LM03
Internal switch
3
First interval
Internal switch 1
Internal switch 2
Internal switch 3
Second interval
Internal switch 1
Internal switch 2
Internal switch 3
Third interval
Internal switch 1
Internal switch 2
Expression
Setting 1
Setting 2
W001
W001
S001
LM01
S002
LM02
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Internal switch 3
1
1
2-92
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.10 Configuring Logic Math (/MT option)
If multiple logic math operations set the same output, the result of the logic math with the
1
largest logic math number is reflected. However, for the logic math data (LM), the calculated
result of that number is reflected.
Example: When multiple logic math operations specify the same output
Settings
2
Logic math 1 (LM01)
Configuring the GM
Output type: Internal switch
Output No.: 1
Calculation expression: W001 (W001 is set to 1)
3
Logic math 2 (LM02)
Output type: Internal switch
Output No.: 1
Calculation expression: W002 (W002 is set to 0)
4
Values after calculation
Internal switch 1 = 0
LM01=1
LM02=0
5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-93
2.11 Setting Display Conditions
2.11.1
Set the display conditions.
Setting the Trend Interval
This setting is not available when the measurement mode is High speed and Dual interval.
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Display settings > Trend interval Hardware configurator: Display settings > Trend interval
Description
Setup Item Trend interval [/div] (recording interval)1
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
5s (100ms),2, 3 10s (200ms),2, 3 15s (500ms),2 1min (2s)
30s (1s), 1min (2s), 2min (4s), 5min (10s), 10min
(20s), 15min (30s), 20min (40s), 30min (1min),
1h (2min), 2h (4min), 4h (8min), 10h (20min)
1min (2s)
1 Does not appear if the recording mode is set to Event in basic settings under recording settings 2 Cannot be specified if an electromagnetic relay type module is in use (configured). 3 Cannot be specified if a low withstand voltage relay type module is in use (configured).
Trend interval [/div] Set the trend interval.
Relationship between the Scan Interval and Trend Interval
The shortest trend interval that you can specify varies depending on the scan interval.
Scan Interval 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s
Shortest Trend Interval 5 s 10 s 15 s 30 s 1 min 5 min
Explanation
If the recording mode is set to Event, the trend interval depends on the recording interval of event data.
2-94
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.11.2
2.11 Setting Display Conditions
Setting Display Groups
Assign channels and set the group name for each display group. Set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display.
If you want to use the multi-batch function (/BT option), see the multi-batch function manual (IM 04L51B01-03EN).
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Display settings > Group settings > Group No. (display example: 1-20)
Hardware configurator: Display settings > Group settings > Group No. (display example: 1-20)
Description
Group number Select the target group number. GM10-1: 50, GM10-2: 60
Group settings
Setup Item On/Off Group name
Scan group* Channel set
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 ) 1/2 Up to 20 channels
Default Value Off --
1 --
* You can set this when the measurement mode is set to Dual interval.
On/Off Set this to On to use the target group number.
Group name Set the group name.
Scan Group
When the measurement mode is set to dual interval, set the measurement group number to assign to the group.
Channel set
Select from AI channels, DI channels, DO channels, math channels (/MT option), and communication channels (/MC option). · In the Channel set dialog box, you can drag channels to change the displayed order of
the channels in the group. The order is applied on the monitor display. For the procedure, see "Operation Example 3" on page 2-15.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Trip line 1 to 4
Set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
On/Off Position Color
Off, On
Off
0 to 100 %
50
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, --
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray,
lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple,
black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray,
olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a user-
defined color (1 color)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-95
2.11 Setting Display Conditions
On/Off Set this to On to display trip lines. Position Set the display position in the range of 0 to 100% of the display width.
Color Set the display color.
2.11.3 Setting Messages
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Display settings > Message settings Hardware configurator: Display settings > Message settings
Description
Message number Displays the message number (1 to 100) to be set.
Message
Setup Item Message 1 to 100
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
Message 1 to 100 Assign a message to the message number.
2.11.4
Writing Messages You can recall preset messages and write them. With free messages, you can set messages when you need to write them. For the procedure, see "Writing Messages" on page 3-15.
Setting Trend Display Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Display settings > Trend settings Hardware configurator: Display settings > Trend settings
Description
Message
Setup Item Power-fail message
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
Power-fail message
Set this to On to write power-fail messages. When the GM recovers from a power failure, a message is written.
Options
Description
On
Automatically writes the message when the GM recovers from a power failure.
Example message:
"18:20:06 Power-fail message 2012/12/18 18:19:53"
Time of recovery
Time of power failure
Off
Disables the feature.
2-96
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.11 Setting Display Conditions
2.11.5 Turning the Operation from the Monitor Displays On and Off
1
Configuring the GM
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Display settings > Screen display settings
2
Hardware configurator: Display settings > Screen display settings
Description
Changing each value from monitoring
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
3
Default Value Off
On/Off Set this to On to enable users to change alarm values, perform alarm ACK (when individual
4
alarm ACK is enabled), and control DO or AO from the monitor displays (trend, digital, bar
graph, and overview)
For the procedure, see page 3-9 in section 3.1.2, "Monitoring the GM Data and
Controlling the GM from the Monitor Screen".
5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-97
2.12
Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)
Set the scan interval, A/D integrate, measurement groups, etc.
2.12.1
Setting the Scan Interval
When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval, see page 2-112 in section 2.14, "Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later)".
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Scan interval Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Scan interval
Description
Scan interval
Setup Item Scan interval
Selectable Range or Options 1ms,4 2ms,4 5ms,4 10ms,4 20ms,4 50ms,4 100ms,1, 3 200ms,1, 3 500ms,1 1s, 2s, 5s
Default Value 1 s2
1 Cannot be specified if an electromagnetic relay type analog input module is in use (configured). 2 2 s if an electromagnetic relay type analog input module is in use. 3 Cannot be specified if a low withstand voltage relay type analog input module is in use
(configured). 4 You can set this when the measurement mode is High speed.
Scan interval
Set the scan interval. The scan intervals that you can set are displayed depending on the
installed modules.
When the measurement mode is High speed and the scan interval is 1 ms or 2 ms, the
following limitations apply to the number of valid channels of high-speed universal type.
Scan interval 1ms 2ms
Channel limitations* All channels except channel 1 of each module are set to Skip. Channels 3 and 4 of each module are set to Skip.
* Channels set to skip as a result of changing the scan interval are not changed from display group channel settings or recording channel settings.
2-98
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.12 Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)
2.12.2 Setting the Over-range Detection Method
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Over-range Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Over-range
Description
Over-range
Setup Item Value on over-range
Selectable Range or Options Free, Over
Default Value Over
Value on over-range
Set how to detect over-range values on linearly scaled or square-rooted I/O channels. In either case, +over range occurs if the value excluding the decimal point exceeds 99999 and over range if it falls below 999999.
Options Free
Over
Description
The value is set to over range if the value is less than 5% of the measurable span range and +over range if the value is greater than 105%. The value is set to over range if the value is less than 5% of the span setting (Linear scaling or , Square root span) and +over range if the value is greater than 105%. They are displayed as Over and +Over. Example: If the linear scaling scale is 0.0 to 200.0, a value less than 10.0 results in a over range, and a value greater than 210.0 results in a +over range.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App
2.12.3 Setting the Operation Mode of a Module
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Module operation settings Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Module operation settings
Description
AI Modules
Operation mode
Setup Item Operation mode
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
AI modules other than 2ch Only, Low noise mode; 10ch Normal mode
those below
10ch Normal mode
4-wire RTD/resistor type
Electromagnetic relay type, low withstand voltage relay type High-speed universal
2ch mode (low noise), 6ch mode (normal) Fixed to 10ch mode
Cannot be set.
6ch mode (normal) 10ch mode
--
Operation mode Set the operation mode to use. For details on the operation modes, see the explanation.
DI Modules or DI/DO Modules
Operation mode
Setup Item Operation mode
Selectable Range or Options Remote, Normal
Default Value Normal
Operation mode Set the operation mode to use. For details on the operation modes, see the explanation.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-99
2.12 Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)
Explanation
2ch Mode and 6ch/10ch Mode (AI modules)
In 10ch mode, measurement is possible on CH1 to CH10. In 6ch mode, measurement is possible on CH1 to CH6. In 2ch mode, measurement is possible only on CH1 and CH2. (CH3 and higher channels are fixed to Skip.) In 6ch/10ch mode, when the scan interval is set to 100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is fixed at 1.67 ms. This prevents power frequency noise from being eliminated, causing measured values to wobble (especially for temperature). In 2ch mode, when the scan interval is 100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or 20 ms. This allows power frequency noise to be eliminated. Note that the selectable A/D integration times vary depending on the 2ch/6ch/10ch mode and scan interval settings.
Normal and Remote (DI modules)
Specify Remote to use the DI as a remote control input. When there are multiple DI modules, only one of them can be set to Remote. Remote can only be specified for a DI module or DI/DO module linked to the GM main unit. For normal DI input, specify Normal.
When using Event action, set to Remote. For remote control using event action, see page 2-135 in section 2.20, "Configuring the Event Action Function".
Operation mode DI input
Normal
1 0
DI channel
Record
Remote
DI channel
Record Remote control
Event action setting
2-100
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.12 Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)
2.12.4 Setting the A/D Integral Time (Other than high-speed AI or PID control
1
modules)
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Module operation settings Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Module operation settings
Description
A/D integrate
Setup Item A/D integrate
Selectable Range or Options Auto, 50Hz, 60Hz, Common1
Default Value Auto
1 You can specify Common when the scan interval is 500 ms or longer (1 s or longer for a low withstand voltage relay type).
A/D integrate
Set the module's A/D integration time. The available options appear depending on the scan
interval setting.
Options
Description
Auto
50Hz 60Hz Common
The GM automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the A/D integration time to 16.67 ms for 60 Hz and 20 ms for 50 Hz. However, if the module operation mode is 10ch/6ch and the scan interval is 100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is fixed at 1.67 ms. Sets the integration time to 20 ms. Sets the integration time to 16.67 ms. Sets the integration time to 16.67 ms, 20 ms, 36.67 ms, or 100 ms. Integration time and scan interval by module
Type
Universal Current (mA) input 4-wire RTD/resistance High withstand voltage Electromagnetic relay
Low withstand voltage relay
Integration time
36.67ms 100ms
16.67ms/20ms 36.67ms 100ms 36.67ms 100ms
Scan interval 10ch mode / 2ch mode 6ch mode 1s 2s or 5s
1s
--
2s
--
5s
--
2s
--
5s
--
Explanation
Integration Time of the A/D Converter
The GM uses an A/D converter to convert sampled analog signals to digital signals. The power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated by setting the integration time of the A/D converter to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle. Common (36.67 ms/100 ms) can specified to effectively eliminate power supply frequency noise for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-101
2.12 Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)
2.12.5 Setting the Noise Rejection (High-speed AI, PID control module) (Release number 4 and later)
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Module operation settings Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Module operation settings
Description
Noise rejection
Setup Item Noise rejection
Selectable Range or Options Auto, 50Hz, 60Hz, Common1
Default Value 2
1 Common can be set when the scan interval is longer than 100 ms. For PID control modules, this is fixed to Common.
2 Depends on the scan interval. Refer to the noise rejection that are available depending on the scan interval.
Noise rejection
Set the noise rejection. The available options appear depending on the scan interval setting.
For PID control modules, this is fixed to Common.
Options
Description
Auto
50Hz 60Hz Common
The GM automatically detects the power supply frequency and rejects 50 Hz noise for 50 Hz or 60 Hz noise for 60 Hz. However, noise is not rejected if the scan interval is set to 1 ms, 2 ms, 5 ms, or 10 ms. 50 Hz noise is rejected. 60Hz noise is rejected. 50 Hz and 60 Hz noise is rejected simultaneously.
Noise rejection that is available depending on the scan interval
Scan interval 1ms 2ms 5ms 10ms 20ms
50ms
100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s
Noise rejection that is available Auto
Default value Filter
Auto
None
Auto 50Hz 60Hz Auto 50Hz 60Hz Common
Auto Auto Common
None
50 Hz or 60 Hz auto selection 50Hz 60Hz 50 Hz and 60 Hz simultaneous rejection
2-102
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.12 Setting Measurement Conditions (Scan interval, A/D integrate, etc.)
2.12.6
Setting the Burnout Criteria
Set the upper and lower limits for determining burnout for when the range type is set to GS or GS (4-20mA).
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Module operation settings Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Module operation settings
Description
Lower limit of burnout set (%), Upper limit of burnout set (%)
Setup Item Lower limit of burnout
Upper limit of burnout
Selectable Range or Options 20.0 to 5.0 %
105.0 to 120.0 %
Default Value
-10.0 (AI module) -20.0 (PID module) 110.0 (AI module) 120.0 (PID module)
Lower Limit of Burnout Set the lower limit for determining burnout. Set as a percentage of the specified span width.
Upper Limit of Burnout Set the upper limit for determining burnout. Set as a percentage of the specified span width.
2.12.7
Setting the Chattering Filter for Pulse Input
You can set this filter on a DI module or DI/DO module when the GM10 (/MT option) operation mode is set to Normal. To set the chattering filter of a pulse input module, use the pulse input channel settings.
See page 2-52 in section 2.5.1, "Setting the Range".
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Measurement settings > Module operation settings Hardware configurator: Measurement settings > Module operation settings
Description
Chattering filter for pulse input
Setup Item Chattering filter for pulse input
Selectable Range or Options On, Off
Default Value On
Explanation
This filter prevents pulse count errors caused by chattering or noise. By default, the chattering filter for pulse input is set to On. This is because the pulse input of DI modules and DI/DO modules may be affected by noise. In normal situations, set the chattering filter for pulse input to On.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-103
2.13
Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Set the type of data to record (event or display data), the recording interval, and the interval for saving measurement data files to an SD card. When the measurement mode is Dual interval, the recording setting menu does not appear. For details on recording conditions in this situation, see page 2-112 in section 2.14, "Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later)".
2.13.1 Setting the Type of Data to Record (Event or display data) and Recording Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Recording settings > Recording basic settings Hardware configurator: Recording settings > Recording basic settings
Description
Recording mode
Setup Item File type
Selectable Range or Options Display,2 Display + Event,1, 2 Event
Default Value Event
1 This is not available when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option) or multibatch function (/BT option).
2 You cannot set this when the measurement mode is High speed or Dual interval.
File type
Set the type of data to record.
When the measurement mode is High speed or Dual interval, this is fixed to Event.
Setup Item
Description
Display Display + Event Event
Records display data Records display and event data Records event data
Event data1
Setup Item Recording interval
Recording mode Data length
Pre-trigger3 Trigger source operation3
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
1ms,7 2ms,7 5ms,7 10ms,7 20ms,7 50ms,7
1s5
100ms,4 200ms,4 500ms,4 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 15s,
20s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 20min,
30min
Free, Single 6, Repeat 6
Free
2min, 5min, 10min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2, h, 3h, 4h, 2
6h, 8h, 12h, 1day, 2day, 3day, 5day, 7day, 14day,
31day
0%, 5%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 95%, 100%
0%
Off, On
On
1 You can set this when the file type is set to Display + Event or Event. 2 The minimum effective data length based on the recording interval of event data and the
number of recording channels. 3 You can set this when the mode is not set to Free. 4 Cannot be specified if an electromagnetic relay type analog input module is in use (configured). 5 2 s if an electromagnetic relay type analog input module is in use. 6 This is not available when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option) or multi-
batch function (/BT option). 7 You can set this when the measurement mode is High speed or Dual interval.
2-104
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Recording Interval
Set the event data recording interval. You cannot choose a recording interval shorter than the scan interval or a recording interval that is not an integer multiple of the scan interval.
Note
When the measurement mode is set to Normal · The maximum number of channels that the GM can record varies depending on the recording
interval and file type.
Recording Interval
100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s or more
Event 100ch 200ch 500ch 500ch
GM10-1 Display + Event 100ch 200ch 500ch 500ch
GM10-2
Event
Display + Event
500ch
100ch
500ch
200ch
1000ch
500ch
1000ch
1000ch
When the measurement mode is set to High speed or Dual interval · There is a limit to the number of channels that can record at scan intervals shorter than 100 ms. For limitations, see the limitations provided in the GM Data Acquisition System General Specifications (GS 04L55B01-01EN).
Recording mode
Set the mode for recording event data.
Options
Description
Free
Records data at all times
Single
Records data when the trigger condition is met
Repeat
Records data every time the trigger condition is met
· Free Recording starts when you start it and stops when you stop it.
Time
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
File
File
File
Adding data
· Single The GM enters the trigger-wait state when you start recording. After a trigger event occurs, the GM will record data for the specified time (data length) and stop. From this point, the GM will not record even if the trigger condition is met.
Trigger condition met
Time
File
· Repeat The GM enters the trigger-wait state when you start recording. After a trigger event occurs, the GM will record data for the specified time (data length) and stop. Then, it enters the trigger-wait state again and repeats recording for the specified time (data length) every time the trigger condition is met. To stop recording event data, stop the recording.
Trigger condition met Trigger condition met
Time
File
File
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-105
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Data length
Set the size of recording data per file. Recording data is divided at the specified file size. The selectable data lengths vary depending on the number of channels to record and the Recording Interval setting.
A file is also created in the following instances. · When a file is created manually · When recording is stopped · When file creation is executed with the event action function · After recovering from a power failure
Recording Interval*
1 ms
Selectable range of data length 2 min to 10 min
Recording Interval*
50 ms
Selectable range of data length 10 min to 8 hours
Recording Interval*
2 s
Selectable range of data length 10 min to 14 days
Recording Interval*
30 s
Selectable range of data length 1 hour to 31 days
Recording Interval*
15 min
Selectable range of data length 1 hour to 31 days
2 ms
2 min to 20 min
100 ms
10 min to 1 days
5 s
10 min to 31 days 1 min 1 hour to 31 days 20 min 1 hour to 31 days
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
2 min to 1 hour 5 min to 2 hours 5 min to 4 hours
200 ms
500 ms
1 s
10 min to 2 days 10 min to 3 days 10 min to 7 days
10 s
15 s
20 s
10 min to 31 days 10 min to 31 days 10 min to 31 days
2 min
5 min
10 min
1 hour to 31 days 1 hour to 31 days 1 hour to 31 days
30 min
1 hour to 31 days
* You cannot choose a recording interval that is shorter than the scan interval.
2-106
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Pre-trigger
1
Set the range of data to record before the trigger point. Set this value as a percentage of the
data length. If you do not want to record data before the trigger point, set this to 0%.
Pre-trigger enables you to record data before an event, such as an alarm.
Trigger condition met
2
Configuring the GM
Time
3
Data before the trigger
Data after the trigger
Trigger source operation
Select On to apply triggers through the User function key of the event action function.
Note
· The event trigger can be used from the Web Page. See "Triggering the Starting of Event Data Recording" on page 3-6
· When you start recording, recording will start if the trigger condition is met.
Display Data, Trend Waveform
Setup Item Saving interval1
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
10min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2, h, 3h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 2
12h, 1day, 2day, 3day, 5day, 7day, 14day, 31day
1 You cannot set this when the file type is set to Event. 2 The minimum effective saving interval based on the trend interval of display data and the number of recording channels.
Note
· The maximum number of channels that the GM can record varies depending on the trend interval and file type.
Trend Interval (Unit: /div) 5s
GM10-1
Display
Display + Event
100ch
100ch
GM10-2
Display
Display + Event
200ch
100ch
10s 15s 30s or more
200ch 500ch 500ch
200ch 500ch 500ch
500ch 1000ch 1000ch
200ch 500ch 1000ch
4 5
App Index
Saving interval Set the size of recording data per file. Recording data is divided at the specified file size. The options vary depending on the number of channels to record and the Saving interval setting. The divided files can be connected with the universal viewer. However, you can not connect files that have stopped recording.
Saving interval
Time
File
File
File
Adding data
A file is also created in the following instances. · When a file is created manually · When recording is stopped · When file creation is executed with the event action function · After recovering from a power failure
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-107
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Trend Interval and Display Data Recording Interval
Trend Interval*
5 s
10 s
15 s
Recording interval Selectable range of file save interval Trend Interval* Recording interval Selectable range of file save interval Trend Interval* Recording interval Selectable range of file save interval
100 ms 10 min to 12 hours 2 min 4 s 10 min to 14 days 30 min 1 min 1 hour to 31 days
200 ms 10 min to 1 days 5 min 10 s 10 min to 31 days 1 h 2 min 1 hour to 31 days
500 ms 10 min to 3 days 10 min 20 s 10 min to 31 days 2 h 4 min 2 hour to 31 days
30 s
1 s 10 min to 7 days 15 min 30 s 10 min to 31 days 4 h 8 min 4 hour to 31 days
* You cannot choose a recording interval that is shorter than the scan interval.
1 min
2 s 10 min to 14 days 20 min 40 s 1 hour to 31 days 10 h 20 min 8 hour to 31 days
Explanation
Event Data and Display Data
There are two file types: event data and display data. Event data is useful when you wish to record the measured data in detail. In the case of event data, the GM records the measured values at every recording interval (Instantaneous data in each scan interval). Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long-term recording. In the case of display data, the GM records the maximum and minimum values from the measured values within each recording interval (Instantaneous data in each scan interval).
Maximum value per recording interval Minimum value per recording interval
Instantaneous value during recording
Display data
Event data
Measured data per scan interval Time Scan interval Recording interval of event data Recording interval of display data
Refer to the examples below, and record data that suits your purpose.
Example 1: Continuously record the waveform data as with the conventional chart recorder. Record the display data.
Setup Items File type: Display data
Example 2: Record waveform data under normal conditions but record details around the point of alarm occurrence when alarms occur. Record detailed data. Continuously record display data and record event data when alarms occur.
Setup Items File type: Display + Event data Recording mode: Single or Repeat
2-108
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Example 3: Record the most-detailed data at all times. Record event data by specifying the recording interval.
Setup Items File type: Event data Recording mode: Free
Example 4: No need to continuously record data. Record data only when alarms occur. Record event data only when alarms occur.
Setup Items File type: Event data Recording mode: Single or Repeat
Data Types The GM can record the following types of data. If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see section 1.2.1, "Data Types," in the Advanced Security Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Data Type Event data
Display data
Manual sampled data Report data (/MT option)
Setting parameter
Description
· Measured data that is recorded at the specified recording interval. There are two modes. One mode starts recording when a trigger occurs. The other mode records at all times. · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Event data contains alarm and message information. · Data format: Binary (undisclosed), text · Waveform data displayed on the trend display. The measured data is recorded at the specified trend interval. · The minimum and maximum values among the measured data within the trend interval are saved. · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Event data contains alarm and message information. · Data format: Binary (undisclosed), text · Instantaneous value of the measured data when a manual sample operation is executed. · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Data format: Text · Hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, batch, daily custom report data. Report data is created at an interval that is determined by the report type (one hour for hourly reports, one day for daily reports, and so on). · A header string (shared with other files) can be written in the file. · Data format: Text · The data can be converted to Excel and PDF formats. · The setting parameters of the GM. · Data format: Text
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-109
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
Flow of Data Recording and Storage
Measured data is recorded once to the internal memory and then saved to the external storage medium.
Math I/O channel channel
Communication channel
Data of another device (via communication)
...
...
...
Record Internal memory
Display
Setting parameters
Save data FTP server on the network
Screen image data
Display/event data
Save
Load
SD card
External storage media
Internal Memory
Display data and event data are held in files in the internal memory. This data is also saved as files to a storage medium.
Record
Display data and event data
Internal memory Manual sampled data Report data
FTP server on the network
File ......
Save data
...... Directory on the external storage medium
2-110
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.13 Setting Recording Conditions (Recording mode, recording interval, saving interval)
2.13.2 Configuring Recording Channels
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Recording settings > Recording channel settings Hardware configurator: Recording settings > Recording channel settings
Description
Setup Item Display data, Trend waveform
Event data
Manual sample
Selectable Range or Options
AI, DI, DO, AO, PID, math, communication channels AI, DI, DO, AO, PID, math, communication channels AI, DI, DO, AO, PID, math, communication channels
Default Value --
--
--
Display data, Trend waveform Set the channels for recording display data. Channels that you can specify are displayed.
Event data
Set the channels for recording event data. Channels that you can specify are displayed. If you specify more than the number of recordable channels, the recording interval will automatically change to a setting that is possible (see Note).
Manual sample
Set the channels for recording manual sampled data. Channels that you can specify are
displayed.
Number of Recording Channels
Model GM10-1 GM10-2
Maximum Number of Channels 50 100
Manual sampled data is recorded to internal memory. If the number of manual sampled data entries exceeds 400, the data is overwritten from the oldest entry.
Time
Manual sampled data
Note
When the measurement mode is set to Normal · The maximum number of channels that the GM can record varies depending on the recording
interval and file type. Display data
Trend Interval (Unit: /div) 5s 10s 15s 30s or more
GM10-1
Display
Display + Event
100ch
100ch
200ch
200ch
500ch
500ch
500ch
500ch
GM10-2
Display
Display + Event
200ch
100ch
500ch
200ch
1000ch
500ch
1000ch
1000ch
Event data Recording interval
100ms 200ms 500ms 1 s or more
Event 100ch 200ch 500ch 500ch
GM10-1 Display + Event 100ch 200ch 500ch 500ch
GM10-2
Event
Event + Display
500ch
100ch
500ch
200ch
1000ch
500ch
1000ch
1000ch
When the measurement mode is set to High speed or Dual interval · There is a limit to the number of channels that can record at scan intervals shorter than 100 ms. For limitations, see the limitations provided in the GM Data Acquisition System General Specifications (GS 04L55B01-01EN).
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-111
2.14 Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later)
These settings apply when the measurement mode is set to Dual interval.
2.14.1 Setting the Scan Interval
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Dual interval settings > Scan interval Hardware configurator: Dual interval > Scan interval
Description
Scan interval
Setup Item Measurement group 1
Measurement group 2
Selectable Range or Options 1ms1, 3, 4, 5 2ms1, 3, 4, 5 5ms1, 3, 4, 5 10ms1, 3, 4, 5 20ms1, 3, 4, 5 50ms1, 3, 4, 5 100ms1, 3, 4 200ms1, 3, 4 500ms1, 4 1s 2s 5s 100ms1, 3, 4 200ms1, 3, 4 500ms1, 4 1s, 2s 5s
Default value 1s2
2s
1 You cannot specify this value on sub unit (unit 1 to unit 6) modules. 2 2s when an electromagnetic relay type module is used in the same scan group.. 3 You cannot specify this value when a low withstand voltage relay type module is used in the
same scan group. 4 You cannot specify this value when an electromagnetic relay type module is used in the same
scan group. 5 You can specify this value when only a high-speed universal type module is in use. However,
can not settings 1 ms and 2 ms for GM10-1.
Measurement group 1 Set the scan interval of measurement group 1. You can select from the scan intervals available depending on the installed module.
Measurement group 2 Set the scan interval of measurement group 2. You can select from the scan intervals available depending on the installed module.
Note
You cannot set the scan intervals of measurement group 1 and measurement group 2 to the same value.
2-112
Master Scan Interval
Setup Item Measurement group number
Selectable Range or Options
Default value
Measurement group 1, measurement group 2 Measurement
group 1
Measurement group number
Set the measurement group number with the scan interval that you want to use as the master scan interval.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.14 Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later)
2.14.2 Setting the Scan Interval of Each Module
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Dual interval settings > Scan interval Hardware configurator: Dual interval settings > Scan interval
Description
Main Unit Module Scan Interval, Unit 1 to Unit 6 Module Scan Interval
Setup Item Measurement group number
Selectable Range or Options
Default value
Measurement group 1, measurement group 2 --
Measurement group number Set the scan group with the scan interval that you want the module to run at.
2.14.3 Setting the Recording Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Dual interval settings > Recording settings Hardware configurator: Dual interval settings > Recording settings
Description
Recording mode
Setup Item File type
Selectable Range or Options Event (fixed)
Default value Event
File type Records event data
Event data (Measurement group 1)
Setup Item Recording interval
Recording mode Data length
Pre-trigger3 Trigger source operation3
Selectable Range or Options
Default value
1ms, 2ms, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 50ms, 100ms, 1s
200ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 30s,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 20min, 30min
Free, Single, Repeat
Free
2min, 5min, 10min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2, h, 3h, 1h
4h, 6h, 8h, 12h, 1day, 2day, 3day, 5day, 7day,
14day, 31day
0%, 5%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 95%, 100%
0%
Off, On
On
Recording interval
Set the event data recording interval. You cannot choose a recording interval shorter than the scan interval or a recording interval that is not an integer multiple of the scan interval.
Recording mode
Set the mode for recording event data.
Setup Item
Description
Free Single
Records data at all times Records data when the trigger condition is met
Repeat
Records data every time the trigger condition is met
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-113
2.14 Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later)
Data length
Set the size of recording data per file. Recording data is divided at the specified file size. The selectable data lengths vary depending on the number of channels to record and the Recording Interval setting. A file is also created in the following instances. · When a file is created manually · When recording is stopped · When file creation is executed with the event action function · After recovering from a power failure
Event data (Measurement group 2)
Setup Item Recording interval
Recording mode Data length
Selectable Range or Options
100ms, 200ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 20min, 30min Free, Single, Repeat 10min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2, h, 3h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h, 1day, 2day, 3day, 5day, 7day, 14day, 31day
Default value 2s
Free 1h
Recording interval Set the event data recording interval. You cannot choose a recording interval that is shorter than the scan interval.
Recording mode This is the same as Measurement group 1.
Data length This is the same as Measurement group 1.
2-114
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.14 Configuring the Dual Interval Settings (Release number 4 and later)
2.14.4 Configuring Recording Channels
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Dual interval settings > Recording channel settings Hardware configurator: Dual interval settings > Recording channel settings
Description
Event data (Measurement group 1)
Setup Item Event data
Selectable Range or Options AI, DI, pulse input, AO, DO, math, communication channels
Default value --
Event data
Set the channels for recording event data with measurement group 1. Channels that you can specify are displayed.
Event data (Measurement group 2)
Setup Item Event data
Selectable Range or Options AI, DI, pulse input, AO, DO, math, communication channels
Default value --
Event data
Set the channels for recording event data with measurement group 2. Channels that you can specify are displayed.
Manual sample
Set the channels for recording manual sampled data. Channels that you can specify are
displayed.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Default value
Manual sample
AI, DI, pulse input, AO, DO, math,
--
communication channels
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
Manual sample
Set the channels for recording manual sampled data. Channels that you can specify are displayed.
Number of Recording Channels
Model GM10-1 GM10-2
Maximum number of channels 50 100
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-115
2.15 Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files
Set the conditions for saving data files. If you want to use the multi-batch function (/BT option), see the multi-batch function manual (IM 04L51B01-03EN).
2.15.1 Setting the Save Directory, File Header, and File Name
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Data save settings Hardware configurator: Data save settings
Description
Save directory
Setup Item Directory name
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 20 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value DATA0
Directory name Set the name of the directory on the storage medium for saving data. Characters that cannot be used: ' ; " * / : < > ? \ |
Spaces are not allowed in the beginning or end of names. Names cannot be all spaces. Strings that cannot be used: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, CLOCK$, COM0 to COM9, LPT0 to LPT9
· If a character or string that cannot be used is entered, it is changed to an underscore when the entry is completed.
Note
Do not place a file with the same name as the directory name ("DATA0" by default) in the storage medium for saving data.
2-116
File header
Setup Item Characters
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 50 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
Characters Enter a header comment to write into data files.
Data file name
Setup Item Structure Identified strings
Selectable Range or Options Date, Serial, Batch*
Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
* Appears when the batch function is set to On.
Default Value Date --
Structure
Sets the structure of the file name when saving data.
Options
Description
Date
Serial Batch Name
Serial number + specified string + date The date reflects the date and time when recording was started to the relevant file. Serial number + specified string Serial number + batch (when using the batch function)
Identified strings
Set the user-assigned character string. Characters that cannot be used: ' ; " * / : < > ? \ |
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.15 Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files
Explanation
File name
You can select what type of file name to use to save measured data to an SD card. The following three types are available. If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see section 1.2.8, "Saving Data to External Storage Medium," in the Advanced Security Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Structure Date
Display data Event data 1
Manual sampled data
Snapshot data
Alarm data
Description
Serial
Specified string
Date
. Extension
Example: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA121231_174633.GDS
Serial
Report data
Display data Event data 1 Manual sampled data Snapshot data Alarm data
Serial
Specified string
Date
Type . Extension
Example: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA121231_174633HD.GRE
Serial
Specified string . Extension
Example: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.GDS
Report data
Display data Event data 1
Serial
Specified string Type . Extension
Example: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAAHD.GRE
Serial
Batch name
. Extension
Example: 000123_BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB.GDS
Batch Report data
Serial
Date
Type . Extension
Example: 000123_121231_174633HD.GRE
Manual sampled data Snapshot data Alarm data
Serial
Date
. Extension
Example: 000123_121231_174633.GMN
1 For measurement group 2 when the measurement mode is set to Dual interval, "S" is attached to the front of the file name. Example when Structure is set to Date: S00123_AAAAAAAAAAA121231_174633.GEV
Item
6-digit number + 1-character delimiter
Description
6-digit number
A number that indicates the file's order of occurrence. The number ranges from 000001 to 999999. If the number reaches 999999, it returns to 000000.
Serial
1-character delimiter
Starts with ` _' and takes on the following values: A to Z and 0 to 9. If a file with the same name exists in the specified directory, the file is saved by changing the delimiter to prevent overwriting. Example: If a file named "000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.GDS" already exists, the file is saved to the name "000123AAAAAAAAAAAA.GDS."
Date
YYMMDD_hhmmss
Specified string
AAAAAAAAAAAAA
YY: Year (lower two digits) MM: Month, DD: Day hh: Hour, mm: minute, ss: Second
The date reflects the date and time when recording was started to the relevant file.
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Batch name BBBBBBBBBBBBBB···B Up to 41 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Type
H_, D_, W_, M_, HD, DW, DM, B_, C_
Report data types H_: Hourly, D_: Daily, W_: Weekly, M_: Monthly, HD: Hourly and daily, DW: Daily and weekly, DM: Daily and monthly, B_: Batch, C_: Daily custom
Extension
Display data:
GDS
Event data:
GEV
Manual sampled data: GMN
Manual summary data: GAL
Snapshot data:
png
Display data (text): Event data (text): Report data: Report data: Report data:
GTD GTE GRE xlsx or xlsm (report template function) pdf (report template function)
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-117
2.15 Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files
2.15.2 Setting the Save Method to Media (Auto save or manual save) and Media FIFO
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Data save settings Hardware configurator: Data save settings
Description
Media save
Setup Item Auto save Media FIFO*
Selectable Range or Options Off, On Off, On
* You can set this when Auto save is set to On.
Default Value On Off
Auto save
Set this to On to automatically save measured data. To save measured data manually, set this to Off.
Options
Description
On
Automatically saves measured data to an SD card Set this to On to use the
media FIFO.
Off
Measured data is not saved automatically. The data in the internal memory is
saved at once when an external storage medium is inserted.
Media FIFO
Set this to On to use media FIFO.
Options
Description
On
Enables media FIFO. Constantly retains the most recent data files in an SD
card.
Off
Disables media FIFO. Replace the SD card if the free space on it drops low.
Note
If you are not using media FIFO, the SD card must have adequate free space to store all the data; otherwise, the GM will not be able to save the data from the internal memory. Replace the SD card and save the data before the data in the internal memory is overwritten.
2-118
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.15 Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files
Explanation
Internal Memory The recorded measured data is divided at a specific time interval (saving interval) and saved to files. If the internal memory is full or if the number of display data files and event data files exceeds 500 for the GM10-1 or 1000 for the GM10-2, files are overwritten from the oldest file.
Auto Save
· When Media FIFO Is Not in Use
Keep the SD card inserted in the drive at all times. The data in the internal memory is automatically saved to the SD card. If there is not enough free space on the SD card, the GM cannot save the data in the internal memory to the SD card. Replace the SD card and save the data before the data in the internal memory is overwritten.
· Auto Save Timing
Data Type Display data
Description The file is saved when the file is created.
Time
File
File
File
Saved to storage medium
Event data
Same as the display data.
Manual
The first time manual sample is executed, a manual sampled data file
sampled data
is created on the SD card. The data is appended to this file for each
subsequent manual sample operation. A new file is created after manual
sampled data is stored 100 times.
For operating instructions, see "Executing Manual Sampling" on page
3-6.
Report data
The first time report data is generated, a report data file is created on the
SD card and report data is stored. The report data is appended to this file
every time a report is created.
Dividing of the report files
The appending of the report data to the file is stopped at a specified time,
and subsequent reports are saved to a new file. The file is divided in the unit
shown in the table below. Also, when recording is stopped, all report files
are divided.
Report template
Every time a report file is divided, a report file is created according to the
specified template format such as an XML spreadsheet format or PDF
format. The report file can also be printed.
For the setup procedure, see page 2-124 in section 2.17, "Configuring the
Report Function (/MT option)".
Report kind
Report File
Separate
Combine
Hourly and daily reports
a file for each daily report
hourly reports for a day and a
hourly reports for a day
daily report
Daily and weekly reports
a file for each weekly report
daily reports for a week and a
daily reports for a week
weekly report
Daily and monthly reports
a file for each monthly report
daily reports for a month and a
daily reports for a month
monthly report
Batch reports
a file for each recording start/ a file for each recording start/stop
stop operation The file will be
operation The file will be divided if the
divided if the number of data entries number of data entries exceeds 200.
exceeds 200.
Daily custom
a file for each file creation unit
a file for each file creation unit
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-119
2.15 Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files
· When Media FIFO Is in Use
If not enough free space is available when saving a new data file to the SD card, files are deleted in order from the oldest data update date/time to save the new file. This operation is referred to as FIFO (first in first out). When saving the data files automatically, you can save the data so that the most recent data files are constantly retained in the SD card. This method allows you to use the GM continuously without having to replace the SD card.
Old
Update date
New
Deleted File 1 Medium
File 2
File 3
Saved
File 4
Media FIFO Save Operation · FIFO is used only when the following files are saved automatically. When files are saved
using other methods, FIFO is not used. Display data files, event data files, report data files, manual sample data files, and snapshot data files
· Files subject to deletion All files in the destination directory, except for the ones listed below, are subject to deletion. However, the following files are excluded. Hidden files, read-only files, files in the subdirectory within the save destination directory
· Up to the most recent 1000 files are retained. If the number of files in the save destination directory exceeds 1000, the number of files is held at 1000 by deleting old files even if there is enough free space.
· If there are more than 1000 files already in the save destination directory, at least one file is always deleted before saving the new file. The number of files is not kept within 1000 in this case.
Manual Save (Collectively storing unsaved data) When automatic saving is set to Off, unsaved data in the internal memory is stored in files to the external storage medium (SD card) when an external storage medium is inserted. When using manual save, it is important that you save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium before the data is overwritten. Determine the usage condition of the internal memory and save the data to the external storage medium at appropriate times.
For details on the manual save operation, see "Saving Event Data" on page 3-6 or "Saving Display Data" on page 3-6.
Save operation
Time
File Saved the previous time
File
File
Saved this time
2-120
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.15 Setting the Conditions for Saving Data Files
2.15.3 Setting the File Format of Display Data and Event Data
1
Configuring the GM
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Data save settings Hardware configurator: Data save settings
Description
File format
Setup Item Display/Event data
Selectable Range or Options Binary, Text *
2
3
Default Value Binary
* This is not available when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option).
4
Display/Event data
Set the file format of display data and event data.
Text format is TSV (tab separated). When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval or High speed, this is fixed to Binary.
5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-121
2.16 Configuring the Batch Function
Set the batch function. You can add batch information to display data and event data files. You can manage display data and event data files using batch information.
2.16.1 Configuring the Batch Function (Lot-No. digit and Auto increment)
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Batch settings > Batch function Hardware configurator: Batch settings > Batch function
Description
Batch function
Setup Item
On/Off Lot-No. digit* Auto increment*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On Off/4/6/8 Off, On
* You can set this when the batch function is set to On.
Default Value
Off 6 On
On/Off Set this to On to use the batch function.
Lot No. Set the number of digits of lot numbers. To disable lot numbers, set this to Off.
Auto increment
Options On
Off
Description
Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to the current lot number + 1. Turns auto increment off.
2.16.2 Setting Batch Text (When the batch function is set to On)
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Batch settings > Batch text Hardware configurator: Batch settings > Batch text
Description
Setup Item Text field number
Selectable Range or Options 1 to 24
Text field number Select the text field number to assign text to.
Default Value 1
Text field
Setup Item Title of field
Characters
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 20 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 30 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
2-122
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.16 Configuring the Batch Function
Title of field Set the title for the text field number you selected. Characters Set the characters for the text field number you selected.
Explanation Batch Function
· Batch Number and Lot Number
Display data and event data files can be identified by their "batch number-lot number" (hereinafter referred to as batch name). The lot number does not have to be specified. · Batch number (up to 32 characters) · Lot number (up to 8 digits)
· Automatic Increment of the Lot Number
The lot number can be automatically incremented when the recording is stopped. · Text Field
You can enter text fields into a file. There are 24 available text fields. Each text field consists of the following: · Field title (up to 20 characters) · Field string (up to 30 characters) You can use the touch screen to display text fields on the GM screen. · Batch Comment
You can enter up to three comments in a file. You can enter each comment once during recording. Comment 1, Comment 2, and Comment 3 (up to 50 characters each)
Using the Batch Function
You can enter text in measurement data files. See the figure below. For example, you can enter the operator name and administrator name in text fields.
Batch number + lot number
Recording start Comment
Recording stop
Text field
Time
Comment
Data file
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
For the procedure, see "Starting Recording" on page 3-2.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-123
2.17 Configuring the Report Function (/MT option)
Set the report function. When the measurement mode is set to High speed or Dual interval, there is a limit to the number of report channels at scan intervals shorter than 100 ms. For limitations, see the GM Data Acquisition System General Specifications (GS 04L55B0101EN).
2.17.1 Setting the Report Type, Creation Time, Data Type, Etc.
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Report settings > Report basic settings Hardware configurator: Report settings > Report basic settings
Description
Type
Setup Item Type
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, Hourly + Daily, Daily + Weekly, Daily + Monthly, Off
Batch, Daily custom
Type
Set the kind of report to create.
Options
Description
Off Hourly + Daily
Daily + Weekly
Daily + Monthly Batch Daily custom
Disables the report function. Creates hourly and daily reports. Hourly report: Creates report data every hour on the hour for the previous one hour. Daily report: Creates report data every day at a specified time for the previous one day. Creates hourly and weekly reports. Weekly report: Creates report data every week at a specified time at a specified day of the week for the previous one week. Monthly report: Creates report data every month at a specified time at a specified day for the previous one month. Creates a report in unit of batches. Creates daily reports by dividing it at the specified time intervals.
Creation time1
Setup Item Day Day of the week
Hour Minute Save interval2 File creation interval
Selectable Range or Options
1 to 28 Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday 1 to 23 0 to 59 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 1h 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h, 24h
1 You can set this when the kind of report is not set to Off. 2 You can set this when the type is set to Batch or Daily custom.
Default Value 1 Sunday
0 0 10min 4h
Depending on the kind of report, set the items with marks in the table below.
Setup Item
Hourly + Daily
Day
Day of the week
Hour of the day
Minute
Save interval
File creation interval
Daily + Weekly
Kind Daily + Monthly
Batch
Daily custom
2-124
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.17 Configuring the Report Function (/MT option)
Day, Day of week, Hour, Minute Set the day or day of week and the time to create reports.
Save interval (for Batch and Day custom) Set the data recording interval.
File creation interval (for Day custom) Set the time interval for dividing files.
Data type
Setup Item Report 1 to 5
Selectable Range or Options Ave, Max, Min, Sum, Inst, Off*
* You can set this for Report 2 to Report 5.
Report 1 to 5
Set the data type to output as reports.
Options
Description
Ave
Outputs average values.
Max
Outputs maximum values.
Min
Outputs minimum values.
Sum Inst
Outputs sum values. Outputs instantaneous values.
Default Value --
File type*
Setup Item File type
Selectable Range or Options Separate, Combine
Default Value Combine
* You can set this when the Type is not set to Batch or Daily custom.
File type
Set this item when creating two types of reports such as daily report and monthly report.
Options
Description
Separate Combine
Saves each type of report to a separate file. For information about how files are divided, see page 2-118 in section 2.15.2, "Setting the Save Method to Media (Auto save or manual save) and Media FIFO". Saves the report data of two types in a single file.
Report template output
Setup Item
Excel file PDF file Printer
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On Off, On Off, On
Default Value
Off Off Off
Excel file Set this to On to output in Excel format.
PDF file Set this to On to output in PDF format.
Printer Set this to On to output to a printer.
For instructions on how to set the output destination printer, see page 2-186 in section 2.26.6, "Setting the Printer Output Conditions".
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-125
2.17 Configuring the Report Function (/MT option)
Electric Signature
Setup Item PDF Electronic Signature
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
PDF Electronic Signature
Set this to On to electronically sign a PDF file. To use electronic signature, you need to create a key and a certificate.
See page 2-211 in section 2.30, "Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)".
Text File
Setup Item Attach batch information
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
Attach batch information
Set this to On to output text data of report files by attaching batch information. If the file division mode is Separate, batch information is attached to each file.
Note
· If the multi-batch function (/BT option) is enabled, batch information cannot be attached. · Batch information cannot be output in report template output (Excel file, PDF file, printer output).
Explanation Report Data Values The range of report data values is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point.
Saving the Report Data Report data is saved to the internal memory. If the number of report data entries exceeds 800, the data is overwritten from the oldest entry.
Report data
Time
Daily custom
You can create daily reports by dividing files at the specified time interval (file creation interval). For example, in a three-shift system, you can set the file creation interval to 8 hours to create a file for each shift.
2-126
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.17 Configuring the Report Function (/MT option)
2.17.2 Setting the Channels to Output Reports
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Report settings > Report channel settings Hardware configurator: Report settings > Report channel settings
Description
Setup Item Report channel number
Selectable Range or Options 1 to 60
Default Value 1
Report channel number Select the report channel number. The GM generates reports in order by this number.
Report channel
Setup Item Channel type
Channel number* Sum scale*
Selectable Range or Options
IO channel, Math channel, Communication channel, Off Channels that you can set Off, /s, /min, /h, /day
* You can set this when the channel type is not set to Off.
Default Value --
-- --
Channel type Set the channel type to assign to the report channel.
Channel no Set the channel number to assign to the report channel. All channels can be assigned, but reports are not created for channels set to Skip or Off even if they are assigned.
Sum scale Set the sum scale to match the unit of the measured values. Example: If the unit of the measured value is "m3/min," select min. Off: The measured data is summed as-is once per scan interval.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-127
2.17 Configuring the Report Function (/MT option)
Explanation
Unit of Sum Computation
In sum computation, data is summed over the scan interval. However, for flow values that have units /s, /min, /h, or /day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result, because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different. In such cases, set the sum scale to match the unit of the input value. In effect, the sum value with the same unit as that of the input value is computed. For example, if the scan interval is 2 s, and the input value is 100 m3/min, a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute. However, if the sum scale is set to /min, then 2 s/60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has an m3 unit. The following converting equations are used to compute the sum. The scan interval unit is seconds. Off: (measured data every scan interval) /s: (measured data every scan interval) × scan interval /min: (measured data every scan interval) × scan interval/60 /h: (measured data every scan interval) × scan interval/3600 /day: (measured data every scan interval) × scan interval/86400
Report Processing when the Measurement Mode Is Set to Dual Interval
Report computation is performed at the scan interval of each measurement group. For example, if a channel of measurement group 1 is assigned to a report channel, computation on that report channel is performed at the scan interval of measurement group 1. A single report file will be created.
Report Processing When the Measurement Mode Is Set to High Speed Report computation is performed at the scan interval.
Maximum Number of Report Channels
The following table shows the maximum number of report channels depending on the
measurement mode.
Normal 60
Measurement mode High speed 60
Dual interval 30
2-128
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.18 Using the Report Template Function (/MT option) 1
You can create report templates and use them to automatically create custom report files.
Load a report template file that you have created into the GM10 internal memory. The GM10
2
will automatically create report files using the report template file.
Configuring the GM
A report template file can be used to create report files in Excel format, create report files
in PDF format, and print reports on a printer connected over the LAN. The GM can handle
template files that are 1 MB or smaller.
3
Report file based
Report template file
on a template
Save Internal memory Output
Excel
4
PDF
Printer
5
Creating a report template: page App-16 in Appendix 4, "Creating Report Templates" Loading and saving report templates: page 2-195 in section 2.28.3, "Saving and Loading
Report Templates (/MT option)"
2.18.1
Excel Report Files
For instructions on how to create templates, see page App-16 in Appendix 4, "Creating Report Templates".
Template Item Format, extension File name Kind
Creation method
Description Excel format. The extension is .xlsx or .xlsm (with macro) (lowercase). Assign a file name of your choosing. A report template for each kind of report file is created. The kinds of report files available are hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, hourly + daily, daily + weekly, daily + monthly, batch, and day custom. Create templates using Microsoft Office 2007 or later.
Excel Report Files
Item Format, extension File name
Kind
Description Excel format. You can open the file with Excel. The extension is .xlsx or .xlsm (with macro). The file name excluding the extension is the same as the report file with the .GRE extension.
File Name: page 2-116 in section 2.15.1, "Setting the Save Directory, File Header, and File Name" For each kind of report file, a corresponding template file is used to create the appropriate report files. The report file that you create is based on the report creation setting. For example, if the GM is not configured to create daily reports, you will not be able to use a report template to create daily reports. However, regardless of this setting, you can output the data of all data types (average, maximum, minimum, sum, and instantaneous).
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-129
2.18 Using the Report Template Function (/MT option)
2.18.2
PDF Report Files
For instructions on how to create templates, see page App-16 in Appendix 4, "Creating Report Templates". Template
Item
Description
Format, extension Yokogawa proprietary format. The extension is .tpl (lowercase).
File name
Assign a file name of your choosing.
Kind
A report template for each kind of report file is created. The kinds of
report files available are hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, hourly + daily,
daily + weekly, daily + monthly, batch, and day custom.
Creation method Create templates using a YOKOGAWA's original tool.
PDF Report Files
Item
Description
Format, extension PDF format. The extension is .pdf (lowercase).
File name
The file name excluding the extension is the same as the report file
with the .GRE extension.
File Name: page 2-116 in section 2.15.1, "Setting the Save Directory,
File Header, and File Name"
Kind
For each kind of report file, a corresponding template file is used to
create the appropriate report files.
The report file that you create is based on the report creation setting.
For example, if the GM is not configured to create daily reports,
you will not be able to use a report template to create daily reports.
However, regardless of this setting, you can output the data of all data
types (average, maximum, minimum, sum, and instantaneous).
2.18.3
Printing on a Printer over the LAN
Report template The report template for PDF reports is used to output data to the printer.
Printer output
Item
Description
Compatible printers Printers supporting the HP PCL5c language and can print through port
9100 on a LAN connection
For configuring the printer, see page 2-186 in section 2.26.6, "Setting
the Printer Output Conditions".
Kind
For each kind of report file, the specified template file is used to create
the appropriate report files. The report file that you create is based on
the report creation setting. For example, if the GM is not configured
to create daily reports, you will not be able to create daily reports.
However, regardless of this setting, you can output the data of all data
types (average, maximum, minimum, sum, and instantaneous).
2-130
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.18 Using the Report Template Function (/MT option)
2.18.4
Creating Template-Based Report Files
Template-based report files are created (the creation of template-based report files will hereinafter be referred to as "template conversion") in the following cases.
For instructions on how to set the type of files to output, see page 2-124 in section 2.17.1, "Setting the Report Type, Creation Time, Data Type, Etc.".
PDF Report Files and Excel Report Files
· Auto Save When a report file is created (when file division occurs), template conversion is performed, and the report file is saved to the SD card. Template conversion is also performed when recording stops.
· Manual Save (Collectively storing unsaved data) When you save a report file manually, template conversion is performed on the report files in the internal memory that have not yet been converted. Converted files are saved to the external storage medium.
Printer Output When a report file is created (when file division occurs), template conversion is performed, and the report is output to a printer. Template conversion is also performed when recording stops.
2.18.5
Loading and Saving Report Template Files
For details on loading report template files, see page 2-195 in section 2.28.3, "Saving and Loading Report Templates (/MT option)".
About Report Template Files
Creates a report template for each kind of report file. If the file type is Separate, a template for each type is necessary.
Example in which the report file type is Hourly +Daily
File type Combine Separate
Template An Hourly + Daily report template is necessary. An Hourly and Daily report templates are necessary.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-131
2.19 Setting the Timers
Set the timers that are used in the event action function and the math function (/MT option). There are two types of timers: absolute and relative. You can set up to 12 timers* for each type. You cannot change timers during recording or computing.
* For release numbers 3 and later (up to 4 timers for release numbers earlier than 3).
2.19.1 Setting the Timers
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Timer settings > Timer Hardware configurator: Timer settings > Timer
Description
Timer: 1 to 12
Type
Setup Item Type
Selectable Range or Options Off, Relative, Absolute
Default Value Off
Type Set the timer type.
Options Relative timer Absolute timer
Description Times out at specified intervals. Expires at the times determined by the reference time and the interval.
Interval1
Setup Item Day2 Hour2 Minute2 Interval3
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
0 to 31
0
0 to 23
1
0 to 59
0
1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6min, 10min, 12min, 1h
15min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2, h, 3h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h, 24h
1 You can set this when the type is not set to Off. 2 You can set this when the type is set to Relative timer. 3 You can set this when the type is set to Absolute timer.
Day, Hour, Minute Set the interval for the relative timer.
Interval Set the interval for the absolute timer.
Action on Math Start*
Setup Item Reset
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value On
* You can set this when the type is set to Relative timer.
Reset
Set this to On to reset the timer when starting computation. Set this to Off to not reset. The timer does not expire (if the timer is specified as an event, the action will not be executed).
2-132
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Reference time*
Setup Item Hour Minute
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 23 0 to 59
* You can set this when the type is set to Absolute timer.
Hour, Minute Set the reference time for the absolute timer.
2.19 Setting the Timers
Default Value 0 0
Explanation
Timers
· Relative Timer
The timer is started when the timer is set, and the timer expires every specified interval. In this mode, the timer stops when a power failure occurs. Example: Interval: 00:15
The timer expires every 15 minutes. · Absolute Timer
The timer expires at the times determined by the reference time and the interval. The reference time is set on the hour (00 to 23). Example: Reference time: 00:00
Interval: 10 min The timer expires at 0 hour, 0 hour 10 min, 0 hour 20 min, . . . 23 hour 40 min,
and 23 hour 50 min. For example, if the timer is set at 9 hour 36 min, the timer expires at 09 hour
40 min, 09 hour 50 min, 10 hour, and so on.
Absolute timer Set the timer
Ref. time
Time
Relative timer
Set the timer Reset the timer
Time
AAAA
Timeout
A: Interval
B
B
B: Interval
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2.19.2 Setting the Match Time Timer
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Timer settings > Match time timer Hardware configurator: Timer settings > Match time timer
Description
Match time timer: 1 to 12
Type
Setup Item Type
Selectable Range or Options Off, Day, Week, Month, Year
Type
Set the kind of match time timer.
Options
Description
Off Day Week Month Year
Disables the function. Set the time match condition of a day. Set the time match condition of a week. Set the time match condition of a month. Set the time match condition of a year.
Default Value Off
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-133
2.19 Setting the Timers
Timer match condition1
Setup Item
Day of week Month Day Hour Minute
Selectable Range or Options
Sunday to Saturday January to December 1 to 312 0 to 23 0 to 59
Default Value
Sunday January 1 0 0
1You can set this when the type of timer is not set to Off. The items that are displayed varies depending on the Type setting.
2 If Type is set to Year, the range varies depending on the timer match condition Month. If Type is set to Month, the range is 1 to 28.
Day of Week, Month, Day, Hour, Minute
Set each timer match condition.
Depending on the Type setting, set the items with marks in the table below.
Setup Item
Day
Month
Day
Day of the week
Hour:Minute
Week
Type
Month
Year
Timer action
Setup Item Timer action
Selectable Range or Options Single, Repeat
Timer action
Set the timer action.
Options
Description
Single
Executes the action once when the condition is met.
Repeat
Executes the action at every specified time.
Default Value Repeat
2-134
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
The event action function is used to execute a specified action on the basis of events that occur. The settings explained here are also used to configure the remote control function.
2.20.1
Setting Event Action Numbers and Actions
Select an event action number, and set event action to On. Set the even type and event-specific conditions. Then, set the action for the event and the action conditions.
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Event action > Event action number (display example: 1-20)
Hardware configurator: Event action > Event action number (display example: 1-20)
Description Event action number Select the event action number (1 to 50) to assign an event action.
Event action
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off Select On to use the event action function.
Event1
Setup Item Type
Number2 Detail3
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Internal switch, Remote,4 Relay, Alarm -
Internal switch
IO channel, Alarm - Math channel, Alarm
- Communication channel, Any alarm, Timer,
Match time timer, User function key, Status
IO channel, Math channel, Communication
1
channel, Internal switch, Timer, Match time timer,
User function key, Relay, Remote
When the Type is to Alarm - IO channel, Alarm Level 1
- Math channel, or Alarm - Communication
channel.
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
When the type is set to Status.
Record
Record, Computation, User lock out 6, Memory/
Media error, Measurement error, Communication
error
Operation mode
Rising edge, Falling edge, Rising/Falling edge, Rising edge Edge5
1 You can set this when Event action is set to On. 2 You cannot set this when Type is set to Any alarm or Status. 3 You can set this when the Type is to Alarm - IO channel, Alarm - Math channel, Alarm -
Communication channel, or Status.
4 You can set this when the operation mode of the DI module is set to Remote. 5 You can set this when the event is set to Timer, Match time timer, or User function key. 6 You can set this when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option).
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-135
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Type
Set the event conditions for executing the action.
Event Type
Description
Internal switch
Select the internal switch number.
Remote
Select the DI channel number of the remote control input.
You cannot set this on a DI of a PID control module.
Relay
Select the DO channel number.
Alarm - I/O channel
Alarm - Math channel Alarm - Communication channel
Any alarm
Timer Match time timer User function key Status
Set the alarm of an I/O channel.* Channels of PID control modules are not included. Set the alarm of a math channel.* Set the alarm of a communication channel.* You cannot set this on a DO of a PID control module with the type set to Contact output within module. The change from no active alarms to one or more active alarms is regarded as an event. Alarms of PID control modules are also included. Select a timer number. Timer timeout. Select a match time timer number. When the time matches. Select the user function key number. Select the status.
* Alarms whose Logging is set to Off in the alarm settings are also applicable.
Number
Set a number from the following table depending on the event type.
Event Type
Description
Internal switch Relay
Internal switch number Output relay number (DO channel number)
Alarm - I/O channel
I/O channel number
Alarm - Math channel
Computation channel number
Alarm - Communication channel Timer
Communication channel number Timer number
Match time timer
Match time timer number
User function key
User function key number
Detail
Set the alarm level and status.
Detail Alarm level 1 to 41 Record2 Computation2 User lock out Memory/Media error2 Measurement error2 Communication error2
Description Alarm level (1 to 4) Recording in progress. Computing in progress. User lock out occurring. Internal memory or external media error Measurement error status. Communication error status.
1 When the Type is to Alarm - IO channel, Alarm - Math channel, or Alarm - Communication channel.
2 When the type is set to Status.
Operation mode
Set the edge type for performing actions.
Operation mode
Description
Rising edge Falling edge Rising / Falling edge
Edge
The action is executed when the event changes from off to on. The action is executed when the event changes from on to off. When the event changes from off to on, the action is changed from off to on. When the event changes from on to off, the action is changed from on to off. You can set this on events other than Timer and Match time timer. The action is executed when an event occurs. This applies when the event is set to Timer or Match time timer.
2-136
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Operation Modes That Can Be Specified Depending on the Event
1
The settings with marks in the table below are possible.
Event
Remote (DI) Internal switch
Rising
Falling
Rising / Falling edge
edge
edge
edge
2
Relay (DO)
Configuring the GM
Alarm - IO channel
Alarm - Math channel
Alarm - Communication channel
Any alarm
3
Timer
Match time timer User function key Status
4
Rising edge
Falling edge
Event occurrence
Event occurrence
5
Action Execution
Flag ON
OFF
Rising / Falling edge
Event occurrence
Action
Execution
Flag
ON
ON
OFF
Edge (timer, match time timer)
Event occurrence
App Index
Action Execution
Execution
Action
Flag ON
OFF
Flag
ON
ON
OFF
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-137
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Action
Setup Item Type
Selectable Range or Options
When the operation mode is rising edge, falling edge, or edge Recorded, Computation, Flag, Manual sample, AlarmAck, Adjust the time, Save display data, Save event data, Event trigger 8, Message, Reset the relative timer, Load Settings, Save Settings, Relay, Internal switch, Load program pattern11
Default Value --
Number1 Detail2 Group number3 Batch group number9, 10
When the operation mode is Rising/Falling edge
Recording start/stop, Computation start/stop, Flag On/
Off, Relay On/Off, Internal switch On/Off
Depends on the type Start,4 Stop,4 Reset,5 All groups,6 Specified group,6 -- On/Off7
GM10-1: 1 to 50
1
GM10-2: 1 to 60 GM10-1: ALL,11 1 to 6 GM10-2: ALL,11 1 to 12
1 You can set this when the type is set to Flag, Message, Reset the relative timer, Flag On/Off, Relay, Relay On/Off, Internal switch, or Internal switch On/Off.
2You can set this when the type is set to Recorded, Computation, Message, Relay, or Internal switch.
3 Appears when the type is set to Message and Detail is set to Specified group. 4 You can set this when the type is set to Recorded, or Computation. 5 You can set this when the type is set to Computation. 6 You can set this when the type is set to Message. 7 You can set this when the type is set to Relay or Internal switch. 8 This is not available when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option).
9 This is available when you are using the multi-batch function (/BT option).
10 You cannot set this when the type is set to Flag, Manual sample, or Computation start/stop. If
the type is set to Computation, you can set this only when Detail is set to Reset. You cannot set this when the type is set to Message. 11 This action can be specified only when the event is set to Remote or User function key.
Type Set the action to execute when an event occurs.
When the Event Operation Mode Is Rising Edge or Falling Edge
Options Recording Computing
Flag Manual sample Alarm ACK
Save display data
Save event data
Event trigger
Message
Reset the relative timer Load settings
Save settings Adjust the time Relay
Internal switch
Description
Starts or stops recording. Starts or stops computation (/MT option) or resets the computed values of all math channels. Sets the flag to 1 (On). (/MT option) Executes manual sampling Clears the alarm output DOs of PID control modules are also included. Saves the display data being recorded to a file in the internal memory. You can specify this when the GM is configured to record display data. Saves the event data being recorded to a file in the internal memory. You can specify this when the GM is configured to record event display data. Applies a trigger that starts event data recording. You can specify this when the GM is configured to record event display data. Writes a message. Specify the message number and the message write destination. Set the destination to all groups, or specify a write destination group number. You can execute this while recording is in progress. Resets a relative timer. The timer starts immediately. Loads the setting parameter file in the root directory of the SD card and configures the GM accordingly. (See the explanation.) Saves the setting parameter file in the root directory of the SD card. Sets the clock to the nearest hour. Sets the relay output to On or Off. DO channels of PID control modules are applicable. Sets the internal switch to On or Off.
Continued on the next page
2-138
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Options Load program pattern
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Description Loads all the pattern files (ProgPatYY, YY: 01 to 99) in the specified folder at the root directory of the SD memory card.
Folder name LoadProgPatXX
Content XX: 01 to 10
File name ProgPatYY.GPT
Content YY: 01 to 99
When the Event Operation Mode Is Rising/Falling Edge
Options Recording start/stop Computation start/stop
Flag On/Off
Relay On/Off
Internal switch On/Off
Description
Repeats recording start and stop on every event occurrence. Repeats computation (/MT option) start and stop on every event occurrence. Repeats the operation of setting the flag to 1 (On) and 0 (Off) on every event occurrence. Repeats the operation of setting the relay to On and Off on every event occurrence. Repeats the operation of setting the internal switch to On and Off on every event occurrence.
Detail Set the details when the action type is set to Recorded, Computation, or Message.
When Set to Recorded or Computation
Options
Start Stop Reset (Computation only)
Description
Starts recording or computation. Stops recording or computation. Resets computation.
When Set to Message
Options All groups Specified group
Description
Writes the message to all groups. Writes the message to the specified group. Set the destination by specifying a group number.
When Set to Relay or Internal switch
Options On Off
Description Set the relay or internal switch to On. Set the relay or internal switch to On.
Note
Do not manually operate a relay assigned to a status event or the output status of an internal switch action.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-139
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Number
Set the target number for Message, Reset the relative timer, Event trigger, Save event data,
Flag, User function key, or Load program pattern.
Operation mode
Type
Setup Items
Flag
Flag number 1 to 20
Relay
DO channel whose Type is set to Manual
Save event data
Measurement group 1
Rising edge, Falling edge, Edge
Event trigger Message Reset the relative timer Load settings
Measurement group 1, measurement group 2* Message number 1 to 100 Timer number 1 to 4 (relative time) Load number 1 to 10
Save settings Internal switch
Save number: 1 to 10 Internal switch number whose Type is set to Manual
Load program pattern* File number 1 to 10
Rising / Falling edge Flag On/Off
Flag number 1 to 20
Relay On/Off Internal switch On/Off
DO channel whose Type is set to Manual Internal switch number whose Type is set to Manual
* When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval Release number 4 and later.
Group number Set the display group number to write the message to when Specified group is specified.
Batch group number Set the batch group number or all batch groups (ALL) to execute when events occur.
Explanation
Resetting a Relative Timer Resets a timer and starts it. If you reset a relative timer, it is considered to have expired (if the timer is being used as an event, the corresponding action is executed).
Resetting a Match Time Timer Resets a match time timer after it expires so that it is enabled again. · Resetting a match time timer is not considered a timeout (even if it is being used as an
event in the event action function, the corresponding action is not executed). · This operation can be used with match time timers whose timer action is set to single.
Loading Setting Parameters This action can be specified only when the event is set to remote or user function key. This action loads a setting parameter file from the root directory of the SD card and configures the GM accordingly. Setting parameter files are named "LOAD1.GNL," "LOAD2. GNL," and so on up to "LOAD10.GNL." (If the advanced security function is enabled (On), the extension is .GSL.) You must create a setting parameter file and save it to the SD card in advance. If the advanced security function (/AS option) is in use, security settings are not loaded.
Saving Setting Parameters This action can be specified only when the event is set to remote or user function key. This action saves a setting parameter file with the name "SAVE1.GNL," "SAVE2.GNL," and so on up to "SAVE10.GNL" in the root directory of the SD card. (If the advanced security function is enabled (On), the extension is .GSL.)
2-140
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Time Adjustment
1
This action can be specified only when the event is set to remote control input. This action
sets the GM internal clock to the nearest hour.
· Operation When Recording Is Stopped
Difference from the Nearest Operation
2
Hour
00 min 00 s to 01 min to 59 s Truncates the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00 min 00 s.
02 min 00 s to 57 min to 59 s The time is not changed. 58 min 00 s to 59 min to 59 s Rounds up the minutes and seconds.
3
Example: 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00 min 00 s.
Configuring the GM
· Operation during Recording If the time difference between the event occurrence time and the nearest hour is within the time specified by Gradually adjusting the time of Time basic settings, the time is gradually corrected. Otherwise, the time is corrected according to Time adjustment beyond limit. See the explanation in page 2-182 in section 2.26.4, "Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time".
Internal Switch and Relay Output When the Scan Interval Is Shorter Than 100 ms Internal switches and relays triggered by event actions are output at 100 ms intervals.
4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-141
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Limitations on the Combinations of Events and Actions The combinations that are indicated with marks in the table below can be used.
Event Remote (DI)3
Action
Recording
Recording start/
stop1
Computation
Computation start/
stop1
Manual sample
Alarm ACK
Save display data
Save event data
Event trigger
Message
Reset the relative
timer
Load settings
Save settings
Load program
pattern
Adjust the time
Flag
Flag On/Off1
Relay output2
Relay On/Off1, 2
Internal switch2
Internal switch On/
Off1, 3
Relay (DO)
Internal switch
Alarm - IO channel
Alarm - Math channel
Alarm - Communication
channel
Any alarm
Timer
Match User Status
timer function
key2
1 When the operation mode is Rising/Falling edge. 2 Action can be set to Relay output, Relay On/Off, Internal switch, or Internal switch On/Off only
when the DO channel range type and internal switch type is set to Manual. 3 Only for DI modules installed in the GM whose operation mode is set to Remote.
2-142
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.20.2
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Event Action Examples
Example 1: Starting/Stopping Recording through Remote Control
Starts or stops recording when a remote control signal is applied to DI channel 0101. We assume that a DI module is installed in slot 1 of the main unit and that the operation mode is set to Remote. Event action number 1 will be used.
Setting the Mode of the DI Module
· Procedure
Config. tab > Measurement settings > Module settings > Module code "GX90XD-1611N"
· Setup Items
Setup Item Operation mode
Operation mode
Value Remote
Configuring the Event Action
· Procedure
Config. tab > Event action > Event action number [1-20] · Setup Items
Setup Item Event action number Event action Event
Action
On/Off Type Number Operation mode Type
Value
1 On Remote 0101 Rising / Falling edge Recording start/stop
Operation
If the DI channel 0101 input is turned on when recording is stopped, recording starts. If the DI channel 0101 input is turned off when recording is in progress, recording stops.
Example 2: Writing a Message When an Alarm Occurs
Write the message "Channel 1 Alarm" to group 1 when an alarm occurs on channel 0001. This example assumes that an AI module is installed in slot 0 of the GM main unit. Use event action number 2.
Configuring the Event Action
· Procedure
Config. tab > Event action > Event action number [1-20] · Setup Items
Setup Item Event action number Event action Event
Action
On/Off Type Number Detail Operation mode Type Number
Value
2 On Alarm - I/O channel 0001 Alarm level 1 Rising edge Message 1
Other Settings
· Set AI channel 0001 to alarm level 1. Setup: See page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
· Register "Channel 1 Alarm" in message number 1. Setup: See page 2-96 in section 2.11.3, "Setting Messages".
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-143
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Example 3: Saving the Data Every Day at Hour 17
Save recorded data to the SD card every day at hour 17. Use event action number 3. Use match time timer number 1.
Setting Match Time Timer 1
· Procedure
Config. tab Timer settings > Match time timer · Setup Items
Setup Item Match time timer Type Timer match condition
Timer action
Hour Minute Timer action
Value
1 Day 17 00 Repeat
Configuring the Event Action
· Procedure
Config. tab > Event action > Event action number [1-20] · Setup Items
Setup Item Event action number Event action Event
Action
On/Off Type No. Operation mode Type
Value
3 On Match time timer 1 Edge Save display data
Other Settings
Set the display data to be saved automatically. Set the file save interval to 1day or longer. If a file save interval shorter than 1day is specified, the data is also saved at the file save interval.
Setup: page 2-104 in section 2.13.1, "Setting the Type of Data to Record (Event or display data) and Recording Conditions" Setup: page 2-118 in section 2.15.2, "Setting the Save Method to Media (Auto save or manual save) and Media FIFO"
Example 4: Setting DO to OFF and When Recording Starts and DO to ON When Recording Stops
Set the output status of DO channel 0009 to ON when recording stops and OFF when recording starts.
Recording start
Recording stop
Event
Recording start Recording stop
Action
DO[0009]: On DO[0009]: Off
This example assumes that a DI/DO module is installed in slot 0 of the GM main unit. Use event action numbers 4 and 5.
2-144
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.20 Configuring the Event Action Function
Setting the DO Channel Type
· Procedure
Config. tab > DO channel settings > [0009-0014] > Range · Setup Items
Setup Item CH (channel) Range
Type
Value 0009 Manual
Configuring the Event Action
· Procedure
Config. tab > Event action > Event action number [1-20] · Setup Items
Setup Item Event action number Event action Event
Action
On/Off Type Detail Operation mode Type No. Detail
Value
4 On Status Record Rising edge Relay 0009 Off
Setup Item Event action number Event action Event
Action
On/Off Type Detail Operation mode Type No. Detail
Value
5 On Status Record Falling edge Relay 0009 On
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-145
2.21
Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
Set communication channels. Set these items to make the GM record data from Modbus devices or PCs.
2.21.1 Enabling Communication Channels and Setting the Span, Decimal Point, and Unit
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication channel settings > Channel range (display example: C001-C020) > On/Off, Span
Hardware configurator: Communication channel settings > Channel range (display example: C001-C020) > On/Off, Span
Description
Item Channel range
Selectable Range or Options GM10-1: C001 to C300 GM10-2: C001 to C500
Default Value --
On/Off, Decimal place, Span Lower, Span Upper, Unit
Setup Item
On/Off Decimal place* Span Lower* Span Upper* Unit*
Selectable Range or Options Off, On 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 9999999 to 99999999 9999999 to 99999999
Character string (up to 6 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value
Off 0 0 100 --
* You can set this when a communication channel is set to On.
On/Off Select On to use the communication channels.
Decimal place Set the decimal place for span lower and span upper.
Span Lower, Span Upper Set the input range.
Unit Set the unit.
At Power on*
Setup Item Value at power on
Selectable Range or Options Last value, Preset value
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
Value at power on Set the value to replace the communication channel value at power-on.
Default Value Last value
2-146
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
Preset value*
Setup Item Preset value
Selectable Range or Options
9.999999E+29 to 9.999999E+29 9.9999999E+29 to 1.0000000E30,0, 1.0000000E30 to 9.9999999E+29
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
Preset value Set the preset value.
Default Value 0
Watchdog timer
Setup Item On/Off Timer* Value at timer-expired*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On 1 to 120 (s) Last value, Preset value
Default Value
Off 30 Last value
* You can set this when the watchdog timer is set to On.
On/Off Set this to On to use the watchdog timer.
Timer
Set the duration for monitoring values that fail to be updated. If a value is not updated within the specified duration, the value is replaced.
Value at timer-expired Set whether to set the value when the timer expires to the last value or preset value.
Explanation
Watchdog Timer Function Data may fail to be updated due to Modbus or other communication problems. The watchdog timer function replaces values with preset values or last values when values are not updated within the specified duration (timer). Data replacement occurs immediately when the timer expires, and the values are held until the next read cycle.
Z Replace data
Read cycle
Timer
Communication channel data
A BC D E E E FGH
Communication data
Data not updated
Preset value: Z
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-147
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
2.21.2 Setting Alarms
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication channel settings > Channel range (display example: C001-C020) > Alarm
Hardware configurator: Setting tab > Communication channel settings > Channel range (display example: C001-C020) > Alarm
Description
Setup Item Channel range
Selectable Range or Options GM10-1: C001 to C300 GM10-2: C001 to C500
Default Value --
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Setup Item On/Off Type1
Value1 Hysteresis1, 3 Logging1 Output type1 Output No.2
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On H: High limit, L: Low limit, T: Delay high limit, t: Delay low limit 9999999 to 99999999 Numeric value (0 to 100000) On/Off Off, Relay, Internal switch DO channel or internal switch
1 You can set this when a level (1 to 4) is set to On. 2 You can set this when Output type is not set to Off. 3 You can set this when the type is set to H:High limit or L:Low limit.
On/Off Set this to On to set alarms.
Type Set the alarm type.
Value
Set the alarm value for the specified alarm type.
Options
Value
H, L
Within 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point.
T, t
Same as H and L
Default Value Off H: High limit
0 0 On Off --
Hysteresis Set this to establish an offset between the value used to activate and release alarms.
Logging Set this On to display an alarm (notify you) when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, when an alarm occurs, the GM outputs signals to alarm output DO channels or internal switches but does not display the alarm. Alarms are also not recorded in the alarm summary.
2-148
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
Output type
1
Set the alarm output destination.
Configuring the GM
Output No.
Set the number of the DO channel or internal switch to output alarms to.
2
Alarm delay*
Setup Item
Hour Minute Second
Selectable Range or Options
1 to 24 0 to 59 0 to 59
Default Value
0 0
3
10
* You can set this when Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, or Level 4 is On.
Hour, Minute, and Second
4
Set the alarm delay. These values are valid when the delay high limit or delay low limit is in
use.
For details on alarm types, see page 2-33 in section 2.3.2, "Setting Alarms".
5
2.21.3 Setting the Display
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication channel settings > Channel range (display example: C001-C020) > Display settings
Hardware configurator: Communication channel settings > Channel range (display example: C001-C020) > Display settings
Description
Tag
Setup Item Characters
No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Characters Set the tag. Not all characters may be displayed due to space constraints.
No. Set the tag number.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-149
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
Color
Setup Item Color
Selectable Range or Options
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green) and a userdefined color (1 color)
Default Value --
Color Set channel display colors. The colors apply to the trend display and bar graph display.
For instructions on how to set the user-defined color, see "Operation Example 2" on page 2-14.
Zone
Setup Item Lower Upper
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 95% 5 to 100% input
Default Value 0 100
Lower and Upper Set these values when you want to divide the waveform displays of channels into separate zones so that waveforms do not overlap. Set the Lower and Upper positions as percentages of the maximum display width. Set Lower to a value less than Upper, and set the zone width (Upper Lower) to be 5% or greater.
For zone display examples, see "Changing the Trend's Waveform Display" on page 3-17.
Bar graph
Setup Item Base position
Selectable Range or Options Lower, Center, Upper
Default Value Lower
Base position Set the bar graph base position. This setting is applied on the bar graph display.
For bar graph display examples, see "Bar Graph Monitor and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor" on page 3-23.
2-150
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
Color scale band
Setup Item Band area Color
Display position Lower Display position Upper
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, In, Out
Off
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, --
yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime, cyan, dark
blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown,
light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring
green) and a user-defined color (1 color)
Span (scale) lower limit to span (scale) upper limit 0.00
Span (scale) lower limit to span (scale) upper limit 1.00
Band area
Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the scale. This
setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Options
Description
Off
Disables the function.
In
Displays the area inside using the color band.
Out
Displays the area outside using the color band.
Color Set the display color.
Upper display position limit, Lower display position limit Set the display position. Set a value within the span range.
Alarm point mark
Setup Item Indicate on Scale Mark kind Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color*
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, On
On
Alarm, Fixed
Alarm
24 colors (red, green, blue, blue violet, brown,
orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink,
light brown, light green, dark gray, olive, dark cyan,
and spring green) and a user-defined color (1 color)
* You can set this when the Mark kind is set to Fixed.
Indicate on Scale
Set this to On to display alarm point marks on the scale. Set this to Off to not display them. This setting is shared with the bar graph display.
Mark kind
Options Alarm
Fixed
Description
Displayed normally in green. Displayed in the specified color when an alarm occurs. Displayed with a fixed color.
Mark Shape or
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Alarm 1 color to Alarm 4 color When Mark kind is set to Fixed, set the display colors of point marks for alarm levels 1 to 4.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-151
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
2.21.4
Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, Correction factor* (release number 4 (version 4.02) and later))
* /AH option only
2-152
Path
Web application: Config. tab > AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Calibration correction
Hardware configurator: AI channel settings or AI (mA) channel settings > Channel range (display example: 0001-0010) > Calibration correction
Description
Calibration correction
Setup Item On/Off Mode 1
Number of set points 1 Edit correction points 1
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off/On 2
Off
Linearizer Approximation, Linearizer Bias,
Linearizer
Correction Factor
Approximation
2 to 12
2
Use the Edit correction points button to display a --
calibration correction dialog box.
1 You can set this when On/Off is set to On. 2 This setting is fixed to Off when communication channel is not used (Off (page 2-146)).
On/Off
Set the communication channel for the calibration correction to On *.
* The number of channels that can be set to On has the following limitations.
Model
Number of channels that can be set to On
GM10-1
150
GM10-2
300
Mode
Set the correction mode when performing calibration correction. When the range is set to DI or Skip, the mode is fixed to Off.
Number of set points Set the number of points that make up the segments (including the start and end points).
Edit correction points: Linearizer approximation or linearizer bias (1 to 12*)
Setup Item Linearizer input Linearizer output
Selectable Range or Options 9999999 to 9999999 9999999 to 9999999
Default Value -- --
* The number of displayed points varies depending on the number of set points.
Linearizer input, Linearizer output
Enter the value of the set point. For linearizer input, set a value that is greater than the previous value.
Edit correction points: Correction factor (1 to 12*) (/AH option only)
Setup Item Uncorrected value
Instrument correction factor Sensor correction factor
Selectable Range or Options -9999999 to 9999999
-9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999
Default Value --
-- --
Execution of the input measurement --
--
* The number of displayed points varies depending on the number of set points.
Uncorrected value Enter the uncorrected value. Set a value that is greater than the previous value.
Instrument correction factor Set the instrument-dependent correction factor.
Sensor correction factor Set the sensor-dependent correction factor.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.21 Configuring Communication Channels (/MC option)
Procedure
1
Click Linearizer Edit correction points to display the AI channel[XXXX] Calibration correction dialog box.
Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias
Correction factor
2
Configuring the GM
3
4
Explanation Linearizer Approximation Corrects input values using characteristics specified with segments to derive output values.
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Output value ( Measured value )
Input value
Linearizer Bias Corrects input values using bias values specified with segments to derive output values.
After correction
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Output value
Linearizer bias
( Measured value )
Input value
Correction Factor
Corrects input values using the instrument correction factor and sensor correction factor specified with segments to derive output values.
Output value
After correction
Number of setpoints: 2 to 12
Uncorrected value
Instrument correction factor + Sensor correction factor
( Measured value )
Input value
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-153
2.22
Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Set the Ethernet communication conditions. For the WT connection client settings (WT communication (/E2 option)), see the WT Communication (/E2) User's Manual (IM 04L51B-19EN). For the EtherNet/IP communication settings (EtherNet/IP communication (/E1 option)), see the EtherNet/IP Communication (/E1) User's Manual (IM 04L51B-18EN). For the SLMP client settings (SLMP communication (/E4 option)), see the SLMP Communication (/E4) User's Manual (IM 04L51B-21EN).
2.22.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Communication (Ethernet) Basic settings
Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Ethernet basic settings
Description
Automatic IP settings
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Obtain IP address automatically Off, On
Default Value Off
Obtain IP address automatically
Set this to On to automatically obtain the IP address (DHCP). · If the current connection is disconnected after obtaining the IP address automatically, you
can check the IP address with the IP Address Configurator ( see page 2-2 in section 2.1.2, "Setting the IP Address (IP Address Configurator)"). After reconnection, you can check the IP address on the network information monitor ( see "Network Information Monitor" on page 3-38).
IP address
Setup Item
IP address Subnet mask Default gateway
Selectable Range or Options
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
* You can set this when Obtain IP address automatically is set to Off.
Default Value
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
IP address Set a fixed IP address to assign to the GM.
Subnet mask
Set the subnet mask. Set this in accordance with the system or network that the GM belongs to.
Default gateway Set the IP address of the default gateway.
Automatic DNS settings*
Setup Item Obtain DNS address automatically
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
* You can set this when Obtain IP address automatically is set to On.
Default Value Off
2-154
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Obtain DNS address automatically
Set this to On to automatically obtain the DNS server address. Otherwise, set this to Off. If you set this to Off, you need to set the primary and secondary DNS servers and domain suffixes. You can check the DNS server address that was obtained automatically ( see "Network Information Monitor" on page 3-38).
DNS settings*
Setup Item Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server
Selectable Range or Options 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
* You can set this when Obtain DNS address automatically is set to Off.
Primary DNS server Set the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS server Set the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Default Value 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Domain suffix
Setup Item Primary domain suffix
Secondary domain suffix
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Primary domain suffix Set the primary domain name. You do not have to set this.
Secondary domain suffix Set the secondary domain name. You do not have to set this.
Host settings
Setup Item Host name
Domain name
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
Host name Set the GM host name.
Domain name Set the domain name of the network that the GM belongs to. This is valid when Obtain DNS address automatically is set to Off.
Host name registration*
Setup Item Host name registration
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
* You can set this when Obtain IP address automatically is set to On.
Host name registration
Set this to On to register the host name.
Note
For information on IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS, and other settings, check with your network administrator.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-155
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
If the communication is disconnected due to a change in the IP address, do not close the browser, refresh the Web browser, or change the URL until the communication status icon turns off. Doing so may cause the closing of the browser or refreshing of the Web page to take a long time.
For details on the communication status icon, see "Status Indications" on page 2-8.
2.22.2 Configuring the FTP Client Function
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > FTP client settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > FTP client settings
Description
FTP client function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off Select On to use the FTP client function.
Transfer file1
Setup Item Display & Event data Report Manual sampled data Alarm summary Setting file 2
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On
Default Value
Off Off Off Off Off
1 You can set this when the FTP client function is set to On. 2 You can set this when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option).
Display & Event data Set this to On to automatically transfer display and event data files.
Report
Set this to On to automatically transfer report data files (including those based on report templates).
Manual sampled data Set this to On to automatically transfer manual sampled data.
Alarm summary Set this to On to automatically transfer alarm summaries.
Setting file (for the advanced security function (/AS option)) Set this to On to automatically transfer the setting parameter file when settings are changed.
Transfer wait time*
Setup Item Display & Event data Report
Selectable Range or Options 0 to 120 (minute) 0 to 120 (minute)
* You can set this when the FTP client function is set to On.
Display & Event data Set the time to delay the data transfer to the FTP server.
Report Set the time to delay the data transfer to the FTP server.
Default Value 0 0
2-156
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Encryption*
Setup Item Encryption Verification of certificate
Selectable Range or Options Off, On Off, On
* You can set this when the FTP client function is set to On.
Default Value Off On
Encryption Set to On to encrypt using SSL the data transferred via FTP.
Verification of Certificate Set to On to verify the certificate received from the server using the certificate installed in the GM.
FTP connection Primary*
Setup Item FTP server name
Port number User name
Password
Directory
PASV mode
Selectable Range or Options
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Numeric value (1 to 65535) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Off, On
Default Value --
21 --
--
--
Off
* You can set this when the FTP client function is set to On.
FTP server name
Set the name of the FTP server to transfer files to. If the DNS is available, you can set the host name as a server name. You can also set the IP address. In this case, the DNS is not required.
For details on DNS, see page 2-154 in section 2.22.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Port number Set the port number of the FTP server to transfer files to.
User name Set the user name (login name) for accessing the FTP server.
Password Set the password for accessing the FTP server.
Directory
Set the directory of the file transfer destination. The delimiter for directories varies depending on the implementation of the destination FTP server. Example: When transferring files to the "data" directory in the "home" directory of an FTP server on a UNIX file system. /home/data
PASV mode Set this to On when using the GM behind a firewall that requires the PASV mode.
FTP connection Secondary
Configure the secondary FTP server. The settings are the same as those for "FTP connection Primary."
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-157
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
2.22.3 Configuring the SMTP Client Function
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > SMTP client settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > SMTP client settings
Description
SMTP client function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off Select On to use the SMTP client function.
Authentication*
Setup Item Authentication
Selectable Range or Options Off, SMTP Authentication, POP before SMTP, APOP
* You can set this when the SMTP client function is set to On.
Authentication Set the authentication method for authenticated e-mail transmission.
Default Value Off
Encryption*
Setup Item Encryption Verification of certificate
Selectable Range or Options Off, On Off, On
Default Value Off On
* You can set this when authentication is set to Off or SMTP Authentication.
Encryption Set to On to encrypt using SSL the data transferred via SMTP.
Verification of Certificate
Set to On to verify the certificate received from the server using the certificate installed in the GM.
SMTP server1
Setup Item SMTP server name
Port number User name2 Password2
Selectable Range or Options
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Numeric value (1 to 65535) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 )
1You can set this when the SMTP client function is set to On. 2 You can set this when authentication is set to SMTP Authentication.
Default Value --
25 --
--
SMTP server name Set the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
Port number
Set the port number to use. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
2-158
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
User name Set the login name for accessing the server using SMTP authentication.
Password Set the password for accessing the server using SMTP authentication.
POP3 Server1
Setup Item POP3 server name
Port number User name2 Password2
Selectable Range or Options
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Numeric value (0 to 65535) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
110 --
--
1You can set this when the SMTP client function is set to On. 2 You can set this when authentication is set to POP Before SMTP or APOP.
POP3 server name
If you need to use POP before SMTP, set the host name or IP address of the POP3 server.
Port number
Set the port number to use. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
User name Set the login name for accessing the POP3 server.
Password Set the login password for accessing the POP3 server.
2.22.4
Setting E-mail Transmission Conditions (When the SMTP client function is on)
Set the server configuration and the contents of the e-mail transmission. For the mail format, see page 3-46 in section 3.2.5, "E-mail Format".
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > E-mail settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > E-mail settings
Description
Mail header
Setup Item Recipient 1
Recipient 2
Sender
Subject
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 150 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 150 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value -- -- -- --
Recipient 1 Set the address of recipient 1. You can enter multiple e-mail address in a recipient box. When entering multiple addresses, delimit each address with a space.
Recipient 2 Set the address of recipient 2. You can enter multiple e-mail address in a recipient box. When entering multiple addresses, delimit each address with a space.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-159
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Sender Set the sender address. Set this if necessary.
Subject Set the subject of e-mails.
E-mail contents
Setup Item Header
Include source URL
Selectable Range or Options
Character string (up to 128 characters, A a # 1 ) Off, On
Default Value --
Off
Header Set the mail header.
Include source URL Set this to On to include the source URL. The URL is attached when the Web server is enabled.
Alarm settings
Setup Item Alarm notification
Detection 1 Channel set 2
Alarm level 1 3 Alarm level 2 3 Alarm level 3 3 Alarm level 4 3 Attach instantaneous data* Send alarm action*
Include tag/ch in Subject
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 &
Off
Recipient 2
Channel, Alarm level
Channel
Up to 50 channels; I/O channels, Math channels, --
communication channels
Off, On
Off
Off, On
Off
Off, On
Off
Off, On
Off
Off, On
Off
Occurrence & Release, Occurrence
Occurrence & Release
Off, On
Off
1 You can set this when the alarm notification is not set to Off. 2 You can set this when the Detection is set to Channel. 3 You can set this when the Detection is set to Alarm level.
· Alarm notification mail is not sent when a control alarm occurs or is released.
Alarm notification Set the recipients that will receive e-mails when alarms occur and are released.
Detection
Set the type for detecting alarm occurrence and release. You cannot specify a channel of an AO module or PID control module.
Channel set Set the source channel for detecting alarm occurrence and release.
Alarm level 1 to Alarm level 4
Set the alarm level for detecting alarm occurrence and release. The setting applies to all channels.
Attach instantaneous data
Set this to On to include instantaneous data. The data that is attached is the instantaneous value at the time an e-mail is transmitted.
Send alarm action Set the type of alarm notification mail to transmit.
Include tag/ch in Subject
Set this to On to include the channel number and tag of the alarm detection channel in the subject.
2-160
IM 04L55B01-01EN
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Report settings
Setup Item Report notification
Selectable Range or Options
Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 & Recipient 2
Default Value Off
Report notification Set the recipients that will receive report e-mails.
Scheduled settings
Setup Item
Scheduled notification Attach instantaneous data* Interval (Recipient 1) Ref. time hour (Recipient 1) Ref. time minute (Recipient 1) Interval (Recipient 2) Ref. time hour (Recipient 2) Ref. time minute (Recipient 2)
Selectable Range or Options
Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 & Recipient 2 Off, On 1h/2h/3h/4h/6h/8h/12h/24h 0 to 23 0 to 59 1h/2h/3h/4h/6h/8h/12h/24h 0 to 23 0 to 59
Default Value
Off Off 24h 0 0 24h 0 0
* You can set this when Scheduled notification is not set to Off.
Scheduled notification Set the recipients that will receive scheduled e-mail transmissions.
Attach instantaneous data Set this to On to include instantaneous data. The data that is attached is the instantaneous value at the scheduled times.
Interval (Recipient 1) Set the interval for transmitting e-mails to recipient 1.
Ref. time hour, Ref. time minute (Recipient 1) Set the time used as a reference for sending e-mails at specific intervals to Recipient 1.
Interval (Recipient 2) Set the interval for transmitting e-mails to recipient 2.
Ref. time hour, Ref. time minute (Recipient 2) Set the time used as a reference for sending e-mails at specific intervals to Recipient 2.
System settings
Setup Item Memory full notification Power failure notification System error notification User lockout notification*
Selectable Range or Options
Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 & Recipient 2 Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 & Recipient 2 Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 & Recipient 2 Off, Recipient 1, Recipient 2, Recipient 1 & Recipient 2
Default Value
Off Off Off Off
* You can set this when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option).
Memory full notification
Sends a message when the free space on the external storage medium or internal memory is low.
Power failure notification
Set recipients if you want e-mails to be sent when the GM is powered on or recovers from a power failure.
System error notification Set recipients if you want e-mails to be sent when system errors occur.
User lockout notification (for the advanced security function (/AS option))
Set recipients if you want an e-mail to be sent when a user lock out (user invalidation) occurs.
Mail Format For the mail format, see page 3-46 in section 3.2.5, "E-mail Format".
2-161
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
2.22.5
Setting the SNTP Client Function
Set the function used to query the time information server on the network for the time and synchronize the time.
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > SNTP client settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > SNTP client settings
Description
SNTP client function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off Select On to use the SNTP client function.
SNTP server*
Setup Item SNTP server name
Port number
Selectable Range or Options
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value --
123
* You can set this when the SNTP client function is set to On.
SNTP server name
Set the SNTP server name. If the DNS is available, you can set the host name as a server name. You can also set the IP address. In this case, the DNS is not required.
For details on DNS, see page 2-154 in section 2.22.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Port number
Set the port number of the SNTP server. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
Query action*
Setup Item Ref. time (Hour) Ref. time (Minute) Interval Timeout Time adjust on Start action
Selectable Range or Options
0 to 23 0 to 59 6h, 12h, 24h 10s, 30s, 90s Off, On
Default Value
0 0 6h 30s Off
* You can set this when the SNTP client function is set to On.
Ref. time (Hour), Ref. time (Minute) Set the reference time for making queries.
Interval Set the time interval for synchronizing the time with the server. Timeout Set the time to wait for the response from the SNTP server when querying the time.
Time adjust on Start action
Set this to On to synchronize the time using SNTP when recording is started. When set to ON, the clock is adjusted when recording starts and when the GM recovers from power failures when recording is in progress.
2-162
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
2.22.6 Configuring the Modbus Client Function (/MC option) Configuring Basic Settings
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Modbus client settings
Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Modbus client settings
Description
Modbus client function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off Select On to use the Modbus client function.
Communication1
Setup Item Interval
Selectable Range or Options 100ms, 200ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1min
1 You can set this when the Modbus client function is set to On.
Interval Set the communication interval.
Default Value 1s
Recovery action*
Setup Item Wait time
Selectable Range or Options Off, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min
Default Value 2min
* You can set this when the Modbus client function is set to On.
Wait time
Set the interval for retrying the connection when the connection is interrupted for some reason. Set this to Off to not retry connections. If communication fails, communication stops.
Connection1
Setup Item Keep connection Connection timeout2
Selectable Range or Options Off, On 1 to 10 (s)
Default Value Off 1
1 You can set this when the Modbus client function is set to On. 2 You can set this when Keep connection is set to On.
Keep connection Set this to On to maintain the connection with the external device.
Connection timeout
If you set Keep connection to On, set the duration to maintain the TCP connection with the external Modbus device.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-163
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Explanation
Keep connection Set whether to connect and disconnect TCP connections every time the GM accesses an external device. If you set Keep connection to On, the TCP connection/disconnection procedure is skipped, thereby reducing the amount of communication traffic between the devices. However, some devices do not support this feature. Use this feature after you check the specifications of the connected devices. Even if Keep connection is set to OFF, if the communication interval is less than 1 s, communication is performed as if Keep connection set to ON.
Configuring the Destination Server
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Modbus server settings
Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Modbus server settings
Description
Modbus server settings
Setup Item Server number
Server name Port number
Selectable Range or Options GM10-1: 16 GM10-2: 32
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value --
-- 502
Server number Displays the registration number of the server to be configured.
Server name Set the destination Modbus server name. If the DNS is available, you can set the host name as a server name. You can also set the IP address. In this case, the DNS is not required.
Port number Set the port number of the selected server. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
2-164
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Setting Commands
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Modbus client command settings > Client command number (display example: 1-20)
Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Modbus client command settings > Client command number (display example: 1-20)
Description
Client command number Displays the transmission command number to be set. GM10-1: 100, GM10-2: 200
Command setting
Setup Item Type Server* Unit No.* Data type* Register*
Channel type*
First-CH* Last-CH*
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off/Read/Write
Off
GM10-1: 1 to 16
1
GM10-2: 1 to 32
1 to 255
255
INT16, UINT16, INT32_B, INT32_L, UINT32_B, INT16
UINT32_L, FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
1 to 9999, 10001 to 19999, 30001 to
Read: 30001
39999, 100001 to 165535 300001 to 365536, 40001 to 49999,
Write: 40001
400001 to 465536
Read: Communication channel
Read:
Write: IO channel, Math channel,
Communication
Communication channel
channel
Write: I/O channel
Same as the channel type
1
Same as the channel type
1
* You can set this when the type not set to Off.
Type Set the command type.
Server Set the server number.
Unit No.
Set the fixed port number. The unit number is used to specify a device connected through the Modbus gateway function. To connect to the Modbus/TCP master of a UTAdvanced series, set the unit number to 1.
Data type
Set the data type. The data types that you can specify vary depending on the type of command.
See page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-165
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Register Set the register number of the server. You can specify an input register in the range of 30001 to 39999 or 300001 to 365536. You can specify a hold register in the range of 40001 to 49999 or 400001 to 465536. You can specify a coil in the range of 1 to 9999 and input relay in the range of 100001 to 165535. The register numbers that you can specify vary depending on the type of command.
Channel type When the type is set to Read, only communication channels are available. When the type is set to Write, set the channel type of the data to send.
First-CH, Last-CH Set the first channel number and the last channel number in accordance with the channel type.
2.22.7 Configuring the Server Function
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Server function Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Server function
Description
Keep alive function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value On
On/Off
Set this to On to disconnect when there is no response to test packets that are periodically sent. Otherwise, set this to Off.
Timeout function
Setup Item On/Off Timeout (minute)*
Selectable Range or Options Off, On 1 to 120
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
On/Off Select On to use the communication timeout function.
Timeout (minute) Set the timeout value.
Default Value Off 1
FTP server
Setup Item Output Directory Format
Selectable Range or Options MS-DOS, UNIX
Default Value UNIX
Output Directory Format Sets the directory output format.
Modbus server
Setup Item Modbus delay response
Selectable Range or Options Off, 10ms, 20ms, 50ms
Default Value Off
Modbus delay response To delay the responses to queries from the client, set the response delay value.
2-166
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
2.22.8 Limiting the Connection to the Modbus Server (GM)
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Allowed Modbus clients
Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Allowed Modbus clients
Description
Modbus client connect limits function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off
Set this to On to limit the IP addresses that can connect to the GM Modbus server function. IP addresses other than those specified here will not be able to connect. To not limit connections, set this to Off.
1 to 10*
Setup Item On/Off IP address
Selectable Range or Options Off, On Numerical value (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)
Default Value Off 0.0.0.0
* You can set this when the Modbus client connect limits function is set to On.
On/Off
Set this to On to set the IP addresses to allow connection. You can register up to 10 IP addresses.
IP Address
Set the IP addresses to allow connection (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255). You cannot specify host names.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-167
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
2.22.9
Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)
When using the OPC-UA server function (OPC-UA server (/E3 option)), see the OPC-UA
Server (/E3) User's Manual (IM 04L51B-20EN).
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Server list Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Server list
Description
For each server service, there is a separate Update configuration button for applying the
settings. Change the services one service at a time.
FTP
Setup Item On/Off Encryption* Port number*
Selectable Range or Options
On/Off On/Off Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value
On Off 21
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
ON/Off
Select On to use the FTP server function. Encryption
Set to On to encrypt using SSL the data exchanged via FTP. You need to create a key and a certificate.
See page 2-211 in section 2.30, "Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)".
Port number
Set the port number of the FTP server. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
HTTP
Setup Item On/Off Encryption* Port number*
Selectable Range or Options
On/Off On/Off Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value
On Off 80
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
ON/Off Select On to use the Web server function.
Encryption
Set to On to encrypt using SSL the data exchanged via HTTP. You need to create a key and a certificate.
See page 2-211 in section 2.30, "Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)".
2-168
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
Port number Set the port number of the HTTP server. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number. If encryption is set to On, the port number will be set to 443.
Note
· When you change the HTTP port to Off, you cannot later change it back to On. To change it back to On, use the SMARTDAC+ Hardware Configurator or a communication command (see the communication command manual).
· If the communication is disconnected due to a change in the HTTP port, do not close the browser, refresh the Web browser, or change the URL until the communication status icon turns off. Doing so may cause the closing of the browser or refreshing of the Web page to take a long time.
SNTP
Setup Item On/Off Port number*
Selectable Range or Options On/Off Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value Off 123
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
ON/Off Select On to use the SNTP server function.
Port number
Set the SNTP port number. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
MODBUS
Setup Item On/Off Port number*
Selectable Range or Options On/Off Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value Off 502
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
ON/Off Select On to use the Modbus server function.
Port number
Set the Modbus port number. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
GENE
Setup Item On/Off Port number*
Selectable Range or Options On/Off Numeric value (1 to 65535)
Default Value On 34434
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
ON/Off
Select On to use the general purpose communication. General purpose communication is a function for communicating with the GM using dedicated commands.
Port number
Set the port number to use for general purpose communication. Unless specified otherwise, you do not need to change this number.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-169
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
DARWIN
Setup Item On/Off Channel Conversion*
Selectable Range or Options On/Off Stand-alone type, extended type
Default Value Off Stand-alone type
* You can set this when On/Off is set to On.
ON/Off Select On to use DARWIN compatible communication.
Channel Conversion
Set the DARWIN model type. The model type, channel number, and relay number are converted as follows.
Note
The channel conversion setting is shared with the channel conversion setting set with DARWIN in section, "2.23.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions". Changing this setting will also change the channel conversion setting set with DARWIN in section, "2.23.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Stand-alone type
Channel number Relay number
DARWIN GM 0xx -- 0?0 0x0x -- 0x?0 0xx -- 0?0 0x0x -- 0x?0
Example 031 0301, 040 0310 031 0301, 040 0310
Extended type
Channel number Relay number
DARWIN GM 0xx -- 5?0 1x0x -- 6x?0 Ixx -- I?0 0x0x -- 0x?0
Example 031 1301, 040 1310 I31 0301, I40 0310
For details on the DARWIN compatible communication function, see page 2-217 in section 2.31, "Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function".
Note
The following numbers cannot be used for the port number of any of the server functions. 34437, 44818, 2222, 34150, 34151
2.22.10 Setting the Web Content Selection Tree
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Web content selection
Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Web content selection
Description
You can set whether to show or hide some of the contents shown on the Data tab of the Web application. · When Communication of the security function is set to Login, only administrators can use
this feature. · When the Communication of the security function is set to Off, there are no restrictions on
using this feature.
User level: User
Setup Item
DO channel status/COMM status, etc. Log System information/Network information File
Selectable Range or Options On/Off
On/Off On/Off
On/Off
Default Value On
On On
On
2-170
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.22 Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function
DO Channel Status/COMM status, etc. Set this to Off to hide the following contents on the Data tab. DO channel, Internal switch, Modbus master, Modbus client, WT client
Log Set this to Off to hide the log on the Data tab.
System information/Network information Set this to Off to hide the system information and network information on the Data tab.
File Set this to Off to hide Memory summary/Save, Report, Manual sample, Save/load on the Data tab.
User level: Monitor *
Setup Item
DO channel status/COMM status, etc. Log System information/Network information File
Selectable Range or Options On/Off
On/Off On/Off
On/Off
Default Value On
On On
On
* You can set this when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option).
The settings are the same as those of the User user level except that Save/Load on the Data tab does not appear even if File is set to On.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-171
2.23 Configuring the Serial Communication Function (/C3 option)
Set serial communication parameters.
2.23.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Serial) settings > Serial basic settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Serial) settings > Serial basic settings
Description
Receiver
Setup Item Function
Address
Selectable Range or Options
Off, Normal, Modbus master (/MC option), Modbus slave, DARWIN When the function is Normal or DARWIN: 1 to 99 Other than Normal: 1 to 247
Default Value Normal
1
Function Set the function to use. To use general purpose communication, select Normal.
Address Set the GM address.
Function Normal, DARWIN Modbus master, Modbus slave
Selectable Range or Options 1 to 99 1 to 247
Data transfer*
Setup Item Baud rate
Parity bit Stop bit Data length
Selectable Range or Options
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 (bps) None, Even, Odd 1bit, 2bit 7bit, 8bit
You can set this when the receiver function is not set to OFF.
Baud rate Set the baud rate.
Parity bit Set the parity check method.
Stop bit Set the stop bits.
Data length Set the data length. To output the data in binary format, select 8bit.
Default Value 9600
Even 1bit 8bit
2-172
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.23 Configuring the Serial Communication Function (/C3 option)
Logout*
Setup Item Auto logout
Selectable Range or Options Off/1min/2mion/5min/10min
Default Value Off
* You can set this when the receiver function is set to Normal, and in the security settings, communication is set to Login.
Auto Logout
Options Off 1 min to 10 min
Description
Stays logged in until the user logs out. When you log in through serial communication, you will be automatically logged out when there is no communication control for the specified duration.
DARWIN *
Setup Item Channel conversion
Selectable Range or Options Stand-alone type, extended type
Default Value Stand-alone type
* You can set this when the receiver function is set to DARWIN.
Channel Conversion
Set the DARWIN model type. The model type, channel number, and relay number are converted as follows.
Stand-alone type
Channel number Relay number
DARWIN GM 0xx -- 0?0 0x0x -- 0x?0 0xx -- 0?0 0x0x -- 0x?0
Example 031 0301, 040 0310 031 0301, 040 0310
Extended type
Channel number Relay number
DARWIN GM 0xx -- 5?0 1x0x -- 6x?0 Ixx -- I?0 0x0x -- 0x?0
Example 031 1301, 040 1310 I31 0301, I40 0310
Note
The channel conversion setting is shared with the channel conversion setting set with DARWIN in section, "2.22.9 Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)". Changing this setting will also change the channel conversion setting set with DARWIN in section, "2.22.9 Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)".
For details on the DARWIN compatible communication function, see page 2-217 in section 2.31, "Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function".
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-173
2.23 Configuring the Serial Communication Function (/C3 option)
2.23.2 Enabling or Disabling the Modbus Master Function (/MC option) and Setting Communication Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Serial) settings > Modbus master Basic settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Serial) settings > Modbus master Basic settings
Description
Master function
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
On/Off Select On to use the Modbus master function.
Communication
Setup Item Interval
Communication timeout
Gap between messages
Selectable Range or Options
100ms, 200ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1min 100ms, 200ms, 250ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 1min Off, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 50ms, 100ms
Default Value 1s
1s
Off
Interval Set the data read cycle.
Communication timeout Set the timeout value for the response from the specified slave when a command is sent from the GM.
Gap between messages Set the amount of time to wait after receiving a response to a command to send the next command. To connect a UTAdvanced series, set the gap between messages to 20 ms.
Recovery action
Setup Item Retransmission
Wait time
Selectable Range or Options
Off, Once, Twice, 3 times, 4 times, 5 times, 10 times, 20 times Off, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min
Default Value 1
5s
Retransmission Set the number of retransmissions when there is no response from the slave device.
Wait time Set the auto recovery time from communication halt.
2-174
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.23.3
2.23 Configuring the Serial Communication Function (/C3 option)
Setting Modbus Master Transmission Commands
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Serial) settings > Modbus master Command settings > Master command number (display example: 1-20)
Hardware configurator: Communication (Serial) settings > Modbus master Command settings > Master command number (display example: 1-20)
Description
Command settings
Setup Item Type Slave* Data type* Register*
Channel type*
First-CH* Last-CH*
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Off, Read, Write
Off
1 to 247
1
INT16, UINT16, INT32_B, INT32_L, UINT32_B, INT16
UINT32_L, FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
1 to 9999, 10001 to 19999, 30001 to
Read:
39999, 100001 to 165535 300001 to 365536, 40001 to 49999, 400001 to 465536
30001 Write: 40001
Read: Communication channel
Communication
Write: IO channel, Math channel,
channel
Communication channel
Channel of the channel type
--
Channel of the channel type
--
* You can set this when the type not set to Off.
Type Set the transmission command operation.
Slave Set the address of the slave device.
Data type
Set the data type. The data types that you can specify vary depending on the type of command. See page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
Register
Set the register number of the slave. You can specify an input register in the range of 30001 to 39999 or 300001 to 365536. You can specify a hold register in the range of 40001 to 49999 or 400001 to 465536. You can specify a coil in the range of 1 to 9999 and input relay in the range of 100001 to 165535. The register numbers that you can specify vary depending on the type of command. See page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
Channel type
When the type is set to Read, only communication channels are available. When the type is set to Write, set the channel type of the data to send.
First-CH, Last-CH
Set the first channel number and the last channel number in accordance with the channel type.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-175
2.24 Configuring the USB Communication Function
Turn the USB communication function on or off.
2.24.1 Turning the USB Communication Function On and Off
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (USB) settings Hardware configurator: Communication (USB) settings
Description
USB communication
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value On
On/Off
Select On to use the USB communication function.
Logout*
Setup Item Auto logout
Selectable Range or Options Off/1min/2min/5min/10min
Default Value Off
* You can set this when in the security settings, communication is set to Login.
Auto logout
Options Off 1 min to 10 min
Description
Stays logged in until the user logs out. When you log in through USB communication, you will be automatically logged out when there is no communication control for the specified duration.
2.24.2
Explanation USB Communication Function
Item Compliant standard Interface
Communication conditions
Specifications
USB2.0 Connector: mini B type Number of ports: 1 Power supply: Self-powered Baud rate: 115200 bps Parity: None Data length: 8 bits Stop bits: 1 bit Handshake: Off
Connecting USB Communication
Connect a USB cable to the USB port. A USB driver must be installed in the PC in advance. If the PC is connected to Internet, a USB driver will be automatically downloaded and installed when the GM is connected to the PC. For the USB driver download page, see the following Web site. www.smartdacplus.com/software/en/
Note
If the driver fails to be downloaded properly, perform Update Driver Software from the Windows Device Manager.
2-176
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.25 Using the Bluetooth Communication Function
1
(/C8 option)
Configure the settings for using the Bluetooth communication function.
2.25.1 Turning the Bluetooth Communication Function On and Off
2
Configuring the GM
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Bluetooth) settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Bluetooth) settings
Description
Bluetooth communication
Setup Item On/Off
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value On
On/Off
Select On to use the Bluetooth communication function.
ID setting1
Setup Item Local device name
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 30 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value
2
1 You can set this when the Bluetooth communication function is set to On. 2 Model-serial number (e.g., GM10-123456789)
Local device name
Assign a Bluetooth device name to the GM. · The default name is "GM10-serial number." Change this if necessary. · Note that loading a setting parameter file to another GM10 will cause the ID setting to
also be loaded.
Bluetooth password*
Setup Item On/Off Password
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Character string (up to 20 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value On 1234
* You can set this when the Bluetooth communication function is set to On. When Communication of the security function is set to Login, only administrators can use this feature.
On/Off
Set this to On to authenticate the password using the communication start command when establishing a connection.
Password Set this when the password function is set to On.
Timeout function*
Setup Item Timeout
Selectable Range or Options Off, 1min, 2min, 5min, 10min
* You can set this when the Bluetooth communication function is set to On.
Default Value Off
Timeout
Options Off 1 min to 10 min
Description
Disables the timeout function. After a connection is established, if no commands are received within the specified time, communication will be automatically disconnected.
3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-177
2.25 Using the Bluetooth Communication Function (/C8 option)
Explanation
Bluetooth Communication Function
Item
Compliant standard Compatible profile Carrier frequency band Channel spacing Number of channels Communication distance Protocol Pairing
Specifications
Bluetooth Ver 2.1+EDR SPP (Serial Port Profile) 2402 to 2480 MHz 1 MHz 79 Approx. 10 m (depends on the operating environment) (Class 2) Dedicated protocol Maximum number of terminal device registrations: 8 (multi pairing) If the number of registrations exceeds 8, the registrations will be overwritten from the oldest ones.
2.25.2
Bluetooth Connection
Connection Procedure To establish a Bluetooth connection, you need to set the Bluetooth function to On and switch to Enabled mode (see "Bluetooth Function Mode" on the next page). The following procedure applies when you are connecting for the first time when the Bluetooth function is set to the default value.
Procedure
1 Check that the GM10 BT LED is not lit. 2 Hold down the GM10 USER1 key for at least 3 seconds.
The BT LED (orange) will turn on, and the GM will enter the connection standby state.
2-178
Hold down for at least 3 seconds.
BT LED lit: Enabled mode, connection standby state BT LED blinking: Enabled mode, connected state BT LED off: Disabled mode
3 Perform a pairing operation from the PC. A 6-digit authentication code appears on the PC screen and GM10's 7 segment LED. Check that the authentication codes match, and pair the devices. When pairing is complete, a COM port will be assigned. You will need to configure the COM port when connecting. Check the COM port using Windows Device Manager.
4 Connect to the GM from the PC. When connecting for the first time, you need to enter the password.
5 Enter 1234 (default value). The BT LED will blink, and a connection will be established with the GM.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.25 Using the Bluetooth Communication Function (/C8 option)
Explanation
Bluetooth Function Mode
The Bluetooth communication function mode and state depending on the usage condition
are shown below.
Item
Description
Function Mode
State BT LED
On
Enabled Connection On Bluetooth communication is disconnected.
mode standby
Bluetooth communication connection and pairing can
be performed.
Connected Blinking Bluetooth communication in progress.
Using GM dedicated protocol communication
commands, you can control and configure the GM and
output data.
Disabled
--
Off Bluetooth communication is not usable (radio waves
mode
are not generated).
To use Bluetooth communication, switch to Enabled
mode.
Off
Disabled
--
Off Bluetooth communication is not usable (radio waves
mode
are not generated).
To use Bluetooth communication, switch to Enabled
mode.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-179
2.26
Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
Set the system environment such as the time zone and language.
2.26.1 Setting the Display Language, Temperature Unit, Decimal Point Type, and Date Format
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Environment (Language) settings Hardware configurator: System settings > Environment (Language) settings
Description
Environment (Language) settings
Setup Item Language
Decimal Point Type
Selectable Range or Options
English, Japanese, German, French, Russian, Chinese, Korean Point, Comma
Default Value English
Point
Language
Set the language to use. The specified language is used in power-fail messages and other auto messages and the character strings in emails that are created.
Note
When you click Update configuration after changing the language, the message "Restart is required to reflect this changes. Continue?" may appear. Click OK, and the GM will automatically restart with the specified language.
Temperature unit Set the temperature unit.
Decimal Point Type
Set the decimal point type.
Options
Display Example
Point Comma
1234.56 1234,56
This is applied to the following files and displays. The decimal point of any file or setting not
listed below (the setup screen for example) is displayed using a period.
Type
Item
File output
Manual sampled data file
Report file
Printer output
Screen
Trend display
Digital display
Bar graph display
Overview display
Historical trend
Multi panel
Report data display
E-mail
The instantaneous value data in alarm e-mails and scheduled e-mails. The report data in report e-mails.
Date format
Setup Item Date format Delimiter Month indicator
Selectable Range or Options
Year Month Day, Month Day Year, Day Month Year Slash (/), Point (.), Hyphen (-) Characters, Numerical
Default Value
Year Month Day Slash (/) Numerical
2-180
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
Date format
Set the date display format.
Options
Display example1
Year Month Day Month Day Year Day Month Year
2012/12/30 12/30/2012 30/12/2012
1 In the display examples, the delimiter is a slash (/).
Scope
This is where the settings are retrieved from when Sync with the hardware in the Web Option settings* is executed. It does not change the date format on the date in the output data via communications, the date saved along with the data, and the date used in the data file names. * For the web option settings, see page 3-42 in section 3.1.3, "Changing the Display
Settings on the Browser".
Delimiter Set the date delimiter.
Month indicator Set whether to spell out months or use numbers on the screen.
2.26.2 Setting the Interval for Calculating the Rate-of-Change for Rate-ofChange Alarms
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Alarm basic settings Hardware configurator: System settings > Alarm basic settings
Description
Rate of change
Setup Item Decrease Increase
Selectable Range or Options 1 to 32 1 to 32
Default Value 1 1
Decrease Set the interval for the rate-of-change computation of the low limit on rate-of-change alarm in terms of the number of measured data values (1 to 32).* The actual interval is obtained by multiplying the value specified here by the scan interval.
* The number of measured data values is the number of samples.
Increase Set the interval for the rate-of-change computation of the high limit on rate-of-change alarm in the same manner as the interval for the low limit on rate-of-change alarm.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-181
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
2.26.3 Setting the Alarm Display Hold/Nonhold and Individual Alarm ACK Operation
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Alarm basic settings Hardware configurator: System settings > Alarm basic settings
Description
Indicator
Setup Item Hold/Nonhold
Selectable Range or Options Hold, Nonhold
Default Value Nonhold
Hold/Nonhold
Set the alarm display behavior. This applies to both measurement alarms and control
alarms.
Options
Description
Nonhold Hold
Clears the alarm indication when the alarm condition is released (returns to normal condition). Holds the alarm indication until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed.
The GM10 status display varies depending on the alarm display behavior settings.
For details on the status display, see page 1-64 in section 1.7.2, "Status Display".
Alarm ACK
Setup Item Individual alarm ACK
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
Individual alarm ACK
Set to On to perform individual alarm acknowledge. You can acknowledge alarms separately by channel and level. If set to On, Display settings are automatically set Hold. The Relay Action on ACK of all DO channels when an acknowledge is performed is Reset. Relay Action on ACK when the range type is set to Alarm in the DO settings of control settings is also set to Reset.
2.26.4 Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Time basic settings Hardware configurator: System settings > Time basic settings
Description
Time zone
Setup Item Hour Minute
Selectable Range or Options -13 to 13 0 to 59
Default Value 9 0
Hour, Minute
Set the time zone of the region in which the GM will be used in terms of the time difference from GMT. A negative value indicates that the local time is behind the GMT. Example: The standard time in Japan is ahead of the GMT by 9 hours. In this case, set Hour
to 9 and Minute to 0.
2-182
IM 04L55B01-01EN
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
Gradually adjusting the time
Setup Item Time deviation limit Time adjustment beyond limit
Selectable Range or Options Off, 5s, 10s, 15s Not Change the time, Change the time
Default Value 5s Not Change the time
Time deviation limit
To gradually correct the time when the time is changed while recording is in progress, set
the deviation limit for gradually correcting the time. Only when the time deviation between
the GM's time and the specified time is within ±(the value that you specify here) is the GM's
time gradually corrected. Otherwise, the time is corrected according to Time adjustment beyond limit.
Options
Description
5 s to 15 s Off
The time deviation limit. Disables the function that gradually corrects the time.
Current time
Specified time
Time deviation limit
Time adjustment beyond limit
Set the behavior when a time that exceeds the time deviation limit is specified.
Options
Description
Not Change the time Change the time
Time is not corrected. Time is immediately corrected.
Daylight Saving Time
Setup Item Use/Not
Selectable Range or Options Not, Use
Default Value Not
Use/Not Set this to On to set Daylight Saving Time.
Daylight Saving Time Settings
Start time
Setup Item
Month Day order Day of the week Hour
Selectable Range or Options
January to December 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last Sunday to Saturday 0 to 23
Default Value
March 2nd Sunday 2
Month, Day order, Day of the week, Hour of the day
Set the date and time when daylight saving time starts.
Setup Item
Description
Month
Set the month.
Day order
Set the week in the month.
Day of the week
Set the day of the week.
Hour of the day
Set the hour. 0 to 23.
End time
Setup Item Month Day order Day of the week Hour
Selectable Range or Options
January to December 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last Sunday to Saturday 0 to 23
Default Value
November 1st Sunday 2
Month, Day order, Day of the week, Hour of the day
Set the date and time when daylight saving time ends. The settings here are the same as those for Start time.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2-183
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
Explanation
Operation of Gradually Correcting the Internal Clock
If the time deviation between the time of the GM internal clock and the correct time (the specified time) is within a specified value, the GM clock is adjusted gradually at a rate of 1 ms per second. The maximum value of time deviation (tm in the figure below) can be selected in the range of 5 s to 15 s.
Time specified using keys or
retrieved from an SNTP server GM time
Time when the remote control signal is applied Nearest (GM time)
hour
Time deviation
tm
tm
Range in which the time is
gradually adjusted
Time deviation
tm
tm
Range in which the time is
gradually adjusted
Example: When changing the time to 12 hours 55 minutes 35 seconds when the internal clock is 12 hours 55 minutes 32 seconds The time deviation of 3 seconds is adjusted 1 ms per second. The internal clock will be synchronized to the specified time 50 minutes later.
2-184
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
2.26.5 Setting Internal Switches
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Internal switch settings Hardware configurator: System settings > Internal switch settings
Description
Internal switch number Displays the internal switch number (1 to 100) that you want to set.
Internal switch
Setup Item Type And/Or
Selectable Range or Options Alarm, Manual AND, OR
Default Value Alarm OR
Type
Set the item to assign to the internal switch.
Options Alarm Manual
Description Assigns the internal switch as an alarm output destination. Specify this to output using manual operation or event action.
And/Or
Set the internal switch operation conditions when multiple alarm outputs are assigned to the switch. When the channel 1 alarm output and channel 2 alarm output are assigned, And and Or operations are as shown in the figure below.
When set to AND
When set to OR
CH1 alarm
CH2 alarm
Internal switch S001
On
On
On
Preset action
Setup Item At power-on
Selectable Range or Options Last value, Off (0), On (1)
Default value Off (0)
At power-on
Set the action at power-on.
Options Previous value Off (0) On (1)
Description The internal switch state retains the previous value at power-on. The internal switch state is set to Off (0) at power-on. The internal switch state is set to On (1) at power-on.
* The action at power-on can be set when the internal switch type is set to Manual.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-185
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
2.26.6 Setting the Printer Output Conditions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Printer settings Hardware configurator: System settings > Printer settings
Description
Setup Item
IP address Paper size Page orientation Resolution (dpi) Number of copies
Selectable Range or Options
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 A4, A3, Letter Vertical, Horizontal 300dpi, 600dpi 1 to 10
Default Value
0.0.0.0 A4 Vertical 300dpi 1
IP address Set the IP address of the printer.
Paper size Set the size of the paper to print.
Page orientation Set the print orientation.
Resolution (dpi) Set the print resolution.
Number of copies Set the number of copies to print.
Note
If an SD memory card is not inserted, report printing using report templates is not possible.
Compatible printers Printers supporting the HP PCL5c language and can print through port 9100 on a LAN connection
2-186
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.26 Configuring System Settings (Time zone, language, status relay, etc.)
2.26.7 Setting Instrument Tags
1
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Instruments tag Hardware configurator: System settings > Instruments tag
Description
Setup Item Instruments Tag
Instruments tag No.
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 16 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
00
Instruments Tag Set the GM instrument tag.
Instrument tag No. Set the GM instrument tag number. The first two characters of the instrument tag number are displayed as a system number on the 7 segment LED. If the first two characters of the instrument tag number setting are not between 0 and 9 or space, the system number is displayed as 0.
For details on the 7 segment LED, see page 1-63 in section 1.7.1, "7 segment LED".
Note
Note that loading a setting parameter file to another GM10 will cause the tag settings to also be loaded.
2.26.8 Setting Comments to Setting Parameter Files
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
Path
Web application: Config. tab > System settings > Setting file Hardware configurator: System settings > Setting file
Description
Setup Item Setting file comment
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 50 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
Setting file comment Set the comment to attach to the setting parameter file.
Configuration changes comment (for the advanced security function (/AS option))
Setup Item Input comment
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
Input Comment
Set this to On to enter comments in setting files when settings are changed. The Update configuration dialog box appears when you change the settings. The comment text box displays the content set in Setting file comment. If you change the text, the content set in Setting file comment will be updated.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-187
2.27 Configuring the Security Functions
Set the security function. The login function allows only registered users to use the GM. Access from communication functions can also be limited to users registered here. Authority of user can be configured to restrict the items that each user is allowed to use. (Up to 10 conditions can be set.) The key lock function prohibits the use of the GM10's START, STOP, and USER1/USER2 keys (with the exception of clearing errors with the STOP key). If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see the Advanced Security Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Security features
Communication
Login
· Ethernet communication · Serial communication (/C3) · USB communication · Bluetooth communication (/C8)
Only registered users can log in
· User name · Password
Admin User
Operation restriction
Key lock
Lock the GM10 keys
2.27.1 Configuring the Security Functions
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Security settings > Security basic settings Hardware configurator: Security settings > Security basic settings
Description
Security function
Communication
To apply communication access security, set this to Login.
Options
Description
Off Login
Disables the security function Allows only registered users to access the GM via communication
Explanation
Login
Log in by entering the user name and password in the following situations.
GM Access
Login Necessary
Communication
When accessing general purpose communication, FTP server, or Web server
Note
· If the communication login is changed from Off to Login, the GM login function will be enabled immediately, and authentication will be required. We recommend that you check or register users in User settings beforehand. See page 2-189 in section 2.27.2, "Setting Registered User Conditions (When touch operation or communication is set to login)"
· In Chrome, turn on "Allow Chrome sign-in," and then clear the cache. If you do not clear the cache, the browser will clear the user name and password you are trying to enter in the user authentication dialog box before you can finish typing.
2-188
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.27 Configuring the Security Functions
2.27.2 Setting Registered User Conditions (When touch operation or
1
communication is set to login)
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Security settings > User settings Hardware configurator: Security settings > User settings
Description
User number Displays the user registration number (1 to 50).
User settings
Setup Item User level Mode User name
Initialize password Authority of user1 Authority number2
Selectable Range or Options Off, Admin, User Communication
Character string (up to 20 characters, A a # 1 ) Initialize Off, On Authority number 1 to 10
Default Value -- Communication --
-- Off 1
1 You can set this when the user level is set to User. 2 You can set this when Authority of user is set to On.
User Level
Set the user level. System administrators (Admin) are users that can perform all operations on the GM. When using the login function, at least one user must be registered as a system administrator. The user level of User number 1 is fixed to Admin. User-level users cannot configure security settings, perform A/D calibration, configure the encryption function or create keys for encryption/certificate, or update the firmware.
Mode
Options Communication
Description You can log in to the GM via communication.
User name
Set the user name. Duplicate user names are not allowed. User names cannot contain spaces.
Initialize password
Web application:
Hardware configurator:
Select the Initialize password check box, and click Update configuration. To cancel initialization, click Cancel. Click Change next to the password, and enter the password in the New Password and New Password Again boxes.
Authority of user When the user level is User, set this to On to apply user restrictions.
Authority number When Authority of user is set to On, set the authority number. For details on setting user restrictions, see the next section.
Note
Default user names are "User01" to "User50" for user number 1 to user number 50, respectively. The default password is "default." To change a password, log in and perform Password change.
Configuring the GM
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-189
2.27 Configuring the Security Functions
2.27.3 Setting User Restrictions (when communication is set to login)
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Security settings > Authority of user Hardware configurator: Security settings > User property*
* Appears when Communication of the security function is set to Login
Description
Authority number Select the user number (1 to 10) to apply user restrictions.
Authority of user
For details on controls, see the Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-31EN).
Setup Item
Record Math Data save Message Batch Alarm ACK Communication Time set Setting operation External media System operation Output operation
Selectable Range or Options
Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock Free, Lock
Default Value
Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free
Record Set this to Lock to restrict record start/stop operation.
Math Set this to Lock to restrict the math operations below.
Operation Start computation Stop computation Reset computation
Data save
Set this to Lock to restrict the data save operations below.
Operation Save display data Save event data Event trigger Manual sample Reset timer Reset match time timer
2-190
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.27 Configuring the Security Functions
Message Set this to Lock to restrict message writing operation.
Batch Set this to Lock to restrict the batch operations below.
Operation Write batch numbers Write lot numbers Write comments Write in text fields
Alarm ACK Set this to Lock to restrict alarm ACK operation.
Communication Set this to Lock to restrict the following operations: start, stop, and test mail; test FTP, test printer output; manually recover Modbus master; manually recover Modbus client, and manually recover SLMP communication.
Time set Set this to Lock to restrict manual SNTP server time adjustment and date/time adjustment.
Setting operation Set this to Lock to restrict setting operation.
External media Set this to Lock to restrict the following operations: save, load, and delete files; manually save data; save alarms; abort saving; create certificate requests; install certificates; and install intermediate certificates.
System operation Set this to Lock to restrict the following operations: initialize, reconfigure system, Creating a self-signed certificate, Creating a certificate signing request, display certificates, delete certificates, install certificates, install intermediate certificates, and execute unverified certificates.
Output operation Set this to Lock to restrict internal switch operations, relay operations, communication channel operations, and AO channel operations (retransmission output, manual output).
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2.27.4
Enabling Key Lock, Releasing the Key Lock
Only system administrators can lock and unlock keys.
Enabling Key Lock
Path
Web application: Option tab > Lock Hardware Key
Description
Locks the GM10's START, STOP, USER1, and USER2 keys. While key lock is enabled, the dot LED of the lower digit on the 7 segment LED is lit.
Releasing Key Lock
Path
Web application: Option tab > Unlock Hardware Key
Description
Releases the lock from the GM10's START, STOP, USER1, and USER2 keys.
Note
Key lock does not apply to the STOP key for resetting the error display.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-191
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
2.28.1
This section explains how to save, load, and delete setting parameters, report templates, trusted certificates, and program patterns (/PG option) (Release number 4 and later).
Saving, Loading, and Deleting GM Setting Parameters
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Setting parameters
Saving Setting Parameters
You can save GM setting parameters to an SD card.
Description
Setup Item File name
Comment
Selectable Range or Options Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 50 characters, A a # 1 )
Default Value --
--
File name Set the file name. Comment Set this to attach a comment to the file that you are saving.
Procedure
1 Select the save destination folder.
2 Double-click a folder to show the folders and files in that folder.
Click the move to the higher level folder button to move to the higher level folder.
3 Enter the file name in the File Name text box. You do not have to enter the extension. You can also click a file in the list to display the file name in the File Name text box.
4 Click Save. The Save as configuration file dialog box appears.
5 Enter a command, and click Save.
To not save, click Cancel. The setting parameters are saved, and the Save as configuration file dialog box closes.
Note
· Folders and files are not displayed if their names contain single quotation marks or semicolons. · If a file with the same name exists, overwriting is indicated.
2-192
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
Loading Setting Parameters
You can load GM setting parameters from an SD card into the GM.
Description
Setup Item Security Control settings2 IP address Other Communication(Server settings)1 Calibration correction settings1 Instruments tags, etc.1
Selectable Range or Options
Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On
Default Value
Off On Off On On On On
1 You can set this when Other is set to On. 2 This is displayed when a PID control module is detected. Release number 4 and later.
Security
Set this to On to load only the security settings.
Note
If the advanced security function (/AS option) is in use, passwords are not loaded except for monitor users. All administrator and user passwords are set to their defaults. See "Reusing Setting Parameters" section 1.3.4, "User Levels," in the Advanced Security Function (/AS) User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Control settings Set this to On to load control settings.
Setup items that are loaded · Control settings · Program pattern settings · Control event action
IP address Set this to On to load the IP address, DHCP, and DNS settings.
Other Set this to On to load settings other than security, IP address, or control settings.
Communication (Server settings) Set this to On when you want to load the server list settings, server encryption settings, and channel conversion setting of DARWIN compatible communication.
Calibration correction settings Set this to On to load calibration correction settings and calibration reminder settings (/AH option).
Instruments tags, etc. Set this to On to load tag settings and the ID setting of Bluetooth communication.
Procedure
1
2 3
Select the file you want to load. The selected file name appears in the File Name text box.
If you double-click the file name, the Load from configuration file dialog box appears. In this case, proceed to step 3.
Click Load. The Load from configuration file dialog box appears.
Specify what types of settings to load into the GM using On and Off. Settings that are set to On will be loaded.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-193
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
4 Click Load. To not load, click Cancel. The setting parameters are applied to the GM, and the Load as configuration file dialog box closes.
Note
· When the language setting is changed, the GM may restart. · Folders and files are not displayed if their names contain single quotation marks or semicolons. · It is possible that as a result of loading setting parameters, the Web application no longer runs
properly or the GM restarts automatically. · When loading security settings
Changes to the security settings may require a login. Check the security settings in the setting parameter file before loading. You can use the SMARTDAC+ Hardware Configurator for this purpose. · When loading IP address settings Changes to the IP address may cause the connection to be disconnected. If this occurs, you can use the SMARTDAC+ Hardware Configurator to check the IP address.
2.28.2
2-194
Explanation Setting Parameter Files · The extension is .GNL. When the advanced security function (/AS option) is in use, the extension is .GSL.
Deleting a Setting Parameter File
You can delete GM setting parameters from an SD card.
Procedure
1 Select the file you want to delete. The selected file name appears in the File Name text box.
2 Click Delete. The File dialog box appears. The message "Delete the file?" appears.
3 Click OK. The file is deleted. To not delete, click Cancel.
Downloading Files
You can download files in the SD card to your PC.
Procedure
1 Under Save/Load on the Data tab, show the screen containing the file you want to download.
2 Select the file you want to download. The selected file name appears in the File Name text box.
3 Click Download. Follow the instructions in the dialog box that appears.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
2.28.3
Saving and Loading Report Templates (/MT option)
For the procedure, see page 2-192 in section 2.28.1, "Saving, Loading, and Deleting GM Setting Parameters".
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Report template
Saving a Report Template
Description
Setup Item File type File name
File type Set the type of file to save.
File name Set the file name.
Selectable Range or Options Excel file, PDF/Printer file --
Default Value Excel file --
Setup Item Report kind
Data
Selectable Range or Options
Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Hourly + Daily, Daily + Weekly, Daily + Monthly, Batch, Daily custom --
Default Value Hourly
--
Report kind Set the kind of report template.
Data Displays the presence or absence of the specified file.
Loading a Report Template
Description
Setup Item File type Select file
Selectable Range or Options Excel file, PDF/Printer file --
Default Value Excel file --
File type Set the file type. Select file Set the file to load.
Setup Item Report kind
Data
Selectable Range or Options
Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Hourly + Daily, Daily + Weekly, Daily + Monthly, Batch, Daily custom --
Default Value Hourly
--
Report kind Set the kind of report template.
Data Displays the presence or absence of the specified file.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-195
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
2.28.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters, Report Templates, Trusted Certificates, Program Patterns (/PG option) (Release number 4 and later)
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > File list(Save all/Load all)
Description Select folder Set the folder.
File Structure When Saving All Settings and Loading All Settings When you save all settings, the following folders and files are saved in the specified folder.
File structure when saving all settings Config.GNL 1 Report_YY.ZZ 2, 3, 4 Report_YY.TPL 2, 3 Client (folder) 5 YYMMDD_HHMMSS_FileName.CER 6 Server (folder) 7
commu_server_cert.CER N_commu_chained_cert.CER 8 pdf_server_cert.CER N_pdf_chained_cert.CER8 ProgramPattern (folder) ProgPatGG.GPT 9
Description
Setting parameter file Report template file (Excel format) Report template file (PDF format) Trusted certificate folder Trusted certificate Server certificate folder Server certificate (communication) Intermediate certificate (communication) Server certificate (PDF) Intermediate certificate (PDF) Pattern file folder Pattern file
1 If the advanced security function is enabled (On), the extension is .GSL. 2 An extension appropriate for each report type is entered in "YY."
YY
Report type
YY
Report type
YY
H
Hourly
M
Monthly
DM
D
Daily
HD
Hourly + Daily
BT
W
Weekly
DW
Daily + weekly
CT
Report type Monthly + daily
Batch Custom
3 If a report template file is not loaded, it is not saved. 4 The Excel file format (.xlsx or .xlsm) is entered in "ZZ." 5 If a trusted certificate is not loaded, it is not saved. 6 The date and time are entered in "YYMMDD_HHMMSS." 7 If a server certificate or intermediate certificate is not installed, it is not saved. 8 A serial number assigned when the intermediate certificate was installed is entered in "N." All
the installed intermediate certificates are saved. 9 Pattern number (01 to 99) appears in "GG".
When you load all settings, files are loaded according to the file structure for when saving all settings. To use files that are created by saving all settings, you can simply specify the folder. To use files other than those created by saving all settings, note the following. · Use the following file structure. Files that do not comply with the structure or those that do
not use the following names will not be loaded when you load all settings. · Server certificates are not installed when you load all settings.
File structure when loading all settings Config.GNL
Report_YY.ZZ
Report_YY.TPL
Client (folder)
YYMMDD_HHMMSS_FileName.CER ProgramPattern (folder)
ProgPatGG.GPT
Description
Use the file name shown on the left. If the advanced security function is enabled (On), set the extension to .GSL. Use the file name shown on the left. For "YY" and "ZZ," see the file structure for when saving all settings. Use the file name shown on the left. For "YY," see the file structure for when saving all settings. If the folder name is not "Client," the trusted certificates inside the folder will not be loaded. The file will be loaded as long as the extension is .cer. If the folder name is not "ProgramPattern," the pattern files in the folder will not be loaded. Use the file name shown on the left. For "GG," see the file structure for when saving all settings.
2-196
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
Load all settings
1 Move to the folder containing the setting parameter files you want to load. 2 Click Load all settings. 3 Click OK.
All the files are loaded.
Operation complete
Note
The conditions for loading files depend on the contents of the setting parameters, report templates, and trusted certificates. Check the contents before loading them.
2.28.5
Save all settings
1 Move to the save destination folder.
2 Click All settings save. 3 Enter the folder name in the Folder Name text box. 4 Click OK.
All the files are saved. Setting parameters, report templates, and trusted certificates are saved.
Operation complete
Saving, Loading, and Deleting Trusted Certificates
To use this function, you must set Calib tab > Encryption/Certificate > Encryption function to On.
For instruction on how to use the Open folder, reload, Download, and Delete buttons, see
page 2-192 in section 2.28.1, "Saving, Loading, and Deleting GM Setting Parameters".
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Trusted Certificate
Viewing a Certificate Click View certificate. A Trusted Certificate dialog box opens, and the currently loaded trusted certificates appear. Select a file in the dialog box to view the certificate information (see Certificate information for details).
Saving Trusted Certificates
Description
Click Save to save test certificates. Here, you cannot specify the file names. A number indicating the time when the files are saved are appended to the file names and saved.
Example: If two loaded certificate files, 001_abcd.cer and 002_efgh.cer, are saved at 2014/12/30 15:23:38, they are saved with the file names "141230_152338_001_abcd. cer" and "141230_152338_002_efgh.cer."
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-197
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
Loading Trusted Certificates
Description
Select the name of the certificate file you want to load from the external medium, and click Load. A Load Trusted Certificate dialog box appears, and the following certification information is displayed. Check the information and click Load to load the certificate.
Certificate Information
Setup Item
File name Issuer Subject Valid not before Validity not after Front half of hash value (SHA1) Latter half of hash value (SHA1)
Selectable Range or Options
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
Default Value
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
Issuer, Subject, Valid not before, Validity not after, Front half of hash value (SHA1), Latter half of hash value (SHA1)
The items in the file to be loaded are displayed. For details, see page 2-211 in section 2.30, "Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)".
Deleting a Trusted Certificate
Description
Select file Click View certificate. A Trusted Certificate dialog box opens. In the dialog box, select the file you want to delete, and check the following certificate information. Click Delete displayed certificate to delete the certificate.
Certificate Information
Setup Item
Issuer Subject Valid not before Validity not after Front half of hash value (SHA1) Latter half of hash value (SHA1)
Selectable Range or Options
-- -- -- -- -- --
Default Value
-- -- -- -- -- --
Issuer, Subject, Valid not before, Validity not after, Front half of hash value (SHA1), Latter half of hash value (SHA1)
The items in the certificate to be deleted are displayed. For details, see page 2-211 in section 2.30, "Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)".
2-198
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.28.6
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
Saving, Loading, and Deleting Program Patterns (/PG option) (Release number 4 and later)
Each program pattern is saved to a separate file.
Saving a Specified Pattern
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Program pattern
Description
Setup Item Pattern number Pattern name File name
Selectable Range or Options
1 to 99 -- --
Default value
1 -- --
Pattern number Set the pattern number to be loaded. If there is not a loaded pattern, "No pattern" is displayed.
Pattern name The name of the pattern is displayed.
File name The name of the file to be saved is displayed.
Procedure
1
2 3
Enter the file name in the File Name text box. You do not have to enter the extension. You can also click a file in the list to display the file name in the File Name text box.
Click Save specified program pattern. A Save specified program pattern dialog box appears.
Select the pattern number you want to save from the pattern number list.
4 Select the pattern number you want to load from the pattern number list. 5 Click Save (or Overwrite to overwrite).
To not save, click Cancel. The specified pattern is save to an external storage medium.
Operation complete
Saving All Patterns
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Program pattern
Procedure
1 Click Save all program patterns. A Save all program patterns dialog box appears.
2 Enter the folder name in the folder name text box.
3 Click Save. To not save, click Cancel. Operation complete
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-199
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
Loading a Specified Pattern
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Program pattern
Description
Setup Item File name Pattern number Pattern name File
Selectable Range or Options
-- 1 to 99 -- --
Default value
1 --
File name The file name is displayed.
Pattern number Set the pattern number to be loaded.
Pattern name The name of the pattern is displayed.
File The presence or absence of pattern files is displayed.
Procedure
1 Select the program pattern file you want to load. The selected file name appears in the File Name text box.
2 Click Load specified program pattern. A Load specified program pattern dialog box appears.
3 Select the pattern number you want to load from the pattern number list. 4 Click Load.
To not load, click Cancel. The specified pattern is applied to the GM, and the Load specified program pattern dialog box closes.
Loading All Patterns
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Program pattern
Procedure
1 Move to the folder containing the setting parameter files you want to load.
2 Select Load all program patterns. To not load, click Cancel. A Load all program patterns dialog box appears.
3 Click Load.
All patterns are loaded.
Operation complete
2-200
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
Deleting a Specified Pattern
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Program pattern
Description
Setup Item Pattern number Pattern name
Selectable Range or Options 1 to 99 --
Default value 1 --
Pattern number Set the number of the pattern to delete. Pattern name The name of the pattern is displayed.
Procedure
1 Click Delete specified program pattern.
2 Select the number of the pattern to delete.
3 Click Delete. The specified pattern is deleted. Operation complete
Deleting All Patterns
Path
Web application: Data tab > Save/Load > Program pattern
Description
Setup Item Delete all program patterns
Selectable Range or Options --
Delete all program patterns Displays the presence or absence of patterns.
Procedure
1 Click Delete all program patterns. 2 Click Delete.
All patterns are deleted. Operation complete
Default value --
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-201
2.28 Saving and Loading Settings
2.28.7
Saving All the Data* in the Internal Memory
You can save all the data in the internal memory to an SD card memory. * Display and event data, manual sample data, and report data
1 On the Data tab, click Save/Load and then File list (Save all/Load all). A File list screen appears.
2 Click All save. An All save dialog box appears.
3 Click Save to SD card. The data is saved.
Operation complete
Data Save Destination
The GM will create a new directory to store the data in each time you save data. Directory name: Specified string_YYMMDD_HHMMSS (the values of YY to SS are the
date and time of operation) Example: DATA0_141205_184500 You can set the "specified string" by clicking Data save settings on the Setting tab.
After saving is complete, click Reload to display the save destination directory.
2-202
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.29
Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
Initialize the settings or the internal memory, and reconfigure the GM. For details on A/D calibration, see page 5-5 in section 5.1.3, "Performing A/D Calibration and Adjusting the Input Accuracy of an AI Module". For details on the advanced security settings (when the advanced security function (/ AS option) is in use), see section 2.5, "Disabling the Advanced Security Function," in the Advanced Security Function (/AS) User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN). For details on encryption and certificates, see page 2-211 in section 2.30, "Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)". For details on updating the firmware (Web application, I/O module, and expansion module), see page 5-17 in section 5.1.8, "Updating the Firmware". For the multi-batch settings (multi batch function (/BT option)), see the Multi-batch Function (/BT) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-03EN).
2.29.1 Initializing the Settings and the Internal Memory
Path
Web application: Option tab > Initialize > Settings/Internal data
Description
Setup Item Initialize
Selectable Range or Options Initialize all, Initialize all except communication settings, Separate
Default Value Separate
Initialize all
Set this to On to initialize all settings and return the GM to its factory default condition. However, the A/D calibration password is not initialized.
Initialize all except communication settings
Set this to On to initialize all settings except Communication(IP address) and Communication(Server settings). However, the A/D calibration password is not initialized.
Separate
Set each setting to On when you want to initialize the following settings. However, the A/D calibration password is not initialized.
Security settings, Communication(IP address), Communication(Server settings), Calibration correction settings, Instruments tags, etc., Internal data
Config.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Security settings 1, 4
Off, On
Control settings6
Off, On
Other 2, 4
Off, On
Communication(IP address) 3, 5
Off, On
Communication(Sever settings) 3, 5 Off, On
Calibration correction settings 3, 4 Off, On
Instruments tags, etc. 3, 4 Off, On
Default Value
Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
1 When Communication of the security function is set to Login, only administrators can use this feature.
2 You can set this when Initialize is set to Separate. 3 You can set this when Other than Security settings set to On. 4 This is fixed to On when Initialize is set to Initialize all or Initialize all except communication
settings. 5 This is fixed to On when Initialize is set to Initialize all and Off when it is set to Initialize all
except communication settings. 6 You can set this when a PID control module is detected. Release number 4 and later.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-203
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
Security settings Set this to On to initialize the security settings.
Control settings Set this to On to initialize control settings.
Setup items that are initialized · Control settings · Program pattern settings · Control event action
Other Set this to On to initialize settings other than the security and control settings. If you change this from Off to On, Communication(IP address), Communication(Server settings), Calibration correction settings, and Instruments tags, etc. are also set to On.
Communication(IP address) Set this to On to initialize the IP address, DHCP, and DNS settings.
Communication(Server settings) Set this to On when you want to initialize the server list settings, server encryption settings, and channel conversion setting of DARWIN compatible communication.
Calibration correction settings Set this to On to initialize calibration correction settings and calibration reminder settings (/AH option).
Instruments tags, etc. Set this to On to initialize tag settings and the ID setting of Bluetooth communication.
Data
Setup Item Internal Data *
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
* You can set this when Initialize is set to Separate. This is fixed to On when Initialize is set to Initialize all or Initialize all except communication settings.
Internal data
Set this to On to initialize all data in the internal memory.
Note
· Before initializing, back up necessary setup parameters and other data. See page 2-192 in section 2.28.1, "Saving, Loading, and Deleting GM Setting Parameters".
· Initialization does not initialize the A/D calibration password. If you forget the password, you will not be able to perform A/D calibration. Make sure you do not forget the password.
· If you perform initialization by selecting Initialize all or Communication(IP address), the Web application connection will be disconnected as a result of the IP address being initialized. If this occurs, use the SMARTDAC+ IP Address Configurator to reassign the IP address. · If Communication of the security function is set to Login and you initialize the IP address, you cannot set the IP address with the IP Address Configurator. For details on how to set the IP address in this situation, see the IP Address Configurator User's Manual (IM 04L61B0103EN).
· If the communication is disconnected due to initialization, do not close the browser, refresh the Web browser, or change the URL until the communication status icon turns off. Doing so may cause the closing of the browser or refreshing of the Web page to take a long time.
2-204
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
Description
Channel Assignment in Group Settings through Initialization If you initialize, channels will be automatically assigned on the basis of the installed modules. If necessary, change the channel assignments for your purpose.
nitialized Settings depending on Initialization Items
Initialization item
Initialize Initialize Security Control
Setting/Internal memory
Description
all
all except settings settings
communication
settings
Security settings
Security values
Bluetooth password setting Yes
--
Yes
--
Control settings
See control setting details. Yes
--
--
Yes
Other Communication(IP Automatic IP settings
address)
Automatic DNS settings
Host name registration
settings IP address settings
Yes
Yes
--
--
DNS settings
Domain suffix settings
Host settings
Communication Server list settings (Server settings)
Yes
Yes
--
--
Calibration
Calibration correction
correction settings settings (excluding control Yes
--
--
--
settings)
Instruments tags, Instruments tag settings
etc.
Bluetooth communication
Yes
--
--
--
ID setting
Internal data
Control alarm summary
Control summary
Alarm summary Message summary
Yes
--
--
--
Memory summary (display
and event data)
Display information
Free message settings
--
--
--
--
Internal file
Report file
Favorite monitors data
Yes
--
--
--
Pattern file (1 to 99)
Other
-- --
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
-- Yes --
Internal data -- --
--
-- -- --
Yes -- --
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-205
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
Control setting details
Control settings
Program pattern settings Control event action
Item
Setup parameters
Basic control settings (control settings,
contact registration, relay related)
I/O settings
PV, RSP settings
OUT settings
Operation parameters
Control alarms
Target setpoints
PID number/Reference point
PID settings
Control detail setting
Control display
Control group settings
Loop display settings
Screen display settings
Program Run/Reset message
Automatic switch to program operation display
Program RUN detail settings
DI/DO/Internal switch registration
* The following control settings are not initialized. They are initialized when Initialize all is specified or when Others is set to On.
Item PID channel settings of control display Math channel formula
2.29.2
Initializing Display Groups or Recording Channels Separately
You can initialize display groups or recording channels separately. When the measurement mode is Dual interval, channels will be automatically assigned on the basis of the installed modules. If necessary, change the channel assignments for your purpose.
Path
Web application: Option tab > Initialize > Individual settings
Description
Setup Item Display group settings Recording channel settings
Selectable Range or Options Off, On Off, On
Default value Off Off
Display group settings Set this to On to initialize display group settings.
Recording channel settings Set this to On to recording channel settings.
2-206
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
2.29.3
Setting the Measurement Mode
The measurement mode determines how the entire GM system operates. The GM measurement characteristics change depending on the measurement mode. The measurement mode must be set before reconfiguration and before specifying various settings. Depending on the measurement mode, there are limits to the modules that can be used, the number of measurement channels and recording channels, and so on. For limitations, see the GM Data Acquisition System General Specifications (GS 04L55B01-01EN).
Path
Web application: Calib tab > Measurement mode
Description
Setup Item Measurement mode
Selectable Range or Options Normal, High speed, Dual interval
Default value Normal
Measurement mode
Set the measurement mode according to the measurement conditions.
Options Normal
High speed
Dual interval
Description Data collection (measurement and recording) can be performed at 100 ms minimum. Data collection (measurement and recording) can be performed at 1 ms minimum. Data collection (measurement and recording) can be performed at two different scan intervals.
Note
· When the measurement mode is changed, the system restarts, and the following data is initialized. Set the measurement mode before reconfiguration and before specifying various settings.
Initialized settings All internal data All setting parameters including security settings but excluding communication settings System configuration data
· You cannot set the measurement mode when recording, computation, or control execution is in progress.
· The measurement mode setting is not initialized through the initialization of settings. · Measurement mode setting is not saved in setting parameter files. · If the advanced security function (/AS) or multi-batch function (/BT) is enabled (On), the
measurement mode is fixed to Normal. To change the measurement mode, set the advanced security function (/AS) and multi-batch function (/BT) to off. · When the login function is in use, only system administrators can set the measurement mode.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Description
By switching the measurement mode according to the measurement target and measurement conditions, you can perform high-speed measurements as well as simultaneous high-speed and low-speed measurements. In high-speed measurement, a high-speed AI module can be installed to achieve measurement at the shortest interval of 1 ms. In dual interval measurement, measurement can be performed by two measurement groups with different scan intervals.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-207
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
2.29.4
Reconfiguring the GM
When you reconfigure the GM, the I/O modules installed in the main unit and sub units are detected, and the settings are changed accordingly. Reconfiguration is necessary in the following situations. · When you change the modules (change to different modules) · When you add or remove modules · When you connect or add a sub unit · When the measurement mode is changed · When the advanced security setting on/off state is changed
Path
Web application: Calib tab > Reconfiguration Hardware configurator: Operation tab > Reconfiguration
Procedure
1 Click Reconfiguration. A Reconfiguration dialog box appears. A message "Reconfigure modules?" appears.
2 Click Execute. The GM will reconfigure. A message "System reconstruction in progress" appears. When reconfiguration is complete, a Hardware configuration dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The Hardware configuration dialog box appears again.
4 Click OK.
Note
· Do not carry out the following operations while a reconfiguration is in progress. Doing so may damage the GM. Turn the power off and on. Insert or remove modules.
· If turn off a expansion module and turn it back on, after checking the connected module, execute reconfiguration.
· Reconfiguration is not possible during recording or computing. Be sure to stop recording and computing beforehand.
· If the total number of I/O channels of the installed modules exceeds 100 on the GM-10-1 or 500 on the GM10-2, no additional modules can be detected. For example, if the maximum number of I/O channels are assigned and the last channel is assigned to an intermediate channel of a module, that module (channel) and subsequent modules (channels) will not be reconfigured or recognized.
GM10-1
Module n
Module 1
Maximum number of I/O channels
91 81
: 100 : :
106 90
1
··· :
10
This module will not be detected.
· A single digital input/output module (GX90WD) can be linked to the main unit and each of the sub units.
· Up to a total of 10 digital output modules (GX90YD) and digital input/output modules (GX90WD) can be linked in a system.
· If the measurement mode is set to High speed, Dual interval or if the advanced security function is set to On, PID control modules (GX90UTs) will not be identified.
· During reconfiguration, the output channel is turned off or de-energized. In addition, for models with the program control function (/PG), the program pattern is changed when the PID control module is removed.
2-208
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
Conditions on the Combination of GM10 Versions and Input/output Modules
The module versions that can be detected depending on the GM10 version are as follows. If a module cannot be detected, update the GM10.
I/O Module and Expansion Module
Model
Type
Firmware version
-C1
R1.04.01 and later
-L1
R1.04.01 and later
GX90XA
-U2
R1.04.01 and later
-T1
R1.04.01 and later
-H0
R1.01.01 and later
-R1
R1.01.01 and later
GX90XD
---
R1.04.01 and later
GX90XP
---
R1.01.01 and later
GX90WD
---
R1.04.01 and later
GX90YD
---
R1.04.01 and later
GX90YA
---
R1.01.01 and later
GX90UT
---
R1.01.01 and later
GX90EX
---
R1.02.01 and later
GM10 Firmware version R2.02 and later R2.02 and later R2.02 and later R2.02 and later R4.01 and later R4.01 and later R2.02 and later R3.01 and later R2.02 and later R2.02 and later R3.02 and later R4.01 and later R2.02 and later
2.29.5 Notes on System Configuration
· Link modules with the unit's power turned off. · Do not link modules in a way that violates the specifications. Doing so can cause
the GM system to crash. · When a system shutdown occurs, the GM10's 7 segment LED displays "bF."
Module Linking That Causes the GM to Shut Down
· When multiple data acquisition modules (GM10) are linked · When a data acquisition module (GM10) is linked to a slot that is not adjacent to
the power supply module (GM90PS) · When an electromagnetic relay type or high-speed universal type analog input
module is linked to slot 8 or 9 of the main unit · When an electromagnetic relay type or high-speed universal type analog input
module is linked to any of the slots from 0 to 7 of the main unit and a module is linked to slot 8 or 9 · When a high-speed universal type analog input module is linked to the main unit and an analog output module is linked to slot 7, 8, or 9 · When an analog output module is linked to the main unit and a high-speed universal type analog input module is linked to slot 7, 8, or 9 · When a high-speed universal type analog input module and an analog output module are linked to any of the slots from 0 to 6 of the main unit and a module is linked to slot 7, 8, or 9 · When multiple digital I/O modules are linked to the main unit · When three or more analog output modules are linked to the main unit · When a PID control module is linked to slot 5 to 9 of the main unit · When a PID control module is linked to any of the slots from 0 to 4 of the main unit and an I/O module is linked to slot 5 to 9 · When an expansion module (GX90EX) is linked to slots 7, 8, or 9 of the main unit
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-209
2.29 Initializing and Calibrating the System (Initialization, reconfiguration), Setting the Measurement Mode
Problematic Module Linking
In the Main Unit
Problematic System Configuration Process Performed during System Configuration
Exceeding the allowed number of
Modules are not detected.
modules in a unit1
Connecting a unconnectable module2
Connecting a module with connection
limitations3
Linked module error
In a Sub Unit
Problematic System Configuration Process Performed during System Configuration
Exceeding the allowed number of
Modules are not detected.
modules in a unit1 Connecting a unconnectable module2
Connecting a module with connection
limitations3
Link module error
Expansion module (GX90EX) with
an invalid unit number in the system configuration4
In a Single Unit System
Problematic System Configuration Exceeding the maximum number of channels in a unit5
Process Performed during System Configuration Adjusted so that the number is equal to the maximum number of channels
In a Multi Unit System
Problematic System Configuration Overlapping unit number in a system Connecting an unidentifiable sub unit Exceeding the maximum number of modules in a system6 Exceeding the maximum number of channels in a system7
Process Performed during System Configuration None of the overlapping units are not detected. Only the unidentifiable is not detected. Modules are not detected.
Adjusted so that the number is equal to the maximum number of channels
1 Main unit: Up to 10 input/output modules (up to 7 when including an expansion module (GX90EX)). Sub unit: Up to 6 input/output modules (up to 7 when including an expansion module (GX90EX)).
2 Input/output module whose version is earlier than 1.04.01, expansion module whose version is earlier than 1.02.01, or unknown module
3 2 or more digital input/output modules (GX90WD) in a unit. 11 or more digital output modules (GX90YD) or digital input/output modules (GX90WD) in a system. Main unit: Linking an expansion module (GX90EX) to a slot other than slots 0 to 6. Main unit: Linking an input/output module to the left as seen from the front of an expansion module (GX90EX). Sub unit: Linking an expansion module (GX90EX) to an improper position.
4 Other than unit numbers 1 to 6 5 Up to 100 channels 6 GM10-1: Up to 10 input/output modules. GM10-2: Up to 42 input/output modules. 7 GM10-1: Up to 100 channels. GM10-2: Up to 500 channels.
Problematic Unit Connection
· The system will not operate properly if units are connected in a ring. · The system will not operate properly if there are multiple data acquisition modules
(GM10) in a system.
2-210
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.30
Configuring Key Creation, Certificate Management, and Encryption/Certificate (SSL communication, PDF electronic signature)
Configure these settings when using SSL encryption and PDF electronic signatures. To use encryption on the FTP server and HTTP server and to use PDF electronic signature, you must create a key and install a certificate. SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) SSL is a function for encrypting data communication between devices on the Internet and other networks. It ensures safe data transmission such as by preventing spoofing by other devices and data eavesdropping.
Note
When the GM and Web application are being configured for SSL communication, once all the SSL communication settings are aligned, SSL communication will take effect, causing the communication between the GM and Web application to be disconnected. In this situation, we recommend the following procedure. 1 Check that HTTP encryption is set to Off. If it is set to On, change it to Off (see section 2.30.1). 2 Change the encryption function to On (see section 2.30.1). 3 Check the presence or absence of a key. If there is none, create one (see section 2.30.2). 4 Check the presence or absence of a server certificate (communication). If there is none, create
a self-signed certificate or install a server certificate (communication) (see section 2.30.3). 5 Change HTTP encryption to On. Check the HTTP port number (see section 2.30.4).
The GM's HTTP port switches to SSL communication, and the communication with the Web application is disconnected. 6 Change the URL to https on the Web browser to reconnect (see section 2.1.4).
Note
When SSL communication is in progress between the GM and Web application, the following functions cannot be used. · Create a key (see section 2.30.2) · Create a self-signed certificate (see section 2.30.3) · Install a certificate (see section 2.30.3) · Install an intermediate certificate (see section 2.30.3) · Delete a certificate (see section 2.30.5) In addition, note the following points when turning off the SSL communication on the GM and the Web application. · Before turning the SSL communication off, we recommend that you change HTTP encryption to
Off (see section 2.30.4). · If you change the encryption function to Off before turning off HTTP encryption, the HTTP port
number will not be reset. As such, pay attention to the port number after switching back to normal HTTP communication. Normally, the HTTP port number is 80. The number during SSL communication is 443.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
2.30.1
Enabling the Encryption Function
When you switch the encryption function on/off state, the GM will restart. After the GM restarts, you need to perform various configuration and operations.
Path
Web application: Calib tab > Encryption/Certificate > Encryption function
Description
Setup Item Encryption function
Selectable Range or Options Off, On
Default Value Off
Encryption function Select On to use the encryption function.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-211
2.30 ConfiguringKeyCreation,CertificateManagement,andEncryption/Certificate(SSLcommunication,PDFelectronicsignature)
2.30.2 Creating a Key
Path
Web application: Calib tab > Encryption/Certificate > Create a key
*
Appears when the encryption function is set to On.
Procedure
· When switching to key creation mode, the GM restarts. When this happens, if the GM is configured to obtain the IP address automatically, the IP address may change after restarting, preventing the Web application from connecting to the GM.
· We recommend that you use a fixed IP address for communicating when switching to key creation mode.
1 Click Create a key. A Create a key dialog box appears.
2 Click Execute. The Create a key dialog box closes. The GM switches to key creation mode and starts creating a key. When the process is complete, the Create a key dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The GM restarts and switches to normal mode.
Operation complete
Note
· Clicking Cancel while a key is being created (key creation mode) opens a Create a key dialog box. Clicking OK will cancel the key creation. Clicking Cancel will continue the key creation.
If you perform any of the following operations, a special standby screen for key creation mode will appear with message M8205.
· If you press Refresh on the Web browser while a key is being created · If a connection is made to the GM10 while a key is being created · While using the Web application, key creation is executed from a Web application of another
Web browser Keys cannot be created with a User connection.
Description
Setup Item Key
Selectable Range or Options --
Key Displays the presence or absence of a key.
Default Value --
2-212
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.30 ConfiguringKeyCreation,CertificateManagement,andEncryption/Certificate(SSLcommunication,PDFelectronicsignature)
2.30.3
Configuring Certificate Management (Creating self-signed certificates, creating certificate signature requests (CSRs), installing certificates, and installing intermediate certificates) and Deleting Certificates
Path
Web application: Calib tab > Encryption/Certificate > Certificate management
*
Appears when the encryption function is set to On.
Description
Execution Button
Description
Open folder
Opens the folder selected from the list.
Certificate Exist/Not exist
Displays certificate information with installed certificate status.
View certificate
Displays the content of installed certificates or deletes
certificates.
Creating a self-signed certificate
Creates and installs a self-signed certificate.
Creating a certificate signing request Creates on an external medium a certificate signature request
(CSR)
(CSR) to be submitted to a certification authority and the serial
number indication of the device information.
Installation of certificate
Installs a certificate from an external medium.
Installation of intermediate certificate Installs an intermediate certificate from an external medium.
Reload
Reloads the medium status.
Delete
Deletes the selected file.
Certificate Exist/Not exist
Certificate for Communication Displays the presence or absence of a certificate for communication.
Certificate for PDF signature Displays the presence or absence of a certificate for PDF signature.
View certificate
In a loaded dialog box, the details of the file name of the selected certificate and the serial number of the device information are displayed. The certification information is as follows. Item File name Updated Issuer Valid not before Validity not after Front half of hash value (SHA1) Latter half of hash value (SHA1)
Delete displayed certificate button The File dialog box for confirming the file deletion appears.
Clicking OK will delete the selected certificate file.
Updated Displays the update time of the selected file.
Issuer Displays the issuer information.
Subject Displays the subject information.
Valid not before Displays the start date of the valid period.
Validity not after Displays the end date of the valid period.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-213
2.30 ConfiguringKeyCreation,CertificateManagement,andEncryption/Certificate(SSLcommunication,PDFelectronicsignature)
Front half of hash value (SHA1) Displays the front half of the certificate's hash value.
Latter half of hash value (SHA1) Displays the latter half of the certificate's hash value.
Creating a self-signed certificate
Set the items in the self-signed certificate dialog box and click Execute to create and install a
self-signed certificate. The setup items are shown below.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Country State
Character string (up to 2 characters, A a )# 1
--
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) --
City Common name
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) -- Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) --
Organization Organization unit E-mail Use
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 )
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 )
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) Communication, PDF signature
-- -- -- Communication
Country Set the ISO country code. (United States country code: US)
State Set the state.
City Enter the city name.
Common name Set the URL (FQDN) of the site that will use SSL encrypted communication. This must match the URL that the clients specify to establish SSL connection.
Organization Set the official English name of the organization that will manage the server. Enter the official organization name including the suffix such as inc., Co.ltd, K.K.
Organization unit Set the division, department, or other names for identification.
E-mail Set the E-mail address.
Use Set the use of the self-signed certificate.
2-214
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.30 ConfiguringKeyCreation,CertificateManagement,andEncryption/Certificate(SSLcommunication,PDFelectronicsignature)
Creating a Certificate Signature Request (CSR)
To apply and obtain a certificate, create a certificate signature request (CSR) to be submitted
to a certification authority.
Set the items in the Creating a self-signed certificate dialog box and click Execute to create
a certificate signature request (CSR) and save it to the GM's external medium.
You need to enter a file name before clicking Create. When you are setting the file name,
selecting Certificate Signing Request file (*.CSR) for the file type will display certificate signature request files that are already present.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Country State
Character string (up to 2 characters, A a )# 1
--
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) --
City Common name
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) -- Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 )
Organization Organization unit
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) -- Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) --
E-mail
Character string (up to 64 characters, A a # 1 ) --
Country, State, City, Common Name, Organization, Organization Unit, and E-mail These items are the same as those explained in "Creating a Self-Signed Certificate."
Installation of certificate
Set the file type to Certificate file (*.CER) to display a list of certificate files. Select the file
that you want to install, and click Installation of certificate.
An Installation of certificate dialog box appears.
Select the use and click Execute to install it.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Use
Communication, PDF signature
Communication
Use Set the use of the certificate.
Installing an Intermediate Certificate
Like the installation of a certificate, select the file that you want to install, and click
Installation of intermediate certificate.
An Installation of intermediate certificate dialog box appears.
Select the use and click Execute to install it.
Setup Item
Selectable Range or Options
Default Value
Use
Communication, PDF signature
Communication
Use Set the use of the certificate.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-215
2.30 ConfiguringKeyCreation,CertificateManagement,andEncryption/Certificate(SSLcommunication,PDFelectronicsignature)
2.30.4 Configuring the Encryption of the Server Function and Client Function, and Applying PDF Electronic Signatures
Configuring the Server Function Set the encryption of the FTP server and HTTP server.
For details on the settings, see page 2-156 in section 2.22.2, "Configuring the FTP Client Function" and page 2-158 in section 2.22.3, "Configuring the SMTP Client Function".
Configuring the Client Function Set the encryption of the FTP client and SMTP client.
For details on the settings, see page 2-124 in section 2.17.1, "Setting the Report Type, Creation Time, Data Type, Etc.".
Setting the PDF Electronic Signature Set the electronic signature of PDF files.
For details on the settings, see page 2-168 in section 2.22.9, "Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)".
2.30.5 Loading, Deleting, and Saving a Trusted Certificate
See page 2-197 in section 2.28.5, "Saving, Loading, and Deleting Trusted Certificates".
2.30.6
Verification Confirmation of Unverified Certificates
If a certificate that you have fails verification and FTP transfer or mail transmission is not possible, an error message (E782 or E783) appears, and a Unverified certificate appears on the Operation tab. FTP transfer or mail transmission will not be possible until a verification confirmation is performed, a root certificate is installed, or other appropriate measure is taken. When verification confirmation is performed, transmission becomes possible, and data that was not transmitted will be transmitted in the next transmission opportunity.
1 On the Operation tab, click Unverified certificate. An Unverified certificate dialog box appears.
2 Select (click) the server that you want to display the certificate information of. A Select unverified certificate dialog box appears with the certificate information. You will be prompted to install a root certificate or confirm the certificate.
3 Check the information, and click OK. Clicking Cancel will abort the process and close the dialog box.
Certificate Information
Item Type Validity Verification Issuer Subject Valid not before Validity not after Front half of hash value (SHA1) Latter half of hash value (SHA1)
Description FTP Primary, FTP Secondary, SMTP OK or not OK OK or not OK Name of the issuer Subject Start date and time of validity End date and time of validity Front half of hash value Latter half of hash value
2-216
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication 1 Function
Configuring the GM
This section provides an outline on how to use the DARWIN compatible communication
2
function and how to configure it.
2.31.1 Overview
A portion of the DARWIN's setting and control commands is supported.
Measured data, math data, and so on can be output in DARWIN format.
3
You can use an existing program that has been created for DARWIN to communicate with
the GM.
Existing control program
4
Ethernet
Output Command
5
STATUS DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
STATUS SUB UNIT
GM
DARWIN
Note
The following application programs and API are not supported. You cannot communicate with the GM using the following programs and API through the DARWIN
compatible communication function. · DAQ32, DAQ32Plus, DAQLogger · MX190 (API for MX100/DARWIN) · LabVIEW driver (for DARWIN)
Instrument Configuration
To control the GM using the DARWIN compatible communication function, you must configure the GM (module type, channel numbers (unit numbers and slot numbers)) to match DARWIN. For details on channel conversion, see page 2-168 in section 2.22.9, "Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)" (for Ethernet communication) or page 2-172 in section 2.23.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions" (for serial communication).
Module Configuration Example
Unit Main unit
Slots 0 to 5 Sub unit
Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5
DARWIN (Extended type) Main -- DS600 DU100-11 DU100-11 DU100-11 No module DU100-11 No module
GM Main unit No module Sub unit GX90XA GX90XA GX90XA No module GX90XA No module
Interface Ethernet, RS-422/485 (/C3 option)
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-217
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Communication Ports and Maximum Number of Connections (for Ethernet)
Port Number
34150 34151
Maximum Number of Connections 1
4
Notes
RS232C command support, configuration port Loading instantaneous data
· Port 34159 (communication status verification) cannot be used.
Connection Limitation (Release number 3 (Version 3.02) and later)
· Connection can be limited using the port limitation setting command (SDarwinPortLimit). · When port limitation is on, the limitation is the same as that of DARWIN. When connected
via Ethernet, only instantaneous data reading is possible on port number 34151. Configuration, control, and operation are not possible. When connected via serial, only the commands that can be used on a Ethernet connection through port 34150 are valid. · When port limitation is off (default value), there are no limitations on commands on either port. All supported commands work on both ports. · For details on communication commands, see the Communication Interface User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-17EN).
Terminator
Classification Input Output
Terminator CR+LF or LF CR+LF
Limitations
· If communication security is enabled in security settings, you must login via communication. For details about logging in through communication, see the communication control commands in the Communication Command Manual.
Procedure to Use the GM
Configure the system
Align the GM configuration to DARWIN. · Connect expandable I/Os. · Install modules.
Execute reconfiguration
Make the GM recognize the modules. For the setting procedure, see section, "2.29.4 Reconfiguring the GM."
Configure functions
Configure communication settings
Configure the DARWIN compatible communication
function
Preparation complete
As necessary, configure the GM functions according to DARWIN.
For setting procedure, see chapter 2 "Configuring the GM" on page 2-1.
Ethernet: Set the GM IP address, subnet mask, and the like. For the setting procedure, see section, "2.22.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions."
Serial communication: Set the receiver function, address, and the like.
For the setting procedure, see section, "2.23.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions." For the Ethernet setting procedure, see section, "2.22.9 Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)." For the serial communication setting procedure, see section, "2.23.1 Setting Basic Communication Conditions."
2-218
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.31.2
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Supported Commands
The commands supported by the DARWIN compatible communication function are as follows.
Instantaneous Data Output Commands
Command EF EL
EB
Description Outputs measured data and math data in binary format. Outputs unit and decimal point information of a specified channel in ASCII format. Sets the byte output order.
DO, DIO, AO, and PID control modules cannot output measured data or decimal point information.
ESC+T Command
If a "Esc+T" command is received, time-synchronized measured value and math value are
held in the local buffer until the next "Esc+T" command is received.
Command Esc+T
Description Prepares to output the data selected with the TS command.
Setting Commands
Command SR SN SA SD SV CM SC 1, 3 SZ 1, 3 PT 1, 3 AO 1, 2
Description Sets the range. Sets the unit (scale unit). Sets an alarm. Sets the date and time. Sets moving average. Sets math input data (option). Sets the chart speed. Sets the zone recording. Sets the analog recording. Assigns a reference channel to the retransmission output channel
1 Release number 4 and later 2 Setting a channel set to manual output will result in error. 3 Only an affirmative response is returned on the GM because this is not supported.
SR Command Parameters
If a setting parameter that the GM does not support is received, a negative response is returned.
Item Mode Range Module
Description RRJC PT2, JPT2, PT2S, JPT2S, GATE AC, STRAIN
· When the mode is SCL Sending a command without a parameter may cause an E1 error. If an error occurs, do not omit the parameters.
· When the mode is PULSE Setting is not possible with just the SR command. Set the range setting data type to scaling, and then send the command.
Commands Applicable to RS-422/485 Only
Command Esc+O Esc+C
Description Open Command (address a communication destination) Close Command (close the addressed state of a device)
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-219
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Data Output Request Commands
Command TS
FM
LF
Parameter 0: Measured data 1: Setting parameters 2: Unit information 5: System configuration information 9: Setup mode setting data output 0: Measured data (ASCII) 1: Math data (binary) 2: Math data (ASCII) 3: Math channel (binary) --
CF
--
VF
--
BO
--
Esc+S
--
Description Selects the talker output data.
Selects the output format of measured/math data.
Sets the output channel for the setting data output, unit, and decimal place information. Sets the system configuration data format. Relay status output request Sets the byte output order. Status output request
Responses to Output Request Commands
AO module channels are not output in response to the following command.
Command FM EF LF EL
Item Selects the output format of measured/math data. Measured data and math data (binary format) Sets the output channel for the unit and decimal place information. Unit and decimal point information of a specified channel (ASCII format)
Module Names Output by the CF Command
GM Module AI module DI module DO module Expansion module Module error DI/DO module AO module PID control module
Module Name INPUT DI RELAY Module not connected XXXXXX REMOTE OUTPUT PID
2-220
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Control Execution Commands
Command AR IR
Description Resets alarms. Resets timers.
EX
Starts, stops, resets, clears (option) math.
RS
System reconfiguration
RC
Clears RAM (initializes operation mode setting parameters).
VD
Turns on and off relays externally.
CF
System configuration data output request (diagnosis)
PS
Starts or stops recording.
MS
Starts message printing.
IM
Sets the interrupt mask.
SM
Sets the auxiliary interrupt mask.
Handling of Commands for Functions Not Available on the GM
If a command or parameter for a function not available on the GM is received, a negative response (E1) is returned. However, if the command does not constitute a functional problem, a positive response (E0) is returned without performing any operation.
Commands That the GM Returns Positive Responses For
Command DS XE UD ESC+R ESC+L
Description Switches the setting mode. Confirms setup setting parameters. Sets the display mode of the top display. Switches from local mode to remote mode. Switches from remote mode to local mode.
Response Positive response
Operation No operation
Commands That Do Not Affect the Operation (Negative response)
Command SX SI SQ SL SO SK AO YO ET
Description Sets a math group. Sets a timer (option). Sets a match time timer (option). Sets event/action (option). Sets a calculation expression (option). Sets a calculation constant (option). Assigns a transmission channel. Sets the time constant for transmission output. Sets a timeout.
Response Negative response
Operation No effect
If ASCII codes E2 to E6 (, , , ) are received, they are converted to spaces, and no error results. The E1 character (°) is converted to the GM character code C2B0 and applied.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-221
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Setting Output Format
When you execute the command TS1 + device trigger (ESC+T) + LF, the operation mode parameters are output in the following order.
SR
Measurement range setting data of the first channel
CrLf
·
·
·
·
·
·
SR
Measurement range setting data of the last channel
CrLf
SN
Unit setting data of the first channel
CrLf
·
·
·
·
·
·
SN
Unit setting data of the last channel
CrLf
SA
Alarm setting data of the first channel
CrLf
·
·
·
·
·
·
SA
Alarm setting data of the last channel
CrLf
SV
Moving average setting data of the first channel
CrLf
·
·
·
·
SV
Moving average setting data of the last channel
CrLf
AO
Retransmission output setting data of the first channel
CrLf
·
·
·
·
·
·
AO
Retransmission output setting data of the last channel
CrLf
EN
Output end
CrLf
Because the command TS9 + device trigger (ESC+T) + LF is not supported, only the EN line will be output.
Command Operation When the Multi Batch Function (/BT) Is Enabled (Release number 3 and later)
This section explains the operation of the following commands when the multi batch function
is enabled.
Command PS EX MS
Description Starts/stops recording of the first batch Starts, stops, resets, clears computation Writes a message to all groups in the first batch
2-222
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Handling of Commands for Functions Not Available on the GM
If a command or parameter for a function not available on the GM is received, a negative response (E1) is returned. However, if the command does not constitute a functional problem, a positive response (E0) is returned without performing any operation.
Commands That the GM Returns Positive Responses For
Command DS XE UD SC SZ PT ESC+R ESC+L
Description Switches the setting mode. Confirms setup setting parameters. Sets the display mode of the top display. Sets the chart speed. Sets the recording zone. Sets the analog recording on/off state. Switch from Local Status to Remote Status. Switch from Remote Status to Local Status.
Response Operation Positive No operation response
Commands That Do Not Affect the Operation (Negative response)
Command SX SI SQ SL SO SK YO ET
Description Sets a math group. Sets a timer (option). Sets a match time timer (option). Sets event/action (option). Sets a calculation expression (option). Sets a calculation constant (option). Sets the time constant for transmission output. Sets a timeout.
Response Operation Negative No effect response
If ASCII codes E2 to E6 (, , , ) are received, they are converted to spaces, and no error results. The E1 character (°) is converted to the GM character code C2B0 and applied.
Handling depending on the Measurement Mode
Measurement mode Normal
High speed Dual interval
Description All the channels of detected modules are output (except for DO, DIO, AO, and PID modules). Of the detected modules, only the AI channels are output. Of the detected modules, only the channels of scan groups using the master interval are output (except for DO, DIO, AO, and PID modules).
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Command That Runs When the Measurement Mode Is Set to Dual Interval
Command EX PS MS
Description Starts, stops, resets, clears computation (master interval). Starts, stops recording of both measurement group 1 and 2. Writes messages to all display groups.
Handling of Settings Available on the GM but Not on DARWIN
Settings that are available on the GM but not on DARWIN are output as follows.
Command
Item
Description
SR
High-speed AI module's voltage (VOLT) at 100 V range
100V
4-wire RTD module's RTD at PT500 range
Pt500
4-wire RTD module's RTD at PT1000 range
Pt1000
4-wire RTD module's type is resistance (OHM)
OHM
4-wire RTD module's resistance (OHM) at 20 ohm range
20ohm
4-wire RTD module's resistance (OHM) at 200 ohm range
200ohm
4-wire RTD module's resistance (OHM) at 2000 ohm range 2000ohm
AI module's general signal
GS
DO module's PULSE
DIPULSE
AO
When the type is manual output
ManualAO
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-223
2.31 Using the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
2.31.3 Configuring the DARWIN Compatible Communication Function
Ethernet
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Ethernet) settings > Server settings Server list Hardware configurator: Communication (Ethernet) settings > Server settings Server list
Description
DARWIN
Setup Item On/Off Channel conversion*
Selectable Range or Options Off, On Stand-alone type, extended type
Default Value Off Stand-alone type
* You can set this when the On/Off settings is set to On.
On/Off Select On to use the DARWIN compatible communication function.
Channel Conversion Set the DARWIN type to perform channel conversion.
Serial Communication
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Communication (Serial) settings > Serial basic settings Hardware configurator: Communication (Serial) settings > Serial basic settings
Description
DARWIN
Setup Item Channel conversion*
Selectable Range or Options Stand-alone type, extended type
Default Value Stand-alone type
* You can set this when the receiver function is set to DARWIN.
Channel Conversion Set the DARWIN type to perform channel conversion.
2.31.4
Configuring the GM IP Address, Subnet Mask, and the Like (for Ethernet)
See page 2-154 in section 2.22.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
2.31.5
Setting the GM's Basic Serial Communication Conditions (for RS422/485)
See page 2-172 in section 2.23.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
2-224
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.32 Using the Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option) (Release number 3 and later)
2.32.1
This section explains calibration reminder settings for periodically performing calibration correction settings and the like. · When the notification date set using the calibration reminder function arrives, the
notification content is shown on a notification screen. · It can be used to remind you of the schedule. · For details on calibration correction of AI channels, see page 2-44 in section 2.3.4,
"Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, Correction factor* (release number 3 and later))". · For details on calibration correction of communication channels, see page 2-152 in section 2.21.4, "Setting Calibration Correction (Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, Correction factor* (release number 4 (version 4.02) and later))". · For details on the calibration correction of the PID control module's input terminal (AI number), see section 3.4.5, "Performing Calibration Correction," in the Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-31EN).
Setting the Calibration Reminder
Path
Web application: Config. tab > Calibration reminder settings Hardware configurator: Calibration reminder settings
Description
Setup Item Schedule number
On/Off
Selectable Range or Options
GM10-1: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 GM10-2: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Off, On
Default Value --
Off
On/Off Set this to On to set a schedule.
Due date
Setup Item Due date
Daily reminder Re-notification cycle
Selectable Range or Options January 1, 2001 to December 31, 2035
1 day before to 10 days before in unit of days 10min, 30min, 1h, 8h, 24h
Default Value
January 1, 2012 5 days before 1h
Due date
Set the reminder date by directly entering the date. [+1 month] button/[-1 month] button: You can change the due date in unit of months. [+1 week] button/[-1 week] button: You can change the due date in unit of weeks. · If you change the due date with the buttons and the date that you select is not available in that month, the date is changed to the last date of that month (if you press [+1 month] button when the date is August 31, the date is changed to September 30).
Daily reminder Set how many days before to start reminders using the notification screen.
Re-notification cycle Set interval for showing reminders using the notification screen.
Notification contents
Setup Item Title
Notification message 1
Notification message 2
Buzzer
Selectable Range or Options
Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Character string (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ) Off, On
Default Value -- -- -- Off
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-225
2.32 Using the Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option) (Release number 3 and later) Title Set the title to show on the notification screen.
Notification message 1, 2 Set the notification contents.
Buzzer Set this to On to sound the buzzer. This depends on the PC's speaker settings.
Note
In Chrome, you have to click on the screen 1 or more times to play the alarm. To configure Chrome to play without having to click, do the following: 1. Type the following into the Chrome address bar and then press Enter.
chrome://flags/#autoplay-policy 2. Under Autoplay policy, select No user gesture is required.
2.32.2
Notification Screen Display
When a daily reminder date arrives, a notification screen appears at 00:00 (HH:MM).
This screen reappears at the re-notification cycle.
If the buzzer is enabled, a buzzer is sounded when the notification screen appears. To stop
the buzzer, close the notification screen.
Notification screen
Title
Notification message 1
Notification message 2
Last setting date
Due date
Other notification numbers
Operation Example Daily reminder setting: 1 (day before), re-notification cycle: 8h
Notification screen display start
Calibration correction time limit
Notification screen display
Notification screen display
Notification
Notification
screen display screen display
00:00
08:00
16:00
00:00
08:00
Re-notification cycle setting
Re-notification cycle setting
Re-notification cycle setting
Re-notification cycle setting
Notification (days in advance) setting
2-226
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2.32.3
2.32 Using the Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH option) (Release number 3 and later)
Displaying Reminders
Path
Web application: Data tab > Reminder
Description
Reminders that are currently valid are listed. The background color of each reminder varies depending on the elapsed time of the reminder.
Type: Reminder No. 1 2 3
Title Calibration reminder A Calibration reminder B Calibration reminder C
Last setting date 2015/10/20 2015/10/20 2015/10/20
Due date 2015/11/18 2015/11/30 2015/11/25
Days remaining -2 days 10 days 5 days
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)Indicates the reminder status with icon color. After the notification date but before the due date: Yellow After the due date: Red
(2)Displays the schedule number of the registered schedule. (3)Displays the title of the notification screen. (4)Displays the date when the due date was set. (5)Displays the due date that was set. (6)Displays the number of days until the due date. A minus sign is displayed if the date
is passed the due date. If the number of days exceeds 999, it is displayed as 999, including when the number is negative.
Configuring the GM
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2-227
Blank
Chapter3 Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM
For the details on the Web application screen, see "Screen" on page 2-7. If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see the Advanced Security Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
You can carry out the following operations on the Web application. · Start and stop recording ( page 3-2) · Start, stop, reset, and acknowledge computing ( page 3-4) · AlarmACK ( page 3-5) · Individual alarm ACK ( page 3-23) · Set the date and time ( page 2-24) · Start, stop, and test mail transmission ( page 3-44) · Trigger the starting of event data recording ( page 3-6) · Execute manual sampling ( page 3-6) · Save event data ( page 3-6) · Save display data ( page 3-6) · Reset relative timers ( page 3-7) · Reset match time timers ( page 3-7) · Change a batch number, lot number, and batch comment ( page 3-7) · View the batch text ( page 3-7) · Change the time using SNTP ( page 3-7) · Perform a test print ( page 3-8) · Execute a file transmission test on the FTP server ( page 3-8) · Clear error displays ( page 3-8) · Clear the Bluetooth connection list ( page 3-8) · Write messages ( page 3-15) · Change the alarm value ( page 3-21) · Change the DO channel output ( page 3-21) · Individual AO Channel Operation from the Monitor ( page 3-22) · Change the internal switch value ( page 3-35) · Change the login password ( page 3-43)
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-1
3.1 Controlling the GM
Use the following buttons.
3.1.1
Starting and Stopping Recording
When the measurement mode is Dual interval, scan groups start and stop recording simultaneously.
Starting Recording
Follow the procedure below to start recording.
Procedure
1 On the SMARTDAC+ Web Service tab, click Recording. The Recording dialog box appears.
2 If the batch function is in use, enter numbers in the Batch No. and Lot No. boxes. You can also edit the text field by clicking Edit Textfield.
3 Click Start recording or Start recording and computing. Recording starts. The indicator below the Recording button turns on in green.
Stopping Recording
Follow the procedure below to stop recording. Procedure
1 On the SMARTDAC+ Web Service tab, click Recording. The Recording dialog box appears.
3-2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM
2 Click Stop recording or Stop recording and computing. Recording stops. The indicator below the Recording button turns off.
1
2
3
4
5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-3
3.1 Controlling the GM
Starting, Stopping, Resetting, and Acknowledging Computing
Procedure
1 On the SMARTDAC+ Web Service tab, click Computing. The Computing dialog box appears.
2 Click a button.
Start computing: Starts computing on math channels. The indicator below the Computing button turns on in blue. Stop computing: Stops computing on math channels. The indicator below the Computing button turns off. Start computing (MathRST): Resets computing on math channels and starts computing on math channels. The indicator below the Computing button turns on in blue. Reset computing: Resets computing on math channels Math ACK: Clears the icon that appears (on the GM) when a computation data dropout occurs.
Starting and Stopping Recording and Computing Using the GM10 START and STOP Keys
Starting Recording and Computing
Procedure
1 Hold down the GM10 START key for at least 3 seconds. Recording starts, and the GM10's REC LED illuminates. On models with computation (/MT option), depending on the start key setting, computing also starts when recording starts. The MATH LED illuminates. To only start computing, press START, rather than holding it down.
Hold down for at least 3 seconds.
Recording + computing
Stopping Recording and Computation
Procedure
1 Hold down the GM10 STOP key for at least 3 seconds. Recording stops, and the GM10's REC LED turns off. On models with computation (/MT option), depending on the stop key setting, computing also stops when recording stops. The MATH LED turns off. To only stop computing, press STOP, rather than holding it down, when recording is stopped.
3-4
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Explanation Operations That Start When Recording Starts · Reporting (/MT option) · Computation (/MT option; when START/STOP key action is set to Start / Stop or Reset + Start / Stop)
Operations That Stop When Recording Stops · Reporting (/MT option) · Computation (/MT option): When stop key action is set to Stop
Performance While Data Is Being Saved If the internal memory or external storage medium is continuously accessed, the following phenomena may occur. · Files being saved to the external storage medium drop out. · Accessing the GM through communication takes a long time. If these conditions occur, take the following measures. · If you are creating data files at short intervals consecutively using the event action
function, increase the data file save interval. · If you are creating numerous files in a single directory on the external storage medium,
change the destination directory name at approximately every 1000 files. · If data recording and display are using up resources (for example if you are recording on
multiple channels at a fast rate), reduce the recording interval, or change the display.
Alarm ACK
Follow the procedure below to acknowledge all alarms that are occurring.
Procedure
1 On the SMARTDAC+ Web Service tab, click Alarm. The Alarm dialog box appears.
2 Click Alarm ACK. Alarms are acknowledged.
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Indicator below the Alarm button See "Status Indications."
Setting the Date and Time For details on the settings, see page 2-24 in section 2.2, "Setting the Date and Time".
Starting, Stopping, and Testing Mail Transmission
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click E-Mail function. The Mail function dialog box appears.
2 Click a button.
Start E-mail transmission: Enables the mail transmission function. Stop E-mail transmission: Disables the mail transmission function. E-Mail test for recipient 1 or E-Mail test for recipient 2: Sends a test mail to the recipient.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-5
3.1 Controlling the GM
Triggering the Starting of Event Data Recording
Follow the procedure below to apply a start trigger for event data recording.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Event trigger. The Event trigger dialog box appears.
2 Click Execute event trigger. Event data recording that is in the trigger-wait state starts. When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval, click Execute Event trigger meas group 1, Execute Event trigger meas group 2, or Execute All.
Executing Manual Sampling
Follow the procedure below to execute manual sampling. Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Manual sample. A Manual sample dialog box appears.
2 On the Operation tab, click Execute a manual sample. Manual sampling is executed.
Saving Event Data
Follow the procedure below to save the event data being recorded to a file.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Event save. An Event save dialog box appears.
2 Click Save event data. The event data is saved.
Data save information icon
Saving Display Data
Follow the procedure below to save the display data being recorded to a file. Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Display save. A Display save dialog box appears.
2 Click Save display data. The display data is saved.
3-6
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Resetting a Relative Timer
1
Follow the procedure below to reset and start a relative timer.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Timer reset.
2
The Timer reset dialog box appears.
2 Select the timer check box you want to reset, and click Reset. The timer is reset.
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
Resetting a Match Time Timer
Follow the procedure below to reset a timer that has expired.
Procedure
1. On the Operation tab, click Reset Match Time Timer. The Match time timer reset dialog box appears.
2. Select the match time timer check box you want to reset, and click Reset. The match time timer is reset.
Changing the batch number, lot number, and batch comment
Follow the procedure below to change the batch number, lot number, and batch comment. When the GM is recording, you can enter only batch comments that have not been entered yet.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Batch. The Batch dialog box appears.
2 Enter the batch number, lot number, and batch comment, and click Change. The batch number, lot number, and batch comment are changed. For the procedure to enter the batch number, lot number, and batch comment, see page 2-122 in section 2.16, "Configuring the Batch Function".
4 5
App Index
Viewing the Batch text
Follow the procedure below to view the batch text set on the GM. You cannot change it. Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Batch. The Batch dialog box appears.
2 Check the batch text, and click Cancel.
Changing the Time Using SNTP
Follow the procedure below to query the SNTP server for the time and adjust the GM time. Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click SNTP manual time adjustment. The SNTP manual time adjustment dialog box appears.
2 Click Execute SNTP manual time adjustment. The GM queries the SNTP server for the time.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-7
3.1 Controlling the GM
Performing a Test Print
Follow the procedure below to perform a test print.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Test print. A Test print dialog box appears.
2 Click Execute a test print. A test print is performed.
Executing a File Transmission Test on the FTP Server
Follow the procedure below to transfer a test file to the FTP server.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click FTP test. A FTP test dialog box appears.
2 Click Execute an FTP test to the primary or Execute an FTP test to the secondary. The GM transfers a test file to the FTP server.
Items to Check before Performing This Test · Connect the Ethernet cable correctly. For the connection procedure, see "Connecting
to the Ethernet Port" in the First Step Guide. · Check that the Ethernet interface settings are correct.
For the setup procedure, see page 2-154 in section 2.22, "Configuring the Ethernet Communication Function". Checking the Results of the FTP Test · When an FTP test is executed, a test file named FTP_TEST.TXT is transferred to the specified FTP destination directory. · You can also check the result of an FTP test using the FTP log ( see "Error Log Monitor" on page 3-28) and Flog command (see the setting commands in the communication manual).
Clearing Error Displays
Follow the procedure below to clear an error display from the GM10's 7 segment LED.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Clear Error Display. A Clear Error Display dialog box appears.
2 Click Clear error display. The error display is cleared.
Clearing the Bluetooth Connection List (Bluetooth function (/C8 option))
Follow the procedure below to clear the Bluetooth connection list (pairing information cannot be deleted). If a Bluetooth connection password is set, you will need to enter a password the next time you connect.
Procedure
1 On the Operation tab, click Clear Bluetooth connection list. A Clear Bluetooth connection list dialog box appears.
2 Click Clear Bluetooth connection list. The connection list is cleared.
3-8
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1.2
3.1 Controlling the GM
Monitoring the GM Data and Controlling the GM from the Monitor Screen
You can retrieve data and display conditions from the GM and view the information using the monitors listed below. You can also perform alarm acknowledge and other operations. Monitors Trend, digital, bar graph, horizontal bar graph, overview, alarm summary,
message summary, DO channel status, internal switch status, Modbus master status, Modbus client status, WT client status, SLMP client status, memory data list, report data list, manual sampled data list, various error logs, network information, system information
On the trend monitor, digital monitor, bar graph monitor, and horizontal bar graph monitor, channel data is displayed in groups. Up to 4 groups can be displayed.
Display Update Interval The channel data display is updated at the scan interval. However, the shortest update interval is 1 second.
Order of Display Precedence If the display of the same type of items overlaps, the information of the smallest number takes precedence. For example, if multiple alarms are occurring, the alarm with the smallest alarm level number takes precedence.
Note
If the GM system configuration or settings change while the monitor is displayed, the monitor may not display data correctly. In such a case, reload the page.
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-9
3.1 Controlling the GM
Switching the Monitor Display
Procedure On the Data tab, click the monitor you want to display. Favorite monitors appears when you register a favorite monitor. You can also switch the screen by clicking a monitor display switch button.
Data tab tree Switch the monitor display Change the channel display format Pause and resume data updating
Note
You can change the monitor display switch buttons that are displayed on the menu bar. For the procedure, see "Changing the Channel Display Format" on page 3-11.
Pausing and Resuming Data Updating
Follow the procedure below to pause and resume monitor data updating.
Procedure Each time you click Pause/Resume, the monitor data updating pauses or resumes. When data updating is paused, a section of the Pause/Resume button icon blinks.
Note
If the GM settings are changed when updating is paused, the paused state may be cleared.
3-10
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Changing the Channel Display Format
1
Follow the procedure below to set the display format of channel names and the digital I/O
channel values on the monitors. The settings are applied to all monitors.
Procedure
2
1 Click Display format. A bar appears where you can specify the channel display.
2 Select the display format.
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
Item
Description
Channel Set the display format of channel names to Channel No., Tag, or Tag No.
Digital label Select the value display format of digital input channels and digital output
channels.
Digit
Displays 0s and 1s as they are (using numbers).
Character Displays 0s and 1s using predefined character strings, such as "OPEN" and "CLOSE." If character strings are not specified, they will be blank.
Favorite Monitors
Follow the procedure below to create favorite monitors. You can create up to 15 monitors.
Procedure Registration
1 On the Data tab, click Create monitor. A screen for creating a new monitor appears.
4 5
App Index
2 Click Divide. Screen multi panel options appear.
3 Click the multi panel pattern to use.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-11
3.1 Controlling the GM
4 From the Type list, select the screen type to display. You can also select None (to not register a screen).
5 If you select Trend, Digital, Bar, or Horizontal bar, select the display group from the Gr. list.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign screens to all areas.
7 Click Register. The Name box appears.
8 Enter the monitor name, and click Register. The monitor name is added under Favorite monitors in the content selection tree.
Monitor name · You can enter up to 16 characters. · Tabs will be replaced with spaces. · Hats (^), single quotation marks, and semicolons will be replaced with underscores. · Preceding and trailing spaces will deleted. Deleting a Favorite Monitor
1 In the content selection tree, point to the favorite monitor you want to delete. 2 Click the X mark that appears to the right of the monitor name.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The monitor name is deleted from the content selection tree. Note You cannot edit a favorite monitor that you created before. If you want to change a favorite monitor, create a new monitor, and overwrite the old one by specifying the same name.
3-12
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM
Trend Monitor, Digital Monitor, Bar Graph Monitor, and Horizontal Bar Graph
1
Monitor
Trend Monitor
Trend displays are shown by group.
2
Display group change bar
Display groups
3
4
5
Digital Monitor Digital displays are shown by group.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-13
3.1 Controlling the GM
Bar Graph Monitor and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor Bar graph displays or horizontal bar graph displays are shown by group.
Bar Graph Monitor
Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor
Note
· When you start the Web application for the first time, display groups are displayed in accordance with the default conditions. Change the display groups if necessary.
· Changes that you make to the monitor are always retained.
Changing the Division Setting of the Screen (Trend, digital, bar graph and horizontal bar graph monitors)
Follow the procedure below to change the division setting of the screen. If you change the division setting, check the group displayed in each area, and change it if necessary (see "Changing Display Groups"). The division setting applies to all four monitors.
Procedure
1 Click Divide. A bar appears where you can select the division setting.
2 Click the appropriate setting. The screen is divided accordingly.
3-14
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Changing Display Groups (Trend, digital, bar graph and horizontal bar graph
1
monitors)
Follow the procedure below to change the group to show in each area. This setting applies
to all four monitors.
2
Procedure
On the display group change bar, select the display group from the Gr list.
Note
3
You can change an existing monitor and register it as a favorite monitor. For the registration
procedure, see "Favorite Monitor" on page 3-14.
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
Writing Messages
Follow the procedure below to write a message at the current time position in the data being recorded. You can execute this procedure when a trend, digital, bar graph, horizontal bar graph, overview, alarm summary, message summary, log, DO channel status, or internal switch status is displayed. When you write a message, the screen temporarily shows an alternate screen (see note on page 3-6). The message is displayed on the trend. You can also view it in the message summary.
Procedure
1 Click Message. A bar appears where you can set the message to write.
2 Select Preset or Free to specify the message. Preset messages are fixed messages set in the GM. Select a message from the list. Free messages are messages that you enter on the spot. Select a message number from the list, and enter the message string in the text box.
4 5
App Index
Free messages · Up to 32 characters · Single quotation marks and semicolons will be replaced with spaces.
3 From the Write to list, select the display group to write to. Select All groups to write the message to all groups.
4 Click Write. The message is written. See the screen example on the next page.
Note
If you write a free message, the message string set in the GM will also be replaced.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-15
3.1 Controlling the GM
Trend
The description of a trend screen that can be displayed in one of the divided areas is given below.
Written message
Toolbar
Trip line
Waveform display area Time axis
Alarm
Y-axis display area
Active Y-axis mark Splitter
Name
Description
Toolbar
Change the trend waveform display mode.
Waveform display area Displays channel data as waveforms.
Y-axis display area Displays the Y-axis of each channel. Each Y-axis displays a scale
image, channel name, and unit. Alarm point marks and color scale
bands are also displayed.
Splitter
Drag the splitter to adjust the sizes of the waveform display area
and Y-axis display area.
Note
· The time axis displays the time of day. It does not display the elapsed time from the start of recording.
· Partial expanded display is not possible. · If a change is made on the GM that disrupts the continuity of the data, the trend will be cleared.
Changing the Trend's Active Y-Axis
This procedure applies to the trend display. What Is the Active Y-axis? The active Y-axis refers to the Y-axis that has focus among the multiple waveforms. The waveform display area shows horizontal grid lines that correspond to the active Y-axis.* The corresponding waveform is also shown in front.
* If auto zone or free zone is in use (see the next page), the horizontal grid lines of the Y-axes that are in the same column as the active Y-axis are also shown.
Procedure In the Y-axis area, click a Y-axis to activate it. The active waveform icon appears below the new active Y-axis.
3-16
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM
Changing the Trend's Waveform Display
This procedure applies to the trend display. You can click the icons in the figure below to
change the waveform display.
Full Auto Slide Free
Turns the cursor display on and off Waveform line thickness
Turns the alarm display on and off Zoom in on or out of the time axis Waveform display limits Waveform display zone
Waveform Display Zone
Change the waveform display zone.
Name Full
Description Displays all waveforms in full zones.
Auto
Divides the waveform display area into equally spaced zones in accordance
with the number of displayed waveforms and displays the waveforms.
Slide
Displays each waveform cascaded from the top to the bottom of the waveform
display area.
Free
Displays waveforms in zones specified on the GM.
The following figure shows the Y-axes of each display zone.
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Full zone
Auto zone
Slide zone
Free zone
Waveform Display Limits
If you apply the waveform display limit, the Y-axis display range is limited to the minimum and maximum values of the scale. Values that are less than the minimum scale value are set to the minimum value, and values that are greater than the maximum scale value are set to the maximum value.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
With waveform display limits
Zooming In on or Out of the Time Axis You can zoom in on or out of the time axis.
No waveform display limits 3-17
3.1 Controlling the GM
Alarm Display
Alarm information is displayed in the bottom area. Alarm levels (1, 2, 3, and 4) are displayed in order from the top. The duration of each alarm is indicated with a bar using the same color as the corresponding channel. Alarms of channels that correspond to the active Y-axis are shown in front.
1
2
Alarm level 1 Alarm level 2 Alarm level 3
Alarm level 4
3
4
(red) channel 0001 (blue) channel 0002 (green) channel 0003
Number 1 2 3 4
Description An alarm level 1 alarm on channel 0001 An alarm level 2 alarm on channel 0001 An alarm level 3 alarm on channel 0002 An alarm level 4 alarm on channel 0003
Cursor
You can use cursors to read the values at the cursor. Click the cursor display icon, and click a location on the waveform display area. A cursor appears, and the channel values at the cursor position is displayed in pop-up windows. Drag the pointer to display two cursors. You can read the values at the two positions.
3-18
Channel color Channel name
TI001 13.07
Measured value
Note
· The pop-up window for the waveform that corresponds to the active Y-axis is shown in front. · When waveform display limit is enabled, "+Over," "Over," and "BURNOUT" are displayed for
channel values when appropriate.
Waveform Line Thickness You can change the waveform line thickness. Trip Lines Trip lines are displayed for the active Y-axis and the Y-axes displayed in the same column as the active Y-axis.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM
Displaying Trends' Past Data
1
You can display past data as a trend. This is called historical trend.
Data and Interval That Can Be Displayed as a Historical Trend The current recording and past recording data can be displayed as historical trends over the
2
following interval.
Interval: From the point when 1 points of data is recorded since the start of recording until
the start of the next recording.
Recording start
Recording stop Recording start
3
Recording duration A
The next recording duration B
Duration for which the historical trend of recording duration A can be displayed
Displaying the Historical Trend Click the historical trend icon to display the historical trend. You can use the scroll bar to adjust the display range.
Historical trend Retrieve historical trend data
4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Scroll bar
You can carry out the following operations. The procedures are the same as those for the trend display. · Change the active waveform · Change the waveform display zone and waveform display limits · Zoom in on or out of the time axis · Show or hide alarms information · Show or hide cursors
The cursor value for display data shows the minimum and maximum values.
Event data TI001
13.07
Display data TI001
13.07 / 13.15
Instantaneous value
Minimum value Maximum value
· Change the waveform line thickness
3-19
3.1 Controlling the GM
Retrieving Historical Trend Data Follow the procedure below to retrieve historical trend data from the GM.
Note
The Web application has a buffer for historical trend data. The buffer can hold 3600 data points per channel. By retrieving the historical trend data, you can view the data that has been loaded into this buffer from the GM.
1 Click the retrieve historical trend data icon. A dialog box appears where you can specify the range of historical trend data to retrieve.
2 Drag the scroll bar and selection window to specify the interval of historical trend data to retrieve.
Selection window time display
Get button Exit button
Time axis
Selection window
Interval held in the buffer
3 Click Retrieve. Data retrieval starts. When the data retrieval is complete, the historical trend data is displayed.
Note
If the clock was changed (excluding gradual time adjustment) or a power failure occurred during recording, for data before the last time disruption, the time between what is selected in the dialog box for specifying the interval of historical trend data to retrieve and the actual data will be misaligned. Displaying such data is possible.
3-20
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Digital
1
The description of a digital screen that can be displayed in one of the divided areas is given
below.
Tag name
2
Measured value
Unit
3
Alarm mark
4
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
5
Alarm Marks
Alarm Status On On Off Off
Alarm ACK Unacknowledged alarms present. All alarms acknowledged. Unacknowledged alarms present. All alarms acknowledged.
Background Color Alternating bright and dark red Bright red Blinking gray No change
App Index
When Information Cannot Be Read
Due to space limitations, channel information may not be displayed. If you place the pointer in a channel area and leave it there for about 1 second, the channel name, digital value, and unit will appear in a pop-up window.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-21
3.1 Controlling the GM
Executing Individual Alarm Acknowledges, Changing Alarm Values, and Changing DO Output (DO set to Manual), Changing AO Output
Click a channel area to display a channel information dialog box of that channel.
AI channel
DO channel
AO channel
· Executing an Individual Alarm ACK (AI channel) Click ACK. The individual alarm is acknowledged.
· Changing the Alarm Value (AI channel) Enter a value in the alarm value text box, and click Send. The alarm value will be changed.
· Changing the DO Output (DO channel set to Manual) You can control the DO output from the channel information dialog box.
· Changing AO Output (AO channel) You can control the AO output from the channel information dialog box. See "Individual AO Channel Operation from the Monitor" on page 3-33.
If the operation fails, a message appears in the bottom line of the channel information dialog box.
3-22
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Bar Graph Monitor and Horizontal Bar Graph Monitor
1
The description of the bar graph or horizontal bar graph that can be displayed in one of the
divided areas is given below.
Bar Graph The bar graph is shown vertically, and the starting point of bars is as according to the GM
2
setting.
Horizontal Bar Graph
The bar graph is shown horizontally, and the starting point of bars is as according to the GM setting.
3
Bar Graph
Tag name
4
Alarm mark
Measured value
Unit
5
Alarm point mark
App
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
Horizontal Bar Graph
Index
Tag name Measured value Unit Alarm mark Alarm point mark
Alarm Marks See "Digital."
When Information Cannot Be Read Due to space limitations, channel information may not be displayed. If you place the pointer in a channel area and leave it there for about 1 second, the channel name, digital value, and unit will appear in a pop-up window.
Executing Individual Alarm Acknowledges, Changing Alarm Values, and Changing DO Output (DO set to Manual) See "Digital" on 3-21.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-23
3.1 Controlling the GM
Overview Monitor
The following four types of overview monitors are available. · All channel · Display group · Display group (detail display) · Channel in display group All channel overview
Display group overview Display group overview (detail display)
Channel-in-display-group overview can be displayed from the display group overview.
All channel The all channel overview can be displayed when the number of active channels is 100 or less. The screen shows channel names, digital values, units, alarm statuses, and types of active alarms.
3-24
Display Item Channel name
Digital value Unit Type of active alarm
Alarm status
Description Displays the channel number, tag, or tag number. If the
information does not fit, the portion that does not fit is displayed
with an ellipsis (...).
If the value does not fit, it is not displayed.
If the value does not fit, it is not displayed.
Of the active alarms, the alarm type of the lowest alarm level is
displayed.
The alarm status at the channel level is displayed with a
background color.
When the alarm display is set to Nonhold
Alarm Status Background Color
On
Red
Off
Green
When the alarm display is set to Hold
Alarm Status On
Alarm ACK Unacknowledged alarms present.
Background Color Alternating bright and dark red
On
All alarms
Bright red
acknowledged.
Off
Unacknowledged Alternating green and white
alarms present.
Off
All alarms
Green
acknowledged.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Due to space limitations, channel information may not be displayed. If you place the pointer
1
in a channel cell and leave it there for about 1 second, the channel name, digital value, unit,
and the type of active alarm will appear in a pop-up window.
· Executing Individual Alarm Acknowledges, Changing Alarm Values, and Changing DO Output (DO set to Manual)
2
See "Digital" on 3-23.
Display group The display group overview shows groups.
3
4
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
5
App
Display Item Display group name
Alarm status
Description If the information does not fit, the portion that does not fit is displayed with an ellipsis (...). The alarm status at the group level is displayed with a background color. For details on the background color, see "Alarm status" in "All Channel."
Due to space limitations, channel information may not be displayed. If you place the pointer in a group area and leave it there for about 1 second, the group name will appear in a popup window.
Display group (detail display) When the display group overview is shown, you can click the detail display button to enable and disable detail display mode. Channels in each group are displayed.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-25
3.1 Controlling the GM
Display Item Description
Display group If the information does not fit, the portion that does not fit is displayed with
name
an ellipsis (...).
Channel name A channel name is displayed in the appropriate cell if the channel has an
active alarm or has an unacknowledged alarm when the alarm is set to
Hold. If the information does not fit, the portion that does not fit is displayed
with an ellipsis (...).
Alarm status The alarm status at the channel level is displayed with a background color.
For details on the background color, see "Alarm status" in "All Channel."
Due to space limitations, channel information may not be displayed. If you place the pointer in a group name area and leave it there for about 1 second, the group name will appear in a pop-up window. If you place the pointer in a channel area and leave it there for about 1 second, the channel name will appear in a pop-up window.
Channel in display group When the display group overview is shown, you can click one of the display group areas to display an overview of that group. The displayed information is the same as with "All channel."
Return to the display group overview. Switch the display group.
· Executing Individual Alarm Acknowledges, Changing Alarm Values, and Changing DO Output (DO set to Manual)
See "Digital" on 3-24.
3-26
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Alarm Summary Monitor
1
The alarm summary monitor displays the GM alarm summary. Up to 1000 items can be
displayed.
When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval, alarm ACK remains for each scan group.
2
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
4
5
Saving the Alarm Summary Click Alarm save, and follow the instructions in the dialog box that appears. The alarm summary can be saved to an SD card or USB flash memory.
Sorting Click a column title to sort the alarm summary in ascending or descending order of that column.
Rearranging Columns You can rearrange columns by dragging the column title areas. However, the left most column is fixed.
Changing Column Widths You can change the column widths by dragging the column boundaries.
Copying to the Clipboard Drag the cursor to select the list. Press Ctrl+C on the keyboard to copy the selected list to the clipboard.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-27
3.1 Controlling the GM
Message Summary Monitor
The message summary monitor displays the GM message summary. Up to 450 items can be displayed.
You can sort, rearrange columns, change column widths, and copy to clipboard.
Error Log Monitor
The error log monitor displays the GM error log. The following figure shows an error log display.
3-28
You can sort, rearrange columns, change column widths, and copy to clipboard.
The maximum number of log entries is shown below.
Type Event log
Maximum Number of Displayed Events 50
Error log
50
FTP log
50
Web log
200
Mail log
50
SNTP log
200
Modbus log
200
DHCP log
200
General log
200
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Event log *
Action Login Logout NewTime TimeChg PowerOff PowerOn TRevStart TRevEnd SNTPtimeset DSTStart DSTEnd
Description Login Logout Time change when recording is stopped Time change through touch operation Power off (including power failures) Power on (including recoveries from power failures) Start of gradually adjusting the time End of gradually adjusting the time Time change by SNTP Start of Daylight Saving Time End of Daylight Saving Time
* If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see the Advanced Security Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Factor OPERATE COMMU REMOTE ACTION SYSTEM SERIAL
Description Key operation Operation via communication Operation through the remote control function Operation through event action Operation by the system Operation through serial communication
Error log For the error codes and error messages, see page 5-21 in section 5.2.1, "Messages".
General Log
User ID Number e0 e1 e2 e3 s0 s1 s2
Description Command exchanged through Ethernet connection #0 Command exchanged through Ethernet connection #1 Command exchanged through Ethernet connection #2 Command exchanged through Ethernet connection #3 Command exchanged through serial communication Command exchanged through Bluetooth connection Command exchanged through USB Function
Input/Output Symbol > <
Description Indicates a command that the GM received Indicates a response that the GM sent
Message (Over length)
(Serial error) (output)
(disconnected)
Description Appears when the length of a command received by the GM exceeded the limit Appears when a serial communication error occurred Displays a response that was sent in response to an output command or setting query. This message appears in place of the response content. Appears when the GM disconnected communication due to a timeout or other reason.
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
FTP Log
Flag P S
Description File was sent to the primary FTP destination. File was sent to the secondary FTP destination.
WEB Log
Method, IP address GET POST
Description Displays the HTTP method in which an error occurred. The IP address of the external device in which the error occurred is also displayed.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-29
3.1 Controlling the GM
Mail Log
Type ALARM TIMER POWER MEMORY ERROR REPORT TEST PASSWORD
SNTP Log
Error Code ELINK
EDORMANT
EHOSTNAME
ETCPIP
ESEND
ERECV
EBROKEN
ETIMEDOUT EOVER
Description Alarm mail transmission Scheduled mail transmission Power-on, power failure recovery Memory full notification Error message mail Report file transmission Test mail transmission User lock out
Description The Ethernet cable is not connected. Check the GM Ethernet cable connection. An internal processing error occurred. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. The SNTP server host name is invalid. Check the GM Ethernet cable connection, IP address setting, and SNTP server address setting. An internal processing error occurred. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. Failed to transmit data to the SNTP server. Check the GM Ethernet cable connection and IP address setting. Failed to receive data from the SNTP server. Check the GM Ethernet cable connection and IP address setting. The SNTP server returned an invalid response. The SNTP server may in a condition that cannot deliver time information. Check the SNTP server status. The response from the SNTP server timed out. Check the GM Ethernet cable connection. The time difference between the GM and SNTP server has exceeded the limit for correcting the time. Check whether the SNTP server is running properly and the limit for correcting the time.
3-30
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Modbus Log
Flag C M
Description Communication by the Modbus client function (Ethernet) Communication by the Modbus master function (serial)
Status
Factor
Description
W
Write
R
Read
Blue
Normal communication.
Yellow
An external Modbus device returned an error response.
Orange
TCP connection in progress.
Red
Failed to connect to an external Modbus device.
Common to SKIP
Command not set.
colors other INVALID
Command cannot be executed.
than blue
WAITING
Communication with an external device is congested. Waiting for
recovery. Check the connection with the external device.
CLOSED
Modbus communication was stopped, and connection to the external
device was closed.
RESOLVING
Server/slave connection being established (resolving address).
CONNNECTING Server/slave connection being established (requesting connection).
UNREACH
The external device was not found on the network. Check the
Modbus server address setting and Ethernet cable connection.
TIMEOUT
The response from the external device timed out. Check the
connection with the external device.
BROKEN
A CRC error was detected in the serial communication with the
external device. Check the serial communication baud rate and other
settings.
ERR_FC
The external device returned an error response. Check whether the
ERR_ADDR
Modbus registers are set correctly to match the external device.
ERR_VALUE
ERR_DEVICE
ERR_ACK
ERR_BUSY
ERR_NEGATIVE
ERR_GATE_PATH Check whether the Modbus connection destination unit number is
correct.
ERR_GATE_
The external device returned an error response. Check whether the
TARGET
Modbus registers are set correctly to match the external device.
BAD_SLAVE
The external device returned an invalid response. Check whether the
BAD_FC
external device is operating properly.
BAD_ADDR
BAD_NUM
BAD_CNT
VALID
Modbus communication was established normally.
START
Modbus communication started.
STOP
Modbus communication stopped.
DROPOUT
Failed to send all commands within the specified communication
interval. Check the number of Modbus commands and the baud rate.
NO_DATA
Data has not yet been received once. Check the communication
settings.
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-31
3.1 Controlling the GM
DHCP Log
Type LINK
SET DHCP
Message ON OFF Address (e.g., 10.0.122.3) OFF ON RENEWING RELEASING REJECTING
RENEWED RELEASED EXTENDED ESEND
ESERVER
ESERVFAIL
ERENEWED
ERELEASED EEXTENDED
EEXPIRED
DNS
UPDATED REMOVED EFORMERR
ESERVFAIL EINTERNAL ENONAME ENXDOMAIN EREFUSED EYXDOMAIN EYXRESET ENXRESET ENOTAUTH ENOTZONE
Description Ethernet cable connection was detected. Ethernet cable disconnection was detected. The IP address of the GM was set. The DHCP function was disabled. The DHCP function was enabled. The IP address obtained from the DHCP server was renewed. The IP address obtained from the DHCP server was released. The IP address obtained from the DHCP server was rejected. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. 1 IP address was renewed. IP address was released. IP address extension application complete. DHCP message transmission failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. DHCP server search failed. Check whether the DHCP server is available. The response from the DHCP server timed out. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. IP address renewal failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. IP address release failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. IP address extension application failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. IP address lease period expired. IP address was reset to 0.0.0.0. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. DNS host name registration complete. DNS host name removal complete. DNS message syntax error was found. Check whether the DNS server is operating properly. An internal processing error occurred in the DNS server. Check whether the DNS server is operating properly.
Query to the DNS server wave rejected. Check whether the GM domain name setting is correct. The GM does not support DNS servers that require host name registration authentication. Check whether the DNS server supports host name registration without authentication.
3-32
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Changing the Status Display and Output of DO Channels
1
You can display the DO channel status of the entire system. You can change the DO output
that are set to Manual.
2
Tag name
Output
3
Unit
4
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
5
· Up to 60 channels can be displayed. When the display area of each channel becomes small, some of the information will not be displayed.
· The display is updated every second.
Changing the DO Output (DO channel set to Manual) Click a channel area to display a channel information dialog box of that channel. You can control the DO output from the channel information dialog box.
Individual AO Channel Operation from the Monitor
From the monitor, you can individually operate the AO channel assigned to retransmission output or manual output.
Retransmission output: Turn on and off the retransmission output. Manual output: Set the output value. You can carry out this procedure on the digital, bar graph, horizontal bar graph, and overview displays. In Display settings, under Screen display settings, Changing each value from monitoring On/Off must be set to On. Users whose Output operation under User property in the security settings is set to LOCK cannot turn retransmission output on or off or operate the manual output.
Retransmission output on/off
1 Select an AO channel. The channel information screen appears.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
2 Select ON or OFF. The selected value (ON or OFF) takes effect. Operation complete
The highlighted one is the current state.
3-33
3.1 Controlling the GM
Performing Manual Output
1 Select an AO channel. The channel information screen appears.
2 Set the output value, and select Send. The specified value is output. Operation complete
Collective AO Channel Operation from the Monitor You can turn on and off the AO channels assigned to retransmission output at once. Users whose Output operation under User property in the security settings is set to LOCK cannot operate AO channels. Turning Retransmission Output On or Off at Once
1 On the Operation tab, select All re-transmission ON/OFF. The All re-transmission ON/OFF dialog box appears.
2 Select ON or OFF. The selected value (ON or OFF) takes effect. Operation complete
3-34
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Displaying the Internal Switch Status and Changing the Values
1
You can display the internal switch status of the entire system. You can change the values of
internal switches that are set to Manual.
2
Internal switch number
Value
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
4
5
· Up to 100 internal switches can be displayed. When the display area of each channel becomes small, some of the information will not be displayed.
· The display is updated every second.
Changing the Internal Switch Values (Internal switches set to Manual) Click an internal switch area to display a channel information dialog box of that switch. You can change the internal switch value from the channel information dialog box.
Checking the Command Status of the Modbus Client and Modbus Master
Click the Data tab and then Modbus client or Modbus master to display the command operating status. The display is updated every 5 seconds.
Communication Condition
The following settings are displayed. The setting display varies between Modbus client and
Modbus master.
Function Modbus client Modbus master
Setup Item Wait time Interval Communication timeout Retransmission Wait time
Display Auto recovery Read cycle Time out Retrials Auto recovery
Communication Status See "Modbus Log" on page 3-31.
Resuming Command Transmission You can use the display interface (click Refresh) to resume command transmission to a server to which communication is stopped (red status lamp).
Data When Communication Is Stopped and during Connection Retrials If the command transmission stops such as due to a connection drop, the status turns orange or red, and the communication channel data is held at the previous value or is reset.
Data Dropout Data drop occurs when the commands from 1 to 100 from the GM10-1 or from 1 to 200 from the GM10-2 do not complete within the read cycle. When a data dropout occurs, the communication channel data is held at the previous value. If this happens, take measures such as making the read cycle longer or reducing the number of commands. Confirm that no data dropout occurs on the Modbus status log screen.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-35
3.1 Controlling the GM
WT Client Status
You can display the connection status with the WT power meter. For details on the displayed information, see the WT Communication (/E2) User's Manual (IM 04L51B01-19EN). The display is updated every 5 seconds.
Listing and Saving the Measured Data in the Internal Memory
You can display a list of the measured data (display data and event data) in the internal memory. · Select the type of data to display using the Data type list box. · When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval, the display can be switched
between Event data 1 and Event data 2. · Click a column title to sort the items in ascending or descending order of that column.
3-36
Saving All Data You can save the internal memory's display data, event data, manual sampled data, and report data.
1 Click All save. A Memory data save dialog box appears.
2 Click a button to specify the save destination. The data is saved.
Saving Selected Data
1 Select the data you want to save from the list. 2 Click Select save.
A Memory data save dialog box appears.
3 Click a button to specify the save destination. The data is saved.
Downloading Data You can download the selected data to your PC.
1 Select the data you want to download. 2 Click Download.
Follow the instructions in the dialog box that appears.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
Listing and Saving Report Data
1
You can display a list of the report data in the internal memory.
· Select the type of report data to display from the Report type list box.
· Click a column title to sort the items in ascending or descending order of that column.
2
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
4
5
Saving the Report Data
1 Click Save. A Report data save dialog box appears.
2 Click a button to specify the save destination. All the report data is saved.
Listing and Saving Manual Sampled Data
You can display a list of the manual sampled data in the internal memory. · Click a column title to sort the items in ascending or descending order of that column.
App Index
Saving Manual Sampled Data
1 Click Save. A Manual sample data save dialog box appears.
2 Click a button to specify the save destination. All the manual sampled data is saved.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-37
3.1 Controlling the GM
Network Information Monitor
The network information monitor displays the network information of connected instruments.
Click Reload (in the lower right of the screen) to update the displayed network information.
Note
If the Bluetooth options is available, the GM10's BD address is displayed. If the GM10's BT lamp has never been turn on, the BD address will be displayed as ":::::." After turning on the BT lamp, click Reload to reload the network information monitor.
3-38
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1 Controlling the GM
System Information Monitor
1
The system information monitor displays the GM's basic information, such as the number of
channels, and the module configuration.
The following figure is for when only the main unit is available. If a sub unit is also available, the screen will consist of a System Info tab, Unit Info tab, and Module Info tab.
2
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
4
5
App
Click ReLoad (in the lower right of the screen) to update the information under Connected module.
Recognized Module and Connected Module Recognized module shows the module configuration that the GM has detected. Connected module shows the module configuration that is actually connected to the GM. To align Recognized module with Connected module, you must perform reconfiguration on the GM. The Special Order column is fixed to Standard. The Status column shows maintenance information.
Note
· If the Bluetooth options is available, the GM10's BD address is displayed. If the GM10's BT lamp has never been turn on, the BD address will be displayed as ":::::." After turning on the BT lamp, reload the system information monitor.
· If the expansion module is turned off and then back on, the connection status is changed. Reload.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-39
3.1 Controlling the GM
Displayed Content
Item System information
Description Product Name (GM10) Serial No. MAC Address Firmware Version Web Application Version Model Option Instruments tag Instrument tag No. Channel Information Advanced security function: Option, /AS usage BD address: Displayed when Bluetooth function (/C8) is in use Multi-batch function: Displayed on models with the /BT option Measurement mode Connected module Connected module (single unit system) A list of modules connected to the main unit is displayed. Unit list (multi unit system) A list of detected units and connected units is displayed. Status indication
Icon Description The module is operating normally.
An error is occurring in the module.
A critical error is occurring in the module.
Unit information Module information
The module that is recognized does not match the module that is connected. (Blank) No modules are connected or recognized. A list of detected units* and connected units* is displayed. The displayed items are model, serial number, version, options, tokuchu, and errors. The status indication icons and descriptions are the same as those of system information. * GM10 and GX90EX A list of detected modules and connected modules is displayed. There is a Main unit tab and a Unit No. tab. The displayed items are model, serial number, version, options, tokuchu, input channels, output channels, and errors. The status indication icons and descriptions are the same as those of system information.
Activating Modules (When using the advanced security function (/AS option))
If modules that need to be activated are installed, "Module activation" appears under the system information. For details on module activation, see section 2.1.7, "Activating Modules," in the Advanced Security Function (/AS) User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
3-40
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.1 Controlling the GM
Printing the Settings
1
You can print the GM settings.
On the SMARTDAC+ Web Service tab, click Print Config. Window.
The setup print window appears.
2
3
4
5
App
Index
· You can enter a comment in the Comment box. · Items whose check boxes are selected under Print setting will be printed. Clear the
check boxes for the items you do not want to print. · The password is displayed using asterisks. · Click the browser's Refresh button to refresh the displayed information. · The information is displayed in the specified display language (see page 3-42 in section
3.1.3, "Changing the Display Settings on the Browser").
Print using the browser's print feature.
Note
The setup print window will work properly only when it is opened from the Web application. When you close the Web application, close also the setup print window.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-41
3.1 Controlling the GM
3.1.3
Changing the Display Settings on the Browser
You can change the display language on the browser and add and delete monitor display switch buttons on the menu bar.
1 On the Option tab, click Web Option. A Web Option dialog box appears.
2 Change the settings, and click OK.
For procedure to change the settings, see the explanation below.
Language Select the language from the list. Click Get info. from Hardware to obtain the setting from the GM and reflect it in the text box.
Note
· If you change the language, the Web application will restart. · The language and date format are according to the browser display format and are different
from the GM settings. For the GM settings, see page 2-180 in section 2.26.1, "Setting the Display Language, Temperature Unit, Decimal Point Type, and Date Format".
Date Format: Format Select the format from the list. Click Get info. from Hardware to obtain the setting from the GM and reflect it in the text box.
Date Format: Delimiter Select the delimiter for the year, month, and day from the list. Click Get info. from Hardware to obtain the setting from the GM and reflect it in the text box.
Month Indicator To display the month as words, select the check box. Click Get info. from Hardware to obtain the setting from the GM and reflect it in the check box. You cannot select this setting when the language is set to Japanese, Chinese, or Korean.
Display Type of Decimal Point Select the decimal point type from the list. Click Get info. from Hardware to obtain the setting from the GM and reflect it in the text box.
3-42
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.1.4
3.1 Controlling the GM
Control settings
Display background Set the display background to White or Black Click Get info. from Hardware to obtain the setting from the GM and reflect it in the text box.
Jump Buttons
Button 1 to Button 5 You can add up to five monitor display switch buttons to the menu bar. From the Button1 to Button5 lists, select the monitor display switch buttons you want to add. Select ----- if you do not want to specify a jump button.
Audio setting
Alarm Sound If you select ON, the PC will generate an alarm sound when an alarm occurs. · This function is enabled when in System settings, under Alarm basic settings,
Indicator's Hold/Nonhold is set to Hold. · The alarm sound stops when you acknowledge the alarm on the GM or Web application.
Note
In Chrome, you have to click on the screen 1 or more times to play the alarm. To configure Chrome to play without having to click, do the following: 1. Type the following into the Chrome address bar and then press Enter.
chrome://flags/#autoplay-policy 2. Under Autoplay policy, select No user gesture is required.
Changing the Password
The user that is logged in can change his or her password.
1 On the Option tab, click Password change. A Password change dialog box appears.
2 Enter the password, and click Update. The password will be changed. Use the new password for subsequent logins.
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-43
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
3.2.1 3.2.2
This section explains how to configure e-mail transmission settings.
Configuring the SMTP Client Function
The SMTP client function is used to send E-mail from the GM.
Description · Enable the SMTP client function · Set the user authentication method Set the authentication method when user authentication is necessary. · Specify the SMTP server settings · Specify the POP3 server settings Specify the necessary settings when the user authentication method is POP3 (POP before SMTP).
For details on the settings, see page 2-158 in section 2.22.3, "Configuring the SMTP Client Function".
Setting the Mail Content
Description · Set the mail header · Set the mail content · Set alarm notification mail Specify the necessary settings to send e-mails when alarms occur and are released. · Set report generation notification mail Specify the necessary settings to send e-mails when reports are generated. · Set periodic mail Specify the necessary settings to send periodic e-mails . · Send mail when the power is turned on, when the GM recovers from a power failure, when the memory is full, or when an error occurs
For details on the settings, see page 2-159 in section 2.22.4, "Setting E-mail Transmission Conditions (When the SMTP client function is on)".
3-44
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.2.3 3.2.4
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
Explanation
Transmitting E-mail Messages
The available types of e-mails are listed below. E-mail can be automatically transmitted for each item You can specify two groups of destinations and specify the destination for each item. In addition, you can set a header string for each item. · Alarm notification mail
Sends alarm information when an alarm occurs or clears or reports alarm information only when an alarm occurs. When the measurement mode is Dual interval, there is no distinction as to whether the alarm occurred on measurement group 1 or measurement group 2. · Power failure notification mail Sends the time of power failure and time of recovery when the GM recovers from a power failure. · Memory full notification Sends a message when the free space on the external storage medium or internal memory is low. · System error notification mail Sends an error code and message when an external storage medium error, internal memory error, or FTP client error occurs. · Periodic notification mail Sends a message when the specified time is reached. This can be used to confirm that the e-mail transmission function including the network is working properly. You can specify the reference time and the e-mail transmission interval for each destination. · Report notification mail (only on models with the math function (/MT option)) Sends report results. · User lockout notification mail (only on models with the advanced security function (/AS option) Sends a list of invalidated users.
Example of an e-mail sent periodically
Date: Wed, 10 Nov 2014 08:00:45 +0900 (JST) [From: GM10@smartdacplus.com To: user1@smartdacplus.com, user2@daq.co.jp Subject: [Periodic data] subject MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; chaset="iso-2022-jp" Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Subject
TEMPERATURE
Header 1
Periodic notification <Host name> GM10
<Time> 2014/12/19 08:00:01
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Performing an Mail Transmission Test
For the procedure, see "Starting, Stopping, and Testing Mail Transmission" on page 3-5.
Starting and Stopping E-mail Transmission
For the procedure, see "Starting, Stopping, and Testing Mail Transmission" on page 3-5.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-45
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
3.2.5
E-mail Format
The formats of alarm notification mail, periodic notification mail, power failure notification mail, memory full notification mail, system error notification mail, report notification mail, test mail, user lockout notification (on models with the advanced security function (/AS option)) are given below.
Alarm Notification Mail Format
Subject
Subject
[Alarm_Summary]sss···s-ttt···t
Syntax Header block General block Alarm information
Instantaneous data
Source URL
headerCRLF
CRLF Alarm_notificationCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF
CRLF <CH>ccc···cCRLF <Type>lqCRLF <aaa>yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF :
CRLF <Inst. value>CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF
ccc···c=ddd···duuu···uCRLF :
CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen. CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF
CRLF
Display item description ttt···t ccc···c lq
aaa ddd···d
Tag number or channel number (when tag or channel is attached to the header) Tag number, tag, or channel number (Channels set to skip or off are not output.) Alarm level (1 to 4) Alarm type (H, L, R, r, T, t, h, l) H (high limit alarm), L (low limit alarm), R (high limit on rate-ofchange alarm), r (low limit on rate-of-change alarm), T (delay high limit alarm), t (delay low limit alarm), h (difference high limit alarm), l (difference low limit alarm) Alarm status (On, Off) Measured value, computed value (up to 10 digits including the sign and decimal point) +OVER (positive overflow) OVER (negative overflow) Burnout ******* (error data)
The GM transmits channel numbers, alarm types, and alarm statuses for up to 10 events in a single e-mail. If the GM is configured to include a tag number or a channel number in the e-mail subject, one e-mail is sent for each event.
3-46
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
Periodic Notification Mail Format
Subject Subject
[Periodic_data]sss···s
Syntax Header block General block Time information Cancellation information
Instantaneous data
Source URL
headerCRLF
CRLF Periodic_notificationCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF
CRLF <Time>CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF E-mail message(s) did not reach intended recipient(s). CRLF [ttt···t]CRLF Count = nnn···nCRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF :
CRLF <Inst. value>CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF
ccc···c=ddd···duuu···uCRLF :
CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen. CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF
CRLF
Display item description ccc···c ttt···t
nnn···n ddd···d
Tag number, tag, or channel number (Channels set to skip or off are not output.) Canceled mail type Alarm_summary (alarm notification mail) Periodic_data (periodic notification mail) System_warning (system error notification mail) Power_failure (power failure notification mail) Memory_full (memory full notification mail) Report_data (report notification mail) Number of canceled mails Measured value, computed value (up to 10 digits including the sign and decimal point) +OVER (positive overflow) OVER (negative overflow) Burnout ******* (error data)
The time that follows the type and count of canceled mails is the time when the mail is canceled last.
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-47
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
Power Failure Notification Fail Format
Subject Subject
[Power_failure]sss···s
Syntax Header block General block
Power supply information
Source URL
headerCRLF CRLF Power failure notificationCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF CRLF <Power_failure>CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF CRLF <Power_recovery>CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen. CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF CRLF
Memory Full Notification Mail
Subject
Subject
[Memory_full]sss···s
Syntax Header block General block
Memory information
Source URL
headerCRLF
CRLF Memory full notificationCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF
CRLF
yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF <Memory_remain>ppp···pMbytesCRLF <File number>bbb/500CRLF <Medium_remain>rrr···rMbytesCRLF CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen. CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF
CRLF
Display item description ppp···p bbb rrr···r
Remaining space in internal memory Number of unsaved files (0 to 500) Remaining space on external storage medium
3-48
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
System Error Notification Mail Format
Subject
Subject
[System_warning]sss···s
Syntax Header block General block
Error information
Source URL
headerCRLF CRLF System error notificationCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF <ERROR>fffCRLF mmm···mCRLF CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen. CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF CRLF
Display item description fff
mmm···m
Error number (234, 501, 502, 507, 511, 692, 693, 695, 696, 698, 699, 921) Error message
The error message varies depending on the error type.
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-49
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
Report Notification Mail Format
Subject Subject
[rrr···r]sss···s
Syntax Header block General block Report information
Source URL
headerCRLF CRLF tiCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF <CH>ccc···cCRLF <tp>eee···eCRLF <tp>eee···eCRLF <tp>eee···eCRLF <tp>eee···eCRLF <tp>eee···eCRLF <Unit>uuu···uCRLF CRLF
: CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen. CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF CRLF
Display item description rrr···r ti tp ccc···c eee···e
Report mail content (Hourly report, Daily report, Weekly report, Monthly report, Batch report, Daily custom report) Report mail content (hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, batch, and dailycustom) Report content (average, maximum, minimum, sum, and instantaneous; five items from these are output) Tag number, tag, or channel number (Channels set to off are not output.) Measured value, computed value (up to 10 digits including the sign and decimal point). However, for the sum value, the value is output as a combination of the sign, mantissa, E, sign, and exponent such as in -3.800000E+02. +OVER (positive overflow) OVER (negative overflow) ******* (error data)
3-50
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
Test Mail Transmission Format
Subject Subject
[Test]sss···s
Syntax Header block General block
Time information
headerCRLF CRLF Test_mailCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF CRLF <Time>CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF CRLF
User Lockout Notification Format
· Subject
Subject
[User_lockout]sss···s
· Syntax Header block General block
User lock out information
Source URL
headerCRLF
CRLF User_lockout_notificationCRLF <Host name>CRLF hostCRLF
CRLF yyyy/mo/dd_hh:mi:ssCRLF <User name>CRLF uuu···uCRLF
: CRLF Access_the_following_URL_in_order_to_look_at_a_screen.CRLF http://host.domain/CRLF CRLF
Display item description
uuu···u
User name
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Display Items Common to All Formats
sss···s uuu···u yyyy mo dd hh mi ss header host
domain _ CRLF
Subject Unit Year (2001 to 2035) Month (01 to 12) Day (01 to 31) Hour (00 to 23) Minute (00 to 59) Second (00 to 59) Header Host name or IP address (IP address when the host name is not assigned.) Domain name Space Line feed
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-51
3.2 Transmitting E-mail Messages
Channel Number Notation and Range
Type
Model
I/O channel
GM10
Sub unit
Math channel
GM10
Report channel
GM10
Communication channel GM10-1
GM10-2
Notation and Range 0001 to 09991 1001 to 6599 A001 to A100 R01 to R60 C001 to C300 C001 to C500
1 0001 to 0899 when a sub unit is connected
Notes Depends on the installed module /MT option /MT option /MC option
3-52
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.3 Accessing the Measurement Data File on the GM 1 from a PC (FTP server function)
You can use a PC to access the GM via FTP. You can perform operations such as retrieving directory and file lists from the external storage medium (SD card) of the GM and
2
transferring and deleting files. In addition, you can also retrieve the directory or file list and
transfer files in the internal memory.
PC
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
4
Files stored on the external storage medium
Ethernet
GM
5
3.3.1 3.3.2
FTP server
App
Configuring FTP Server Settings
Description · Enable the FTP server function · Set the FTP server directory output format
For details on the settings, see page 2-168 in section 2.22.9, "Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)".
Accessing the GM from a PC
When Not Using the Login Function Access the GM from a PC via FTP using the admin, user, or anonymous account. With the admin account, you can ·Retrieve directory and file lists from the external storage medium and transfer and delete
directories and files on the external storage medium. ·Retrieve directory and file lists from the internal memory and transfer directories and files
in the internal memory. With the user or anonymous account, you can · Retrieve directory and file lists from the external storage medium.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-53
3.3 Accessing the Measurement Data File on the GM from a PC (FTP server function)
Connecting from a PC via the FTP An example of retrieving files using a browser is described below. In the Address box, enter ftp://host name.domain name. Drag the data you want to retrieve from the /MEM0/DATA folder in the case of internal memory data or the /DRV0 folder in the case of data on the external storage medium to the PC. You can also use the IP address in place of the "host name.domain name."
When Using the Login Function (Standard) In the URL box, enter ftp://user name@host name.domain name/. · Internal memory: ftp://username@hostname/MEM0/DATA · External media: SD memory card: ftp://username@hostname/DRV0/
You will be prompted for a user name and password when you access the server. Enter a user name and password that are registered on the GM to connect to it. To specify the password, append [:password] to the user name. Example: ftp://username:password@hostname/MEM0/DATA
Note
· Memory is linked to ftp://hostname/MEM0/DATA. · External media: SD card is linked to ftp://hostname/DRV0/. · You cannot retrieve data files that are being created. · You must access using "ftps://" when SSL encryption is in use.
3-54
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.4
Transferring Data Files from the GM (FTP client function)
The display data, event data, report data, alarm summary data, and manual sample data files that are created in the internal memory of the GM can be automatically transferred via FTP when the files are created. You can specify two file transfer destinations (FTP servers): primary and secondary. If the primary FTP server is down, the file is transferred to the secondary FTP server. If the report template function is in use, report files in Excel format and report files in PDF format that are created in the external storage medium of the GM can be automatically transferred when the files are created.
Data file to transfer
Destination (FTP server) information
Transfer log (FTP log)
FTP client
GM
Data file
FTP server
Primary
Ethernet Secondary
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
3.4.1
Configuring the FTP Client Function
Description Enable the FTP client function Set the files to transfer Set the files that will be transferred automatically. · Set the transfer wait time Set the transfer wait time if you want to delay data transfers to the FTP server. · Set the destinations (primary and secondary) Set the connection destination FTP servers.
For details on the settings, see page 2-156 in section 2.22.2, "Configuring the FTP Client Function".
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-55
3.4 Transferring Data Files from the GM (FTP client function)
Explanation
Files to Transfer via FTP
Data other than Excel report files and PDF report files are automatically transferred
regardless of whether the external storage medium is available.
File Type Display data file Event data file
Report data file
Description Data files are automatically transferred at each file save interval. Files are automatically transferred when the data length of data is recorded. When the file division mode is Separate or Combine, data files are automatically transferred when a report file is closed (or divided). For example, data files are automatically transferred once per month for daily+monthly reports when the file division mode is Combine. Report data files based on report templates (Excel report file, PDF report file) are also automatically transferred when they are created. 1
Alarm summary data file Manual sample data file Setting file at the time of the setting change
For details on Separate and Combine, see page 2-124 in section 2.17.1, "Setting the Report Type, Creation Time, Data Type, Etc.". Files are automatically transferred when alarms are saved.
Files are automatically transferred when the next time manual sample is executed2 and the file is divided. The setting file in the SD memory card is automatically transferred when settings are changed.1, 3
1 Files will not be transferred automatically if the remaining space on the SD card is low or if the SD card is not connected.
2 Refers to an action triggered through communication command (OExecRec) or event action function.
3 Only on models with the advanced security function (/AS option).
Shifting the Transfer Time
There may be cases when data cannot be transferred from the GM to the FTP server due to too many simultaneous connections to the FTP server. An example is when multiple files are created and need to be transferred at the same time from multiple GMs. By shifting the transfer time, you can avoid having too many simultaneous connections to the FTP server. You can shift the transfer time for display data files, event data files, and report files. · Even if a new event that requires an FTP transfer occurs while the GM is waiting to
transfer the data of the previous event, it does not affect the transfer wait time of the previous event. When the transfer shift time passes, all data files of the same type that have been created (all of the files that have not been transferred) are transferred via FTP. The following figure is an example for display data. · To avoid accumulating too many files that have not been transferred, we recommend that you set the transfer wait time shorter than the interval at which events that require FTP transfers occur.
FTP transfer 1
FTP transfer 1 2 3
Display data file 1 Transfer wait time
1
2
3
Transfer wait time
3-56
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
3.4.2
3.4 Transferring Data Files from the GM (FTP client function)
Transfer Operation · Even if you turn the power off during FTP transfer wait time, the elapsed time is recorded. · If you change the FTP transfer time settings during FTP transfer wait time, the data files
that are being held are transferred using the previous setting. Subsequent data files are sent according to the new setting. · If you execute FTP function to Off, or "Initialize all" during a FTP transfer wait time, the elapsed time is cleared.
When There Is a File with the Same Name at the Transfer Destination Under all circumstances, when there is a file with the same name at the transfer destination, it is overwritten.
Operation When the Data Transfer Fails If the GM fails to transfer files to both the primary and secondary FTP servers, the GM aborts the file transfer operation. When the new (next) data file becomes available, the GM transfer the new data file along with the files that the GM failed to transfer (except for alarm summary data files and manual sample data files). Note that because the GM transfers data from its internal memory, if the data that the GM failed to transfer is overwritten, it is lost.
Testing the FTP Transfer
You can check whether files can be sent from the GM to the FTP server using a test file. For the procedure, see "Executing a File Transmission Test on the FTP Server" on page 3-8.
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-57
3.5 Synchronizing the Time (SNTP client function)
The GM time can be synchronized to the time on an SNTP server (time information server on the network). The GM can retrieve time information from a specified SNTP server at specified intervals. When recording is in progress, the time is gradually adjusted.
See page 2-182 in section 2.26.4, "Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time".
SNTP server
Time query
Ethernet GM
3.5.1 3.5.2
SNTP client
Configuring the SNTP Client Function
Description · Enable the SNTP client function · Specify the SNTP server settings · Set the query operation
For setup details, see page 2-162 in section 2.22.5, "Setting the SNTP Client Function".
Adjusting the Clock Manually
Procedure You can adjust the clock manually. The SNTP client must be enabled. For operating instructions, see "Changing the Time Using SNTP" on page 3-7.
3-58
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3.6 Transmitting Time Information from the GM to
1
SNTP Client Devices (SNTP server function)
The GM can operate as an SNTP server.
2
When an SNTP client device on the network queries the GM for time information, the GM
sends the information.
SNTP server GM
3
Operating the GM and Using Network Functions
12:34
Ethernet
4
Query
3.6.1
SNTP client device
Configuring the SNTP Server Function
5
App
Description Enabling the SNTP Server Function
For details on the settings, see page 2-168 in section 2.22.9, "Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)".
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
3-59
Blank
Chapter 4 Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
4.1 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable Other Devices to Read Data from and Write Data to the GM (Modbus server function)
The Modbus function is used by the GM and external Modbus devices to perform communication and data reading and writing. The GM can operate as a Modbus server. The maximum number of simultaneous connections is 4. Other devices (Modbus client devices) can carry out the following operations on the GM. · Read I/O channel and math channel (/MT option) data · Read communication channel (/MC option) data · Write data to communication channels · Start and stop recording, write messages, and perform other operations · Load the recording start/stop condition, message strings, and other types of data
Modbus server
GM
Ethernet Modbus client device
GM internal register
Command
Input register
Read
3XXXXX
Client Read
Read
Hold register
Read
4XXXXX
Write
Write
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
4.1.1 Setting Basic Network Communication Conditions
4.1.2
Description · Obtain the IP address automatically · Set the IP address manually (when automatic IP address assignment is set to Off)
For details on the settings, see page 2-154 in section 2.22.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Configuring the Modbus Server Function
Description Enabling the Modbus Server Function
For details on the settings, see page 2-168 in section 2.22.9, "Setting the Server Functions to Use (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, MODBUS, GENE, DARWIN compatible communication)".
Applying Modbus Connection Limits Set this function to limit the IP addresses that can connect to the GM Modbus server function. You can register up to 10 IP addresses.
For details on the settings, see page 2-167 in section 2.22.8, "Limiting the Connection to the Modbus Server (GM)".
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-1
4.1 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable Other Devices to Read Data from and Write Data to the GM (Modbus server function)
4.1.3
Reading from and Writing to the GM from Other Devices
Other devices (client devices) can transmit commands to the GM to read data from and write data to the GM internal registers. By writing data to the GM internal registers, you can control the GM (such as start recording).
For details on the function codes that the GM supports and the GM registers that client devices can access, see page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
Specifying Register Numbers On client devices, specify the GM registers as follows: · If you are using a commercial SCADA system or something similar, specify the register
number (a number such as 400001; referred to as the "reference number") listed in page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments". · If you are using a custom communication program, specify the "relative number" in relation to the reference number. Derive the relative number in the manner indicated in the examples below.
Example The relative number for input register 300100 is 99, which is the difference between 300100 and 300001. 300100 300001 = 99
The relative number for input register 400011 is 10, which is the difference between 400011 and 400001. 400011 400001 = 10
4-2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.2 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable the GM to Read
1
Data from and Write Data to Other Devices
(Modbus client function)
2
The Modbus function is used by the GM and external Modbus devices to perform
communication and data reading and writing.
The GM can operate as a Modbus client. The maximum number of connectable servers is
16 for the GM10-1 and 32 for the GM10-2. The GM can connect to another device (Modbus server) via Modbus/TCP and read from
3
and write to the device's internal registers. Read data can be handled using communication
channels. Data that can be written are I/O channel data, math channel data, and
communication channel data. Modbus server
4
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
4.2.1 4.2.2
Ethernet
GM Modbus client
Server internal register
Command
Input register
Read
3XXXXX
Read
Hold register
4XXXXX
Write
GM
Read Read Write
Setting Basic Network Communication Conditions
Description · Obtain the IP address automatically · Set the IP address manually (when automatic IP address assignment is set to Off)
For details on the settings, see page 2-154 in section 2.22.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Configuring the Modbus Client Function
Description · Enable the Modbus client function · Set the communication interval · Set the recovery action · Set the keep connection function
For details on the settings, see "Configuring Basic settings" page 2-163 in section 2.22.6, "Configuring the Modbus Client Function (/MC option)".
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-3
4.2 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus client function)
4.2.3 Configuring the Destination Server
4.2.4
Description · Set the server number · Configure the server settings
For details on the settings, see "Configuring Basic settings" page 2-163 in section 2.22.6, "Configuring the Modbus Client Function (/MC option)".
Setting Commands
Description · Set the client command number · Set the command
For details on the settings, see "Configuring Basic settings" page 2-163 in section 2.22.6, "Configuring the Modbus Client Function (/MC option)". For details on the Modbus functions and registers that the GM supports, see page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
Server Register Number
You can specify an input register in the range of 30001 to 39999 or 300001 to 365536. You can specify a hold register in the range of 40001 to 49999 or 400001 to 465536. The register numbers that you can specify vary depending on the type of command. page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments"
Specifying Register Numbers
Specify the register number on the GM by using the "reference number" (such as the
number 40001 written above). For example, for the YOKOGAWA UT35A digital indicating
controller, the D register number corresponds to the reference number as shown in the
following table.
D-Reg. No.
Ref. No.
D2001
42001
For a server that calls the register using a "relative number," add 30001, 300001, 40001,
400001 or a similar number to obtain a reference number.
Register Type
Relative Number Reference Number Expression
Hold register
1004 14567
41005 414568
1004+40001 14567+400001
Input register
0000
30001
0000+30001
4-4
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.2 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus client function)
Examples of Setting Commands
1
The following are command setting examples on the GM when the GM is a Modbus client
device. If the GM is a Modbus master device, substitute "master" for "client" and "slave" for
"server."
Connection example
2
GM (Modbus client)
Device A
Device B
Instrument C
(Modbus server 1) (Modbus server 2) (Modbus server 3)
3
Ethernet
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
Loading into Communication Channels
The GM enters data loaded from the server into communication channels as floating point
4
type data.
Example 1
Load the 16-bit signed integer value assigned to register 30001 of instrument A to C001.
5
Communication channel data
Register of instrument A
C001
30001 16-bit signed integer
Command setting
Setup Item Client command number Command setting
Type Server Data type Register Channel type First-CH Last-CH
Value 1 Read 1 INT16 30001 Communication channel C001 C001
Example 2
Load the 32-bit signed integer value assigned to registers 30003 and 30004 (little endian) of instrument B to C003. Only the smallest register number need be specified in commands.
Communication channel data C003
Register of instrument B
30003 30004
Lower bytes Higher bytes
32-bit signed integer
App Index
Command setting
Setup Item Client command number Command setting
Type Server Data type Register Channel type First-CH Last-CH
Value 2 Read 2 INT32_L 30003 Communication channel C003 C003
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-5
4.2 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus client function)
Example 3
Load the 16-bit signed integer values assigned to registers 30001 and 30002 of instrument B to C001 and C002. Only the smallest register number need be specified in commands.
Communication channel data C001
C002
Register of instrument B 30001 16-bit signed integer 30002 16-bit signed integer
Command setting
Setup Item Client command number Command setting
Type Server Data type Register Channel type First-CH Last-CH
Value 3 Read 2 INT16 30001 Communication channel C001 C002
Example 4
Load the 32-bit floating point values assigned to registers 30005 and 30006 (little endian) of instrument B to C004. Only the smallest register number need be specified in commands.
Communication channel data C004
Register of instrument B
30005 30006
Lower bytes Higher bytes
32-bit floating point
Command setting
Setup Item Client command number Command setting
Type Server Data type Register Channel type First-CH Last-CH
Value 4 Read 2 FLOAT_L 30005 Communication channel C004 C004
Writing Data to a Server Example Write the measured value from I/O channel 0001 to register 40001 of instrument A.
I/O channel 0001
Register of instrument A 40001 16-bit signed integer
Command setting
Setup Item Client command number Command setting
Type Server Data type Register Channel type First-CH Last-CH
Value 5 Write 1 INT16 40001 I/O channel 0001 0001
4-6
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.2 Using Modbus/TCP to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus client function)
Writing Computed Values to a Server
1
Example
Write the computed values from channel A001 to registers 40001 and 40002 of instrument A,
in the order lower 16 bits/higher 16 bits. Only the smallest register number need be specified
in commands.
2
Math channel A001
Register of instrument A
40001 40002
Lower bytes Higher bytes
32-bit signed integer
3
Command setting
Setup Item
Value
Client command number
6
Command setting
Type
Write
4
Server
1
Data type
INT32_L
Register
40001
Channel type Math channel
First-CH
A001
5
Last-CH
A001
4.2.5
Checking the Modbus Operation Status
Procedure For the procedure, see "Checking the Command Status of the Modbus Client and Modbus Master" on page 3-35.
App Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-7
4.3
Using Modbus to Enable Other Devices to Read Data from and Write Data to the GM (Modbus slave function)
The GM can operate as a Modbus slave device. Other devices (Modbus master devices) can carry out the following operations on the GM. · Read I/O channel and math channel (/MT option) data (input register) · Read communication channel (/MC option) data (hold register) · Write communication channel (/MC option) data (hold register) · Start and stop recording, write messages, and perform other operations (using the hold
register) · Load the recording start/stop condition, message strings, and other types of data (using
the hold register)
Modbus master device
4.3.1 4.3.2
Serial communication GM
GM internal register
Command
Input register
Read
3XXXXX
Master Read
Modbus slave
Hold register 4XXXXX
Read Write
Read Write
Setting Serial Communication Conditions
Description · Configure the receiver function · Set data transfer conditions
For details on the settings, see page 2-172 in section 2.23.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Reading from and Writing to the GM from Other Devices
Other devices (master devices) can transmit commands to the GM to read data from and write data to the GM. By writing data to the GM internal registers, you can control the GM (such as start recording).
For details on the function codes that the GM supports and the GM registers that master devices can access, see page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
4-8
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.4
4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3
Using Modbus to Enable the GM to Read Data from and Write Data to Other Devices (Modbus master function)
The GM can operate as a Modbus master device. The GM can connect to another device (Modbus slave device) via Modbus and read from and write to the device's internal registers. Read data can be handled using communication channels. Data that can be written are I/O channel data, math channel data, and communication channel data.
Modbus master GM
Serial communication Server internal register
Command
Input register
Read
3XXXXX
Read
Hold register
4XXXXX
Write
Modbus slave device
GM Read Read Write
Setting Serial Communication Conditions
Description · Configure the receiver function · Set data transfer conditions
For details on the settings, see page 2-172 in section 2.23.1, "Setting Basic Communication Conditions".
Configuring the Modbus Master Function
Description · Enable the master function · Set communication conditions · Set the recovery action
For details on the settings, see page 2-174 in section 2.23.2, "Enabling or Disabling the Modbus Master Function (/MC option) and Setting Communication Conditions". For details on the Modbus functions and registers that the GM supports, see page 4-10 in section 4.5, "Modbus Function and Register Assignments".
Setting Commands
Description · Set the master command number · Set the command
For details on the settings, see page 2-175 in section 2.23.3, "Setting Modbus Master Transmission Commands". For command setting examples, see page 4-4 in section 4.2.4, "Setting Commands".
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-9
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
4.5.1
Modbus Client/Master Function
Function
The GM supports the following functions.
The server (slave) must support these functions.
Function Code Function
Operation
1
Read the coil status
The GM reads the coil status of the server (slave) device.
(0xxxx)
2
Read the input relay
The GM reads the input relay status of the server (slave)
status (1xxxx, 1xxxxx) device.
3
Read the hold register The GM reads the hold register of the server (slave) into
(4XXXX, 4XXXXX)
a communication channel.
4
Read the input register The GM reads the input register of the server (slave) into
(3XXXX, 3XXXXX)
a communication channel.
5
Change the single coil The GM changes the single coil status of the server
status
(slave) device (off/on).
(0xxxx)
6
Write to a single hold
The GM writes to a single hold register of the server
register (4xxxx, 4xxxx) (slave).
15
Change the coil status The GM changes the coil status of the server (slave)
(0xxxx)
device (off/on).
16
Write to the hold register The GM writes the I/O channel data, math channel data,
(4XXXX, 4XXXXX)
or communication channel data to the hold register of the
server (slave).
Command
Command type: Read, Write
Number of commands: GM10-1: Set up to 100 commands.
GM10-2: Set up to 200 commands.
Data type: See the table below.
Symbol
Description
INT16
16-bit signed integer
UINT16
16-bit unsigned integer
INT32_B
32-bit signed integer (big endian)
INT32_L UINT32_B
32-bit signed integer (little endian) 32-bit unsigned integer (big endian)
UINT32_L
32-bit unsigned integer (little endian)
FLOAT_B
32-bit floating point (big endian)
FLOAT_L BIT
32-bit floating point (little endian) Bit
Special Value Output
When a register is read or when its content is exported through the Modbus function, the
GM may output the following special values.
Channel status
Integer
Data type Floating
+Over, +Burnout
Maximum expressible value +
Over, Burnout
Minimum expressible value
Example: Channel status is "Over"
Data type Int16 Int32 Float
Output value 32768 (0x8000) 2147483648 (0x80000000) (0xff800000)
4-10
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Loading into Communication Channels
· Read values from the server (slave) register into the communication channels of the GM. · The communication channel function is an option (/MC).
GM
Server (slave)
Command Channel type: Comm. channel
Register
Data Type
Type Read
Number: C001 to C300 (GM10-1) C001 to C500 (GM10-2)
Type: INT 16, UINT 16, INT 32_B, INT 32_L, UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
Read
1 to 9999 10001 to 19999 100001 to 165535 30001 to 39999 300001 to 365536
INT 16, UINT 16, INT 32_B, INT 32_L, UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L, FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
40001 to 49999
400001 to 465536
Writing I/O Channel Data · Write I/O channel data to the server (slave) registers.
GM
Command Channel type: I/O channel Type Number: 0001 to 6550
Write
Type: INT 16, UINT 16,
Write
INT 32_B, INT 32_L,
UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
Server (slave)
Register
Data Type
1 to 9999
INT 16, UINT 16,
40001 to 49999 INT 32_B, INT 32_L,
400001 to 465536 UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
Writing Math Channel Data
· The math function is an option (/MT). · Write math channel data to the server (slave) registers.
GM
Command Channel type: Math channel
Type Number: A001 to A100 (GM10-1)
A001 to A200 (GM10-2)
Type: INT 16, UINT 16,
Write
INT 32_B, INT 32_L,
UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
Server (slave)
Register
Data Type
1 to 9999
INT 16, UINT 16,
40001 to 49999 INT 32_B, INT 32_L, Write 400001 to 465536 UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
Writing Communication Channel Data · Write GM communication channel data to the server (slave) registers.
GM
Server (slave)
Command Data type: Comm channel data
Register
Data Type
Type Write
Number: C001 to C300 (GM10-1) C001 to C500 (GM10-2)
Type: INT 16, UINT 16, INT 32_B, INT 32_L, UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
Write
1 to 9999
INT 16, UINT 16,
40001 to 49999 INT 32_B, INT 32_L,
400001 to 465536 UINT 32_B, UINT 32_L,
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L, BIT
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-11
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
4.5.2
Modbus Server/Slave Function
Function The GM supports the following functions.
Function Code 1 2 3 4 5
6 8* 15 16
Function
Operation
Read the coil status
The client (master) device reads the coil status of the GM.
(0xxxx)
Read the input relay The client (master) device reads the input relay status of
status (1xxxx, 1xxxxx) the GM.
Read the hold register The client (master) device reads the GM data.
(4XXXX, 4XXXXX)
Read the input register The client (master) device reads the I/O, math, alarm, time
(3XXXX, 3XXXXX)
data from the GM.
Change the single coil The client (master) device changes the single coil status
status
(off/on) of the GM.
(0xxxx)
Write to a single hold The client (master) device writes to a single hold register of
register (4xxxx, 4xxxx) the GM.
Loop-back test
The master device performs a GM loopback test.
Change the coil status The client (master) device changes the coil status (off/on)
(0xxxx)
of the GM.
Write to the hold register The client (master) device writes to the GM communication
(4XXXX, 4XXXXX)
channels.
* Loopback test is only for serial communication.
4.5.3
Register Assignments (Shared with the Modbus server/slave function)
Input register
Unit Main unit
Type
GM Register
Number
Data Type
I/O channel
I/O data
300001 to 301000 32-bit signed integer
301001 to 302000 32-bit floating point
302001 to 302500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 302501 to 303000 16-bit signed integer
I/O channel
I/O data
304001 to 304200 32-bit signed integer
(continuous area)
304201 to 304400 32-bit floating point
304401 to 304500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 304501 to 304600 16-bit signed integer
Sub unit
Math channel (A001 to A100)
Math channel (A101 to A200)
GM status Unit 1 I/O channel
Unit 2 I/O channel
Unit 3 I/O channel
Unit 4 I/O channel
Math data
305001 to 305200
305201 to 305400
305401 to 305500
Status information 305501 to 305600
Math data
306001 to 306200
306201 to 306400
306401 to 306500
Status information 306501 to 306600
308001 to 308007
I/O data
310001 to 311000
311001 to 312000
312001 to 312500
Status information 312501 to 313000
I/O data
315001 to 316000
316001 to 317000
317001 to 317500
Status information 317501 to 318000
I/O data
320001 to 321000
321001 to 322000
322001 to 322500
Status information 322501 to 323500
I/O data
325001 to 326000
326001 to 327000
327001 to 327500
Status information 327501 to 328000
32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer
Continued on next page
4-12
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit 5 I/O channel
Unit 6 I/O channel
Type
GM Register
Number
Data Type
I/O data
330001 to 331000 32-bit signed integer
331001 to 332000 32-bit floating point
332001 to 332500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 332500 to 333000 16-bit signed integer
I/O data
335001 to 336000 32-bit signed integer
336001 to 337000 32-bit floating point
337001 to 337500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 337501 to 338000 16-bit signed integer
Read
Client/Master device
Hold register
Unit Main unit
Sub unit
Channel properties
Type
GM Register
Number
Data Type
I/O channel
I/O data
400001 to 401000 32-bit signed integer
401001 to 402000 32-bit floating point
402001 to 402500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 402501 to 403000 16-bit signed integer
I/O channel
I/O data
404001 to 404200 32-bit signed integer
(continuous area)
404201 to 404400 32-bit floating point
404401 to 404500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 404501 to 404600 16-bit signed integer
Communication Communication 405001 to 406000 32-bit signed integer
channel
data
406001 to 407000 32-bit floating point
407001 to 407500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 407501 to 408000 16-bit signed integer
Internal switch
408001 to 408100 16-bit signed integer
GM operation setting
409001 to 410000 16-bit signed integer
Unit 1
I/O data
410001 to 411000 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel
411001 to 412000 32-bit floating point
412001 to 412500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 412501 to 413000 16-bit signed integer
Unit 2
I/O data
415001 to 416000 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel
416001 to 417000 32-bit floating point
417001 to 417500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 417501 to 418000 16-bit signed integer
Unit 3
I/O data
420001 to 421000 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel
421001 to 422000 32-bit floating point
422001 to 422500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 422501 to 423000 16-bit signed integer
Unit 4
I/O data
425001 to 426000 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel
426001 to 427000 32-bit floating point
427001 to 427500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 427501 to 428000 16-bit signed integer
Unit 5
I/O data
430001 to 431000 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel
431001 to 432000 32-bit floating point
432001 to 432500 16-bit signed integer
Status information 432501 to 433000 16-bit signed integer
Unit 6
I/O data
435001 to 436000 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel
436001 to 437000 32-bit floating point
437001 to 437500 16-bit signed integer
I/O data
437501 to 438000 16-bit signed integer
Channel
Channel
440001 to 465000 16-bit signed integer
information
properties
Write
Read
Client/Master device
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-13
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Coil
Only channels on the main unit can be accessed. Channel information in each register
corresponds to a channel in order from the first specified register. With I/O channels, 50
registers are assigned per module.
Type
GM Register
I/O channel
I/O data
Number 00001 to 00500
Data Type Bit string
Status information
00501 to 01000
Communication channel Internal switch
Communication data Status information
001001 to 01500 01501 to 02000 02001 to 02100
Write
Read
Client/Master device
Input Relay
Only channels on the main unit can be accessed. Channel information in each register
corresponds to a channel in order from the first specified register. With I/O channels, 50
registers are assigned per module.
Type
GM Register
I/O channel
I/O data Status information
Number 100001 to 100500 100501 to 101000
Data Type Bit string
Math channel
Math data Status information
101001 to 101100 101501 to 101600
Read
Client/Master device
4-14
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5.4
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Input Registers (Shared with the Modbus server/slave function)
Common Items
· The client (master) device can only read the input registers.
· Decimal place and unit are not included. Specify them on the client (master) device.
· Due to the different number of channels between modules, unavailable channel numbers
will exist. This will not cause a register read error, so you can read the data continuously.
· The register values for unavailable channel numbers are set to 0, and the status
information is set to SKIP.
· Channel range
Channel type I/O channel Math channel
GM10 0001 to 6950 A001 to A100
GM10-2 0001 to 6950 A001 to A200
· If Log scale calculation (/LG option) is performed on an AI channel, data of I/O channels set to 32-bit signed integer or 16-bit signed integer will be an integer with two- or threedigit mantissa.
I/O Channel Data
· 32-bit signed integer
Unit Main unit
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data 300001
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data 300002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0050 data 300099
Higher bytes of the channel 0050 data 300100
Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data 300101
Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data 300102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0150 data 300199
Higher bytes of the channel 0150 data 300200
Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data 300201
Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data 300202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0250 data 300299
Higher bytes of the channel 0250 data 300300
Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data 300301
Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data 300302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0350 data 300399
Higher bytes of the channel 0350 data 300400
Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data 300401
Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data 300402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0450 data 300499
Higher bytes of the channel 0450 data 300500
Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data 300501
Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data 300502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0550 data 300599
Higher bytes of the channel 0550 data 300600
Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data 300601
Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data 300602
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0650 data 300699
Higher bytes of the channel 0650 data 300700
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-15
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Main unit Sub unit 1
Sub unit 2
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data 300701
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data 300702
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0750 data 300799
Higher bytes of the channel 0750 data 300800
Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data 300801
Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data 300802
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0850 data 300899
Higher bytes of the channel 0850 data 300900
Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data 300901
Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data 300902
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0950 data 300999
Higher bytes of the channel 0950 data 301000
Lower bytes of the channel 1001 data 310001
Higher bytes of the channel 1001 data 310002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1050 data 310099
Higher bytes of the channel 1050 data 310100
Lower bytes of the channel 1101 data 310101
Higher bytes of the channel 1101 data 310102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1150 data 310199
Higher bytes of the channel 1150 data 310200
Lower bytes of the channel 1201 data 310201
Higher bytes of the channel 1201 data 310202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1250 data 310299
Higher bytes of the channel 1250 data 310300
Lower bytes of the channel 1301 data 310301
Higher bytes of the channel 1301 data 310302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1350 data 310399
Higher bytes of the channel 1350 data 310400
Lower bytes of the channel 1401 data 310401
Higher bytes of the channel 1401 data 310402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1450 data 310499
Higher bytes of the channel 1450 data 310500
Lower bytes of the channel 1501 data 310501
Higher bytes of the channel 1501 data 310502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1550 data 310599
Higher bytes of the channel 1550 data 310600
Lower bytes of the channel 2001 data 315001
Higher bytes of the channel 2001 data 315002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2050 data 315099
Higher bytes of the channel 2050 data 315100
Lower bytes of the channel 2101 data 315101
Higher bytes of the channel 2101 data 315102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2150 data 315199
Higher bytes of the channel 2150 data 315200
Continued on next page
4-16
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 2 Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 2201 data 315201
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 2201 data 315202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2250 data 315299
Higher bytes of the channel 2250 data 315300
Lower bytes of the channel 2301 data 315301
Higher bytes of the channel 2301 data 315302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2350 data 315399
Higher bytes of the channel 2350 data 315400
Lower bytes of the channel 2401 data 315401
Higher bytes of the channel 2401 data 315402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2450 data 315499
Higher bytes of the channel 2450 data 315500
Lower bytes of the channel 2501 data 315501
Higher bytes of the channel 2501 data 315502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2550 data 315599
Higher bytes of the channel 2550 data 315600
Lower bytes of the channel 3001 data 320001
Higher bytes of the channel 3001 data 320002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3050 data 320099
Higher bytes of the channel 3050 data 320100
Lower bytes of the channel 3101 data 320101
Higher bytes of the channel 3101 data 320102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3150 data 320199
Higher bytes of the channel 3150 data 320200
Lower bytes of the channel 3201 data 320201
Higher bytes of the channel 3201 data 320202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3250 data 320299
Higher bytes of the channel 3250 data 320300
Lower bytes of the channel 3301 data 320301
Higher bytes of the channel 3301 data 320302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3350 data 320399
Higher bytes of the channel 3350 data 320400
Lower bytes of the channel 3401 data 320401
Higher bytes of the channel 3401 data 320402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3450 data 320499
Higher bytes of the channel 3450 data 320500
Lower bytes of the channel 3501 data 320501
Higher bytes of the channel 3501 data 320502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3550 data 320599
Higher bytes of the channel 3550 data 320600
Lower bytes of the channel 4001 data 325001
Higher bytes of the channel 4001 data 325002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4050 data 325099
Higher bytes of the channel 4050 data 325100
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-17
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 4
Sub unit 5
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 4101 data 325101
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 4101 data 325102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4150 data 325199
Higher bytes of the channel 4150 data 325200
Lower bytes of the channel 4201 data 325201
Higher bytes of the channel 4201 data 325202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4250 data 325299
Higher bytes of the channel 4250 data 325300
Lower bytes of the channel 4301 data 325301
Higher bytes of the channel 4301 data 325302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4350 data 325399
Higher bytes of the channel 4350 data 325400
Lower bytes of the channel 4401 data 325401
Higher bytes of the channel 4401 data 325402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4450 data 325499
Higher bytes of the channel 4450 data 325500
Lower bytes of the channel 4501 data 325201
Higher bytes of the channel 4501 data 325502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4550 data 325599
Higher bytes of the channel 4550 data 325600
Lower bytes of the channel 5001 data 330001
Higher bytes of the channel 5001 data 330002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5050 data 330099
Higher bytes of the channel 5050 data 330100
Lower bytes of the channel 5101 data 330101
Higher bytes of the channel 5101 data 330102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5150 data 330199
Higher bytes of the channel 5150 data 330200
Lower bytes of the channel 5201 data 330201
Higher bytes of the channel 5201 data 330202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5250 data 330299
Higher bytes of the channel 5250 data 330300
Lower bytes of the channel 5301 data 330301
Higher bytes of the channel 5301 data 330302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5350 data 330399
Higher bytes of the channel 5350 data 330400
Lower bytes of the channel 5401 data 330401
Higher bytes of the channel 5401 data 330402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5450 data 330499
Higher bytes of the channel 5450 data 330500
Lower bytes of the channel 5501 data 330501
Higher bytes of the channel 5501 data 330502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5550 data 330599
Higher bytes of the channel 5550 data 330600
Continued on next page
4-18
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 6
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 6001 data 335001
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 6001 data 335002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6050 data 335099
Higher bytes of the channel 6050 data 335100
Lower bytes of the channel 6101 data 335101
Higher bytes of the channel 6101 data 335102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6150 data 335199
Higher bytes of the channel 6150 data 335200
Lower bytes of the channel 6201 data 335201
Higher bytes of the channel 6201 data 335202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6250 data 335299
Higher bytes of the channel 6250 data 335300
Lower bytes of the channel 6301 data 335301
Higher bytes of the channel 6301 data 335302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6350 data 335399
Higher bytes of the channel 6350 data 335400
Lower bytes of the channel 6401 data 335401
Higher bytes of the channel 6401 data 335402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6450 data 335499
Higher bytes of the channel 6450 data 335500
Lower bytes of the channel 6501 data 335501
Higher bytes of the channel 6501 data 335502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6550 data 335599
Higher bytes of the channel 6550 data 335600
· Register Channel 0001 example Register 300001
Register 300002
Higher bytes
Lower bytes Channel 0001 data
· There is no decimal place information.
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-19
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
· 32-bit floating point
Unit Main unit
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data 301001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data 301002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0050 data 301099
Higher bytes of the channel 0050 data 301100
Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data 301101
Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data 301102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0150 data 301199
Higher bytes of the channel 0150 data 301200
Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data 301201
Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data 301202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0250 data 301299
Higher bytes of the channel 0250 data 301300
Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data 301301
Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data 301302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0350 data 301399
Higher bytes of the channel 0350 data 301400
Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data 301401
Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data 301402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0450 data 301499
Higher bytes of the channel 0450 data 301500
Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data 301501
Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data 301502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0550 data 301599
Higher bytes of the channel 0550 data 301600
Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data 301601
Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data 301602
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0650 data 301699
Higher bytes of the channel 0650 data 301700
Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data 301701
Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data 301702
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0750 data 301799
Higher bytes of the channel 0750 data 301800
Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data 301801
Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data 301802
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0850 data 301899
Higher bytes of the channel 0850 data 301900
Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data 301901
Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data 301902
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0950 data 301999
Higher bytes of the channel 0950 data 302000
Continued on next page
4-20
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 1
Sub unit 2
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 1001 data 311001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 1001 data 311002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1050 data 311099
Higher bytes of the channel 1050 data 311100
Lower bytes of the channel 1101 data 311101
Higher bytes of the channel 1101 data 311102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1150 data 311199
Higher bytes of the channel 1150 data 311200
Lower bytes of the channel 1201 data 311201
Higher bytes of the channel 1201 data 311202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1250 data 311299
Higher bytes of the channel 1250 data 311300
Lower bytes of the channel 1301 data 311301
Higher bytes of the channel 1301 data 311302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1350 data 311399
Higher bytes of the channel 1350 data 311400
Lower bytes of the channel 1401 data 311401
Higher bytes of the channel 1401 data 311402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1450 data 311499
Higher bytes of the channel 1450 data 311500
Lower bytes of the channel 1501 data 311501
Higher bytes of the channel 1501 data 311502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1550 data 311599
Higher bytes of the channel 1550 data 311600
Lower bytes of the channel 2001 data 316001
Higher bytes of the channel 2001 data 316002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2050 data 316099
Higher bytes of the channel 2050 data 316100
Lower bytes of the channel 2101 data 316101
Higher bytes of the channel 2101 data 316102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2150 data 316199
Higher bytes of the channel 2150 data 316200
Lower bytes of the channel 2201 data 316201
Higher bytes of the channel 2201 data 316202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2250 data 316299
Higher bytes of the channel 2250 data 316300
Lower bytes of the channel 2301 data 316301
Higher bytes of the channel 2301 data 316302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2350 data 316399
Higher bytes of the channel 2350 data 316400
Lower bytes of the channel 2401 data 316401
Higher bytes of the channel 2401 data 316402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2450 data 316499
Higher bytes of the channel 2450 data 316500
Lower bytes of the channel 2501 data 316501
Higher bytes of the channel 2501 data 316502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2550 data 316599
Higher bytes of the channel 2550 data 316600
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-21
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 3001 data 321001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 3001 data 321002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3050 data 321099
Higher bytes of the channel 3050 data 321100
Lower bytes of the channel 3101 data 321101
Higher bytes of the channel 3101 data 321102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3150 data 321199
Higher bytes of the channel 3150 data 321200
Lower bytes of the channel 3201 data 321201
Higher bytes of the channel 3201 data 321202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3250 data 321299
Higher bytes of the channel 3250 data 321300
Lower bytes of the channel 3301 data 321301
Higher bytes of the channel 3301 data 321302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3350 data 321399
Higher bytes of the channel 3350 data 321400
Lower bytes of the channel 3401 data 321401
Higher bytes of the channel 3401 data 321402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3450 data 321499
Higher bytes of the channel 3450 data 321500
Lower bytes of the channel 3501 data 321501
Higher bytes of the channel 3501 data 321502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3550 data 321599
Higher bytes of the channel 3550 data 321600
Lower bytes of the channel 4001 data 326001
Higher bytes of the channel 4001 data 326002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4050 data 326099
Higher bytes of the channel 4050 data 326100
Lower bytes of the channel 4101 data 326101
Higher bytes of the channel 4101 data 326102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4150 data 326199
Higher bytes of the channel 4150 data 326200
Lower bytes of the channel 4201 data 326201
Higher bytes of the channel 4201 data 326202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4250 data 326299
Higher bytes of the channel 4250 data 326300
Lower bytes of the channel 4301 data 326301
Higher bytes of the channel 4301 data 326302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4350 data 326399
Higher bytes of the channel 4350 data 326400
Lower bytes of the channel 4401 data 326401
Higher bytes of the channel 4401 data 326402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4450 data 326499
Higher bytes of the channel 4450 data 326500
Lower bytes of the channel 4501 data 326501
Higher bytes of the channel 4501 data 326502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4550 data 326599
Higher bytes of the channel 4550 data 326600
Continued on next page
4-22
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Input register Data type
Lower bytes of the channel 5001 data 331001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 5001 data 331002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5050 data 331099
Higher bytes of the channel 5050 data 331100
Lower bytes of the channel 5101 data 331101
Higher bytes of the channel 5101 data 331102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5150 data 331199
Higher bytes of the channel 5150 data 331200
Lower bytes of the channel 5201 data 331201
Higher bytes of the channel 5201 data 331202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5250 data 331299
Higher bytes of the channel 5250 data 331300
Lower bytes of the channel 5301 data 331301
Higher bytes of the channel 5301 data 331302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5350 data 331399
Higher bytes of the channel 5350 data 331400
Lower bytes of the channel 5401 data 331401
Higher bytes of the channel 5401 data 331402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5450 data 331499
Higher bytes of the channel 5450 data 331500
Lower bytes of the channel 5501 data 331501
Higher bytes of the channel 5501 data 331502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5550 data 331599
Higher bytes of the channel 5550 data 331600
Lower bytes of the channel 6001 data 336001
Higher bytes of the channel 6001 data 336002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6050 data 336099
Higher bytes of the channel 6050 data 336100
Lower bytes of the channel 6101 data 336101
Higher bytes of the channel 6101 data 336102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6150 data 336199
Higher bytes of the channel 6150 data 336200
Lower bytes of the channel 6201 data 336201
Higher bytes of the channel 6201 data 336202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6250 data 336299
Higher bytes of the channel 6250 data 336300
Lower bytes of the channel 6301 data 336301
Higher bytes of the channel 6301 data 336302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6350 data 336399
Higher bytes of the channel 6350 data 336400
Lower bytes of the channel 6401 data 336401
Higher bytes of the channel 6401 data 336402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6450 data 336499
Higher bytes of the channel 6450 data 336500
Lower bytes of the channel 6501 data 336501
Higher bytes of the channel 6501 data 336502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6550 data 336599
Higher bytes of the channel 6550 data 336600
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-23
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
· 16-bit signed integer
Unit Main unit
Sub unit 1 Sub unit 2
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 data |
Channel 0050 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0150 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0250 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0350 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0450 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0550 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0750 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0850 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0950 data Channel 1001 data
| Channel 1050 data Channel 1101 data
| Channel 1150 data Channel 1201 data
| Channel 1250 data Channel 1301 data
| Channel 1350 data Channel 1401 data
| Channel 1450 data Channel 1501 data
| Channel 1550 data Channel 2001 data
| Channel 2050 data Channel 2101 data
| Channel 2150 data Channel 2201 data
| Channel 2250 data
Input register Data type
302001
16-bit signed integer
|
302050
302051
|
302100
302101
|
302150
302151
|
302200
302201
|
302250
302251
|
302300
302301
|
302350
302351
|
302400
302401
|
302450
302451
|
302500
312001
|
312050
312051
|
312100
312101
|
312150
312151
|
312200
312201
|
312250
312251
|
312300
317001
|
317050
317051
|
317100
317101
|
317150
Continued on next page
4-24
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 2 Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
Sub unit 5
I/O channel data
Channel 2301 data |
Channel 2350 data Channel 2401 data
| Channel 2450 data Channel 2501 data
| Channel 2550 data Channel 3001 data
| Channel 3050 data Channel 3101 data
| Channel 3150 data Channel 3201 data
| Channel 3250 data Channel 3301 data
| Channel 3350 data Channel 3401 data
| Channel 3450 data Channel 3501 data
| Channel 3550 data Channel 4001 data
| Channel 4050 data Channel 4101 data
| Channel 4150 data Channel 4201 data
| Channel 4250 data Channel 4301 data
| Channel 4350 data Channel 4401 data
| Channel 4450 data Channel 4501 data
| Channel 4550 data Channel 5001 data
| Channel 5050 data Channel 5101 data
| Channel 5150 data Channel 5201 data
| Channel 5250 data Channel 5301 data
| Channel 5350 data Channel 5401 data
| Channel 5450 data
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Input register Data type
317151
16-bit signed integer
|
317200
317201
|
317250
317251
|
317300
322001
|
322050
322051
|
322100
322101
|
322150
322151
|
322200
322201
|
322250
322251
|
322300
327001
|
327050
327051
|
327100
327101
|
327150
327151
|
327200
327201
|
327250
327251
|
327300
332001
|
332050
332051
|
332100
332101
|
332150
332151
|
332200
332201
|
332250
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-25
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
I/O channel data
Channel 5501 data |
Channel 5550 data Channel 6001 data
| Channel 6050 data Channel 6101 data
| Channel 6150 data Channel 6201 data
| Channel 6250 data Channel 6301 data
| Channel 6350 data Channel 6401 data
| Channel 6450 data Channel 6501 data
| Channel 6550 data
Input register Data type
332251
16-bit signed integer
|
332300
337001
|
337050
337051
|
337100
337101
|
337150
337151
|
337200
337201
|
337250
337251
|
337300
4-26
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O Channel Data Status Information
Unit Main unit
Sub unit 1
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 status information |
Channel 0050 status information Channel 0101 status information
| Channel 0150 status information Channel 0201 status information
| Channel 0250 status information Channel 0301 status information
| Channel 0350 status information Channel 0401 status information
| Channel 0450 status information Channel 0501 status information
| Channel 0550 status information Channel 0601 status information
| Channel 0650 status information Channel 0701 status information
| Channel 0750 status information Channel 0801 status information
| Channel 0850 status information Channel 0901 status information
| Channel 0950 status information Channel 1001 status information
| Channel 1050 status information Channel 1101 status information
| Channel 1150 status information Channel 1201 status information
| Channel 1250 status information Channel 1301 status information
| Channel 1350 status information Channel 1401 status information
| Channel 1450 status information Channel 1501 status information
| Channel 1550 status information
Input register Data type
302501
16-bit signed integer
|
302550
302551
|
302600
302601
|
302650
302651
|
302700
302701
|
302750
302751
|
302800
302801
|
302850
302851
|
302900
302901
|
302950
302951
|
303000
312501
|
312550
312551
|
312600
312601
|
312650
312651
|
312700
312701
|
312750
312751
|
312800
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-27
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 2
Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
I/O channel data
Channel 2001 status information |
Channel 2050 status information Channel 2101 status information
| Channel 2150 status information Channel 2201 status information
| Channel 2250 status information Channel 2301 status information
| Channel 2350 status information Channel 2401 status information
| Channel 2450 status information Channel 2501 status information
| Channel 2550 status information Channel 3001 status information
| Channel 3050 status information Channel 3101 status information
| Channel 3150 status information Channel 3201 status information
| Channel 3250 status information Channel 3301 status information
| Channel 3350 status information Channel 3401 status information
| Channel 3450 status information Channel 3501 status information
| Channel 3550 status information Channel 4001 status information
| Channel 4050 status information Channel 4101 status information
| Channel 4150 status information Channel 4201 status information
| Channel 4250 status information Channel 4301 status information
| Channel 4350 status information Channel 4401 status information
| Channel 4450 status information Channel 4501 status information
| Channel 4550 status information
Input register Data type
317501
16-bit signed integer
|
317550
317551
|
317600
317601
|
317650
317651
|
317700
317701
|
317750
317751
|
317800
322501
|
322550
322551
|
322600
322601
322650 322651
| 322700 322701
| 322750 322751
| 322800 327501
| 327550 327551
| 327600 327601
| 327650 327651
| 327700 327701
| 327750 327751
| 327800
Continued on next page
4-28
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
I/O channel data
Channel 5001 status information |
Channel 5050 status information Channel 5101 status information
| Channel 5150 status information Channel 5201 status information
| Channel 5250 status information Channel 5301 status information
| Channel 5350 status information Channel 5401 status information
| Channel 5450 status information Channel 5501 status information
| Channel 5550 status information Channel 6001 status information
| Channel 6050 status information Channel 6101 status information
| Channel 6150 status information Channel 6201 status information
| Channel 6250 status information Channel 6301 status information
| Channel 6350 status information Channel 6401 status information
| Channel 6450 status information Channel 6501 status information
| Channel 6550 status information
· There is no decimal place information.
2 bytes
Higher Lower bytes bytes
Status information Reserved area Alarm list
0
5 bits
0 0 0 0 4 bits
Error code
A/D calibration value error RJC error
Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1
Input register Data type
332501
16-bit signed integer
|
332550
332551
|
332600
332601
|
332650
332651
|
332700
332701
|
332750
332751
|
332800
337501
|
337550
337551
|
337600
337601
|
337650
337651
|
337700
337701
|
337750
337751
|
337800
Error code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 17
Meaning No error Skip +Over Over +Burnout Burnout A/D error Invalid data Computation error Communication error
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-29
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Register Configuration of PID Control Module Channels
The following table shows the register configuration when a PID control module is installed
in unit 0 (main unit) slot 0.
* If the PID module is installed in unit 1 slot 3, channel numbers 1301 to 1350 will be
allocated.
Channel number
Description
Notes
0001
PV of loop 1
PID computation data
0002
SP of loop 1
0003
OUT of loop 1
0004 0005
PV of loop 2 SP of loop 2
0006
OUT of loop 2
0007
Input 1 data
Physical channel data
0008 0009
Input 2 data Output 1 data
0010
Output 2 data
0011
DI1 data
0012 0013
DI2 data DI3 data
0014
DI4 data
0015
DI5 data
0016 0017
DI6 data DI7 data
0018
DI8 data
0019
DO1 data
0020 0021 0022
DO2 data DO3 data DO4 data
0023
DO5 data
0024
DO6 data
0025 0026
DO7 data DO8 data
0027
|
0034 0035
Alarms 1 to 4 of loop 1
Lower 4 bits
0036
Alarms 1 to 4 of loop 2
Lower 4 bits
0037
Auto/manual/cascade switching of loop 1 1: Auto
2: Manual
3: Cascade
0038 0039
Auto/manual/cascade switching of loop 2 Run/stop switching of loop 1
1: Auto 2: Manual 3: Cascade 1: Run 2: Stop
0040
Run/stop switching of loop 2
1: Run
2: Stop
0041
Remote/local switching of loop 1
1: Local
2: Remote
0042 0043
Remote/local switching of loop 2
Target setpoint number (SP number) selection of loop 1
1: Local 2: Remote 1 to 8
0044
Target setpoint number (SP number)
1 to 8
selection of loop 2
0045
PID number selection of loop 1
Read only
0046 0047
PID number selection of loop 2 Auto-tuning status of loop 1
Read only Read only
0048
Auto-tuning status of loop 2
Read only
0049
Alarm ACK of loop 1
1: Alarm ACK
0 when read
0050
1: Alarm ACK 0 when read
4-30
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
PID Control Module Status Information
The following status information of each module loop is output to channels 35 to 50.
Item Control alarm information
Description Alarms 1 to 4 (lower 4 bits)
Auto/manual/cascade switching
1: Auto, 2: Manual, 3: Cascade
Run/stop status Remote/local switching
1: Run, 2: Stop 1: Local, 2: Remote
Target setpoint number (SP number) selection 1 to 8
PID number selection
1 to 8, 9 for the reference PID
Auto-tuning status Alarm ACK
1 to 8 for when auto-tuning is in progress 9 for the reference PID 0 when stopped 1: Alarm ACK, 0 when read
2 bytes
Higher Lower bytes bytes
Status information
Alarm list
0
5 bits
8 bits
Error code
A/D calibration value error
Level 8 Level 7
Level 4 Level 3
RJC error
Level 6 Level 2
Level 5 Level 1
Error code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 17
Meaning No error Skip +Over Over +Burnout Burnout A/D error Invalid data Computation error Communication error
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-31
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Math Channel Data and Status Information
Data
Lower bytes of the computed data of channel A001 Higher bytes of the computed data of channel A001
| Lower bytes of the computed data of channel A100 Higher bytes of the computed data of channel A100 Lower bytes of the computed data of channel A101 Higher bytes of the computed data of channel A101
| Lower bytes of the computed data of channel A200 Higher bytes of the computed data of channel A200 · Register configuration of computed data
Register 305001
305002
| 305199
305200
306001
306002
| 306199
306200
Channel A001 example Register 305001
Register 305002
Data Type 32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes
Lower bytes
Channel A001 computed data
· There is no decimal place information.
Lower bytes of the computed data of channel
305201
A001
Higher bytes of the computed data of channel 305202
A001
|
|
Lower bytes of the computed data of channel
305399
A100
Higher bytes of the computed data of channel 305400
A100
Lower bytes of the computed data of channel
306201
A101
Higher bytes of the computed data of channel 306202
A101
|
|
Lower bytes of the computed data of channel
306399
A200
Higher bytes of the computed data of channel 306400
A200
· There is no decimal place information.
Channel A001 computed data
305401
|
|
Channel A100 computed data
305500
Channel A101 computed data
306401
|
|
Channel A200 computed data
306500
· There is no decimal place information.
Channel A001 status information
305501
|
|
Channel A100 status information
305600
Channel A101 computed data
306501
|
|
Channel A200 computed data
306600
· Status register configuration
This is the same as that of the I/O channel data status information.
32-bit floating point
16-bit signed integer 16-bit signed integer
4-32
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Continuous Channel Data Area
The GM reserves up to 50 channels of register area per module. For example, reading 100 channels of data from 10 analog input modules through normal input registers would be inefficient because there would be a lot of empty registers. The "continuous channel data area" is a special area that enables continuous reading by limiting the number of channels of each module to 10. It is for I/O channels installed in the GM main unit.
I/O Channel Data
· 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel data
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0010 data Higher bytes of the channel 0010 data Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data
Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data |
Lower bytes of the channel 0110 data Higher bytes of the channel 0110 data Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0210 data Higher bytes of the channel 0210 data Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0310 data Higher bytes of the channel 0310 data Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0410 data Higher bytes of the channel 0410 data Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0510 data Higher bytes of the channel 0510 data Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data
Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data |
Lower bytes of the channel 0610 data Higher bytes of the channel 0610 data Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0710 data Higher bytes of the channel 0710 data Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0810 data Higher bytes of the channel 0810 data Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0910 data Higher bytes of the channel 0910 data
Input register
304001 304002
| 304019 304020 304021
304022 |
304039 304040 304041 304042
| 304059 304060 304061 304062
| 304079 304080 304081 304082
| 304099 304100 304101 304102
| 304119 304120 304121
304122 |
304139 304140 304141 304142
| 304159 304160 304161 304162
| 304179 304180 304181 304182
| 304199 304200
Data Type 32-bit signed integer
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-33
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data · Register
Channel 0001 example Register 304001
Register 304002
Input register Data Type
Higher bytes
Channel 0001 data
Lower bytes
· There is no decimal place information.
· 32-bit floating point
I/O channel data
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0010 data Higher bytes of the channel 0010 data Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0110 data Higher bytes of the channel 0110 data Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0210 data Higher bytes of the channel 0210 data Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0310 data Higher bytes of the channel 0310 data Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0410 data Higher bytes of the channel 0410 data Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0510 data Higher bytes of the channel 0510 data Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0610 data Higher bytes of the channel 0610 data Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0710 data Higher bytes of the channel 0710 data Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0810 data Higher bytes of the channel 0810 data Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0910 data Higher bytes of the channel 0910 data
Input register
304201 304202
| 304219 304220 304221 304222
| 304239 304240 304241 304242
| 304259 304260 304261 304262
| 304279 304280 304281 304282
| 304299 304300 304301 304302
| 304319 304320 304321 304322
| 304339 304340 304341 304342
| 304359 304360 304361 304362
| 304379 304380 304381 304382
| 304399 304400
Data Type 32-bit floating point
32-bit floating point
4-34
IM 04L55B01-01EN
IM 04L55B01-01EN
· 16-bit signed integer
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 data |
Channel 0010 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0110 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0210 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0310 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0410 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0510 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0610 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0710 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0810 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0910 data
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Input register
304401 |
304410 304411
| 304420 304421
| 304430 304431
| 304440 304441
| 304450 304451
| 304460 304461
| 304470 304471
| 304480 304481
| 304490 304491
| 304500
Data Type 16-bit signed integer
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
I/O Channel Data Status Information
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 status information |
Channel 0010 status information Channel 0101 status information
| Channel 0110 status information Channel 0201 status information
| Channel 0210 status information Channel 0301 status information
| Channel 0310 status information Channel 0401 status information
| Channel 0410 status information Channel 0501 status information
| Channel 0510 status information Channel 0601 status information
| Channel 0610 status information Channel 0701 status information
| Channel 0710 status information Channel 0801 status information
| Channel 0810 status information Channel 0901 status information
| Channel 0910 status information
Input register
304501 |
304510 304511
| 304520 304521
| 304530 304531
| 304540 304541
| 304550 304551
| 304560 304561
| 304570 304571
| 304580 304581
| 304590 304591
| 304600
Data Type 16-bit signed integer
16-bit signed integer Continued on next page
4-35
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data · There is no decimal place information.
2 bytes
Higher Lower bytes bytes
Input register Data Type
Status information Reserved area Alarm list
0
5 bits
0 0 0 0 4 bits
Error code
A/D calibration value error RJC error
Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1
Error code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 17
Meaning No error Skip +Over Over +Burnout Burnout A/D error Invalid data Computation error Communication error
GM status
Data Measuring Computing Alarm activated E-mail started
Memory end
Register 308001 308002 308003 308004
308005
Screen login status
Modbus communication error
308006 308007
User locked status (only for the advanced security function (/AS option)) Multi batch 1 measuring
| Multi batch 12 measuring
308008
308011 |
308022
Description
0: Recording stopped 1: Recording 0: Computing stopped 1: Computing 0: No alarm 1: Alarm occurrence 0: No e-mail transmission 1: E-mail transmission
available 0: Space available in the
internal memory or external storage 1: Not much space in the internal memory or external storage 0: No login 1: Logged in 0: Modbus master or client command normal 1: Modbus master or client command error 0: User unlocked status 1: User locked status
Data Type 16-bit signed integer
0: Stop recording 1: Recording
4-36
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Program operation status
Data
Register
Program operation status 308101
Running pattern number display Running segment number display Wait state
308102 308103 308104
Remaining segment time of the running pattern (hours) Remaining segment time of the running pattern (minutes) Remaining segment time of the running pattern (seconds) PV event status
Time event status
308105
308106
308107
308111 |
308142 308151
| 208182
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
1
Description
Data Type
0: Stop 1: Running
16-bit signed integer
1 to 99: Pattern number
2
0: Program operation stop
1 to 99: Segment number
0: Not waiting
1: Waiting 0 to 99: Hours
3
0 to 59: Minutes
4
0 to 59: Seconds
0: Event absent 1: Event present
0: Event absent 1: Event present
5
App
Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-37
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
4.5.5
Hold Registers (Shared with the Modbus server/slave function)
Common Items
· The client (master) device can read and write to the hold registers.
· Communication channels are an option (/MC).
· Channel range by model
Channel type I/O channel Communication channel
GM10-1 0001 to 6950 C001 to C300
GM10-2 0001 to 6950 C001 to C500
· Math channels are input registers only. · If Log scale calculation (/LG option) is performed on an AI channel, data of I/O channels
set to 32-bit signed integer or 16-bit signed integer will be an integer with two- or threedigit mantissa.
I/O Channel Data*
· 32-bit signed integer
Unit Main unit
I/O channel data
Hold register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data 400001
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data 400002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0050 data 400099
Higher bytes of the channel 0050 data 400100
Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data 400101
Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data 400102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0150 data 400199
Higher bytes of the channel 0150 data 400200
Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data 400201
Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data 400202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0250 data 400299
Higher bytes of the channel 0250 data 400300
Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data 400301
Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data 400302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0350 data 400399
Higher bytes of the channel 0350 data 400400
Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data 400401
Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data 400402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0450 data 400499
Higher bytes of the channel 0450 data 400500
Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data 400501
Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data 400502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0550 data 400599
Higher bytes of the channel 0550 data 400600
Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data 400601
Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data 400602
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0650 data 400699
Higher bytes of the channel 0650 data 400700
Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data 400701
Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data 400702
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0750 data 400799
Higher bytes of the channel 0750 data 400800
Continued on next page
4-38
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Main unit Sub unit 1
Sub unit 2
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Input register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data 400801
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data 400802
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0850 data 400899
Higher bytes of the channel 0850 data 400900
Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data 400901
Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data 400902
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0950 data 400999
Higher bytes of the channel 0950 data 401000
Lower bytes of the channel 1001 data 410001
Higher bytes of the channel 1001 data 410002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1050 data 410099
Higher bytes of the channel 1050 data 410100
Lower bytes of the channel 1101 data 410101
Higher bytes of the channel 1101 data 410102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1150 data 410199
Higher bytes of the channel 1150 data 410200
Lower bytes of the channel 1201 data 410201
Higher bytes of the channel 1201 data 410202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1250 data 410299
Higher bytes of the channel 1250 data 410300
Lower bytes of the channel 1301 data 410301
Higher bytes of the channel 1301 data 410302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1350 data 410399
Higher bytes of the channel 1350 data 410400
Lower bytes of the channel 1401 data 410401
Higher bytes of the channel 1401 data 410402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1450 data 410499
Higher bytes of the channel 1450 data 410500
Lower bytes of the channel 1501 data 410501
Higher bytes of the channel 1501 data 410502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1550 data 410599
Higher bytes of the channel 1550 data 410600
Lower bytes of the channel 2001 data 415001
Higher bytes of the channel 2001 data 415002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2050 data 415099
Higher bytes of the channel 2050 data 415100
Lower bytes of the channel 2101 data 415101
Higher bytes of the channel 2101 data 415102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2150 data 415199
Higher bytes of the channel 2150 data 415200
Lower bytes of the channel 2201 data 415201
Higher bytes of the channel 2201 data 415202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2250 data 415299
Higher bytes of the channel 2250 data 415300
Lower bytes of the channel 2301 data 415301
Higher bytes of the channel 2301 data 415302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2350 data 415399
Higher bytes of the channel 2350 data 415400
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-39
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 2 Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
I/O channel data
Input register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 2401 data 415401
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 2401 data 415402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2450 data 415499
Higher bytes of the channel 2450 data 415500
Lower bytes of the channel 2501 data 415501
Higher bytes of the channel 2501 data 415502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2550 data 415599
Higher bytes of the channel 2550 data 415600
Lower bytes of the channel 3001 data 420001
Higher bytes of the channel 3001 data 420002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3050 data 420099
Higher bytes of the channel 3050 data 420100
Lower bytes of the channel 3101 data 420101
Higher bytes of the channel 3101 data 420102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3150 data 420199
Higher bytes of the channel 3150 data 420200
Lower bytes of the channel 3201 data 420201
Higher bytes of the channel 3201 data 420202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3250 data 420299
Higher bytes of the channel 3250 data 420300
Lower bytes of the channel 3301 data 420301
Higher bytes of the channel 3301 data 420302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3350 data 420399
Higher bytes of the channel 3350 data 420400
Lower bytes of the channel 3401 data 420401
Higher bytes of the channel 3401 data 420402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3450 data 420499
Higher bytes of the channel 3450 data 420500
Lower bytes of the channel 3501 data 420501
Higher bytes of the channel 3501 data 420502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3550 data 420599
Higher bytes of the channel 3550 data 420600
Lower bytes of the channel 4001 data 425001
Higher bytes of the channel 4001 data 425002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4050 data 425099
Higher bytes of the channel 4050 data 425100
Lower bytes of the channel 4101 data 425101
Higher bytes of the channel 4101 data 425102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4150 data 425199
Higher bytes of the channel 4150 data 425200
Lower bytes of the channel 4201 data 425201
Higher bytes of the channel 4201 data 425202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4250 data 425299
Higher bytes of the channel 4250 data 425300
Lower bytes of the channel 4301 data 425301
Higher bytes of the channel 4301 data 425302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4350 data 425399
Higher bytes of the channel 4350 data 425400
Continued on next page
4-40
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 4 Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Input register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 4401 data 425401
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 4401 data 425402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4450 data 425499
Higher bytes of the channel 4450 data 425500
Lower bytes of the channel 4501 data 425501
Higher bytes of the channel 4501 data 425502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4550 data 425599
Higher bytes of the channel 4550 data 425600
Lower bytes of the channel 5001 data 430001
Higher bytes of the channel 5001 data 430002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5050 data 430099
Higher bytes of the channel 5050 data 430100
Lower bytes of the channel 5101 data 430101
Higher bytes of the channel 5101 data 430102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5150 data 430199
Higher bytes of the channel 5150 data 430200
Lower bytes of the channel 5201 data 430201
Higher bytes of the channel 5201 data 430202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5250 data 430299
Higher bytes of the channel 5250 data 430300
Lower bytes of the channel 5301 data 430301
Higher bytes of the channel 5301 data 430302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5350 data 430399
Higher bytes of the channel 5350 data 430400
Lower bytes of the channel 5401 data 430401
Higher bytes of the channel 5401 data 430402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5450 data 430499
Higher bytes of the channel 5450 data 430500
Lower bytes of the channel 5501 data 430501
Higher bytes of the channel 5501 data 430502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5550 data 430599
Higher bytes of the channel 5550 data 430600
Lower bytes of the channel 6001 data 435001
Higher bytes of the channel 6001 data 435002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6050 data 435099
Higher bytes of the channel 6050 data 435100
Lower bytes of the channel 6101 data 435101
Higher bytes of the channel 6101 data 435102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6150 data 435199
Higher bytes of the channel 6150 data 435200
Lower bytes of the channel 6201 data 435201
Higher bytes of the channel 6201 data 435202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6250 data 435299
Higher bytes of the channel 6250 data 435300
Lower bytes of the channel 6301 data 435301
Higher bytes of the channel 6301 data 435302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6350 data 435399
Higher bytes of the channel 6350 data 435400
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-41
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 6
· Register
I/O channel data
Input register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 6401 data 435401
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the channel 6401 data 435402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6450 data 435499
Higher bytes of the channel 6450 data 435500
Lower bytes of the channel 6501 data 435501
Higher bytes of the channel 6501 data 435502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6550 data 435599
Higher bytes of the channel 6550 data 435600
Channel 0001 example Register 400001
Register 400002
Higher bytes
Channel 0001 data
Lower bytes
· There is no decimal place information.
*When Modbus writing is performed on a channel of a DO module, a relay output occurs from the corresponding channel of the DO module. Write a 0 to turn the relay off Write a nonzero value to turn the relay on
To enable relay output from a DO module through Modbus writing, the DO channel range type must be set to Manual. See page 2-63 in section 2.7.1, "Setting the Range".
4-42
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
· 32-bit floating point
Unit Main unit
I/O channel data
Hold register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data 401001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data 401002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0050 data 401099
Higher bytes of the channel 0050 data 401100
Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data 401101
Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data 401102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0150 data 401199
Higher bytes of the channel 0150 data 401200
Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data 401201
Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data 401202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0250 data 401299
Higher bytes of the channel 0250 data 401300
Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data 401301
Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data 401302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0350 data 401399
Higher bytes of the channel 0350 data 401400
Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data 401401
Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data 401402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0450 data 401499
Higher bytes of the channel 0450 data 401500
Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data 401501
Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data 401502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0550 data 401599
Higher bytes of the channel 0550 data 401600
Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data 401601
Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data 401602
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0650 data 401699
Higher bytes of the channel 0650 data 401700
Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data 401701
Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data 401702
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0750 data 401799
Higher bytes of the channel 0750 data 401800
Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data 401801
Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data 401802
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0850 data 401899
Higher bytes of the channel 0850 data 401900
Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data 401901
Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data 401902
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 0950 data 401999
Higher bytes of the channel 0950 data 402000
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-43
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 1
Sub unit 2
I/O channel data
Hold register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 1001 data 411001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 1001 data 411002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1050 data 411099
Higher bytes of the channel 1050 data 411100
Lower bytes of the channel 1101 data 411101
Higher bytes of the channel 1101 data 411102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1150 data 411199
Higher bytes of the channel 1150 data 411200
Lower bytes of the channel 1201 data 411201
Higher bytes of the channel 1201 data 411202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1250 data 411299
Higher bytes of the channel 1250 data 411300
Lower bytes of the channel 1301 data 411301
Higher bytes of the channel 1301 data 411302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1350 data 411399
Higher bytes of the channel 1350 data 411400
Lower bytes of the channel 1401 data 411401
Higher bytes of the channel 1401 data 411402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1450 data 411499
Higher bytes of the channel 1450 data 411500
Lower bytes of the channel 1501 data 411501
Higher bytes of the channel 1501 data 411502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 1550 data 411599
Higher bytes of the channel 1550 data 411600
Lower bytes of the channel 2001 data 416001
Higher bytes of the channel 2001 data 416002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2050 data 416099
Higher bytes of the channel 2050 data 416100
Lower bytes of the channel 2101 data 416101
Higher bytes of the channel 2101 data 416102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2150 data 416199
Higher bytes of the channel 2150 data 416200
Lower bytes of the channel 2201 data 416201
Higher bytes of the channel 2201 data 416202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 2250 data 416299
Higher bytes of the channel 2250 data 416300
Lower bytes of the channel 2301 data 416301
Higher bytes of the channel 2301 data 416302
|
|
Higher bytes of the channel 2350 data 416399
Higher bytes of the channel 2350 data 416400
Lower bytes of the channel 2401 data 416401
Higher bytes of the channel 2401 data 416402
|
|
Higher bytes of the channel 2450 data 416499
Higher bytes of the channel 2450 data 416500
Lower bytes of the channel 2501 data 416501
Higher bytes of the channel 2501 data 416502
|
|
Higher bytes of the channel 2550 data 416599
Higher bytes of the channel 2550 data 416600
Continued on next page
4-44
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Hold register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 3001 data 421001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 3001 data 421002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3050 data 421099
Higher bytes of the channel 3050 data 421100
Lower bytes of the channel 3101 data 421101
Higher bytes of the channel 3101 data 421102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3150 data 421199
Higher bytes of the channel 3150 data 421200
Lower bytes of the channel 3201 data 421201
Higher bytes of the channel 3201 data 421202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3250 data 421299
Higher bytes of the channel 3250 data 421300
Lower bytes of the channel 3301 data 421301
Higher bytes of the channel 3301 data 421302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3350 data 421399
Higher bytes of the channel 3350 data 421400
Lower bytes of the channel 3401 data 421401
Higher bytes of the channel 3401 data 421402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3450 data 421499
Higher bytes of the channel 3450 data 421500
Lower bytes of the channel 3501 data 421501
Higher bytes of the channel 3501 data 421502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 3550 data 421599
Higher bytes of the channel 3550 data 421600
Lower bytes of the channel 4001 data 426001
Higher bytes of the channel 4001 data 426002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4050 data 426099
Higher bytes of the channel 4050 data 426100
Lower bytes of the channel 4101 data 426101
Higher bytes of the channel 4101 data 426102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4150 data 426199
Higher bytes of the channel 4150 data 426200
Lower bytes of the channel 4201 data 426201
Higher bytes of the channel 4201 data 426202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4250 data 426299
Higher bytes of the channel 4250 data 426300
Lower bytes of the channel 4301 data 426301
Higher bytes of the channel 4301 data 426302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4350 data 426399
Higher bytes of the channel 4350 data 426400
Lower bytes of the channel 4401 data 426401
Higher bytes of the channel 4401 data 426402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4450 data 426499
Higher bytes of the channel 4450 data 426500
Lower bytes of the channel 4501 data 426501
Higher bytes of the channel 4501 data 426502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 4550 data 426599
Higher bytes of the channel 4550 data 426600
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-45
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
I/O channel data
Hold register Data Type
Lower bytes of the channel 5001 data 431001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the channel 5001 data 431002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5050 data 431099
Higher bytes of the channel 5050 data 431100
Lower bytes of the channel 5101 data 431101
Higher bytes of the channel 5101 data 431102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5150 data 431199
Higher bytes of the channel 5150 data 431200
Lower bytes of the channel 5201 data 431201
Higher bytes of the channel 5201 data 431202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5250 data 431299
Higher bytes of the channel 5250 data 431300
Lower bytes of the channel 5301 data 431301
Higher bytes of the channel 5301 data 431302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5350 data 431399
Higher bytes of the channel 5350 data 431400
Lower bytes of the channel 5401 data 431401
Higher bytes of the channel 5401 data 431402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5450 data 431499
Higher bytes of the channel 5450 data 431500
Lower bytes of the channel 5501 data 431501
Higher bytes of the channel 5501 data 431502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 5550 data 431599
Higher bytes of the channel 5550 data 431600
Lower bytes of the channel 6001 data 436001
Higher bytes of the channel 6001 data 436002
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6050 data 436099
Higher bytes of the channel 6050 data 436100
Lower bytes of the channel 6101 data 436101
Higher bytes of the channel 6101 data 436102
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6150 data 436199
Higher bytes of the channel 6150 data 436200
Lower bytes of the channel 6201 data 436201
Higher bytes of the channel 6201 data 436202
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6250 data 436299
Higher bytes of the channel 6250 data 436300
Lower bytes of the channel 6301 data 436301
Higher bytes of the channel 6301 data 436302
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6350 data 436399
Higher bytes of the channel 6350 data 436400
Lower bytes of the channel 6401 data 436401
Higher bytes of the channel 6401 data 436402
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6450 data 436499
Higher bytes of the channel 6450 data 436500
Lower bytes of the channel 6501 data 436501
Higher bytes of the channel 6501 data 436502
|
|
Lower bytes of the channel 6550 data 436599
Higher bytes of the channel 6550 data 436600
4-46
IM 04L55B01-01EN
· 16-bit signed integer
Unit Main unit
Sub unit 1 Sub unit 2
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 data |
Channel 0050 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0150 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0250 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0350 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0450 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0550 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0750 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0850 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0950 data Channel 1001 data
| Channel 1050 data Channel 1101 data
| Channel 1150 data Channel 1201 data
| Channel 1250 data Channel 1301 data
| Channel 1350 data Channel 1401 data
| Channel 1450 data Channel 1501 data
| Channel 1550 data Channel 2001 data
| Channel 2050 data Channel 2101 data
| Channel 2150 data Channel 2201 data
| Channel 2250 data
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Hold register Data Type
402001
16-bit signed integer
|
402050
402051
|
402100
402101
|
402150
402151
|
402200
402201
|
402250
402251
|
402300
402301
|
402350
402351
|
402400
402401
|
402450
402451
|
402500
412001
|
412050
412051
|
412100
412101
|
412150
412151
|
412200
412201
|
412250
412251
|
412300
417001
|
417050
417051
|
417100
417101
|
417150
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-47
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 2 Sub unit 3
Sub unit 4
Sub unit 5
I/O channel data
Channel 2301 data |
Channel 2350 data Channel 2401 data
| Channel 2450 data Channel 2501 data
| Channel 2550 data Channel 3001 data
| Channel 3050 data Channel 3101 data
| Channel 3150 data Channel 3201 data
| Channel 3250 data Channel 3301 data
| Channel 3350 data Channel 3401 data
| Channel 3450 data Channel 3501 data
| Channel 3550 data Channel 4001 data
| Channel 4050 data Channel 4101 data
| Channel 4150 data Channel 4201 data
| Channel 4250 data Channel 4301 data
| Channel 4350 data Channel 4401 data
| Channel 4450 data Channel 4501 data
| Channel 4550 data Channel 5001 data
| Channel 5050 data Channel 5101 data
| Channel 5150 data Channel 5201 data
| Channel 5250 data Channel 5301 data
| Channel 5350 data
Input register Data Type
417151
16-bit signed integer
|
417200
417201
|
417250
417251
|
417300
422001
|
422050
422051
|
422100
422101
|
422150
422151
|
422200
422201
|
422250
422251
|
422300
427001
|
427050
427051
|
427100
427101
|
427150
427151
|
427200
427201
|
427250
427251
|
427300
432001
|
432050
432051
|
432100
432101
|
432150
432151
|
432200
Continued on next page
4-48
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
I/O channel data
Channel 5401 data |
Channel 5450 data Channel 5501 data
| Channel 5550 data Channel 6001 data
| Channel 6050 data Channel 6101 data
| Channel 6150 data Channel 6201 data
| Channel 6250 data Channel 6301 data
| Channel 6350 data Channel 6401 data
| Channel 6450 data Channel 6501 data
| Channel 6550 data
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Input register Data Type
432201
16-bit signed integer
|
432250
432251
|
432300
437001
|
437050
437051
|
437100
437101
|
437150
437151
|
437200
437201
|
437250
437251
|
437300
I/O Channel Data Status Information
Unit Main unit
I/O channel data Channel 0001 status information
| Channel 0050 status information Channel 0101 status information
| Channel 0150 status information Channel 0201 status information
| Channel 0250 status information Channel 0301 status information
| Channel 0350 status information Channel 0401 status information
| Channel 0450 status information Channel 0501 status information
| Channel 0550 status information Channel 0601 status information
| Channel 0650 status information Channel 0701 status information
| Channel 0750 status information Channel 0801 status information
| Channel 0850 status information Channel 0901 status information
| Channel 0950 status information
Hold register Data Type
402501
16-bit signed integer
|
402550
402551
|
402600
402601
|
402650
402651
|
402700
402701
|
402750
402751
|
402800
402801
|
402850
402851
|
402900
402901
|
402950
402951
|
403000
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-49
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 1
Sub unit 2
Sub unit 3
I/O channel data
Channel 1001 status information |
Channel 1050 status information Channel 1101 status information
| Channel 1150 status information Channel 1201 status information
| Channel 1250 status information Channel 1301 status information
| Channel 1350 status information Channel 1401 status information
| Channel 1450 status information Channel 1501 status information
| Channel 1550 status information Channel 2001 status information
| Channel 2050 status information Channel 2101 status information
| Channel 2150 status information Channel 2201 status information
| Channel 2250 status information Channel 2301 status information
| Channel 2350 status information Channel 2401 status information
| Channel 2450 status information Channel 2501 status information
| Channel 2550 status information Channel 3001 status information
| Channel 3050 status information Channel 3101 status information
| Channel 3150 status information Channel 3201 status information
| Channel 3250 status information Channel 3301 status information
| Channel 3350 status information Channel 3401 status information
| Channel 3450 status information Channel 3501 status information
| Channel 3550 status information
Input register Data Type
412501
16-bit signed integer
|
412550
412551
|
412600
412601
|
412650
412651
|
412700
412701
|
412750
412751
|
412800
417501
|
417550
417551
|
417600
417601
|
417650
417651
|
417700
417701
|
417750
417751
|
417800
422501
|
422550
422551
|
422600
422601
|
422650
422651
|
422700
422701
|
422750
422751
|
422800
Continued on next page
4-50
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 4
Sub unit 5
Sub unit 6
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O channel data
Channel 4001 status information |
Channel 4050 status information Channel 4101 status information
| Channel 4150 status information Channel 4201 status information
| Channel 4250 status information Channel 4301 status information
| Channel 4350 status information Channel 4401 status information
| Channel 4450 status information Channel 4501 status information
| Channel 4550 status information Channel 5001 status information
| Channel 5050 status information Channel 5101 status information
| Channel 5150 status information Channel 5201 status information
| Channel 5250 status information Channel 5301 status information
| Channel 5350 status information Channel 5401 status information
| Channel 5450 status information Channel 5501 status information
| Channel 5550 status information Channel 6001 status information
| Channel 6050 status information Channel 6101 status information
| Channel 6150 status information Channel 6201 status information
| Channel 6250 status information Channel 6301 status information
| Channel 6350 status information Channel 6401 status information
| Channel 6450 status information Channel 6501 status information
| Channel 6550 status information
Input register Data Type
427501
16-bit signed integer
|
427550
427551
|
427600
427601
|
427650
427651
|
427700
427701
|
427750
427751
|
427800
432501
|
432550
432551
|
432600
432601
|
432650
432651
|
432700
432701
|
432750
432751
|
432800
437501
|
437550
437551
|
437600
437601
|
437650
437651
|
437700
437701
|
437750
437751
|
437800
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-51
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
· There is no decimal place information. 2 bytes
Higher Lower bytes bytes
Status information Reserved area Alarm list
0
5 bits
0 0 0 0 4 bits
Error code
A/D calibration value error
RJC error
Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1
Error code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 17
Meaning No error Skip +Over Over +Burnout Burnout A/D error Invalid data Computation error Communication error
4-52
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Continuous Channel Data Read/Write Area
The GM reserves up to 50 channels of register area per module. For example, reading 100 channels of data from 10 analog input modules through normal input registers would be inefficient because there would be a lot of empty registers. The "continuous channel data read/write area" is a special area that enables continuous reading and writing by limiting the number of channels of each module to 10. It is for I/O channels installed in the GM main unit.
I/O Channel Data
· 32-bit signed integer
I/O channel data
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0010 data Higher bytes of the channel 0010 data Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data
Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data |
Lower bytes of the channel 0110 data Higher bytes of the channel 0110 data Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0210 data Higher bytes of the channel 0210 data Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0310 data Higher bytes of the channel 0310 data Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0410 data Higher bytes of the channel 0410 data Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0510 data Higher bytes of the channel 0510 data Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data
Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data |
Lower bytes of the channel 0610 data Higher bytes of the channel 0610 data Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0710 data Higher bytes of the channel 0710 data Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0810 data Higher bytes of the channel 0810 data Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0910 data Higher bytes of the channel 0910 data
Hold register
404001 404002
| 404019 404020 404021
404022 |
404039 404040 404041 404042
| 404059 404060 404061 404062
| 404079 404080 404081 404082
| 404099 404100 404101 404102
| 404119 404120 404121
404122 |
404139 404140 404141 404142
| 404159 404160 404161 404162
| 404179 404180 404181 404182
| 404199 404200
Data Type 32-bit signed integer
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-53
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
· 32-bit floating point
I/O channel data
Lower bytes of the channel 0001 data Higher bytes of the channel 0001 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0010 data Higher bytes of the channel 0010 data Lower bytes of the channel 0101 data Higher bytes of the channel 0101 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0110 data Higher bytes of the channel 0110 data Lower bytes of the channel 0201 data Higher bytes of the channel 0201 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0210 data Higher bytes of the channel 0210 data Lower bytes of the channel 0301 data Higher bytes of the channel 0301 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0310 data Higher bytes of the channel 0310 data Lower bytes of the channel 0401 data Higher bytes of the channel 0401 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0410 data Higher bytes of the channel 0410 data Lower bytes of the channel 0501 data Higher bytes of the channel 0501 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0510 data Higher bytes of the channel 0510 data Lower bytes of the channel 0601 data Higher bytes of the channel 0601 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0610 data Higher bytes of the channel 0610 data Lower bytes of the channel 0701 data Higher bytes of the channel 0701 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0710 data Higher bytes of the channel 0710 data Lower bytes of the channel 0801 data Higher bytes of the channel 0801 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0810 data Higher bytes of the channel 0810 data Lower bytes of the channel 0901 data Higher bytes of the channel 0901 data
| Lower bytes of the channel 0910 data Higher bytes of the channel 0910 data
Hold register
404201 404202
| 404219 404220 404221 404222
| 404239 404240 404241 404242
| 404259 404260 404261 404262
| 404279 404280 404281 404282
| 404299 404300 404301 404302
| 404319 404320 404321 404322
| 404339 404340 404341 404342
| 404359 404360 404361 404362
| 404379 404380 404381 404382
| 404399 404400
Data Type 32-bit floating point
4-54
IM 04L55B01-01EN
· 16-bit signed integer
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 data |
Channel 0010 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0110 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0210 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0310 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0410 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0510 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0710 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0810 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0910 data
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Hold register
404401 |
404410 404411
| 404420 404421
| 404430 404431
| 404440 404441
| 404450 404451
| 404460 404461
| 404470 404471
| 404480 404481
| 404490 404491
| 404500
Data Type 16-bit signed integer
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-55
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
I/O Channel Data Status Information
I/O channel data
Hold register
Channel 0001 status information
404501
|
|
Channel 0010 status information
404510
Channel 0101 status information
404511
|
|
Channel 0110 status information
404520
Channel 0201 status information
404521
|
|
Channel 0210 status information
404530
Channel 0301 status information
404531
|
|
Channel 0310 status information
404540
Channel 0401 status information
404541
|
|
Channel 0410 status information
404550
Channel 0501 status information
404551
|
|
Channel 0510 status information
404560
Channel 0601 status information
404561
|
|
Channel 0610 status information
404570
Channel 0701 status information
404571
|
|
Channel 0710 status information
404580
Channel 0801 status information
404581
|
|
Channel 0810 status information
404590
Channel 0901 status information
404591
|
|
Channel 0910 status information
404600
· There is no decimal place information.
2 bytes
Higher Lower bytes bytes
Status information Reserved area Alarm list
0
5 bits
0 0 0 0 4 bits
Error code
A/D calibration value error RJC error
Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1
Data Type 16-bit signed integer
Error code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16 17
Meaning No error Skip +Over Over +Burnout Burnout A/D error Invalid data Computation error Communication error
4-56
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Communication Channel
Data
Hold register
Data Type
Lower bytes of the input data of channel C001 405001
32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the input data of channel C001 405002
|
|
Lower bytes of the input data of channel C500 405999
Higher bytes of the input data of channel C500 406000
· There is no decimal place information.
Lower bytes of the input data of channel C001 406001
32-bit floating point
Higher bytes of the input data of channel C001 406002
|
|
Lower bytes of the input data of channel C500 406999
Higher bytes of the input data of channel C500 407000
· Note when a client (master) device writes data
Input range: 9.9999E29 to 1E30, 0, 1E30 to 9.9999E29
Values outside this range when used in a math channel will result in computation error.
Channel C001 input data
407001
16-bit signed integer
|
|
Channel C500 input data
407500
Channel C001 status information
407501
|
|
Channel C500 status information
408000
· Status register configuration
This is the same as that of the I/O channel data status information.
Internal Switch*
Data
S001 input data |
S100 input data
Hold register 408001
| 408100
Supplementary Information OFF: 0, ON: Not 0 | OFF: 0, ON: Not 0
Data Type 16-bit signed integer
* To control internal switches through Modbus writing, the internal switch must be set to Manual. See page 2-185 in section 2.26.5, "Setting Internal Switches".
GM operation setting
Data Starts or stops recording (without multi batch) Multi batch 1 to 12 Recording start or stop
Computation operation (without multi batch) Multi batch 1 to 12 Computation operation
All alarm ACK
Individual alarm ACK
Hold register 409001
409001 | 409012 409021
409021 | 409032
409041
409042
Supplementary Information Data Type
0: Fixed at 0 when reading 16-bit signed integer 1: Start recording 2: Stop recording
0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Start computation (all) 2: Stop computation (all) 3: Reset computation (by batch) 4: Clear the computation dropout status display (all) 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Clear alarm output Alarm ACK channel type specification 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: I/O channel 2: Math channel 3: Communication channel
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-57
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Data Individual alarm ACK
Hold register 409043
409044
Manual trigger, manual
409051
sample, snapshot, timeout
Synchronize time using SNTP 409052
Start/stop the e-mail transmission function
409053
Recover Modbus manually 409054
Reset a relative timer
409055
Reset a match time timer 409056
All loop control run/stop
409057
Supplementary Information Data Type
Alarm ACK channel number 16-bit signed integer specification 0: Fixed at 0 when reading I/O channel: 1 to 6932 Math channel: 1 to 200 Communication channel: 1 to 500 Alarm ACK alarm level specification 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Alarm level 1 ACK 2: Alarm level 2 ACK 3: Alarm level 3 ACK 4: Alarm level 4 ACK 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Execute manual sampling 2: Generate a manual trigger 3: Take a snapshot 4: Cause a timeout in display data 5: Cause a timeout in event data 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Execute manual SNTP 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Start e-mail transmission 2: Stop e-mail transmission 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1: Manually recover the Modbus client. 2: Manually recover the Modbus master. 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1 to 12: Reset the specified timer 100: Reset all timers 0: Fixed at 0 when reading 1 to 12: Reset the specified timer 100: Reset all timers 1: All loops run 2: All loops stop
Continued on next page
4-58
IM 04L55B01-01EN
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Data
Hold register Supplementary Information Data Type
Property display area display 409091
0: Range, unit, tag name 16-bit signed integer
information settings
information of continuous
measurement channels 0001
to 6510
10: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
0001 to 950
11: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
1001 to 1950
12: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
2001 to 2950
13: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
3001 to 3950
14: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
4001 to 4950
15: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
5001 to 5950
16: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
6001 to 6950
20: Range, unit, tag name
information of math channels
A001 to A200
30: Range, unit, tag name
information of communication
Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
409101* 409102* 409103* 409104* 409105* 409106*
channels C001 to C500 0 to 65535 1 to 12 1 to 31 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 to 59
* Read only. Cannot be written to.
Write a message
409201
0: Fixed at 0 when reading 16-bit signed integer
(specify the write method)
1: Write a preset message
2: Write a free message
Write a message
409202
0: Fixed at 0 when reading
(message number)
Preset: 1 to 100
Free: 1 to 10
Write a message
409203
0: All display groups; fixed at
(specify the write destination)
0 when reading
1 or greater: The specified
display group
Write a message
409204
0: Fixed at 0 when reading
(batch group number)
1 or greater: Batch group
number
Write a message
409205
0: Fixed at 0 when reading
(free message)
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 32 characters
Ignored for preset messages
Attach a terminator at the end
|
|
|
Write a message
409230
0: Fixed at 0 when reading
(free message)
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 32 characters
Ignored for preset messages
Attach a terminator at the end
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
4-59
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments Data Batch, lot number Batch, lot number (multi batch support)
Batch comment 4-60
Hold register 409301 409302 409303 | 409319 409351
409352
409353
409354
| 409379
409401
409402
Supplementary Information Data Type
Lower bytes of the lot number 32-bit signed integer
Higher bytes of the lot number
Batch number
16-bit signed integer
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 32 characters [attach
the terminator '\0' at the end]
|
Batch number
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 32 characters [attach
the terminator '\0' at the end]
1 or greater: Batch group 16-bit signed integer
number
When reading, the batch
group number that performed
writing previously
Default value: 0
Lower bytes of the lot
32-bit signed integer
number
When reading, the lot
number corresponding to the
above batch group number
0 if there is no corresponding
batch group number
Higher bytes of the lot
number
When reading, the lot
number corresponding to the
above batch group number
0 if there is no corresponding
batch group number
Batch number
16-bit signed integer
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 32 characters [attach
the terminator `\0' at the end]
When reading, the batch
number corresponding to the
above batch group number
NULL character if there is no
corresponding batch group
number
|
Batch number
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 32 characters [attach
the terminator `\0' at the end]
When reading, the batch
number corresponding to the
above batch group number
NULL character if there is no
corresponding batch group
number
1 to 12: Batch group number 16-bit signed integer
When reading, the batch
group number that performed
writing previously
Default value: 0
Without multi batch: 1
1 or greater: Batch group 16-bit signed integer
number
When reading, the batch
group number that performed
writing previously
Default value: 0
Continued on next page
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Data Batch comment
Batch text field title
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Hold register 409403
| 409428
409451 409452 409453
|
Supplementary Information Data Type
Comment string UTF-8 characters (2 characters) Up to 32 characters [attach the terminator `\0' at the end] When reading, the batch comment text corresponding to the above batch group number and batch comment number NULL character if there is no corresponding batch group number or batch comment number | Comment string UTF-8 characters (2 characters) Up to 32 characters [attach the terminator `\0' at the end] When reading, the batch comment text corresponding to the above batch group number and batch comment number NULL character if there is no corresponding batch group number or batch comment number 1 to 12: Batch group number 16-bit signed integer When reading, the batch group number that performed writing previously Default value: 0 Without multi batch: 1 Batch text Text field number When reading, the batch text field number that performed writing previously Default value: 0 Batch Text field Title UTF-8 characters (2 characters) Up to 20 characters [attach the terminator `\0' at the end] When reading, the batch field title text corresponding to the above batch group number and batch text field number NULL character if there is no corresponding batch group number or batch text field number |
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-61
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
4-62
Data Batch text field title
Hold register 409478
Batch text field characters 409501 409502 409503
| 409528
Program operation pattern 409601 number switching
Program operation switching 409601
Hold-on switching
409603
Supplementary Information Data Type
Batch Text field
16-bit signed integer
Title
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 20 characters [attach
the terminator `\0' at the end]
When reading, the batch field
title text corresponding to the
above batch group number
and batch text field number
NULL character if there is no
corresponding batch group
number or batch text field
number
1 to 12: Batch group number 16-bit signed integer
When reading, the batch
group number that performed
writing previously
Default value: 0
Without multi batch: 1
Batch text
Text field number
When reading, the batch text
field number that performed
writing previously
Default value: 0
Batch Text field
Characters
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 30 characters [attach
the terminator `\0' at the end]
When reading, the batch field
text corresponding to the
above batch group number
and batch text field number
NULL character if there is no
corresponding batch group
number or batch text field
number
|
Batch Text field
Characters
UTF-8 characters (2
characters)
Up to 30 characters [attach
the terminator `\0' at the end]
When reading, the batch field
text corresponding to the
above batch group number
and batch text field number
NULL character if there is no
corresponding batch group
number or batch text field
number
1 to 99
Communication pattern
number reading and writing
when read
1: Program operation stop
2: Program operation run
When read,
1: Program operation stop
2: Program operation running
1: Release hold
2: Hold
When read,
1: Program running
2: Holding
Continued on next page
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Data Advance instruction
Hold register 409604
Alarm setting (channel type) 409701
Alarm setting (channel number)
409702
Alarm setting (alarm level) 409703
Alarm type
409704
Alarm setpoint
409705 409706
Alarm delay setting (channel 409711 type)
Alarm delay setting (channel 409712 number)
Alarm delay
409713 409714
Supplementary Information Data Type
1: Advance instruction
Always 0 when read
1: I/O channel
16-bit signed integer
2: Math channel
3: Communication channel
Channel type of the alarm
that wrote previously when
read
Default value: 0
I/O channel: 1 to 6932
Math channel: 1 to 200
Communication channel: 1
to 500
Channel number of the alarm
that wrote previously when
read
Default value: 0
1 to 4: Alarm level
Alarm level of the alarm that
wrote previously when read
Default value: 0
0: OFF
1: High limit alarm
2: Low limit alarm
3: High limit on rate-of-
change alarm
4: Low limit on rate-of-
change alarm
5: Delay high limit alarm
6: Delay low limit alarm
7: Deviation high limit alarm
8: Deviation low limit alarm
Alarm type corresponding
to the above channel type,
channel number, and alarm
level when read
Alarm setpoint
Alarm setpoint corresponding
to the above channel type,
channel number, and alarm
level when read
1: I/O channel
2: Math channel
3: Communication channel
Channel type of the alarm
that wrote previously when
read
Default value: 0
I/O channel: 1 to 6932
Math channel: 1 to 200
Communication channel: 1
to 500
Channel number of the alarm
that wrote previously when
read
Default value: 0
Alarm delay seconds
Alarm delay corresponding to
the channel type and channel
number when read
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-63
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
4.5.6
Coil
Coil registers can only be accessed from the main unit channels. The coil area is both readable and writable. The registers contain 1-bit data. The registers take on the value of 0 when the data is 0 and the value of 1 otherwise to indicate the data or status.
I/O channel data
Type I/O Channel Data
I/O channel data Channel 0001 data
|
Channel 0050 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0150 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0250 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0350 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0450 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0550 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0750 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0850 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0950 data I/O Channel Data Status Information Channel 0001 data
| Channel 0050 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0150 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0250 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0350 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0450 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0550 data I/O Channel Data Status Information Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0750 data
Register
00001
|
00050 00051
| 00100 00101
| 00150 00151
| 00200 00201
| 00250 00251
| 00300 00301
| 00350 00351
| 00400 00401
| 00450 00451
| 00500 00501
| 00550 00551
| 00600 00601
| 00650 00651
| 00700 00701
| 00750 00751
| 00800 00801
| 00850 00851
| 00900
Read/Write Data Type
R/W
Bit string
R
Bit string
R
Bit string
Continued on next page
4-64
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5.7
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Type
I/O channel data
Register Read/Write Data Type
1
I/O Channel Data Status Information Channel 0801 data
00901
R
Bit string
|
|
Channel 0850 data
00950
Channel 0901 data |
00951 |
2
Channel 0950 data
01000
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
Communication channel data
Type Communication channel data
Communication channel status information
Communication Channel Register
Data
Channel C001 data
01001
|
|
Channel C300 data
01300
Channel C001 data
01501
|
|
Channel C300 data
01800
Read/Write Data Type
R/W
Bit string
R
Internal Switch Data
Type Internal Switch Data
Internal Switch Data
Internal switch S001 data |
Internal switch S100 data
Register
02001 |
02100
Read/Write Data Type
R/W
Bit string
3 4 5
App
Input Relay
Input relay registers can only be accessed from the main unit channels. The input relay area is read-only. The registers contain 1-bit data. The registers take on the value of 0 when the data is 0 and the value of 1 otherwise to indicate the data or status.
I/O channel data
Type I/O Channel Data
I/O Channel Data I/O Channel Data
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 data
|
Channel 0050 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0150 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0250 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0350 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0450 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0550 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0750 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0850 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0950 data
Register
10001
|
10050 10051
| 10100 10101
| 10150 10151
| 10200 10201
| 10250 10251
| 10300 10301
| 10350 10351
| 10400 10401
| 10450 10451
| 10500
Read/Write Data Type
R
Bit string
R
Bit string
R
Bit string
Continued on next page
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-65
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Type I/O Channel Data Status Information
I/O channel data
Channel 0001 data |
Channel 0050 data Channel 0101 data
| Channel 0150 data Channel 0201 data
| Channel 0250 data Channel 0301 data
| Channel 0350 data Channel 0401 data
| Channel 0450 data Channel 0501 data
| Channel 0550 data Channel 0601 data
| Channel 0650 data Channel 0701 data
| Channel 0750 data Channel 0801 data
| Channel 0850 data Channel 0901 data
| Channel 0950 data
Register
10501 |
10550 10551
| 10600 10601
| 10650 00651
| 10700 10701
| 10750 10751
| 10800 10801
| 10850 10851
| 10900 10901
| 10950 10951
| 11000
Read/Write Data Type
R
Bit string
Math Channel Data
Type Math channel data
Math channel status information
Math Channel Data
Channel A001 data |
Channel A200 data Channel A001 data
| Channel A200 data
Register
11001 |
11200 11501
| 11700
Read/Write Data Type
R
Bit string
R
4-66
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5.8
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Property area
Property area is a register area in which the data that can be read can be changed by
changing the channel property change register value.
Item Property area range
Description 440000 to 465000 (hold register)
Channel property change register
409091 (hold register)
Setting Register
Channel property change register
Type
Register
Property
409091
area display
information setting
Data type 16-bit signed integer
Supplementary description 0: Range, unit, tag name information of
continuous measurement channels 0001 to 6510 10: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 0001 to 0950 11: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 1001 to 1950 12: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 2001 to 2950 13: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 3001 to 3950 14: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 4001 to 4950 15: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 5001 to 5950 16: Range, unit, tag name information of I/O
channels 6001 to 6950 20: Range, unit, tag name information of
math channels A001 to A200 30: Range, unit, tag name information of
communication channels C001 to C500
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-67
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Property Details
Property 0 (for continuous measurement channel information)
Indicates zero for read-only registers and when registers are not present.
Unit Main unit
I/O channel information Channel 0001 information
Start register End register Register type
440001
440040
16-bit signed integer
Sub unit 1
Channel 0002 information |
Channel 0010 information Channel 0101 information Channel 0102 information
| Channel 0110 information Channel 0201 information Channel 0202 information
| Channel 0210 information Channel 0301 information Channel 0302 information
| Channel 0310 information Channel 0401 information Channel 0402 information
| Channel 0410 information Channel 0501 information Channel 0502 information
| Channel 0510 information Channel 0601 information Channel 0602 information
| Channel 0610 information Channel 0701 information Channel 0702 information
| Channel 0710 information Channel 0801 information Channel 0802 information
| Channel 0810 information Channel 0901 information Channel 0902 information
| Channel 0910 information Channel 1001 information Channel 1002 information
| Channel 1010 information Channel 1101 information Channel 1102 information
| Channel 1110 information Channel 1201 information Channel 1202 information
| Channel 1210 information
440041 |
440361 440401 440441
| 440761 440801 440841
| 441161 441201 441241
| 441561 441601 441641
| 441961 442001 442041
| 442361 442401 442441
| 442761 442801 442841
| 443161 443201 443241
| 443561 443601 443641
| 443961 444001 444041
| 444361 444401 444441
| 444761 444801 444841
| 445161
440080 |
440400 440440 440480
| 440800 440840 440880
| 441200 441240 441280
| 441600 441640 441680
| 442000 442040 442080
| 442400 442440 442480
| 442800 442840 442880
| 443200 443240 443280
| 443600 443640 443680
| 444000 444040 444080
| 444400 444440 444480
| 444800 444840 444880
| 445200
Continued on next page
4-68
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 1 Sub unit 2
Sub unit 3
I/O channel information Channel 1301 information Channel 1302 information
| Channel 1310 information Channel 1401 information Channel 1402 information
| Channel 1410 information
| Channel 1501 information Channel 1502 information
| Channel 1510 information Channel 2001 information Channel 2002 information
| Channel 2010 information Channel 2101 information Channel 2102 information
| Channel 2110 information Channel 2201 information Channel 2202 information
| Channel 2210 information Channel 2301 information Channel 2302 information
| Channel 2310 information Channel 2401 information Channel 2402 information
| Channel 2410 information Channel 2501 information Channel 2502 information
| Channel 2510 information Channel 3001 information Channel 3002 information
| Channel 3010 information Channel 3101 information Channel 3102 information
| Channel 3110 information Channel 3201 information Channel 3202 information
| Channel 3210 information Channel 3301 information Channel 3302 information
| Channel 3310 information Channel 3401 information Channel 3402 information
| Channel 3410 information
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Start register End register Register type
445201
445240
16-bit signed integer
445241
445280
|
|
445561
445600
445601
445640
445641
445680
|
|
445961
446000
|
|
446001
446040
446041
446080
|
|
446361
446400
446401
446440
446441
446480
|
|
446761
446800
446801
446840
446841
446880
|
|
447161
447200
447201
447240
447241
447280
|
|
447561
447600
447601
447640
447641
447680
|
|
447961
448000
448001
448040
448041
448080
|
|
448361
448400
448401
448440
448441
448480
|
|
448761
448800
448801
448840
448841
448880
|
|
449161
449200
449201
449240
449241
449280
|
|
449561
449600
449601
449640
449641
449680
|
|
449961
450000
450001
450040
450041
450080
|
|
450361
450400
450401
450440
450441
450480
|
|
450761
450800
Continued on next page
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-69
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Unit Sub unit 3 Sub unit 4
Sub unit 5
I/O channel information Channel 3501 information Channel 3502 information
| Channel 3510 information Channel 4001 information Channel 4002 information
| Channel 4010 information Channel 4101 information Channel 4102 information
| Channel 4110 information Channel 4201 information Channel 4202 information
| Channel 4210 information Channel 4301 information Channel 4302 information
| Channel 4310 information Channel 4401 information Channel 4402 information
| Channel 4410 information Channel 4501 information Channel 4502 information
| Channel 4510 information Channel 5001 information Channel 5002 information
| Channel 5010 information Channel 5101 information Channel 5102 information
| Channel 5110 information Channel 5201 information Channel 5202 information
| Channel 5210 information Channel 5301 information Channel 5302 information
| Channel 5310 information Channel 5401 information Channel 5402 information
| Channel 5410 information Channel 5501 information Channel 5502 information
| Channel 5510 information
Start register End register Register type
450801
450840
16-bit signed integer
450841
450880
|
|
451161
451200
451201
451240
451241
451280
|
|
451561
451600
451601
451640
451641
451680
|
|
451961
452000
452001
452040
452041
452080
|
|
452361
452400
452401
452440
452441
452480
|
|
452761
452800
452801
452840
452841
452880
|
|
453161
453200
453201
453240
453241
453280
|
|
453561
453600
453601
453640
453641
453680
|
|
453961
454000
454001
454040
454041
451080
|
|
454361
454400
454401
454440
454441
454480
|
|
454761
454800
454801
454840
454841
454880
|
|
455161
455200
455201
455240
455241
455280
|
|
455561
455600
455601
455640
455641
455680
|
|
455961
456000
Continued on next page
4-70
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Unit Sub unit 6
I/O channel information Channel 6001 information Channel 6002 information
| Channel 6010 information Channel 6101 information Channel 6102 information
| Channel 6110 information Channel 6201 information Channel 6202 information
| Channel 6210 information Channel 6301 information Channel 6302 information
| Channel 6310 information Channel 6401 information Channel 6402 information
| Channel 6410 information Channel 6501 information Channel 6502 information
| Channel 6510 information
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Start register End register
456001
456040
456041
456080
|
|
456361
456400
456401
456440
456441
456480
|
|
456761
456800
456801
456840
456841
456880
|
|
457161
457200
457201
457240
457241
457280
|
|
457561
457600
457601
457640
457641
457680
|
|
457961
458000
458001
458040
458041
458080
|
|
458361
458400
Register type 16-bit signed integer
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-71
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Property 10 to 16 (for I/O channel information)
The relationship between the property number and I/O channel is as follows.
Property number 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Unit Main unit Sub unit 1 Sub unit 2 Sub unit 3 Sub unit 4 Sub unit 5 Sub unit 6
Unit number (X) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
I/O channel 0001 to 0950 1001 to 1550 2001 to 2550 3001 to 3550 4001 to 4550 5001 to 5550 6001 to 6550
Indicates zero for read-only registers and when registers are not present.
"X" in the channel number is the unit number.
I/O channel information Channel X001 information
Start register 440001
End register 440040
Register type 16-bit signed integer
Channel X002 information
440041
440080
|
|
|
Channel X050 information Channel X101 information
441961 442001
442000 442040
Channel X102 information
442041
442080
|
|
|
Channel X150 information Channel X201 information
443961 444001
444000 444040
Channel X202 information
444041
444080
|
|
|
Channel X250 information Channel X301 information Channel X302 information
445961 446001 446041
446000 446040 446080
|
|
|
Channel X350 information Channel X401 information Channel X402 information
447961 448001 448041
448000 448040 448080
|
|
|
Channel X450 information
449961
450000
Channel X501 information Channel X502 information
450001 450041
450040 450080
|
|
|
Channel X550 information
451961
452000
Channel X601 information Channel X602 information
452001 452041
452040 452080
|
|
|
Channel X650 information
453961
451000
Channel X701 information Channel X702 information
454001 454041
454040 454080
|
|
|
Channel X750 information
455961
456000
Channel X801 information Channel X802 information
456001 456041
456040 456080
|
|
|
Channel X850 information
457961
458000
Channel X901 information Channel X902 information
|
458001 458041
|
458040 458080
|
Channel X950 information
459961
460000
4-72
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4.5 Modbus Function and Register Assignments
Property 20 (for math channel information)
1
Indicates zero for read-only registers and when registers are not present.
I/O channel information
Start register
End register
Register type
Channel A001 information
440001
440040
16-bit signed integer
Channel A002 information |
440041 |
440080 |
2
Channel A200 information
447961
448000
Property 30 (for communication channel information) Indicates zero for read-only registers and when registers are not present.
3
I/O channel information
Start register
End register
Register type
Channel C001 information
440001
440040
16-bit signed integer
Channel C002 information
440041
440080
|
|
|
4
Channel C500 information
459961
460000
Using Modbus Functions (Communicating with Modbus devices)
Item High limit range
Channel Property Details
I/O Channel Information Details
Start register End register Register type
440001
440002
32-bit signed integer
Low limit range 440003
440004
Decimal place
440005
440005
16-bit signed integer
Unit Tag name
440006 440014
440013 440040
Remarks When the computation type is Off or Delta: The span upper limit is output. When the computation type is Linear scaling or Square root: The scale 100% value is output. When the computation type is log input, pseudo-log input, or linear-log input: 0 is output. When the computation type is Off or Delta: The span lower limit is output. When the computation type is Linear scaling or Square root: The scale 0% value is output. When the computation type is log input, pseudo-log input, or linear-log input: 0 is output. When the computation type is Off or Delta: The span decimal place is output. When the computation type is Linear scaling or Square root: The scale decimal place is output. When the computation type is log input, pseudo-log input, or linear-log input: 0 is output. UTF-8 character string Up to 6 characters (15 bytes) A terminator is added to the end. UTF-8 character string Up to 32 characters (53 bytes) A terminator is added to the end.
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
4-73
Blank
Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5.1 Maintenance
1
5.1.1 5.1.2
Periodic Inspection
Check the operation periodically to keep the GM in good working order. Perform the following inspections, and replace worn parts as needed. · Is the display and storage functioning properly?
If not, see section 5.2, "Troubleshooting." ·If replacement is necessary, see section 5.1.4, "Recommended Replacement Periods for
Worn Parts."
Calibrating Modules
To maintain measurement and output accuracy, we recommend that you calibrate AI modules once a year. YOKOGAWA dealers can provide calibration servicing. For details, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Calibrating AI Modules
Required Instruments
To calibrate the AI modules, you need calibration instruments with the following accuracy and resolution.
Recommended Instruments
· DC voltage standard
: Must meet the following specifications (M/9100 by FLUKE or equivalent) Voltage output range: 20 mV to 100 V Output accuracy of output range: ±(0.01%+1 V) or better
Must meet the following specifications (for mA modules, Yokogawa
Meters & Instruments GS200 or equivalent)
Current output range: 0 mA to 20 mA
Setting output accuracy: ±(0.03% of setting + 5 A) or better
· Resistance standard
: Must meet the following specifications (ADR3204 by Alpha Electronics
or equivalent)
Resistance setting range (resolution): 0.2 to 1999 (0.001 ),
0.2 to 19999 (0.01 )
Resistance accuracy of the resistance setting range: ± (0.01% of + 2
m ) or better
· Digital multimeter
: Must meet the following specifications (for mA modules)
Agilent 3458A or equivalent
Current measurement range: 100 mA
Measurement accuracy: 35 ppm of reading + 5 ppm of range
· 0°C standard temperature : ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics or equivalent
device
Main specifications
Standard temperature stability accuracy: ±0.05°C
For information on purchasing these calibration instruments, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-1
5.1 Maintenance 5-2
Calibration Procedure
1 Wire the GM and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure, and adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the GM is at least 30 minutes). Note: The wiring diagram is an example for the universal, 4-wire RTD/resistor type. For details on wiring, see "Installation and Wiring" in the First Step Guide (IM 04L51B01-02EN).
2 Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity is within the standard operating conditions (see "General Specifications").
3 Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0, 50, and 100% of the input range and calculate the errors from the readings. For current (mA) modules, the error is determined from the difference between the measured value and the digital multimeter value. For the high-speed universal type, each channel needs to be calibrated. If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
You can also perform the A/D calibration and adjust the GM within the accuracy specifications. Follow the instructions in section 5.1.3, "Performing A/D Calibration and Adjusting the Input Accuracy."
Note
For thermocouple inputs, you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature.
DC Voltage Measurement
CH1
+
Hi Lo
DC voltage/current standard
Temperature or Resistance Measurement Using an RTD Three Wire System
CH1
A The resistance of three lead wires B
b
H L G
Resistance standard
Four Wire System
The resistance of four lead wires must be equal.
BA I C
CH1 H L G
Resistance standard
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Current (mA) Input
5.1 Maintenance
1
CH1
++
.
Digital multimeter
SAMPLE ERROR REPEAT STORE REMOTE ERROR
LOCAL ESC
POWER
NUM LOCK
GS200 DC VOLTAGE/CURRENT SOURCE
OUTPUT
V
1
2
6
7
UTILITY
3
4
5
BS RANGE
8
9
SETUP
0 LIMIT
MEASURE
END PROGRAM
STEP
DEL
HOLD
RUN
PROGRAM
mV
mA SRQ ENTER
SENSE
OUTPUT
Hi
32V MAX
0.5V MAX
32V 200mA
MAX
Lo
42V 10mA
PEAK
G
G TERM 250 V PEAK TO
DC current source
Temperature Measurement Using a Thermocouple
Copper wires
Thermocouple wires or TC extension wires
2 3 4 5
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
App
CH1
+
+ DC voltage/current standard
Copper wires
Thermocouple wires
Uses the reference junction compensation function of the GM.
(0°C standard temperature device ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics)
RJC of TC Input
As the measurement terminal of the GM is generally at room temperature, the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0°C. The GM performs compensation by measuring the temperature at the input terminal and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the actual output of the thermocouple. Therefore, when the measurement terminal is shorted (equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0°C), the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal. When calibrating the GM, this compensation voltage (thermoelectromotive force of 0°C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application. As shown in the figure, by using the 0°C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0°C, you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0°C reference from the DC voltage standard and perform the calibration.
Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-3
5.1 Maintenance
Calibrating AO Modules
Required Instruments
To adjust AO modules, you need calibration instruments with the following specifications and accuracy.
Recommended Instruments
· Resistance standard: · Digital Multimeter:
Accuracy: ±0.01% or more Allowable power: 0.25 W or higher Temperature coefficient: 5ppm/°C or less Resistance value: 600 or less Accuracy: ±0.01% or more
For information on purchasing these calibration instruments, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Calibration Procedure
1 Wire the GM and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure, and adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the GM is at least 30 minutes).
2 Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity is within the standard operating conditions (see "General Specifications").
3 Set the range type to Manual and the range to 4-20mA. 4 Manually output 4 mA and 20 mA, and determine the error from the measured values.
For measurements using voltage, the error is determined from the difference between the measured value and the digital multimeter value. If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Operation complete
Voltage measurement wiring
+ CH1 output terminal
.
Digital multimeter
Current measurement wiring
+ CH1 output terminal
Resistance box
current input terminal
.
Digital multimeter
5-4
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1.3
5.1 Maintenance
Calibrating PID Control Modules
For input calibration, refer to the AI module calibration. For output calibration, refer to the AO module calibration. For details on wiring, see "Installation and Wiring" in the First Step Guide (IM 04L55B0102EN).
Performing A/D Calibration and Adjusting the Input Accuracy of an AI Module
Preparing the Instruments
1 Wire the GM and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure, and adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the GM is at least 30 minutes). For details on wiring, see "Installation and Wiring" in the First Step Guide (IM 04L55B01-02EN).
2 Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity is within the standard operating conditions (see "General Specifications").
Operation complete
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-5
5.1 Maintenance
Universal, Electromagnetic Relay, Low Withstand Voltage Relay, Current (mA), 4-wire RTD/Resistor, High Withstand Voltage Type Wiring for DC voltage range
Short the input terminal of CH1 (apply 0 V)
CH1 CH2
++
Hi Lo
Input terminal of CH2
DC voltage/current standard
Wiring for RTD range
Short the input terminal of CH1 (connect 0 )
b
CH1 CH2
BA
A B b
The resistance of three lead wires
Input terminal of CH2
H L G
Resistance standard
Wiring Current (mA) Input Modules
Short the input terminal of CH1 (apply 0 A)
CH1 CH2
++
Input terminal of CH2
.
Digital multimeter
SAMPLE ERROR REPEAT STORE REMOTE ERROR
LOCAL ESC
POWER
NUM LOCK
GS200 DC VOLTAGE/CURRENT SOURCE
OUTPUT
V
1
2
6
7
UTILITY
3
4
5
BS RANGE
8
9
SETUP
0 LIMIT
MEASURE
END PROGRAM
STEP
DEL
HOLD
RUN
PROGRAM
mV
mA SRQ ENTER
SENSE
OUTPUT
Hi
32V MAX
0.5V MAX
32V 200mA
MAX
Lo
42V 10mA
PEAK
G
G TERM 250 V PEAK TO
DC current source
5-6
IM 04L55B01-01EN
High-speed Universal Type Wiring for DC voltage range
Wiring for zero-point calibration
Short the
CH1 input
CH1
++
terminals
Hi
(connect 0 ).
Lo
5.1 Maintenance
1
2
3
Wiring for RTD range
Wiring for zero-point calibration
A bB Short the
CH1 input terminals (connect 0 ).
DC voltage/current standard
The resistance of three lead wires must be equal. A B b
4 5
App
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
H L G
Resistance standard
4-wire RTD/Resistor Type
The resistance of four lead wires must be equal.
BA I C
Index
H L G
Resistance standard
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-7
5.1 Maintenance
Performing A/D Calibration and Adjusting the Input Accuracy
Adjustment is performed from the Web application. You cannot perform A/D calibration while recording or computation is in progress. A/D calibration is performed in A/D calibration mode. For details on switching to the A/D calibration mode when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see section 2.2.1, "Logging In," in the Advanced Security Function (/AS) User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Note
· When switching to A/D calibration mode, the GM restarts. When this happens, if the GM is configured to obtain the IP address automatically, the IP address may change after restarting, preventing the Web application from connecting to the GM.
· We recommend that you use a fixed IP address for A/D calibration. If you cannot use a fixed IP address, change the GM to Fixed IP address mode using the GM10 keys.
· Switching to A/D calibration mode is not possible with a User connection.
Switching to Fixed IP Address Mode
1. While holding down USER1, turn the power on. The 7 segment LED displays "C0."
2. Press STOP. The 7 segment LED display changes from "C0" to the system number indication. · Fixed IP address: 192.168.1.1 See page 1-68 in section 1.7.4, "Operation Mode" · To return to normal mode, turn the GM off and then back on (restart).
Adjusting the Input Accuracy Universal, Electromagnetic Relay, Low Withstand Voltage Relay, Current (mA) Input, High Withstand Voltage Type
1 Click the Config. tab and then A/D calibration. A screen appears for you to confirm the switch to A/D calibration mode.
2 Click Next. A Mode Switching dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The GM restarts in A/D calibration mode. Detected analog input modules (module list) are displayed in the left side of the content area. If they do not appear, analog input modules have not been detected. Reload modules Reloads and displays linked modules
Execute Calibrates the selected range
Password settings Displays a dialog box for setting a password
Module list
Selected module
End Returns to normal mode
Write Writes (saves) calibration values
RESET Returns the calibration values to their factory defaults
In A/D calibration mode, the GM10's 7 segment LED shows "A2."
5-8
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1 Maintenance
4 From the module list, select the module you want to calibrate. A calibration table for the selected module appears.
5 For each calibration range, enter the reference values according to the table below. Universal, Electromagnetic Relay, Low Withstand Voltage Relay, Current (mA) Input, High Withstand Voltage Type
Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 1 V 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V Pt100-H1 Pt1001 20 mA2
CH1 0 mV (short) 0 mV (short) 0 mV (short) 0 V (short) 0 V (short) 0 V (short) 0 V (short) 0 V (short) 0 (short) 0 (short) 0 A (short)
CH2 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 1 V 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V 160 400 20 mA
1 Range calibration of RTDs is not applicable to the electromagnetic relay type (Type suffix code -T1), low withstand voltage relay type (Type suffix code -L1) or high withstand voltage type (Type suffix code -V1) analog input module.
2 For only the analog input modules of the current input type (Type suffix code -C1)
4-wire RTD/Resistor Type
Range Pt100-H Pt100 Pt1000 20 2000
CH1 0 (short) 0 (short) 0 (short) 0 (short) 0 (short)
CH2 160 400 4000 20 2000
6 Click Execute. Calibration takes up to 20 seconds to complete. If calibration is successful, Value1 and Value2 values change to blue (light blue).
7 Repeat step 5 for every range.
8 When all the ranges have been calibrated, click Write. The calibration values will be saved.
To reset the A/D calibration values to their factory defaults, click Reset. You do not have to click Write.
10 To calibrate another module, wire the module you want to calibrate, and perform steps 4 to 6.
11 To return from A/D calibration mode to normal mode, click End. When a dialog box appears, click OK. The GM restarts in normal mode.
Operation complete
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-9
5.1 Maintenance 5-10
High-speed Universal Type
1 Click the Config. tab and then A/D calibration. A screen appears for you to confirm the switch to A/D calibration mode.
2 Click Next. A Mode Switching dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The GM restarts in A/D calibration mode.
In A/D calibration mode, the GM10's 7 segment LED shows "A2."
4 From the module list, select the module you want to calibrate. A channel selection for the selected module appears.
5 Select the channel you want to calibrate. A calibration table for the selected module appears.
6 Short the input terminals of the channel to you want to calibrate.
7 Click Execute under Zero for the range you want to calibrate. Calibration takes up to 20 seconds to complete.
8 Enter the reference value of the range to be calibrated according to the following table,
and click Execute under Full. If calibration is successful, Value1 and Value2 values change to blue (light blue).
Range 20 mV
Reference value 20 mV
60 mV
60 mV
200 mV
200 mV
1 V
1 V
2 V
2 V
6 V
6 V
20 V
20 V
50 V
50 V
100 V Pt100-H
100 V 160
Pt100
500
Cu10 GE
50
9 For each range you want to calibrate, repeat steps 7 and 8. 10 When all the ranges have been calibrated, click Write.
The calibration values will be saved.
11 Click Go back to return to channel selection. To calibrate other channels, select the channel you want to calibrate, and repeat steps 6 to 10.
12 To return from A/D calibration mode to normal mode, click End. When a dialog box appears, click OK. The GM restarts in normal mode.
Operation complete
Note
· Do not perform any other operations (especially turning the GM off) during calibration. The GM may malfunction.
If you perform any of the following operations, a special standby screen for A/D calibration mode will appear with message M8204 (see page 5-21 in section 5.2.1, "Messages"). · If you press Refresh on the Web browser in A/D calibration mode · If a connection is made to the GM10 in A/D calibration mode · While using the Web application, the mode is changed to A/D calibration mode from a Web
application of another Web browser.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1.4
5.1 Maintenance
Calibrating the D/A of AO Modules and Adjusting the Output Accuracy
Required Instruments and Preparation See page 5-4 in section , "Calibrating AO Modules".
Switching to Fixed IP Address Mode
1. While holding down USER1, turn the power on. The 7 segment LED displays "C0."
2. Press STOP. The 7 segment LED display changes from "C0" to the system number indication. · Fixed IP address: 192.168.1.1 See page 1-68 in section 1.7.4, "Operation Mode". · To return to normal mode, turn the GM off and then back on (restart).
Adjusting the Output Accuracy
1 Click the Config. tab and then A/D calibration. A screen appears for you to confirm the switch to A/D calibration mode.
2 Click Next. A Mode Switching dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The GM restarts in A/D calibration mode. Detected AO modules (module list) are displayed in the left side of the content area. If they do not appear, the modules have not been detected. Reloads modules Reloads and displays linked modules
Start/Stop Starts or stops the output of the selected range
Edit Writes calibration values
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Set the password. Displays a dialog box for setting a password
Module list
Selected module
End Returns to normal mode
Write Saves calibration values
Reset Returns the calibration values to their factory defaults
In A/D calibration mode, the GM10's 7 segment LED shows "A2."
4 From the module list, click the module you want to calibrate. A calibration table for the selected module appears.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-11
5.1 Maintenance
5 Click START for the 4 mA range of the channel to be calibrated. The GM outputs at the current calibration value. During output, the button changes to STOP. Output can be started simultaneously on multiple channels of the same module.
6 Click Edit for the calibration value (Count). A counter value edit dialog box appears.
Set the calibration value.
7 Set the calibration value, and click OK. The specified calibration value is written, and the corresponding value is output. Repeat the procedure until the multimeter reading falls within the values corresponding to the output accuracy.
Example of the accuracy range for voltage measurement (voltage drop method, resistance: 250 )
Range
4 mA 20 mA
Output accuracy range
3.98 to 4.02 mA 19.98 to 20.02 mA
Digital multimeter indication range (Resistance: 250 ) 995 mV to 1005 mV
4995 mV to 5005 mV
8 Perform a procedure similar to steps 5 to 8 to calibrate the 20 mA range.
9 To calibrate another channel, wire the channel you want to calibrate, and perform steps 5 to 8.
10 When all the channels have been calibrated, Click Save. The calibration values are saved.
To reset the calibration values to their factory defaults, click Reset. You do not have to click Save.
11 Click End to display a confirmation screen. Click OK to end A/D calibration mode.
Operation complete
5-12
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1.5
5.1 Maintenance
Calibrating the I/O of PID Modules and Adjusting the I/O Accuracy
Calibrating the Input
1 Click the Config. tab and then A/D calibration. A screen appears for you to confirm the switch to A/D calibration mode.
2 Click Next. A Mode Switching dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The GM restarts in A/D calibration mode. In A/D calibration mode, the GM10's 7 segment LED shows "A2."
4 From the module list, select the module you want to calibrate. An input/output selection for the selected module appears.
5 Click Input calibration. A channel selection screen appears.
6 Select the channel you want to calibrate. A calibration table for the selected module appears.
7 Short the input terminals of the channel to you want to calibrate. 8 Click Execute under Zero for the range you want to calibrate.
Calibration takes up to 20 seconds to complete.
9 Enter the reference value of the range to be calibrated according to the following table,
and click Execute under Full. If calibration is successful, Value1 and Value2 values change to blue (light blue).
Range 20 mV 60 mV
Reference value 20 mV 60 mV
200 mV
200 mV
1 V
1 V
2 V
2 V
6 V
6 V
20 V
20 V
50 V
50 V
Pt100-H Pt100
160 500
Cu10 GE
50
10 For each range you want to calibrate, repeat steps 7 and 8. 11 When all the ranges have been calibrated, click Write.
The calibration values will be saved.
12 Click Go back to return to channel selection. To calibrate other channels, select the channel you want to calibrate, and repeat steps 6 to 11.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
11 To return from A/D calibration mode to normal mode, click End. When a dialog box appears, click OK. The GM restarts in normal mode.
Operation complete
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-13
5.1 Maintenance
Adjusting the Output Accuracy
1 Select the Config. tab and then A/D calibration. A screen appears for you to confirm the switch to A/D calibration mode.
2 Select Next. A Mode Switching dialog box appears.
3 Select OK. The GM restarts in A/D calibration mode.
4 From the module list, select the module you want to calibrate. An input/output selection for the selected module appears.
5 Click Output calibration. A channel selection screen appears.
6 Select the channel you want to calibrate. A calibration table for the selected module appears.
7 Select START for the 4 mA range of the channel to be calibrated. The GM outputs at the current calibration value. During output, the button changes to STOP. Output can be started simultaneously on multiple channels of the same module.
8 Select Edit for the calibration value (Count). A counter value edit dialog box appears.
9 Set the calibration value, and select OK. The specified calibration value is written, and the corresponding value is output. Repeat the procedure until the multimeter reading falls within the values corresponding to the output accuracy.
Example of the accuracy range for voltage measurement (voltage drop method, resistance: 250 )
Range
4 mA 20 mA
Output Accuracy Range
3.98 to 4.02 mA 19.98 to 20.02 mA
Digital Multimeter Indication Range (Resistance: 250 ) 995 mV to 1005 mV
4995 mV to 5005 mV
10 Perform a procedure similar to steps 6 to 8 to calibrate the 20 mA range.
11 To calibrate another channel, wire the channel you want to calibrate, and perform steps 5 to 8.
12 When all the channels have been calibrated, Click Save. The calibration values are saved.
To reset the calibration values to their factory defaults, click Reset. You do not have to click Save.
13 Select End to display a confirmation screen. Select OK to end A/D calibration mode.
Operation complete
5-14
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1.6 5.1.7
5.1 Maintenance
Using a Password
1
You can use a password to allow only permitted users to perform calibration.
This is not available when you are using the advanced security function (/AS option) and
Communication of the security function is set to Login.
1 Switch A/D calibration mode, and click Password settings.
2
An A/D calibration Password dialog box appears.
2 Click On under On/Off.
3
3 Enter the same password in the New Password and New Password Again boxes.
You will need to enter the password the next time the GM is switched to A/D calibration
mode.
4
Operation complete
Note
Initialization does not initialize the A/D calibration password.
5
If you forget the password, you will not be able to perform A/D calibration. Make sure you do not
forget the password.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts
To ensure that this instrument operates reliably and correctly for a long time, we recommend that you carry out preventative maintenance by periodically replacing its parts. As you continue to perform this preventative maintenance over time, the parts that need to be replaced may change. Be sure to check with your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for information on part replacement. The recommended replacement periods for parts that wear down (parts that have a service life) are shown in the following table. The replacement periods listed here have been calculated under the assumption that the GM is used under standard operating conditions. Use these values as a guideline when you determine the replacement periods of the parts of your GM based on its actual usage conditions. Parts must be replaced by qualified YOKOGAWA technicians or technicians specified by YOKOGAWA, so contact your YOKOGAWA dealer when part replacement is necessary.
Item Battery
Replacement Model Period 10 years GM10
Name
Battery Assembly
Part No. Quantity
B8800ZK
1
Notes
*Replacement period when the GM is used at the upper limit of the normal operating temperature (50°C) The replacement period for aluminum electrolytic capacitors varies depending on the operating temperature and the GM specifications. When the operating temperature is 30°C, the replacement period may be 10 years or more.
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-15
5.1 Maintenance
Module
Electromagnetic relay type modules make measurements by switching mechanical contact relays on and off. To ensure that the modules continue to operate reliably and correctly, replace them periodically as shown below.
Module
Model
Measurement
Condition
Analog input module
GX90XA-10-T1N-3N Continuous use at
(electromagnetic relay type)
1 s scan interval
Continuous use at
2 s scan interval
Continuous use at
5 s scan interval
Replacement Period 1 years
2 years
5 years
Notes
The power supply module uses aluminum electrolytic capacitors. To ensure that the modules continue to operate reliably and correctly, replace them periodically as shown below.
Module Power supply module
Model GM90PS
Replacement Period 5 years*
Notes
*Replacement period when the GM is used at the upper limit of the normal operating temperature (60 °C) When the operating temperature is 30°C, the replacement period may be 10 years or more.
5-16
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1.8
5.1 Maintenance
Updating the Firmware
This section explains how to update the firmware of the Web application, I/O module, and I/O expansion module (expansion module). Updating is performed in update mode. You need to place the new files in the SD card in advance. You cannot update while recording or math is in progress. You can download firmware from the following URL. www.smartdacplus.com/software/en/
Data Files Applicable for Updating
Target Web application I/O expansion module I/O module (AI/DI/DO/DIO) Pulse input module AO module* High-speed AI module* 4-wire RTD/resistor module* PID control module*
* Release number 4 and later
Description Web application I/O expansion module firmware I/O module firmware Pulse input module firmware AO module firmware High-speed AI module firmware 4-wire RTD/resistor module firmware PID control module firmware
Switching to Update Mode
Note
· When switching to update mode, the GM restarts. When this happens, if the GM is configured to obtain the IP address automatically, the IP address may change after restarting, preventing the Web application from connecting to the GM.
· We recommend that you use a fixed IP address to update the firmware. If you cannot use a fixed IP address, change the GM to Fixed IP address mode using the GM10 keys (see "Switching to Fixed IP Address Mode" on page 5-8).
· Switching to update mode is not possible with a User connection.
1 Click the Config. tab and then Update. A screen appears for you to confirm the switch to update mode.
2 Click Next. A Mode Switching dialog box appears.
3 Click OK. The GM restarts in update mode. An update list appears on the left side of the content list. In update mode, the GM10's 7 segment LED shows "A7."
Operation complete
Note
If you perform any of the following operations, a special standby screen for update mode will appear with message M8203 (see page 5-21 in section 5.2.1, "Messages"). · If you press Refresh on the Web browser in update mode · If a connection is made to the GM10 in update mode · While using the Web application, the mode is changed to update mode from a Web application
of another Web browser
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-17
5.1 Maintenance
Updating the Web Application
1 In Update mode of the content area, select GM10.
2 Click Next. An Update (Web application) dialog box appears. The current version and the new version after updating are displayed.
3 Click Update. Updating will take place. When the process is complete, the Update dialog box appears.
4 Click OK.
5-18
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.1 Maintenance
5 To return to normal mode, click End.
1
When a dialog box appears, click OK.
The GM restarts in normal mode.
Operation complete
2
Note
When you return to normal mode after updating the Web application, the content area displays the
instruction "Please delete temporary internet files from the browser, close the browser and restart the application" appears.
3
To execute this instruction, perform the following procedure.
1 On Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet options > General tab > Browsing history > Delete.
Select the Temporary Internet files check box, and delete the files.
2 Close Internet Explorer once. If you do not close it and refresh the browser, the files may not be deleted properly.
4
3 Start Internet Explorer and connect to the GM. The update Web application will run.
Updating Modules
Note
Do not perform any other operations (especially turning the GM off) during updating. The module may malfunction, or the Web application may fail to run properly.
Collectively Updating
1 In Update mode of the content area, select Module.
2 Click Batch update under All modules. The module firmware is updated.
3 Click Next. The Update (All modules) dialog box appears. The current version and the new version after updating are displayed.
3 Click Update. Updating will take place. When the process is complete, the Update dialog box appears.
4 Click OK. 5 To return to normal mode, click End.
When a dialog box appears, click OK. The GM restarts in normal mode.
Operation complete
Note
If the main unit's expansion module version is earlier than R1.02.01, update to R1.02.01 or later before using batch update.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-19
5.1 Maintenance
Updating Individually
1 In Update mode of the content area, select Module.
2 Click the module you want to update. 3 Click Next.
The Update dialog box appears. The current version and the new version after updating are displayed.
The title of the dialog box will show the model of the selected module.
3 Click Update. Updating will take place. When the process is complete, the Update dialog box appears.
4 Click OK. 5 To return to normal mode, click End.
When a dialog box appears, click OK. The GM restarts in normal mode.
Operation complete
5-20
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
1
5.2.1
Messages
Error codes may appear on the 7 segment LED or Web application screen or in the error log while you are using the GM. On the GM, an error code is displayed with an alternating pattern: first the error type* and the hundreds digit of the error number and then the lower two digits (the tens and ones digits) of the error number. A list of the possible error codes and messages are given in the table below. Communication error codes and messages are also listed. Error responses to communication commands are output in English. * There are two error types: normal errors and system errors. Normal errors are indicated
with an E and system errors with an F. Normal errors include execution errors and operation errors related to parameter settings and communication application errors.
Note
· The 7 segment LED displays only the latest error code. Error codes that occurred in the past are cleared.
· When an F type error code is displayed, E type error codes do not appear. · You can clear an error code displayed on the 7 segment LED by pressing STOP. But, F type
error codes cannot be cleared.
Errors Related to Parameter Settings
· Setting Errors
Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 11 12 13
Description
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section
Incorrect date or time setting.
Enter a correct value.
The setting of the parameter is wrong. Please confirm specifications. Check the communication command specifications.
The input numerical value exceeds the set range.
Enter a proper value.
Incorrect input character string.
Enter a proper character string.
Too many characters.
Enter the correct number of characters.
The format of the parameter is wrong.
Check the communication command specifications.
String's length has exceeded.
Enter the correct number of characters.
The module does not exist.
Check that the module is installed correctly.
No specified input channel.
Specify a channel that is installed.
Exceeded the number of channels which can be set.
Set the correct number of channels.
14
The same channel exist more than one.
15
The specified number is set to manual.
16
Please specify at least one channel.
31
Invalid input value. (in ascending order)
41
No channel specified by formula.
42
MATH expression grammar is incorrect.
43
Invalid order of operators.
44
Too many operators for MATH expression.
45
Nonexistent constant specified in MATH expression.
46
The scale band is wider than 16 decades of the entire scale.
47
The scale band is less than 1 decades of the entire scale.
48
The combination of mantissa and index is wrong.
49
Invalid operator or operand used.
91
This username is already registered.
92
'quit' string cannot be specified.
93
String including space cannot be specified.
94
NULL cannot be specified.
95
User ID already registered.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Set a channel only once. Set the DO channel or internal switch Type to Alarm. Specify a channel. Set the calibration correction value to a value greater than the previous value. Check the channel number specified by the expression. Check that the expression grammar is correct. Check that the operator used in the expression in relation to the applicable operands meets the grammar requirements. The maximum number of operators in an expression has been exceeded. Reduce the number of operators, such as by splitting up the expression into multiple math channels. Check the constant number specified by the expression. Set the scale width to 15 decades or less. (See the Log Scale (LG) User's Manual.) Set the scale width to 1 decades or more. (See the Log Scale (LG) User's Manual.) Set the mantissa and exponent properly. (See the Log Scale (LG) User's Manual.) Check that the expression grammar is correct. Register another user name. Change the character string. Change the character string. Change the character string.
Continued on next page
5-21
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
2 3 4 5
App Index
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code 96 101 102 103 104 105 106 107
141 142 143
Message This user name cannot be specified. Duplicated port number. IP address class error. Masked IP address is all 0s or 1s. SUBNET mask is incorrect. The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address. More than one address cannot be specified. Number entered exceeds channel number range. Use another command. Duplicated loop number. Exceeded maximum PID group number. Invalid loop number.
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Change the character string. Enter a different port number for each function. Check the IP address. Check the subnet mask. Check the subnet mask. Check the IP address. Only a single sender is allowed. Check the syntax of the Modbus command.
Set them so that they are not overlapped.
Enter the correct loop number.
· Execution Errors
Code Message 201 Cannot execute because other users changed setting.
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Perform the operation again.
202 This action is not possible because recording or math computation is Execute after stopping recording or computing.
in progress.
203 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress.
Execute after stopping recording.
204 This action is not possible because math computation is in progress. Execute after stopping computing.
208 Control is in progress.
Stop all control loops. Stop all control loops.
209 This action is not possible because recording or control is in progress.
210 This action is not possible because control is in progress.
Stop all control loops.
211 This function is not possible now.
Check the GM status, and then execute again.
213 This function is not available with invalid user.
214 This function is not available with logged out user.
Log in and perform the operation.
221 This function is not possible because input number is over.
The limit is 50 messages (10 for free messages).
222 Failed to write while recording stopped.
Execute after starting recording.
224 Failed to write message to outside of data range.
Move within the data range.
225 Failed to print.
Check the printer and network status.
231 This action is not possible because saving is in progress.
Wait until saving is complete.
233 Data save is not possible because of insufficient media capacity.
Replace the external storage medium.
234 Invalid file or directory name.
Use alphanumeric characters and symbols.
235 This action is not possible because FTP transmission is in progress. Execute after FTP data transfer is complete.
242 End process can't proceed, because setting file is not saved to Media Change the storage medium.
243 Exceeded max number of change.
Reduce the number below the maximum number of settings that can be changed.
244 Configuration error.
Failed to change settings, initialize, or reconfigure. Execute the operation again. (An error occurs if the power is interrupted while the operation is in progress.)
245 Execution error, lack of key.
Set the encryption function to On in the Encryption/ Certificate screen of Init/Calib, and then create a key.
246 Failed to process input value.
Check that the module is installed correctly.
251 Invalid user name or password.
Enter the correct name or password.
252 The login password is incorrect.
Check the password. If the password is lost, the password must be initialized by an administrator.
253 A user already logged in.
There is a user already logged in with the same name or started the login operation.
254 This entry is incorrect.
The maximum number of login users has been exceeded.
255 Password entered is incorrect.
Enter the correct password.
256 Same password not allowed.
Specify a different password.
257 Password is incorrect.
Enter the correct password.
258 This function is locked.
Log in using a user account that has permission to use the operation.
260 This user name is unable to use this mode.
Users cannot switch modes.
Continued on next page
5-22
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Code 261 262 263
Message Wrong user ID or password. Log in failed, password expired. No change for default password.
264 This user ID and password combination is already in use. 265 Login inputs are incorrect. 266 Incorrect Bluetooth password. 272 This password became invalid.
273 Invalid user. 274 Please enter more than 6 characters. 281 Exceeds time deviation setting.
301 No modules to download the firmware.
302 Firmware file not found.
303 Failed to read firmware file.
304 Corruputed firmware file. 305 Invalid firmware version. 306 Mismatch module type.
307 Firmware download error.
321 Cannot operate specified loop. 322 Invalid control parameter. 323 Cannot operate in this control mode. 324 Auto-tuning in progress.
325 Auto-tuning failed. 326 Cannot operate in this control condition. 327 Cannot operate in this control settings. Check the control status. 331 Cannot change program mode. 332 Specified pattern number does not exist. 333 Failed to open the program pattern file. 334 Program operation already started. 335 Program operation not started. 336 Specified pattern number is not in program operation. 337 Cannot change current segment settings. 338 Program is not in hold operation. 339 Invalid program pattern file. 341 Exceed PV range setting.
403 Input Bluetooth password.
5.2 Troubleshooting
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Enter the correct user ID and password. Change the password. Set a password that is different from the default password. Set them so that they are not overlapped. Enter the correct login information. Enter the correct password. On the GM, because the wrong password has been entered consecutively for more than the permissible number of times, this user has been locked out. The account has been invalidated on the server. The account has been invalidated on the GM. The account has been invalidated on the server. The account has been invalidated on the GM. The time change made during recording exceeds the time deviation limit. Set the time within the Time deviation limit, which is set in Time basic settings of System settings. page 2-182 in section 2.26.4, "Setting the Time Zone, Gradual Time Adjustment, and Daylight Saving Time" Do not remove the module while firmware is being downloaded. Check that the firmware file exists on the specified medium. Download the firmware again. Check that the SD card is not damaged and that it is not disconnected while the firmware is being downloaded. Download the appropriate firmware from our Website. Download the appropriate firmware from our Website. Download the appropriate firmware for the module type that you want to update from our Website. Download the firmware again. Check that the SD card is not damaged and that it is not disconnected while the firmware is being downloaded. Perform the operation on the correct loop number. Enter a valid value less than the high limit. Check the control mode setting. Wait for auto-tuning to complete, and then perform the operation again. Check the process. Check the control status.
Check the pattern settings and control status. Perform the operation on the correct pattern number. Load or create a pattern file.
Select a pattern number that is running.
Check that the module is installed correctly. Check the PV range setting on the main unit and the pattern file. Enter the correct password.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-23
5.2 Troubleshooting
· Operation Errors
Code 501 502
Message Operation aborted due to media error. Not enough free space on media.
503 Media not recognized. 504 Media read error. 505 Media write error. 506 Failed to create the file. 507 No file or directory.
509 Unknown file type. 511 Invalid file or directory operation.
512 The file is already in use. Try again later. 514 No setting files. 515 A template file is abnormal. 516 Some items not set. 517 Media is read-only. 519 Template file not loaded. 532 No data available.
541 Printer not connected.
542 Printer busy. 551 Module was detached. 552 Detected newer version module. 553 Unrecognized module. 554 Fatal module error.
555 Non-calibrated module. 556 RJC error module. 557 A/D error module. 558 Activation required for attached modules. 559 Installed modules require update.
560 Module connection error. System stopped.
561 Module was detached. Please readjust reminder settings.
562 Detected pulse counter error modules.
570 The specified file does not exist. 571 The specified folder does not exist. 572 Deletion of the file went wrong. 573 Deletion of the folder went wrong. 611 System rebooted due to FPGA software error.
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Change the storage medium. Not enough free space on the storage medium, or the limit of the number of directories has been exceeded. Change the storage medium. Remove the storage medium, and set it again. Change the storage medium.
Tried to access a file which does not exists in the internal memory. Check the extension. Tried to delete a directory containing files. Delete the files and directories in the directory first before executing the operation. Wait until the file becomes accessible. Check the setting parameter file. Check the report template file. Check the error log. Make it writable. Load a template file. This error occurs when there is no valid data in the internal memory. Specify valid data. Check the printer settings. Check the printer and network conditions. Execute after printing is complete. Check that the module is installed correctly. Check the module version. Check that the module is installed correctly. If the same message continues to appear even after you perform the procedure above, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs. Perform A/D calibration. Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs. Activate modules. Check that the IO module version is R1.04.01 or later and that the expansion module version is R1.02.01 or later. Check that modules are not linked in a way that would cause the system to shut down. Check that the module is installed correctly.
If the same message continues to appear even after you perform the procedure above, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs. Specify a valid file name. Check the folder name. Change the storage medium. Change the storage medium. An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) software error or device error was detected. To prevent erroneous operation, the system was restarted. If the system does not recover, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
page 5-48 in section 5.2.3, "Auto restart when a device error occurs (release number 4 (version 4.04) and later))"
5-24
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
Communication Application Errors
· Errors Related to E-mail
Further details are provided by the character string (detail code) that appears after code.
Code Message
Character String Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section
651 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not
HOSTADDR
An IP address has not been assigned to the GM.
available.
Check the IP address settings.
652 SMTP server is not found.
HOSTNAME
The SMTP server host name is invalid. Check
the DNS address setting on the GM.
Also, check the SMTP server address setting.
653 Cannot initiate E-mail transmission.
HELO
Failed to log in to the SMTP server. Check the
654 Sender's address rejected by the server.
MAILFROM
user authentication settings of the SMTP server.
655 Some recipients' addresses are invalid.
RCPTTO
The recipient address was rejected the SMTP
server. Check the recipient address settings.
656 SMTP protocol error.
DATA
The mail body was rejected by the SMTP server.
Check whether the SMTP server is operating
properly.
TCPIP
Internal processing error. Contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
657 Ethernet cable is not connected.
LINK
The Ethernet cable is not connected. Check the
Ethernet cable connection.
658 Could not connect to SMTP server.
UNREACH
Failed to connect to the SMTP server. Check the
Ethernet cable connection.
Also, check the SMTP server address setting.
660 E-mail transfer error.
TIMEOUT
The response from the SMTP server timed out.
Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
correctly.
Also, check whether the SMTP server is
operating properly.
671 Could not connect to POP3 server.
POP3UNREACH Failed to connect to the POP3 server. Check the
POP3 server address setting.
POP3HOSTNAME The POP3 server host name is invalid. Check
the DNS address setting on the GM.
Also, check the POP3 server address setting.
672 Not able to login to the POP3 server.
POP3TIMEOUT The response from the POP3 server timed out.
Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
correctly. Also, check whether the SMTP server
is operating properly.
POP3AUTH
User authentication on the POP3 server failed.
Check whether the user name and password for
POP3 authentication are correct.
673 SMTP authentication failed.
SMTPAUTH
Check whether the user name and password for
authentication are permitted on the server.
674 The server requested an unsupported
ANOTSUPPORT Use the appropriate authentication method, or
authentication method.
change the server configuration.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-25
5.2 Troubleshooting
· Errors Related to FTP Client
Detail codes are not displayed for error messages on the screen. You can view them on the GM FTP log screen or
through an FTP log output via communication.
Further details are provided by the character string (detail code) that appears after code.
Code Message 657 Ethernet cable is not connected.
Character String Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section
LINK
The Ethernet cable is not connected. Check the
Ethernet cable connection.
691 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available. HOSTADDR
692 FTP control connection error.
UNREACH
An IP address has not been assigned to the GM. Check the IP address settings. Failed to connect to the FTP server. Check whether the GM IP address and the connection destination FTP server are set correctly.
REPLY
An error response was received from the FTP
server. Check whether you have privileges to
write files to the destination FTP server.
SERVER
An unknown response was received from the
FTP server. Check whether you are using the
correct FTP server.
693 FTP command was not accepted.
HOSTNAME COMSEND
The specified FTP server host name is invalid. Check the DNS and host name settings. Failed to send a command to the FTP server. Check whether the Ethernet cable is connected and whether the FTP server is down.
COMRECV
Failed to receive a response from the FTP
server. Check whether the Ethernet cable is
connected and whether the FTP server is down.
USER
The specified user name is not registered on the
destination FTP server. Check whether the user
name is set correctly.
695 FTP data connection error.
PASS CONNECT RECV
Password authentication failed at the destination FTP server. Check whether the password is set correctly. Failed to establish a data transfer connection with the FTP server. PASV mode may be necessary depending on the network environment. Check the PASV mode settings. Failed to receive data over the data transfer connection with the FTP server. Check whether the Ethernet cable is connected and whether the FTP server is down.
SEND
Failed to send data over the data transfer
connection with the FTP server. Check whether
the Ethernet cable is connected and whether the
FTP server is down.
696 FTP file transfer error.
FILE
File operation failed during file transfer. Check
whether the external storage medium is inserted.
698 Connection time-out occurred for FTP. 699 An error occurred for FTP
TIMEOUT
TCPIP NOFD
Connection with the FTP server timed out. Check whether the Ethernet cable is connected and whether the FTP server is down. An internal processing error occurred. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
NOID
PARAM
5-26
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
Note
·
·
The FTP client function on the GM has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes. If the server does not respond within this time period, the transfer fails. The FTP client function on the GM overwrites files without a warning if files with the same name exist at the transfer destination unless the server returns a negative response.
· SNTP Errors
Code 711
712 713 714 715
Message
Character String Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section
SNTP access failure.
ESEND
Failed to transmit data to the SNTP server.
Check the GM Ethernet cable connection and IP
address setting.
ERECV
Failed to receive data from the SNTP server.
Check the GM Ethernet cable connection and IP
address setting.
EDORMANT
An internal processing error occurred. Contact
ETCPIP
your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
NTP server does not respond.
ETIMEDOUT
The response from the SNTP server timed out.
Check the GM Ethernet cable connection.
Incorrect SNTP server setting.
EHOSTNAME The SNTP server host name is invalid.
Check the GM Ethernet cable connection, IP
address setting, and SNTP server address
setting.
Invalid SNTP server reply.
EBROKEN
The SNTP server returned an invalid response.
The SNTP server may in a condition that cannot
deliver time information.
Check the SNTP server status.
No time correction because excess time deviation with EOVER
The time difference between the GM and SNTP
SNTP server.
server has exceeded the limit for correcting the
time.
Check whether the SNTP server is running
properly and the limit for correcting the time.
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-27
5.2 Troubleshooting
· DHCP Errors
Code Message
Character String Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section
721 IP address was released because DHCP setting is REJECTING invalid.
722 DHCP access failure.
ESEND ESERVER ESERVFAIL ERENEWED EEXTENDED EEXPIRED
723 Registration of the hostname to the DNS server failed. EFORMERR
724 Deletion of the hostname to the DNS server failed. ESERVFAIL
ENXDOMAIN EREFUSED EINTERNAL ENONAME EYXDOMAIN EYXRESET ENXRESET ENOTAUTH ENOTZONE
The IP address obtained from the DHCP server was rejected. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. If the GM cannot accept the IP address obtained from the DHCP server, the GM rejects the address and immediately returns a response to the DHCP server. DHCP message transmission failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. DHCP server search failed. Check whether the DHCP server is available. The response from the DHCP server timed out. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. IP address renewal failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. IP address extension application failed. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. IP address lease period expired. IP address was reset to 0.0.0.0. Check the Ethernet cable connection. Check whether the DHCP server is operating properly. DNS message syntax error was found. Check whether the DNS server is operating properly. An internal processing error occurred in the DNS server. Check whether the DNS server is operating properly. Query to the DNS server wave rejected. Check whether the GM domain name setting is correct.
The GM does not support DNS servers that require host name registration authentication. Check whether the DNS server supports host name registration without authentication.
5-28
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
· Other Communication Errors
Code Message
731 Connection has been lost.
Character String --
732 The number of simultaneous connections has been exceeded. --
733 Communication has timed-out.
--
781 Failed to establish encrypted communication.
--
782 Communcation failed due to certificate.
--
783 Wrong validity certificate.
--
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section
If the GM receives data of improper protocol using general purpose communication (Ethernet or serial communication), the GM generates error 731 and disconnects the connection. (1) For an Ethernet connection, check the GM Ethernet cable connection. (2) For a serial connection, check the cable connection and the serial communication settings (baudrate, etc.). This message is output when an attempt is made to establish five or more connections to the GM using general purpose communication (Ethernet). (1) Reduce the number of simultaneous connections. (2) Check whether there is a connection from another PC. (3) Turn on the timeout function in server settings. This message is output when communication times out on general purpose communication. (1) Check the timeout value in server settings. (2) Reconnect to the GM. Check the key, certificate, communication settings, and host device. Failed to verify the certificate received from the server. Select the unverified certificate, and check the details. There is an error in the validity of the certificate received from the server or a trusted certificate in the device.
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-29
5.2 Troubleshooting
· Errors for When the Advanced Security Function (/AS option) Is in Use
Code Message 760 Invalid KDC client configuration. 761 Cannot find KDC server. 762 KDC server connection error.
763 Not supported by this machine. 764 Preauthentication failed. 765 The encryption type is not supported by this machine.
766 Failed to receive authentication from KDC server. 767 Change the password. 768 The time difference with the KDC server exceeds the limit.
770 The host principal is not registered. 771 The host principal is invalid. 772 The host password is incorrect. 773 Preauthentication failed. 774 The realm is incorrect.
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Set the host principal or realm name. The KDC server cannot be found in the same domain. An error occurred while the GM was connecting to the KDC server. Make sure that the network connection is not broken. Not supported by the GM. Enter the correct password. Also, make sure that the times on the GM and the server match. The GM does not support the encryption type, or the encryption type settings on the GM and the server are different. Use the same encryption method on the GM and the server. Check the GM and server settings. Also, make sure that the times on the GM and the server match. Change the password. Change the password of the user account that is registered on the server. There is a time difference of 5 minutes or more between the GM and the server. Synchronize the GM time to the time on the server. The host account is not registered on the server. Check the host account that is registered on the server. Make sure that the GM authentication-key password and the server's host-account password match. An internal error occurred during preauthentication. Disable the server's preauthentication function. Make sure that the realm name setting on the GM is correct.
5-30
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
Communication Errors
For information about the GM communication functions, see the Communication Command User's Manual, IM04L51B01-17EN.
· Execution Errors
Code 351 352 353 354 355 356
Message Command is too long. Unknown command. This command is not permitted in this user. This command is not permitted in this mode. The option is not installed. This command is not permitted in this setting.
357 Wrong command arguments number. 358 This command does not support a query. 361 Wrong error number.
401 A user name and password is required. 411 Exceeded number of selection.
412 No data exists.
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Check the communication command specifications.
Log in using a user account that has permission to use the operation. Check the communication command specifications. Log in using a user account that has permission to use the operation. Check the communication command specifications.
This is an unregistered error number. Please check the error number. Log in. In manual select saving, set the number of specified data files to 50 or less. Check that the file specified by memory summary and the like exists.
1 2 3 4 5
App
Index
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-31
5.2 Troubleshooting
Status Messages
Code
801 802 803 804 805 806 809 811 812 815 819 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 830 831 832 833 834 836 837 841 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 877 878 880 881 882 891 892
Message
Execution completed. Please wait a moment... Saving data to media. Loading file from media. Memory save to media stopped. Data save completed. Post process in progress. No unsaved data. Media mounted. Failed to mount the media. Wrong format media. Ethernet cable connected. Ethernet cable disconnected. Connecting to the line... Sending data file. Executing FTP test. Executing e-mail test. Now connecting to SNTP server... Querying to DHCP. Received ressponse from DHCP. IP address set. No hostname registration to DNS server in current settings. Registered hostname to DNS server. Deleted hostname in DNS server. KDC test connection succeeded. Login may be impossible in incorrect KDC client settings. Now adjusting the time. Saving Settings. Attached a module. Updating I/O module firmware. System reconstruction in progress. Executing A/D calibration. Initialization in progress. Writing the A/D calibration value. Resetting the A/D calibration value. Detected new modules. Required System Reconfiguration. Please set as recording channel. Noise may influence measurement in fast mode. Please acknowledge all active alarms before stopping this record. Changed the recording interval. Setting changes exceeded 50. Not possible to save beyond 100. Please save now. "Relay Action on ACK" setting of all DO channel will change to "reset". Not available for electric signature. Please set the certificate. Not available for encrypted comm. Please set the certificate. Chattering filter may not function. Please update module to R1.04.01 or later. Before saving these settings, register users in the User settings menu under Security settings. Time event setting has changed. Input time event time less than segment time. Reconfigure pattern data related to control loops (Starting target setpoint, wait settings, and segment settings) Initialized measured data and settings. Initialized measured data. Changed the language. Please reboot the system. Please reboot the system.
If E819 occurs, take the following corrective action. · SD memory card
Format the SD memory card using the SD memory card formatter distributed by the SD Association.
5-32
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
System Errors
Servicing is required when a system error occurs. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Code Message 901 ROM failure.
Description, Corrective Action, Ref. Section Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer
902 RAM failure. 911 A/D calibration value error.
for repairs.
912 A/D calibration error.
Check that the reference value is correct.
Check that the wiring is correct.
If the same message continues to appear even after you perform
the procedure above, servicing is required. Contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
913 Incorrect number for the A/D calibration.
Select a number of a module that has been detected.
914 Failed to write A/D calibration value. 915 Failed to receive A/D calibration value.
Failed to write A/D calibration values to the module. Check that the module is installed correctly. Do not remove the module during calibration. If the same message continues to appear even after you perform the procedure above, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs. Failed to receive A/D calibration values from the module. Check that the module is installed correctly. Do not remove the module during calibration. If the same message continues to appear even after you perform the procedure above, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
916 Incorrect A/D calibration procedure.
Calibrate correctly.
921 Memory acquisition failure.
Perform the following tasks.
1. Stop recording.
2. Save the measured data that is stored in internal memory to an
external storage medium.
3. Initialize the internal memory data.
If the same message continues to appear even after you perform
the procedure above, servicing is required. Contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
922 The ethernet module is down. 923 A hardware test failed. 924 The backup battery is low.
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
951 Data are not written at the flash memory area for
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer
production.
for repairs.
952 A SUM value of the flash memory area for production is
incorrect.
953 The reading of the flash memory area for production failed.
954 The writing of the flash memory area for production failed.
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
999 System error.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-33
5.2 Troubleshooting
Expansion Module Error Codes
Error F1
F2 F3 F4
F5 E1 E2 E3
E4
E5 E6
E7
E8 Px (x: 0 to 5)
Error Name Secondary boot read error
Firmware download error DRAM read error System data error
Ethernet error Unit number error Multiple expansion module connection Slot error Duplicate unit numbers
Download error Extended unit master mode error
EXBus connection error
Module connection error Module insertion and removal
Error Description
Corrective Action
Failed to read the secondary boot program of
Contact your nearest
the expansion module. There may be a problem YOKOGAWA dealer.
reading the flash RAM.
Failed to read the flash memory of the expansion
module.
There is an error in the DRAM of the expansion
module.
There is an error in the system data (MAC
address, product serial number) of the expansion
module.
There is an error in the EXBus controller of the
expansion module.
The unit number setting is incorrect.
Set the unit number in the range
of 0 to 6.
There are multiple expansion modules connected Install a single expansion
to the GM or a sub unit.
module in the correct slot.
An expansion module was installed to an in
Install the expansion module in
appropriate slot position when the module is
the correct position.
operating in slave mode.
There are duplicate expansion module unit
Turn off the main unit and all
numbers.
sub units and expandable I/O
units that are connected. Then,
reassign the unit numbers so
that they do not overlap.
Failed to update the expansion module.
Update the expansion module
again.
The master I/O expansion or slave I/O expansion Set dipswitch 8 of the expansion
operation setting of the expansion module is
module correctly.
incorrect.
A device other than an expansion module is
Disconnect devices other than
connected to EXBus.
the expansion module from
EXBus.
A module is installed in slot 6 or later.
Install it between slots 0 and 5.
Appears when a module is inserted or removed. --
x indicates the slot number.
5-34
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
Messages That the Web Application Generates
· Error Messages
Code Title
Description and Corrective Action
Message
E8001 E8002 E8003 E8004
E8005
Communication error A communication error has occurred.
Authentication error Login failure; the page will be reloaded.
Configuration loading error Failed to load hardware configuration. Auxiliary Message 1 There is a communication error or the hardware is
busy. 2 The configuration you are loading is not fully
compatible with the existing configuration of hardware. Configuration updating error Failed to update hardware configuration. Auxiliary Message 1 There is a communication error or the hardware is busy. 2 The configuration you are updating is not fully compatible with the existing configuration of hardware. 3 There are invalid MATH expressions. 4 This username is already registered. File The file name is invalid. Auxiliary Message 1 A file name can not contain any of the following characters. \"*/:<>?|'; 2 The length of file name is up to 32 characters.
This message appears when processing cannot be completed because Ethernet communication with the GM is not possible. Example: The communication is disconnected during login authentication. Check the communication environment. Check example: If the target GM can be found with IP Address Configurator, the target GM is in the same network as the PC. Check the IP address settings. Due to a change in the user registration settings on the GM, an authentication procedure has occurred while the Web application was running and has failed. Click OK in the dialog box to reload the page. This message appears when the Web application fails to load settings from the GM. The system configuration or settings on the GM have been changed, and a conflict has occurred with the settings displayed by the Web application. Check the system configuration and settings on the GM. Also, check the communication condition.
This message appears when the Web application fails to change the GM settings. There is a conflict in the system configuration or settings between the GM and the Web application. Reload the settings to align the Web application settings to the GM settings (settings that have been edited will be discarded). Error in expression. A user with the same user name is already registered.
Set the file name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
E8006 E8007 E8008
Configuration error Failed to operate due to communication error. Auxiliary Message 1 The configuration is not fully compatible with the
existing configuration of hardware.
Certificate Creation Error Failed to create certificate. Check the following. Auxiliary Message 1 Cannot use ! " # $ % & ' ^ | ; ? 2 The country name must be in alphabet a-z, A-Z. Authentication error Password entered is incorrect.
When AI channels are being configured, the available alarm range of channels that are set to Log scale are retrieved from the GM via communication. If a communication error occurs during this process, the available range cannot be retrieved, and this message is displayed. When this message appears, we recommend that, after communication is restored, you reload the settings. Failed to create a certificate.
The passwords entered for the new password and confirmation do not match when changing the password at login (when the password is initialized or when the password is expired). Enter the same character string for both.
Continued on next page
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-35
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code E8009
E8010 E8011
E8601 E8602 E8603 E8604 E8605
Title Message Authentication error This function is not possible now.
Program operation Program operation not started. Configuration error The input numerical value exceeds the set range.
Registration error The monitor name must be 1-16 characters in length.
Description and Corrective Action
This message appears in the following cases. 1. If the GM login settings (User ID On/Off and the like) has
been changed from somewhere else (when the login dialog box is displayed and when the Login button in the login dialog box is pressed). Log in again. 2. If a portion of communication errors (when communication is disconnected) occurs (when the standby display persists after the OK button is pressed) Take the same corrective action as 8001.
This message appears when you press RUN PANEL on the program selection screen when a program is not running. The screen does not switch to the program operation screen. This message appears when setting entry fails on the following setting screen. · Report channel setting (in Dual interval mode)
When the scan interval of measurement group 1 is 50 ms or less, there is a high limit to the number of channels that can be assigned to report channels that can be set from measurement group 1. This message appears when you try to enter more than this high limit. Use 1 to 16 characters to set the favorite monitor name.
Registration error
Delete at least one favorite monitor and start over, or overwrite
Failed to add a monitor because the maximum number an existing favorite monitor.
of allowed monitors has been reached.
Registration error
Because the favorite monitor information that the browser has
Failed to update favorite monitor information; this action detected is different from what is stored in the GM, registering, has already been performed. Please reload the page. overwriting, or deleting of the favorite monitor failed. Reload
the page.
Communication error Failed to operate due to communication error. Communication error
Communication error occurred. Please restart the web browser.
Operation failed due to a communication error. Check the communication conditions.
Follow the instruction below to restart the browser. 1 Close the browser. 2 Check the communication conditions. 3 Start the browser, and connect to the Web application.
· Warning Messages
Code Title Message
W8101 Clear the editing Are you sure you want to clear the edited content?
W8102
Reload configuration
If the display language is changed, the page will be reloaded.
Description and Corrective Action
This confirmation message appears when you edit settings and try to move to a different setting screen without clicking Update Config. This confirmation message appears when you try to change the language setting.
Continued on next page
5-36
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code W8103
W8104 W8105 W8106 W8107 W8108 W8109
Title
Description and Corrective Action
Message
Update configuration
Are you sure you want to update the hardware configuration? Auxiliary Message
This confirmation message appears when you click Update Config. in a setting screen.
1 Communication will be disconnected when you change Ethernet basic settings. If it be disconnected, please reconnect with new settings.
2 Communication will be disconnected when you change to HTTP Off. You cannot change HTTP On from the web application.
3 Communication will be disconnected when you change the port number for HTTP. After the configuration is completed, please reconnect with the new port number.
4 Change the communication security. After the configuration is completed, the page reload or user authentication are required.
5 Change user settings, including current log in. After the configuration is completed, the page reload or user authentication are required.
6 Not available for electric signature. Please set the certificate.
7 Not available for encrypted comm. Please set the certificate.
8 Bluetooth connection list will be cleared.
9 Before save this configuration, do the user registration
from security settings - User settings menu
Update configuration
This confirmation message appears after you change the
Restart is required to reflect this changes. Continue? settings when the GM needs to restart.
Reload configuration Are you sure you want to clear the edited contents by reloading the configuration? Destruction of editing Are you sure you want to clear the edited monitor?
Login user changed Login user has changed. The page will be reloaded.
This confirmation message appears when you click Reload in a setting screen.
This message appears for you to confirm whether to discard the current monitor and move to different content. If you want to save the monitor configuration, register the monitor as a favorite monitor, and then move to different content. Due to a change in the user registration settings on the GM, an authentication procedure has occurred while the Web application was running, and as a result, the login user has changed. Click OK to reload the page.
Hardware configuration
Hardware system configuration has changed. The information will be updated.
This message appears on the system information screen or network information screen when the system configuration changes on the GM. Click OK to update the information.
Limit of configuration editing
This configuration includes contents that could not be changed. Auxiliary Message
1 The hardware is recording data or executing math, so the configuration cannot upload.
2 The configuration you are loading includes the contents that cannot be changed from the web application.
This message appears when setting parameters are loaded. It indicates that restrictions will be placed on the configuration capabilities due to the GM condition or design limitations of the Web application.
Continued on next page
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-37
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code W8110
W8111 W8112 W8113 W8114 W8115
W8116 W8117 W8118 W8119
Title
Description and Corrective Action
Message
Limit of configuration editing
This message appears when settings are being displayed. It
The hardware was operated, so this operation will affect the configuration.
indicates that restrictions will be placed on the configuration capabilities due to changes in the GM condition.
Auxiliary Message
1 The hardware is recording data or executing math, so the configuration cannot upload.
2 The hardware was operated. The configuration is not fully compatible with the existing configuration of hardware.
3 The hardware is currently running control, therefore, the configuration cannot be loaded.
Save all
This message appears during all settings save.
Save files to the current folder?
Auxiliary Message
· Setting parameters, Report template, Trusted Certificate, Certificate
· Program pattern
Load all
This message appears during all settings load.
Load files from the current folder?
Auxiliary Message
· Setting parameters, Report template, Trusted Certificate
· Program pattern
File Delete the file?
This message appears when files are deleted from the saved/ loaded contents.
Reconfiguration
This message appears when performing reconfiguration.
· Reconfigure modules?
· (Caution) If the PID control module has been detached, relevant program pattern settings will be cleared.
Mode Switching
Exit current mode?
Auxiliary Message
1 This requires reboot the hardware.
This message appears when you · click the button that returns to normal mode in the information message 8203, 8204, or 8205 dialog box or · click the End button for the update content.
2 Current execution process will be canceled.
3 Confirm that hardware is not executing calibration.
Mode Switching Switch to A/D calibration mode?
This message appears when you click the A/D calibration mode button for the A/D calibration content.
Auxiliary Message
1 This requires reboot the hardware.
Mode Switching Exit A/D calibration mode?
This message appears when switching from A/D calibration mode to normal mode.
Auxiliary Message
1 This requires reboot the hardware.
2 Calibration values that being edited is discarded when their values which is not written in exists.
A/D calibration
Calibration values that being edited is discarded when their values which is not written in exists.
Encryption function On/Off
Are you sure you want to update the hardware configuration? Auxiliary Message
This message appears on the A/D calibration mode screen when you try to select another module when there are ranges for which the calibration execution results have not been written. This message appears when the encryption function on/off state is changed.
1 This requires reboot the hardware.
Continued on next page
5-38
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code W8120
W8121
W8122
W8123 W8124
W8125 W8127
W8126 W8129 W8130 W8131 W8132
W8133 W8134 W8136
Title
Message
Create a key Create the key. Switch to the key creation mode? Auxiliary Message 1 This requires reboot the hardware. 2 Creating key may take a while. 3 Delete the installed server certificate. Create a key Cancel to create the key ? This requires reboot the system. Auxiliary Message 1 This requires reboot the hardware. Unverified certificate Communication failed due to certificate. Auxiliary Message 1 Operation: Unverified certificate Certificate Installed certificate exists. Overwrite the certificate?
Limitation of Function Cannot use this function currently. Auxiliary Message 1 This operation is not permitted in this mode. 2 Cannot use this function when connected by
HTTPS. Communication Communication disconnected. Please reload later.
Mode Switching Switch to update mode? Auxiliary Message 1 This requires reboot the hardware. Mode Switching Changed hardware mode, reloading the page. Display Settings Layout may be displayed incorrectly in case of zoom is not 100%. A/D calibration Save calibration value? A/D calibration The calibration value is reset to the factory default value. Abort calibration without saving? Advanced security settings Are you sure you want to update the hardware configuration? Auxiliary Message 1 Data is initialized. Reboot the system ? Logout Are you sure you want to logout? Save all SETTINGS Same folder name exists, overwrite? Update configuration Multi batch settings have been changed. Auxiliary Message 1 Please reload after restart of the hardware.
Description and Corrective Action
This message appears when you try to create a key.
This message appears when you try to cancel while creating a key.
Check the certificate. You can display the details of a problematic certificate and execute authentication (or load) by using Unverified certificate from the menu. This message appears during certificate installation when a certificate is already installed when you are creating a selfsigned certificate. This message appears when you try to select a function that cannot be used currently.
This message appears while waiting for the results of processing when some time elapses after communication is disconnected. This message appears when you click the Update button for the A/D calibration content.
This message appears when the main unit mode is changed.
This message appears when the Web browser zoom may not be set to 100%. It appears once when you start the Web application. This message appears on the A/D calibration mode screen when the calibration execution results are about to be written. This message appears on the A/D calibration mode screen when you are resetting calibration.
This message appears when the advanced security setting is switched.
This message appears when the logout button is pressed.
This confirmation message appears when the folder name specified for all settings save already exists. This message appears when the Web application detects a change in the multi batch settings. Reload the settings to avoid conflict between the GM and Web application.
Continued on next page
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-39
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code W8137
W8138
W8139 W8140
W8141 W8142 W8143 W8144 W8145 W8146 W8147 W8148 W8156 W8701 W8702
Title
Description and Corrective Action
Message
Multi batch settings
This confirmation message appears when you click Update
1 Are you sure you want to update the hardware Config. in the multi batch setting screen.
configuration?
Auxiliary Message
System is rebooted. All initialization is done except log,
communication basic settings, and Communication
server settings. Is it OK?
Auto-tuning
This message appears when you click Auto-tuning (AT: OFF)
CAUTION: Do not perform auto-tuning for the following on the tuning screen.
processes. Tune PID manually.
Auxiliary Message
· Processes with fast response such as flow rate control
and pressure control.
· Processes which do not allow the output to be turned
on and off even temporarily.
· Processes which prohibit output changes at control
valves (or other actuators).
· Processes in which product quality can be adversely
affected if PV values fluctuate beyond their allowable
ranges.
Abort auto-tuning
This message appears when you try to stop auto-tuning while
Abort auto-tuning?
auto-tuning is in progress.
Measurement mode
Are you sure you want to update the hardware configuration? Auxiliary Message
This message appears when you click Update Config. in the measurement mode setting screen.
Data is initialized. Reboot the system?
Program operation (PROGRAM RUN/RST) Execute program control RUN/RESET.
This message appears when you click PROGRAM RUN/ RESET on the program operation screen.
Program operation (PROGRAM RUN) Start program control?
This message appears when you click PROGRAM RUN on the program operation screen.
Advance of segment (ADVANCE) Advance program to the next segment?
This message appears when you click ADVANCE on the program operation screen.
Hold Hold program operation?
This message appears when you click HOLD on the program operation screen.
Hold Release hold operation?
This message appears when you click HOLD on the program operation screen in hold mode.
Pattern number (SET PT NO.)
Change action pattern number into displayed pattern number? Update configuration
Measurement mode have been changed.
This message appears when you click SET PT NO on the program selection screen.
This message appears when the measurement mode is changed.
Auxiliary Message
Please reload after restart of the hardware.
Update configuration
This message appears when you change the following items
If this web option is changed, the page will be reloaded. from the Web option dialog box. · Language
· Control screen background
Web application
If using Chrome, this message is displayed if the zoom factor
Layout may be displayed incorrectly in case of display zoom or browser zoom is not 100%. It may be fixed by changing browser zoom.
in the Windows display settings or the browser is not 100%. The layout of the table header on the settings page can become disrupted. Changing the browser's zoom factor may alleviate the problem.
Favorite monitor
This message confirms whether it is okay to overwrite an
The monitor with the same name already exists. Do you existing favorite monitor. If you do not want to overwrite, click
want to overwrite it?
Cancel, and then register with a different name.
Favorite monitor
This message confirms whether it is okay to delete a favorite
Are you sure you want to delete \%s\"?"
monitor. The "%s" section will contain the favorite monitor name.
5-40
IM 04L55B01-01EN
· Information Messages
Code Title Message
M8201 Hardware configuration Hardware system configuration has changed.
M8202 Update configuration Configurations were updated successfully.
M8203 Update Mode Hardware is in Update mode. Please wait. Auxiliary Message 1 Module updating... (xxx%) 2 Modules not updated.
3 Web application updating... (xxx%) 4 Web application not updated.
M8204
A/D Calibration Mode Hardware is in A/D calibration mode. Please wait.
M8205
Key Creation Mode Created key pairs. Please reboot the system. Auxiliary Message 1 Key not created. 2 Key creation in progress. (xxx%)
M8206 M8207
M8208 M8209
A/D calibration
Executed successfully.
Create a key Created key pairs. Please reboot the system. Auxiliary Message 1 This requires reboot the hardware. Update Update completed. Mode Switching Returned to normal operation display. Auxiliary Message 1 Key creation canceled.
M8210 -- Media removed.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
1
Description and Corrective Action
This message appears when the system configuration changes on the GM.
2
The GM settings have been successfully changed.
This message appears in the following cases. · When a connection is made with the GM in update mode · While connected to the GM in normal mode, another Web
browser changes the GM to update mode This auxiliary message appears in the following cases. 1 When module updating is in progress 2 When module updating is not in progress
3 When Web application updating is in progress 4 When Web application updating is in not progress
Clicking Exit current mode displays W8115 and returns the GM to normal mode. While updating is in progress, the Exit current mode button cannot be used. Mode cannot be switched with a User connection. The Exit current mode button will be hidden. This message appears in the following cases. · When a connection is made to the GM in A/D calibration mode · While connected to the GM in normal mode, another Web
browser changes the GM to A/D calibration mode.
Clicking Exit current mode displays W8115 and returns the GM to normal mode. When returning the GM10 to normal mode, confirm that the GM10 is not executing A/D calibration. You can confirm by looking at the GM10 LED. Mode cannot be switched with a User connection. The Exit current mode button will be hidden. This message appears in the following cases. · When a connection is made to the GM in key creation mode · While connected to the GM in normal mode, another Web
browser changes the GM to key creation mode
Clicking Exit current mode displays W8115, cancels key creation, and returns the GM to normal mode. Mode cannot be switched with a User connection. The Exit current mode button will be hidden. This message appears when calibration is executed successfully.
This message appears when a key is created successfully.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
3 4 5
App Index
This message appears when updating is complete.
This message appears in the following cases. · When the key that you are creating is complete, and the GM is returned to normal mode · When the key that you are creating is canceled · When the update mode screen that you opened is closed · When the A/D calibration mode screen that you opened is closed This auxiliary message appears in the following conditions. · When key creation canceled This message appears when the external storage medium is removed from the GM10.
Continued on next page
5-41
5.2 Troubleshooting
Code M8211
M8801 M8802
Title
Description and Corrective Action
Message
Paste
This message is displayed when you click the on-screen Paste
To paste, please press Ctrl + v or paste from the browser button in Chrome.
menu.
Message
Message writing has been completed successfully.
The message was written successfully.
Resumption of monitors
The paused condition has been cleared due to a setting change
Monitors resumed operation following setting changes. in the GM that would cause the monitor to be initialized.
5-42
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2.2
Troubleshooting
The GM does not work (nothing is displayed).
Is the power switch turned on? Is the switch
NO
working properly?
YES
Is the power supply
NO
connected properly?
YES
Is power being supplied correctly? NO
YES
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
5.2 Troubleshooting
1
2
Turn on the power properly.
F.S.G.
3
Connect properly.
F.S.G.
Supply the power at the specified voltage and frequency.
F.S.G.
4 5
App Index
F.S.G.: First Step Guide
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-43
5.2 Troubleshooting
· The error is large. · The trend or digital values fluctuate. · The trend is off the scale on either the 0% or 100% side.
Does the input meet
NO
the specifications?
YES
Is the range/span setting
NO
appropriate?
YES
Taking measures
NO
against noise?
YES
Is the environmental temperature kept constant
NO
(TC input)?
YES
Is the input wiring correct?
NO
YES
Are there parallel connections
NO
with other devices?
YES
Is the RJC setting correct
NO
(TC input)?
YES
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Change the input to meet the specifications.
General Specifications
· Adjust the span and range (sec. 2.3, 2.4, 2.5). If you use calibration correction, check the set values.
· Separate the input wiring from noise sources.
· Ground the recorder. · Ground the object under measurement. · Insulate the TC from the object
under measurement. · Use shielded cables for input. · Change the integral time of the input
A/D converter (sec. 2.8). · Use moving average on the input
(Sec 2.3).
· Attach the input terminal cover properly. · Protect the input terminal from wind
or fans. · Keep the temperature fluctuation
near the input terminal to a minimum.
· Wire correctly (F.S.G.). · Install the terminal block correctly. · Fasten the terminal screws correctly. · Insulate the RTD from the ground. · If burnt, replace the TC.
· Disable the burnout function on other devices.
· Ground the GM and other equipment at one point.
· Disconnect parallel wiring (use a double-element TC, for instance).
Enter the correct setting.
Sec. 2.3
F.S.G.: First Step Guide
5-44
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Other functions do not work properly.
Taking measures
NO
against noise?
YES
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Some menus are not displayed.
5.2 Troubleshooting
1
· Move the input and communication
wires away from noise sources.
2
· Ground the GM.
· Use shielded cables for input and
communication wires.
· Insert an isolation transformer into
3
the power line.
· Insert a power line filter into the
power line.
· If an inductive load is used in
4
the alarm output line, insert a surge
suppressor in the line.
5
App
Are the conditions for
NO
displaying the menu item met?
YES
· Confirm that the necessary options are installed.
Index
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-45
5.2 Troubleshooting
Unable to connect to the GM10 from the Web application.
Is the GM10 detected by
NO
the IP Address Configurator?
YES
· Connect the GM10 and PC properly to the network.
· Enable only the network adapter on the PC that is connected to the same network as the GM10.
Is an IP address assigned
NO
to the GM10?
YES
· Use the IP Address Configurator to set the IP address.
Is the destination URL on
NO
the Web browser correct?
YES
· If the GM10's HTTP port encryption is set to On (SSL communication), change the beginning of the URL to "https."
· Attach the port number to the URL.
· If the Web application proceeds to the start screen and operation screen and then stops on the monitor display, see "The monitor is not displayed correctly on the Web application" in Troubleshooting.
· If the Web application still fails to connect, servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
· In some cases, immediately after you try to start the Web application, Internet Explorer displays a message "A problem with this webpage caused Internet Explorer to close and reopen the tab." If this happens, see the Note in section 2.1.4, "Starting and Closing the Web Application."
5-46
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5.2 Troubleshooting
· After performing from the Web application an operation that causes the GM10 to restart (e.g., switching to A/D calibration mode, turning on or off the encryption function),
1
the connection between the GM10 and Web application is disconnected.
· Use a fixed IP address.
2
Is the GM10 configured
NO
If a fixed IP address cannot be
to obtain the IP address
used, change the GM10 to Fixed
automatically? YES
IP address mode.
· To check the IP address, use the
3
SMARTDAC+ IP Address
Configurator.
· The GM10's HTTP port may have
4
Has the encryption function
NO
on/off setting been changed?
switched between http and https as a result of turning the encryption
function on or off. Set the URL correctly on the Web browser.
5
YES
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
· Unable to update the Web application. · Web application updating fails.
App Index
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Is the "WEB" folder in the "SYSTEM" folder of
NO
the SD card?
YES
· Place the "WEB" folder in the "SYSTEM" folder of the SD card.
Is the old "WEB" folder being overwritten with the
NO
new "WEB" folder?
YES
· Delete the old "WEB" folder, and then place the new "WEB" folder.
If you simply overwrite the folder, the GM10 may not detect the update file in the "WEB" folder.
Servicing is required. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
IM 04L55B01-01EN
5-47
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2.3
Auto restart when a device error occurs (release number 4 (version 4.04) and later))
If an FPGA error or other device error occurs, the system is automatically restarted to prevent erroneous operation. Data is not acquired during the auto restart procedure. In addition, an auto restart causes the measurement data file being recorded to be divided. When an auto restart takes place, an error message is displayed or an auto message is written and an e-mail is sent depending on the settings.
· Error message
When an auto restart takes place, the following error message is displayed. E611 System rebooted due to FPGA software error. · Auto message writing
If recording is in progress, the following message is written automatically when an auto restart takes place. FPGA error Time of occurrence Example: FPGA error 2018/08/31 17:15:30 · E-mail transmission
If the system error notification is set to ON, an e-mail is sent when an auto restart takes place. · Measurement data file
An auto restart causes the measurement data file being recorded to be divided. The Starting Cond. and Dividing Cond. for the division is indicated as "FPGA error."
Relay output and analog output caused by auto restart
· Fail relay, output relay (DO of DO/DIO modules and PID modules)
Relays are set to de-energized at auto restart. They return to their normal states when the auto restart is complete. · Analog output (AO modules)
Preset action on error takes place during an auto restart. When the auto restart is complete, a power-on preset action takes place, and the output returns to its normal state. · Analog output (PID modules)
Relays are set to 0 mA at auto restart. They return to their normal states when the auto restart is complete.
If the system does not recover with an auto restart or if an auto restart does not take place, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
5-48
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix
Appendix1 File Size of Event Data and Display Data 1
File Size
This section explains how to calculate the file size of event data files and display data files.
The calculation examples are given for the display data only and event data only cases. If
2
you are recording both display and event data, calculate the data size of each and add them
together. Use the calculated file size as a rough guide.
The calculations discussed here apply to a GM without the advanced security function (/AS
option) or a GM whose advanced security function is disabled.
3
A file consists of the following data. Information other than the sampled data + the sampled data + system information The size of system information can range from 1 to 100 KB depending on how the system is configured and other conditions. The maximum size of a single event data file or display data file is 18 MB.
Size of Information Other Than the Sampled Data
Item File format identification block File information block Event information block Time zone information block Alarm block Message block Control information block
Control summary block Control alarm summary block Batch information block Display information block Group information block Channel information block Calibration correction block
Time change information block Measurement data information block Measurement data scan information block
Size (Bytes) 48 112 304 48 104 + 56 × the number of alarms (Up to 5000) 72 + 200 × the number of messages 136 + 72 × number of loops + 40 × number of program patterns 104 + 64 × number of control summaries 104 + 64 × number of control alarm summaries 2360 224 24 + 264 × the number of groups 24 + 328 × the number of recording channels 24 + (40 + 16 × number of correction points) × number of recording channels (excluding math channels) 280 96 40 + 16 × the number of recording channels
The number of recording channels is the total of all the channels that are recording. The number of correction points is set for each channel (when correction mode is off, the number of correction points is 0).
Example 1: When recording data for 30 I/O channels, 10 math channels, 50 communication channels, and 10 group channels. Here we assume that there are no messages, alarms, loops, program patterns, control summaries, or control alarms.
48 + 112 + 304 + 48 + 104 + 72 + 136 + 104 + 104 + 2360 + 224 + (24 + 264×10) + (24 + 328 × 90) + (24 + 40 × 80) + 280 + 96 + (40 + 16×90) = 40,904 bytes
Sampled Data Size
· Data Size of Event Data and Display Data
Channel I/O channel Math channel Communication channel
Display Data 12 bytes/channel 12 bytes/channel 12 bytes/channel
Event Data 6 bytes/channel 6 bytes/channel 6 bytes/channel
Time data common to all channels is added for each sample.
Time data
16 bytes/sample
Appendix
4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-1
Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data
· Data Size per Sample
Event Data (Number of I/O channels × 6 bytes) + (number of math channels × 6 bytes) + (number of communication channels × 6 bytes) + 16 bytes (time data)
Display Data (Number of I/O channels × 12 bytes) + (number of math channels × 12 bytes) + (number of communication channels × 12 bytes) + 16 bytes (time data)
· Sampled Data Size per File
Event Data Data size per sample×data length/Recording interval
Example 2: When recording event data for 30 I/O channels, 10 math channels, 50 communication channels at a Recording interval of 1 s and a data length of 2 h
(30 × 6 bytes + 10 × 6 bytes + 50 × 6 bytes + 16 bytes) × 2 h × 60 × 60/1 s = 556 bytes × 2 h × 60 × 60/1 s = 4,003,200 bytes
Display Data Data size per sample × saving interval/recording interval The recording interval is determined by dividing the trend interval (in seconds) by 30 (50 if the trend interval is 5 s or 10 s).
Example 3: When recording the display data for 30 I/O channels, 10 math channels, and 50 communication channels at a trend interval of 30 min/div (the recording interval of display data is 60 s), and a saving interval of 1 day (24 h)
(30 × 12 bytes + 10 × 12 bytes + 50 × 12 bytes + 16 bytes) × 24 h × 60 × 60/60 sec = 1,096 bytes × 24 h × 60 × 60/60 sec = 1,578,240 bytes
Size per File The size per file is the sum of the size of information other than the sampled data and the size of the sampled data and the size of system information. Event Data Example 4: When recording under the conditions of examples 1 and 3 From examples 1 and 3, we obtain 40,904 + 4,003,200 = 4,044,104 bytes = 3.857 MB Then, add the size of system information (about 5 KB in this example).
Display Data Example 5: When recording under the conditions of examples 1 and 2 From examples 1 and 2, we obtain 40,904 + 1,578,240 = 1,619,144 bytes = 1.544 MB Then, add the size of system information (about 5 KB in this example).
App-2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data
Save Duration to the SD Card
We will estimate the duration over which measured data can be saved to an SD card when measured data is being saved automatically.
Event Data Save duration to an SD card (estimate) = (Size of the SD card/size per file) × [data length] Example 7: We will estimate the time until the SD card needs to be replaced under the conditions of examples 1 and 3. In this example, the size of the SD card is assumed to be 1 GB.
1 GB/3.857 MB × 2 h 1024 MB/3.857 bytes × 2 h 531 h 22.1 days
Display Data Save duration to an SD card (estimate) = (Size of the SD card/size per file) × [file save interval] Example 6: We will estimate the save duration to an SD card under the conditions of examples 1 and 2. In this example, the size of the SD card is assumed to be 1 GB.
1 GB/1.544 MB × 24 h 1024 MB/1.544 bytes × 24 h 15,915 h 663 days
Note
The available size of an SD card is somewhat less than the size indicated.
Time until the Internal Memory Becomes Full
If you are manually saving the measured data in the internal memory, old data is overwritten when the internal memory is full. The maximum number of files that can be saved to the internal memory is 500 on the GM10-1 and 1000 on the GM10-2. Depending on the file size, files may be overwritten before the internal memory becomes full. You need to save the measured data to the SD card before the data is overwritten.
Event Data Time until the internal memory becomes full (estimate) = (Size of the internal memory/size
per file) × [data length] Example 9: We will estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full under the conditions of examples 1 and 3. The internal memory is standard (500 MB).
500 MB/3.857 bytes × 2 h 253 h 10.5 days
Display Data Time until the internal memory becomes full (estimate) = (Size of the internal memory/size per file) × [file save interval] Example 8: We will estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full under the conditions of examples 1 and 2. The internal memory is standard (500 MB).
500 MB/1.544 bytes × 24 h 7,771 h 323 days
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-3
Appendix2 Types of Data Files That the GM Can Create and How They Can Be Used
This section will explain the types of data files that the GM can create and how they can be used. · If you are using the advanced security function (/AS option), see the Advanced Security
Function User's Manual (IM 04L55B01-05EN).
Data Type Event data Display data Report data
Manual sampled data Setting parameters Alarm summary data
Extension Format
GEV GTE GDS GTD GRE xlsx xlsm pdf GMN GNL GAL
Binary (undisclosed) Text format (TSV) Binary (undisclosed) Text format (TSV) Text (see appendix 3) Excel format Excel format (with macro) PDF format Text (see appendix 3) Text Text format
Display Method1
GM
Viewer
Yes
Yes
--
--
Yes
Yes
--
--
--
Yes
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Yes
--
--
--
--
Application Yes2, 3 Yes Yes2, 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -- Yes
1 Viewer: Universal Viewer, Application: Software application 2 You can use Universal Viewer to convert the data format and use the converted data on a
software application such as Microsoft Excel. 3 You can display data loaded from the GM using the communication function on a software
application.
App-4
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix3 Text File Data Format
1
This section explains the format of text files. The text files that the GM can create are display and event data files (when the data save format is text), manual sample data files, report files, and alarm summary files. Files contain values and character strings, each separated by a tab, in text format.
Format of Event and Display Data Files
Format
YREC
Measure Data
Version 1.01.03
Model
GM10
Language Code
UTF-8
Serial No.
SSS···S
Time Correction Done None
Sampling Interval NNN···N ms s
min
Trigger Point
NNN···N
Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header File ID
SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S NNN···N
NNN···N
Start Info
Unknown None
SSS···S
Manual
Key
End Info
Auto Black Out Trigger Unknown
Communication Remote Event None
SSS···S
Manual
Key
Auto
Communication
Extra Data
Black Out Trigger Meas Math
Remote Event Max Min
PlusOver NNN···N ··· MinusOver
Time Zone DST
Batch Info Batch Comment Batch Comment Batch Comment Text Info Text Field Text Field Text Field
: Text Field Ch Ch Id Tag Unit Type
Ext NNN···N On Off
NNN···N TTT···T TTT···T TTT···T
SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S
: SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S Meas Math Ext
Inst
January February March April May June July August September October November December SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S
SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S
: SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S Meas Math Ext
FirstWeek SecondWeek ThirdWeek FourthWeek LastWeek
Sunday
Monday Tuesday
Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
NNN···N
SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S
···
Message
··· ···
···
···
Message
···
···
January
February March
April May June July August September October November
December
FirstWeek SecondWeek ThirdWeek FourthWeek LastWeek
Sunday
Monday Tuesday
Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
NNN···N
NNN···N
Kind
Sampling Data TTT···T Massage Data
Inst Min Max
Inst Min Max
NNN···N NNN···N
··· ··· ···
NNN···N
···
Continued on next page
Appendix
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-5
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
TTT···T
SSS···S
None Key Communication Remote Event System Serial External Web
SSS···S
NNN···N : Number SSS···S : Character string TTT···T : Date and time
Common header Format header
Information header section
YREC Measure Data Model Language Code Serial No. Time Correction Sampling Interval Trigger Point Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header File ID
Start Info End Info Extra Data Time Zone DST Batch Info
Table header section
Measured data block Message data block
Batch Comment Text Info Text Field Ch
Ch Id Tag Unit Type Kind Sampling Data
Massage Data
Fixed character string File type Model name -- Serial number (up to 16 characters) Time change information Sampling interval Trigger point: 0 and higher Equipment tag (up to 32 characters) Equipment tag number (up to 16 characters) File header (up to 50 characters) First: Record start number Second: File serial number up to record stop First file: 1 and higher Start user name (up to 20 characters) End user name (up to 20 characters) -- Current time zone setting Current DST setting Lot number: 0 and higher Batch number (up to 32 characters) The entire block is omitted when batch is set to off. User name (up to 20 characters), comment (up to 50 characters) The entire block is omitted when batch is set to off. Title (up to 20 characters), text (up to 30 characters) Channel number (up to 4 characters) The character string "Message" is inserted at the right end. Tag number (up to 16 characters, spaces on the right) Tag name (up to 32 characters, spaces on the right) Unit name (up to 6 characters, spaces on the right) The character string "Message" is inserted at the right end. The character string "Count" is inserted at the right end. The number of messages (up to 4 characters) is inserted in the right most column. Message string (up to 32 characters), user name (up to 20 characters) If the number of messages is zero, the entire block is omitted.
App-6
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
File Output Example
· Event data
YREC Measure Data Model Language Code Serial No. Time Correction Sampling Interval Trigger Point Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header File ID Start Info End Info Extra Data Extra Data
Extra Data
Time Zone DST Ch Ch Id
Tag
Version 1.01.03 GM10 UTF-8 S5E701635 None 500 4 tag tagno FILE_HEADER_STRING 6893290432 Auto Auto Meas Math
Ext
540 On 0001 TagID_001
Furnace 1
ms
Key Key Inst Inst Inst
March 0002 TagID_002 Furnace 2
1 Admin Admin PlusOver PlusOver
PlusOver
999999999 MinusOver -999999999 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
999999999 MinusOver -999999999
SecondWeek Sunday 2
0101
0102
Message
TagID_003 TagID_004
Furnace 3 Furnace 4
November
FirstWeek Sunday 2 -60
Unit
°C
°C
°C
°C
Type
Meas
Meas
Meas
Meas
Message
Kind
Inst
Inst
Inst
Inst
Count
Sampling Data
2012/12/12 14:50:00_000 153.2
153.3
153.2
153.3
1
2012/12/12 14:50:00_500 153.3
153.4
153.3
153.4
0
2012/12/12 14:50:01_000 153.4
153.5
153.4
153.5
2
2012/12/12 14:50:01_500 153.5
153.6
153.5
153.6
0
2012/12/12 14:50:02_000 153.6
153.7
153.6
153.7
0
Massage Data
2012/12/12 14:50:01_000 Message 2
Communication Admin2
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-7
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
· Display data
YREC Measure Data Model Language Code Serial No. Time Correction Sampling Interval Trigger Point Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header File ID Start Info End Info Extra Data Extra Data
Version 1.01.02
GM10
UTF-8
S5E701635
None
1
s
4
tag
tagno
FILE_HEADER_STRING
34295620394
1
Auto
Key
Auto
Key
Meas
Max
Meas
Min
Admin Admin PlusOver PlusOver
999999999 MinusOver -999999999 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
Extra Data Extra Data Extra Data Extra Data Time Zone DST Batch Info Batch Comment
Batch Comment
Batch Comment
Text Info Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Text Field Ch Ch Id Tag
Math Math Ext Ext 540 On 000002 2012/12/12 14:50:00 2012/12/12 14:50:00 2012/12/12 14:50:00
title1 title2 title3 title4 title5 title6 title7 title8 title9 title10 title11 title12 title13 title14 title15 title16 title17 title18 title19 title20 title21 title22 title23 title24 0001 TagID_001 Furnace 1
Max
PlusOver 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
Min
PlusOver 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
Max
PlusOver 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
Min
PlusOver 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
March
SecondWeek Sunday
2
batch-name-no.
Admin1
comment1
November FirstWeek Sunday 2
-60
Admin1
comment2
Admin1
comment3
text1 text2 text3 text4 text5 text6 text7 text8 text9 text10 text11 text12 text13 text14 text15 text16 text17 text18 text19 text20 text21 text22 text23 text24 0001 TagID_001 Furnace 1
A001 TagID_002 Furnace 2
A001
C002
C002
TagID_002 TagID_003 TagID_003
Furnace 2 Furnace 3 Furnace 3
Message
Unit
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
Type
Meas
Meas
Math
Math
Ext
Ext
Message
Kind
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Count
Sampling Data
2012/12/12 14:50:00 153.2
153.3
153.2
153.3
153.2
153.3
1
2012/12/12 14:50:01 153.3
153.4
153.3
153.4
153.3
153.4
0
2012/12/12 14:50:02 153.4
153.5
153.4
153.5
153.4
153.5
2
2012/12/12 14:50:03 153.5
153.6
153.5
153.6
153.5
153.6
0
2012/12/12 14:50:04 153.6
153.7
153.6
153.7
153.6
153.7
0
Massage Data
2012/12/12 14:50:02 Message 2
Communication Admin2
App-8
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
Format of Manual Sample Data Files
· Manual sample data files contain values and character strings, each separated by a tab, in text format.
· Values of I/O channels set to Skip and math and communication channels set to Off are not output.
· The data is appended to the file each time manual sample operation is performed.
Format
YREC Manual Sample Data Language Code Model File Status
Serial No. Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header Extra Data Time Zone DST
Version 1.04.00 UTF-8 GM10 Complete Progress Decrease SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S SSS···S (omitted) Inst NNN···N On Off
Ch Ch Id Tag
SSS···S ··· SSS···S ··· SSS···S ···
PlusOver NNN···N MinusOver NNN···N
January FirstWeek Sunday
February SecondWeek Monday
March
ThirdWeek Tuesday
April
FourthWeek Wednesday
May
LastWeek Thursday
June
Friday
July
Saturday
August
September
October
November
December
NNN···N
January FirstWeek
February SecondWeek
March
ThirdWeek
April
FourthWeek
May
LastWeek
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
Unit
SSS···S ···
TTT···T
NNN···N ···
NNN···N
NNN···N
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
NNN···N : Number SSS···S : Character string TTT···T : Date and time
File Output Example
YREC Manual Sample Data Language Code Model File Status Serial No. Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header Extra Data Time Zone DST Ch Ch Id Tag
Version 1.04.00 UTF-8 GM10 Progress S5KC09223 tag tagno
Inst
PlusOver 999999999 MinusOver -999999999
540
On
February SecondWeek Sunday
20
September ThirdWeek 20
-60
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
chid001001 chid001002 chid001003 chid001004 chid001005 chid001006 chid001007 chid001008
Unit
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2012/12/12 14:50:01 0
0
-0.0001 -0.0003 -0.0005 -0.0007 -0.0009 -0.0002
2012/12/12 14:51:01 0
0
-0.0002 -0.0004 -0.0006 -0.0008 -0.0001 -0.0003
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-9
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
Note
· File status Complete: Completed (100 manual sample data entries have been stored, and the file is closed.) Progress: Progress: Data is being added. (The number of stored data entries has not reached 100 files, and the file is open.) Decrease: Corrupted. (Some of the manual sample data in the file are missing.)
· Output when channel data is in the condition shown in the table below
Data Condition Error +Overrange Burnout +Display over +Computation over Overrange Burnout Display over Computation over
Data Handling Error +Over
Over
Output (Space) Value indicated for PlusOver in the Extra Data information header section
Value indicated for MinusOver in the Extra Data information header section
· A new manual sampled data file is created in the following cases.
· The range of an I/O channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel was changed from some range other than Skip to Skip.
· The range of an I/O channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel was changed from Skip to some range other than Skip.
· A math or communication channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel was changed from On to Off or from Off to On.
· The unit of a channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel was changed. · When the settings of a manual sampling recording channel are changed. · When an AI channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel is changed from the DI
range (calculation is not set to linear scaling) to some other range, or vice versa. · When a DI channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel is changed from linear
scaling calculation to some other setting, or vice versa. · When the decimal place of a channel configured as a manual sampling recording channel is
changed.
App-10
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
Report File Format (/MT option)
·Hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly report files contain values and character strings, each separated by a tab, in text format.
· Values of I/O channels set to Skip and math and communication channels set to Off are not output.
· The data is appended to this file every time a report is created.
YREC Report Data Language Code Model File Statas Serial No. Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header Extra Data
Report Set
File Data
Math Set
Start Time Time Zone DST
Ch Ch Id Tag Unit Data Type
Time
Format
Version 1.04.00
UTF-8
GM10
Complete
Progress
Decrese
SSS···S
SSS···S
SSS···S
SSS···S
(omitted)
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Inst
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly
Batch
DailyCustom
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly
Batch
DailyCustom
Ave
···
Max
Min
Sum
Inst
TTT···T
NNN···N
On
Off
SSS···S
···
SSS···S
···
SSS···S
···
SSS···S
···
Free
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Batch
DailyCustom
TTT···T
PlusOver NNN···N
MinusOver NNN···N
January FirstWeek
February SecondWeek
March April May June
ThirdWeek FourthWeek LastWeek
July
August
September October November
December
Sunday NNN···N Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
January FirstWeek
February SecondWeek
March April May June
ThirdWeek FourthWeek LastWeek
July
August
September October November
December
Sunday NNN···N Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
NNN···N
Elapsed Time* Status
(Data attribute identifier) IM 04L55B01-01EN
(omitted) Bo Er Ov Pw Cg NNN···N
TTT···T ···
···
App-11
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
NNN···N : Number SSS···S : Character string TTT···T : Date and time
* Elapsed time is used for batch reports.
Output Example
· Hourly (hourly + daily) recording with file set to Separate
YREC
Report Data Version 1.04.00
Language Code UTF-8
Model
GM10
File Statas Complete
Serial No. S5KC09223
Equip Tag
tag
Equip TagNo. tagno
File Header
Extra Data
Ave
PlusOver
999999999
MinusOver
-999999999
Extra Data
Max
PlusOver
999999999
MinusOver
-999999999
Extra Data
Min
PlusOver
999999999
MinusOver
-999999999
Extra Data
Inst
PlusOver
999999999
MinusOver
-999999999
Report Set Hourly+Daily
File Data
Hourly
Math Set
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Start Time 2012/12/12 11:01:01
Time Zone
540
DST
On
February
SecondWeek Sunday
20
September
ThirdWeek
20
-60
Ch
0001
0002
0003
0004
A001
A002
A003
C001
Ch Id
chid001001 chid001002 chid001003 chid001004 chid001005 chid001006 chid001007 chid001008
Tag
Point A
Point B
Point C
Point D
Point A Math Point B Math Point C Math Com
Unit
V
V
V
V
°C
°C
°C
V
Data Type
Hourly
Time
2012/12/12 12:00:00
Status
Ave
0.0001
0.5010
0.7397
-1.0001
122.6
20.08
-20.98
0.2001
Max
1.9983
0.9989
1.4995
0.0010
123.4
22.02
-20.01
0.8887
Min
-1.9959
-0.0053
-0.1005
-1.9952
120.3
19.79
-24.00
-0.3345
Sum
0.353900E+00 1.773039E+03 2.617798E+03 -3.53935E-03 4.338814E+05 7.099234E+04 -7.424822E-04 7.081539E+02
Data Type
Hourly
Time
2012/12/12 12:06:01
Status
Ave
0.0002
0.5011
0.3301
-1.4423
121.3
20.20
-21.21
0.4411
Max
1.9984
0.9990
1.4995
0.0001
122.4
21.98
-20.95
0.8898
Min
-1.9959
-0.0055
-1.4005
-1.994
120.09
19.00
-22.22
-0.1121
Sum
0.072200E+00 1.808971E+02 1.191661E+02 -5.206703E-02 4.378930E+04 7.292200E+03 -7.656810E-03 1.592371E+02
App-12
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
· Batch Report
YREC
Report Data Version 1.04.00
Language Code UTF-8
Model
GM10
File Statas Complete
Serial No. S5KC09223
Equip Tag
tag
Equip TagNo. tagno
File Header
Extra Data
Ave
PlusOver
Extra Data
Max
PlusOver
Extra Data
Min
PlusOver
Extra Data Report Set
Batch
Inst
PlusOver
File Data
Batch
Math Set
Ave
Max
Min
Start Time 2012/12/12 11:01:01
Time Zone
540
DST
On
February
SecondWeek
Ch
0001
0002
0003
Ch Id
chid001001 chid001002 chid001003
Tag
Unit
V
V
V
Data Type
Batch
Elapsed Time
0000 00:10:00
Status
Ave
0.0001
0.5010
0.7397
Max
1.9983
0.9989
1.4995
Min
-1.9983
-0.0033
-0.1005
Sum
6.000000E-02 3.006000E+02 4.438200E+02
Data Type
Batch
Elapsed Time
0000 00:15:30
Status
Ave
0.0021
0.5110
0.7362
Max
1.9950
0.9987
1.4991
Min
-1.9989
-0.0053
-0.0997
Sum
6.930000E+00 1.818300E+02 2.429460E+02
Data Type
Free
Elapsed Time
0000 00:15:30
Status
Ave
0.0008
0.5187
0.7374
Max
1.9950
0.9989
1.4995
Min
-1.9989
-0.0053
-0.1005
Sum
7.530000E-01 4.824300E+02 6.858210E+02
999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
MinusOver MinusOver MinusOver MinusOver
-999999999 -999999999 -999999999 -999999999
Sum
Sunday 0004 chid001004
V
20 A001 chid001005
September A002 chid001006
°C
°C
-1.0001 0.0010 -1.9952 -6.000600E+02
122.6
20.08
123.4
22.02
120.3
19.79
7.356000E+04 1.204800E+04
-1.0005 0.0011 -1.9960 3.301650E+02
98.5
20.51
105.2
21.01
70.5
20.01
3.250500E+04 6.768300E+03
-1.0002
114.0
20.23
0.0011
123.4
22.02
-1.9952
70.5
19.79
-9.3022500E+02 1.060650E+05 1.881630E+04
ThirdWeek A003 chid001007
°C
20
-60
C001
chid001008
V
-20.98
0.2001
-20.01
0.8887
-24.00
-0.3345
-1.258800E+04 1.206000E+02
-20.42
0.1999
-19.99
0.8802
-23.89
-0.3321
-6.738600E+03 6.596700E+01
-20.78
0.2000
-19.99
0.8887
-24.00
-0.3345
-1.932660E+04 1.860270E+02
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-13
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
Note
· When the channel data is in the condition shown in the table below, the Er, Ov, or Bo status is output to a report.
Data detection condition during report computation
Status
Error
Er
Over range data detection (including computation overflow of a math Ov
channel)
Burnout
Bo
Power failure
Pw
Time change
Cg
· The report output value of Ave, Max, Min, Sum, and Inst varies depending on the channel data condition as shown in the table below.
Item Max, Min, Inst
Ave
Sum, Ave
Data Condition Error/When there are no valid data +Over1
Over1
When there are no valid data When the valid range is exceeded during computation +Over1
Over1
When there are no valid data When the valid range is exceeded during computation
Report Output Value (Space) Value indicated for PlusOver in the Extra Data information header section Value indicated for MinusOver in the Extra Data information header section (Space)
Value indicated for PlusOver in the Extra Data information header section Value indicated for MinusOver in the Extra Data information header section (Space)
1 +Over, Over +Over
Over
+Overrange Burnout +Display over Overrange Burnout Display over
App-14
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format
Alarm Summary Format
· Files contain values and character strings, each separated by a tab, in text format. · Values of I/O channels set to Skip and math and communication channels set to Off are
not output.
Format
YREC
Alarm Summary Data Version 1.01.00
Language Code
UTF-8
Model
GM10
Serial No. Equip Tag
SSS···S SSS···S
Equip TagNo.
SSS···S
File Header
SSS···S
Time Zone DST
NNN···N On
January
Off
February
March
April May June
July
August
September October November
December
Alarm Data TTT···T
On
SSS···S
Off
Ack
FirstWeek SecondWeek ThirdWeek FourthWeek LastWeek
Sunday
Monday Tuesday
Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
NNN···N
January
February March
April May June July August September October November
December
FirstWeek SecondWeek ThirdWeek FourthWeek LastWeek
Sunday
Monday Tuesday
Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
NNN···N
NNN···N
SSS···S
SSS···S
NNN···N : Number SSS···S : Character string TTT···T : Date and time
Output Example
YREC
Alarm Summary Data Version 1.01.00
Language Code
UTF-8
Model
GM10
Serial No.
S5KC09223
Equip Tag Equip TagNo. File Header
tag tagno
Time Zone
540
DST
On
February
SecondWeek Sunday
20
September ThirdWeek 20
-60
Alarm Data
2012/12/12 11:01:10 On
0001
1
H
2012/12/12 11:01:12 Off
0001
1
H
2012/12/12 11:01:14 Ack
All
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-15
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
Creating Report Templates for Report Files in Excel Format
To create a report template, enter keywords and text in the cells of an Excel file. Keywords specify the type of data that will be entered into a cell. Text are output as they are in reports. Save the report templates that you create in Excel format (.xlsx extension) or Excel macro format (.xlsm extension).
Function: See page 2-129 in section 2.18, "Using the Report Template Function (/MT option)". Setup: See page 2-124 in section 2.17, "Configuring the Report Function (/MT option)" Loading and saving report templates: See page 2-195 in section 2.28.3, "Saving and Loading Report Templates (/MT option)"
Template Example
Channel number Name Unit $ReportDataTime(Hour)$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$
$Tag(R001)$
$Tag(R002)$
Tank 1 temperature
Tank 1 pressure
$Unit(R001)$
$Unit(R002)$
$ReportDataInst(Hour, R001)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour, R002)$
$Repeat$
$Repeat$
$Repeat$
$Repeat$
Report Output Example
Channel number Name Unit 2012/12/01 00: 00: 00 2012/12/01 01: 00: 00 2012/12/01 02: 00: 00
TIC-001 Tank 1 temperature °C 76.5 78.9 77.7
PIC-002 Tank 1 pressure kPa 45.6 56.7 50.8
App-16
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Keyword Parameter Report Kind Hour Day Week Month Batch Custom Free
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
Keyword Format
Keywords are written by themselves or with parameters.
$ Keyword(parameter)$
Example: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R001,00,23)$
Basic Rules
· The dollar sign on the left indicates the start of a keyword, and the dollar sign on the right indicates the end of a keyword.
· You can only write keywords using letters of the alphabet, dollar signs, parentheses, commas, and spaces. You can put a space after an opening parenthesis, before and after a comma, and before a closing parenthesis. Keywords are not case sensitive. You cannot use a dollar sign inside of a keyword.
· The maximum length of a keyword, including spaces, is 100 characters.
Parameter Rules
· Parameters are enclosed in parentheses.
· Multiple parameters (up to 4) are separated by commas.
· Examples of how parameters can be omitted are shown below.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R001, ,23)$ $ReportDataSum(Hour, R001, 01, )$ or
The third parameter has been omitted. The fourth parameter has been omitted.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R001, 01)$
Excel Format Rules
· Set the data format by setting the cell format.
· Set the proper format for each keyword's cell in the cell's Number properties.
· The keyword in a cell is only valid when the keyword name and parameters are all in the
same format. When a keyword's font size or some other property is not consistent, it is
invalid.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R001, 00, 23)$
The font size of "Hour" is different, so the keyword is invalid.
· If a single cell contains text and a keyword, only the format of the keyword has to be
consistent. The format of the text can be different.
Date and time: $DateTime$
The format of the keyword is consistent, so it is valid.
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Limitations on Report Types and Template Types If you violate the rules illustrated below, data will not be output.
Template Type
Hour
Day
Week
Month Hour + Day Day +
Day +
Week
Month
Batch Report
Day Custom
Limitation on Report Types and Parameter Omissions
If you violate the rules illustrated below, it will be considered a keyword format error.
The keyword will not be converted and will remain as is.
Report Kind Hour Day Week Month Batch
Custom
Free
Start date and time End date and time
Start time (hour) End time (hour)
Start day
End day
--
--
--
--
Relative start time Relative end time
(minute)
(minute)
Start time
End time
(hour:minute)
(hour:minute)
--
--
Start number -- -- -- --
Start number
--
--
End number -- -- -- --
End number
--
--
App-17
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
Keyword Definitions For examples, see "Report Template Examples."
· System Keywords
One keyword produces one item of data.
Keyword Time Date DateTime DateTimeString Serial Equip Tag EquipTagNo FileHeader Ch Tag ChId Unit
Description Current time on the GM Current date on the GM Current date and time on the GM Current date and time on the GM GM serial number GM Tag string GM Tag number GM file header Channel number1 Tag string1 Tag number1 Unit1
Format Time2 Date2 Character string
1 The parameter is the report channel number (it cannot be omitted). 2 The item becomes a character string in PDF and printer output.
· Report Data Keywords
One keyword produces multiple items of data.
Keyword ReportDataDate ReportDataTime ReportDataDateTime ReportDataDateTimeString ReportDataElapsedTimeString4 ReportDataStatus ReportDataSum ReportDataInst ReportDataAve ReportDataMax ReportDataMin
Description Report creation date1 Report creation time1 Report creation date and time1 Report creation date and time1 Report data time out date and time Report data status2 Report data sum2 Instantaneous report data value2 Average report data value2 Maximum report data value2 Minimum report data value2
Format Date5 Time5 Date5 Character string
Number or character string3
1 Write the parameters in this order: report type (cannot be omitted), report start date and time (can be omitted), report end date, time (can be omitted), start number (can be omitted), and end number (can be omitted).
2 Write the parameters in this order: report type (cannot be omitted), report channel number (cannot be omitted), report start date and time (can be omitted), report end date and time (can be omitted), start number (can be omitted), and end number (can be omitted).
3 The decimal point type (dot or comma) depends on whether the converted data is a value or character string. Whether the converted data is a value or character string depends on the format of the cell that the keyword is written in. When the cell format is numerical, the decimal point type is determined by the cell format. When the cell format is text, the decimal point type matches the format of the report data.
4 Valid only when the report type is Batch. 5 The item becomes a character string in PDF and printer output.
· Special Keywords
Keyword Repeat Copy
Index
Description
Format
Specifies the output location of the data that The same as the
corresponds the report data keyword and corresponding keyword.
the Index keyword (a special keyword).
Outputs all data that corresponds the report The same as the
data keyword and the Index keyword (a corresponding keyword.
special keyword). This keyword is valid for
PDF and printer output.
Outputs serial numbers from the value
Number
specified by "start" to the value specified by
"end."
App-18
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
· Parameter
Parameter Name Report channel number Report Kind
Format Rxxx1 Hour Day Week Month Batch Custom Free
Start date and time
End date and time
Start number End number
hh2 dd3 mm4 hh:mm5
hh2 dd3 mm4 hh:mm5
xxx1 xxx1
Range R001 to R100 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
00 to 23
01 to 31
0 to 12000
hh: 00 to 23 mm: 00 to 59
00 to 23
01 to 31
0 to 12000
hh: 00 to 23 mm: 00 to 59
001 to 200 001 to 200
Description
Notes
GM report channel
Hourly report
Daily report
Weekly report
Monthly report
Batch report
Daily custom
Batch and daily custom
reports
Computed results, such as
sum values, of data in the file
are appended to the file.
This piece of data is called
"Free."
Specifies the start hour
Used in hourly
reports
Specifies the start day
Used in daily
reports
Specify the start minute
Used in batch
reports
Specifies the start hour:time Used in
hourly custom
reports
Specifies the end hour
Used in hourly
reports
Specifies the end day
Used in daily
reports
Specify the end minute
Used in batch
reports
Specifies the end
Used in
hour:minute
hourly custom
reports
Specifies the start number Used in batch
Specifies the end number reports
1 xxx is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 2 hh is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 3 dd is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 4 mm is a number without a limitation on the number of digits 5 Spaces are allowed before and after colons. 6 Start time and end time are relative to the record start time.
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-19
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
Starting and Ending Dates and Times
Use the start date and time and end date and time to specify the parts of the report file's report data that you will output to the file that you create with the template. You can specify the starting and ending dates (for daily reports) or times (for hourly reports).
Report Kind Hour Day Batch Day custom
Start Date and Time Start time (hour) Start time (day) Start time (minute) Start time (hour:minute)
End Date and Time End time (hour) End time (day) End time (minute) End time (hour:minute)
Example Example when the report type is hourly and the report is created at 18:00.
$ReportDataSum(Hour,R001,20,22)$ $ReportDataSum(Hour,R001,16,19)$
18:00
19:00
20:00
21:00
22:00
16:00 17:00 18:00 19:00
1
2
Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R001,20,22)$ From the hourly data from 19:00:01 to 22:00:00, the report data (sums) of report channel R001 for 20:00, 21:00, and 22:00 is output.
Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R001,16,19)$ From the hourly data from 3:00:01 PM to 7:00:00 PM, the report data (sums) of report channel R001 for 4:00 PM, 5:00 PM, and 6:00 PM is output. Because the report data for 19:00 is in another report file, it is not output.
Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R001)$ One file's worth (18:00:01 to 18:00:00) of data from report channel R001 is output, starting from 19:00.
When you omit the start and end times for an hourly report, the data for the hour after the report creation time until the 24th hour is output. For daily reports, the data for the day after the report creation time until the end of the month is output.
Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R001,08)$ From the hourly data from 07:00:01 to 18:00:00, the report data (sums) of report channel R001 for 08:00 to 18:00 is output.
App-20
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Report Template Examples
System Keyword Examples Intermixed Keyword and Text
File header: $FileHeader$
Date and time: $DateTime$
File header: GM10
Date and time: 2012/12/01 12:00:00
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
1
2
3
Intermixed Multiple Keyword and Text
4
Device number: $Serial$ File Header: $FileHeader$
Device number: ABCDEFG File Header: GM10
5
Report Data Keyword Examples
The following examples are for when the hourly report data for report channel R001 is 101, 102, 103, 104, and 105 and the hourly report data for report channel R002 is 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, and 206.
The $Repeat$ command applies to the closest keyword above the command in the same column.
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R001)$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R002)$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$
101 102 103 104 201 202 203 204 205
The $Repeat$ command applies to the keyword above it in the same column, even when that keyword is not directly above the command.
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R001)$
101
$Unit(R001)$
°C
$Repeat$
102
$Unit(R001)$
°C
$Repeat$
$Unit(R001)$
103
°C
You can mix system keywords, report data keywords, and text. If the data specified by a keyword does not exist, nothing is output.
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R001)$($Unit (R001)$) $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$($Unit(R001)$) $Repeat$(°C) $Repeat$
101(°C)
102 103 104(°C) 105(°C)
Appendix
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-21
Appendix 4 Creating Report Templates
Keywords in merged cells are affected by the leftmost cells above them.
$Repeat$
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R001)$ $Repeat$
$Repeat$ 101 102
103
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R002)$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$
201 202 203 204
When a keyword is written incorrectly or its formatting is wrong, the keyword will be output to the file as it is written.
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R)$
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R002)$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R)$
201 $Repeat$ 202 203 204
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R001)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R002)$
1 101 $ReportDataInst(Hour,R002)$
1 When there are multiple system keywords in the same cell, only the first keyword is valid.
Creating Report Templates for PDF Report Files and Printer Output
To create a report template, use the editing tool provided by YOKOGAWA to enter keywords and text in the cells of table. Keywords specify the type of data that will be entered into a cell. Text are output as they are in reports. For the keywords that you can use, see "Creating Report Templates for Report Files in Excel Format."
App-22
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix 5 Power Recovery Operation
1
This section explains how the GM operates when it recovers from a power failure.
Power Failure Detection
The GM power shuts down when the power is disrupted for the times indicated below. · 100 to 240 VAC: 1 cycle or more
Basic Operation
The following operations are retained when the GM recovers from a power failure. Recording Operation · If a power failure occurs while the GM is recording, it will continue recording when it
recovers. · Display and event data files are separated when a power failure occurs.
Moving Average Moving average of AI channels are not retained. When the GM recovers, a new moving average will start.
Timer Action · Relative timer
Time action is retained. Relative timers do not count the power failure time. · Absolute timer, match time timer
If timers expire during a power failure, timeout processing occurs when the GM recovers.
Remote Remote conditions are retained. If remote conditions change during a power failure, the corresponding remote actions are executed when the GM recovers.
Computation · If a power failure occurs while the GM is computing, it will continue computing when it recovers. · Computation results are retained during a power failure. · Rolling average values are also retained during a power failure. · If absolute timers or match time timers expire during a power failure, TLOG computation
is performed when the GM recovers.
Report Operation ·If a power failure occurs while the GM is creating a report, it will continue to create it when
it recovers. · If timers expire during a power failure, timeout processing occurs using the data up to the
power failure when the GM recovers. If this occurs, the report data will contain a power failure mark.
Communication Operation
Communication ports are closed when a power failure occurs. · Reestablish Ethernet connections. · Client function
· When Modbus client is in use and a power failure occurs in the middle of a transmission, the data will not be retransmitted.
· When the FTP client function is in use and a power failure occurs in the middle of a file transfer, the file will be re-transferred when the GM recovers.
· Communication channel values are retained even during a power failure. The GM can be configured so that the values take on preset values when the GM recovers.
Appendix
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-23
Appendix 5 Power Recovery Operation
DO Operation
DO output values are not retained during a power failure. · Alarm output
Alarms are set to off when the GM recovers. · Manual DO operation
Manual DO operation is set to off, regardless of the condition before the power failure.
Power Recovery Operation Summary
Operation Recording
Function Recording status
Timer Remote
File creation Relative timer
Absolute timer Match time timer
Remote condition
AI channel
Moving Average
Computation Computation status
Computed results Rolling average
TLOG computation
Communication Connection Client
Held/Not Held Description
Held
If a power failure occurs during recording,
recording will continue when the GX /GP
recovers.
Held
A power failure divides files.
Held
Timers do not count during the power failure
period.
Held
If timers expire during a power failure,
timeout processing occurs when the GM
recovers.
Held
If remote conditions change during a power
failure, the corresponding actions are
executed when the GM recovers.
Not held
When the GM recovers, a new moving
average will start.
Held
If a power failure occurs during computing,
computing will continue when the GM
recovers.
Held
Data before the power failure is retained.
Held
Average values before the power failure is
retained.
Held
If absolute timers or match time timers
expire during a power failure, TLOG
computation is performed when the GM
recovers.
Not held
Connections need to be reestablished when
the GM recovers.
Not held
Modbus: Data in transmission is discarded.
FTP: Files in transmission is retransmitted.
Communication channel Held
Data before the power failure is retained.
DO
Alarm
Not held
Set to off.
Manual DO
Not held
Set to off.
Fail
Not held
Set to on.
App-24
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix6 Computation Examples Using Pulse Input
Example 1: Pulse Sum Value
Sum the pulses applied to channel 0001.
Pulse input
Scan interval
Time
0001
Number of pulses per scan interval
TLOG.SUM or
TLOG.PSUM Pulse sum value
(Sum)
Expression
Assign the computation channel and set the expression. Set the span lower/upper limit and
unit according to the application.
Channel
Expression
Description
A001
TLOG.SUM(0001) TLOG.PSUM(0001)
Sum of the number of pulses per scan interval Sum of the number of pulses per scan interval (Only the input channels of GX90XP pulse input modules)
Example 2: Number of Pulses per Minute
With the scan interval set to 1 s,* count the pulse signal applied to 0001, and calculate and display the number of pulses per minute.
* This computation example is not possible for scan intervals faster than 1 s.
(Moving average over a minute)
Pulse input
Scan interval (1 s)
Time
A001
Number of pulses per scan interval (1 s)
(60x)
IM 04L55B01-01EN
A002
Number of pulses per minute
Expression
Assign the computation channel and set the expression. Set the span lower/upper limit and
unit according to the application.
Channel
Expression
Description
A001
0001
Number of pulses input to 0001
A002
A001*K001
Number of pulses per minute
Constant K001
Channel A001
Value 60
Rolling average Sampling interval: 1s Number of samples: 60
Description Coefficient for converting the number of pulses per second to the number of pulses per minute Description Moving average over a minute
Channel
The computation is performed in order from the channel with the smallest channel number in one scan interval. Use a channel of a channel number larger than that of the channel counting the number of pulses per second for the computation channel that is to calculate the number of pulses per minute.
App-25
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5
App Index
Appendix 6 Computation Examples Using Pulse Input
Example 3: Reset When the Pulse Sum Value Exceeds a Certain Value
Reset the sum value when the pulse sum value exceeds a specified value (reset value) and carry over the value exceeding the reset value to the sum after the reset. Count the number of resets and calculate the total sum value up to that point.
Pulse input
Scan interval
Time
0001 Number of pulses per scan interval
A001 Reset count
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
K001 Reset value (Sum)
A002 Sum value
(Resets the value below the reset value)
Expression
Assign the computation channel and set the expression. Set the span lower/upper limit and
unit according to the application.
Channel
Expression
Description
A001 A002 A003 Constant K001
((A002+0001).GE.K001)+A001 Pulse sum value reset count
CARRY(K001):TLOG.SUM(0001) Pulse sum value
K001*A001+A002
Total sum value
Description
The reset value. The sum value is reset when this value is exceeded.
Channel A001: Reset Count Calculates the number of times the pulse sum value is reset. The expression "((A002+0001).GE.K001)" is set to 1 when "the previous pulse sum value (A002) + the current pulse count (0001)" is greater than the reset value (K001). Otherwise, the expression is set to 0. The value of channel A001 is incremented when the pulse sum value exceeds the reset value.
Channel A002: Pulse Sum Value Calculates the pulse sum value. Under normal conditions, the pulse sum value TLOG.SUM (0001) is calculated. When the pulse sum value is greater than or equal to the reset value (K001), the pulse sum value is set to the amount exceeding K001.
Channel A003: Total Sum Value Multiplies the reset value (K001) by the reset count (A001) and adds the pulse sum value (A002) to derive the total sum value.
Note
· The computation is performed in order from the channel with the smallest channel number in one scan interval. If the channel number in the expression is greater than or equal to the channel number in which the expression is assigned, the previous computed result (previous value) is used for the channel in the expression.
· If the pulse input value of the scan interval is greater than the reset value, correct computation cannot be achieved.
App-26
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Appendix7 Terminology
1
This section explains the terminology related to the GM.
Term
Explanation
Notes
Event data
Measured data that is recorded at the specified recording interval.
Display data
Measured data that records the maximum and minimum values of the
sampled data within the recording interval, which is determined by the
specified trend interval.
Trend interval
The interval at which the waveform display is updated.
page 2-94 in section
2.11.1, "Setting the Trend
Interval"
I/O channel
A collective term that refers to analog input channels (AI channels), digital
input channels (DI channels), pulse input channels, and digital output
channels (DO channels).
AI channel
Analog input channel. Analog input channels can receive and measure DC
voltage, thermocouple (TC), RTD, and On/Off signals (DI).
DI channel
Digital input channel. Digital input channels can measure On/Off signals.
Pulse input channel
Input channel of a pulse input module. Pulse input can be integrated by
using math (/MT).
DO channel
Digital output channel. Digital output channels can be used as relay
outputs.
AO channel
Analog output channel. AO channels can output DC current signals (4-
20mA, 0-20mA range).
PID channel
A channel (PV, SP, OUT, AI, DI, AO, or DO) on a PID control module.
GS (range type)
Range type for 1-5VDC and 0.4-2VDC signals
GS (4-20mA) (range Range type for 4 to 20 mADC signals (current input modules)
type)
DI (range type)
Range type for digital input (1, 0) based on contacts or voltage levels
RTD (range type)
Range type for RTD sensors
TC (range type)
Range type for thermocouple sensors
Resistance (range type) This is a range type for the 4-wire resistance input.
Input calculation
Calculation performed on inputs, such as scaling, taking the difference
between two channels (difference in relation to a reference channel), and
square rooting.
Color scale band
Displays a specified section (inside or outside) of the measurement range
using a color band on the scale.
Trip line
A line displayed at a specified position in the waveform display range on
the trend display.
Zone (display)
Zones enable channels to be displayed in separate areas so that
waveforms do not overlap.
Manual sample
An action executed through a screen operation or event action function.
The action saves instantaneous values of all channels (except those set to
Skip or Off).
Reconfiguration
A system reconfiguration that aligns the GM settings to the I/O module configuration. Reconfiguration is necessary when the positions of different types of modules are changed and when modules are added or deleted.
page 2-208 in section 2.29.4, "Reconfiguring the GM"
Individual alarm ACK The operation of acknowledging alarms (clearing alarm output) separately
by channel and level.
General communication A function for communicating with the GM (configuration and control) using
(GENE)
GM dedicated communication commands.
Appendix
2 3 4 5
App Index
IM 04L55B01-01EN
App-27
Blank
Index
Index
1
2ch mode............................................................................. 2-100 10ch mode........................................................................... 2-100
A
relay action on ACK............................................................... 2-64 action on math start............................................................. 2-132 A/D integration time............................................................... 1-19 alarm acknowledge operation............................................... 2-65 alarm delay.............................................. 2-35,2-49,2-55,2-87 alarm type.................................................................... 2-34,2-36 all alarms, acknowledging..................................................... 2-65 AND/OR operation................................................................ 2-65 auto increment..................................................................... 2-122 auto save........................................................1-27,2-118,2-119
file save interval................................................................... 2-107 file type................................................................................ 2-104 firmware updating.................................................................. 5-17 firmware version..........................................................................v free...................................................................................... 2-105
G
gap between messages...................................................... 2-174 GENE.................................................................................. 2-169 grid............................................................... 2-112,2-113,2-114
H
hysteresis.................................... 2-35,2-49,2-54,2-87,2-148
B
batch function........................................................................ 1-37 bias........................................................................................ 2-32 binary format......................................................................... 1-28 burnout.................................................................................. 2-32 burnout criteria.................................................................... 2-103
I
individual alarm ACK............................. 2-64,2-65,2-182,3-22 input measurement, execution.............................................. 2-45 instrument correction factor....................................... 2-45,2-152 intermediate certificate........................................................ 2-215 internal memory..................................................................... 1-25
C
calibration correction................................................. 2-44,2-152 certificate for communication............................................... 2-213 certificate signature request (CSR)......................... 2-213,2-215 collectively storing unsaved data......................................... 2-120 color scale band.............................................. 2-41,2-89,2-151 continuous data area............................................................. 4-33 continuous data read/write area............................................ 4-53 correction factor......................................................... 2-44,2-152
D
daily custom........................................................................ 2-126 DARWIN...................................................... 2-170,2-173,2-217 data length........................................................................... 2-106 data save................................................................................. 1-4 data type............................................................ 1-4,1-22,2-109 decimal place.............................................................. 2-29,2-48 delta....................................................................................... 2-53 detection................................................ 2-35,2-49,2-87,2-148 difference calculation............................................................. 2-28 display characters of each value............. 2-42,2-51,2-56,2-68 display data................................................... 1-23,2-107,2-108 display (Web browser)........................................................... 1-28 DO output relay operation..................................................... 2-66 dual interval settings.............................................................2-112
E
encryption.........................................2-157,2-158,2-168,2-211 Energize/De-energize.................................................. 2-64,2-65 event action........................................................................... 1-33 event data.............................................. 1-23,2-104,2-108,3-6 Excel report files.................................................................. 2-129 extension..............................................................................2-117
F
FIFO function......................................................................... 1-27 file format............................................................................. 2-121
K
key....................................................................................... 2-212
L
large memory type........................................................................i linearizer approximation...................... 2-44,2-46,2-152,2-153 linearizer bias...................................... 2-44,2-46,2-152,2-153 linearizer input........................................................... 2-44,2-152 linearizer output......................................................... 2-44,2-152 linear scaling............................................................... 2-28,2-53 logging................................................................................... 2-54 login....................................................................................... 1-42 low-cut output........................................................................ 2-29 low-cut value......................................................................... 2-29
M
manual sample.............................................................2-111,3-6 manual save.............................................................. 1-27,2-120 measurement mode............................................................ 2-207 media FIFO..............................................................2-118,2-120
N
Nonhold/Hold......................................................................... 2-65 normal and remote.............................................................. 2-100 notes on connecting modules................................................ 1-15
O
operation of gradually correcting the internal clock............. 2-184 output.................................................................................... 1-26 over range............................................................................. 2-43
P
partial expanded display........................................................ 2-41 password initialization......................................................... 2-189 PC system requirements......................................................... 2-3
IM 04L55B01-01EN
Index-1
Index
2 3 4 5
App Index
Index
PDF report files................................................................... 2-130 certificate for PDF signature................................................ 2-213 PDF electronic signature..................................................... 2-126 possible combinations of events and actions........................ 1-34 power-fail message............................................................... 2-96 pre-trigger............................................................................ 2-107
W
watchdog timer.................................................................... 2-147 Web application, starting......................................................... 2-4 Web application, closing.......................................................... 2-6
Q
quick setting function............................................................. 1-70
R
recommended replacement periods for worn parts............... 5-15 reconfiguration..................................................................... 2-208 recording....................................................................... 1-4,1-22 recording channel.................................................................. 1-25 recording interval..................................................... 2-105,2-108 reflash.................................................................................... 2-65 relay deactivated interval....................................................... 2-65 release number...........................................................................v repeat trigger....................................................................... 2-105 report template............................................ 2-125,2-129,2-195 rolling average............................................................. 2-30,2-73
S
samples, number of............................................................... 2-30 Scale Lower................................................................. 2-29,2-48 Scale Upper................................................................. 2-29,2-48 scan interval................................................................ 1-19,2-98 self-signed certificate........................................................... 2-213 sensor correction factor............................................. 2-45,2-152 setup change procedure........................................................ 2-12 single trigger........................................................................ 2-105 SMARTDAC+ GM................................................................... 1-1 Span Lower................................. 2-28,2-47,2-63,2-72,2-146 span upper............................................................................ 2-53 Span Upper................................. 2-28,2-47,2-63,2-72,2-146 square root............................................................................ 2-28 standard type................................................................................i START/STOP key operation.................................................. 2-70 status indication....................................................................... 2-8 style number................................................................................v
T
text format............................................................................. 1-28 time deviation limit............................................................... 2-183 transfer wait time................................................................. 2-156 transfer wait time, shifting...................................................... 3-56 trend interval.............................................................. 2-94,2-108 trigger source operation...................................................... 2-107 trusted certificate................................................................. 2-197
U
uncorrected value...................................................... 2-45,2-152 unverified certificate............................................................ 2-216 update interval of measured values...................................... 2-42 user authentication.............................................................. 2-158 user level............................................................................... 1-42 user privileges........................................................... 1-43,2-189 user registration................................................................... 2-189
V
value modification from the monitor...................................... 2-97 verification of certificate........................................... 2-157,2-158
Index-2
IM 04L55B01-01EN
General Specifications
GS 04L55B01-01EN
Data Acquisition System GM
GM10 Data Acquisition Module GM90MB Module Base GM90PS Power Supply Module
[Release 4]
OVERVIEW
The Data Acquisition System GM is a data logger that excels in versatility and expandability. The main unit includes on-board memory for data acquisition and also supports SD cards for external storage. The system consists of a Data Acquisition Module (GM10), Power Supply Module (GM90PS), and Module Base (GM90MB), which is used to mount a variety of modules. SMARTDAC+ GM utilizes the same modules as the GX/GP series of SMARTDAC+.
High expandability and maintainability: Employs YOKOGAWA's original block structure, making it easy to rearrange the combination of required modules. The structure also excels in maintainability because even after installation, every module can be removed separately.
Multichannel measurement: Measures up to 420 analog input channels on the GM10-2 and up to 100 channels even on the GM10-1.
Flexible system configuration: A wide variety of systems, such as multichannel measurement from 10 to 420 channels or data acquisition through communication, can be configured.
High environmental tolerance: The guaranteed operating temperature range of -20°C to 60°C allows more freedom in where the system can be installed.
Mounting: Not only can the system be installed on a desktop, it can also be mounted on DIN rails or a wall.
Less wiring through distribution: Installation of sub units away from the main unit makes measurement possible without connecting sensor signal wires over a long distance.
Long-term recording and saving: Large internal memory (500 MB on the GM10-1 and 1.2 GB on the GM10-2) allows long-term recording and saving.
Secure saving of recording data: An SD card (SD/ SDHC) up to 32 GB (1 GB included) can be used for the external storage medium. And the FTP client function can be used to provide data redundancy using a file server.
Rich I/O interface: Seven types of I/O modules are available: analog input, analog output, digital input, digital output, digital I/O, pulse input and PID control. DCV (DC voltage), TC (thermocouple), RTD (resistance temperature detector), DI (contact or TTL level voltage), mA (DC current) can be assigned to each channel as input signals.
Web server function: Various settings can be configured online from a Web browser, without using a dedicated software application. Moreover, measured data can be monitored in real time.
High withstand voltage performance: Safe measurement up to withstand voltage of 600 V between input terminal and ground is possible by using a high withstand voltage analog input module.
GM10
GM90MB
GM90PS
High-speed measurement: Measurement at the shortest interval of 1 ms is possible by using a highspeed analog input module.
Dual interval measurement: Measurement can be performed by setting two different scan intervals.
Simple settings: The standard USB port makes it easy to connect with the PC.
Supports 21 CFR Part 11: GM supports the USA FDA's Title 21 CFR Part 11 regulation by advanced security function (/ AS optional).
PID control function: PID control on up to 20 loops is possible by installing a PID control module.
Program control function (/PG option): Program control of up to 99 patterns is possible by using a PID control module and program control function. In addition, up to 32 time event and 32 PV events can be used.
* For details on the PID control module, PID control function, and program control function (/PG), see the GX90UTPID Control Module General Specifications (GS04L53B01-31EN).
Math function (/MT option): Various calculations are possible. The report function enables creation of hourly, daily, and monthly reports and other types of data. Logic computation outputs results of computation as 0s or 1s to internal switches and DO channels.
Extensive network functions: The standard Ethernet interface allows network features such as various e-mail notifications and FTP file transfer. In addition, Modbus/TCP, Modbus/RTU (/C3), EtherNet/ IP (/E1), and CC-Link familty SLMP communication (/ E4) are supported.
Universal Viewer software: A free software application is available for displaying and printing waveforms of measured data on a PC.
The contents of this general specifications correspond to the GM with release number 4 and style number 2.
Release number: firmware ID number (GM10) Style number: hardware ID number (GM90PS)
Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 Japan
GS 04L55B01-01EN ©Copyright October 2014 11th Edition Mar. 1, 2019
Actual values underlying accurate measurements
Input Type
Measuring accuracy*1 (typical value*2)
DCV 20 mV
± (0.01% of rdg +5 V)
60 mV
± (0.01% of rdg +5 V)
6V (1-5V)
± (0.01% of rdg +2 mV)
TC*3 R, S
±1.1°C
B
±1.5°C
K (-200.0 to 1370.0°C)
± (0.01% of rdg +0.2°C for 0.0 to 1370.0°C; ± (0.15% of rdg +0.2°C) for -200.0 to 0.0°C
K (-200.0 to 500.0°C)
±0.2°C for 0.0 to 500.0°C; ± (0.15% of rdg +0.2°C) for -200.0 to 0.0°C
J
± 0.2°C for 0.0 to 1100.0 °C;
± (0.10% of rdg + 0.2 °C) for
-200.0 to 0.0 °C
T
± 0.2°C for 0.0 to 400.0°C;
± (0.10% of rdg + 0.2 °C) for
-200.0 to 0.0 °C
N
± (0.01% of rdg + 0.2°C) for 0.0 to
1300.0 °C;
± (0.22% of rdg + 0.2°C) for -200.0
to 0.0 °C
RTD
Pt100 (-200.0 to 850.0°C)
± (0.02% of rdg + 0.2°C)
Pt100 (high resolution) (-150.00 to 150.00°C)
± (0.02% of rdg + 0.16°C )
rdg: Reading value
*1 These values have been calculated from the accuracy testing data at the time of shipment of the instrument from the factory. Applies to GX90XA-10-U2, A/D integration time 16.67 ms or more, General operating conditions: 23±2 ºC, 55±10% RH, supply voltage 90132, 180264 V AC, power frequency within 50/60 Hz ±1%, warm-up of 30 minutes or more, no vibrations or other hindrances to performance.
*2 For the measuring accuracy (guaranteed), see the module's general specifications (GS 04L53B01-01EN).
*3 These values do not include the reference junction compensation accuracy.
CONFIGURATION
SMARTDAC+ GM handles a wide variety of applications through the combination of various modules.
The unit that includes GM10 (Data Acquisition Module) is called the main unit. A unit connected to the main unit via GX90EX (expansion module) is called a sub unit. Modules in a unit can be connected by installing a GM90MB (Module Base).
Unit Types
Main Unit (Single Unit) A unit consisting of a GM10 and a GM90PS. Up to 10 I/O modules* can be connected to a unit.
2
Main Unit (Multi Unit) A unit consisting of a GM10, a GM90PS and a GX90EX. Up to six I/O modules can be connected to a unit. Up to six sub units can be connected via the GX90EX.
Sub Unit A unit consisting of a GM90PS and a GX90EX. Up to six* I/O modules can be connected to a unit. The
main unit and sub units are connected directly using
LAN cables. The maximum connection distance
between two units is 100 m. It can also be used as an
expandable I/O for the GX/GP paperless recorder.
* See "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 26.
Module Types
Model GM10
Description Data Acquisition Module for SMARTDAC+ GM
GM90PS
A module that acquires data from I/O modules and expansion modules. A main unit requires one module of this type.
Power Supply Module for SMARTDAC+ GM
A module that supplies power to the modules connected in the unit.
A unit requires one module of this type.
GX90EX* Expansion module
A module that connects units to expand the
system.
A main unit or a sub unit requires one module
of this type.
GM90MB Module Base
This is used to connect modules (excluding the
GM90PS).
*
The firmware version of GX90EX that can be used on the
SMARTDAC+ GM must be R1.02.01 or later.
For the detailed specifications of the expansion
module, see the following general specifications.
Material No.: GS 04L53B00-01EN
* Up to 8 when a GX90XA-T1 is connected All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
I/O Modules Input/output modules may need to have their firmware
updated.
Model
Description
GX90XA
Analog input module (number of inputs:
10)
A module that can receive various analog
Type Suffix code signals.
-U2
Universal, solid state relay scanner type
(3-wire RTD b-terminal common)
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple,
resistance temperature detector (RTD), DI
(voltage, contact), DC current (when an
external shunt resistor is connected)
Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 0.7 W
-C1
Current (mA), scanner type (isolation
between channels)
DC current (0-20 mA), DC current
standard signal (4-20 mA)
Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 0.7 W
-L1
Low withstand voltage DCV/TC/DI,
scanner type (isolation between channels)
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple,
DI (voltage, contact), DC current (when an
external shunt resistor is connected)
Scan interval: 500 ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 0.7 W
-T1
DCV/TC/DI, electromagnetic relay scanner
type (isolation between channels)
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple,
DI (voltage, contact), DC current (when an
external shunt resistor is connected)
Scan interval: 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 0.9 W
-H0
High-speed universal, individual A/D
(isolation between channels) (number of
inputs: 4)
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple,
resistance temperature detector (RTD), DI
(voltage, contact), DC current (when an
external shunt resistor is connected)
Scan interval: 1/2/5/10/20/50/100/200/500
ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 2.0 W
-R1
4-wire RTD/resistance, solid state relay
scanner type (number of inputs: 6)
4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance
Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 0.7 W
-V1
DCV/TC/DI, high withstand voltage
scanner type (Isolated between channels)
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple,
DI (voltage, contact), DC current (when an
external shunt resistor is connected)
Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 1.0 W
GX90XD
Digital input module
(number of inputs: 16)
A module that can receive open collector
or voltage-free contact signals.
Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s
Power consumption: 0.7 W
Continued on the following table
3
Model GX90YA
GX90YD GX90WD
GX90XP GX90UT
Description Analog output module (number of outputs: 4) A module that can transmit 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC signals. Output update interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s Power consumption: 3.0 W Digital output module
(number of outputs: 6) A module that can transmit relay contact (c contact) signals. Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s Power consumption: 1.4 W Digital I/O module (number of inputs: 8, number of outputs: 6) A module that can receive open collector or voltage-free contact signals and transmit relay contact (c contact) signals. Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s Power consumption: 1.6 W Pulse input module (number of inputs: 10) A module that can receive open collector, voltage-free contact, or 5 V logic signals. Scan interval: 100/200/500 ms, 1/2/5 s Power consumption: 0.9 W
PID control module (Number of inputs / outputs: universal input 2, current pulse or voltage pulse output 2, DI 8, DO 8) This module can perform PID control on up to 2 loops. It supports the following control modes: single loop, cascade, and loop control with PV switching. Control interval: 100/200 ms Power consumption: 2.8 W
For the detailed specifications of the I/O modules, see the following general specifications.
Material No.: GS 04L53B01-01EN For the detailed specifications of the PID control module, see the following general specifications.
Material No.: GS 04L53B01-31EN
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
4
System Configuration SMARTDAC+ GM supports both standalone operation and data acquisition using a PC.
Restrictions on module connection * See "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 26.
Single Unit System A system configured with only a main unit.
Use as a stand-alone type
Use by connecting a PC Main unit
Use by connecting a PC
Sub unit Sub unit
Multi Unit System A system configured with a main unit connected to sub units*. * The GX60 expandable I/O can also be used. Note: The main unit and sub units are connected directly using LAN cables. Hubs and repeaters cannot be used. · Up to six sub units can be connected to a main unit. Each unit can connect up to six modules.
· For analog input, up to 420 channels (GM10-2) and up to 100 channels (GM10-1) can be measured.
Use as a stand-alone type
Main unit
Maximum connection distance between two units is 100 m.
Sub unit
Maximum connection distance between two units is 100 m.
Sub unit
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
SMARTDAC+ GM COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
Compliant Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1,
overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution
degree 2 *2,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-030
CAN/CSA-IEC 61010-2-201*4
· UL:
UL 61010-1, UL 61010-2-030 (CSA
NRTL/C)
UL 61010-2-201(CSA NRTL/C)*4
· CE/EMC directives:
EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2
EN61000-3-2 compliance
EN61000-3-3 compliance
EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive:
EN61010-1, EN 61010-2-030
Overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution
degree 2 *2
Measurement category II*3,
EN 61010-2-201 compliance*4
· Australia, New Zealand EMC standard (RCM):
EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
/C8 option
· RE directive:
SAFETY
EN61010-1 compliance
EN61010-2-030 compliance
Overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution
degree 2 *2
Measurement category II *3
EN62311 compliance
EMC
EN301 489-1 compliance
EN301 489-17 compliance
EN61326-1 compliance
SPECTRUM
EN300 328 compliance
· Wireless module (/C8 option) certification and the
like:
FCC Approval, IC Approval, Japanese Radio Law Korea Certification (Radio Wave Act), China Certification (Radio Wave Act) · Wireless communication standards of Australia and New Zealand (RCM) (/C8 option): AS/NZS4268, AS/NZS2772.2 · KC mark: KN11 KN61000-6-2 Kn301 489-1/-17 (/C8 option)
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II: Applied to power supply voltage code 1 (100-240 V AC) I: Applied to power supply voltage code 2 (12-28 V DC)
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 Measurement category: Depends on the specification of each modules
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
5
Category Measurement
Description
Remarks
category
II
CAT II
Available in the testing and Appliances,
measuring circuits directly portable
connected to a usage
equipment,
location (receptacle or the like) of a low-voltage main
etc.
power supply facility.
III
CAT III
Available in the testing Distribution
and measuring circuits connected to a power distribution portion of a
board, circuit breaker, etc.
low-voltage main power
supply facility.
IV
CAT IV
Available in the testing Overhead
and measuring circuits connected to a power source of a low-voltage
wire, cable systems, etc.
main power supply facility.
*4 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows:
· Install the GM unit / GX60 in a panel with a door.
· The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 61010-2-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· The /WH option does not support standards other than KC mark.
Normal Operating Conditions
· Rated supply voltage: 100 to 240 V AC (AC power supply) or 12 to 28 V DC (DC power supply)
· Allowable supply voltage: 90 to 264 V AC (AC power supply) or 10 to 32 V DC (DC power supply)
· Power frequency (AC power supply): 50 Hz ±2 %, 60 Hz ±2 %
· Power consumption:
Supply voltage 100 V AC 240 V AC 12 V DC 28 V DC
Normal operation* 25 VA 35 VA 15 VA
Maximum 45 VA 60 VA 24 VA
* When 10 analog input modules are connected
· Ambient temperature: -20 to 60 °C -20 to 50 °C in the following cases
· When a GX90YD is used · When a GX90WD is used · When a GX90XA-T1 (electromagnetic relay
type) is used · When a GX90YA is used · When a GX90UT is used · On a GM10 with the /C8 option
· Ambient humidity: 20 to 85 %RH (no condensation)
· Magnetic field: 400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz) · Vibration: 5 f < 8.4 Hz amplitude 3.5 mm (peak)
8.4 f 160 Hz acceleration 9.8 m/s2 or less · Shock: Power supply ON, 98 m/s2 or less, 11 ms (excluding GX90YD and GX90WD) Power supply OFF, 500 m/s2 or less, approx. 10 ms 6 directions (±X, ±Y, ±Z), 3 times in each direction
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
· Mounting position: Left and right horizontal, front and back horizontal
· Altitude: 2000 m or less · Installation location: Indoors · Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power on
Transport and Storage Conditions
· Ambient temperature: -25 to 70 °C · Ambient humidity: 5 to 95 %RH (no condensation) · Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 maximum · Shock: 392 m/s2 maximum (in packaged
condition)
Construction
Mounting: Wall mount, DIN rail (panel storage, rack), desktop
Note: No stacking Material: Polycarbonate
6
GM10 DATA ACQUISITION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
7 segment LED (x2) Status display START/STOP key USER key
USB port
Serial communications port (/C3 option)
SD memory card slot
Ethernet port
7 segment LED: Displays the operation mode, system No., self-check operation, key lock, operation error, process running, and module installation information.
Status display:
Item RDY REC SD FAIL MATH SER BT ALM
LED color Green Green Orange Red Green Orange Orange Red
Description System normal indication Recording status SD card access status System error indication Computation status Serial communication status Bluetooth communication status Alarm status
START key: Starts recording and computation STOP key: Stops recording and computation, clears
errors USER keys (USER1/USER2):
Executes specified actions (event action function)
Functional Specifications
Measuring Function Number of connectable modules and number of I/O
channels:
GM10-1 Modules Up to 10
I/O channels Up to 100
GM10-2 Modules Up to 42
I/O channels Up to 500 (up to 420 if AI only)
· Measurement mode: Normal, High speed, Dual interval
Normal: A mode in which the shortest measurement interval is 100 ms
Number of scan groups: 1 File type: Event data, display data Data format: Binary, text Scan interval: Fastest 100 ms Compatible modules: All modules High speed: A mode in which the shortest
measurement interval is 1 ms Number of scan groups: 1 File type: Event data only Data format: Binary only Scan interval: Fastest 1 ms
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
Compatible modules:* High-speed AI (GX90XA-4-H0)
* A single DI (GX90XD) or DIO (GX90WD) can be connected for remote input. Measurement and recording are not possible.
Dual interval: A mode in which measurement is possible by setting different scan intervals on the two scan groups.
Number of scan groups: 2 File type: Event data only Data format: Binary only Scan interval:
Model GM10-1
Scan group 1 Fastest 5 ms
Scan group 2 Fastest 100 ms
GM10-2
Fastest 1 ms
Fastest 100 ms
Master scan interval: Scan group 1 or scan group 2
Master scan interval is used for the following: Math function's scan interval, communication channel function's scan interval, manual sampling function's detection timing, logic math interval, instantaneous values included in e-mails
Compatible modules: Modules other than the PID control module
· Scan interval: 1 ms / 2 ms / 5 ms / 10 ms / 20 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms / 200 ms / 500 ms / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s
Note: Some intervals will be unavailable depending on the system configuration and modules.
· Scan intervals shorter than 1 s cannot be specified
on electromagnetic relay type (type suffix code -T1)
analog input modules.
· Scan intervals shorter than 500 ms cannot be specified on low withstand voltage relay type (type suffix code -L1) analog input modules.
· Scan interval shorter than 100 ms can only be specified when the measurement mode is set to High speed or Dual interal.
Module connection limitations: See "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 27.
Channel Specifications Operations such as measurement, computation, and recording are performed on channels. · Channel name: A channel name is expressed with a 4-digit number. Channel names are specific to the system, so they cannot be changed. By setting tags or tag numbers to the channels, you can use any names you like.
X X X X Channel name
Channel number
Analog input: 01 to 10 Analog output: 01 to 04 Digital input: 01 to 16 Digital output: 01 to 06 Digital I/O:
Digital input: 01 to 08 Digital output: 09 to 14 Pulse input: 01 to 10 PID control, I/O: 01 to 26
Slot number: 0 to 9
Unit number
Main unit: 0 Sub unit: 1 to 6
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
7
Display Function Real-time data monitoring is possible using a Web browser. · Number of groups: GM10-1: 50, GM10-2: 60 · Number of channels that can be assigned to each group: 20 · Display types: Trend, digital, bar graph, horizontal bar graph, overview, alarm summary, message summary, DO channel status, internal switch status, Modbus master status, Modbus client status, WT client status, SLMP client status, memory data list, report data list, manual sampled data list, various error logs, network information, system information Display update interval: Minimum 1 second
Data Saving Function
Data is recorded to internal memory and external
storage medium. When the system recovers from a
power failure, the operation that was being performed
before the power failure is resumed.
· Internal memory: Temporarily saves various types of
data.
Medium: Flash memory
Size:
GM10-1: 500 MB
GM10-2: 1.2 GB
· External storage medium:
Medium: SD card (SD/SDHC)
Size:
1 to 32 GB (1 GB included)
Format: FAT32 or FAT16
Data saving to the external storage medium:
Select whether to save automatically
or when a medium is inserted for event
data, display data, manual sampled
data, and report data.
Auto save: Automatically saves to the internal
memory when a data files is created.
Save when a medium is inserted:
Saves unsaved data files when an
external storage medium is inserted.
· Data type:
Data type Display data
Saved content Maximum and minimum values per recording interval
Event data
Instantaneous values at recording intervals
Alarm summary data Summary of warnings
Manual sampled data Instantaneous values at a user specified time
Setup data
GM10 and I/O module settings
Report data (/MT option)
Report at each scheduled time of report
· Event data: Target: Measurement (I/O module)/math (/MT)/ communication (/MC) channels, alarm summary, message summary Recording interval: 1 ms / 2 ms / 5 ms / 10 ms / 20 ms / 50 ms / 100 ms / 200 ms / 500 ms / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 15 s / 20 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min / 5 min / 10 min / 15 min / 20 min / 30 min selectable Note: Some intervals will be unavailable depending on
the scan interval and number of channels.
Number of channels: Determined by the scan interval and recording data type
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
Measurement mode: Normal
GM10-1
Recording interval
100 ms
Number of channels 100
200 ms
200
500 ms or longer
500
GM10-2 Recording interval
100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s or longer
Number of channels *1
Event
Display + Event
500
100
500
200
1000
500
1000
1000
Measurement mode: High speed
Recording interval
1 ms
Number of channels *1
GM10-1
GM10-2
2
10
2 ms
4
20
5 ms
10
50
10 ms
20
100
20 ms
40
150
50 ms
100
150
100 ms
100
200
200 ms
200
500
500 ms
500
1000
1 s or longer
500
1000
Measurement mode: Dual interval
Recording interval
1 ms
Number of channels *1 *2
GM10-1
GM10-2
---
5
2 ms
---
10
5 ms
5
25
10 ms
10
40
20 ms
20
50
50 ms
50
50
100 ms
100
100
200 ms
100
200
500 ms
250
600
1 s or longer
250
600
*1 Total number including I/O channels, math channels, and communication channels
*2 Number of channels that can be recorded is the same for scan group 1 and scan group 2.
Data size (binary): Analog input data: 6 bytes/ch. Analog output data: 6 bytes/ch. Digital I/O data: 2 bytes/ch. Math channel data: 6 bytes/ch. Communication channel data: 6 bytes/ch.
File size (binary): Up to 18 MB Number of files (including display data) (internal
memory) GM10-1: Up to 500 GM10-2: Up to 1000 Internal memory operation: FIFO (First In First Out) Data format: Binary or text*
* Selectable when saving to the external storage
medium
Mode:
Free:
Records data at all times
Trigger: Starts recording data when a certain
event occurs and records for the
specified interval
Repetition trigger: Repeat Trigger mode
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
8
Event data file sample time (estimated)
GM10-1 (when recording interval is 1 s)
I/O channels
Total sample time
30
Approx. 29 days
100
Approx. 9 days
GM10-2 (when recording interval is 1 s)
I/O channels
Total sample time
30
Approx. 71 days
100
Approx. 23 days
300
Approx. 7 days
· Display data: Target: Measurement (I/O module)/math (/MT)/ communication (/MC) channels, alarm summary, message summary Trend interval (/div) (recording interval): 5 s / 10 s / 15 s / 20 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min / 5 min / 10 min / 15 min / 20 min / 30 min selectable Note: Some intervals will be unavailable depending on
the scan interval and number of channels.
Number of channels: Determined by the trend
interval and recording data type
GM10-1
Trend interval Recording
setting (/div)
interval
Number of channels
5 s
100 ms
100
10 s
200 ms
200
15 s or longer 500 ms or more
500
GM10-2
Trend interval setting (/div)
5 s 10 s 15 s 30 s or longer
Recording interval
100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s or longer
Number of
channels
category Display +
Event
200
100
500
200
1000
500
1000
1000
Data size (binary): Analog input data: 12 bytes/ch. Analog output data: 12 bytes/ch. Digital I/O data: 4 bytes/ch. Math channel data: 12 bytes/ch. Communication channel data: 12 bytes/ch.
File size (binary): Up to 18 MB Number of files (including event data) (internal
memory) GM10-1: Up to 500 GM10-2: Up to 1000 Internal memory operation: FIFO(First In First Out) Data format: Binary or text *
* Selectable when saving to the external storage
medium
Display data file sample time (estimated)
GM10-1 (when recording interval is 1 min)
I/O channels
Total sample time
30
Approx. 914 days (2.5 years)
100
Approx. 239 days (9 months)
GM10-2 (when recording interval is 1 min)
I/O channels
Total sample time
30
Approx. 2184 days (5.9 years)
100
Approx. 702 days (1.9 years)
300
Approx. 239 days (7 months)
· Alarm summary: Saved item: Alarm of each data item Maximum number of items saved to internal memory: 5000
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
Internal memory operation: FIFO(First In First Out)
Maximum number of items displayed on Web
screen: Latest 1000
Save operation: Saves alarm information to internal
memory when an alarm occurrence or
release is detected
* Alarm information is saved to the corresponding
event or display data file.
Saved content: Target channel name (tag name),
time of occurrence or release, warning
type, etc.
Save operation methods: Web browser,
communication command
· Message summary:
Description: Saves a summary of written messages
Saved item: Message string
Maximum number of items saved to internal
memory: 1000
Internal memory operation:
FIFO (First In First Out)
Maximum number of items displayed on Web
screen: Latest 450
Save operation: Saves message information to
internal memory when message writing
operation is performed.
* Message information is saved to the
corresponding display or event data file.
Saved content: Message name, writing interval,
user name, write group
· Manual sampled data:
Saved item: Measurement (I/O module)/math (/MT)/
communication (/MC) channels
Number of saved channels:
GM10-1: Up to 50, GM10-2: Up to 100
Save operation methods: Web browser,
communication command, event action
Maximum number of events saved to internal
memory: 400
Internal memory operation: FIFO (First In First Out)
Auto saving to an external storage medium:
Every time manual sampling is executed
Data format: Text format
· Setup data
Saved item: GM10 and I/O module settings
(including setup data of modules
connected via GX90EX)
Saved events: Operation from a Web browser,
communication command, event action,
setting changes (when the advanced
security function (/AS) is on)
Data format: Text format
Binary format when the advanced
security function (/AS) is on
· Report data (/MT option):
Saved item: Measurement (I/O module)/math/
communication channels
Select from average, maximum, minimum, sum, and
instantaneous values
Type:
Hourly + daily, daily + weekly, daily +
monthly
User specified time (batch, day custom)
Saved events: Timeout time of each report type
Maximum number of events saved to internal
memory: 800
Internal memory operation: FIFO (First In First Out)
Auto saving to an external storage medium:
Save every time of the event
Data format: Test format
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
9
· User data Saved item: Excel report template (/MT), PDF/print report template, SSL communication certificate (server certificate, trusted certificate), electronic signature certificate (/MT) Recorded events: Operation from a Web browser, communication command
Message Write Function Messages can be written to event data and display data. · Message type: Preset message: Writes preset text Free message: Writes text that you enter Auto message: Writes fixed text when power recovers after a power failure occurs during recording. · Preset message, free message: Number of displayable characters: Up to 32 Displayable character types: Alphanumeric, Japanese, and Chinese characters Number of messages: Preset message: 100 Free message: 10 Free messages that you enter are also saved in setup files.
Write method: Operation from a Web browser, communication command, event action
Write destination: Specified event data or display data group or all groups
· Auto message Displayed text: "Power-fail" + the time of failure occurrence Example: Power-fail 2014/01/06 09:49:21 Write method: Writes a message when power recovers after a power failure occurs during recording. Whether or not to write is selectable. Write destination: All display data or event data groups
Alarm Function · Number of alarms: Up to four alarms (levels) for each measurement channel · Alarm type: High limit, low limit, difference high limit, difference low limit, high limit on rate-ofchange, low limit on rate-of-change, delay high limit, and delay low limit · Alarm delay time: 1 s to 24 hours (for each channel) · Rate-of-change calculation interval of rate-of-change alarms: 1 to 32 times the scan interval (common to all channels) · Hysteresis: 0.0 to 5.0% of the span (for each alarm (level)) · Alarm output: DO output: DO operation: Energize/de-energize, hold/ nonhold, AND/OR, reflash Internal switch output: Number of internal switches: 100 Internal switch operation: AND/OR operation selectable · Status LED display operation: Select whether or not to hold the indication until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
· Alarm no logging function: Possible to output only to the DO or internal switch when an alarm occurs (warning display and recording to the alarm summary are not performed)
· Alarm information: Displays a log of alarm occurrences on the alarm summary
· Reflash: The duration for which the reflash relays are deactivated can be set to 500 ms, 1 s, or 2 s.
· Individual alarm ACK function: Alarm display and relay output can be canceled on individual alarms.
Event Action Function · Description: Execute a specified operation when a given event occurs. · Number of settings: 50 Events: Remote control input, etc. Timer: Number of timers: 12 Match time timer: Number of timers: 12 Action: Specify memory start/stop, alarm ACK, etc.
Control Event Action Function See the GX90UT PID Control Module General Specifications (GS04L53B01-31EN).
Security Function · Key lock function: All GM10 key operations · Login function: Only registered users can operate the GM (Ethernet /serial (/C3) /USB/ Bluetooth (/ C8) operation) (including Web browsers) System administrators and users: Up to 50 Number of Authority of user: 10 levels
Manual Sampling Function · Description: Measured value at a user specified time · Target: Measurement (I/O module)/math (/MT)/ communication (/MC) channels · Number of recording channels: GM10-1: Up to 50 GM10-2: Up to 100 · Maximum number of data values that the internal memory can store: 400 · Data format: Text
Report Function (/MT option) · Description: Report at each scheduled time of report · Target: Measurement (I/O module)/math/ communication channels · Number of report channels: 60 · Maximum number of data values that the internal memory can store: 800 · Data format: Text
Setup Function · Description: GM10 and I/O module setup · Setup method: Web browser, communication commands, Hardware Configurator · Output/read destination (for saving/loading): External storage medium
Clock Function · Clock: With a calendar function Accuracy: ±5 ppm Excludes the delay (of 1 second, maximum) caused when the power is turned on. · Time difference between units: ±2 ms max. (time difference between a sub unit and main unit)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
10
· Time setting: Using Web operation, communication commands, event action, or SNTP client function
· Time adjustment method: Limit in which the time is gradually adjusted: Select from the available settings between 5 s and 15 s. Whether to change an out-of-limit operation immediately or report it as an error can be selected. While memory sampling: Corrects the time by 1 ms for each second. While memory is stopped: Immediately change the time.
· Time zone: Sets the time difference from GMT · Date format: Select "YYYY/MM/DD",
"MM/DD/YYYY", "DD/MM/YYYY" or "DD.MM.YYYY". MM expression can be selected from the numeric character or ellipsis. Ex. January: 01 or Jan The delimiter can be selected from "/", ".", "-".
Ethernet Communication Function · Electrical specifications: Conforms to IEEE 802.3 · Connection: Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) · Max. segment length: 100 m · Max. connecting configuration: Cascade Max. 4 level (10BASE-T), Max. 2 level (100BASE-TX) · Connector: RJ-45 · Protocols: TCP, UDP, IP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, SNTP, Modbus, dedicated protocols, and DARWIN compatible communication · E-mail client: Automatically sends e-mail at specified times E-mail is sent by events as below. - Alarm occurring/alarm canceling - Recover from power failure - Report data generating - Storage medium error, FTP client function error - Specified time period · Supported authentication methods: POP before SMTP, SMTP authentication (Login, Plain, CRAM-MD5) · FTP client: Automatically transfers data files to the FTP server Applicable files: Event data, display data, report data, etc. · FTP server: Transfers files, delete files, manipulate directories, and outputs file lists Max. number of the simultaneous connections: 4 · Web server: GM10 real-time monitoring and setting changes/operations can be performed from a Web browser. Max. number of the simultaneous connections: 4 · SNTP client: Inquires the time to the SNTP server and sets the GM10 · SNTP server: Outputs the GM10 time. Time resolution: 5 ms · DHCP client: Automatically obtains the network address settings from the DHCP server · Modbus client: Reads data from another device and writes to the registers (Required /MC option)
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
Number of connectable severs: GM10-1: Up to 16 GM10-2: Up to 32
· Modbus server: Loads measurement and math channel data Loads and writes communication channel data Some control commands such as memory start Filtering to accept connections only from specific IP addresses available
Max. number of the simultaneous connections: 4 · Setting/Measurement server:
Operate and set the GM10 and output data using a dedicated protocol. Max. number of the simultaneous connections: 4 · DARWIN compatible communication server: Supports some DARWIN commands Communication with the GM10 is possible using DARWIN communication commands. Output-related commands: Outputs measurement
channel data, math channel data, relay status, decimal place of measurement channels, decimal place of math channels, system configuration information Setup-related commands: Range, Scale unit, Alarm, Time, Moving average Operation-related commands: Reset alarm, Reset timer, Start MATH calculation, Rebuild system, Initialize, Input communication, Output communication DO, Write message Note: To control the GM using the DARWIN compatible
communication function, you must configure
the GM (module type, channel numbers (unit
numbers and slot numbers)) to match DARWIN.
Batch Function
· Function: Data management using batch names.
Enter text fields and batch comments in
the data file.
· Batch name: Added to the file name of the event
data and display data.
Structure: Batch number (up to 32 characters) +
lot number (up to 8 digits)
Use/not use selectable for lot number,
on/off selectable for auto increment
function.
· Text field: Adds text to the event data and display
data. There are 24 available text fields.
Title:
Up to 20 characters
Text:
Up to 30 characters per field
· Batch comment: Adds text to the event data and
display data. 3 comments (max. 50
characters/comments) are available.
USB Communication Function · Compliant standard: USB2.0 · Interface: Connector: mini B type Number of ports: 1 Power supply: Self powered · Implemented protocol: Dedicated protocol Operate and set the GM10 and output data using a dedicated protocol. · Communication conditions: Baud rate: 115200bps, Parity: None, Data length: 8bit, Stop bit: 1bit, Handshake: Off
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
11
FAIL Output Function · Function: Relay output from a specified channel of the GX90YD or GX90WD when a CPU error occurs · Output format: Relay contact · FAIL output: Relay contact output when any of the various errors is detected Normally energized; de-energized when a system error occurs
Printer Output Function · Printers supporting the HP PCL5c language and can print through port 9100 on a LAN connection Supports printing using the report template function (/MT).
SSL Communication Function Communication that sends and receives information encrypted by the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) protocol is possible. · Server function: Supported servers: HTTP server and FTP server Private key: Can be created on the GM10 Server certificate: Server certificates created by users can be saved in the internal memory. Self-signed certificates can be created on the GM10. · Client function: Supported clients: FTP client and SMTP client Trusted certificate: Trusted certificates (up to 80 KB total) can be saved in the internal memory.
Electronic Signature Function Electronic signatures can be added to report files created in PDF format using the PDF form creation function. An electronic signature is provided each time a report file is created. · Electronic signature certificate: Electronic signature certificates created by certificate issuing organizations can be saved in the internal memory.
Loop Control Function (when a PID control module is installed)
See the GX90UT PID Control Module General Specifications (GS04L53B01-31EN). Other Function · Firmware update function:
The firmware of the GM10 and connected modules can be updated from the GM10. · A/D calibration function: The A/D calibration of connected modules can be operated from the GM10. Web Server Function Real-time data monitoring and setting changes/ operations can be performed from a Web browser.
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
PC System Requirements Hardware
Item CPU
Internal memory Hard disk
Printer Mouse Display
Communication port
Specifications Intel Pentium IV, 3GHz or faster x64 or x86 processor 2 GB or more 100 MB or more free space, NTFS recommended Printer compatible with the OS Mouse compatible with the OS Display compatible with the OS with 1024x768 dots or better, high color or better Ethernet port compatible with the OS and TCP/IP protocol
OS Item Windows Vista
Windows 7
Windows 8.1
Windows 10
Specifications Home Premium SP2 (excluding 64-bit editions) Business SP2 (excluding 64-bit editions) Home Premium SP1 (32-bit edition and 64-bit editions) Professional SP1 (32-bit edition and 64-bit editions) Update (32-bit edition and 64-bit editions) Pro Update (32-bit edition and 64-bit editions) Home (32-bit edition and 64-bit editions) Pro (32-bit edition and 64-bit editions)
Compatible Browsers Internet Explorer 11, Google Chrome
Specifications of Options
Advanced Security Function (/AS) Security and electronic record/signature functions have been added that are compliant with the USA's FDA title 21 CFR Part 11.
· Enabling/disabling the advanced security function: You can enable or disable the advanced security function.
* The set values and data stored in the internal memory are initialized each time the function is enabled or disabled.
· Login function: Using the login function described below, you can enter security settings on the instrument User name, password, and user ID (depending on the use/not use setting)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
12
User level: Administrator: No restrictions (all operations) User: Operations that can be executed can be set using the authority of user settings. Monitor user: Only monitoring and changing passwords are possible.
Number of users: Up to 100 including administrators, users, and monitor users
Authority of user: Users can be restricted from performing GM operations.
Number of authority of user: 10 Password expiration period: Off, 1 month, 3 months,
or 6 months (no expiration period for monitor users) Signature restriction: Users can be restricted from signing measurement data files. Number of signature restrictions: 8 · Password control function: Logins are verified by a Kerberos v5 authentication server* (only user name and password) Encryption method: AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 ARCFOUR-HMAC-MD5 Pre-Auth function: use * The function has confirmed compatibility with Windows Server2003 SP2/Windows Server2008 SP2/Windows Server2012 ActiveDirectory · Audit trail function: The history of operations from when the recording was stopped the previous time to when the recording was stopped this time is recorded as event log and saved in measurement data files along with the settings. · Data anti-tamper function: Settings and measured data are saved as encrypted binary files. · Data type: Only for display or event Trigger mode is not possible with event data. · Signature function*: Includes approval information to measurement data files Information that can be included: User name, pass/ fail, comment Number of signatures: Up to 3 per file Signature privileges: Can be set for each user * Universal Viewer is used to sign measurement data. · Signing measurement data files is not possible from the GM10. · Measurement mode limitations: Measurement modes High speed and Dual interval cannot be used. · Module limitations: PID control modules cannot be used.
Serial Communication Interface (/C3) · Connection: EIA RS-422/485 · Protocol: Dedicated protocol, Modbus/RTU, or DARWIN compatible communication · Setting/measurement server function: Operation, setting or output of measurement data are available by dedicated protocol. · Synchronization: Start-stop synchronization · Transmission mode (RS-422/485): RS-422: Four-wire half-duplex multi-drop connection (1:n (n = 1 to 31)) RS-485: Two-wire half-duplex multi-drop connection (1:n (n = 1 to 31)) · Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
· Data length: 7 or 8 bits · Start bit: 1 bit · Stop bit: 1 bit or 2 bit · Parity: ODD, EVEN, or NONE · Communication distance:
1200 m (57600 bps or less), 600 m (115200 bps) · Modbus/RTU communication: Reading or writing of measurement data on other instruments is available by Modbus protocol. Communication channel function (/MC option) is needed to read measurement data from other instruments. · Modbus operation modes: Master or slave
Bluetooth Communication Function (/C8)* Data monitoring, setting, and operation is possible on a tablet, such as a Bluetooth compatible PC or smartphone, through Bluetooth communication. · Compliant standard: Bluetooth Ver 2.1+EDR · Supported profile: SPP (Serial Port Profile) · Carrier frequency band: 2402 to 2480 MHz · Channel spacing: 1 MHz · Number of channels: 79 · Communication distance: Approx. 10 m (depends on the operating environment) (Class2) · Protocol: Dedicated protocol Operate and set the GM10 and output data using a dedicated protocol. · Pairing: Maximum number of connections 8 (multi pairing) Overwritten through FIFO when 8 units are exceeded Displays the 6-digit SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) authentication code and checks for a match (numeric comparision) · Password request function: Requests connected terminals for passwords * Regions in which Bluetooth can be used are
restricted by the Radio Waves Act of each
country. For details, contact the appropriate
authority.
Mathematical Functions with Report Function (/MT)
Mathematical Function: · Number of math channels: GM10-1: 100, GM10-2: 200 Note: There is a limitation on the number of math channels
when the scan interval is shorter than 100 ms.
See "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 27.
· Scan interval
Measurement mode
Normal
Scan interval Scan interval
High speed Dual interval
Scan interval Master scan interval
· Expression: Up to 120 characters · Operations:
General arithmetic operations: Four arithmetic operations (+, -, *, /), square root, absolute, common logarithm, natural logarithm, exponential, and power Relational operations: <, , >, , =, and Logic operations: AND, OR, NOT, and XOR
13
Statistical operations: TLOG (maximum, minimum, average, sum, P-P values of time series data), CLOG (maximum, minimum, average, sum, P-P values of a specified channel)
Special operations: PRE, HOLD, RESET, CARRY Conditional operation: [a?b:c] Bit operation: BIT Integer extracting operation: INT Remainder extracting operation: MOD Trigonometric functions: SIN, COS CP calculation: CP.O2, CP.CO2 Special CLOG.AVE calculation: CLOG.PAVE · Computation accuracy:
Double-precision floating point · Data that can be used
Channel data: Measurement channels: 0001 to 6516 Math channels: A001 to A100 (GM10-1) A001 to A200 (GM10-2) Communication channels: C001 to C300 (GM10-1) C001 to C500 (GM10-2) Communication channel raw data: RC001 to RC300 (GM10-1) RC001 to RC500 (GM10-2) Constants: K001 to K100 Variable constant: W001 to W100 Internal switches: S001 to S100 Flags: F01 to F20 Recording state: REC01 Integer data: Z000 to Z999
Logic math function: A function that outputs calculated results as 0 or 1 to DOs or internal switches · Number of logic maths: 50 · Math interval: Fastest 100 ms · Expression: Up to 120 characters · Math type: Basic arithmetic, relational, logical, conditional, bit · Data that can be used: All channel data Logic math: LM001 to LM050 · Output destination: Internal switches, DO channels (only when set to Manual) · Setting change: Cannot be changed during recording
Report function: Report at each scheduled time of report.
· Number of report channels: 60
· Target: Measurement (input/output module)/math/
communication channels
Note: There is a limitation on the number of report channels when the scan interval is shorter than 100 ms. See "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 27.
· Scan interval
Measurement mode
Scan interval
Normal
Scan interval
High speed
Scan interval
Dual interval
Scan interval of each group
· Report types: Hourly + daily, daily + weekly, daily + monthly, batch, day custom
· Computation types: Average, maximum, minimum, sum, instantaneous value
Unit of sum: OFF, /s, /min, /hour, /day
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
· Report templates: Office Open XML spreadsheet files (which can be displayed with Microsoft Office Excel) or PDF files can be output or printed out with any LANconnected printer supporting the HP PCL5c language and the port 9100.
Communication Channel Function (/MC) Data of external devices, such as PLC and PC, can be displayed and recorded. · Number of communication channels: GM10-1: 300 (C001 to C300)
GM10-2: 500 (C001 to C500)
Note: There is a limitation on the number of communication channels when the scan interval is shorter than 100 ms. See "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 27. The minimum communication channel update interval is 100 ms.
· Scan interval
Measurement mode
Scan interval
Normal
Scan interval
High speed
Scan interval
Dual interval
Master scan interval
· Calibration correction: Mode: Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, correction coefficient * Number of set points: 2 to 12 * Only when the /AH option is installed
Log Scale (/LG) A logarithmic voltage that has been converted from a physical value is applied to the GM10, and then the GM10's Log scale (logarithmic scale) is used to display and record the physical value. · Input type: Log input (logarithmic input), pseudo log input (input that supports pseudo logs), log linear input (input that is linear on a logarithmic scale) · Range: 20mV/60mV/200mV/1V/2V/6V/20V/50V · Scalable range: Log input: 1.00E-15 to 1.00E+15 (15 decades maximum) Scale_L < Scale_U If the lower limit mantissa is 1.00, the difference between the exponents must be 1 or more. If the lower limit mantissa is a value other than 1.00, the difference between the exponents must be 2 or more. Pseudo Log Input/Log linear input 1.00E-15 to 1.00E+15 (15 decades maximum) The upper limit mantissa is the same as the lower limit mantissa. If the lower limit mantissa is 1.00, the value must be between 1.00E15 and 1.00E+15, the difference between the exponents must be 1 or more, and the maximum decades is 15. If the lower limit mantissa is a value other than 1.00, the value must be between 1.01E15 and 9.99E+14, the difference between the exponents must be 1 or more and the maximum decades is 15. · Alarm type: High limit, low limit, delay high limit, delay low limit
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
14
· Alarm setting range: The range converted into the LOG scale corresponding to -5% to 105% of the span width.
· Alarm hysteresis: Fixed to 0 · Green band setting range: The lower limit to the
upper limit of the scale. However, the lower limit of the display position must be smaller than the upper limit. · Decimal place: 1 or 2 · Misc: Nonlinear input is possible by correcting the input value.
EtherNet/IP Communication (PLC communication protocol) (/E1)
Can join an Ethernet/IP network as an adapter (or a server) · Loading data from the I/O channel or math channel (/MT)
I/O channel: GM10-1: 100, GM10-2: 500 Math channel: GM10-1: 100, GM10-2: 200 · Loading and writing data from/to the communication channel (/MC) Communication channel:
GM10-1: 300, GM10-2:500 · Implementation level: Level 2 · Number of the simultaneous connection: Max. 10
(Explicit message) · Supported protocols: EIP/PCCC, EIP/native
WT Communication (/E2) Acquires data by connecting to WT equipment manufactured by Yokogawa Meters & Instruments Corp. via Ethernet communication. · Supported models: WT1800, WT500, WT300 · Number of connectable units: 16 · Communication cycle: 500 ms/1 s/2 s/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s · Types of data that can be obtained: Voltage, current, power, power factor, phase, electrical energy, high-frequency wave, etc. · Number of data allocations: 300
Multi-batch Function (/BT) Recording start/stop and data file creation is possible for each batch. · Number of multi batches GM10-1: 6 max., GM10-2: 12 max. · Batch single operation: Memory start/stop, math reset, message writing · Batch overview operation: Computation start/stop, report start/stop, manual sampling, setup data save/load · Scan interval: 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s (common to all batches) · Data type: Display or event only Trigger mode not available for event data. · Recording interval: Common to all batches · Data file: Display or event data file created for each batch · Number of display groups: GM10-1: 6 max. per batch Number of channels per group: 20 GM10-2: 12 max. per batch Number of channels per group: 20 Channels assigned to the display group of each batch and those set as recording channels are recorded to data files. · Batch single settings: Group, trip line, file header, data file name, text field, batch number, lot number
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
· Measurement mode limitations: Measurement modes High speed and Dual interval cannot be used.
Aerospace Heat Treatment (/AH) Supports heat treatment application AMS2750/ NADCAP Schedule management for periodically executing calibration correction configuration and the like In correction coefficient mode of calibration correction, two biases can be specified: one based on thermocouple and another based on device · Number of manageable schedules GM10-1: 6 max., GM10-2: 12 max. · Calibration correction mode: Off, linearizer approximation, linearizer bias, correction coefficient Number of set points: 2 to 12
OPC-UA Server (/E3) Data acquired by the GM can be accessed through Ethernet communication from a host system (OPCUA client). · Communication Type: OPC-UA Server Encoding: UA Binary Protocol: OPC UA TCP Maximum number of connections: 3 sessions Profile: Micro Embedded Device Server · Security Mode: None Encryption: None Login: Anonymous, Username · Data acquisition: Measurement value, alarm status, alarm value Computation value, alarm status, alarm value Communication value, alarm status, alarm value Batch information
· Data writing: Measurement channel (DO channel only), communication channel, alarm value, batch information
· Other acquired information: Device name, serial number, time, device status
· Port number: 4840 (changeable: 1 to 65535) · Number of items: 300 max. (MonitoredItem/Session) · Fastest period: 100 ms · Service set:
Discovery
FindServers, GetEndpoints
SecureChannel OpenSecureChannel,
CloseSecureChannel
Session
CreateSession, ActivateSession,
CloseSession
View
Browse, BrowseNext,
TranslateBrowsePathsToNodeIds
Attribute
Read, Write
MonitoredItem CreateMonitoredItems,
ModifyMonitoredItems,
DeleteMonitoredItems,
SetMonitoringMode
Subscription CreateSubscription, ModifySubscription,
DeleteSubscriptions, Publish, Republish,
SetPublishingMode
· When a PID control module is installed, loop objects are displayed in place of channel objects. Data collection: PV, SP, OUT, R/S, A/M/C, R/L, alarm status in loops Data saving: OUT, R/S, A/M/C, R/L
15
SLMP Communication (Mitsubishi PLC) (/E4) Protocol function of CC-Link family that enables connection from GM to Mitsubishi Electric PLC without sequencer program. The GM operates as an SLMP client. Writing GM measurement data to a PLC and reading PLC data into communication channels* are possible. * The communication channel function (/MC option) is required. · Number of connection destination servers: 16 max. · Read cycle: 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 1 min · Number of commands that can be registered: GM10-1: 100 GM10-2: 200 · Communicable internal data: Special relay (SM), special register (SD), input (X), output (Y), internal relay (M), latch relay (L), annunciator (F), edge relay (V), link relay (B), data register (D), link register (W), timer contact (TS), timer coil (TC), current timer value (TN), integration timer contact (SS), integration timer coil (SC), current integration timer value (SN), counter contact (CS), counter coil (CC), current counter value (CN), special link relay (SB), special link register (SW), direct access input (DX), direct access output (DY), index register (Z), file register (R, ZR), extended data register (D), extended link register (W) Device code is indicated in parentheses.
Program Control Function (/PG) See the PID Control Module General Specifications (GS 04L51B31-01EN).
Integration Bar Graph Function (/WH) The integration bar graph function reads the report file (a hourly report or hourly report / daily report) stored on the SD card of GM 10 and displays the integration bar graph and the integration trend in the web application. · Report file monitoring and display update interval: 5 minutes
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
GM10 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color:
Case: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB 6.0/4.5 equivalent)
Front panel: Light charcoal gray (Munsell 10B 3.6/0.3 equivalent)
· External Dimensions: 45.1(W)×111(H)×107.1(D) mm · Weight: Approx. 0.25 kg
Power Supply and Isolation
· Power supply: Supplied from the GM90PS Power Supply Module
· Power consumption: 2.8 W maximum · Insulation resistance: Between RS-422/485 terminal
and internal circuit and between Ethernet terminal and internal circuit, 20 M or higher at 500 V DC · Isolation diagram
RS-422/485 terminal (/C3 option) Ethernet port
Internal circuit GM90PS ground terminal
Circuits delimited by lines are mutually isolated.
Other Specifications
· Memory backup: A built-in lithium battery backs up the settings and runs the clock.
External Dimensions
45.1 [1.77] 42.5 [1.67]
USB port 3
[0.12]
Unit: mm [approx. inch]
117.1 [4.61] (/C3) 107.1 [4.22]
100 [3.94]
16
GM90MB MODULE BASE SPECIFICATIONS
Slide locks (top and bottom)
Module connector
· Number of installable modules: 1 · Power consumption: Less than 0.01 W · Automatic module number assignment function:
Automatically assigns a module number when a module is connected · Material: Polycarbonate · Color: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB 6.0/4.5
equivalent) · External Dimensions: 57.7(W)×135(H)×103.5(D) mm · Weight: Approx. 0.15 kg
External Dimensions
18.8 [0.74]
57.7 [2.27] 50 [1.97] 39.5 [1.56]
9.5 [0.37]
Unit: mm [approx. inch] 103.5 [4.07]
106.8 [4.20]
135 [5.31]
8 [0.31]
RS-422/485 terminal [/C3 option] Ethernet port
2-ø5.5[0.22]×5.9[0.23] Oval hole for wall mounting
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Latch For fixing a DIN rail in place
(8) ([0.31]) When the latch is lowered
Rear view
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
GM90PS POWER SUPPLY MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
With a power inlet
Unit: mm
With power supply terminals (M4)
Power switch
GM90PS-1N1[]0 · Rated supply voltage: 100 to 240 VAC · Allowable supply voltage: 90 to 264 V AC · Power frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%, 60 Hz ± 2% · Power switch: Available · Terminal type: Inlet or M4 screw terminal · Allowable interruption time: Less than 1 cycle of the power supply frequency · Insulation resistance: Between the power supply terminal and earth: 20 M or higher at 500 V DC · Withstand voltage: Between the power supply terminal and earth: 3000 V AC (50/60 Hz) for 1 minute · Grounding: Be sure to set a low grounding resistance. · Material: Polycarbonate · Color: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB 6.0/4.5 equivalent) · External Dimensions: 56.8(W)×135(H)×107.1(D) mm · Weight: Approx. 0.55kg
GM90PS-1N2W0 · Rated supply voltage: 12 to 28 V DC · Allowable supply voltage: 10 to 32 V DC · Power frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%, 60 Hz ± 2% · Power switch: Available · Terminal type: M4 screw terminal · Allowable interruption time: 2 ms or less · Insulation resistance: Between the power supply terminal and earth: 20 M or higher at 500 V DC · Withstand voltage: Between the power supply terminal and earth: 1000 V AC (50/60 Hz) for 1 minute · Grounding: Be sure to set a low grounding resistance. · Material: Polycarbonate · Color: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB 6.0/4.5 equivalent) · External Dimensions: 56.8(W)×135(H)×107.1(D) mm · Weight: Approx. 0.55kg
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
17
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
External Dimensions
With a power inlet 88 [3.46] 7[0.28]
ø4.1[0.16] hole for wall mounting
18.8 [0.74]
2.7 [0.11]
106.8 [4.20]
135 [5.31]
126.7 [4.99]
ø4.1[0.16]×4.5[0.18] oval hole for wall mounting
With power supply terminals (M4)
88 [3.46] 7[0.28]
ø4.1[0.16] hole for wall mounting
18.8 [0.74]
2.7 [0.11]
106.8 [4.20]
135 [5.31]
126.7 [4.99]
Rear view
ø4.1[0.16]×4.5[0.18] oval hole for wall mounting
18
Unit: mm [approx. inch]
(8) ([0.31])
When the latch is lowered Rear view
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
UNIT EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Main unit (single unit)
L
19
Unit: mm [approx. inch]
138 [5.43] 88 [3.46]
2.7 [0.11]
135 [5.31]
146 [5.75]
DIN rail
Main unit (multi unit)
L
GX90EX
I/O module
GM10
GM90PS
138 [5.43] 88 [3.46]
2.7 [0.11]
135 [5.31]
146 [5.75]
DIN rail
Sub unit
I/O module
GM10 GM90PS
L
138 [5.43] 88 [3.46]
2.7 [0.11]
146 [5.75]
135 [5.31]
DIN rail
Unit types Main unit (single unit) Main unit (multi unit) Sub unit (multi unit )
I/O module
GX90EX GM90PS
Unit: mm
approx. inch
Maximum width for each input / output module to be connected: L (mm)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
138 188 238 288 338 388 438 488 538 588 638
5.43 7.40 9.37 11.34 13.31 15.28 17.24 19.21 21.18 23.15 25.12
188 238 288 338 388 438 488
7.40 9.37 11.34 13.31 15.28 17.24 19.21
138 188 238 288 338 388 438
5.43 7.40 9.37 11.34 13.31 15.28 17.24
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
20
Vertical Mounting Dimensions for DIN Rail Mounting
Unit: mm [approx. inch] DIN rail
68.6 [2.70] 185 [7.28]
Wall Mount Dimensions
620.5 570.5 520.5 470.5 420.5 370.5 320.5 270.5 220.5 170.5 [24.43] [22.46] [20.49] [18.52] [16.56] [14.59] [12.62] [10.65] [8.68] [6.71]
Unit: mm [approx. inch]
120.5 [4.74]
88 [3.46]
590.5 540.5 490.5 440.5 390.5 340.5 290.5 240.5 [23.25] [21.28] [19.31] [17.34] [15.37] [13.41] [11.44] [9.47]
190.5 [7.50]
140.5 [5.53]
90.5 [3.56]
185 [7.28]
Tolerance: ±0.3 [±0.012]
M4 depth 3 mm [0.12 inchs] or more
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
SMARTDAC+ STANDARD · Universal Viewer
· Hardware Configurator
· IP Address Configurator
Download the latest version of the software from the following URL.
www.smartdacplus.com/software/en/
PC System Requirements
Operating system:
OS
Type
Windows Vista Home Premium SP2 (excluding 64-bit editions)
Business Edition SP2 (excluding 64-bit editions)
Windows 7 Home Premium SP1 (32- or 64-bit edition)
Professional SP1 (32- or 64-bit edition)
Windows 8.1 Update (32- or 64-bit edition)
Pro Update (32- or 64-bit edition)
Windows 10 Home (32- or 64-bit edition)
Pro (32- or 64-bit edition)
Processor and main memory:
OS Windows Vista
Windows 7 Windows 8.1 Windows 10
Processor and main memory Intel Pentium 4, 3 GHz or faster x64 or x86 processor. At least 2 GB.
32-bit edition: Intel Pentium 4, 3 GHz or faster x64 or x86 processor. At least 2 GB. 64-bit edition: Intel Pentium 4, 3 GHz or faster x64 processor. At least 2 GB.
Web browser: Supported browser: Windows Internet Explorer Version: Internet Explorer 11 HTTP1.1 and JavaScript are used.
Hard disk: 100MB or more of free space (depending on the amount of data, you may need more memory).
Display: A video card that is recommended for the OS and a display that is supported by the OS, has a resolution of 1024 x 768 or higher, and that can show 65,536 colors (16-bit, high color) or more.
Universal Viewer
The universal viewer can display the following data generated by data loggers or recorders on the screen and print it out on the printer. · Display data file
· Event data file
· Report data file
· Manual sampled data file
21
· Viewer function: Waveform display, digital display, circular display, list display, report display, operation log display, waveform superimposed display, etc.
· Data conversion: File conversion to Excel and ASCII format
· Signature function: Signing measurement data files is possible.
Hardware Configurator · Offline setting on Web browser
Settings can be configured from Internet Explorer 11.
IP Address Configurator · GM10 IP address assignment
Edit the GM10's host name, IP address, DNS server, domain name, domain suffix, and so on as well as register the host name to a DNS server. · GM10 searchSearch for GMs in the same network segment and list them.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
MODEL AND SUFFIX CODES
GM10 Model and Suffix Codes
Model
Suffix Optional code code
Description
GM10
Data Acquisition Module for
SMARTDAC+ GM
Type
-1
Standard (Max. measurement
channels: 100)
-2
Large memory (Max.
measurement channels: 500)
Area
E
General
--
0
Always zero
Optional features /AH Aerospace heat treatment
/AS Advanced security function *5
/BT Multi-batch function *4
/C3 RS-422/485
/C8 Bluetooth
/E1 EtherNet/IP communication
(PLC communication protocol) *7
/E2
WT communication*1
/E3 OPC-UA sever
/E4 SLMP communication (Mitsubishi
PLC) *8
/LG Log scale
/MC Communication channel function
*9
/MT Mathematical function (with report function) *2 *3
/PG Program control function *6 /WH Integration bar graph function *10
*1 If you specify WT communication, you must also specify the communication channel function (/MC option).
*2 Optional code /MT (MATH) required if using the GX90XD's or GX90WD's pulse input.
*3 Optional code /MT (MATH) required if using the GX90XP's pulse integration.
*4 When the advanced security function is set to ON, the scan interval is set to 100 ms or longer. In addition, the dual interval function and PID modules cannot be used.
*5 When the multi-batch function is set to ON, the scan interval is set to 500 ms or longer. In addition, the dual interval function cannot be used.
*6 A PID control module is required to use the program control function.
*7 If you want to write from a PLC to the GM via EtherNet/ IP communication, a separate communication channel (/ MC) is required.
*8 A separate communication channel (/MC) is required to perform SLMP communication.
*9 A communication channel (/MC) is required to configure the Modbus client function and for other devices to write to the GM Modbus server.
*10 If you specify /WH option, you must also specify the communication channel function (/MC option) and the mathematical function (/MT option).
22
GM90PS Model and Suffix Codes
Model Suffix Code GM90PS
Type -1
Area
N
Supply voltage 1
2
Power supply
D
connection
F
H
N
Q
R
W
--
0
Optional features
Optional code
Description
Power Supply Module for
SMARTDAC+ GM
Always 1
General
100-240 V AC
12-28 V DC *1
Power inlet with UL/CSA
cable
Power inlet with VDE cable
Power inlet with GB cable
Power inlet with NBR cable
Power inlet with BS cable
Power inlet with AS cable
Screw terminal (M4) (without
power cable)
Always zero
/WH For Integration bar graph
function *2
*1 Only W (Screw terminal (M4)) is available for the power supply connection.
*2 When using with GM10 (/ WH option), it is necessary to specify the / WH option (for integrated bar graph function) for GM90PS.
GM90MB Model and Suffix Codes
Model Suffix Code
Description
GM90MB
Module Base for SMARTDAC+ GM
--
-01
Always -01
Area
N
General
--
0 Always zero
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model, suffix code, and optional codes, when necessary, are required to be specified.
Note 1: For modules other than GM90PS (power supply module), a GM90MB (module base) is required for each module.
Note 2: Before ordering, read "MODEL SELECTION GUIDE" on page 24 and "Restrictions and Cautions" on page 26.
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Model
Standard accessory name
Qty
GM10
SD card (1 GB)
1
GM90PS Connector cover
1
Power cable
1
(depends on the suffix code of the
power supply connection)
Interconnect screw (M3)
4
GM90MB Interconnect screw (M3)
4
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
23
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)
Product
Model/part
no.
SD card (1 GB)
773001
Shunt resister for M3 terminal (250 ± 0.1 %)
415940
Shunt resister for M3 terminal (100 ± 0.1 %)
415941
Shunt resister for M3 terminal (10 ± 0.1 %)
415942
Shunt resister for clamp terminal (250 ± 0.1 %) 438920
Shunt resister for clamp terminal (100 ± 0.1 %) 438921
Shunt resister for clamp terminal (10 ± 0.1 %) 438922
Dummy cover
B8740CZ
Validation Documents (For /AS option) *1
773230
*1 Provision of Validation Documents A license sheet containing the license key required for installation is provided. Download the validation document from the following URL. http://www.smartdacplus.com/software/en/
Related Product (Sold Separately)
Model
Description
GA10
Data Logging Software
OS: Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012
Test Certificate (QIC, sold separately) QIC is available for each model.
User's Manual Product user's manuals can be downloaded from the following URL. You will need Adobe Reader 7 or later by Adobe Systems.
URL: www.smartdacplus.com/manual/en/
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
24
MODEL SELECTION GUIDE
Selection of the system configuration and GM10 type
Model-Type GM10-1 GM10-2
Internal memory 500MB 1.2GB
System Configuration
Single Unit Multi Unit Single Unit Multi Unit
I/O channels
0 to 100ch 0 to 100ch 0 to 100ch 0 to 420ch
I/O Modules
Model
Suffix code
GX90XA -10-C1N-N
-10-L1N-N
-10-U2N-N
-10-T1N-N -10-V1N-N -04-H0N- N
GX90XD GX90XP GX90YD
-06-R1N- N -16-11N-N -10-11N-N -06-11N-3N
GX90WD -0806-01N-3N
GX90XP -10-11N-N GX90YA -04-C1N-N
GX90UT -02-11N-3N
Product name Analog Input Module
Digital Input Module Pulse Input Module Digital Output Module Digital Input/Output Module Pulse Input Module Analog Output Module PID Control Module
Description
Number of channels
Measurement interval
(shortest)
Current (mA) input: DC current (mA), DC current 10
100 ms
standard signal (4-20 mA)
Low withstand voltage relay: DC voltage, standard
500 ms
signal, thermocouple (TC), DI (voltage, contact), and
DC current (by adding an external shunt resistor)
Universal: DC voltage, standard signal,
100 ms
thermocouple (TC), resistance temperature detector
(RTD), DI (voltage, contact), and DC current (by
adding an external shunt resistor)
Electromagnetic relay: DC voltage, standard signal,
1 s
thermocouple (TC), DI (voltage, contact), and DC
current (by adding an external shunt resistor)
High withstand voltage: DC voltage, standard signal,
100 ms
thermocouple (TC), DI (voltage, contact), and DC
current (by adding an external shunt resistor)
High-speed universal: DC voltage, standard
4
1 ms
signal, thermocouple, resistance temperature
detector (RTD), DI (voltage, contact), DC current
(when an external shunt resistor is connected)
4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance
6
100 ms
Remote control input, pulse input
16
100 ms
Pulse input (flow sum and the like)
10
100 ms
Alarm output, etc
6
100 ms
(update
interval)
Remote control input, pulse input
DI: 8
100 ms
DO: 6
Pulse input (flow sum and the like)
10
100 ms
Transmission output, manual output
4
100 ms(update
interval)
Control of temperature, flow, pressure etc.
2 loops 100 ms(update
interval)
Single unit system configuration (up to 100 channels)
GM90MB Module Base
GM90PS Power Supply Module
Configuration example (maximum) GM10: 1 GM90PS: 1 GX90[][]: 10 GM90MB: 11
GX90[][] I/O Module
GM10 Data Acquisition Module
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GM10
GM90PS
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
Multi unit system configuration (up to 420 channels)
Main unit
GX90EX I/O Expansion module
Sub unit
GM90MB Module Base
GM90PS Power Supply Module
25
GM90MB Module Base
GM90PS Power Supply Module
GX90[][] I/O Module
GM10 Data Acquisition Module
Main unit configuration example (maximum) GM10: 1 GM90PS: 1 GX90[][]: 6 GX90EX: 1 GM90MB: 8
GX90[][] I/O Module
GX90EX I/O Expansion module
Sub unit configuration example (maximum) GM90PS: 6 GX90[][]: 36 GX90EX: 6 GM90MB: 42
Main Unit (Unit 0)
Sub Unit (Unit 1)
Sub Unit (Unit 2)
Sub Unit (Unit 3)
Sub Unit (Unit 4)
Sub Unit (Unit 5)
Sub Unit (Unit 6)
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GX90EX GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GM10 GM90PS
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90EX
GM90PS
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90EX
GM90PS
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90EX GM90PS
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90EX GM90PS
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90[][]
GM90MB GX90EX
GM90PS
5
4
3
2
1
0 <---Slot number
GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GM90MB GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90[][] GX90EX GM90PS
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
26
RESTRICTIONS AND CAUTIONS
Limit to the number of modules and number of channels in the system
Maximum
System
Measurement mode
Number of Connections
Maximum Number of Channels
Module
I/O
Communication
Math
Normal GM10-1 High speed
10
100
8
32
300
100
Dual interval
10
50
150
50
Normal GM10-2 High speed
42
500
8
32
500
200
Dual interval
42
250
250
100
Report 60 30 60 30
Limit to the number of modules per unit
The following table shows the limits when the module specified under Module is connected to the system. The system will not operate if the limit is exceeded.
Module
When GX90XA-10-T1 is included When GX90XA-04-H0 is included When GX90XA-04-H0 and GX90YA are included When GX90UT is included
Single unit system Main unit 8 8 7 5
Multi unit system Main unit No limit No limit No limit 5
Limit to the Number of Sub Units · Up to six units can be connected. · Connection is not possible if the measurement mode is set to High speed.
Limit on Modules
· Up to 10 modules consisting of GX90YD, GX90WD, and GX90UT can be connected to the system. · One GX90WD module can be connected to each unit. · Two GX90YA modules can be connected to the main unit and to the sub unit. · Up to 10 GX90YA modules can be connected to a GM10-1 system and up to 12 to a GM10-2 system. · If the measurement mode is High speed, a GX90XD or GX90WD module can be connected to the system. · If the measurement mode is High speed, only GX90XA-04-H0 (high-speed AI), GX90XD (DI), and GX90WD (DIO)
are detected. DI and DIO are fixed to remote mode. Measurement and recording are not possible. · If the measurement mode is Dual interval, GX90UT is not detected. · Up to 3 GX90UT modules can be connected to a GM10-1 system and up to 10 to a GM10-2 system.
Notes on Module Installation
· If you want to use reference junction compensation on a thermocouple input of a GX90XA-10-U2, GX90XA-10-L1, GX90XA-10-T1 or GX90XA-10-V1, do not connect the following module to the right of the GX90XA module as seen from the front. Doing so may cause the reference junction compensation accuracy to deviate from the guaranteed range. GX90XA-10-C1 (for mA), GX90XA-04-H0 (high-speed AI), GX90YA, GX90WD, GX90UT
· If the maximum number of I/O channels are assigned and the last channel is assigned to an intermediate channel of a connected I/O module, that module and subsequent modules will not be identified.
GM10-1
Module n
Module 1
Maximum number of I/O channels
91 81
: 100 : :
106 90
1
··· :
10
This module will not be detected. · If you want to use the DI of a GX90XD or GX90WD, only a single module installed in the GM main unit can be used.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
27
Limit to the Number of Measurement Channels
There is a limit to the number of channels that can measure at scan intervals shorter than 100 ms.
· When the measurement mode is set to High speed.
GM10-1
Channel I/O Math
Communication Report
1 ms 1 1 3 1
2 ms 2 2 6 2
5 ms 5 5 15 5
10 ms 10 10 30 10
20 ms 20 20 60 20
50 ms 32 50 150 50
GM10-2
Channel I/O Math
Communication Report
1 ms 5 2 5 2
2 ms 10 4 10 4
5 ms 25 10 25 10
10 ms 32 20 50 20
20 ms 32 40 100 40
50 ms 32 100 250 60
· When the measurement mode is set to Dual interval.
GM10-1
Channel I/O Math
Communication Report
1 ms -----------------
2 ms -----------------
5 ms 5 2 7 2
10 ms 10 5 15 5
20 ms 20 10 30 10
50 ms 32 25 75 25
GM10-2
Channel I/O
Math *1 Communication *1
Report *2
1 ms
5 1 2 1
2 ms
10 2 5 2
5 ms
25 5 12 5
10 ms
32 10 25 10
20 ms
32 20 50 20
50 ms
32 50 125 30
*1 Channels that can be used only on one of the two scan groups. They operate at the scan interval specified in the master scan group.
*2 Can be specified from 30 channels.
Limit to the Number of Recording Channels in Each Measurement Mode
I/O channel + math channel + communication channel
System
Measurement 1ms mode
2ms
5ms 10ms
GM10-1 Normal
-----
-----
-----
-----
High speed
2
4
10
20
Dual interval
-----
-----
5
10
GM10-2 Normal
-----
-----
-----
-----
High speed
10
20
50
100
Dual interval
5
10
25
40
20ms
----40 20 ----150 50
50ms 100ms
-----
100
100
100
50
100
-----
500
150
200
50
100
200ms
200 200 100 500 500 200
500ms
500 500 250 1000 1000 600
1 s or more 500 500 250 1000 1000 600
Dual Interval Searching of Universal Viewer
Recording mode
Free + Free Free + Trigger (single-shot, repeated) Trigger (single-shot, repeated) + Trigger
(single-shot, repeated)
Link dual interval waveform *1 ü
Show dual interval waveform integrated link view *2 ü
*1 Link dual interval waveform: A function that searches a folder for and displays the file that forms a pair with the displayed file.
*2 Show dual interval waveform integrated link view: A function that displays from the result of Search Open one of the files that forms a pair and displays both trends when it is clicked.
Program Pattern Setting (/PG option) Hardware Configurator is required for setting program patterns. You cannot set using the Web application.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
28
Trademarks
The TCP/IP software used in this product and the document for that TCP/IP software are based in part on BSD networking software, Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California. SMARTDAC+ and SMARTDACPLUS are trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Microsoft, MS, and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. Kerberos is a trademark of MIT. Bluetooth is a trademark or registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. Other company names and product names appearing in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders. The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the registered trademark or trademark symbols (® and TM).
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation Subject to change without notice.
GS 04L55B01-01EN Mar. 01, 2019-00
General Specifications
GS 04L53B01-01EN
GX90XA/GX90XD/GX90YD/ GX90WD/GX90XP/GX90YA
I/O Modules
OVERVIEW
I/O modules are connected to the GX/GP, Expandable I/O unit, GM main unit, and GM sub unit.
A module type is seven types, an analog input, a analog output, a digital input, a digital output, a digital input/output and a pluse input PID control*.
* For the GX90UT PID Control Module, please
see GX90UT PID Control Module General
Specifications (GS 04L53B01-31EN.)
Input and output have module structure and it can extend them easily.
The GX90XA analog input module has the following types; (1) universal type that allows the measurement input for DCV (direct voltage), TC (thermocouple), RTD (resistance temperature detector), and DI (contact or TTL level voltage), (2) current input type with the built-in shunt resistor to directly input a standard signal of 4-20mA DC, (3) electromagnetic relay scanner type insusceptible to noises that allows the measurement input for DCV, TC, and DI, (4) low withstand voltage relay type that offers a low cost, (5) high withstand voltage type that 600 V withstand voltage between input terminal and ground. The GX90XA-04-H0 high-speed analog input module can measure DCV (DC voltage), TC (thermocouple), RTD (resistance temperature detector), DI (contact or TTL level voltage) inputs at the shortest interval of 1 ms. It has an A/D converter for each input channel and employs a scannerless method, which is less susceptible to high frequency noise. The GX90XA-06-R1 4-wire RTD/resistance input module can receive input from 4-wire RTDs or 4-wire resistors. In each system, a measurement input signal can be assigned to each channel.
The GX90YA analog output module is capable of retransmission output of various types of channels and also manual output. It provides current output with channels that are isolated.
The GX90XD digital input module, which allows up to 16 digital inputs or pulse inputs, can be used as a multipoint digital input or pluse input. This module can also be used as a remote control input.
The GX90YD digital output module is assigned as a relay output (contact C) and is used when an alarm activates. It can also be used to turn the output on and off manually using the touch panel.
The GX90WD digital input/output module provides eight digital inputs or pulse inputs and six relay outputs. When there are small amounts of digital inputs and digital outputs, you do not need to mount two modules. This enables efficient channel configuration.
GX90XP pulse input module can receive up to 10 pulse inputs. The maximum input frequency is 20 kHz. The module can be used to integrate pulse signals from flowmeters or the like.* * Integration requires the math function (/MT option).
Each module provides a M3 screw terminal and clamp terminal*. Also, the input terminal can be removed and mounted. This enables wiring work to be carried out efficiently. * GX90YD and GX90WD are only M3 screw terminal.
The measuring accuracies noted in the general specifications have a margin of error that takes into account the product's components and the equipment used for adjustment and testing. However, the actual values calculated from the accuracy testing data upon shipment of the instrument from the factory are as follows.
DCV TC*3
RTD
Input Type
Measuring accuracy*1
(typical value*2)
20 mV
± (0.01% of rdg +5 V)
60 mV
± (0.01% of rdg +5 V)
6V (1-5V)
± (0.01% of rdg +2 mV)
R, S
±1.1°C
B
±1.5°C
K
± (0.01% of rdg +0.2°C for 0.0 to
(-200.0 to 1370.0°C) 1370.0°C;
± (0.15% of rdg +0.2°C) for -200.0
to 0.0°C
K
±0.2°C for 0.0 to 500.0°C;
(-200.0 to 500.0°C) ± (0.15% of rdg +0.2°C) for -200.0
to 0.0°C
J
± 0.2°C for 0.0 to 1100.0 °C;
± (0.10% of rdg + 0.2 °C) for -200.0
to 0.0 °C
T
± 0.2°C for 0.0 to 400.0°C;
± (0.10% of rdg + 0.2 °C) for -200.0
to 0.0 °C
N
± (0.01% of rdg + 0.2°C) for 0.0 to
1300.0 °C;
± (0.22% of rdg + 0.2°C) for -200.0
to 0.0 °C
Pt100
± (0.02% of rdg + 0.2°C)
(-200.0 to 850.0°C)
Pt100 (high resolution) ± (0.02% of rdg + 0.16°C )
(-150.00 to 150.00°C)
rdg: Reading value
*1 Applies to GX90XA-10-U2, A/D integration time
16.67 ms or more, General operating conditions:
23±2 ºC, 55±10% RH, supply voltage 90132,
180264 V AC, power frequency within 50/60
Hz ±1%, warm-up of 30 minutes or more, no
vibrations or other hindrances to performance.
*2 For the measuring accuracy (guaranteed), see
page 3 to 4.
*3 These values do not include the reference
junction compensation accuracy.
Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 Japan
GS 04L53B01-01EN ©Copyright April 2014 9th Edition July 9, 2018
2
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE SPECIFICATIONS ANALOG INPUT MODULE
(Model GX90XA or GX/GP main unit options /Uxx0)
The following notations are used to distinguish the various types.
Type Suffix Code
Notation
-U2
Universal
-C1
Current (mA) input
-L1
Low withstand voltage relay
-T1
Electromagnetic relay
-H0
High-speed universal
-R1
4-wire RTD/resistance
-V1
High withstand voltage
GX90XA
· Input Type:
Suffix Code -U2
-C1
Input Type
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple (TC), resistance temperature detector (RTD), DI (voltage, contact), and DC current (by adding an external shunt resistor) DC current (mA), DC current standard signal (4-20 mA)
Number of inputs
10
10
Description (Type) Universal
Current (mA) input
-L1
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple (TC), DI
10 Low withstand voltage
(voltage, contact), and DC current (by adding an exter-
relay
nal shunt resistor)
-T1
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple (TC), DI
10 Electromagnetic relay
(voltage, contact), and DC current (by adding an exter-
nal shunt resistor)
-H0
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple (TC), resist-
4*1
High-speed universal
ance temperature detector (RTD), DI (voltage, contact),
and DC current (by adding an external shunt resistor)
-R1
4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance
6
4-wire RTD/resistance
-V1
DC voltage, standard signal, thermocouple (TC), DI
10 High withstand voltage
(voltage, contact), and DC current (by adding an exter-
nal shunt resistor)
*1 However, 1 point when the scan interval is 1 ms and 2 points when it is 2 ms.
· Input format: Floating unbalanced, isolation between channels (excluding the b terminal on universal and low withstand voltage relay type)
· Measurement interval: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 , 200 , 500 ms, 1, 2, 5 s (See the table below.) Scan interval by module
Suffix Code
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
Scan interval 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms
1 s
2 s
5 s
-U2
-C1
-L1
-T1
-H0
-R1
-V1
· Input range: -5% or more and 105% or less (accuracy is guaranteed in the range from 0% to 100% inclusive) · Operation mode
It is possible to switch to a mode that makes measurements by reducing the supply frequency noise.
Suffix Code -U2 -C1 -L1 -T1 -H0 -R1 -V1
Operation mode 2 ch Only, Low noise mode or 10 ch Normal mode 2 ch Only, Low noise mode or 10 ch Normal mode
2 ch Only, Low noise mode or 6 ch Normal mode 2 ch Only, Low noise mode or 10 ch Normal mode
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
3
· Measurement ranges and accuracies*2 (However, the number of display digits can be increased by scaling.) *2 The following specifications apply to operation of the recorder under standard operation conditions. Temperature: 23 ± 2 °C, Humidity: 55% ± 10% RH, Power supply voltage: 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC, Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, Warm-up time: At least 30 min. Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect recorder operation. Reference junction compensation accuracy is not included for thermocouples.
Universal, Current (mA) input, Low withstand voltage relay, Electromagnetic relay, 4-wire RTD/resister, High withstand voltage type
Input Type
Range
DCV
Standard signal DC current DC current (standard signal TC (Excluding RJC accuracy)
20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 1 V 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V 0.4-2 V 1-5 V 0-20 mA 4-20 mA
R *3 S *3 B *3
K *3
E *3 J *3
T *3
N *3
W *4
L *5
U *5
WRe3-25 *6
KpvsAu7Fe *7 PLATINEL II *7 PR20-40 *8
NiNiMo *7 W/WRe26 *9
RTD (Measured current: 1 mA)
N(AWG14) *10 XK GOST *11 Pt100 *12
JPt100 *12
Cu10 GE Cu10 L&N Cu10 WEED Cu10 BAILEY Cu10 at 20°C =0.00392 Cu10 at 20°C =0.00393 Cu25 at 0°C =0.00425 Cu53 at 0°C =0.00426035 Cu100 at 0°C =0.00425
Measurement range
Measurement accuracy (digital display)
A/D integration time: 16.7ms or more *22
A/D integration time: 1.67ms *23
-20.000 to -60.00 to -200.00 to -1.0000 to -2.0000 to -6.000 to -20.000 to -50.00 to 0.3200 to 0.800 to
0.000 to 3.200 to
20.000 mV ±(0.05 % of rdg + 12 V) 60.00 mV ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.03 mV) 200.00 mV ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.03 mV) 1.0000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.2 mV) 2.0000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.2 mV) 6.000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 3 mV) 20.000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 3 mV) 50.00 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.03 V) 2.0800 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.2 mV) 5.200 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 3 mV)
20.000 mA ±(0.3 % of rdg + 5 A) 20.800 mA
±(0.1 % of rdg + 40 V) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.15 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.4 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 4 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 4 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 15 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 40 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.15 V) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 4 mV) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 15 mV)
±(0.3 % of rdg + 90 A)
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
-270.0 to -200.0 to
-270.0 to -200.0 to
-270.0 to
-270.0 to
0.0
to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
-150.00 to
-200.00 to
-150.00 to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
-200.0 to
1760.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 1.0°C)
1760.0 °C However, R, S; 0.0 to 800.0°C: ±2.2°C, 1820.0 °C B; 400.0 to 800.0°C: ±3.0°C
±(0.2 % of rdg + 6.0°C) However, R, S; 0.0 to 800.0°C: ±7.6°C, B; 400.0 to 800.0°C: ±11.0°C
Accuracy at less than 400.0°C is not guaranteed.
Accuracy at less than 400.0°C is not guaranteed.
1370.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 5.0°C)
500.0 °C However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.35 % of rdg + 0.7°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(3 % of rdg + 5.0°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
800.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 4.0°C)
1100.0 °C However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.35 % of rdg + 0.5°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(2 % of rdg + 4.0°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
400.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.35 % of rdg + 0.5°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
1300.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.3 % of rdg + 6.0°C)
However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.7 % of rdg + 0.7°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(5 % of rdg + 6.0°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
2315.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.3 % of rdg + 14.0°C)
However, more than 1000.0°C: ±(0.8 % of rdg
+ 9.0°C)
900.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 4.0°C)
Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.5 % of rdg + 0.5°C) 400.0 °C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.7 % of rdg + 0.5°C) 2320.0 °C ±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
300.0 K ±(0.15 % of rdg + 2.0 K) 1395.0 °C ±(0.25 % of rdg + 2.3°C) 1900.0°C ±(0.7 % of rdg + 0.4°C)
However, accuracy at less than 800.0°C is not
Less than 0.0°C: ±(3 % of rdg + 4.0°C) ±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
Less than 0.0°C: ±(3 % of rdg + 2.5°C) ±18.0°C More than 2000.0°C: ±0.9 % of rdg ±(0.2 % of rdg + 7.0 K) ±(0.25% of rdg + 8.0°C) ±20.0°C
However, accuracy at less than 800.0°C is not
1310.0°C 2320.0°C
1300.0°C 600.0°C 850.0°C 150.00°C 550.00°C 150.00°C 300.0°C 300.0°C 300.0°C 300.0°C 300.0°C
300.0°C
guaranteed. ±(0.25 % of rdg + 0.7°C) ±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C) However, accuracy at less than 300.0°C is not guaranteed. ±(0.2 % of rdg + 1.3°C) ±(0.25 % of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C) guaranteed range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other range: -200.0 to 300.0°C
guaranteed. ±(0.5% of rdg + 5.0°C) ±(0.4 % of rdg + 12.0°C) However, accuracy at less than 300.0°C is not guaranteed. ±(0.5% of rdg + 7.0°C) ±(0.5% of rdg + 4.0°C) ±(0.3 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.4 % of rdg + 6.0°C) guaranteed range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other range: -200.0 to 300.0°C
-200.0 to 300.0°C ±(0.3 % of rdg + 0.8°C)
±(0.5 % of rdg + 3.0°C)
-50.0 to 150.0°C ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.8°C)
±(0.3 % of rdg + 4.0°C)
-50.0 to 150.0°C ±(0.2 % of rdg + 1.0°C)
±(0.4 % of rdg + 5.0°C)
Max. resolution of digital
display 1 V 10 V 10 V 100 V 100 V 1 mV 1 mV 10 mV 100 V 1 mV 1 V
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1 K 0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
4
Continued
Input Type
Range
Measurement range
RTD
J263B *13
0.0
to
(Measured
current: Ni100 (SAMA) -200.0 to
1 mA)
Ni100 (DIN) *14 -60.0 to
Ni120 *15
-70.0 to
Pt25 *16
-200.0 to
Pt50 *17
-200.0 to
Pt200 WEED -100.0 to
Cu10 GOST *18 -200.0 to
Cu50 GOST *19 -200.0 to
Cu100 GOST -200.0 to
*20
Pt46 GOST *19 -200.0 to
Pt100 GOST *20 -200.0 to
4-wire RTD Pt100*12
-200.0 to
(Measured
-150.00 to
current: 1 mA)
JPt100*12 Cu10 GE
-200.0 to -150.00 to -200.0 to
Cu10 L&N
-200.0 to
Cu10 WEED -200.0 to
Cu10 BAILEY -200.0 to
Cu10 at 20°C -200.0 to
=0.00392
Cu10 at 20°C -200.0 to
=0.00393
Cu25 at 0°C -200.0 to
=0.00425
Cu53 at 0°C -50.0 to
=0.00426035
Cu100 at 0°C -50.0 to
=0.00425
J263B*13
0.0
to
300.0 K
250.0°C 180.0°C 200.0°C 550.0°C 550.0°C 250.0°C 200.0°C 200.0°C 200.0°C
550.0°C 600.0°C 850.0°C 150.00°C 550.0°C 150.00°C 300.0°C 300.0°C 300.0°C 300.0°C 300.0°C
300.0°C
300.0°C
150.0°C
150.0°C
300.0K
Ni100 (SAMA) -200.0 to 250.0°C
Ni100 (DIN)*14 -60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni120*15
-70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt25*16
-200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt50*17
-200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt200 WEED -100.0 to 250.0°C
Cu10 GOST*18 -200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu50 GOST*19 -200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu100
-200.0 to 200.0°C
GOST*20
Pt46 GOST*19 -200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 GOST*20 -200.0 to 600.0°C
4-wire RTD Pt500
-200.0 to 850.0°C
(Measured Pt1000
-200.0 to 850.0°C
current:
0.25 mA)
Resistance 20 (Meas- 0.0
to 20.000
(4-wire) ured current:
1 mA)
200 (Meas- 0.0
to 200.00
ured current:
1 mA)
2000
0.0
to 2000.0
(Measured
current: 0.25
mA)
DI
Level
Contact *21
Measurement accuracy (digital display)
A/D integration time: 16.7ms or more *22
A/D integration time: 1.67ms *23
±1.0 K
Less than 40.0 K: ±3.0 K ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.4°C)
±3.0 K
Less than 40.0 K: ±9.0 K ±(0.3 % of rdg + 2.0°C)
Max. resolution of digital
display 0.1 K
0.1°C
±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.3 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.3 % of rdg + 1.0°C) ±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C) ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.3 % of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.15 % of rdg + 0.3°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 2.0°C) guaranteed range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other range: -200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.3 % of rdg + 4.0°C) ±(0.6 % of rdg + 3.0°C)
±(0.4 % of rdg + 6.0°C) ±(0.3 % of rdg + 4.0°C) ±(0.3 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.6 % of rdg + 4.0°C) ±(0.3 % of rdg + 2.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 5.0°C) guaranteed range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other range: -200.0 to 300.0°C
0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.8°C)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±0.4 K Less than 40.0 K: ±0.8 K ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 2.0°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±1.5 K Less than 40.0 K: ±3.0 K ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 3.0°C) ±(0.2 % of rdg + 5.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1K
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.007) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.03) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.025) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.15) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.0)
0.001 0.01 0.1
Threshold level (Vth=2.4 V) Accuracy: ±0.1 V
-
Less than 1 k: 1(ON), More than 100 k: 0(OFF) (parallel capacitance of 0.01 F -
or less)
rdg: Reading value
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
5
High-speed universal type
Input Type
Range
DCV
Standard signal TC (Excluding RJC accuracy)
20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 1 V 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V 100 V 0.4-2 V 1-5 V R *3 S *3 B *3
K *3
E *3 J *3 T *3
N *3
W *4 L *5 U *5 WRe3-25 *6
KpvsAu7Fe *7 PLATINEL II *7 PR20-40 *8
NiNiMo *7 W/WRe26 *9
N(AWG14) *10 XK GOST *11
Measurement accuracy (digital display)
Measurement range
Scan interval: 50 ms or more
Scan interval: 20 ms or less
(Only the Values in [ ] apply when the (Only the Values in [ ] apply when the
scan interval is 50/100/200 ms)
scan interval is 1/2/5 ms)
-20.000 to 20.000 mV ±(0.05 % of rdg + 5 [12] V)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 25 [40] V)
-60.00 to 60.00 mV ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.02 mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.1 mV)
-200.00 to 200.00 mV ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.02 [0.03] mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.1 [0.4] mV)
-1.0000 to 1.0000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.2 mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.0 mV)
-2.0000 to 2.0000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5 [1.2] mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.0 [4.0] mV)
-6.000 to 6.000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 2 mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 10 mV)
-20.000 to 20.000 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 2 [3] mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 10 [40] mV)
-50.00 to 50.00 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.02 V)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.10 V)
-100.00
100.00 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.02 V)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.10 V)
0.3200 to 2.0800 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5 [1.2] mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.0 [4.0] mV)
0.800 to 5.200 V ±(0.05 % of rdg + 2 mV)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 10 mV)
Max. resolution of digital
display 1 V 10 V 10 V 100 V 100 V 1 mV 1 mV 10 mV 10 mV 100 V 1 mV
0.0
to 1760.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.0°C)
0.0
to 1760.0 °C However, R, S; 0.0 to 800.0°C: ±1.4°C,
0.0
to 1820.0 °C B; 400.0 to 800.0°C: ±1.5 [3.0] °C
±(0.1 % of rdg + 4.0 [6.0]°C) However, R, S; 0.0 to 800.0°C: ±4.8 [7.6] °C, B; 400.0 to 800.0°C: ±7.0 [11.0]°C
0.1°C
Accuracy at less than 400.0°C is not guaranteed.
Accuracy at less than 400.0°C is not guaranteed.
-270.0 to 1370.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 3.5°C)
0.1°C
-200.0 to 500.0 °C However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.2 % of rdg + 0.7°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(2 % of rdg + 3.5°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
-270.0 to 800.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1°C
-200.0 to 1100.0 °C However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.2 % of rdg + 0.5°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
-270.0 to 400.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1°C
However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.2 % of rdg + 0.5°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
-270.0 to 1300.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 4.0°C)
0.1°C
However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.5 % of rdg + 0.7°C) However, -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(3.5 % of rdg +
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed 4.0°C)
0.0
to 2315.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.0°C)
Accuracy at less than -200.0°C is not guaranteed
±(0.1 % of rdg + 7.0°C)
0.1°C
-200.0 -200.0
to 900.0 °C to 400.0 °C
More than 1000.0°C: ±(0.15 % of rdg) However, more than 1000.0°C: ±(0.8 % of rdg )
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1°C
Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.25 % of rdg + 0.5°C) Less than 0.0°C: ±(3 % of rdg + 4.0°C)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1°C
Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.5 % of rdg + 0.5°C) Less than 0.0°C: ±(2 % of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.0
to 2320.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 2.0°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 8.0°C)
0.1°C
More than 2000.0°C: ±(0.15 % of rdg) Less than 200.0°C: 12.0°C
0.0
to 300.0 K ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.7 [2.0] K)
0.0
to 1395.0 °C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.0°C)
0.0
to 1900.0°C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 2.5 [5.5]°C)
More than 2000.0°C: ±(0.1 % of rdg + 13.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 3.5 [7.0] K) ±(0.1% of rdg + 4.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 12.0 [18.0]°C)
0.1 K 0.1°C 0.1°C
However, accuracy at less than 800.0°C is not However, accuracy at less than 800.0°C is not
guaranteed.
0.0
to 1310.0°C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.7°C)
0.0
to 2320.0°C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 2.0°C)
guaranteed. ±(0.1% of rdg + 2.7°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 10.0°C)
0.1°C 0.1°C
However, accuracy at less than 300.0°C is not However, accuracy at less than 300.0°C is not
guaranteed.
guaranteed.
0.0
to 1300.0°C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(1.0% of rdg + 4.0°C)
-200.0 to 600.0°C ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.2 % of rdg + 0.5°C) Less than 0.0°C: ±(1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1°C 0.1°C
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
6
Continued
Input Type
Range
Measurement range
RTD (Measured current: 1 mA)
Pt100 *13
JPt100 *13
Cu25 at 0°C =0.00425 Cu53 at 0°C =0.00426035 Cu100 at 0°C =0.00425 J263B *14
-200.0 to -150.00 to -200.0 to -150.00 to -200.0 to
-50.0 to
-50.0 to
0.0
to
850.0°C 150.00°C 550.0°C 150.00°C 300.0°C
150.0°C
150.0°C
300.0 K
Ni100 (SAMA) -200.0 to 250.0°C
Ni100 (DIN) *15 -60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni120 *16
-70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt25 *17
-200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt50 *18
-200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt200 WEED -100.0 to 250.0°C
Cu50 GOST *20 -200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu100 GOST -200.0 to 200.0°C
*21
Measurement accuracy (digital display)
Scan interval: 50 ms or more
Scan interval: 20 ms or less
(Only the Values in [ ] apply when the (Only the Values in [ ] apply when the
scan interval is 50/100/200 ms)
scan interval is 1/2/5 ms)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.8°C)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C)
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±4.0 K Less than 40.0 K: ±0.8 K ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 1.0°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±1.5 K Less than 40.0 K: ±3.0 K ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 3.0°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C)
Max. resolution of digital
display 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1 K
0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
Pt46 GOST *20 -200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 GOST *21 -200.0 to 600.0°C
RTD
Cu10 GE
-200.0 to 300.0°C
(Measured Cu10 L&N
-200.0 to 300.0°C
current: 1. 6 mA)
Cu10 WEED -200.0 to 300.0°C Cu10 BAILEY -200.0 to 300.0°C Cu10 at 20°C -200.0 to 300.0°C
=0.00392
Cu10 at 20°C -200.0 to 300.0°C
=0.00393
Cu10 GOST *19 -200.0 to 200.0°C
DI
Level
Contact *22
±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.05 % of rdg + 0.3°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.7 [2.0]°C) guaranteed range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other range: -200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.1 % of rdg + 1.5°C) ±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.5 [5.0]°C) guaranteed range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other range: -200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.1 % of rdg + 0.7 [2.0]°C)
±(0.2 % of rdg + 2.5 [5.0]°C)
Threshold level (Vth=2.4 V) Accuracy: ±0.1 V
Less than 100 : 1(ON), More than 10 k: 0(OFF)
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C rdg: Reading value
*3 R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC60584-1, DIN EN60584, JIS C1602, ASTM E230 *4 W: W-5%Re/W-26%Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.) ASTM E988-96
(Type C equivalent of OMEGA Engineering Inc.) *5 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710 *6 WRe3-25: W-3%Re/W-25%Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.) ASTM E988-96
(Type D equivalent of OMEGA Engineering Inc.) *7 KpvsAu7Fe, PLATINEL II, NiNiMo: ASTM E1751 *8 PR20-40: PtRH20%-PtRh40%(Johnson Matthey Plc) ASTM E1751 *9 W/WRe26: W/W-26%Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.) ASTM E1751
(Type G equivalent of OMEGA Engineering Inc.) *10 N(AWG14): NBS *11 XK GOST: Type L (GOST R 8.525-2001) *12 Pt100: JIS C1604, IEC60751, DIN EN60751
JPt100: JIS C1604, JIS C1606 *13 J263B: Yokogawa Electric Corporation J263*B *14 Ni100 (DIN): DIN 43760 *15 Ni120: McGRAW EDISON COMPANY *16 Pt25: One-fourth of JPt100 resistance value *17 Pt50: JIS C1604, JIS C1606 *18 Cu10 GOST: One-tenth of Cu100 GOST resistance value *20 Cu50 GOST, Pt46 GOST: GOST 6651-94 *20 Cu100 GOST, Pt100 GOST: GOST 6651-2009 *21 The detected current value is approx. 10 A. *22 10 channel mode with scan interval set to 500 ms or higher, or 2 channel mode *23 10 channel mode with scan interval set to 100 ms or 200 ms
Measurement accuracy at scaling: measurement accuracy at scaling (digits) = measurement accuracy (digits) × scaling span (digits)/measurement span (digits) + 1 digit
* Rounding up decimal places
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
· Burnout detection*1 *2: Burnout upscale, downscale, or OFF selectable (for each channel). Available input: TC, RTD, Standard signal Detection condition; TC; Universal, Low withstand voltage relay, Electromagnetic relay, High withstand voltage type Normal: 2 k or less., Burnout: 200 k or more (parallel capacitance of 0.01 F or less) Detection current: Approx. 10 A High-speed universal type Detection current: Approx. 50 nA, Superposed electric current system RTD; Universal type Normal: wiring resistance or less, Burnout: 200 k or more parallel capacitance of less than 0.01 F or less Detection current: Approx. 10 A High-speed universal type Detection current: Approx. 100 nA, Superposed electric current system Standard signal: Normal: Within measuring range Burnout: Depends on the setting of the burnout judgment value. The burnout judgment value shall be set with the percentage of the specified span width. Lower limit: -20.0 to -5.0 % Upper limit: 105 to 120 % *1 None for the 4-wire RTD/resistance type *2 If the scan interval on the high speed AI module is 1 to 20 ms, burnout detection will not work correctly.
· Input external resistance: DC voltage, thermocouple input: 2 k or below Resistance temperature detector input: 10 or below in each wire (Same resistance in three wires)
· Input bias current: ±10 nA or less (when burnout function does not work)
· Measured current (for RTD): universal type: Approx. 1 mA High-speed universal type: Approx. 1 mA/1.6 mA (depends on the range) 4-wire RTD/resistance: Approx. 1 mA/0.25 mA (depends on the range)
· Input resistance: 10 M or more for TC/DC voltage (1 V range or less) input Approx. 1 M for DC voltage (2 V range or more)/standard signal input/DI voltage (Highspeed universal type)/while measurement is stopped (High-speed universal type) 250 (249.5 typ) for DC mA * typ: Typical value (Typical)
· Allowable signal source resistance: 2 k or less for TC/DC voltage (1 V range or less) input
· Effect of signal source resistance: ±10 V/1k or less for TC/DC voltage (1 V range or less) input ±0.15 % of rdg/1k or less for DC voltage (2 V range or more)/standard signal input
7
· Allowable wiring resistance: Max. 10 per line for RTD input (conductor resistance between the three lines shall be equal)
· Effect of wiring resistance: ±0.1°C/10 for RTD input (conductor resistance between the three lines shall be equal), ±1°C/10 (50 system or less, High-speed universal type) 4-wire RTD/resistance type 4-wire RTD100 system or more: ±0.1°C/10 4-wire RTD50 system or less: ±1°C/10 Resistance 20 : ± 0.001 or less Resistance 200 : ± 0.01 or less Resistance 2000 : ± 0.1 or less
· Allowable input voltage: Universal, Low withstand voltage relay, Electromagnetic relay, High withstand voltage type: ±10 V DC for TC/DC voltage (1 V range or less)/ RTD/DI (contact) input, DC mA ±60 V DC for DC voltage (2 V range or more) input/ DI (level) input High-speed universal type: ±120 V DC
· Allowable input current (current (mA) input type): 24 mA, 50/60 Hz, peak value including signal
· Noise reduction ratio Universal, Low withstand voltage relay, current (mA) input, Electromagnetic relay, 4-wire RTD/ resistance, High withstand voltage type:
Integration time *1 Normal mode
Common mode
1.67 ms
50/60 Hz, no noise reduction
More than 80 dB
*2 *4
More than 16.67 ms
More than 40 dB More than 120 dB
*2 *3
*2 *4
High-speed universal type:
Scan interval *1
Normal mode
Common mode
20 ms or less
50/60 Hz, no noise reduction
More than 80 dB
*2 *4
More than 50 ms More than 40 dB More than 120 dB
*2 *3
*2 *4
*1 A frequency discrimination setting is made in the main unit.
*2 A resistance temperature detector range is a converted value of voltage when a measured current flows.
*3 50/60 Hz ± 0.1 % *4 50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 imbalance, between
minus measuring terminal and ground
· Normal mode voltage for TC/ DC voltage (1 V range or less)/DI (voltage): 1.2 times or less of rated range Standard signal 0.4 to 2 V range: 2.4 V Standard signal 1-5 V range: 6 V RTD (100 system or more) : 50 mV peak RTD (50 system or less) : 10 mV peak * 50/60Hz, The peak value including the signal.
4-wire RTD/resistance Resistance (2000 ), RTD (100 , 500 1000 system): 50 mV peak Resistance (200 ), RTD (10 , 25 50 system): 10 mV peak Resistance (20 ): 4 mV peak
· Normal mode current (current (mA) input type): 24 mA DC (Value converted to voltage: 6V) * 50/60 Hz, The peak value including the signal.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
· Common mode voltage for measuring input: 30 V ACrms (50/60Hz) or ±60 V DC (Maximum common mode noise voltage for measuring input: 250 V ACrms) High-speed universal type only 300 V ACrms (50/60Hz), Double insulation High withstand voltage type only 600 V ACrms (50/60Hz) or 600 V DC, Double insulation
· Maximum voltage between measuring input channels: 30 V ACrms (50/60 Hz) or ±60 V DC (Maximum common mode noise voltage between measuring input channels: 250 V ACrms (60 V ACrms for low-voltage relay type)) High-speed universal type 300 V ACrms (50/60Hz), Double insulation
· Reference junction compensation accuracy: When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 °C and when Integral time 16.6 ms or more or scan interval 50 ms or more (for the high-speed universal type) and when input terminal temperature is balanced Type K, E, J, T, N, XK GOST: ±0.5 °C (23 °C ± 2 °C), ±0.7 °C (0 to 50 °C), ±1.0 °C (-20 to 60 °C) Type R, S, W, L, U, W97Re3-W75Re25, Platinel2, NiNiMo, W/WRe26, N(AWG14): ±1.0 °C (23 °C ± 2 °C), ±1.4 °C (0 to 50 °C), ±2.0 °C (-20 to 60 °C) Type KpvsAu7Fe: ±1.0 K (23 °C ±2 °C), ±1.4 K (0 to 50 °C), ±2.0 K (-20 to 60 °C) Type B, PR20-40: Internal reference compensation is fixed to 0°C
· Scan interval/A/D integration time: 10 ch. mode, 6 ch mode*3
Universal *1 , Current (mA) input *1 , 4-wire RTD/ resistance, High withstand voltage *1 type
Scan interval 100 ms/200 ms 500 ms or more 1 s 2 s or more
Integration time 1.67 ms 16.67 ms/20 ms 36.67 ms 100 ms
Electromagnetic relay scanner type
Scan interval
Integration time
1 s or more
16.67 ms/20 ms
2 s
36.67 ms
5 s
100 ms
Low withstand voltage relay type
Scan interval 500 ms or more 2 s
Integration time 16.67 ms/20 ms 36.67 ms
5 s
100 ms
2 ch. mode*2
Scan interval
Integration time
100 ms or more
16.67 ms/20 ms
1 s
36.67 ms
2 s or more
100 ms
*1 In 10ch mode, when the scan interval is set to 100 ms or 200 ms, the A/D integration time is fixed at 1.67 ms. This prevents power frequency noise from being eliminated, causing measured values to wobble.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
8
*2 Cannot be specified for the electromagnetic relay type, Low withstand voltage relay type, Highspeed universal type.
*3 For the 4-wire RTD/resistance type.
· Scan interval/filter type: High-speed universal type
Scan interval 20 ms or less
Non*
Filter
50 ms/100 ms/200 ms
50 Hz/60 Hz Simultaneous removal of 50 Hz and 60 Hz
500 ms or more
50 Hz/60 Hz/10 Hz
* With the high-speed universal type, when the
scan interval is 20 ms or less, supply frequency
noise is not removed. As such, the measured
values may fluctuate especially in temperature
measurement using thermocouples.
· Calibration correction: Mode: Linearizer Approximation, Linearizer Bias Number of correcting points: 12
· Moving average function: Can be switched On/Off (Settable for each channel) Moving average number can be selected from 2 to 100 times Select from 2 to 500 for the high-speed universal type.
· First-order lag input filter (high-speed universal type): Can be turned on/off for each channel Time constant: Scan interval × N where N is between 3 and 300)
· Reference junction compensation: Mode: Can be switch internal or external (Settable for each channel) (Set the value of the compensation temperature at external)
· Input calculation: Linear scaling, square root*, differential calculations (Settable for each channel)
* Not available for the 4-wire RTD/resistance type
· Bias function: Can be set the bias value to be added to the input value (Settable for each channel)
· Terminal type: M3 screw terminal or Clamp terminal · Withstand voltage
Universal, Electromagnetic relay, 4-wire RTD/ resistance type;
Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 3000 V AC for one minute Between the analog input channels: 1000VAC for one minute (excluding b-terminal) Current (mA) input type; Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 1500 V AC for one minute Between the analog input channels: 1000 V AC for one minute (excluding b-terminal) Low withstand voltage type; Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 1500 V AC for one minute Between the analog input channels: 400 V AC for one minute (excluding b-terminal) High-speed universal type; Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 3000 V AC for one minute Between the analog input channels: 3000 V AC for one minute
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
High withstand voltage Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 3700 V AC for one minute Between the analog input channels: 1000 V AC for one minute
· Insulation resistance: Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 V DC Between the analog input channels*: 20 M or greater at 500 V DC
* Excludes the b terminal of the universal type · Recommended replacement period of
electromagnetic relay scanner type modules: Electromagnetic relay scanner type modules make measurements by switching mechanical contact relays on and off. To ensure that the modules continue to operate reliably and correctly, replace them Continuous use at measurement interval 1 s: 1 year Continuous use at measurement interval 2 s: 2 years Continuous use at measurement interval 5 s: 5 years
Safety and EMC Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-2-030 CAN/CSA-IEC 61010-2-201*5
· UL: UL61010-1, UL 61010-2-030 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201 (CSA NRTL/C)*5
· CE/EMC directive *3: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive*3: EN61010-1, EN 61010-2-030 Overvoltage category II or I *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 Measurement category II *3 EN61010-2-201 compliance*5
· EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II or I depends on the power supply specification of the main unit.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 The CE standards for modules represent standards that are met when the module is installed in the main unit.
*4 Measurement category II (CAT II): Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
9
*5 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly. · To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel. · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 133.1 mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.3 kg
Power Supply
Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, GM90PS power supply module.
· Power consumption: GX90XA-10-U2: 0.7 W or less GX90XA-10-T1: 0.9 W or less GX90XA-10-C1: 0.7 W or less GX90XA-10-L1: 0.7 W or less GX90XA-04-H0: 2.0 W or less GX90XA-06-R1: 0.7 W or less GX90XA-10-V1: 1.0 W or less
Isolation
Universal, Low withstand voltage relay, Electromagnetic relay, Current (mA) input type
Analog input CH1 Analog input CH2 Analog input CH3 Analog input CH4 Analog input CH5 Analog input CH6 Input circuit Analog input CH7 Analog input CH8 Analog input CH9 Analog input CH10
Functional insulation
Reinforced insulation
Internal circuit
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
High withstand voltage type
Analog input CH1 Analog input CH2 Analog input CH3 Analog input CH4 Analog input CH5 Analog input CH6 Input circuit Analog input CH7 Analog input CH8 Analog input CH9 Analog input CH10
Internal circuit
Functional insulation
Double insulation (600 V ACrms 50/60 Hz, 600 V DC)
High-speed universal type
Analog input CH1 Analog input CH2 Analog input CH3 Analog input CH4
Internal circuit
Double insulation (300 Vrms 50/60Hz)
4-wire RTD/resistance type
Analog input CH1 Analog input CH2 Analog input CH3 Analog input CH4 Analog input CH5 Analog input CH6
Input circuit
Functional insulation
Reinforced insulation
Internal circuit
Terminal arrangements
M3 screw terminal Universal, Low withstand voltage relay, Electromagnetic relay, Current (mA) input, High withstand voltage type
No. Symbol No. Symbol 301 CH1( /b)*1 201 CH1(-/B) 302 CH2( /b)*1 202 CH2(-/B) 303 CH3( /b)*1 203 CH3(-/B) 304 CH4( /b)*1 204 CH4(-/B) 305 CH5( /b)*1 205 CH5(-/B) 306 CH6( /b)*1 206 CH6(-/B) 307 CH7( /b)*1 207 CH7(-/B) 308 CH8( /b)*1 208 CH8(-/B)
No. Symbol 101 CH1(+/A) 102 CH2(+/A) 103 CH3(+/A) 104 CH4(+/A) 105 CH5(+/A) 106 CH6(+/A) 107 CH7(+/A) 108 CH8(+/A)
309 CH9( /b)*1 209 CH9(-/B) 109 CH9(+/A) 310 CH10( /b)*1 210 CH10(-/B) 110 CH10(+/A)
*1 There are no symbol indications for the electromagnetic relay type, current (mA) input type, low withstand voltage relay type, or high withstand voltage type.
* RTD input terminal b is shorted internally across all channels.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
10
High-speed universal type
No. Symbol No. Symbol 301 CH1( /A) 201 CH1(-/b)
No. Symbol 101 CH1(+/B)
304 CH2( /A) 204 CH2(-/b) 104 CH2(+/B)
307 CH3( /A) 207 CH3(-/b) 107 CH3(+/B)
310 CH4( /A) 210 CH4(-/b) 110 CH4(+/B)
4 wire RTD/resistance type
No. Symbol 301 CH1(B) 302 CH1(C) 303 CH2( B) 304 CH3( B) 305 CH3( C) 306 CH4( B) 307 CH5( B) 308 CH5( C)
309 CH6(B) 310 Not Used
No. Symbol 201 CH1(A) 202 Not Used 203 CH2(A) 204 CH3(A) 205 Not Used 206 CH4(A) 207 CH5(A) 208 Not Used
209 CH6(A) 210 Not Used
No. Symbol 101 CH1(I) 102 CH2(C) 103 CH2(I) 104 CH3(I) 105 CH4(C) 106 CH4(I) 107 CH5(I) 108 CH6(C)
109 CH6(I) 110 Not Used
Clamp terminal Universal, Low withstand voltage relay,
Electromagnetic relay, Current (mA) input type, High
withstand voltage type
No. Symbol No. Symbol
201 CH2(+/A) 101 CH1(+/A)
202 CH2(-/B)
102 CH1(-/B)
203 CH2( /b) *1 103 CH1( /b) *1
204 CH4(+/A) 104 CH3(+/A)
205 CH4(-/B)
105 CH3(-/B)
206 CH4( /b) *1 106 CH3( /b) *1
207 CH6(+/A) 107 CH5(+/A)
208 CH6(-/B)
108 CH5(-/B)
209 CH6( /b) *1 109 CH5( /b) *1
210 CH8(+/A) 110 CH7(+/A)
211 CH8(-/B)
111 CH7(-/B)
212 CH8( /b) *1 112 CH7( /b) *1
213 CH10(+/A) 113 CH9(+/A)
214 CH10(-/B) 114 CH9(-/B)
215 CH10( /b) *1
115 CH9( /b) *1
*1 There are no symbol indications for the electromagnetic relay type, current (mA) input type, low withstand voltage relay type, or high withstand voltage type.
* RTD input terminal b is shorted internally across all channels.
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
High-speed universal type
No. Symbol 201 CH1(+/B) 202 CH1(-/b) 203 CH1( /A) 204 Not Used 205 CH2(+/B) 206 CH2(-/b) 207 CH2(/A) 208 Not Used 209 CH3(+/B) 210 CH3(-/b) 211 CH3( /A) 212 Not Used 213 CH4(+/B) 214 CH4(-/b) 215 CH4( /A) 4-wire RTD/resistance
No. Symbol 101 Not Used 102 Not Used 103 Not Used 104 Not Used 105 Not Used 106 Not Used 107 Not Used 108 Not Used 109 Not Used 110 Not Used 111 Not Used 112 Not Used 113 Not Used 114 Not Used 115 Not Used
No. Symbol 201 CH2(I) 202 CH2(A) 203 CH2(B) 204 CH2(C) 205 Not Used 206 CH4(I) 207 CH4(A) 208 CH4(B) 209 CH4(C) 210 Not Used 211 CH6(I) 212 CH6(A) 213 CH6(B) 214 CH6(C) 215 Not Used
No. Symbol 101 CH1(I) 102 CH1(A) 103 CH1(B) 104 CH1(C) 105 Not Used 106 CH3(I) 107 CH3(A) 108 CH3(B) 109 CH3(C) 110 Not Used 111 CH5(I) 112 CH5(A) 113 CH5(B) 114 CH5(C) 115 Not Used
A/D Calibration Value
Two types of A/D calibration values (factory shipment setting and user setting) can be saved. If the user setting is not proper, it can be restored to the calibration value at factory shipment.
11
External Dimensions · Except high speed universal type and high
withstand voltage type M3 screw terminal
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
133.1 (5.24)
45.2 (1.78)
Clamp terminal 133.1 (5.24)
3(0.12) 100 (3.94)
8(0.31)
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
45.2 (1.78)
3(0.12) 100 (3.94)
8(0.31)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
· High speed universal type and high withstand voltage type
M3 screw terminal
133.1 (5.24)
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
45.2 (1.78)
3 (0.12) 100 (3.94)
Clamp terminal
133.1 (5.24)
8 (0.31)
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
45.2 (1.78)
3 (0.12) 100 (3.94)
8 (0.31)
12
Normal Operating Conditions
For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications; GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O) Specifications: GS
04L53B00-01EN GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions
· Ambient temperature: 25 to 70°C · Ambient humidity: 5 to 95 %RH (no
condensation) · Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 maximum · Shock: 392 m/s2 maximum (in packaged
condition)
Effects of Operating Conditions
Integral time 16.67 ms or more or scan interval 50 ms or more (for the high-speed universal type)
· Influence of ambient temperature: variation against a change of 10 °C at an accumulation time of 16.67 ms or more ± (0.05% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or below. (In case of current (mA) input type, ± (0.075% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or below.) KpvsAu7Fe, PR20-40: ±(0.05% of rdg + 0.1% of range) or below, Cu10 system or less: ±(0.2% of rdg + 0.1 °C) or below No reference contact accuracy is guaranteed.
· Influence of power supply voltage variation: Accuracy is satisfied in the range of rated power supply voltage.
· Influence of external magnetic field: Variations against an AC external magnetic field (50/60 Hz, 400 A/m) are ±(0.1% of rdg+ 0 .1% of range) or below.
Installation limitations
If you want to use the electromagnetic relay type or high-speed universal type modules on a GM10 single unit, up to eight modules can be installed.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
DIGITAL INPUT MODULE (Model GX90XD or GX/GP main unit options /CRx1)
GX90XD
· Application: Remote control input, pulse input*1, etc
· Number of inputs: 16 · input type: DI, pulse*1 · Measurement interval: 100 ms (shortest) · Input type: Open collector or Voltage-free contact · Insulation type: Photocoupler, Trance (power
supply) · Contact rating: 12 V DC, 20 mA or more · Input resistance: Approx. 1 k · Allowable input voltage: +10 V · ON/OFF detection
Open collector contact input: Voltage in ON state: 0.5 V DC or less Leakage current in OFF state: 0.5 mA or less
Voltage-free contact input: Contact resistance in ON state: 200 or less Contact resistance in OFF state: 50 k or more
· Number of common: 2 (1 point/8 channels) · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal or Clamp
terminal (In case of Options /CRx1, a digital input module has M3 screw terminals.) · Withstand voltage Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 1500 V AC for one minute · Insulation resistance: Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC [Pulse input specifications]*1 · Counting system: The rising edge of the pulse is counted. Open collector: T he signal level at the input
terminal changes from high to low. Voltage-free contact: The contact changes from open to close. · Max. pulse period: 250Hz (The chattering filter: Off) 125Hz (The chattering filter: On) · Min. detection pulse width: Low (close), High (open), both is 2 ms or more · Pulse detection period: 1 ms · Pulse measuring accuracy: ±1 pulse · Pulse count interval: mesurement interval · Filter: The chattering filter can be switched On/ Off *. * When the chattering filter is off, connect GX/GP/GM so that it is not affected by the noise.
*1 MATH function (optional code /MT) is required.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
13
Safety and EMC Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-IEC61010-2-201*4
· UL: UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201(CSA NRTL/C)*4
· CE/EMC directive *3: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive EN61010-1 Overvoltage category II or I *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 Not included in the measurement category EN61010-2-201 compliance*4
· EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II or I depends on the power supply specification of the main unit.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 The CE standards for modules represent standards that are met when the module is installed in the main unit.
*4 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly. · To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel. · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 133.1 mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.3 kg
Power Supply
Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, GM90PS power supply module.
· Power consumption: 0.7 W or less
Isolation
Digital input CH1 Digital input CH2 Digital input CH3 Digital input CH4 Digital input CH5 Digital input CH6 Digital input CH7 Digital input CH8 Digital input CH9 Digital input CH10 Digital input CH11 Digital input CH12 Digital input CH13 Digital input CH14 Digital input CH15 Digital input CH16
Input circuit Internal circuit
Functional insulation Non-isolated
Terminal arrangements M3 screw terminal/Clamp terminal
No. Symbol 21 DI9 22 DI10 23 DI11 24 DI12 25 DI13 26 DI14 27 DI15 28 DI16 29 COM2 30 -
No. Symbol 11 DI1 12 DI2 13 DI3 14 DI4 15 DI5 16 DI6 17 DI7 18 DI8 19 COM1 20 -
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
External Dimensions M3 screw terminal
14
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
82.1(3.23) 36 97.1(3.82) (1.42)
3(0.12)
31.9(1.26) 45.2(1.78)
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
92(3.62)
1.9 (0.07)
Clamp terminal
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
36 97.1(3.82) (1.42)
82.1(3.23)
3(0.12)
31.9(1.26) 45.2(1.78)
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
92(3.62)
1.9 (0.07)
Normal Operating Conditions
For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications; GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O): GS 04L53B00-
01EN GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions Same as the GX90XA.
Installation limitations When the measurement mode is High speed, a single module, either this module or the GX90WD, can be installed. DI input is fixed to remote mode. Measurement and recording are not possible.
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE (Model GX90YD, or GX/GP main unit options /CR1x, /CR2x, /CR4x)
GX90YD
· Application: Alarm output, etc · Number of outputs: 6 · Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest) · Output type: Relay contact output, SPDT (NO-C-
NC) · Insulation type: Mechanical · Rated load voltage: 30 V DC or 250 V AC or less · Max. load current: 3 A (DC)/3 A (AC), resistance
load, each channel · Min. load voltage/current: 5 V DC/10mA · Recommended replacement periods of contact:
Mechanical 5,000,000 more ON-OFF operations Electrical 30,000 more ON-OFF operations (250 V AC 3 A or 30 V DC 3 A, resistance load) · Number of common: 6 · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal · Withstand voltage Between the output terminals and the internal circuit: 3000 V AC for one minute Between the output terminals: 3000 V AC for one minute · Insulation resistance: Between the output terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC Between the output terminals: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC
Safety and EMC Standards · CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-IEC61010-2-201*4 · UL: UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201(CSA NRTL/C)*4 · CE/EMC directive *3: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1 · CE/Low voltage directive EN61010-1 Overvoltage category II or I *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 Not included in the measurement category EN61010-2-201 compliance*4 · EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
15
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II or I depends on the power supply specification of the main unit.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 The CE standards for modules represent standards that are met when the module is installed in the main unit.
*4 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly. · To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel. · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 133.1 mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.3 kg
Power Supply
Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, GM90PS power supply module.
· Power consumption: 1.4 W or less
Isolation
Digital output CH1 Digital output CH2 Digital output CH3 Digital output CH4 Digital output CH5 Digital output CH6
Output circuit Internal circuit
Functional insulation
Reinforced insulation
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
Terminal arrangements M3 screw terminal
No. Symbol No. Symbol 21 DO4 N.C. 11 DO1 N.C. 22 DO4 COM 12 DO1 COM 23 DO4 N.O. 13 DO1 N.O. 24 DO5 N.C. 14 DO2 N.C. 25 DO5 COM 15 DO2 COM 26 DO5 N.O. 16 DO2 N.O. 27 DO6 N.C. 17 DO3 N.C. 28 DO6 COM 18 DO3 COM 29 DO6 N.O. 19 DO3 N.O. 30 Not Used 20 Not Used
External Dimensions M3 screw terminal
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
82.1(3.23) 36 97.1(3.82) (1.42)
3(0.12)
31.9(1.26) 45.2(1.78)
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
92(3.62)
1.9 (0.07)
Normal Operating Conditions
For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. However, excluding the shock at energization. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications; GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O): This General
Specifications GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions Same as the GX90XA.
Installation limitations When using the GX90WD digital input/output modules and GX90UT PID control modules together, up to a total of 10 modules can be installed.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
16
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE (Model GX90WD)
GX90WD
Digital input/output module can be used one module on GX/GP main unit, Expandable I/O, GM main unit, and GM sub unit. Digital Input Specifications
· Application: Remote control input, pulse input*1, etc
· Number of inputs: 8 · input type: DI, pulse*1 · Measurement interval: 100 ms (shortest) · Input type: Open collector or Voltage-free contact · Insulation type: Photocoupler, Trance (power
supply) · Contact rating: Use an external contact of 12
VDC and 20 mA or more. · Input resistance: Approx. 2.4 k · Allowable input voltage: +10 V · ON/OFF detection
Open collector contact input: Voltage in ON state: 0.5 V DC or less Leakage current in OFF state: 0.5 mA or less
Voltage-free contact input: Contact resistance in ON state: 200 or less Contact resistance in OFF state: 50 k or more
· Number of common: 1 (1 point/8 channels) · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal · Withstand voltage
Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 1500 V AC for one minute · Insulation resistance: Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC [Pulse input specifications]*1 · Counting system: The rising edge of the pulse is counted. Open collector: T he signal level at the input
terminal changes from high to low. Voltage-free contact: The contact changes from open to close. · Max. pulse period: 250 Hz (The chattering filter: Off) 125 Hz (The chattering filter: On) · Min. detection pulse width: Low (close), High (open), both is 2 ms or more · Pulse detection period: 1 ms · Pulse measuring accuracy: ±1 pulse · Pulse count interval: mesurement interval · Filter: The chattering filter can be switched On/ Off *. * When the chattering filter is off, connect GX/GP/GM so that it is not affected by the noise. *1 MATH function (optional code /MT) is required.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
17
Digital Output Specifications · Application: Alarm output, etc · Number of outputs: 6 · Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest) · Output type: Relay contact output, SPDT (NO-CNC) · Insulation type: Mechanical · Rated load voltage: Max. 150 VAC when connected to the main circuit (primary power source), Max. 250 VAC when connected to a circuit (secondary power source) derived from the main circuit, or Max. 30 V DC · Max. load current: 2 A (DC)/2 A (AC), resistance load, each channel · Min. load voltage/current: 5 V DC/10 mA · Recommended replacement periods of contact: Mechanical 5,000,000 more ON-OFF operations Electrical 30,000 more ON-OFF operations (250 V AC 2 A or 30 V DC 2 A, resistance load) · Number of common: 6 (All-contact independent) · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal · Withstand voltage Between the output terminals and the internal circuit: 2700 V AC for one minute Between the output terminals: 1350 V AC for one minute · Insulation resistance: Between the output terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC Between the output terminals: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC
Safety and EMC Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-IEC61010-2-201*4
· UL: UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201(CSA NRTL/C)*4
· CE/EMC directive *3: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive EN61010-1 Overvoltage category II or I *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 Not included in the measurement category EN61010-2-201 compliance*4
· EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II or I depends on the power supply specification of the main unit.
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 The CE standards for modules represent standards that are met when the module is installed in the main unit.
*4 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly. · To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel. · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 133.1 mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.3 kg
Power Supply
Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, GM90PS power supply module.
· Power consumption: 1.6 W or less
Isolation
Digital input CH1-CH8
Input circuit
Digital output CH1 Digital output CH2 Digital output CH3 Digital output CH4 Digital output CH5 Digital output CH6
Internal circuit
Functional insulation
Reinforced insulation
Note: Output channels are functionally isolated. In consideration of safety standards, do not connect the output channel to a mixture of Mains Circuits (primary power supply circuits) and circuits derived from Mains Circuits (secondary power supply circuits).
18
Terminal arrangements
M3 screw terminal
No. Symbol No. Symbol No. Symbol
301 DI3
201 DI2
101 DI1
302 DI6
202 DI5
102 DI4
303 DI COM 203 DI8
103 DI7
304 Not Used 204 Not Used 104 Not Used
305 DO1 N.O. 205 DO1 COM 105 DO1 N.C.
306 DO2 N.O. 206 DO2 COM 106 DO2 N.C.
307 DO3 N.O. 207 DO2 COM 107 DO3 N.C.
308 DO4 N.O. 208 DO4 COM 108 DO4 N.C.
309 DO5 N.O. 209 DO5 COM 109 DO5 N.C.
310 DO6 N.O. 210 DO6 COM 110 DO6 N.C.
External Dimensions M3 screw terminal
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
133.1 (5.24)
45.2 (1.78)
3(0.12) 100 (3.94)
8(0.31)
Normal Operating Conditions
For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. However, excluding the shock at energization. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications; GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O): This General
Specifications GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions Same as the GX90XA.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
19
Installation limitations
· A single module can be installed in each unit. · When using the GX90YD digital output modules
and GX90UT PID control modules together, up to a total of 10 modules can be installed. · When the measurement mode is High speed, a single module, either this module or the GX90XD, can be installed. DI input is fixed to remote mode. Measurement and recording are not possible. The DO function cannot be used.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
PULSE INPUT MODULE (Model GX90XP)
GX90XP
· Application: Pulse input (flow sum and the like) · Number of inputs: 10 · Measurement interval: 100 ms (shortest) · Input type: Contact (open collector, voltage-free
contact), level (5 V logic) · Input format: Pulled up to approx. 5 V through 5
k, common potential shared within the same module · Input range: Up to 20 kHz* * 30 Hz when the chattering filter is in use (On) · Minimum detection pulse width: 25 s* * 15 ms when the chattering filter is in use (On) · Measurement accuracy: Count ± 1 pulse For integration computation *, the following accuracies are added. Computation start: +1 scan interval Computation stop: - 1 scan interval * Integration requires the math function (/MT option). · Chattering filter: Removes chattering up to 5 ms (can be turned on/off on each channel) * When the chattering filter is off, connect GX/GP/GM so that it is not affected by the noise. · Input threshold level:
Contact (open collector, voltage-free contact): Counted when a change from 100 k or higher to 200 or lower is detected
Level (5 V logic): Counted when a change from 1 V or lower to 3 V or higher is detected
· Hysteresis width: Approx. 0.2 V · Contact, transistor rating:
Contact: 15 V DC or higher and 30 mA or higher rating. Minimum applicable load current 1 mA or less.
Transistor: With the following ratings: Vce > 15 V DC, Ic > 30 mA
· Allowable input voltage: ±10 V DC · Insulation type: Photocoupler isolation,
transformer isolation · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal or clamp
terminal · Withstand voltage:
Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 1500 V AC for 1 minute · Insulation resistance: Between the input terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 V DC
20
Safety and EMC Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-2-030 CAN/CSA-IEC 61010-2-201*5
· UL: UL61010-1, UL 61010-2-030 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201*5
· CE/EMC directive *3: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive*3: EN61010-1, EN 61010-2-030 Overvoltage category II or I *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 Measurement category II *3 Not included in the measurement category EN61010-2-201 compliance*5
· EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II or I depends on the power supply specification of the main unit.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 The CE standards for modules represent standards that are met when the module is installed in the main unit.
*4 Measurement category II (CAT II): Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.
*5 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly. · To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel. · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 133.1 mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.3 kg
Power Supply
Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, GM90PS power supply module.
· Power consumption: 0.9 W or less
Isolation
Pulse input CH1 Pulse input CH2 Pulse input CH3 Pulse input CH4 Pulse input CH5 Pulse input CH6 Pulse input CH7 Pulse input CH8 Pulse input CH9 Pulse input CH10
Input circuit Internal circuit
Functional insulation Non-isolated
Terminal arrangements M3 screw terminal/Clamp terminal
No.
Symbol
No.
Symbol
21 CH6
+
11 CH1
+
22
-
12
-
23 CH7
+
13 CH2
+
24
-
14
-
25 CH8
+
15 CH3
+
26
-
16
-
27 CH9
+
17 CH4
+
28
-
18
-
29 CH10
+
19 CH5
+
30
-
20
-
* Negative terminal (common) potential shared
External Dimensions M3 screw terminal
21
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
82.1(3.23) 36 97.1(3.82) (1.42)
3(0.12)
31.9(1.26) 45.2(1.78)
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
92(3.62)
1.9 (0.07)
Clamp terminal
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
36 97.1(3.82) (1.42)
82.1(3.23)
3(0.12)
31.9(1.26) 45.2(1.78)
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
92(3.62)
1.9 (0.07)
Normal Operating Conditions
For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications: GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O):
GS 04L53B00-01EN GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions
Same as the GX90XA.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE (Model GX90YA)
GX90YA
· Application: Retransmission output, Manual output
· Number of outputs: 4 (isolated between channels)
· Output type: 4 to 20mA or 0 to 20mA · Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest) · Load resistance: 600 or less · Output range: 0 to 22mA · Output accuracy: ± 0.1% of F.S. (1mA or more)
(F.S.=20mA) · Resolution: 0.002% · Operating temperature range: -20 to 50°C · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal or Clamp
terminal · Withstand voltage
Between the output terminals and the internal circuit: 1500 V AC for one minute Between the output terminals and the output terminals: 500 V AC for one minute · Insulation resistance: Between the output terminals and the internal circuit: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC Between the output terminals and the output terminal: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC
Safety and EMC Standards · CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, overvoltage category II or I *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-2-030 CAN/CSA-IEC61010-2-201*4 · UL: UL61010-1, UL 61010-2-030 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201 (CSA NRTL/C)*4 · CE/EMC directive *3: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1 · CE/Low voltage directive *3 EN61010-1, EN 61010-2-030 Overvoltage category II or I *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 Not included in the measurement category EN61010-2-201*4 · EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1 · KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance
22
*1 Overvoltage category: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. Applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. II or I depends on the power supply specification of the main unit.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 The CE standards for modules represent standards that are met when the module is installed in the main unit.
*4 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly. · To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel. · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 133.1mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.2 kg
Power Supply
Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, GM90PS power supply module.
· Power consumption: 3 W or less
Isolation
Analog output CH1 Analog output CH2 Analog output CH3 Analog output CH4
Internal circuit
Functional insulation
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
82.1(3.23)
107.1(4.22)
Terminal arrangements M3 screw terminal/Clamp terminal
Term. No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Symbol CH1 +
- CH2 +
- CH3 +
- CH4 +
- Not Used Not Used
D/A Calibration Value Two types of D/A calibration values (factory shipment setting and user setting) can be saved. If the user setting is not proper, it can be restored to the calibration value at factory shipment.
External Dimensions
M3 screw terminal/Clamp terminal
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
23
Effects of Operating Conditions
· Influence of power supply voltage variation: Accuracy is satisfied in the range of rated power supply voltage.
· emperature influence: ±200 ppm of F.S./°C or less
Installation Conditions
· Installation limitations by unit GX10/GP10: Up to 1 module GX20/GP20: Up to 2 module GM10/GX60: Up to 2 modules per unit
· System limitations GX10/GX20-1: Up to 10 module GX20-2: Up to 12 module
· If you want to use this module simultaneously with the GX90XA-04-H0 (high-speed universal type) module, the following limitation applies to the number of modules (including expansion modules) that can be used.
Model
Number of modules
GP10 (12 V DC)
Up to two modules total
GX20/GP20
Up to nine modules total
GX60
No limit
GM10 Single unit
Up to seven modules total
GM10 Multi unit (main unit/ Sub unit)
No limit
· Performing thermocouple measurement on a slot left of this module (above, below, left, and right for the GX20/GP20) may increase RJC errors on that module.
(1.02)
26
43.8(1.72) 45.2(1.78)
3(0.12)
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
92(3.62)
1.9 (0.07)
Normal Operating Conditions For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications; GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O): GS 04L53B0001EN GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions Same as the GX90XA.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
24
MODEL AND SUFFIX CODES
Analog input module, Digital I/O module (sold separately): MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90XA)
Model GX90XA Number of channels
Type
Suffix Code
-04 -06 -10
-C1 -L1
-U2 -T1
-H0 -R1 -V1
Terminal form
Area
N -3 -C N
Description Analog Input Module 4 channels (Type -H0 only) 6 channels (Type -R1 only) 10 channels (Type -C1, -L1, -U2, -T1, -V1) Current, scanner type (isolated between channels) DCV/TC/DI, low withstand voltage scanner type (isolated between channels) Universal, Solid state relay scanner type (3-wire RTD b-terminal common) DCV/TC/DI, Electromagnetic relay scanner type (isolated between channels) High-speed universal, individual A/D type (isolated between channels) 4-wire RTD/resistance, scanner type (isolated between channels) DCV/TC/DI, high withstand voltage scanner type (isolated between channels) Always N Screw terminal (M3) Clamp terminal General
MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90XD)
Model
Suffix Code
Description
GX90XD
Digital Input Module*
Number of channels -16
16 channels
Type
-11
Open collector/Non-voltage, contact (shared common), Rated 5 VDC
-
N
Always N
Terminal form
-3
Screw terminal (M3)
-C
Clamp terminal
Area
N General
* If you want to integrate pulse input, a math function (/MT option) is required in the GX/GP/GM main unit.
MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90YD)
Model
Suffix Code
GX90YD
Digital Output Module
Number of channels -06
6 channels
Type
-11
Relay, SPDT(NO-C-NC)
-
N
Always N
Terminal form
-3
Screw terminal (M3)
Area
N General
Description
MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90WD)
Model
Suffix Code
Description
GX90WD
Digital Iutput/Output Module*
Number of channels -0806
8 channel DIs, 6 channel DOs
Type
-01
Open collector/non-voltage contact (shared common), rated 5 VDC;
Relay, SPDT (NO-C-NC)
-
N
Always N
Terminal form
-3
Screw terminal (M3)
Area
N General
* If you want to integrate pulse input, a math function (/MT option) is required in the GX/GP/GM main unit.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
25
MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90XP)
Model GX90XP Number of channels -10
Suffix Code
Pulse Iutput Module* 10 channels
Description
Type
-11
DC voltage/open collector/non-voltage contact (shared common), rated
5 VDC
Terminal form
N -3 -C
Always N Screw terminal (M3) Clamp terminal
Area
N General
* If you want to integrate pulse input, a math function (/MT option) is required in the GX/GP/GM main unit.
MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90YA)
Model GX90YA
Suffix Code
Analog Output Module
Description
Number of channels -04
4 channels
Type -
-C1 N
Current (isolated between channels) Always N
Terminal form
-3
Screw terminal (M3)
-C
Clamp terminal
Area
N General
Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)
Product
Model/part no.
Shunt resister for M3 terminal (250 ± 0.1 %) 415940
Shunt resister for M3 terminal (100 ± 0.1 %) 415941
Shunt resister for M3 terminal (10 ± 0.1 %) 415942
Shunt resister for Clamp terminal (250 ± 0.1 %) 438920
Shunt resister for Clamp terminal (100 ± 0.1 %) 438921
Shunt resister for Clamp terminal (10 ± 0.1 %) 438922
Calibration certificate (sold separately) When ordering the GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20 with options (analog input), the calibration certificate for the modules is included in and shipped with the calibration certificate of the main unit.
When ordering an analog input module, each module gets its own calibration certificate (one certificate per module).
Test certificate (QIC, sold separately) When ordering the GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20 with options (analog/digial I/O), the QIC for each module is included in and shipped with the QIC of the main unit.
When ordering analog input modules and digital I/O modules, each module gets its own QIC (one QIC per module).
User's Manual Product user's manuals can be downloaded or viewed at the following URL. To view the user's manual, you need to use Adobe Reader 7 or later by Adobe Systems.
URL: www.smartdacplus.com/manual/en/
Product Purchase Specifications · The GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20 is composed of the main unit, I/O modules, the expandable I/O, and the expansion
module. There are two ways to purchase I/O modules. One way is to purchase them individually by specifying models GX90XA, GX90XD, GX90YD, GX90WD, GX90XP, and GX90YA, . The other way is to purchase them as an option (/UCxx or /USxx). Purchasing them as an option is convenient, but this places limitations on the number of analog inputs that you can obtain. If you want to use more than 51 channels, please purchase the I/O modules individually. · The GM is composed of the data aquisition module, the power supply module, the module base, the I/O module, and the expansion module. Please purchase the modules and module base individually.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
26
Trademarks The TCP/IP software used in this product and the document for that TCP/IP software are based in part on BSD networking software, Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California.
· SMARTDAC+ and SMARTDACPLUS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. · Microsoft, MS and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation USA. · Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. · Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider. · Other company names and product names appearing in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of
their respective holders.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-01EN
July 9, 2018-00
General Specifications
GS 04L53B01-31EN
GX90UT PID Control Module
GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20 Paperless Recorder Data Acquisition System GM Loop Control Function, Program Control Function (/PG Option)
Overview
The GX90UT is a PID control module that connects to the GX/GP, expandable I/O units, and GM main units and sub units.
The GX90UT PID Control Module can perform PID control on up to two loops. It is equipped with two control inputs, two control outputs, eight digital inputs, and eight digital outputs. In addition to single loop control, cascade control and loop control with PV switching are possible. For the control output, you can select current output or voltage pulse for each loop.
Installing the PID Control Module in the GX/GP/GM enables PID control of up to 20 loops/system (up to 6 loops/system for the GX10/GP10/GX20-1/GP20-1/ GM10-1). In addition to control loop monitoring and the control group screen for convenient operation, adjustment using the tuning screen is available.
Adding the /PG option to the GX/GP/GM main unit allows 99 patterns and 99 segments (1 pattern) of program patterns to be stored in the main unit. Further, up to 32 time events and 32 PV events can be set for each segment.
The GX90UT control data can be acquired and recorded in the GX/GP/GM main unit.
PID Control Module Specifications (Model: GX90UT)
Use
Controlling temperature, flow rate, pressure, etc.
Analog Input
· Measurement types: DC voltage (DCV), standard signal, type (TC), resistance temperature detector (RTD), DI (LEVEL, no-voltage contact), DC current (when external shunt resistor is connected)
· Number of measurement points: 2 · Scan period: Same as the control period · Input format: F loating unbalanced input, isolation
between channels · Measuring range/accuracy:
See the table in "Measuring Range/ Accuracy" (page 3). · Burnout detection: Upscale, downscale, and off can
be specified (for each channel). Detectable inputs: Thermocouple, resistance temperature detector, standard signal Detection condition: Thermocouple: Detection current: approx. 100 nA,
superposed electric current system RTD: Detection current: approx. 100 nA, superposed
electric current system
GX90UT
Standard signal: Normal: within measurement range Disconnection: based on the burnout criteria setting
The criteria is set as a percentage of the specified span width.
Lower limit: -20.0 to -5.0% Upper limit: 105 to 120% · External input resistance: DC voltage, thermocouple: 2 k or less RTD: 10 or less per line (the same resistance for all three lines) · Input bias current: ±10 nA or less (except when
burnout detection is set) · Measurement current (RTD): A pprox. 1 mA, approx.
1.6 mA · Input resistance:
10 M or more for thermocouple/DC voltage (1 V range or lower) About 1 M for DC voltage (2 V range or higher)/ standard signal · Allowable signal source resistance 2 k or less for thermocouple/DC voltage (1 V range or less) · Effect of signal source resistance: ±10 V/1 k or less for thermocouple/DC voltage (1 V range or less) ±0.15%/1 k or less for DC voltage (2 V range or higher)/standard signal · Effect of wiring resistance:
Fluctuation per 10 change per line (the same resistance for all three lines) RTD (100 type or higher): ±0.1°C/10 RTD (50 type or lower): ±1°C/10 · Allowable input voltage: Thermocouple, DC voltage (1 V range or lower), RTD, DI(contact input): ±10 VDC DC voltage (2 V range or higher), DI (level): ±60 VDC · Normal-mode rejection ratio: 40 dB or more · Common mode rejection ratio: 120 dB or more
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26 2nd Edition (YK)
2
· Normal mode voltage: Thermocouple, DC voltage, DI (voltage): 1.2 times the range rating or less Standard signal 0.4-2 V range: 2.4 V Standard signal 1-5 V range: 6 V RTD 100 type or higher: 50 mV peak RTD 50 type or lower: 10 mV peak
· Common mode voltage: 30 VACrms or ±60 VDC Maximum common mode noise voltage: 250 VACrms
· Common mode voltage between channels: 30 VACrms or ±60 VDC Maximum common mode noise voltage: 250 VACrms
· Reference junction compensation accuracy: When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 °C, using a power supply frequency noise reduction filter, and when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced
Type K, E, J, T, N, XK GOST: ±0.5°C (23°C±2°C) ±0.7°C (0 to 50°C) ±1.0°C (-20 to 60°C)
Type R, S, W, L, U, WRe3-25, PLATINEL II, NiNiMo, W/WRe26, N (AWG14):
±1.0°C (23°C±2°C) ±1.4°C (0 to 50°C) ±2.0°C (-20 to 60°C) Type KpvsAu7Fe: ±1.0 K (23°C±2°C) ±1.4 K (0 to 50°C) ±2.0 K (-20 to 60°C) Type B, PR20-40: internal RJC fixed at 0°C · Calibration correction function: Mode: Linearizer approximation, linearizer bias (number of correction points: 12), correction factor · First-order lag input filter: on/off switchable (for each
channel) Time constant: 1 to 120 s · Reference junction compensation:
internal/external switchable (for each channel)
· Input calculation: off, linear scaling, square root calculation (for each channel)*DC voltage/standard signal
· Bias function: Bias to add to input values can be specified (for each channel).
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Measuring Range/Accuracy1
Input type
Range
Measurement range
Measurement accuracy (digital display)
DC voltage
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
1 V
2 V
6 V
20 V
50 V
Standard signal 0.4-2V
1-5V
Thermocouple R2
(does not
S2
include
B2
reference
junction
K2
compensation
accuracy)
E2
J2
T2
-20.000 to
-60.00 to
-200.00 to
-1.0000 to
-2.0000 to
-6.000 to
-20.000 to
-50.00 to
0.3200 to
0.800 to
0.0
to
0.0
to
0.0
to
20.000 mV 60.00 mV 200.00 mV
1.0000 V 2.0000 V 6.000 V 20.000 V 50.00 V 2.0800 V 5.200 V 1760.0°C 1760.0°C 1820.0°C
-270.0 to 1370.0°C -200.0 to 500.0°C
-270.0 to 800.0°C -200.0 to 1100.0°C
-270.0 to 400.0°C
N2
-270.0 to 1300.0°C
W3
0.0
to 2315.0°C
L4
-200.0 to 900.0°C
U4
-200.0 to 400.0°C
Thermocouple WRe3-255
0.0
(does not
include
KpvsAu7Fe6 0.0
reference
PLATINEL II6 0.0
junction
PR20-407
0.0
compensation
accuracy)
NiNiMo6
0.0
W/WRe268
0.0
to 2320.0°C
to 300.0 K to 1395.0°C to 1900.0°C
to 1310.0°C to 2320.0°C
N(AWG14)9 XK GOST10
0.0
to 1300.0°C
-200.0 to 600.0°C
RTD (measurement current 1 mA)
Pt10011
JPt10011
Cu100 at 0°C =0.00425 Cu25 at 0°C =0.00425 Cu53 at 0°C =0.00426035 J263B17
-200.0 to -150.00 to -200.0 to -150.00 to -50.0 to
-200.0 to
-50.0 to
0.0
to
850.0°C 150.00°C 550.0°C 150.00°C 150.0°C
300.0°C
150.0°C
300.0 K
Pt2518
-200.0 to 550.0°C
Ni100 (SAMA) -200.0 to 250.0°C
Ni100 (DIN)12 -60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni12013
-70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt5014
-200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt200 WEED -100.0 to 250.0°C
Cu100 GOST15 -200.0 to 200.0°C
Pt46 GOST16 -200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 GOST15 -200.0 to 600.0°C
±(0.05% of rdg+12V) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.02 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.03 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.2 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+1.2 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+2 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+3 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.02 V) ±(0.05% of rdg+1.2 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+2 mV) ±(0.05% of rdg+1.0°C) Except R and S; 0.0 to 800.0°C: ±1.4°C B; 400.0 to 800.0°C: ±3.0°C Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than 400.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+0.7°C) Except -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.2% of rdg + 0.7°C) Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than -200.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+0.5°C) Except -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.2% of rdg + +0.5°C) Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than -200.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+0.5°C) Except -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.2% of rdg + +0.5°C) Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than -200.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+0.7°C) Except -200.0 to 0.0°C: ±(0.5% of rdg + 0.7°C) Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than -200.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+1.0°C) 1000.0 °C or more: ±0.15% of rdg ±(0.05% of rdg+0.5°C) Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.25% of rdg + 0.5°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.5°C) Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.5% of rdg + 0.5°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+2.0°C) 2000.0 °C or more: ±0.15% of rdg ±(0.05% of rdg+2.0 K) ±(0.05% of rdg+1.0°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+5.5°C) Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than 800.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+0.7°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+2.0°C) Accuracy not guaranteed for temperatures less than 300.0°C ±(0.05% of rdg+0.7°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.5°C) Less than 0.0°C: ±(0.2% of rdg + 0.5°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg+0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg+0.8°C)
±(0.05% of rdg+0.6°C)
±0.4 K Less than 40.0 K: ±0.8 K ±(0.1% of rdg+0.8°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg+0.6°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+1.0°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.3°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.6°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.3°C)
3
Digital display highest reso-
lution 1 V 10 V 10 V 100 V 100 V 1 mV 1 mV 10 mV 100 V 1 mV 0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1 K 0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C 0.01°C 0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1 K
0.1°C 0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C 0.1°C
rdg: reading
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
4
Continued Input type
Range
Measurement range
Measurement accuracy (digital display)
RTD (measurement current 1.6mA)
DI
Cu10 GE Cu10 L&N Cu10 WEED Cu10 BAILEY Cu10 at 20°C =0.00392 Cu10 at 20°C =0.00393 Cu10 GOST19 Cu50 GOST16 Level Contact20
-200.0 -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 -200.0
-200.0
-200.0 -200.0
to 300.0°C to 300.0°C to 300.0°C to 300.0°C to 300.0°C
to 300.0°C
to 200.0°C to 200.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg+2.0°C) Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: -70.0 to 170.0°C Cu10 L&N: -75.0 to 150.0°C Cu10 WEED: -200.0 to 260.0°C Other than above: -200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg+2.0°C) ±(0.05% of rdg+0.6°C) Threshold level (Vth = 2.4 V) accuracy ± 0.1 V 100 or less: 1 (ON), 10 k or more: 0 (OFF)
Digital display highest reso-
lution 0.1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C -
rdg: reading
1 Under standard operating conditions: 23±2ºC, 55±10% RH, supply voltage 90132, 180264 V AC, supply frequency within 50/60 Hz ±1%, warm-up of 30 minutes or more, no vibrations or other hindrances to performance.
2 R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC 60584-1, DIN EN 60584, JIS1602 3 W: W-5%Re/W-26%Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.) ASTM E988-96 4 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710 5 WRe3-25: W-3%Re/W-25%Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.) ASTM E988-96
6 KpvsAu7Fe, PLATINEL II, NiNiMo: ASTM E1751 7 PR20-40: PtRH20%-PtRh40%(Johnson Matthey Plc) ASTM
E1751 8 W/WRe26: W/W-26%Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.) ASTM E1751 9 N(AWG14): NBS 10 XK GOST: Type L (GOST R 8.525-2001) 11 Pt100: JIS C 1604, IEC 60751, DIN EN 60751
JPt100: JIS C1604, JIS C1606 12 Ni100 (DIN): DIN 43760 13 Ni120: McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 14 Pt50: JIS C1604, JIS C1606 15 Cu100 GOST, Pt100 GOST: GOST 6651-2009 16 Cu50 GOST, Pt46 GOST: GOST 6651-94 17 J263B: YOKOGAWA J263*B 18 Pt25: 1/4 the JPt100 resistance 19 Cu10 GOST: 1/10 the Cu100 GOST resistance 20 Detected current value: approx. 10 A
Measuring accuracy when scaling: Measuring accuracy when scaling (digits) = measuring accuracy (digits) × scaling span (digits)/measurement span (digits) + 2 digits
* Fractions rounded up
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Analog output
· Number of outputs: 2 · Output types: Current, voltage pulse, or DC loop
power supply (15 VDC) Current output:
Output signal: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA (reverse output possible)
Load resistance: 600 or less Output: ±0.1% of F.S. Except ±5% of F.S.
(F.S.: 20 mA) for 1 mA or less Temperature effect: ±200 ppm/°C Humidity effect: ±0.05% of F.S. @40°C, 93%RH Long-term drift: ±0.05% of F.S. Voltage pulse output: ON voltage: 12 VDC or more (load resistance of 600 or more) OFF voltage: 0.1 VDC or less Cycle time: 0.5 to 1000.0 s Time resolution: 10 ms or 0.1% of output
value, whichever is larger DC loop power supply:
Supply voltage: 13.0 to 18.3 V Maximum supply current:
about 22 mA (with short-circuit current limiting circuit) · Output calculation: split computation
Digital Input/Output
Digital Input · Number of inputs: 8 · Status detection minimum hold time: control period +
50 ms · Input type: no-voltage contact or open collector · Isolation type: photocoupler isolation · Contact rating: 12 VDC or more, 20 mA or more
Using a contact with a minimum ON current of 1 mA or less · Input resistance: about 2.4 k · Allowable input voltage: 10 V · Input detection: For open collector contact input ON voltage: 0.5 VDC or less Leakage current when turned off: 0.5 mA or less For no-voltage contact input Contact resistance when turned on: 200 or less Contact resistance when turned off: 50 k or more · Number of commons: 1 · Application: SP switching, operation mode switching, event input
Digital Output · Number of outputs: 8 · Output time resolution: 100 ms min. · Output type: open collector (sink type) · Isolation type: photocoupler isolation · Output contact capacity: 24 V DC max., 50 mA · Application: alarm output, FAIL output, etc.
Withstand voltage
· Between analog input terminals and internal circuit: 1500 V AC for 1 minute
· Between analog output terminals and internal circuit: 1500 V AC for 1 minute
· Between digital input terminals and internal circuit: 1500 V AC for 1 minute
· Between digital output terminals and internal circuit: 1500 V AC for 1 minute
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
5
· Between input terminals and output terminals: 1000 V AC for 1 minute
· Between analog input channels: 1000 V AC for 1 minute
· Between analog output channels: 20 M or more at 500 V AC
· Between analog I/O terminals and digital I/O terminals: 1000 V AC for 1 minute
Insulation resistance
· Between analog input terminals and internal circuit: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between analog output terminals and internal circuit: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between digital input terminals and internal circuit: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between digital output terminals and internal circuit: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between input terminals and output terminals: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between analog input channels: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between analog output channels: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
· Between analog I/O terminals and digital I/O terminals: 20 M or more at 500 V DC
Standards Compliance
· CSA:
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1, installation category II,*1 pollution degree 2*2
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-030 CAN/CSA-IEC 61010-2-201*4 · UL:
UL 61010-1, UL 61010-2-030 (CSA NRTL/C)
UL 61010-2-201(CSA NRTL/C)*4 · CE/EMC directives:
EN 61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2
EN 61000-3-2 compliance
EN 61000-3-3 compliance
EN 55011 Class A Group 1 · CE/Low-voltage directives:
EN 61010-1, EN 61010-2-030 compliance
installation category II,*1 pollution degree 2,*2 measurement category II*3
EN 61010-2-201 compliance*4 · Australia, New Zealand EMC standard (RCM):
EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1 · KC mark:
Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance *1 Installation category (overvoltage category) II: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. "II" applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. *2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only nonconductive pollution occurs. *3 Measurement category II (CAT II): Available in the testing and measuring circuits directly connected to a usage location (receptacle or the like) of a low-voltage main power supply facility. Appliances, portable equipment, etc.
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
*4 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · The GX10/GX20 is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel. Install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly.
· To make the GP10/GP20 comply with the relevant standard, support the parts of the device other than the front-panel control area with an instrumentation panel or the like, and install it in a location where people cannot touch the terminals carelessly or in a panel.
· Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door.
· The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· To comply with the relevant standard, make sure that the style numbers of the GX/GP main unit, GM90PS power supply module, and GX60 I/O base unit are at least 2.
· WEEE Directive Compliant
Construction
· Front panel (terminal) area: Dust-proof and drip-proof, IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color:
Front panel: Light charcoal gray (Munsell 10B 3.6/0.3 equivalent)
Case: Smoke gray (Munsell 4.1PB 6.0/4.5 equivalent) · External dimensions: 45.2 (W) x 111 (H) x 133.1 (D) mm
(D: depth including the terminal cover) · Terminal type: M3 screw terminal · Weight: Approx. 0.3 kg
Power supply
Supplied from GX/GP, GX60, GM90PS
· Power consumption: 2.8 W or less
Isolation
Analog input CH1 Analog input CH2 Analog output CH1 Analog output CH2 Digital input CH1 to 8 Digital output CH1 to 8
Functional isolation
Internal circuit
Terminal arrangement: M3 screw terminal
No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
309 310
Symbol DI3 DI6 DI-COM DO3 DO6 DO-COM AI1( /A) AI2( /A)
N.C. N.C.
No. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
209 210
Symbol DI2 DI5 DI8 DO2 DO5 DO8 AI1(-/b) AI2(-/b)
AO1(-) AO2(-)
No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
109 110
Symbol DI1 DI4 DI7 DO1 DO4 DO7 AI1(+/B) AI2(+/B)
AO1(+) AO2(+)
6
A/D Calibration Value
You can save two types of AD calibration values: factory default values and user-defined values. If there is a problem with user-define values, they can be reset to factory default calibration values.
External Dimensions
Unit: mm
107.1
26
43.8 45.2
3
100
92
8
1.9
Normal Operating Conditions
· Ambient temperature: 20 to 50°C However, use it within the ambient temperature range defined for the GX/GP/GM main unit. For the normal operating conditions of this module, see the specifications of the instrument (GX/GP, expandable I/O, GM) that this module is installed in. GX specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP specifications: GS 04L52B01-01EN Expandable I/O specifications: GS 04L53B00-01EN GM specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions
· Ambient temperature: -25 to 70°C · Ambient humidity: 5 to 95% RH (no condensation) · Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 or less · Shock: 392 m/s2 maximum (in packaged condition)
Effects of Operating Conditions
· Effects of ambient temperature: Fluctuation per 10°C change ±(0.05% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less However, for KpvsAu7Fe, PR20-40: ±(0.05% of rdg + 0.1% of range) or less
Cu10 or less: ±(0.2% of range + 0.1°C) or less · Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications in the rated power supply range · Effects of magnetic field: Fluctuation in response to a magnetic field of AC (50/60 Hz) 400 A/m is ±(0.1% of rdg + 0.1% of range) or less.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Block Diagram
Single Loop Control Block Diagram
GX/GP screen GX/GP Web app
GM Web app
(Recorder option /PG is required.)
Program operation During program operation, RSP1 is set to the SP of program operation.
7
Legend Module terminal Setup item PID channel
GX90UT module
PV input
AI1
DI1 to DI8
(Thermocouple) RJC
(DC voltage/standard signal)
Input type Measuring range/unit
Burnout detection
EXPV1 selection
Scaling Square root extraction
(Thermocouple/ RTD)
Input linearizer Bias Filter
RSP1 selection SP limit Filter
Ratio bias
Overrange detection AI1
(AI1 used)
(EXPV1 used)
(REMOTE)
DI1 to DI8: Event input is possible through configuration.
DI1 to DI8
(PROG/RESET)
Select with SP group number
SP limit
Control PV range/unit
Control overrange detection PV1
Control alarm function
PID1 computation
(LOCAL)
(REMOTE/PROG/RESET)
SP1
During program operation, SP rate-of-change limiter the SP rate-of-change
limiter does not work.
Output limiter 1
Input error preset output 1
Sensor burnout 1
Normal
AI2
Loop 2 (same operation as PID of loop 1)
Manual output 1 Output limiter 1
MAN Preset output 1
AUTO
STOP
RUN
OUT1
(OUT1 selected)
Retransmission output Scaling
(Not OUT)
Split computation
AO1
Output format setting
AO1
Control output
AO2: PV/SP/OUT/EXPV can be output as analog signals through configuration.
DO1 to DO8: Alarm output and status output are possible through configuration.
DO1 to DO8
DO1 to DO8
AO2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
8
Cascade Control Block Diagram
GX/GP screen (Recorder option /PG is required.) GX/GP Web app
Program operation
GM Web app
During program operation, RSP1 is set to the SP of program operation.
Legend
Module terminal Setup item PID channel
GX90UT module
Primary PV input
AI1
DI1 to DI8
Secondary PV input
AI2
(Thermocouple) RJC
(DC voltage/standard signal)
Input type Measuring range/unit
Burnout detection
EXPV1 selection
DI1
(TC)
Scaling Square root extraction
(Thermocouple/ RTD)
Input linearizer Bias Filter
RSP1 selection SP limit Filter
Ratio bias
to DI8
RJC
(DC voltage/standard signal)
Input type Measuring range/unit
Burnout detection
EXPV2 selection
Scaling Square root extraction
(Thermocouple/ RTD)
Input linearizer Bias Filter
Overrange detection AI1
Overrange detection AI2
(AI1 used)
(EXPV1 used)
(REM)
(PROG/RESET)
(AI2 used)
(EXPV2 used)
Select with SP group number
SP limit
Control PV range/unit
(LOCAL)
(REM/PROG/RESET)
Control overrange detection PV1
Control alarm function
PID1 computation
SP1
Output limiter 1 Input error preset output 1
SP rate-of-change limiter
During program
operation, the SP Select with SP group number
rate-of-change limiter does not work.
SP limit
(CASCADE)
(AUTO/MAN)
Control PV range/unit
Sensor burnout 1
Normal
Control overrange detection PV2
SP2 AUTO/MAN
CASCADE
SP2
Control alarm function
PID2 computation
Preset output 1
Output limiter 2
STOP
RUN
Input error preset output 2 Sensor burnout 2
Normal
OUT1
SP limit 1
Manual output 2 Output limiter 2
DI1 to DI8: Event input is possible through configuration.
AO1: PV/SP/OUT/EXPV can be output as analog signals through configuration. DO1 to DO8: Alarm output and status output are possible through configuration.
MAN Preset output 2
STOP
CASCADE/AUTO
RUN Retransmission output
OUT2
Scaling
Retransmission output (Not OUT)
Scaling
(OUT2 selected)
(Not OUT)
DO1 to DO8 DO1 to DO8
Split computation
AO1
Output format setting
AO1
Split computation
AO2
Output format setting
AO2
Control output
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Loop Control with PV Switching Block Diagram
GX/GP screen GX/GP Web app
GM Web app
(Recorder option /PG is required.)
Program operation During program operation, RSP1 is set to the SP of program operation.
9
Legend Module terminal Setup item PID channel
GX90UT module
PV input 1
AI1
DI1 to DI8
PV input 2
AI2
(Thermocouple) RJC
(DC voltage/standard signal)
Input type Measuring range/unit
Burnout detection
DI1
EXPV1 selection
to DI8
RJC (Thermocouple)
Input type Measuring range/unit
Burnout detection
EXPV2 selection
Scaling Square root extraction
(Thermocouple/ RTD)
(DC voltage/
Scaling
standard Square root extraction
signal)
(Thermocouple/ RTD)
RSP1 selection
Input linearizer Bias Filter
Input linearizer Bias Filter
SP limit Filter
Ratio bias
Overrange detection AI1
Overrange detection AI2
(AI1 used)
(EXPV1 used)
(AI2 used)
(EXPV2 used) (REMOTE)
(PROG/ RESET)
PV switching
Control PV range/unit
Control overrange detection PV1 PID1
Control alarm function computation
SP1
Output limiter 1
Input error preset output 1
Sensor burnout 1
Normal
Manual output 1 Output limiter 1
MAN Preset output 1
AUTO
Select with SP group number
SP limit
(LOCAL)
(REMOTE/ PROG/ RESET)
SP rate-of-change limiter
During program operation, the SP rate-of-change limiter does not work.
DI1 to DI8: Event input is possible through configuration.
AO2: PV/SP/OUT/EXPV can be output as analog signals through configuration.
DO1 to DO8: Alarm output and status output are possible through configuration.
Retransmission output
(Not OUT)
Scaling
STOP
RUN
OUT1
(OUT1 selected)
Retransmission output Scaling
(Not OUT)
Split computation
AO2
Output format setting
AO2
Split computation
AO1
Output format setting
AO1
Control output
DO1 to DO8 DO1 to DO8
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
10
Loop Control Function (Function of
the GX/GP/GM Main Unit)
This function can be used when a PID Control Module is installed in GX/GP main unit, expandable I/O, GM main unit, or sub unit.
Control Screen
Display update interval (GX/GP): 500 ms (fixed)
On the GM, a Web application is used to perform operations similar to those performed on the GX/GP main unit's screen.
Control Group Screen Multiple loops can be shown as a group (control group) on a single screen.
Controller style: A screen that emphasizes PV values as on a digital indicating controller
Display items: Tag No., tag string, operation mode, operating status, control alarm status, PV value, PV unit string, deviation status, SP value, OUT value, OUT unit string, error display
Faceplate style: A screen that shows control values graphically.
Display items: Same items shown on the controller style display as well as PV scale high and low limits, bar graph of PV value, PV alarm high and low limit marks, bar graph of OUT value, SP pointer
Faceplate
Controller
Controller style display example
Faceplate style display example
Control Overview Screen The control overview screen shows on a single screen the alarm status of all loops.
When an alarm occurs, the background color turns red and the text color white.
Control Group Screen
Number of Control Groups and Number of Loops That Can Be Registered
Model
GX10/GP10 GX20-1/GP20-1 (standard type) GM10-1 (standard type) GX20-2/GP20-2 (large memory type) GM10-2 (large memory type)
Number of Groups
(max.)
5 5 5 10
Number of Loops (max.)/
Group 6
8
8
8
10
8
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
11
Tuning Screen The tuning screen can be used to set or adjust PID constants and the like while viewing process data during operation.
Control Summary Screen The control summary screen shows a history of control operations (run/stop, auto/manual, etc.). You can select a historical entry and jump to the historical trend of that section.
· Displayed contents: name, status, time · Maximum number of summaries: 1000 (if the
maximum number is exceeded, the oldest event is deleted)
Multi Panel Screen You can assign a control group screen, control overview screen, control alarm summary screen, and control summary screen to the multi panel screen.
The control group screen and control overview screen may not be displayed depending on the size of the multi panel area that they are assigned to.
Control Alarm Summary Screen The control alarm summary screen shows a history of control alarms. You can select a historical entry and jump to the historical trend of that section.
· Displayed contents: loop, level, type, time · Maximum number of summaries: 500 (if the
maximum number is exceeded, the oldest event is deleted)
Favorite and Standard Screens Control screens can be registered to favorite and standard screens.
Background Color The background color of control screens can be set to white or black. (Controller style display example)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Loop Number:
L x x x
Loop Number; loop 1: 1 loop 2: 2
Slot number: GX10/GP10: 0 to 2 GX20/GP20 main unit: 0 to 9 GM main unit: 0 to 4 GX60 expandable I/O unit/GM sub unit: 0 to 5
Unit number: GX/GP recorder/GM main unit: 0 GX60 expandable I/O unit/GM sub unit: 1 to 6
Tag: Tag strings and tag numbers can be assigned to loop numbers.
· Tag string: up to 32 characters Displayable characters: English, Japanese, and Chinese characters
· Tag No.: up to 16 characters Displayable characters: Alphanumeric and symbols
PID Channel: PID channels are used to display control data and I/O data of PID control modules on trend or digital displays and save the data as recorded data.
· PID channel: analog input (AI1/AI2), digital input (DI1 to DI8), analog output (AO1/AO2), digital output (DO1 to DO8), control data (PV1/PV2, SP1/ SP2, OUT1/OUT2)
· PID channel recording interval: depends on the recorder's recording interval
PID Channel Display Settings: tag, color, zone, scale, bar graph
x x x x
Control data; PV1: 01, SP1: 02, OUT1: 03 PV2: 04, SP2: 05, OUT2:06
I/O data; AIN1: 07, AIN2: 08, AO1: 09, AO2: 10 DI1 to DI8: 11 to 18 DO1 to DO8: 19 to 26
Slot number: GX10/GP10: 0 to 2 GX20/GP20/GM main unit: 0 to 9 GX60 expandable I/O unit/GM sub unit: 0 to 5
Unit number: GX/GP recorder/GM main unit: 0 GX60 expandable I/O unit/GM sub unit: 1 to 6
Number of PID Channels: The number of channels of the GX90UT module is 26 (fixed).
When choosing the type of GX / GP / GM main unit (Standard / Large memory), please calculate it as 26 channels per one unit.
12
Control Functions
Control Mode Select from single loop control,* cascade control, and loop control with PV switching
* Two single loops can run on a single unit. (Dualloop control is possible.)
Number of Control Loops 2 loops/ module (single loop control×2, cascade control)
1 loop/module (loop control with PV switching)
GX/GP/GM system (standard type): 6 loops max. GX/GP/GM system (large memory type): 20 loops max.
Control Period (Input Sampling Period) 100 ms or 200 ms (system global setting)
Control Computation Function · Control type: PID control, on/off control · Target setpoint (SP): up to 8 per loop · PID parameter: 8 groups/loop · PID parameter group selection:
Using target setpoint numbers (SPNO) (PID numbers can be assigned as you like) or segment PIDs (during program control) Using PV input zones (zone PIDs)* Using target setpoint zones (zone PIDs)* Using final target setpoint zones (zone PIDs)* Externally (using the contact input)
* If the deviation exceeds the reference deviation setpoint during constant preset control, the PID constant switches automatically to the preset PID parameter group.
· Zone PID switches: 7 max. · PID default setting function: The controlled target can
be set to a PID constant suitable for the temperature or that suitable for the pressure or flow rate. · PID control mode: fixed-point control mode or constant preset control · SP limiter function: A high limit or low limit can be set. · SP ramp rate setting function: A rising ramp rate or falling ramp rate can be set. · Tracking function: SP tracking, PV tracking · Auto-tuning function · "Super" function (overshoot-suppressing function) · Anti-reset windup (over-integration prevention function) · Preset function (when operation is stopped) · Input error preset function
Operation Mode Switching Remote/local (R/L), auto/manual (A/M), run/stop (R/S), cascade/auto/manual (CAS/AUTO/MAN), auto tuning (AT) run/stop
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Control Parameter Setting Range · Proportional band (P): 0.0 to 999.9% · Integral time (I): 0 to 6,000 s · Derivative time (D): 0 to 6,000 s · ON/OFF control hysteresis:
0.0 to 100.0% of measuring range (high and low can be set separately) · Preset output value: -5.0 to 105.0% · Output limiter setting range: -5.0 to 105.0% (limiter low limit < limiter high limit) · Normal/reverse operation switching: normal or reverse · Tight shut function: When manual control is carried out with 4 to 20 mA output, control output can be reduced to about 0 mA. · Rate-of-change limiter of output: Off or 0.1 to 100.0%/s
External PV (EXPV) External PV can be turned on and off. An I/O, math, or communication channel can be assigned to PV. EXPV send period: 100ms to 500ms (depends on the system configuration.)
Remote SP (RSP) Remote SP can be turned on and off. An I/O, math, or communication channel or the analog input of a PID control module can be assigned to SP. A filter and ratio bias can be set on the remote SP. Remote SP send period: 100ms to 500ms (depends on the system configuration.)
Retransmission Output (Analog Retransmission) Function Output function: current output (reverse output possible) PV, SP, or OUT can be retransmitted from analog output.
Math Function CP computation (zirconia O2 sensor electromotive force, CO2 partial pressure), special CLOG.AVE computation, magic number * The math function is a recorder option (/MT). For details, see the general specifications of the GX/ GP/GM recorder.
Alarm Function · Control alarm types
PV high limit, PV low limit, SP high limit, SP low limit, deviation high limit, deviation low limit, deviation high and low limits, deviation within high and low limits, control output high limit, control output low limit, PV rate-of-change · Alarm action Standby action, relay action (hold/nonhold, reset on ACK, normal action on ACK), hysteresis, ON-delay timer, Off-delay timer · Number of alarm setpoints: 4 per loop
· Standby action Turns off alarms from the start of control (power-on) until a stable condition is reached.
· Hysteresis: Hysteresis can be set for each alarm setting.
· Display: status display in the digital display area when an alarm occurs. Common alarm display can be switched between hold and nonhold.
13
Other Functions · Recorder operation
Operation Operation security settings
Control Event Action Control action or status output can be performed using DI, DO, and internal switch.
· Action
All loop control operation start All loop control operation stop Control operation start/stop (specified loop) Auto/manual switch (specified loop) Remote/local switch (specified loop) Auto switch (specified loop) Manual switch (specified loop) Cascade switch (specified loop) Remote switch (specified loop) Local switch (specified loop) Hold operation Advance operation Program operation start Program operation stop Program operation mode change Hold operation (specified loop, specified program pattern) Advance operation (specified loop, specified program pattern) Program operation start (specified loop, specified program pattern) Program operation stop (specified loop, specified program pattern) Pattern number switch (BIN, BCD)
· Status output · Notification during control operation · Segment number (BIN, BCD) · Pattern number (BIN, BCD) · PROG/RESET monitoring · Wait end signal (1s, 3s, 5s) · Pattern end signal (1s, 3s, 5s) · PV event status · Time event status · Wait flag · Hold-on flag
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Program Control Function (/PG GX/
GP/GM recorder option)
With the program control function, a PID control module installed in the GX/GP main unit, expandable I/O, GM main unit or sub unit can control a system according to time varying setpoints sent from the GX/GP/GM main unit.
GX/GP screen GX/GP Web app
GM Web app
(Recorder option /PG is required.)
Program patterns are executed by operating the GX/GP or GM recorder or Web app.
Program pattern set 1
Program pattern set 2
. . . .
Program pattern set 99
99 program pattern sets
· Number of program pattern sets: 99 · Program pattern name: up to 20 characters · Number of segments: 99 segments/pattern · Number of simultaneous execution: 1 pattern only · SP update period: 100 to 500 ms (depends on the
system configuration) · PV events:
PV alarms, deviation alarms, and the like in program patterns Maximum number of events: 32 per segment Type: PV high limit, PV low limit, SP high limit, SP low limit, deviation high limit, deviation low limit, deviation high and low limits, deviation within high and low limits, control output high limit, control output low limit · Time event: Status output is possible according to the progress of program patterns. Maximum number of events: 32 per segment Time setting: 0 to (segment time - 1 s) · Operation mode switching: Program run/reset, hold/release hold, advance execute, local operation · Number of pattern repetitions: 999 max. or infinite · Segment time:
0 hours 0 minutes 1 second to 99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds
14
· Program pattern start/stop: Program pattern start, stop, hold, and advance can be controlled from digital input, communication, or recorder's screen.
· Program pattern selection: can be controlled from digital input, communication, or recorder's screen.
· Advance function: forcibly moves to the next segment · Wait function:
Wait time: off, 0 hours 0 minutes 1 second to 99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds
Wait zone: 0.0 to 10.0% of PV range span · Hold function: available
· PID parameter switching: Segment PID switching: PID parameter number can be switched for each segment. Zone PID switching: PID parameters can be switched using PV values and the like.
· Status output through digital output (control event action) Status monitoring is possible using digital output.
Program pattern number monitoring, program end (pattern end) notification, segment number monitoring, operation mode monitoring (PROG/REST), wait end notification, PV/time event notification, waiting notification, holding notification, local operation
Program Selection Screen The program selection screen is for selecting the program pattern to start operations and viewing pattern settings.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
· Program screen display: Program operation status display screen: displays the program operating status and the current PV simultaneously (GX/GP only) Number of display loops: 20 max. Number of screens: 1 Display update interval: Digital display area: 500 ms fixed Trend display area: according to the trend interval Program event display: possible
Program Operation Screen The program operation screen is for displaying the program pattern that is currently running.
· Other recorder operations: Save each program pattern to file Load program patterns Delete program patterns
Control Data Acquisition/Recording Function (GX/GP/GM recorder function)
· Acquires/records control data (PV, SP, OUT, etc.) Acquisition/recording is possible by installing a PID Control Module and reconfiguring the system. PID channel data can be used as an I/O channel to be saved in data files or used in computation and reports.
· Control operation summary (number of saved files: up to 3000 data values, number of display data values: up 1000 data values)
· Control alarm summary (number of saved files: up to 1000, number of display data entries: up 500)
15
Installation Conditions
Systematic PID Control Module Limitations
GX/GP/GM system (Standard type)
GX/GP/GM system (Large memory type)
Max. 3 devices Max. 10 devices
However, if the system includes PID control modules (GX90UT), digital output modules (GX90YD), and digital input/output modules (GX90WD), the maximum total number of these modules is 10.
If the recorder's measurement operation mode is high speed or dual interval, PID control modules will not work. (For details, see the general specifications of the GX/GP/GM recorder.)
Input/Output Module Limitations on Recorders and Units When Using the PID Control Module
GX10/GP10 recorder (Standard type)
GX20/GP20 recorder (Standard type)
GX20/GP20 recorder (Large memory type)
Max. 3 devices* Note: Max. 8 devices*
Max. 8 devices*
GM single unit
Max. 5 devices*
configuration, main
(standard type)
GM single unit
Max. 5 devices*
configuration, main (large
memory type)
GM multi unit configuration, Max. 5 devices*
main (standard type)
GM multi unit configuration, Max. 5 devices*
main (large memory type)
GX60 expandable I/O
Installable within the
system limitations
GM multi unit configuration, Installable within the
sub unit
system limitations
* This is the number of devices including the expansion modules (GX90EX) installed in the GX/ GP/GM recorder when an expandable I/O unit (GX60) or GM sub unit is used.
Note: T he maximum number is 2 when the GP10 supply voltage is 12 VDC.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
Model and Suffix Codes
Model and Suffix Codes (GX90UT)
Model
Suffix code
Description
GX90UT
PID Control Module
Number -02 of loops
2 loops
Function
-11
DI 8 points, DO 8 points
-
N
Always N
Terminal type
-3
Screw terminal (M3)
Region
N General
Optional Accessories (Sold separately)
Name Shunt resister for current input (for M3 screw terminal) (250 ± 0.1%) Shunt resister for current input (for M3 screw terminal) (100 ± 0.1%) Shunt resister for current input (for M3 screw terminal) (10 ± 0.1%)
Type 415940
415941
415942
Calibration Certificate (Sold separately)
When you order PID control modules, each module gets its own calibration certificate.
Test Certificate (QIC, sold separately) When you order PID control modules, each module gets its own QIC.
User's Manual You can download the product user's manuals from the following URL. You will need Adobe Reader 7 or later (latest version recommended) by Adobe Systems.
URL:www.smartdacplus.com/manual/ja/
16
Trademarks The TCP/IP software used in this product and the document for that TCP/IP software are based in part on BSD networking software, Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California. SMARTDAC+ and SMARTDACPLUS are trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Microsoft, MS, and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider. Other company names and product names appearing in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders. The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the registered trademark or trademark symbols (® and TM).
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2017, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B01-31EN 2017.06.26-00
General Specifications
GS 04L53B00-01EN
GX60 I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O) GX90EX Expansion Module
OVERVIEW
GX60 I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O)
The GX60 provides a function to expand an I/O module for recording and controlling, when it is connected to the expansion module that is connected to the GX10/GX20/GP10/GP20/GM using a LAN cable via a private communication network.
One GX60 can install up to six I/O modules. Up to six units can be additionally connected to
the GX/GP/GM. The communication distance between the GX/
GP/GM and GX60 or between GX60s can be extended by up to 100 m using a LAN cable. * When the measurement mode on the GX/GP/ GM is High speed, expandable I/O units cannot be installed in the GX/GP/GM.
GX90EX Expansion Module
The expansion module is installed in the GX10/GX20/ GP10/GP20, GX60, GM main unit, and GM sub unit.
[If GX90EX expansion module is installed in the GX/GP or I/O base unit]
The expansion module, which is supported by the GX/GP and GX60, enables a connection between GX/GP and GX60 or a communication between GX60s.
A distributed arrangement with the data time synchronization secured is provided by connecting Expansion modules installed in the GX/GP main unit and GX60 using a LAN cable.
Data is transferred to the high-order GX/GP via the expansion module.
[If GX90EX expansion module is installed in the GM main unit/sub unit]
The expansion module, which is supported by the GM main unit and sub unit, enables a connection between GM main unit and sub unit or a communication between sub units.
A distributed arrangement with the data time synchronization secured is provided by connecting Expansion modules installed in the GM main unit and sub unit using a LAN cable.
Data is transferred to the high-order GM10 via the expansion module.
Power Screw type
GX60
Power inlet type
GX90EX
Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 Japan
GS 04L53B00-01EN ©Copyright April 2014 8th Edition Mar. 20, 2018
GX60 SPECIFICATIONS
Module Installation · I/O module: Max. 6 modules (Slots 0 to 5) Modules that can be installed Please refer to the General Specifications of the GX90XA/GX90XD/GX90YD/GX90WD/GX90XP/ GX90YA I/O Modules (GS 04L53B01-01EN) and GX90UT PID cControl Module (GS 04L53B0131EN). Restrictions: Expansion module: 1 module (expansion module slot "EXT") For other limitations, see the GX10/GX20 Paperless Recorder (Panel Mount Type) General Specifications (GS 04L51B0101EN).
Names of Channels · The module installed in the GX60 has a channel name that consists of the unit number, slot number, and channel number. Channel name
Unit number
Slot number Channel number I/O modules
543210
2
Safety and EMC Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, installation category II *1, pollution degree 2 *2 CAN/CSA-IEC 61010-2-201*3
· UL: UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201 (CSA NRTL/C)*3
· CE/EMC directive: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive: EN61010-1 Installation category II*1 Pollution degree 2 *2 EN61010-2-201*3
· EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance *1 Installation category (overvoltage category) II: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. "II" applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. *2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. *3 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · Install the GX60 in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
Channel number; Analog input: 01 to 10 Digital input: 01 to 16 Digital output: 01 to 06 Digital input/output: DI 01 to 08 DO 09 to 14
Pulse input: 01 to 10 Analog output: 01 to 04 PID control, input/output: 01 to 26
Slot number; 0 to 5
Unit number; 1 to 6
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B00-01EN
Mar. 20, 2018-00
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate, aluminum alloy · Color;
Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 412.5 mm(W) x 164.7 mm(H) x 127.8 mm(D) · Weight: Approx. 3.2 kg (installing 6 modules)
Power Supply
· Rated supply voltage: 100 to 240 VAC · Allowable power supply voltage range: 90 to 132,
180 to 264 VAC · Rated power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz · Power consumption:
Supply voltage Normal operation *
Maximum
100 V AC
20 VA
40 VA
240 V AC
30 VA
55 VA
* When using 6 analog input modules. · Allowable interruption time: Less than 1 cycle of
the power supply frequency
Isolation
· Insulation resistance: Between each insulation terminals, and earth: 20 M or greater at 500 VDC
· Withstand voltage: Between the power terminal and earth: 3000 V AC at 50/60 Hz for one minute Between the input/output modules and earth: Depends on the specification of I/O module.
· Grounding: Be sure to set a low grounding resistance.
· Isolation:
Power terminal
Input and output module terminal
Input and output module internal circuit
Earth (PE) terminal
Internal circuit
The circuits divided by lines are insulated mutually.
External Dimensions Power screw terminal type
48
(1.89)
412.5 (16.2)
156 (6.14)
6-5 hole (6-0.2) hole
162 (6.38)
Power inlet type
48
(1.89)
412.5 (16.2)
156 (6.14)
6-5 hole (6-0.2) hole
162 (6.38)
With modules
48
(1.89)
412.5 (16.2)
156 (6.14)
162 (6.38)
6-5 hole (6-0.2) hole
8.7 (0.34)
148 (5.83) 164.7 (6.48)
8.7 (0.34)
148 (5.83) 164.7 (6.48)
3
127.8 (5.03) 127.8 (5.03)
147 (5.79)
8.7 (0.34) 148 (5.83)
164.7 (6.48)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B00-01EN
Mar. 20, 2018-00
148±0.4 (5.83±0.0157) 185±0.4 (7.28±0.0157)
Dimensions of fixing hole
156±0.2
162±0.2
(6.14±0.0078) (6.38±0.0078)
6-4.5 hole or M4 (0.24-0.18) hole or M4
Unit: mm (approx. inch) Unless otherwise specified, tolerance is ±3% (however, tolerance is ±0.3 mm when below 10 mm).
Normal Operating Conditions · Power supply voltage: 100 to 240 V AC ±10 % · Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz ±2 % · Ambient temperature: 0 to 50 °C · Ambient humidity: 20 to 80 %RH (at 5 to 40°C) (no condensation) · Magnetic field: 400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz) · Vibration: 5 f < 8.4 Hz amplitude 3.5 mm (peak) 8.4 f 160 Hz acceleration 9.8 m/s2 or less · Shock (IEC-60068-2-27): Non-energization, 500 m/s2 or less, approximate 10 ms, 6 directions (±X, ±Y, ±Z) · Mounting position: Can be inclined up to 30 degrees backward. Left and right horizontal when installing the panel mount and wall mount. · Altitude: 2000 m or less · Installation location: Indoors · Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power on
Transport and Storage Conditions · Ambient temperature: 25 to 60°C · Ambient humidity: 5 to 95 %RH (no condensation) · Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 maximum · Shock: 392 m/s2 maximum (in packaged condition)
Effects of Operating Conditions · Power supply variation: Shall satisfy the accuracy specification in the range of 90 to 132 VAC or 180 to 250 VAC (frequency: 50/60 Hz). Power supply frequency fluctuation: Shall satisfy the accuracy specification in the range of rated supply frequency +/-2 Hz (power-supply voltage: 100 VAC).
4
GX90EX SPECIFICATIONS
Communication Functions
Communication between GX/GP and GX60, between GX60s, between GM main unit and sub unit, between GM sub units via dedicated communication network. · Baud rate: 10Base-T/100Base-TX (Auto) *1 · Number of ports: 2 · Connection cable: STP cable, CAT5 or greater · Inter-module connection: Cascade connection
(Ring connection is disabled.) · Maximum communication distance: 100 m *2 · Connector: RJ-45
*1 Can be fixed to 10Base-T by DIP switch settings. *2 Distance extension through HUB connection or
LAN repeaters is not possible.
Display Functions
· System status LED indicators: RDY (green): Lights up when the CPU is running normally. MAIN (green): Turns on in master mode and off in slave mode. FAIL (red): Lights up when a system error occurs.
· 7-segment LED indicator: Indicates a unit number or operation error.
· Ethernet status indicator LED: LINK ACT (green), SPEED (orange)
Address Setting Functions Switch settings:
Switch No.
Descriptions
1
For unit number setting
2
3
4
5
-
6
-
7
10 Mpbs/100 Mbps switching
8
MASTER/SLAVE switching
Master / Slave Functions Can be set to master mode (when installed in the GX/ GP or GM main unit), or slave mode (when installed in the GX60 or GM sub unit) using the DIP switches.
10 Mbps Fixed Mode Can be set to the 10 Mbps fixed mode using the DIP switches.
Mounting Can be mounted in the GX/GP, GX60, GM main unit, and GM sub unit. · Mounting position: GX10/GP10: Slot 2 GX20/GP20: Slot 9 GX60: EXT slot GM main unit: Leftmost position GM sub unit: Next to the power supply module
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B00-01EN
Mar. 20, 2018-00
Safety and EMC Standards
· CSA: CAN/CSA22.2 No.61010-1, installation category II *1, pollution degree 2 *2
· UL: UL61010-1 (CSA NRTL/C) UL61010-2-201(CSA NRTL/C)*3
· CE/EMC directive: EN61326-1 compliance, Class A Table 2 EN61000-3-2 compliance EN61000-3-3 compliance EN55011 Class A Group 1
· CE/Low voltage directive EN61010-1 Installation category II *1 Pollution degree 2 *2 EN61010-2-201*3
· EMC Regulatory Arrangement in Australia and New Zealand (RCM): EN55011 compliance, Class A Group 1
· KC marking: Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard compliance *1 Installation category (overvoltage category) II: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage. "II" applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board. *2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. "2" applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. *3 This product is designed as open equipment under the relevant standard, install it as follows: · Install the GX60/GM unit in a panel with a door. · The instrumentation panel or panel used for support must comply with CSA/UL/EN 610102-201 or must be at least IP1X (degrees of protection) and at least IK09.
· WEEE Directive: Compliant
Construction
· Front panel (terminal): Water and dust-proof, Complies with IEC529-IP20
· Material: Polycarbonate · Color;
Front: Charcoal grey light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 equivalent) Bezel: Smoke blue (Munsell 4.1PB6.0/4.5 equivalent) · Dimensions: 45.2 mm(W) x 111 mm(H) x 107.1 mm(D) (D: including terminal cover) · Weight: Approx. 0.18 kg
82.1(3.23) 107.1
5
Power Supply Suppy from GX/GP, GX60 expandable I/O, or GM90PS power supply module. · Power consumption: 1.8W or less
External Dimensions
Unit: mm (approx. inch)
31.9 45.2(1.78)
Normal Operating Conditions For normal operating conditions of this module, please refer to the General Specifications of the device (GX/GP, I/O Base Unit, or GM) that this module is mounted. GX Specifications: GS 04L51B01-01EN GP Specifications; GS 04L52B01-01EN I/O Base Unit (Expandable I/O): This General Specifications GM Specifications: GS 04L55B01-01EN
Transport and Storage Conditions · Ambient temperature: 25 to 70°C · Ambient humidity: 5 to 95 %RH (no condensation) · Vibration: 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s2 maximum · Shock: 392 m/s2 maximum (in packaged condition)
Effects of Operating Conditions None
100(3.94) 8(0.31)
3(0.12)
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B00-01EN
Mar. 20, 2018-00
6
MODEL AND SUFFIX CODES
MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX60)
Model
Suffix Code
GX60
I/O Base Unit
Type
-EX
I/O Expansion
Area
N
General
Power supply
1
100 V AC, 240 V AC
Power cord
D Power cord UL/CSA standard
F Power cord VDE standard
R Power cord AS standard
Q Power cord BS standard
H Power cord GB standard
N Power cord NBR standard
W Screw terminal (M3) * One GX90EX (I/O expansion module) is provided. MODEL and SUFFIX Code (GX90EX)
Model
Suffix Code
GX90EX
I/O Expansion Module
Port
-02
2 ports
Type
-TP1
Twisted Pair Cable
-
N
Always N
Area
-N General
Description Description
Standard Accessories
Product
Qty
Power cord
1*
Stopper (Antiskid rubber) (A9088ZM)
2
* Except GX60 power cord suffix code: W
Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)
The dummy cover is for empty slots on GX/GP and GX60. The dummy cover is not attached to the GX60 when shipped from the factory. If you need the dummy cover, please purchase it separately.
Dummy cover
Product
Part no. B8740CZ
Test certificate (QIC, sold separately) When ordering the GX60, GX90EX gets its own QIC (one QIC per unit).
When ordering the expansion modules separately, each module gets its own QIC (one QIC per module).
User's Manual Product user's manuals can be downloaded or viewed at the following URL. To view the user's manual, you need to use Adobe Reader 7 or later by Adobe Systems.
URL: www.smartdacplus.com/manual/en/
Trademarks The TCP/IP software used in this product and the document for that TCP/IP software are based in part on BSD networking software, Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California.
· SMARTDAC+ and SMARTDACPLUS are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. · Microsoft, MS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation USA. · Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. · Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider. · Other company and/or product names are registered trade mark of their manufactures.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2014, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
GS 04L53B00-01EN
Mar. 20, 2018-00